Skip to main content

Full text of "Portuguese conversation-grammar"

See other formats


GIFT  or 


METHOD  GASPEY  -  OTTO  -  SAUER. 


PORTUGUESE 
C0NVER8ATI0N-GRAMMAE 


BY 


LOUISE  EY, 


TKACHUt  OF  THB  POSTUOTTBSK   LAN6UAOB    AT    THS  COLONIAL    INSTITUTf  AMD   THE 
SVFKRIOB  COMHBBCIAL  SCHOOL  IN  HAMBCBG. 


SECOND  EDITION. 


LONDON. 

©AVID  NDTT  (A.  G.  Berr>),  212  Shaftesbury  Avenue,  VV.C.  2^ 

DULAU  ft  CO^  34-36  Margaret  Street,  Cavendish  Square  W.  1. 

HEW  YORK:  BRENTANO'S,  Fifth  Avenue  and  27"'  Street. 

THE  INTERNATIONAL  NEWS  COMPANY,  83  and  85  Duane  Street. 

G.  E.  STECHERT  &  CO.,  151—155  West  25*  Street. 

E:  STEIGER  &  CO.,  49  Murray  Street- 

BOSTON:  G.  REUSCHEL,  110  Tremont  Street 

SCHOENHOF  BOOK  COMPANY,  128  Tremont  Street 

HEIDELBERG. 

19221 


PRESERVATION 
REPLACEMENT 


The  (ilaspey*Otto-Saaer  Method  has  become  my  8ole  property  by 
right  of  purchase.  These  books  are  continually  revised.  All  rights, 
especially  those  of  adaptation  and  translation  into  any  language,  are 
reserved.  Imitations  and  copies  are  forbidden  by  law.  Any  information 
as  to  infringement  of  my  rights  always  thankfully  received. 

London,  Paris,  Rome,  St.  Petersburgh,  Ileiddberg.    Julius  Groos, 


i^nHO^ 


\  Pr/nfed  in  Germany  T 


^XiSO(^ 


MAiN 


Preface, 


This  Portuguese  Grammar  is  an  adaptation  of  my 
"Neue  Portugiesische  Konversations-Grammatik,"  issued 
in  1910  by  the  same  pubUsher,  Juhus  Groos,  of  Heidel- 
berg, who,  in  consideration  of  the  extremely  favourable 
reception  that  work  met  with  in  German-speaking  and 
Portuguese -speaking  countries,  commissioned  me  to 
compile  a  Portuguese  Grammar  for  English  use.  This 
work  I  undertook  the  more  readily,  as  the  close  rela- 
tionship existing  between  Great  Britain  and  her  Portu- 
guese ally,  the  increasing  commercial  intercourse  between 
the  two  nations,  and  the  evergrowing  needs  of  tourists, 
demand  further  means  of  linguistic  correspondence. 

In  this  Grammar,  as  well  as  in  that  employed  as 
a  model,  I  have  tried  to  overcome  one  of  the  greatest 
difficulties  of  the  Portuguese  language — i.e.,  the  pro- 
nunciation— by  adopting  the  phonetical  system  of  the 
Association  phonetique  Internationale .  It  was  carefully 
applied  to  the  Portuguese  language  by  Sr.  Gon^alves 
Viana,  who  also  kindly  revised  the  chapter  on  Pro- 
nunciation in  this  grammar. 

As  for  the  orthography — the  difficulty  of  which  is 
next  in  importance  to  the  phonetical  one,  as  hitherto 
the  Portuguese  have  apparently  considered  this  as  a 
problem  to  be  solved  individually — I  have  employed 
that  given  in  the  "Novo  Diccionario  da  Lingua  portu- 
lesa,"  by  Candido  de  Figueiredo,  member  of  the  Aca- 
temy  of  Sciences  in  Lisbon,  which  tends  to  simplify 
le  writing  and  to  facilitate  the  pronunciation  of  Por- 

iguese. 

* 

69610S 


IV  Preface. 

In  compiling  the  Exercises  I  have  felt  the  desira- 
bility of  furnishing  objective  material— so  far  as  this 
is  compatible  with  the  grammatical  Rules  to  be  worked 
out — in  the  form  of  imaginative  pictures.  Further,  I 
have  aimed  at  making  the  student  acquainted  not  only 
with  the  language,  but  with  the  countries  where  Por- 
tuguese is  spoken-— vi^.,  Portugal  and  Brazil— by  giving 
a  geographical,  historical,  and  cultural  view  of  them. 

Wishing  to  make  use,  so  far  as  is  possible,  of 
original  Portuguese  in  the  Reading  Exercises,  and  this 
of  the  purest  and  most  popular  kind,  I  was  fortunate 
enough  to  fall  in  with  what  proved  to  be  a  real  mine 
of  legitimate  linguistic  gold,  both  in  subject  and  in  the 
form  in  which  it  is  presented.  The  student  will  notice 
that  the  greater  part  of  the  Reading  lessons  is  taken 
from  Trindade  Coelho,  a  modern  Portuguese  writer 
who  is  acknowledged  to  be  the  most  accomplished  in 
popular  language,  whose  literary  excellence  has  been 
recognised,  and  whose  tragic  destiny  has  called  forth 
expression  of  sympathetic  sorrow  wherever  he  has  been 
known.  I  have  profited  by  this  great  pedagogue's 
three  "Livros  de  Leitura,"  described  as  "wonderful 
reading-books  for  public  instruction"  by  Dr.  Carolina 
Michaelis  de  Vasconcellos,  the  learned  woman,  respected 
by  all  Romanists,  hitherto  holding  a  professorship  in 
the  University  of  Lisbon. 

These  three  books  have  been  appreciatively  referred 
to  by  the  Portuguese  school-inspector,  Senhor  Brito 
Moreno,  in  the  Civilisagao  Foxmlar,  a  highly  respected 
pedagogical  review,  as  "the  very  best  of  their  kind  to  be 
found  in  Portugal,  as  they  combine  an  extreme  clearness 
with  a  lively  and  characteristic  performance,  uniting  an 
amiable  simplicity  to  an  honest  conviction" — and,  we 
may  perhaps  be  allowed  to  add,  a  sincere  devotion  for 
the  subject  to  the  utmost  consideration  for  the  reader. 


Preface.  V 

I  am  gratified  at  finding  that  Portuguese  and  Bra- 
zilian critics  declare  my  selection  of  reading  material 
to  be  the  most  meritorious  feature  of  my  "Neue  Por- 
tugiesische  Konversations-Grammatik"  (which  contains 
substantially  the  same  exercises  as  the  present  work), 
while  German  critics  highly  appreciate  the  advantage 
of  being  introduced  through  this  medium  to  the  Por- 
tuguese countries  and  customs  as  to  a  home  worthy  of 
our  fullest  sympathy  and  esteem. 

I  beg  to  express  here  my  sincerest  thanks  to  Mr. 
W.  G.  Priest,  of  London,  for  his  assistance  in  revising 
the  English  portion  of  the  work.  Should  any  student 
of  Portuguese,  in  using  this  Grammar,  meet  with  errors 
or  defects,  I  shall  be  grateful  if  he  or  she  will  com- 
municate with  me,  in  order  that  I  may  be  able  to 
rectify  the  same  in  future  editions. 

Pinneberg  (Holstein),  October  1911. 

Louise  Ey. 


VI 


Remarks  on  the  Recent  Reform  of 
Portuguese  Orthography. 

While  this  Grammar  was  in  course  of  preparation 
—  when,  in  fact,  nearly  the  whole  of  the  work  had  been 
printed — the  Portuguese  Government  officially  adopted 
the  Reform  of  Orthography  recommended  by  a  Com- 
mission of  members  of  the  Academia  das  Sciencias.  In 
order,  however,  to  avoid,  the  confusion  that  would  re- 
sult from  the  universal  application  of  so  drastic  an 
alteration  in  spelling,  its  operation  is  for  the  present 
limited  to  the  "Diario  do  Governo"  and  official  docu- 
ments, the  schools  being  accorded  a  period  of  three 
years  in  which  to 'accustom  themselves  to  the  change. 

It  has,  therefore,  not  been  considered  advisable  to 
alter  the  orthography  of  this  Grammar,  more  particularly 
as  all  Portuguese  literature  is,  of  course,  still  written 
in  the  style  of  spelling  hitherto  employed.  At  the 
same  time,  it  is  obviously  desirable  that  students  of 
the  Portuguese  language  should  acquaint  themselves 
with  and  prepare  for  the  new  method;  accordingly,  in 
the  Vocabulary  at  the  end  of  the  book,  the  letters  ex- 
cluded by  the  Reform  have  been  indicated  by  paren- 
theses, which  system  especially  tends  to  estabhsh  a 
concordance  between  the  orthography  and  the  phonetical 
rendering. 

The  principal  alterations  are:  the  avoidance  of 
doubled  consonants  where  only  one  is  pronounced  (bb, 
ff^  99,  llr'nim,  mi,  pp,  ti —now  b,  f\  g,  I,  etc.);  the 
omission  of  the  h  in  its  combinations  of  th  or  ch  (=  A;, 
this  sound  being  substituted  by  c  or  qu,  e.g.,  pcUriarca^ 
quimica),  also  its  omission   from  the  interior  of  words 


Remark  on  the  Recent  Reform  of  Portuguese  Orthography.     VII 

(e.g.,  proibir,  coerente),  even  in  those  which  conserve 
the  initial  h — justified  by  etymology — when  compounded 
with  a  prefix.  Thus  the  new  orthography  will  be:  haver, 
hoje,  homem,  honra,  but:  ontem,  destimano,  desonra,  etc. 
Instead  of  ph,  f  will  be  written:  fotografo. 

It  is  obvious,  of  course,  that  the  doubled  ss  and  rr 
cannot  be  reduced  to  single  s  and  r,  as  the  pronun- 
ciation would  thereby  be  altered.  Also  the  7}im  and  nn 
are  conserved  when  the  first  m  or  n  is  nasal  (e.g.,  cm- 
moldurar,  ennervar). 

For  the  accentuation,  we  have  to  distinguish,  as 
hitherto,  by  a  graphical  accent  the  tonical  vowel  of 
those  words  which  for  want  of  some  characteristic  mark 
might  be  confounded;  e.g.,  sede,  sede;  gosto,  m.,  gosto,  v. 
Also  those  words  ending  by  the  generally  Atonic  syllable 
-em,  -ens  are  marked  by  a  when  this  syllable  is 
tonical;  e.g.,  contem  contains  (cf.  contem  they  count), 
porem  however  (cf.  porem  of  por),  armazem^  armazens 
magazine(s). 

As  the  Reform  admits  —though  it  does  not  pres- 
cribe— the  vowels  e  and  o  to  be  written  e  and  6  wherever 
they  have  the  close  pronunciation,  it  has  been  thought 
convenient  for  the  student,  to  accentuate  them  where 
any  doubt  might  arise,  it  being  understood  that  the 
tonical  endings  -oso  and  -or  are  always  -oso  and  ,-0}% 
the  latter  presenting  the  following  exceptions^:  major, 
suor,  melJior,  peor,  maior,  menor,  where  the  o  is  pro- 
nounced 0,  similar  to  the  English  a  in  "all." 

These  being  the  chief  alterations,  the  remainder, 
of  a  slighter  nature,  will  be  presented  in  a  future 
edition. 

^  In  soror  the  ending  -or  is  also  or,  but  it  is   not  tonical. 

L.  E. 


VIII 


Index. 


First  Part. 

Pronunciation.  Page. 

§  1.  The  Sounds  of  the  Portuguese     ....  1 

§  2.  Types 1 

§  3.  Auxiliary  Signs  of  the  Portuguese  Alphabet  2 

§  4.  Stress  and  Duration .  3 

§  5.  Vowels 3 

§  6.  Diphthongs 6 

§  7.  Nasal  Vowels  and  Diphthongs     ....  8 

§  8.  Triphthongs 8 

§  9.  Consonants 9 

§  10.  Compound,  Doubled  and  Mute  Letters     .  II 
§  11.  Summary  of  the  Phonetic  Signs  in  their 

Relation  to  the  Port.  Alphabet    .      .      .  12 

§  12.  Accentuation      .........  13 

§  13.  Syllabication 14 

§  14.  Homonyms 15 

§  l5.  Homographs 16 

§  16.  Abbreviations 17 

§  17.  Punctuation 18 

Ist  Lesson.    The  Gender  of  the  Noun  and  the  Article  20—24 

Na  Escola. 

2nd        »          The  Plural  of  Substantives      ....  24—30 

8rd         »          The  Address 30—36 

4th         >          The  Auxiliary  Verb  scr  and  the  Adjective  36—40 

6th         »          The  Auxiliary  Verb  estar 40 — 46 

Lishoa. 

6th         ,          The  Auxiliary  Verb  haver       ....  46—52 

Os  verbos  auxUiares. 

7th         >          Employment  and  Concord  of  Tenses  ♦«  .  52—59 


Index.  IX 

Page. 
8th  LesBon.     Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verbs     .      .        59 — 64 
Quintal  e  drvores. 
Jardim  e.flores. 
0  hordrio. 
9tli         »  The  Partitive  Article     ......        64—68 

Refeigoes. 
IQth         »  The  Complements  and  the  most  Frequent 

Prepositions 68—72 

Numa  loja. 
llth         »  The  Attributive  Adjective  in  Gender  and 

/Number 72—78 

A  visita. 
12tii         »          The    Position    of   the    Attributive    Ad- 
jective  78—83 

A  habitagao. 
ISth         »  Comparison  of  the  Adjective.      .      .      .        83—88 

A  trovoada. 
14tb         »          The  Absolute  Comparative   and   Super- 
lative      88—93 

Portugal. 
15th         .  The  Numerals:     I.  Cardinal  Numbers  .        93—99 

A  ligdo  d' arithmitica. 
16th         »  The  Numerals:    II.  Ordinal  Numbers     .      99—106 

0  sy sterna  decimal  ou  mStrico. 
17th         »          The  Numerals:  III.  Multiplicative  Num- 
bers   106—111 

Problemas  de  muUiplicagao. 
18th         »  Kegular     Verbs:       First      Conjugation. 

A.  Simple  Tenses 111—120 

Ao  deitar-se  e  levantar-se. 
19th         »          Regular  Verbs:  First  Conjugation.  B.  Com- 
pound Tenses 120—128 

0  linho. 

The  Tower  of  Belem. 
20th         »  Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs  .      .     .    128-137 

AUmentagdo.    Solicitagdo  d'um  emprego. 
The  Foot  and  the  Hand.      The  Egg 
and  the  Nut. 
21st         »  Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugations  .    137—146 

The  Studious  Pupil  and  the  Lazy. 


X  Index. 

Page. 
22rd  Lesson.    Phonetical  and   Orthographical  Peculia- 
rities of  Otherwise  Regular  Verbs  .      .    146—154 
0  aJgodcto.    As  pelles. 
The  Seamstress.     The  Tailor. 
23rd         »  Exercises  on  the  Full  Verbs  ....    154—160 

As  batatas.    As  frutas;  a  lavra;  a 
sementeira;    a  grade;    a  monda 
Conselhos  duma  mae  etc. 
0  vaqueiro. 
24Ui         »  On  the  Pronouns:  Personal  Pronouns    .    161—168 

0  espinheiro   maldoso.     0   ccLo  e  a 
vacca.     The  Faithful  Bogs. 
25th        »  On   the   Pronouns:    Demonstrative   and 

Possessive  Pronouns 168 — 174 

A  vlhora  e  a  cobra.     0  mocho. 
26th         »          On  the  Pronouns:  Interrogative  and  Re- 
lative Pronouns     174 — 181 

N'um  album. 
27th         »  On  the  Pronouns:    Indefinite   Pronouns     182—186 

0  lido  e  a  raposa.     The  Nut. 

28th         »  The  Irregular  Verbs 186—194 

0  cabrito  e  0  lobo. 
29th         y>         The  Irregular  Verbs  (continued)  .     ,     .    195—201 

Annuncios.     Building, 
30th         »          The  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Con- 
jugation        201—209 

Carta.     Bequerimentos. 
31st         »  Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs  .     .     .    209—216 

Muu  tempo.    Annuncios.     Correio. 
32nd        y>  Verbs  with  a  Double  Participle  .     .     .    216—221 

33rd         »  The  Adverbs 221—228 

Os  Pessegos.    Soneto. 

34th         »  The  Conjunctions 228—236 

A  andorinha. 

35th         »  Interjections 236—239 

No  theatro.    Na  rua. 


Index.  XI 

Second  Part. 

First  Diyision:  Flection. 

Page. 
1st  Lesson.     The  Gender  of  the   Portuguese    Nouns     240—246 

Caule,  tronco  ou  haste. 
2nd       »  The   Gender  of  the  Portuguese   Nouns 

(continued) 246—255 

Vozes  d'animaes. 
.  3r<5         »  The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns: 

Compound  Nouns 255 — 261 

A  Lusitdnia. 
4th         »  Formation  of  the  Plural  of  the  Nouns   .    261—266 

Nuvens. 
5th         »  Formation  of  the  Plural  of  the  Nouns 

(continued;  . 266—270 

Tomada  de  Santarem. 

6th         »  Use  of  the  Article 271—278 

Portugal  continental  e  insular. 
7th         »  Use  of  the  Article  (continued)     .      .      .    278—284 

Portugal  ultramarino. 

8th        »  Omission  of  the  Article 284—291 

Joao  I. 

Second  DiTision:  Syntax. 

9th  Lesson.     Congruence 291—296 

Jodo  I  (continued). 
10th         »  Intransitive  and  Transitive  Verbs.   Com- 

plements without  Preposition    .      .      .    296—301 
Tomada  de  Santarem. 
11th         »  The  Complement  preceded  by  de  and  a    301—307 

A  preposigao  «<fe». 
12th         »  Remarks  on  the  Prepositions       .      .     .    308—313 

A  emigragcio  portuguesa. 
13th         »  Prepositions  (continued):    How    to    Ex- 

press Certain  English  Prepositions     .    313 — 320 
0  automovel. 
14th         >v         Syntactic  Peculiarity  of  Certain  Parts 

of  Speech;  Possessive  Pronouns     .      .    321  —  324 
Cario  ao  Sr.  G.  P. 


XII  Index. 

Page. 
15tii  Lesson.     Syntactic   Peculiarities  of  Personal  Pro- 
nouns      324—328 

Trecho  de  '^Guerreiro  e  Monger. 
16th         »          Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Personal   Pro- 
nouns (continued) 328—332 

JDia  no  campo. 
A  Cigarra  e  a  formiga. 
11^^        »         Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Demonstrative, 

Relative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns  .      .    832 — 336 
The  Whistle. 

0  trahalho  physico  e  mental. 
ISth         »  Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Adjectives  and 

Participles  .     .     .      • 336—341 

O  terremoto  de  Lisboa. 
19th         >,          The  Gerund  and  the  Periphrastical  Con- 
jugation        341—346 

0  Brasil. 

20th         >  Tenses  of  the  Indicative 346—354 

Extract  from  Portugtiese  History. 

21st         „  The  Subjunctive  Mood 354—360 

Passeio  d  Rivieira  j^ortiiguesa. 
22nd        »  The  Subjunctive  Mood  (continued)    .      .    360-364 

Dom  Jodo  de  Castro. 
23rd         .  The  Subjunctive  Mood:  Future  Tense   .    364—368 

Consiglieri  Pedroso  e  o  nccordo  Ittso- 
brasileiro. 
24th         »  The  Infinitive:  I.  General  Use     .     .     .    368—371 

Podrigues  de  Freitas. 
25th         ,  II.   Use   of  the    Personal   and    the   Im- 

personal    Forms     of    the     Infinitive. 
III.  The  Independent  Infinitive      .     .    372—374 
0  rato.     0  ledo  e  a  lebre. 
26th         ),  IV.  The  Dependent   Infinitive   (without 

preposition) 374—379 

On  Education  of  Children. 
A  Hgnoranciaj>  do  pom  portugues. 
27th         ^          IV.  The  Dependent  Infinitive  (with  pre- 
ceding de)   :^ 379—882 

Letter  to  a  Friend. 
A  respiragafo. 


Index.  XUI 

Page. 
28th  Lesson.     IV.  The  Dependent  Infinitive  (with  pre- 
ceding a)     .     • 382—388 

Women  as  Silkivorm-breeders. 
A  Mulher  portuguesa   como   serici- 
cultora. 

29th         »  Construction 388-390 

Preparation  of  Olive-oil. 

Supplement 391—405 

English-Portuguese  Tocabulary 406—420 

Portuguese-English  Vocabulary 421—457 


■^ 


XIV 


Errata. 


Page      5,  Remark  11,  instead  of  harder,  read:  lordar. 
»  8,  1.  7  from  below,  instead  oi  pvu,  read:  p§u. 

»'      11,  1.  3  from  above,  instead  oi  [u^'tisjius],  read:  [uj'tvjiufj. 
»        17,  §  16  is  to  be  added:   V^  S^  =  Vossa  Senhoria. 
»       40,  1.  6tli,  instead  of  Coimbra  is,  read:  Coimhra  was. 
»        61,  1.  3rd  from  below,  inst.  of  tmito,  read:  tanta, 
»       63,  Palavras,  inst.  of  irreJci'etii,  read:  irrtlct'etu. 
»       66,  PalavraSf  inst.  of  levantar  to  get  up,  etc. 
a  mesa  to  rise,  etc. 
read:  levantar  a  mesa  to  rise  etc. 
»        98,  1.  3rd  from  the  end  of  the  Exercise,  inst.   of  As  Por- 

tugal  .  .  .  has,  read :  As  Portugal  had. 
»        98,  1.  Stli  of  39,  inst.  of  so  many  hundreds,  read:  so  many 

tens,  the  next  so  many  hundreds. 
»        98,  1.  15tli  of  39,  inst.  of  §  106,  read  §  105. 
»      110,  1.  5th  of  43,  inst.  of  Twice  jive  times  five^   read:   Twice 

the  fivefold  of  five. 
»      110,  1.  7th  of  43,  inst.  of  men  where,  read:  men  were. 
»      135,  title  of  48,  inst.  of  Alimentago,  read:  AUmentagao. 
From  the  page  226  until  the    end    of  the   1st  part  the  exercises 

87-95  are  to  have  the  numbers  of  92—100. 
Page  290,  1.  8,  inst.  of  saltisfying^  read:  satisfying. 
»      290,  NO  22,  title,  inst.  of  Jao,  read:  Joao. 
»      353,  1.  3rd,  inst.  of  1583,  read:  1383. 


-K38SH>- 


First  Part 


Pronunciation. 


§  1.    The  Sounds  of  the  Portuguese. 

The  Portuguese  orthography  corresponds  only  im- 
perfectly to  the  pronunciation.  And  there  are  signs 
(as  the  tilj  the  cedilla,  the  accents)  and  sounds  (as  the 
nasal  vowels,  the  Ih,  the  nh),  which  do  not  exist  in  the 
English  language.  To  give  an  idea  of  the  Portuguese 
pronunciation  next  to  accuracy,  we  have  had  to  recur  to 
a  phonetic  transcription  and  adopted  that  of  the  Asso- 
ciation phonetique  internaiionale.  In  order  to  be  easily 
distinguished  from  the  remaining  text,  the  phonetic 
signs  are  invariably  put  in  parenthesis.  Each  of  these 
signs  represents  always  the  same  sound,  and  each  sound 
is  always  given  by  the  same  figure.  If  you  want  to 
acquire  the  most  possible  correctness  in  speaking  the 
Portuguese  idiom,  please  to  pay  a  careful  attention  to 
the  phonetics.  Whenever  you  have  an  opportunity,  let 
the  sounds  be  pronounced  to  you  by  a  native  of  Lisbon, 
the  pronunciation  of  the  Portuguese  capital  being  the 
one  adopted  for  this  grammar. 

Be  careful  also  in  distinguishing  voiced  sounds 
from  dumb  ones,  in  vowels  as  well  as  in  consonants. 

§  2.    Types. 

The  Portuguese  letters  are  equal  to  the  English, 
but  their  denomination  is  different  for  the  most  part. 
The  vowels  and  also  some  of  the  =  consonants  have 
several  different  values.  In  the  alphabetic  list  here- 
after we  give  their  alphabetic  value  which  mostly  cor- 
responds to  their  names: 

Portuguese  Convereation-Grammar.  1 


ft 


2 

Pronunciation. 

Character 

Name. 

Character. 

Name. 

a 

a    (like  a  in  bar) 

P 

pe    (as  in  ■pay) 

h 

be  (as  in  hay) 

q 

ke   (like  the  first  syllable 

c 

s^  (  »  5  in  say) 

.     r 

in  kali) 
(er)re  (as  in  ere,  or  re . . . 
Jollowed  by  a  con- 

d 

dd  (  »  in  day) 

e 

6     (ai    >   air) 

s 

sonant) 
(es)se  (like  in  English) 
te    (as  the   first    syllable 

f 

(ef )fe   (as  in  English) 

t 

g 

ge    (as  in  gentle,  but 

without  the  initial  d) 

of  tailor) 

i7 

u 

U    (as  00) 

h 

aga  (dumb) 
i  (ee  in  deep) 

V 

Ve    (as  in  vein) 

i 

IV 

ve  dobrado 

J 
k 

ii   (as  in  jifir,  but  without 
•^         the  initial  d) 
ka   (the  a  as  in  bar) 

X 

(the  ;English  ;t) 

chis  (=  shish,  like 

sh). 

I 

(el)le    (as  in  English) 

m 

(em)me    (as  in  English) 

(en)ne     (»  »       »    ) 

y 

i    gregO  (as  in  English) 

n 

z 

Ze   (as  in  English). 

0 

6   (like  aw  in  law) 

Remark.  The  letter  k  is  to  be  found  in  very  few  Por- 
tuguese words,  as  kysto  cyst;  else  (as  also  w)  only  in  foreign 
words. 

§  3.    Auxiliary  Signs  of  the  Portuguese  Alphabet. 

1.  The  accents,  which  mark  not  only  the  tonical 
accentuation,  but  also  the  colouring  of  a  vowel,  are 
well  to  be  distinguished  from  the  French  accents. 

(a)  The  acute  accent  (')  may  be  put  upon  an}^ 
vowel,  conferring  to  it,  besides  the  tonical  accen- 
tuation, an  open,  ringing  sound:  md,  si,  alii,  fora, 
hahu. 

(b)  The  circumflex  (^)  gives  to  the  (tonical)  vowel 
a  dim  and  closed  sound :  chammitos,  sede,  corte  (cf. : 
cJiamdmos,  sede,  corte). 

(c)  The  grave  accent  (^)  is  not  obligatory.  Where- 
ever  it  is  to  be  found  (upon  a,  e  or  o),  it  denotes 
the  open  sound  of  an  unaccented  syllable  (pddeiro, 
fregues,  pdtetice,  somente). 

2.  The  cedilla  (>,)  is  placed  under  the  letter  c  (qX 
to  which  it  gives  the  articulation  of  5  before  the  vowels 
a,  0,  u,  where  else  the  c  would  be  pronounced  like  k: 
louga,  mogo,  agude  (of.:  louca,  moca,  acitdir). 


stress  and  Duration.  —  Vowels.  3 

3.  The  til  C^)  is  a  sign  peculiar  only  to  the  Castilian 
and  the  Portuguese  languages.  But  being  in  the  former 
employed  upon  a  consonant  (ft),  it  is  found  in  the  latter 
only  upon  vowels  and  diphthongs,  conferring  nasality 
to  them:  la,  mae,  pao^  pde  (pdij,  mui.  On  the  u  it  is 
to  be  met  with  only  in  (the  equally  antiquated)  mrd 
and  muito  (actually  written  only  muito);  it  has  altogether 
disappeared  from  upon  the  i,  being  supplied  by  follow- 
ing n  or  m:  insua  for  Isua,  sim  for  si  etc. 

4.  The  apostrophe  (')  indicates  that  some  vowel  [e 
or  a,  rarely  an  o)  has  been  dropped:  d'elle  (de  ellej; 
Sanf  Anna  (Santa  Anna);  Nun'  Alvares  (Nuno  Alvares). 
Formerly  also  the  m  of  com  was  sometimes  dropped. 
(N.B. — Actually  the  contraction  of  the  elided  words  end- 
ing in  e  is  preferred  to  the  apostrophe:  delle^  duma, 
nesse,  etc.) 

5.  The  hyphen  (-)  unites  tw^o  words  to  one  idea: 
agua-ardente  brandy,  mal-afortunado  unhappy,  bem-casado 
well  married,  recem-chegado  new-comer.  N.B. — These 
words  may  be  written  in  one  (aguardenfe,  etc.). 

Bemarh.  As  for  the  (')  employed  in  this  grammar  for 
the  prosodical  accent,  see  §  4. 

§  4.     Stress  and  Duration. 

In  the  phonetics  we  indicate  the  prosodical  accent 
by  an  acute  (')  placed  hefore  the  tonical  syllable. 

The  vowels  are  of  a  middle  length  when  having 
the  tonical  accent;  they- are  shorter  hefore  the  accented 
syllable  and  shorter  still  after  it. 

§  5.    Vowels, 

'       A  has  three  chief  sounds: 

1.  [a]  an  open  sound  resembling  the  English  far, 
father,  but  with  the  throat  less  open  and  the  tongue 
less  down:  md  [ma]^  chave  ['favo],  caso  ['I'azu]. 

2.  [a]  a  sound  like  the  English  a  followed  by  w: 
atve,  saiv.  In  Portuguese  it  is  always  followed  by  i  or 
u  of  the  same  syllable:  mal  [mai],  mau  [man]. 

3.  [u]  a  close  sound  like  a  in  hag  or  ahout.  It  is 
tonical  only  before  a  nasal  consonant:  pan(n)o  ['pvnu]^ 

1* 


4  Pronnnciation. 

lama  [Ivmv]^  manha  ['misjiv]  and  in  para  ['psrv]  and 
cada  ['hvd'B] ;  otherwise  generally  unaccented;  ex.:  lima 
[lim^]^  Europa  feu  'ropy],  hater  [hv  'ter]. 

Remark.     The  e  in  the  tonical  diphthong  ei,  and  when  ; 
followed  by  a  prepalatal  sonnd  (x,  ch,  j,  Ih,  nh)  has  the  same 
sound:  fecho  f'fyfu],   lei  [Ivi],  igreja  fi'grvgv],   espelho  [if- 
yv^ki]f  tenho  [tvjiu] ;  it  is  equally  indicated  by  [v]. 

JE  in  accented  syllables  has  two  different  sounds: 

1.  [sj  an  open  sound  like  ai  in  air  or  a  in  hare, 
often  indicated  by  an  accent,  as  fe  [fe]  faith,  se  fsej 
cathedral;  prelo,  prelo  ['prelu]  printing-press,  sede,  sede 
[sedd]  seat. 

2.  [e]  a  close  sound  (like  ea  in  the  English  words 
greats  hreak);  this  sound  may  be  indicated  by  the  circum- 
flex, as  aldea  [ai  'dee],  rede  [  'rredd],  sede  [ sedd];  comer 
[ku'mer],  perder  [psr'der]. 

3.  [9]  it  is  found  short  in  unaccented  open  syllables 
and  before  r  in  an  unaccented  syllable,  if  not  final: 
resoar,  designar,  per  dido,  like  the  e  in  matter;  but  in 
ether  ['dtr],  cadaver  [hv ' ^aver] ,  pi.  cadaveres  fkv- 
'davdrdf]  the  e  is  quite  distinct,  similar  to  very,  but 
more  open.  It  is  nearly  inaudible  between  voiceless 
consonants  (repetir  [rrdp(d)'tir])  and  at  the  end  of  a 
word,  as  lote  ['lotdj,  molde  ['moidd],  parte  [' partd] ;  while 
at  the  beginning  of  a  word  it  sounds  like  a  short  i 
(=  ee,  phonetically  i),  as  edade [%  dsLdd] ,  emenda  [i'niendv], 
eleger  [ih'ger];  and  still  shorter  [t]  in  the  terminal 
syllable  es  (fazes  ['fsLzif],  deveres  [di'vmf])  and  before 
cJi  (=:  sh)  and  the  initial  st,  sq,  sp:  espago  [}/' pa.su] ^ 
estranho  ['if'trvjiu],  esquadra  [ifkwadrv],  fechar  [ff/ar]. 

Remark.  When  in  the  middle  of  a  word  the  e  is  fol- 
lowed by  a  or  0,  it  is  pronounced  also  like  a  short  i :  theatro 
[tt'atru],  deante  [dt'vntd],  pear  [pt'or],  thedlogo  [ti'olugu], 
theoria  [tiu'rie].  Also  the  conjunction  e  and  is  pronounced  /. 
when  followed  by  a  word  beginning  with  a  vowel. 

4.  see  A,  Remark. 

■   -^  A\  ?7  sounds: 

1.  when  long,  like  the  English  ee  in  heen:  riso 
['rrim],  estiina  [}f'timv],  sentir  [seAtir]; 

2.  short,  it  corresponds  to  the  English  i  in.  gni, 
gUd:  hilro  f'hitrrul,  viu  f'viu],  virgula  f'virgulv]. 


Vowels.  5 

3.  Before  another  vowel  and  not  having  the  tonical 
accent,  it  is  very  short  and  sounds  nearly  hke  the 
English  y:  ocio  ['os^u]  (but:  macio  [mv'siu])^  inercia 
[i'mrsiv]  (but:  vertia  [vdr'ti'ej),  rdio  f'rratuj  (but: 
saia  [sv  ivj);  meia  f'nivwj. 

N.B. — In  those  words  containing  two  or  more  e-syl- 
lables  the  last  of  which  is  stressed,  only  this  one  is  pro- 
nounced i  (=^  ee)  while  the  preceding  are  pronounced 
like  voiceless  e  [9]:  dividido  [d^vd'^idu];  selicula  [sd- 
'likulvj^  divino  [dd'vinu].  —  This  rule  has  various 
exceptions. 

O  in  accented  syllables  has  two  different  sounds: 

1 .  [0]  (0,  0) :  an  open  sound  like  the  0  in  nor,  Gody 
short.  When  tonical  it  is  a  little  longer  and  more 
ringing  than  in  unaccented  syllables:  cor  [hor],  avo 
[v'vojy  for  a  [forv] ;  adoptar  [vdo'tar]. 

2.  [0]  (6,  0,  ou):  a  close  sound  as  in  lode,  stone: 
cor  fkorj,  avo  fv'voj,  loho  ['loiu],  grou  [gro] ;  solfar 
[soi'far],  colmaga  fkof'masBj. 

Bemark  I.  In  northern  Portugal  the  diphthong  ou  is 
pronounced  o-u,  so  that  there  is  a  difference  between  ougo 
['ousuj  I  hear,  and  osso  ['osuj  bone,  while  these  words  are 
similar  in  Lisbon  as  well  as  in  Brazil. 

Bemark  II.  Before  an  I  of  the  same  accented  or  unac- 
cented syllable,  the  0  is  generally  close:  solto  ['soUu],  colza 
['kolzv] ;  voltear  [voiti'ar]  (exc:  volta  [voitv]^  volte  ['voits] 
etc.).  In  open  syllables  and  before  r  or  s  of  the  same  syl- 
lable, the  unaccented  0  is  pronounced  u  (=  00):  barco  ['barku], 
moroso  [mu  'rozu],  border  [bur  'darj^  costura  [kuf'turv]. 

Bemark  III.  The  definite  article  of  the  masculine 
gender  0,  pi.  os,  always  being  unaccented,  is  pronounced  u 
(=  00  is  foot),  us  [uf];  same  pronunciation  as  for  the  con- 
tractions of  the  article:  dos,  nos  [duj,  nuj],  etc.  N.B.:  nos 
(=z  em  os)  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  objective  pronoun 
nos  (us),  which  corresponds  to  the  subjective  pronoun  fids 
[nofj  tee  (cf.  also  v6s  [vof]  you  and  vos  [vuj]  to  you,  you). 

U. 

1.  fuj  (u,  u)  sounds  like  00  in  root,  when  ac- 
cented: tu  [tu],  luva  ['luvv]. 


6  Pronunciation. 

2.  (u,  o):  It  sounds  like  oo  in  foot  when  unaccented: 
Cb  [du],  disputar  [d}fpu'tar],  lodo  f'lo&uj, 

N.B. — Nearly  every  unaccented  o,  if  not  nasal,  is 
pronounced  u  (cf.  0,  Remark  II.). 

Bemark.  The  u  after  a  q  and  before  a  or  o,  is  pro- 
nounced like  the  English  w:  qual  [Icirai].  It  is  the  same 
when  at  the  end  of  a  word,  and  after  a  voiceless  consonant 
the  u  meets  with  an  o  or  a:  vdcuo  ['vakwu].  The  u  after 
a  g  and  before  an  e  or  i  is  mute.  (Exc. :  arguir  [vrgu  'irj  and 
derived  words,  unguento  [ugu'entuj,  sanguento^  etc.,  and  some 
others.)     See  also  §  10,  end. 

§  6.    Diphthongs. 
A.  Falling  Diphthongs. 

Such  diphthongs  where  the  weight  rests  more  upon 
the  first  vowel  than  upon  the  second,  are  called  falling 
diphthongs.     Their  second  vowel  is  either  i  or  w. 

1.  Feeble  i-sound. 

ai  (ai)^;  Ex.:  pat  (pai  or  pae)  father,  like  pie. 

£t  (ei);  »      rre'ff  (reis)  Portuguese  copper-coins; 

like  a  in  rare^  ai  in  fair. 

VI  (ai,  ei);  »      rrvif  (reis)  kings;  a  sound  between 

fair  and  way;  almost  identical 
with  the  a  of  the  diphthongised 
a  in  late  of  the  South  of  Eng- 
land. 

01  (6i^  oi,  oe);     »      rroif  (roes)  lists;    like   oi   in   moisty 
roisterer. 

0}  (oi,  oi):  »      bof  (hoi)  ox;  same  sound  but  with 

a  close  0. 
»      oiru  (oiro  or  ouro)  ^  gold ;  same  sound 
iDut  with  a  close  o. 

tit  (ui);  »      fut  (fui)  I  was,  I  went;  like  in  ruin. 


*  Here  and  in  other  places  hereafter  the  phonetic  sounds 
are  put  in  the  first  place,  while  the  ortographical  examples  are 
put  in  parenthesis. 

*  The  diphthong  oi,  not  being  terminal,  may  —  but  for  few 
exceptiona  —  be  supplied  by  ou  (cf.  §  5,  0,  Remark  I.).  In  northern 
Portugal  the  ou-sound  is  preferred,  while  the  south  pronounces 
oi  or  0. 


a  sound  between 
2)ouch  audpause, 
similar  to  the 
German  Haus 


Diphthongs. 

2.  Feeble  w-^ound 

au  (ail  or  ao);  Ex.:  pau  (pan) 

stick 
»      mau  (man 
or  mao) 
bad 

6U  (eu  or  eo);  »      sew  (ceu  or  ceo)  sky,  the  e  like 

ai  in  a^V  (cf.  §  5,  E  1). 

eu  (eu,  eu  or  eo);        »      &re«^  (breu)   tar,    same    sound 

with  a  close  e  (cf.  §  5,  E  2). 

2*w  ("m  or  io);  »      t'iw    (%^M^    he   saw,    in    accor- 

dance  with  the  pronuncia- 
tion of  the  simple  vowels. 

0  or  ou  (ou);  »      do(u)ru  (Douro)^  Douro,  river 

in  Portugal. 

B.  Bising  Diphthongs. 
1.  Feeble  i-sound. 

Such  diphthongs  where  the  w^eight  rests  upon  the 
second  vowel,  are  called  rising. 
ia  (ia  or  ea);  Ex.:  di'anu  (diario)  diary  )  nf   8  5    i  3 

vt'adu  (veado)  hart       |      ' ^^  \  \ 
u  (ie  or  ie);       »      dt'ete  (dieta)  diet  I 

lo  (io);  »      mi'oluf  (miolos)  brains       \ 

'to  (io) ;  »      7nt  'olu  (miolo)  crumbs        I  cf.  §  5,  o 

?w  (iu  or  eu);    »      mi'u&u  (miudo  or  meiido)  i     and  u. 
small  ) 

2.  Feeble  tf-sonnd. 

wa  (ua  or  c)«>);  Ex.:  mu'ar  (muar)  mule-  .  .  in  compound 
words. 

»      su'ar(suar)  to  sweat. 

»       suar  (soar)  to  sound, 
wa  (ua);  »       (^w'af-  (dual)  dual. 

?i£  (we  or  oe^-    »      su'eto  (sueto)  holiday. 

»      mu  'edv  (moeda)  coin. 
ue  (ue  or  oe):    »      rw'er  ("roerj  to  gnaw. 

»      pu'emv  (poenm)  poem. 

*  Nowadays  written  and  pronounced  only  Douro  (not  Doiro). 
Nor  can  the  diphthong  ou  be  supplied  by  oi  in  the  following  words : 
ou  or,  oiisar  dare,  ousadia,  ousado;  outorgar,  ouvir,  ouvido,  outuhro, 
ouco,  couve,  moucoj  louco,  and  their  derivatives,  and  never  in  a 
verbal  form — e.g. — comprou. 


o  Prontinciation. 

ui  (ui  or  oi);   Ex.:  fu'ijiu  (fuinho)  woodpecker. 
»      mu'ijtu  (moinho)  mill. 

§  7.    Nasal  Vowels  and  Diphthongs. 

The  Dasal  sound  of  a  vowel  is  either  indicated  by 
the  til  (s.  §  3,  3)  or  by  placing  m  or  n  behind  it.  The 
nasality  of  the  vowel,  especially  when  making  part  of 
a  diphthong,  is  not  attainable  without  considerable 
practice.  It  is  not  so  pure  and  ringing  as  in  French, 
but  rather  squeezed.  We  shall  try  to  approach  the 
sound  by  means  of  examples,  as  much  as  possible. 

1.  »  C-a,  an-y  am-),  vn  before  d  or  t,  vm  before  b 
or  p,  is  the  nasalised  v  (see  §  5,  3),  almost  alike  to  that 
of  pang:  'irmd,  'santo,  'lampada. 

2.  e  (m-,  e^n-),  en  before  d  or  t,  em  before  b  and 
p,  alike  to  that  in  length:  'tenro,  'lento,  bem'posto,  'sendo, 
em' bora. 

3.  i  (m,  in ;  em-,  en-  as  unaccented  initial  sounds) : 
ahke  to  that  in  ring:  fim,  fins,  findo,  Umpo. 

4.  0  (om,  on)  alike,  to  that  in  so^ig,  wrong:  som, 
ofiga. 

5.  U  (um,  un),  alike  to  the  German  jung:  urn,  atum. 

6.  Nasal  diphthongs  with  terminal  feeble  i  or  u. 

vt  (ai,  de,  em) ;  Ex. :  m§}  (mdi  or  m&e)  ]  like   the    a    in 
mother  |    pang,  followed 

»      bvt  (bem)  well     )     by  an  L 
of  (oi,  oe);  »      pot  (poi  or  pde) 

he  puts 
Ofsi  (Oem);  »     pom  (poem)  they 

put 

ui  (ui);  »      mU}  (mUi,  mui)  very  (see  §  3,  3) 

vu  (ao,  am);  »      pvu  (pdo)  bread 

>      'kdmprvu  (compram)  they  buy. 

§  8.     Triphthongs. 

There  are  in  Portuguese  numerous  triphthongs 
which  consist  of  a  falling  diphthong  with  preceding 
feeble  i  or  u.  These  latter  vowels  are  never  nasal, 
even  in  nasal  triphthongs. 


like  the  o  in 
song,  followed 
by  an  i. 


Consonants.  9 

Ex.:  Uais  [IfatJ],  plural  of  leal  fh'afj  true;  fieis 
[fV^IJy  plural  of  fid  faithful;  fieis  //)'»?//  from  fiar  to 
spin;  miau  [mjauj  the  mewing  of  the  cat;  poeira-fpu- 
'vtrsj  dust;  ledo  [U'vuJ  lion,  leoes  [l}'d}f]  lions. 

§  9.    Consonants. 

1.  Those  Portuguese  consonants  which  in  their 
denomination  and  pronunciation  diiffer  from  the  English, 
have  already  been  mentioned  (§  2).  F,  Tcf*  m,  n,  p,  t,  v, 
w  are  generally  pronounced  as  in  English. 

2.  As  for  the  voiced  consonants,  they  are  very 
carefully  to  be  distinguished  from  the  voiceless.  Espe- 
cially, the  h  and  the  d  which,  standing  between  vowels 
or  between  a  vowel  and  an  r,  or  being  doubled,  are 
very  soft  (as,  e.g.,  those  letters  in  the  English  words 
ndk,  lad\  the  h  approaching  the  v,  and  the  ^  the  voiced 
English  th  in  though ;  we  indicate  these  letters  so :  d,  &. 
Ex.:  reboar  [rrdhii'ar^  nearly  like  rrdvu'ar];  abhade 
[v'ha^d],  addigdo  [v&i'sni].  The  b  is  mute  when  ter- 
minal: Jacob  [s^'ho]. 

3.  The  same  as  for  the  g,  which  sounds  like  the  g 
in  give  before  a,  o,  u  and  consonants;  and  like  g  [£j 
in  gentle  (but  without  the  initial  d)  before  e,  i,  y  (or 
rather  like  the  z  in  azure):  the  terminal  g  [g]  is  soft 
as  in  English  (hug).  If  the  g  is  to  keep  its  ^CjVe>sound 
before  e,  i,  y,  a  dumb  u  is  put  between  the  two  letters 
(cf.  §  5,  Z7,  Remark).  Ex. :  garfo  ['garfu]  fork,  gume 
['gurm]  blade,,  gUria  ['ghriv]  glory,  Gog  [gog] ;  gelo 
['gelu]  ice,  giis  /ji//  chalk;  guerra  [g^rre]  war;  gtiiar 
[g}'a,r]  to  guide. 

4.  The  j  has  the  pronunciation  of  the  g  before  e, 
«,  y  (the  z  in  azure  or  the  s  in  pleasure)  and  is  equally 
represented  by  /j7'  jd  /ja/  already,  jejum  /j^jw/ 
fasting,  joelho  [gu'efiu]  knee. 

5.  The  initial  I  sounds  like  the  English;  when  ter- 
minal, it  corresponds  to  the  English  U:  falar  ffv'hrj 
to  speak;  mal  fniafj  bad. 

6.  I  united  to  a  following  h  (Ih)  forms  a  sound 
which  corresponds  to  the  Castilian  II  and  may  be  com- 
pared to  the  I  and  y  in  the  combined  English  words 
will  you, — e.g.:  filho.     It  is  figured  by  [fl]. 


10  Pronunciation. 

7.  A  similar  union  forms  the  h  with  the  n  (nJi) 
figured  by  [ji]  and  pronounced  like  the  Castilian  n 
in  nino  or  the  French  gn  in  ligne:  linha  ['lijiv]  line, 
manhd  [mv'jiv]  morning.^ 

8.  As  for  the  r,  it  must  not  be  confounded  with 
the  English  vocal  r  (in  far,  further).  Good  Portuguese 
speakers  trill  all  r's,  whether  initial,  medial,  or  terminal. 
Only  there  is  a  difference  in  the  energy  employed  with 
the  strongly  rolled  initial  or  doubled  r  and  the  weaker 
r  that  is  found  after  a  consonant  (not  being  ^,  n  or  s) 
between  vowels  or  at  the  end  of  a  syllable.  We  re- 
present the  former  by  rr  and  the  latter  by  r.  Ex.: 
preto  ['pi'etu]  black;  hravo  ['hravu]  brave;  caro  f'haru] 
dear;  flor  [flor]  flower;  perto  ['pertu]  near;  rei  [rrei] 
king;  carro-  [^ka,rru]  carriage;  fe^7ro  ['hiirru]  bobbin; 
honra  ['orrv]  honour;  Israel  [igrre'el]. 

N.B. — In  some  words  the  initial  r  is  followed  by  a 
mute  h:  r/iewma /"Vrewm^y  rheumatism ;  Bheno  ['rrenu] 
Rhine. 

9.  S  is  pronounced  like  Enghsh  s  in  such^  silver, 
[s]   1.    at   the    beginning    of   a    word    and    when 

doubled.     Ex.:  servir  [sdr'vir]  to  serve;  massa  ['masv]. 

2.  after  a  consonant  and  before  a  vowel.  Ex.: 
cansar  [Ice'sar]^  arsenal  ['^rsd'nai],  ohservar  [ohsdr  var] . 
Exc:  obsequio  and  derivatives,  where  it  sounds  soft: 
[ohd '  ztkixi] 

[e]  like  s  in  the  English  words  loose,  rose,  when 
between  two  vowels:  luso  ['luzu] ,  rosa  ['rrozv]. 
Exc:  after  a  prefix:  resmtir  [rrdsen'iir,  presdgio  [pro- 
sagiu]. 

/j7  before  a  voiced  consonant:  rasgo  [rvaggu], 
lesmo  ['le^m'B]. 

[S]  At  the  ^d  of  a  word  before  a  pause,  and  be- 
fore the  consonants  p^  t,  c,  q^  it  sounds  like  English  sh  : 
esperar  [ifpd  'rar],  estd  [}f'ta,]^  escapa  [}f'hapv],  esquerdo 
[t/kerdu]. 


^  In  some  words,  as  anhelo.  inhihir,  inhalar,  inherente,  in- 
hdspito  inhdbil,  enharmdnico,  and  others,  where  the  n  is  part  of  a 
prefix  nh  is  pronounced  like  n;  the  h  is  mute. 


Compound,  Doubled  and  Mute  Letters.  11 

Bemark.  The  terminal  [f]  is  changed  into  [is]  when  followed 
by  a  vowel;  Ex.:  as  aves  [vz'avif] ;  and  if  followed  by  a 
voiced  consonant,  it  is  changed  into  /j7  ;  os  banhos  [ug  'bejiusjy 
as  rosas  [vg  'rrDZvf]. 

10.  X  has  various  sounds.     It  is  pronounced: 

(a)  [f]  (=  s^)  ^*  *^®  beginning  of  a  word:  xadrez 
[f^'dref],  xarope  [f'e'ropd];  generally  in  the  middle  of 
the  words:  feixe  ['f^fi] ;  sexto  f'svijluj ; 

(b)  [ksj  (=  EngUsh  x)  in  some  words  fixo  f'fiksuj, 
sexo  f'seJcsuJ; 

(c)  fsj  in  some  words  as  auxilio  [au'sihuj,  proximo 
fprostmuj; 

(d)  />/  in  some  words  ,as :  exame  [i  '.zvnid]^  exercicio 
[isdr'  sisfuj ; 

(e)  [hf]  (very  rare):  horax  ['horvhf]: 

(f)  The  prefix  ex  ,  .,  when  followed  by.  a  consonant, 
is  pronounced  either  [if]  or  /"«?//:  expor  [('B)ifpor]^  ex- 
pensas  [('^)}fpesvf]. 

11.  Z  is  pronounced  like  />/  in  English  zeal  at 
the  beginning  or  in  the  middle  of  a  word:  zelo  ['zelu] ; 
fazc/r  [fv'zer];  and  like  [f]  at  the  end  of  a  word:  pez 
[pef],  juiz  /jw  'if J  (cf.  9,  Remark). 

Bemarh  In  Brazil  the  terminal  s  and  z  are  pronounced  s. 

§  10.     Compound,  Doubled  and  Mute  Letters. 

1.  The  Ih,  nil  and  rh  have  already  been  mentioned 
in  §  9. 

2.  The  h  is  still  found  in  union  with  t  (ih),  where  it 
is  mute  (theatre  [ti '  airu]),  and  with  p  (ph),  where  it 
forms  the  sound  f:  apht(h)as  f'aftvj  thrush,  photographo 
ffo  'togrvfuj. 

3.  Ph  is  mute  before  th:  phthisica  ['tiziTce], 

4.  With  the  c  (ch)  it  forms  two  sounds: 

(a)  [f];  cJiave  ['favd]^  enclier  [I'fe/r]^  chilro  [fiirru], 

(b)  [h]  in  words  of  Greek  origin :  chrmica  f'kromkvj, 
mdchina  f'makinvj,  monarcha  fmu'narkvj. 

5.  The  cia  found  compound  also  to  t  and  a  second 
c,  (ct,  cc),  where  it  is  often   miite:  actttal  [atu'at],    ac- 


12 


Pronunciation. 


cento  [v'sentu];  pacto  ['paktu],  friccOo  [frtk'sdu].  It  is 
also  mute  after  an  initial  s  (sc):  sceptro  f'setruj,  sciencia 
fst'SswJ. 

6.  The  p  is  often  mute  before  s  and  t  (ps,  pt):  psalmo 
f'safmuj,  adoptar  [edo'tar],  prompto  fprdntuj ;  ph  is 
mute  before  th:  phthisica  ['tisftkv]  (cf.  3). 

Eemark.  The  vowels  e  and  o,  even  when  unaccented, 
are  open  before  the  mute  consonants  c  and  p :  director  [dire- 
'tor] J  excepgdo  [(v)ifse' svu] ;  while  a  is  open  before  ct  and  pt 
and  in  a  few  words  before  cc:  activo  [a'tivuj,  aptidao  fapti- 
'dvuj;  accdo  fa'svu],  fracgdo  [fra(hy svu] . 

7.  Doubled  consonants  are  generally  pronounced  like 
one  (cf.  §  9,  2,  8  and  9):  apparelho  [apv'rvHn]^  matto 
['matu],  penna  f'penvj,  commissao  [kumi'svu],  foliar 
[fv  ^lar].  Yet  when,  of  two  m's  or  *i's,  one  belongs  to  a 
prefix,  it  is  pronounced  with  a  nasal  sound :  emmalhar 
[imis  fiar];  ennovelar  [inu' volar]. 

N.B. — m  is  mute  before  n:  gymndsio  [gVnazm],  con- 
demnar  [hondd' nar] ,  somno  f'sonuj. 

8.  As  for  the  gu  and  qu  see  §  5,  w,  Remark  and 
§  9,  3.  In  qu  the  u  is  mute  before  e  or  i:  queda 
[lc£dv]^  quinhao  [hx'jivu].  Exc. :  frequente  [frd'hiventd], 
tranquillo  [tre'Tcivilu]  and  derivatives,  and  also  in  some 
scientific  words.  Before  a  and  o  it  is  sometimes  mute: 
quatorze  [kvtorisd].,  quotigar  [kuti' zar  or  kwuti'zar], 

§  11.    Summary  of  the  Phonetic  Signs  in  their 
Relation  to  the  Portuguese  Alphabet. 


a,  a,  V 
h,  h 
d,  6 

f,  e,  d 
f 
9^  9 

h  h  * 
k 

fi 
m 


see  §  5 
.»    §  9 

»    §  9 

■■'    §  5 

>^  §  9 
g(a)v  g(u),   g(r),   -g 

etc.  (see  §  9) 
see  §  5 

*  §  9 
^    §  9 

*  §  9 
m,  mm 
n,  nn 


r- 

:  nh 

0,    d 

:  see  §  5 

p 

•  P»  PP 

r 

:  -r-,  -r 

rr 

r-,  rh-,  -rr- 

s 

S-,  -SS-,  (-)8c-,  c(e), 

c(i),  9,  -X 

ks 

-X-,  -cs- 

z 

Z-,    -S-,    -X- 

J 

g{e),  g(i);  j,  -s,  -z 

/ 

X-,  ch-;  -s,  -z 

i 

t-,  -tt-,  th-;  -ct,  -pt- 

ti 

see  §  5 

Accentuation.  13 

V  :  V-,  -V-  N.B.  1: 

hw       :  qu(a);    qu(e),  qu(i)  -r  signifies  terminal  r, 

(rare)  -r-        »        medial  sound, 

V,  e,  I,  r-         »        initial         »     . 
0,  w  :  see  §  7  N.B.  2:  A  letter  in  pa- 

/  :  after  a  vowel,  stret-  renthesis  indicates  that  the 

ches  it  one  preceding  has  the  pro- 

'  :  before  a  syllable,  nunciation  of  the  phoneti- 
means  the  toni-  cal  sign  only  in  this  corn- 
eal accent.  bination. 

§  12.     Accentuation. 

1.  Words  of  two  or  more  syllables,  ending  by 
^,  6,  0,  have  the  stress  generally  on  the  penultimate 
syllable:  lama,  'vinte,  cas'tello,  anted' pado. 

N.B.— Another  vowel  (^,  u  or  o>,  preceding  those 
vowels,  does  not  form  a  diphthong,  and  is  to  be  con- 
sidered an  independent  syllable:  'lia,  harmo'nia,  'crm, 
*tua^  ma'goa,  'hroa. 

2.  Words  ending  in  a  consonant,  a  nasal  vowel 
or  diphthong,  or  in  i  or  u,  generally  bear  the  stress 
on  the  last  syllable;  so,  for  instance,  all  the  infinitives 
{cha'mar,  vender,  influ'ir);  pa' pel,  nacio'nal,  ir'md,  ir- 
'moo,  ale'mOo,  java'U,  balm.  Principal  exc:  the  ad- 
jectives ending  in  -vel  (a'mavd,  indefi'nivel)  and  some 
in  -il  Cfacil). 

N.B. — The  s  forming  the  plural  of  the  nouns  and 
adjectives,  or  the  termination  of  a  verb,  does  not  affect 
the  accentuation  ('mesa,  'mesas;  'alto,  'altos;  sa'bias), 
even  when  by  the  flection  the  last  syllable  is  changed 
into  two:  ta'ftd,  pi.  ta'fues,  in'gles,  in'gleses;  difficil, 
difficds. 

3.  Words  with  stress  on  the  ante-penultimate  syl- 
lable are  rarer  and  generally  marked  by  a  graphic  ac- 
cent: nitido,  fotografo,  comprdvamos;  they  are  called 
esdruxulas  fij '  cfruful'^f] . 

4.  A  word  consisting  of  many  syllables  frequently 
has  a  secondary  stress  (marked  thus:  ^)  on  a  syllable 
preceding  the  tonical,  yet.  never  upon  one  following 
it.    To  this  group  belong  (a)  the  adverbs  formed  of  the 


14  '  PronuDciation. 

adjectives  by  adding  the  termination  -niente  [altiva'mente 
haughtily);  (b)  the  diminutives  and  augmentatives  with 
the  intercalated  letter  -z-:  cadeira'Mnha  small  chair, 
from  cadeira;  homemza' rrdo  big  man  (from  'homem).  In 
such  words  it  is  the  originally  accented  syllable  which 
has  the  secondary  accent. 

5.  Atonic  pronouns  of  only  one  syllable  are  added 
to  the  verbs,  melting  together  with  them:  sabe-lo  (or 
sahel-o),  ver-nos,  dar-lhe. 

§  18.     Syllabication. 

1.  Any  vowel,  whether  accented  or  unaccented, 
even  nasal,  may  terminate  a  syllable. 

2.  Of  the  consonants,  only  the  following  ones  may 
do  so:  Z,  m,  n,  r,  s,  z.  More  rarely  and  only  in  scienti- 
fic terms:  ^,  c,  fc,  2>,  g. 

(Even  here  we  meet  words  separated  thus :  corru-pQao,  aprovi- 
ptar,  au-gmentar,  te-chnica,  pra-gmatica,  etc.) 

3.  Ih,  nh  must  not  be  separated.  They  are  found 
only  in  the  middle  of  a  word  and  belong  always  to 
the  following  vowel :  mi-uJia,  ve-lho.  An  only  apparent 
exception  form  words  from  the  Greek,  as  phil-harmonicay 
and  from  the  Latin,  as  in-hihir,  an  helar,  in-hospitOy  in" 
habil,  etc.,   where  in-  is  a  prefix  (see  p.  10,  foot-note). 

4.  Not  to  be  separated  are  the  diphthongs  and  tho 
nasal  syllables  am,  an,  em,  en,  im,  in,  om,  on,  um,  un. 
Vowels  not  forming  diphthongs  may  be  separated :  ma- 
gu-a-do. 

5.  A  syllable  may  begin  by  one  of  the  following 
groups  of  consonants:  pr-,  hr-,  fr--,  vr-,  tr-,  dr-,  cr-, 
gr-,  cl-,  gl-,  pi-,  hi-,  ft-  [r  or  I  with  another  preceding 
consonant),  and  sc-  (this  only  in  foreign  words). 

N.B.— There  may  also  be  read  syllabications  hke: 
corru-pgdo,  pra-gmatica,  aprom-ptar,eic .  (see  2),  but  as  they 
contradict  the  rules  1  and  5,  given  by  the  most  learned 
Portuguese  phonetician,  Mr.  Gonial ves  Viana,  they  are 
not  to  be  imitated. 

6.  The  consonantal  combinations  of  st-,  sp-,  sph-y 
spl-y  spr-  and  sc-  are  found  only  in  scientific  or  in 
foreign    words:    sparadrapo,    sphinx   or    sphince    (pop.: 


Homonyms. 


15 


esphinge);  splenico,  stylita,  sciencia.  (In  genuine  Portu- 
guese or  nationalised  words  they  are  always  preceded 
by  e,  spoken  like  a  fugitive  i,  which  with  the  following 
s  forms  a  syllable:  espargo  [j/parguj,  estado,  estilo,  es- 
casso,  esplendor,  espraiar.)  These  groups  cannot  be  se- 
parated. 

7.  As  for  the  consonantal  gemination,  the  con- 
sonants are  distributed  on  two  syllables:  fer-renho,  in- 
nato,  im-^aculado,  ap-parente,  as-sistir,  pel-Ies,  ah-bade^ 
at-testar,  dif-ficuldade. 

§  14.     Homonyms. 

Homophonos  [o' mofimuf] . 

There    are    a   number  of  homonymical    words  in 

Portuguese  —  that  is,  words  of  equal  sound  and  different 

orthography. 

Here  some  examples: 

accento  [v'sentu]  accent 

apregar  [yprd'sar]   to  ap- 
praise 

area  ['aria]  area 

atestar  [vti/tar]  to  fill  up 
to  the  top 

lucho  I'hnfu]  craw,  maw 

cdga  ['Icasv]  hunting,  game 

cegar  [sd'gar]  to  blind,  to 
dazzle 

cella  ['sells]  cell 

celleiro  [sd'lviru]  granary 

cem  [se]  hundred 

cerrar  [sd'rrar]  to  shut 

chamma  ['femv]  flame 

concebo  [ko'sebu]  I  under- 
stand, I  conceive 

concelho  [ho's^du]  council 

condega  [kon'desvj  willow- 
basket 

consigo  [ho' sign]  I  obtain 

descripgdo  [difkri's^u]  de- 
scription 

doiito  fdotu]  learned 


assento  seat 
apressar  to  hurry 

aria  air 

attestar  to  attest  ^ 

huxo  box-tree 
cassa  muslin 
segar  to  mow 

sella  saddle 
selleiro  saddler 
sem  without 
serrar  to' saw 
ckama  he  calls,  call 
com  seho  with  tallow 

conselho  counsel 
condessa  countess 

comsigo  with(in)  himself 
discrigdo  discretion 

doii-to  I  give  it  you 


16 


Pronunciation. 


ega  ['esvj  bier,  cenotaph 

hera  f'e:raj  ivy 

maga  ['masv]  mace 

pago  ['pa,su]  palace 

pello  ['pelu]  hair 

pena  ['pen's]  punishment, 
pain 

perdigao  [prdi'sSu]  perdi- 
tion 

perfeito  [pr'fntul  perfect 

rugo  ['rrusu]  grey 

seio  I'sviu]  bosom 

valle  [vat]  valley 


essa  that  (one) 
era  was 
massa  paste 
passo  step 
'pdo  =  por  0. 
penna  pen 

predicgdo  prediction 

prefeito  prefect 
russo  Russian 
sei-o  I  know  it 
vale  post-office  order. 


§  15.     Homographs. 

Honwgraphos  [o  'mografuj], 

A.  Examples  of  Homograplis  with  the  same  sonnd, 
but  different  meaningc 

u  vista  ['vifta]  view,  sight     vista  (pp.  f.  of  ver  to  see) 


0  dado  [  da>du]  die 
o  conto  ['hontu]  story 
a  conta  [Icontv]  bill 
a  cara  ['hare]  face 
a  ferida  [f9'rvM]  wound 

a  conquista  [hd'kiftv]  con- 
quest 
a  sahida  Fsv'iidv]  issue 

a  alta  ['atty]  raising;  halt 
a  haira  [haife]  decrease; 

furlough;   lower  part  of 

the  town  (of  Lisbon) 
a  aherta  [v'bertv]  opening, 

gap 
aceito  [v'smtu]  I  accept 
preciso  [prd'sii^u]  I  want 
c6mo  ['komu]  I  cat 
entre     ['entrd]     imper.    of 

entrar  to  enter 


dado  given 

conto  I  count 

conta  he  (she)  counts 

cara  (adj.  f.)  dear 

ferida     (pp.    f.    of    ferir) 

wounded 
conquista    (pp.   f.    of   con- 

querir)  conquered 
sahida    (pp,    f.    of    sahir) 

gone  out 
alta  (adj.  f.)  high 
haixd  (adj.  f.)  low 


aherta  (pp.  f.)  open 

aceito  accepted 
preciso  wanted 
coino  as,  like 
entre  between,  among. 


Abbreviations. 


17 


B.  Examples  of  Homographs  with  Different 
Fronnnciation  and  Meaning, 

da  [dv]  =z  de  a  oi  the 


da  [da,:]  give(s) 

regia  [rn  ji»7  ^^i'-  ^^  reger 

to  reign 
seria  fsd'rivj  cond.   of  ser 

to  be 
governo  [gu'vernu]  govern- 
ment 
publico  fpuUiJcu]  public 
contrario  ('hdn'traryu]  con- 
trary 
analise  [v'nalizdj   analysis 
domino   [domin'o]  domino 
continuo  [hon'tinuu]   con- 
tinual 
concerto  ['ko'sertuj  concert 
gosto  ['goftu]  taste 
historia  [i/tortv]  history 

presente  [prd'zentd]  present 


regia  ['rreigw]  adj.  f.  king- 
ly, royal 
seria  ['seirivj  adj.  f.  serious 

governo  [gu'vernu]  I  govern 

publico  [pu  'UiTcu]  I  publish 
contrario  [hdntrv  'riii]  I  con- 
tradict 
analise  [vnv ' li:09] !  analysel 
domino  [du'mimu]  I  lord 
continuo  [honti  'nuu]  I  con- 
tinue 
concerto  [WseHu]  I  mend 
gosto  [goftu]  I  like 
historia  [ijlu  'riv]  he  writes 

histor}^ 
presente     [prd  'sentd]      he 
foresees. 


§  16.     Abbreviations. 

Abreviaturas  [vbrdviv  'turvf]. 


ya  J^^a 

=  Vossa    Excel- 

S'^  S.       = 

=  Santo,  Sao 

lencia  Your 

Saint 

Excellence, 

dig"^          = 

=  dignissimo 

you 

most  worthy 

yaj^i 

=  Vossa    Merce 

Hlmo^  illma  ^ 

=  illustrissimOy 

Your  mercy, 

-a   most  il- 

you 

lustrious 

yi 

=  Fo5se(abbr.  of 

ex"^*^,  ex"^  = 

=  excellentissp- 

ya  jyre) 

mo,  -a  most 

sr. 

=  senhor  Mister, 

excellent 

Mr. 

Br.            = 

=  JDoutor  Doctor 

Sf^ 

=  senhora    Mis- 

F.E.F.   = 

-por  especial 

D.,  D<» 

tress,  Mrs. 
=  Dom,  Donna 

(addressing  an 
Inclosed  letter) 

favor  by  es- 
pecial    fa- 

gta 

=  Santa 

vom' 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar. 


18 


Pronunciation. 


S.  E.  C.    =  sua  e:r"»«  casa,     g^-^"^,  gr""^ 

(addressing  a  letter)    }i  grfi 

m^^  =  muito    much, 

very  p.  ex. 

->w<«  __  ^r^etite  (see 

§  12,  4)  V,  g.        , 

att^  =  attentorespect- 

ful(ly)  a  s. 

ven^^',  v^''   =  venerador 

venerator  L  e 


cr 


,v-do 


=  criado  servant 


adm^^         =  admirador  ad-     p^ 
rairer 


=  grato,  gratis- 
simo  thank- 
ful 

=  por  exemplo 
for  instance 

=  verhi gratia  for 
instance 

=  a  saber  name- 
ly, viz. 

=  isto  e  that  is 
(to  say) 

=para  for,  to. 


§  17.     Punctuation. 

I^onctua^do  fpontuv  'sguj. 

1.  The  signs  of  punctuation  are  the  same  as   in 
English;  they  are  called  as  follows: 


«  »  aspas  or  virgula  do- 
brada  notes  of  quo- 
tation ; 

[  0  ]  parenthese,  -sis  paren- 
thesis; 

-  hyphen  or  fisca  de  unido 
hyphen; 

*  asterisco  asterisk. 

'  apostropho  apostrophe. 


.  ponto  (final)  full  stop; 

,  virgula  comma; 

;  ponto  e  virgtda  semicolon ; 

:  dots  pontos  colon; 

?  ponto  de  interrogagap  note 
of  interrogation; 

!  ponto  de  admiragdo  note 
of  exclamation; 

—  risco  or  travessdo   dash 

,  .  .  reticencias  points  of 
suspension  or  reti- 
cence ; 

2.  On  the  whole,  the  rules  of  punctuation  do  not 
differ  from  the  English.  Before  the  conjunctions  e 
(and)  and  ou  (or),  the  comma  is  generally  not  em- 
ployed; also  not  before  a  relative  sentence.  On  the 
other  hand,  elucidating  adjectives  and,  frequently,  ad- 
verbs are  separated  by  commas  from  their  nouns  or 
verbs.  When  c  or  cm  do  not  only  add  a  particle,  but 
introduce  an  independent  phrase,  they  are  also  pre- 
ceded by  a  comma. 


Punctuation.  19 

Examples  of  Portuguese  Punctuation: 

Com  bom  vento,  a  can6a  cacilheira  atravessa  o  Tejo  mais  de- 
pressa  do  que  os  vapores. 

Para  o  seu  8ervi90,  ou  para  a  rebocar  em  calma,  a  fragata 
tern  uma  lancha  que  leva  a  reboque. 

0  catraio  e  a  mais  pequena  das  embarca9oes  que  fazem  ser- 
vi90  no  Tejo,  e  emprega-se  ordinariamente  no  transporte  de  passa- 
geiros,  e  ka  vezes  na  pesca  ao  candeio.  —  0  bote-fragata  6  uma 
fragata  pequena,  que  em  geral  transporta  carga  mais  leve. 

Onde  houver  pessdas,  o  pardal  presume  logo,  como  o  rato, 
que  ha  comida,  e  6  ahi  que  elle  esti  bem,  para  comer  sem  grande 
trabalbo. 

A  cobra,  por^m,  6  inoffensiva  .  .  . 

A  este  respeito,  contem-se  coisas  muito  inter essantes  ,  .  , 

(Trindade  Coelho.) 

Eu,  pordm,  observei-lhe  que,  sendo  ess'  outro  artigo,  na  ver- 
dade,  notavel,  elle,  a  men  juizo,  estava  incomplexo,  e,  insuffioiente, 
nao  esgotava  o  assumpto.    (Bruno.) 


^!^ 


20 


First  Lesson.    Ligao  primeira. 

The  Gender  of  the  Noun  and  the  Article. 

0  genero  dos  suhstantivos  e  o  artigo, 

§  18.  There  are  only  two  genderg  in  Portuguese: 
the  masculine  and  the  feminine;  there  is  no  neuter. 
Those  nouns  which  designate  beings  of  masculine  sex 
(e.g.,  homem  man,  cavallo  horse),  are  naturally  also  of 
the  masculine  gender;  while  those  which  indicate  beings 
of  feminine  sex  (e.g.,  mulher  woman,  egua  mare),  are 
naturally  of  feminine  gender.  Neuter  nouns  are  con- 
ventionally ranged  either  amidst  the  masculine  or  the 
feminine  ones.  Examples:  mesa  table,  feminine;  pais 
country,  pardal  sparrow,  masculine. 

§  19.  The  Portuguese  language  distinguishes  the 
gender,  not  only  by  the  pronoun,  but  by  the  very 
article;  by: 

(a)  the  definite  article  (o  the^  for  the  masculine 
singular;  a  the^  for  the  feminine  singular),  when  there 
is  a  definite  person  or  thing  spoken  of  amidst  others 
of  the  same  kind; 

(b)  the  indefinite  article  (mn  a(n)  for  the  mascu- 
line, uma  a(n)  for  the  feminine),  when  we  speak  of  an 
indefinite  person  or  thing  among  others  of  the  same 
kind  (see  2°^  Lesson).  Ex.:  o  homem  the  man;  nm 
homem  a  man;  a  mulher  the  woman;  uma  mulher  a 
woman. 

Bemark,  Before  rei  kingr  there  was  generally  used  the 
definite  article  el  (of  Spanish  origin),  when  a  reigning  Por- 
tuguese King  was  spoken  of:  El-Itei  Dam,  Manusl  II. 

§  20.  To  signify  the  masculine  sex  (and  gender) 
and  the  feminine,  the  Portuguese  language  has  various 
ways: 

^  The  definite  article  the  is  conseqaently  employed  for  the 
two  genders  and  even  for  the  two  nambers:  o  os,  a  as. 


The  Gender  of  the  Noun  and  the  Article.  21 

(a)  a  different  word  (for  persons  nearly  always): 
Jiommi^  mulher;  frade  monk,  freira  nun;  cavallOf  egua ; 
touro  bull,  hoi  ox,  vacca  cow. 

(b)  a  different  termination — e.g.,  pomho,  pomba 
pigeon;  mestre,  mestra  teacher;  leitor,  leitora  reader. 

§  21.  In  the  latter  case  the  feminine^  is  obtained 
by  the  following  rules: 

1.  Those  nouns  ending  in  -o  (not  being  the  second 
vowel  of  a  diphthong)  change  the  -o  into  -a,  ex. :  filhOy 
filha  child  (=  son  and  daughter);  tio  uncle  tia  aunt; 
pomho,  pomha. 

Excep. — diacono  deacon,  fern.:  diaconisa  deaconess. 

2.  Those  ending  in  -do  change  the  -do  into  -da: 
ledo  Mon, ,  leoa  lioness,  abegao  head  man-servant,  abegoa 
head  maid-servant. 

The  chief  exceptions  to  this  rule  are:  bardo  baron, 
baronesa;  cidaddo  citizen,  cidadd;  irmdo  brother,  irmd; 
ladrdo  thief,  ladra;  sidtdo  sultan,  sultana;  valentdo  boaster, 
valentona. 

3.  Those  ending  in  -or  (or)  and  -es  {ez)  add  an  a 
for  the  feminine :  senhor  sir,  senhora ;  leitor  reader,  leitora ; 
lavrador  peasant,  lavradora;  ingles  English,  inglesa. 

The  chief  exceptions  are:  actor  actor,  actriz;  em- 
baixador  ambassador,  embaixatriz;  imperador  emperor, 
imperatriz;  prior  prior,  prioresa. 

Words.     Palayras. 

Isto  ['iJtuP        thi8(nexttothe  j    esse,  essa 

speaker)  aqiielle,  \  that  (one) 

isso  f'isuj  that  (next  to  the  |        aquella 

accosted) 
t/aquillo  [v'kUu]  that  (next  to  a 

third  person) 
estefeftdj,  esta^  this  (one) 


cd  [kaj,  aqui     here  (next  to  t^e 

[dki]  speaker) 

ahi  [vij  there  (next  to 

the  accosted) 


^  Also  of  the  adjectives. 

2  Isto,  isso,  aqidllo  are  pronouns  and  consequently  employed 
independently  (e.g. — Que  e  isto?  Isto  e  uma  penna  What  is  this? 
This  is  a  pen),  while  este,  esse,  aquelle  are  adjectives  and  employed 
only  with  a  noun  clearly  expressed  or  imagined  (esta  penna  e 
aquella.— There  is  the  same  difiFerence  between  este,  esse,  aquelle, 
as  between  isto,  isso,  aquillo. 


22 

Lesson  1. 

ali[v'U],U[U] 

there  (next  to  a 

0  chdo  [u'fvu] 

the  ground 

acoldfvku  'la]      third  person) 

0  banco  fu'bvku] 

the  bench 

e[c]^ 

18  (mostly  an- 

0 gis  fu'sif] 

the  chalk 

swering  to 

0  muro 

the  wall 

what?  or 

[u'muru] 

who?) 

0  tinteiro 

the  inkstand 

estd  [if'ta] 

is  (mostly  an- 

[utin'tviru] 

swering?  to 

0  quadra  preto 

the  blackboard 

'     where?) 

[u  'kwa&rw 

€18  MP           ] 

pretu] 

eis  aqui 

here  is,  tbis  is 

0  Idpis  [u'lapif] 

the  lead-pencil 

[vizv  'kij 

0  mappa 

the  map 

eis  ahi  fstzv'ij 

,  there  is 

[u'mapv] 

alt  or  acold 

0  caderno 

the  copy-book 

que  [k9f  before 

which,  what  (a) 

[ukv  '&ernu] 

a  rowel  ki] 
que  e  [ki'e]? 

0  menino 

the  boy 

what  is? 

[um9  'ninu] 

quern  i  [kvi  'e]  "i 

'  who  is? 

0  alumno  [m- 

the  pupil. 

onde  i  [ondi- 

'lunu] 

school#Dy 

■c]? 

0  lugar  [ulu- 

the  place 

onde  estd 
[ondiifta] 

'  where  is? 

'gar] 
a  mat  or  mae 

the  mother 

onde  fica 

[v  'mvi] 

[ondd'fikv]? 

0  rei  [u'rrvf], 

the  king 

tern  fmj 

has  (he,  she,  it) 

El-rei  [eh 

0  pae  or  pai 

the  father 

'rmf] 

fupat] 

a  rainha 

the  queen 

0  mestre 

[v'rrviyv] 

fu'tneftrifj 

a  escola 

the  school 

0  professor 

the  teacher 

[mf'kolej 

[u  'pruf9- 

a  penna 

the  pen 

^or] 

[v  'penvj 

a  mestra 
a  professora 

the  (female) 

atinta[v'tmtv] 

the  ink 

teacher  or 
governess 

a  cadeira  [vkv- 
'&vtrsj 

the  chair 

0  livro  [u  'Uvruj 

the  book 

a  cancta  [vkv- 

the   penholder 

0  tecto  [u'tetu] 

the  ceiling 

'netv] 

*  J$,  estd  e  fica  mean  is,  but  they  are  very  clearly  to  be 
distinguished:  ^  marks  a  quality  inherent  to  a  person  or  an  object 
(ex. :  0  pae  e  urn  homem,  4  horn  [good]),  or  the  place  of  a  person 
or  thing  that  it  cannot  or  not  easily  be  removed  from  (ex.;  a  es- 
cda  i  aqui).  JEstd  marks  a  passing  or  casual  quality  (ex. :  o  pae 
estd  doente  [ill]);  or  the  staying  of  somebody  or  something  on  a 
epot  that  he  (or  it)  can  be  easily  removed  from  (ex.:  o  livro  estd 
na  mesa ;  a  mesa  estd  na  aula.  Fica  is  employed  to  designate  the 
place  appointed  to  something  (rarely  to  somebody),  ex.:  a  porta 
fica  perto  (near)  da  janella.  Sometimes  you  may  doubt  whether 
to  employ  fica  or  estd  or  even  estd  or  e;  there  are  cases  where  you 
may  indifferently  employ  the  one  or  the  other.    (See  5^^  Lesson.) 

*  Eis  aqui  or  simply  eis',  also  aqui  i  or  (less  correctly) 
tstd  (cf.  •). 


The  Gender  of  the  Noun  and  the  Article. 


23 


a  parede  [vpv- 

the  wall 

aportafn'pjrtvj 

the  door 

red-gj 

a  janetta  /»je- 

the  window 

a  cidade  [vsi- 

the  town 

'nelv] 

'&ad9] 

a  aula  [e'aulBj  the  school- 

a  lousa  [v'lozv] 

the  slate 

room,  the 

a  rua  [rrwe] 

the  street 

class 

a  esi)onja  [vtf- 

the  sponge 

a  escola  [vtf- 

the  school 

'posvj 

'kolv] 

a  mesa  f'mezvj 

the  table 

sim,  ndo 

yes,  no 

■a  menina 

the  girl 

e,  ou 

and,  or 

a  alumna 

the  school-girl, 

tamhem  ftvvi- 

too,  also. 

the  pupil 

'bnij 

em  fvi,  i]  in,  on,  at,  contracted  with  the  following  article  or  de- 
monstrative pronoun  into  no,  na,  n'um,  numa,  nHsto,  n'isso, 
n'este,  etc.  (or  num,  nisto,  etc.). 

de  [da]  of,  from,  contracted  with  the  following  article  or  demon- 
strative pronoun  into  do,  da,  dum,  dfuma,  d'isto,  d'isso,  d'este, 
etc.  (or  dum,  deste,  etc.),  is  equivalent  to  our  genitive  form. 

a  [v]  at,  to,  contr.  with  the  following  def.  article  or  aquelle  into 
ao,  a,  aquelle,  dquella,  etc.,  is  equivalent  to  our  dative. 


1.  Exercicio.     Leitura  e  versa o. 


Aqui  ^^  a  escola. 


Na  escola. 
Onde  fica^  (or  e)  a  aula? 


Eis  aqui^  a 


aula.  Onde  esta^  o  professor?  0  professor  esta  na  cadeira. 
Onde  e  (or  fica)  o  lugar  do  alnmno  ?  0  lugar  do  alumno  ou 
da  alumna  6  (or  fica)  ali  no  banco.  Quern  tem  o  giz?  0  mestre 
tem  0  giz  e  a  esponja.  Que  e  isto?  Isso  6^  o  quadro  preto.  Que 
6  isso?     Isto  6  o  mappa.     E  que  e  aquillo?     Aquillo  e  o  tecto. 

2.  Exercise. 

Where  is  the  window?  The  window  is  in  the  wall. 
Has  the  reader  the  book  ?  The  book  is  on  the  table.  There 
is  a  lead-pencil  on  the  ground.  Where  is  the  copy-book  of 
the  school-boy?  The  copy-book  is  on  the  chair  of  the  teacher. 
Who  is  that  man  ?  That  man  is  the  head  man-servant  of  the 
baron.  Has  the  daughter  of  the  baroness  a  governess?  Yes, 
and  the  friend  of  the  girl  has  also  a  governess.  Where  is 
the  inkstand?  The  inkstand  is  on  the  table.  The  pen- 
holder too  is  on  the  table.  Who  is  there?  The  father  of 
the  boy  is  there.  Who  is  at  (a)  the  door  of  the  school-room? 
The  pupil  of  the  teacher  is  at  the  door.  Is  here  the  place 
of  the  boy?     Yes,  here  on  the  bench. 

Conversation.  Conversa^ao. 

Quern  6  esse  menino?  E  (He  is)  um  aiumno  da  aula. 

E  quern    6  o  professor  d'esta  E  um  cidadao  d'esta  cidade. 
aula? 

1  See  note  '  of  p.  22. 

2  See  note  2  of  p.  22. 


24  Lesson  2. 

Que  ma  e  esta?  Esta  e  a  rua  do  Abe. 

Onde  e  (or  fica)  a  escola?  A  escola  6  (or  fica)  aqui. 

Tern  o  menino  um  lapiz?  Sim,  eis  nm  lapiz  e  oma  ca- 

n6ta. 


(0  professor  apontara  para  os  objectos  de  que  fala  ou  pegari 
nelles,  emquanto  dirigir  as  seguintes  ou  semelhantes  perguntas  ao 
alumno): 

P.  Que  6  isto?    i?.  Isso  e  a  m6sa.    Isso  ^  o  giz.   Isso  6  o 

quadro  preto,  etc. 
P.  Que  6  isso?    B.  Isto  6  o  livro.    Isto  e  a  penna.     Isto 

e  a  canfita,  etc. 
P.  Que  e  aquillo  ?  B.  Aquillo  6  o  tecto,  a  porta,  a  janella, 

o  mappa,  a  parede,  etc. 

(Tlie  same  exercise  to  be  continued  for  all  objects  already 
mentioned.) 

Second  Lesson.    Ligao  segunda. 

The  Plural  of  Substantives.^ 

A  formagdo  do  plural  nos  suhstantivos, 

§  22.  All  nouns  ending  in  a  vowel  or  diphthong 
(except  -do)  or  in  -n  form  the  plural  by  adding  -5,  thus: 
o  banco  the  bench'  os  hancos  the  benches 

a  janella  the  window  as  janellas  the  windows 

0  pae  (or  pat)  the  father  os^jaes  the  fathers,  the  parents 

a  mde  (or  mdi)  the  mother         as  mdes  the  mothers 
0  dia^  the  day  os  dias  the  days 

a  irmd  [vir'mv]  the  sister  as  irmds  the  sisters 

0  dolmen  ['udoimenJihQhvkxroyf      os  dolmens  the  barrows. 

§  23.    Nouns  ending  in  -m  change  this  letter  into 
-n  before  taking  the  -s  of  the  plural: 
o  homem  fu'omvi]  the  man         os  homens  the  men 
0  jardim  fujvr  'dl]  the  garden      os  jardins  the  gardens 
0  som  [u'sdj  the  sound  os  sons  the  sounds 

um  [u]  a,  one  uns  some,  any. 

§  24.  Nouns  terminating  in  -ao  distinguish  two 
chief  classes: 

^  The  rules  given  for  the  formation  of  the  plural  of  the 
noun  are  applied  also  to  the  adjective. 

^  Those  words  ending  in  a  are  generally  of  the  feminine 
gender,  but  there  are  exceptions— e.g.,  dia,  gramma,  monarchal 
dilemma,  imtriarcha,  clima  (climate),  drama,  thema,  and  others 
derived  from  the  Greek. 


The  Plural  of  Substantives. 


25 


(a)  those  where  this    termination  is  not   accented 
take  simply  an  5: 

0    orfao    or    orphao   f'orf^uj      os  orfdos  the  orphans 

the  orphan 
a  bengdo['bes§uJ^  the  blessing      as  hengdos  the  blessings. 

(b)  those  where  this  termination   is  accented  may 
be  divided  into  three  subdivisions: 

(a)  such  as  change  -uo  into  -uos  (rare) 
(P)     »  .     »        •>        -do     »     -des  (rarer  still) 
(t)     »       »        »        -ao     »     -des. 
(a)  To   the  first   class   belong   the    following   sub- 
stantives : 


o  irmdo  the  brother 


OS   irmdos  the    brothers,    the 

brethren 
OS  cidaddos  the  citizens 
OS  christdos  the  Christians 


0  cidaddo  the  citizen 

0  christdo  [krif'ivu]  the 
Christian 

0  cortesdo  [kurtd  zvu]  the  cour- 
tier 

0  villdo  [vi'lvu]  the  peasant, 
villain 

0  chdo  [fvu]  the  ground 

a  mdo  [meu]  the  hand 

(p)  To  the  second  class  belong  the  following: 


OS  cortesdos  the  courtiers 

OS  villdos  the  peasants,  villains 

OS  chdos  the  grounds 
as  mdos  the  hands. 


0  cdo  [kvu]  the  dog 

0  pdo  fpvu]  the  bread,  the 
loaf 

0  alemdo  [vb'mvu]  the  Ger- 
man 

0  capitdo  [hvpi'tvu]  the  cap- 
tain 

0  escrivdo  fffkri'vvu]  the  clerk 
of  the  court 


OS  cdes  [kvifj  the  dogs 


SffJ 


OS  pdes  fpvifj  the  loaves 

OS  alemdes  [vJd'mv}/]  the  Ger- 
mans 

05  capitdes  [kepi'tvif]  the 
captains 

OS  escrivdes  [tfkri'vvif]  the 
clerks  of  the  court. 


(t)  Most  substantives  ending  in  -ao  (among  these 
all  abstract  nouns  ending  in  -do)  form  their  plural  by 
changing  -do  in  -des,  as: 

0  coragdo  [kurv  'svu]  the  heart, 

OS  coragoes  [kuru'soif] 
0  lido  the  lion,  os  IWes 
0  cangdo  the  song,  os  cangoes 
0  meldo  the  melon,  os  meloes 


0  aldedo  the  peasant,  os  aldeoes^ 
a  acgdo  the  action,  as  acgdes 
a  divisdo  the  division,  as  di- 

vis5es 
a  licdo  the  lesson,  as  ligdes. 


*  bengao  may  also  be  accented  on  its  termination. 

^  aldedo  [aid}  'vuj  may  form  the  plural  in  aldedos  or  aldeoes. 


26 


Lesson  2. 


§  25.     Nouns  (and  adjectives)  ending  in  -r  or 
'Z  add  -es  in  the  plural,  as: 


•5  or 


0    mar    [mar]    the    sea,     os 

mares  [marifj 
0  mes  [mefj  the  month,  meses 
o   rapaz   [rrv'paf]    the    boy, 

rapazes 
o  portugues  [purtu'gufj]  the 

Portuguese,  Portugueses 


a    paz    [paj]    peace,    pazes 

[paz'if] 
a  flor  [flor]  flower,  flores 
a   mulher    [mu  'fier]    woman, 

mulheres  women. 
superior  [supdri'orj  superior 

(sub.  and  adj.). 


N.B. — Many  words  may  be  written  with  an  -s  or  a 
-z,  as :  mcs  or  mez,  lapis  (pencil)  or  lapiz,  ingles  or  inglez, 
etc.;  but  nowadays  the  -s  is  preferred  to  the  -z. 

§  26.  Words  (nouns  and  adjectives)  ending  in  ac- 
cented -al,  'Ol,  -uly  change  the  letter  -I  into  -es: 

0  animal  [vni'mai]  the  ani-      os  animaes  [uni'majfj 
mal 


OS  soes  ['s.7jf] 
OS  tafues  [tv'fwif] 
geraes  [s^'raif] 
azues.  [v  'zutfj. 


0  sol  [sol]  the  sun 
0  taful  [tv'ful]  the  gambler 
geral  hd  'ral]  general 
azul  [v'zui]  blue 

Exception. — 0  mal  the  evil;  o  consul  ['kosul]  the  consul; 
o  cal  [kai]  form  their  plural  by  adding  -es:  os  males,  os  con- 
sules,  as  cales.  0  real  [rri'ai]  the  ree  (unit  of  the  Por- 
tuguese coin),  forms  the  plural  os  reis  [uz'rre]]]. 

§  27.    Nouns  ending  in  -el  or  unaccented  -il  change 
these   letters    into    -eis.     N.B. — If  the   termination   -el 
— which  is  always  pronounced  [ef] — is  accented,  -eis  is 
pronounced  [e}/] ;  if  not  accented,  it  is  /V?//. 
0  papel  [pv'pii]  the  paper         papeis  [pv'peij] 
0  tonnel  [tu  'nel]  the  barrel         tonneis  [tu  'ne-ifj 
o  tunnel  ['tunel]  the  tunnel        tunnels  [tumnj]. 


agradavel  [ngrv'davd]  agree- 
able 
reptil  f'rreptii]  reptile 
fdcil  ['fasti]  easy 
diifuU  [dd'fisiij  difficult 
iextil  [  tvtftii]  textile 


agradaveis  [vgrv  'davvij] 

reptis^ 

fdceis  ['fasvjf] 

difficeis  [d9  flsvij] 

texteis^. 


^  Textil  (with  the  accent  on  the  first  ayllable)  has  the  scieo- 
tifical  plural-form:  texteia,  and  the  popular  form:  textis.  JReptil 
(sclent ifical  form  ['rrcptil]^  popular  form:  [rrep'tii])  forms  the 
plural  in  reptis  [rrep'ti/J,  instead  of  repiis  ['rreptif],  as  would  be 
correct. 


The  Plural  of  Substantives.  27 

Exception.— 0   mel  honey,   forms   meles;  o  fel  gall,  bill, 
has  no  plural. 

§  28.  Nouns  (and  adjectives)  ending  in  accented 
'il  change  the  letter  -l  into  -5,  as: 

o.funil  [fu'niij  the  funnel  funis  [fu'nij] 

o  burril  [hu'rrii]  the  chisel        burris 
civil  [sd'vil]  civil  (adj.)  civis. 

§  29.  Nouns  ending  in  -s  preceded  by  an  un- 
accented vowel  or  falling  diphthong,  do  not  change  in 
the  plural:  o{s)  alferes  [af'ferif]  lieutenant(s) ;  o{s)  lapis 
flapif]  pencil(s);  simples  simple. 

Exception.— 0  calis  ['kahf]  cup,  calyx,  glass,  pL  calls  or 
calices;  deus  ['deuj]  god,  deuses  [deustf]. 

§  30.  Some  substantives  are  only  used  in  the 
plural,  as : 

as  calgas  ["kalsuf]  the  trousers  os  generos  ['genoruf]  the  vie- 
as  ceroulas  [sd  'roluf]  the  dra-  tuals 

wers  as  fontes  ['fontif]  the  temples 

as  tenazes [td'nazij]  the  tongs  as  castas  [hofivj]  the  back 

OS   arredores  [arrd'dorif]   the  os  dculos  ['okulufj  the   spec- 

envirOns  tacles. 

Rule. — As  already  mentioned,  the  adjective  follows 
the  same  rules  as  the  noun,  as  for  the  feminine  and 
plural  forms;  so  it  agrees  with  the  word  qualified  by  it, 
in  gender  and  number,  as: 

0  Jwmem  e  alto  the  man  is  tall 
a  torre  e  alta  the  spire  is  high 
as  torres  sao  alias  the  spires  are  .high. 

§  31.     Present  Tense  (Presente)   of  ter  to  have. 

Eu  ienho  [eu'tvpoj  I  have  tenko  (eu)?  have  I? 

tu  tens  [tu'tnifj  thou  hast  tens  (tu)?  hast  thou? 

elle  tern  [eh't'Si]  he  has  tern  (elle)?  has  he? 

ella  tern  [eIv  'iui]  she  has  tern  (ella)  ?  has  she  ? 

nos     temos    [nDf'temuj]     we  temos  (nds)  ?  have  we  ? 

have 

v6s    tendes    [vof'tendtfj    you  tendes  (vos)?  have  you? 

have 

elles    teem     [ehj'tvivi]    they  ^eem  CeZZes) . ^ have  they  ?Cwasc.^ 

(masc.)  have  • 

ellas    teem    [ehj'tvivi]    they  teem  (ellas)  ?  have  they  (fern.). 

(fern.)  have 


Lesson  2. 


Eu  ndo  tenho  I  have  not,  etc. 
Ndo  tenho  eu?  have  I  not?  etc. 

Rule.— The  negative  n&o  is  put  before  the  verh. 

BemarJc. — The  conjunctive  personal  pronoun  may  be 
omitted.  Yet  it  must  be  employed:  1.  when  it  has  the  em- 
phasis—e.g.,  eu  (e  que)  tenho;  2.  to  avoid  a  misunderstand- 
ing; 3.  when  necessary  to  the  harmony  of  the  phrase. — In 
the  interrogative  form  it  is  put  after  the  verb,  but  may  also 
stand  before  it. 

N.B.— As  for  you  have,  etc.,  see  the  following 
lesson. 

Palavras. 


Men,  minha         my 

f'meu,  mijiv] 
seu,  sua  ['seUf    his,  her,  its, 

8uv]  your 

doiSyduasf'dotf,  two 

'dunfj 
quanta [kwvntuj,  how  much? 

quanta  ? 
quantos,  quantas  how  many  ? 
tres  [tref]  three 

quatrof'kwatruj  four 
cinco  I'siku]       five 
0  pe  [u'pej         the  foot 
o  dedo  [u&e&u]   the  finger,  the 

toe 
obrago [u'i>rasuj  the  arm 
esteSf  estas  these 

esses,  essas  those 

aqueiles,  aquellas  those  (of.  p.  21, 

footnote  2) 
cada  [Tcv&ib] 
ndo  [n%u] 
sao  f&vuj  1 

estao  [}f'tvu]   ] 
algum  [ai'guj 
alguma  [al- 

gumv] 
alguns  [ai' gUf]  [ 
algumas  [al- 

gumvf] 
ha  [a] 


0  sdgro  [' sogru]  the  father-in- 
law 

a  sogra  f'sogrej  the  mother-in- 
law 


each 
no,  not 

are 


some,  any 


vdho  [vefiUf 
vsfiu] 


there  is, 

are 
old,  aged 


there 


a  cdthedra 

["katd&rv] 
o  principe 

['pris}pd] 
a  princesa 

[prl'sezv] 
a  leitura  [Ivi- 

'turvj 
a  versdo  fv^r- 

'svuj 
0  herdeiro  [ir- 

'dv}ru] 
a  herdeira 

[ir'&virv] 
0  fidalgo 

[fi  'ffaigu] 
a  fidalga 

[fi'&aigv] 
0  avo  [v'vo] 

a  av6  [v'vo] 

0  cad  [kvuj 


the  lecturing- 

desk 
the  prince 

the  princess 

the  reading 

exercise 
translation, 

version 
the  heir 

the  heiress 

the   gentleman 

the  gentlewo- 
man, the  lady 

the  grand- 
father 

the  grand- 
mother 

the  dog 

the  bitch 


the 


a  cadella  [lev- 

'&£lv] 
0  rapaz 
a  rapariga 

[rrvpv  'rigvj 
iambem  [tvm- 

'bvij 

Rule.  — The  possessive  adjectives  are  generally  pre- 
ceded by  the  article,  if  the  noun  is  not  a  title  of  re- 


the  boy 
the  girl, 

young  woman 
also. 


The  Plural  of  Substantives.  29 

lationship,  in  which  case  the  article  is  generally 
omitted.  The  article  is  dropped  also  at  addressing  per- 
sons. Ex. :  0  meu  lapis,  a  sua  penna;  l^t  meu  pae^ 
sua  mde;  my  good  friend  I 

3.  Exercicio.    Leitura  e  Tersao. 

Meu  pai  tern  dois  filhos  e  duas  filhas.  Sen  sogro  e  urn 
homem  velho,  sua  sogra  6  uma  mulher  velha.  Na  aula  ha 
uma  cathedra,  dois  bancos,  duas  janellas  e  uma  mesa.  Ka  mfisa 
ha  uma  esponja,  tres  can3tas  e  quatro  lapis.  Os  meus  cadernos 
estao  tambem  na  m6sa.  Tenho  [um]"  av6  e  [uma]  avo.  0 
mestre  6  portugufis.  0  francos  e  um  valentao.  0  principe  6 
o  filho  do  rei  e  da  rainha.  0  fidalgo  ^  o  herdeiro  do  seu  amigo. 
Onde  esta  o  cao  do  ingles?     Esta  ali  no  chao. 

4.  Exercise. 

Translation. 
I  have  two  hands.  Each  hand  has  five  fingers.  We 
have  also  two  feet,  and  each  foot  has  also  five  toes.  These 
are  my  copy-books  and  my  pens.  Is  this  your  lead-pencil? 
No,  it  is  not^;  it  is  the  pencil  of  my  father.  My  mother's 
father-in-law  (=  The  father-in-law  of  my  mother)  is  niy 
grandfather,  and  her  mother-in-law  is  my  grandmother. 
These  girls  and  those  boys  are  pupils  of  my  master.  Have 
you  any  brothers?  Yes,  I  have  three  brothers;  they  are 
in  the  garden.  The  princes  are  the  sons  of  the  king  and 
the  queen.  Those  men  are  aged.  They  are  German  captains. 
The  English,  the  Portuguese,  and  the  Germans  are  Christians. 
There  are  four  dogs  in  the  street.  Have  we  a  map  in  the 
school-room?     Yes,  there  is  a  map  on  the  wall. 

Conversai^ao. 
Tem  0  menino  uma  lousa?  Sim,  tenho  uma  lousa  e  dois 

cadernos. 
Ha  uma  esponja?  Nao  ha   esponja   nesta    aula. 

Quantos  alumnos  ha  aqui?  Ha     cinco     alumnos     e     tr6s 

alumnas. 
Qnantos  ha  em  cada   banco?      Ha  um  em  cada  banco. 
Onde    esta   o   menino   Carlos      Esta  na  rua. 

(Charles)? 
Onde  fica  a  porta?  A  porta  fica  acold. 

Ha  tinta  no  tinteiro?  Ha^,  sim,  senhor. 

Que  tens  tu  ahi?  Eu  tenho  alguns  meloes. 

1  The  impersonal  it  is  is  rendered  by  e  without  a  pronoun. 

'  The  Portuguese  generally  answers  by  employing  the  same 
verb  as  in  the  question;  if  the  latter  contains  a  compound  form, 
he  generally  employs  in  the  answer  only  the  auxiliary  verb.  Ex.: 
Tem  tido  sorte?  Have  you  had  good  luck?     Tenho  Yes,  I  have. 


30  Lesson  3. 

Isto  6  uma  mfisa.  Isto  6  um  banco.  Isso  6  a  porta 
da  aula.  Isso  6  o  caderno  do  menino.  Aquillo  e  a 
cathedra  do  professor.  A  cadeira  tern  quatro  pes, 
elle  esta  no  chao.  0  papel  esta  na  mesa.  Ha  cinco 
rapazes  na  classe.     Cada  rapaz  tern  dois  lapis. 

0  professor  (apontando  o  objecto):  Que  e  isto?,  isso?, 
aquillo? 

0  alumno  (apontando  o  objecto) :  Isto  e  o  meu  caderno, 
a  minha  penna;  isso  e  o  seu  livro;  aquillo  6  o 
lapis  do  menino  Carlos,  etc. 

0  professor:  Onde  esta  o  banco?  Onde  fica  a  porta,  a. 
janella?  etc.  Que  tem  o  menino?,  a  cadeira?,  a 
m6sa?,  etc.     Que  temos  nos?,  etc. 

(The  same  exercise  to  be  continued  for  all  objects  and  forms 
already  mentioned.) 


Third  Lesson.    Ligao  terceira. 

The  Address.     0  tratamento  [trvtv'mmtu]. 

The  Yerb  ter  to  have. 

§  32.  The  English  address  ''you"  is  given  in 
Portuguese  by  different  expressions: 

(a)  Mostly  it  is  not  expressed  at  all:  Tem  tempo? 
Have  you  time?  Ndo  tens  lugar?  Have  you  no  place? 
Esta  doente?  Are  you  ill?  Fode  diser-me  ,  .  .?  Can 
you  tell  me  .  .  .  ? 

(b)  You  is  rendered  by  the  state  or  title  of  the 
person  addressed:  0  senhor  dis-me  You  tell  me.  A 
senhora  quer  sentar-se?  Will  you  sit  down?  Qual  e  a 
opinido  do  senhor  DoutorP  Doctor,  what  is  your  opinion? 
0  sr.  Conde  (count)  deseja  passar?  Do  you  wish  to  pass, 
sir?  0  pae  (a  mde)  que  di^?  What  do  you  say,  father 
(mother)?  Que  manda  o  senhor  patrdo  (principal)?  What 
do  you  command?  0  meu  amigo  nao  vd  Id  don't  (you) 
go  there,  my  friend!  0  vissinho  (o  menino)  cmno  esta? 
Neighbour  (my  boy),  are  you  well?  A  prima  quando 
vae?  When  shall  you  go,  my  cousin? 

(c)  You  may  be  rendered  by  the  name  of  a  person: 
0  Carlos  jd  foi  ?  Charles,  did   you   already  go  there? 


The  Address.  31 

Ndo  disse  a  Maria?  Mary,  didn't  you  say?  It  is  to 
be  considered,  that  with  gentlemen  the  family  name 
(sometimes  also  the  Christian  name)  is  employed  directly 
after  senhor,  while  with  ladies  only  the  Christian  name 
is  used,  but  preceded  by  senhora  Dona  (B^).  0  sr. 
(Antonio)  Correa  dOlivevra  escreveu  urn  novo  poema  ?  Have 
you  written  a  new  poem,  Mr.  d'Oiiveira?  Tern  (uma) 
creada  a  sr"'  D^  Maria?  Have  you  a  maid-servant,  Mrs. 
(or  Miss)  Mary?  Upon  country  people  or  person  of  low 
condition,  the  title  Dona  is  not  bestowed. 

Itemarlc.—\n  addressing  somebody,  the  Portuguese  general- 
ly summons  him  by  an  introductory  «c>/>  (oh!). 

(d)  You  must  be  rendered  by  Vossa  Excellencia 
( V"  E")  [vosytfSQ  'lenstvj  in  speaking  to  persons  of  rank, 
especially  to  ladies  and  to  strangers.  This  form  may 
be  abbreviated  io  Vossencia  fvo'ses'ivj. 

N.B.—  In  Brazil  these  forms  (d)  are  not  usual;  they 
are  substituted  by: 

(e)  Vossa  3Ierce  (V°  Me)  [vosv  mdr'se].  Your 
grace^  a  title  given  in  Portugal  to  lower  people,  maid- 
servants, etc.    This  form  may  be  abbreviated  to: 

(f)  Vosse  (V^)  [vo'se],  used  for  men-servants, 
etc.;  in  familiar  conversation  it  is  also  used  among 
gentlemen. 

(g)  In  commercial  correspondence  there  is  still  the 
now  antiquated  «  Vossa  Senhoria^  [vosv  sfpu'rivj,  your 
honour,  to  be  found  (abr. :    F"  Sr^). 

Bemarhs.  1.  With  all  these  addresses  above  mentioned 
the  verb  is  to  be  employed  in  the  third  person— e.g.,  V^  Ex^ 
tern  or  e  .  .  .,  F«»  Ex^^  teem  or  sdo;  2.  as  already  said,  yon 
need  not  employ  the  address  at  every  verb.  If  on  the  one  hand 
it  would  not  be  polite  to  dispense  with  it,  a  too  frequent  em- 
ployment would  be  heavy.  3.  The  pronoun  €tu»  is  used  only 
in  familiar  treatment  and  may  be  altogether  avoided  by 
foreigners.  4.  The  pronoun  «t;os»,  if  not  taken  in  the  plural 
(and  even  here  it  is  better  to  substitute  it  by  the  third 
person),  is  antiquated  and  only  used  in  pathos,  at  prayers^ 
and  in  solemn  allocution,  for  instance,  to  the  king. 


S2  Lesson  3. 

§  33.     The  verb  ter  to  have.^ 

Present  participle  (participio  presente):  tendo  having. 
Past  participle  (participio  passado)  tido:  f'ti&uj  had. 

Indicative  (Indicativo). 

Present  Tense  (Presente). 

(See  2°d  Lesson.) 

Imperfect  Tense  (Preterito  imperfeito). 

Eu  tinha  ['tipv]  I  had  nos   tinhamos    ['iijivmuf]   we 

iu  tinhas  you  had  (thou  hadst)  had 

elle,  ella  tinha  he,  she,  it,  had      v6s  tinheis  f'tijivtf]  you  had 

dies  tinham  ['tipvu]  they  had. 

Perfect  Tense  (Preterito  perfeito). 

JEu  tive  ['tivd]  I  have  got,  I  nds  tivemos  [ti'vemuj]  we  h&Ye 

had  got 

tu  tiveste  [ti'vejtd]  you  have  v6s  tivestes  [ti'veft9f]  jonh&ye 

got  got 

elle,  ella  teve  ['tevsj  he,  she,  elles,  ellas  tiveram  [ti'vervu] 

it  has  got  they  have  got. 

Present  Perfect  (Preterito  composto). 
Eu  ienho  tido  I  have  had 
tu  tens  tido  you  have  had,  etc. 

Pluperfect  (Mais-que-perfeitq). 
Eu  tinha  tido  I  had  had 
tu  tinhas  tido  you  had  had,  etc. 

Future  (Futuro). 
Eu  terei  [t9'rvi]  I  shall  have      nds' teremos  we  shall  have 

f     f    ^     I  thou  wilt  \  V  vds  tereis  you  will  have 

lu  leras  ^  ^^^  ^.jj    ^  nave        ^^^^^^    ^^^^^    ^-^^    ^^^^   ^^jj 

elle,  ella  terd  he,  she,  it  will         have, 
have 


*  We  hesitated  to  give  so  early,  in  this  lesson,  the  whole  verb 
ter,  successively  followed  by  the  other  auxiliary  verbs  ser,  estar, 
haver;  but  as  these  verbs  cannot  be  dispensed  with  to  form  even 
the  simplest  phrase,  and  as  experience  taught  us  that  a  summary 
arrangement  impresses  more  easily  and  lastingly,  we  resolved  to  do 
80.  Yet  the  student  is  not  supposed  to  learn  at  once  all  the  verbal 
forms,  so  as  to  master  them,  as,  indeed,  these  verbs  with  their 
resemblances  and  differences  constitute  one  of  the  greatest  diffi- 
culties of  the  Portuguese  language  for  the  foreigner.  But  he  is  ear- 
nestly requested  not  to  put  these  lessons  aside  before  having  at- 
tained an  absolute  understanding  of  the  meaning  and  employment 
of  the  auxiliary  verbs. 


The  Address.  33 

Future  Perfect  CFuturo  perfeitoj. 
Eu  ierei  tido  I  shall  have  had. 

Conditional  (Cdndiciondl). 

JEu    teria    [t?  'riv]    I    should      ells,  ella  teria  he,  she,  it  would 

have  have 

.     /  thou  wouldst  \  ^  n6s  teriamos  we  should  have 

tti  terias^^^^  ^^^1^     ^nave      ^^^  ^^^.^.^  ^^^  ^^^j^  ^^^^ 

elles  teriam  they  would  have. 

Conditional  Perfect  (Condicional  perfeito). 
Eu  teria  tido  I  should  have  had. 

Subj uncti ve  (Conjunctivo).  ^ 

Presente.  ^ 

Eu  tenha  I  have  nds  tenhdmos  we  have 

tu  tenhas  you  have  v6s  tenhais  you  have 

elle  tenha  he  have  eUes  tenJmm  they  have. 

Imperfeito. 
(Se)    eu   tivesse  [ti'vesd]   (if)      (Se)  n6stivessemos[ti'v€Sdmuf] 

I  had  (if)  we  had 

(Se)  tu  tivesses  (if)  you  had        (Se)  v6s  tivesseis  (if)  you  had 

»     elle  tivesse  (if)  he  had  »     elles  tivessem  (i^)  they  h.a.d. 

Futuro. 
eu  tiver  [ti'ver]  if  (or  when)  I  am  to  have  or:  if 
tu  tiver es  (or  when)  I  shall  have,  etc. 

elle  tiver 

nds  tivermos  [ti'vermuj] 
v6s  iiverdes 
elles  tiver  em.  * 

Personal  Infinitive.  Infinit(iv)o  pessoal. 

(Para)  eu  ter  (hat  1      may  have,  to  have  (I) 

»       tu  teres  »  you     »         »  »  »      (you) 

»       elle  ter  »  he       »         »  »  »      (he) 

»       nds  termos  »  we      »         »  »  »      (etc.) 

»       vos  terdes  »  you     »   ^     »  »  » 

»       elles  terem  »  they    »         »  »  » 

Imperative  (Imperaiivo). 

Tern  (tu);  tende  (vos);  tenha     ndo  tenhas  (tu);  ndo  tenhais; 
(79  have  ndo  tenha(m)  (V^('>)  do  not 

have. 

^  The  Subjunctive  Moods  in  Lessons  3—7  may  be  only  read 
over  here,  while  well  learned  later  on. 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  S 


.« 


34 


Lesson  3. 


JRemark.     Ter  que  or  ter  de  indicates  necessity: 

Tenho  de  Id  ir  I  must  go  there. 

Tens  que  fazer  a  tua  obrigagdo  you  must  do  your  duty. 

In    the    same   manner    are    conjugated     the    compound 
Yerbs,  as: 


ahster-se  to  abstain, 

bear 
ater  to  stick  to 
conter  to  contain 
deter  to  detain 


to    for-      entreter  to  entertain 
manter  to  maintain 
obter  to  obtain 
reter  to  retain 
suster  to  sustain. 


Palayras. 


A  drvore 

f'arviirjj 
a  droore  fru- 

ctifera  [fru- 

'tifarej 
a  fructa  [  'frutv] 

0  fructo  [' frutu] 

andado  [vn-     ) 

'dad'uj  > 

ido  I'i&uJ  I 
ir  [ir] 

a  saude  fsv  'u&d] 
voUar  [vot'tarj 
a  carta  ['kartv] 
a  noticia  [nu- 

'tis^v] 
0  trahalho  [tre- 

'bdfiuj 
por  muito  tempo 

[pur  muitu 

'tempuj 
ficar  ffi'karj 
a  casa  ['kazvj 
em  casa 
a  ordetn  f'ordv}] 
nenhutn  [ni  'jiUj 
o  assucnr 

[e  'dukarj 
o  leite  [Ivitd] 
o  queijo  f'kvi^uj 
a  manteiga 

[mvn'tvigv] 
0  ovo  f'ovu,  1)1. 

'ovuf] 


the  tree 

the   fruit-tree 


the  fruit 

(eatable) 
the  fruit  (in 

general) 

gone 

to  go 
the  health 
to  return 
the  letter 
the  news 

the  work, 
trouble 
for  a  long  time 


to  stay 
the  house 
at  home 
the  order 
non3 
the  sugar 

the  milk 
the  cheese 
the  butter 


the  egg 


0  did  [J a] 
0  pudim  [pu  '&l] 
0  pastel  fpvf'tei J 
a  batata  [b^- 

'tatnj 
a  pimenta  [pi- 

'mentv] 
o  sal  fsaij 
o  vinho  I'vijiuJ 
0  pdo  fpvuj 
a  came  [karnd] 
a  volataria 

[vuletv  'riv] 
a  caga  ['kasn] 
a  dgua  ['agwis] 
a  dgua  ardente 

[vr'dentd] 
o  pato  f'patuj 
0  copo  f'kjpuj 
0  dinheiro  [di- 

'jiisyru] 
0  chocolate 

[fuku'latd] 
quando  [kivin- 

duj  (algum 

dia) 
precisar  [prdsi- 

'zarj 
0  jantar  fsvn- 

'tarj 
0  caldo  f'kaiduj 
0  arroz  [v  'rrofj 
a  cerveja  [s^r- 

a  gaveta  [gs- 
'vetvj 


the  tea 
the  pudding 
the  pie 
the  potato 

the  pepper 

the  salt 
the  wine 
the  bread 
the  meat 
the  poultry 

the  game 
the  water 
the  brandy 

the  duck 
the  glass 
the  money 

the  chocolate 

whenever 


to  want 

the  dinner 

the  broth 
the  rice 
the  beer 

the  drawer. 


The  Address.  35 

Rule. — The  nouns  of  material,  taken  in  a  partitive 
and  indefinite  sense,  are,  as  in  English,  used  without 
the  article  or  a  preposition:  Tenho  pao  I  have  (some) 
bread.  But:  Te^iho  um  pouco  de  pao  I  have  a  little 
bread. 

5,  Exercicio.    Leitura  e  yersao, 

U  menino,  que  tern  na  mao?  Tenho  uma  can6ta.  Nao 
tern  tambem  um  lapis?  Nao  tenho.  0  sr.  vizinho  tern  um 
cao?  Tenho  dois  caes.  Nao  tinha  meu  Amigo  (um)  jardim 
com  algumas  flores?  Tinha,  sim,  senhor,  e  ainda  tenho.  Se 
tivesse  arvores  fructifel-as,  tambem  teria  fructa.  Tern  a  menina 
andado  a  escola  nestes  dias?  Nao  tenho  ido,  tenho  andado 
{or  estado)  doente.  Quando  tiver  saiide,  terei  muito  gosto  em 
voltar  a  aula.  Teve  V*.  Ex*,  uma  carta  da  sua  amiga?  Tive 
hontem.  Tenho  tido  noticias  d'ella  (from  her)  em  cada  m6s. 
Temos  tido  muito  trabalho,  para  termos  uma  creada.  Agora 
teem  ?  Temos,  mas  nao  a  (her)  teremos  por  muito  tempo. 
Nao  tendo  drdem  para  la  ires,  terds  de  (to)  ficar  em  casa. 

,  6.  Exercise. 

Have  you  some  fruit,  my  friend?  I  have  none.  She 
has  the  sugar.  They  have  the  milk.  We  had  the  cheese. 
You  had  the  butter.  1  shall  have  eggs.  He  will  have  tea. 
We  shall  have  a  pudding.  You  will  have"  a  pie.  They  had 
no  potatoes.  He  has  had  pepper  and  salt.  Had  you  some 
wine  ?  Will  you  have  butter  and  cheese  ?  I  shall  have  bread 
and  meat.  The  boy  has  soup  and  meat.  I  shall  have  no 
poultry,  but  I  shall  have  game.  Your  horse  will  have  bread 
and  brandy.  Shall  you  have  a  duck?  My  daughter  would 
have  a  glass  of  milk.  If  you  had  money,  you  would  have 
chocolate.  Whenever  we  are  to  have  money,  we  shall  have 
everything  we  want  (iuda  quanto  precisarmos) . 

Conversaijao. 

Que  temos  nos  nesta  m^sa?  Temos   uma   penna,    tinta    e 

papel. 

Terao  os  rapazes  pao  e  leite?  Nao,    elles   terao  pao  e  agua. 

Nao     teve     V^-    queijo     esta  Nao,  eu  tive  juanteiga. 

manha  ? 

Nao  terei  eu   came  de   boi  e  Nao,    tu   teras    um  pastel    e 

vinho  para  o  meu  jantar?  cerveja. 

Onde   tern   a  sua  penna   e  a  Tenho-as     (them)    na    minha 

canfita?                 .  gav6ta. 

Nao    teve    ainda    caldo    com  Ainda  nao  (not  yet),  mas   eu 

arroz?  tive  um  copo  de  leite. 

3* 


36  Lesson  4. 

Teria  o   meu   amigo  escripto      Teria,    sim,  senhor.     Mas   ha 
tuna  carta,  se  tivesse  tido  muito  que  nao   tenho  tido 

tempo  ?  tempo. 

(Oral  exercises  to  be  done  on  the  subject,  as  indicated  in  the 
preceding  lessons.) 


Fonrtli  Lesson.    Ligao  qnarta. 

The  Auxiliary  Verb  ser  and  the  Adjective, 
0  verbo  auxUiar  sev  e  o  adjectivo, 
§  34.     The  verb  ser  to  be. 

Participio  imperfeito:  sendo  f'senduj. 
Participio  perfeito:  sido  f'siS^uJ. 

Indicativo. 
Presente. 
Eu  sou  [sou]  I  am  nds  somos  ['somuf]  w%  are 

tu  is  [ef]  thovL  &rt  j  vds  sois  ['so}J]  you  are 

(elUj  ella)  e  he,    >  you  are         (elles,   ellas)  sao  [svu]  they 
she,  it  is  )  (you)  are. 

Imperfeito. 
Eu  ira  ['erv]  I  was  nds  eramos  we  were 

tu  Sras  thou  wast  I  v6s  ereis  you  were 

(elle,  ella)  era  he    >  you  were      elleSj   ellas   eram   they   (you) 
she,  was  |  were. 

Preterito  perfeito. 
Eu  fui^  [fut]  I  was  or  have      nds  fomos  ['fomujj 
been,  etc.       ^  v6s  fostes  tfofttfj 

tu  foste  ['fojtd]  elles,  ellas  fdram  f'forvuj. 

eVSy  ella  foi  [fot] 

Preterito  perfeito  eomposto. 
Eu  tenho  sido  f'sidu]  I  have  been 
tu  tens  sido  you  have  been,  etc. 

Mais-que-perfeito. 
Eu  tinha  sido  I  had  been,  etc. 

1  As  fui  is  also  the  preterito  of  tV  to  go,  it  means  also  I 
went  (fui-me  I  went  away);  it  is  tte  same  for  tenses  derived  from 
the  preterito  (fosse,  fdr^  f6ra)\  see  §  44  and  45. 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  ser  and  the  Adjective. 


37 


Futuro  imperfeito. 
Eu  serei  [s9'rvij  I  shall  be        n6s    seremos    [sd'remuj]    we 


tu  seras  [sd'raj]  you  will  be 

(elle,    ella)    serd    [sd'ra]   he, 

she,  it,  you  will  be,  etc. 


shall  be 
v6s  sereis  [sd'rvif]  you  will  be 
elles,  ellas  serdo  [sd'mu]  they 

will  be. 


Futuro  perfeito. 
Eu  terei  sido  I  shall  have  been,  etc. 
Condicional  imperfeito. 
Eu  seria  [sd'riv]  I  should  be,      nds  seriamos  [sd'rimnuj] 
tu  serias  etc.      vds  serieis  [sd'rivif] 

elk,  ella  seria  elles,  ellas  seriam. 

Condicional  perfeito. 
Eu  ieria  sido  I  should  have  been,  etc. 

Subjunctivo. 
Presente. 
Eu  seja  ['sv^u]  T  be,  etc.  nds  sejdmos  [sd'gvmuj] 


tu  sejas 
elle,  ella  seja 

Eu  fosse^  I'fosd] 
tu  fosses  [fostj] 
die,  ella  fosse 


vds  sejais  [s9'sa'ij] 
elles ,  ellas  sejam. 
Imperfeito. 
were,  etc.      nds  fossemos  ['fosdmu}] 
vds  fosseis 
elles,  ellas  fOssem. 

Futuro. 


^ 


-§ 


Eu  for^ 

^ 

tu  fores 

03 

elle,  ella  for 

I  am  or  happen  to  be 

nds  formos 

f' 

or  if  I  shall  be. 

vds  fordes 

o 

elles  ellas  forem 

**-> 

Infinitivo 

pessoal. 

Eu  ser 

-^ 

tu  seres 

elle  ser 

T«'      J 

I  may  be  or  to  be  (I, 

nds  sermos 

you,  etc.),  etc. 

vds  serdes 

O 

elles,  ellas  serem 

,c 

Imperativo, 
Sc  (tu);  seja  (V^.);  side  (vds)  be.   —   nao  sejas  (tu); 
ndo  seja  (V^.);  ndo  sejaes  (vds)  do  not  be. 

^  See  note  of  the  preceding  page. 


38 


Lesson  4. 


§  35.  The  Portuguese  adjective  follows,  as  already 
mentioned,  the  same  rules  of  inflexion  as  the  substan- 
tive with  which  it  consequently  agrees  in  gender  and 
number.  It  is  the  same  as  for  the  demonstrative,  pos- 
sessive, and  indefinite  adjectives,  and  the  ordinal  numbers, 
which  are  all  considered  adjectives.  Also  the  cardinal 
numbers  um  and  dois  have  a  different  form  for  the 
feminine  (cf.  2'^'^  Lesson):  este  Uvro,  esta  penna;  meu 
paCy  minha  mde ;  algum  papel,  algiima  tinta;  o  primeiro 
(first)  cdumno,  a  primeira  alumna;  dois  bancos,  dims 
mesas,  etc. 

§  36.  There  are  adjectives,  denominated  uniforms, 
which  have  only  one  form  for  both  genders.  This  class 
embraces  those  ending  by  -e,  -Z,  -ar,  -az,  -is,  -oz,  -im, 
-ea  and  -o,  and  those  ending  by  -s  in  syllable  not  accen- 
tuated. Ex.:  doce,  grande,  leal,  amdvel,  fdcil,  getittl, 
singular,  capas,  feliz,  veloz,  ruim,  femea,  so,  simples. 

Exceptions:— e5fe_,  esse,  aquelle,  mestre  (chief— e.g.,  mure 
mestre),  which  have  the  feminine:  esta,  essa,  aquella,  mestra. 

§  37.  The  place  of  the  Portuguese  qualifying  ad- 
jective is  for  the  most  part  after  the  noun  as  for  those 
denoting  colour,  form,  dimension,  nationality,  religion; 
while  the  demonstrative,  possessive,  and  indefinite  ad- 
jectives precede  the  noun. 

Palarras. 


bad 


good,  kind 


Velho  ['vefiu]     old 

novo  f'novuj       young,  new 

ruim  frru'i, 

'rrui] 
mau  fmauj,  adv. 

mal  fmaij 
ham,  boa  [bo, 

bov] 

doente  [du' entjj  ill,  sick 
rico  f'rrikuj       rich 
applicado  fvpU-  diligent 

'ka&uj 
preguigoso  lazy 

fprc/gi'sozuj 
hello  f'beluj         beautiful,  fine 
cede  f'seduj        early,  soon 
tarde  f'tanh]      late 
melhor  fmi'fijr]  better,  best 
duravel  [du-        durable,  lasting 

'ravdj 
caro  ['karuj       dear 


alto  [aituj  high,  tall 
gravde  [' grvndd]  great,  grand, 

large,  big 

sempre  [aemprj]  always,  ever 

0  caminho  [kv-  the  way 

'mijiuj 

a  invengao  [tve-  the  invention 

'svuj 

0  teUgravho  the  telegraph 

[t)  'Isgr^fuJ 

o  Paldcio  de  the  Crystal 

Cri/stal  fcrif'  Palace 

'tai] 

0  edificio  [}^^^-  the  edifice 

o  poeta  fpu'ft7!j  the  poet 
opoemafpu'imv]  the  poem 
colhido  [kw        gathered, 

Tn&u]  plucked 

madurecido  ripe 

fmB&ur.f  'siifu] 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  ser  and  the  Adjective. 


39 


a  crianga  f'kri-  the  child 

pequeno  [pl- 

little;  small 

'vsvj 

'kenuj 

a  fazenda  [fv-    the  stuff,  cloth 

grosso  ['grosu] 

thick,  big 

'zendpj 

0  marmelo  fmvr- 

the  quince 

opanno  ['pvnu]  the  cloth 

'mclu] 

0  signal  [si' ndl]  the  sign,  mark 

situ  ado  [situ- 

situated 

«  duvida              the  doubt 

'a&u] 

[v  'tfuviiTv] 

universidade 

the  university 

nao  tern  duvida  is  does  not 

[univ9rsi- 

matter 

'&a&,j] 

airadofai'raduj  airy 

0  2Jdu  [pan] 

the  wood,  stick 

eomprado  [kom-  bought 

'prad'uj 
batitante  [hvf-     enough,  adv. 

a  madeira  [mv- 

'dvjrv] 
de  madeira  or 

the  wood 

of  wood, 

'tvntd]                   rather 

de  pdu 

wooden 

0  negociante         the  merchant 

a  infancia 

the  childhood 

[ndgust  'vntd] 

[I'fi^v] 

0  quarto               the  room 

a  manha 

the  morning 

f'kwartuj 

[ymv  'jivj 

muito                    very,  much 

d^yianha 

to-morrow 

f'mumtuj 

[amv  'jiv] 

ideia  [i'&£}vj      the  idea              j 

escovado  [ifku- 

brushed. 

honito  [hu'nitu]  pretty                  | 

'va&uj 

7.  Exercicio.     Leitura  e  yersao. 

Eu  sou  velho.  Tu  es  muito  novo.  Elle  6  um  homem 
ruim.  Ella  6  uma  mulher  nova.  Essa  penna  6  boa.  Aquelle 
menino  6  doente.  Nos  nao  somos  ricos.  V6s  sois  applicados. 
Elles  sao  pregui9030s.  Ellas  sao  bellas.  Eu  era  teu  amigo. 
Nos  ja  nao  eramos  crian9as.  Era  isso  um  bom  conselho? 
Nao,  foi  mal  pensado.  Eu  fui  tarde  duma  hora.  Fostes  vos 
(fOste  tu,  foi  V^.)  mais  cedo?  Nao  6  Y^.  Ex^  de  opiniao  que 
j4  seja  tarde?  Se  fosse  mais  cedo,  seria  melhor.  Se  as  fructas 
ja  f6rem  colhidas,  6  signal  de  ja  terem  madurecido.  Isto  que 
sera?  Sera  um  vestido  para  a  menina.  Nao  teria  sido  melhor 
escolher  uma  fazenda  que  fosse  mais  duravel?  Se  nao  for 
duravel,  nao  tern  duvida;  o  panno  nao  foi  caro.  Tudo  quanto 
tenho  eomprado  a  esse  negociante,  tem  sido  bom.  A  nossa 
casa  era  muito  alta  e  tinha  quartos  bastante  grandes  e  airados. 

8.  Exercise. 

Translation. 

You  are  a  tall  man.  The  rooms  are  very  large.  He  is 
[a]  Portuguese.  Those  are  big  horses.  It  was  a  grand  idea. 
She  was  a  pretty  little  girl.  He  has  always  been  a  good  boy. 
If  it  be  late,  you  will  not  find  (nao  encontrard)  the  way.  The 
telegraph  is  a  grand  invention.  Be  kind  to  the  boy !  Be  good, 
and  I  will  give  you  the  fine  fruit.  If  the  stick  were  not  so  thick, 


40  Lesson  5. 

it  would  not  be  bad.  If  I  were  you,  I  should  be  diligent. 
The  Crystal  Palace  is  a  grand  edifice.  Camoes  was  a  great 
Portuguese  poet.  His  best  poem  is  *'0s  Lusiadas.^^  He  is  an 
heir.  Is  this  an  apple?  No,  it  is  a  quince.  We  are  no  bad . 
boys.  The  dog  of  my  cousin  is  good  and  useful.  Coitnbra 
is  the  only  university  in  Portugal.  It  is  situated  on  the 
Mondego. 

Conyersatjao. 

Nao  6  elle  um  bonito   rapaz?      Nao    e    tao    bonito    como  (o) 

Carlos. 
E  V^.  tao  velho  como  eu?  Nao  sou  tao  velho  como  V*. 

Ex^ 

Sao  estas  mesas  de  madeira?      Sim,  ellas  sao  de  madeira. 
FCste  bondCso  para   com  (to)      Fui  muito  bondoso  para  com 

o  velho  homem?  elle. 

Esta  Va-  Ea-  doente?  Tenho      sido     doente     desde 

crian9a  (from  childhood). 
0  tempo  ^manha  serd  bom  ou      Sera  bom  tempo  kmanha. 

mau? 
Estao  escovados   os  vestidos?      Estao;  foram  escovados    pela 

manha  (this  morning). 


(0  professor  dira,  apontando  paro  o   objecto,   e   o    alumno 
repetira:) 

0  quadro  preto  ^  largo,  a  tinta  e  preta,  o  banco  6 
alto.  0  papel  e  branco,  o  giz  tambem  6  branco,  o 
tecto  6  branco  tambem.  Assim  o  papel,  o  giz  e  o 
tecto  sao  brancos.  Este  mata-borrao  e  amarello,  esse 
e  vermelho,  aquelle  ^  azul.  —  Como  e  o  quadro 
preto,  0  banco,  a  porta?  Que  cor  tem  a  tinta,  o 
papel?  etc. 


Fifth  Lesson.    Licao  quinta. 

The  Auxiliary  Verb  estar. 

Difference  between  ser  and  estar. 

0  verho  auxiliar  estcir,     BiffereriQa  entre  ser 

e  estar. 

§  38.     The  verb  estar  to  'be  (to  stand,  to  lie,  to 
dwell,  etc.). 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  estar.  41 

Participio  imperfeito:  estando  [i/tvndu], 
Participio  perfeito:  estado  [t/tadu]. 

Indicative. 
Presente. 
Eu  estou  ['tj'tou]  I  am  nds  eslamos  (tftamuf]  we  are 

iu  estas  flf'iitj]  thou  |  vos  estaes  [jftdjf]  you  are 

art  I  elles,  ellas  estam  [{f'Wu]  they 

(elle,  ella)  estd  [tf'ta]  |  ^^^  ^^®  (you)  are. 

he,  she,  it  is  j 

Imperfeito. 

Eu  estava  [jftavvj  I  was,  etc.      nds  estavamos  [if'favvmuf] 
tu  estavas  vos  estaveis  [tf'tavvtf] 

(elle,  ella)  estava  elles,  ellas  estavam. 

Preterifo  perfeito. 
Estive  [if'tivdj  I  was  or  I  have      estivemos  hfti'vemvjj 

[ifti'vc" 


been,  etc.  estivestes  [tfti'vcftg/j 

iiveste  ftfti'v 
esteve  [tf'tevd] 


estiveste  [ifti'vEftd]  estiveram  [tfti'vervu]. 

Y'ii     ~ 


Preterito  perfeito  composto. 
Tenho  estado  I  have  been,  etc. 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito. 
Tinha  estado  I  had  been,  etc. 

Futuro  imperfeito. 
Estarei  I  shall  be,  etc.  estaremos 

estards  estareis 

estard  estarao. 

Futuro  perfeito. 
Terei  estado  I  shall  have  been,  etc. 
Condicional  imperfeito. 
Estarta  I  should  be,  etc.  estariamos 

estarias  estarieis 

estaria  estariam. 

Subjunctive. 
Presente. 
Esteja  ['tf't'esv]  I  be,  etc.  estejamos  hfti' svmuf] 

estejas  estejaes  [}jt}' gaif] 

esteja  estejam  [}J'tv^vu]. 

Imperfeito. 
Estivesse  [tfti  'vesd]  I  were,  etc.      estivessemos 
estivesses  estivesseis 

estivesse  estivessem. 


42 


I 


v.. 

S»4 


Lesson  5. 

Futuro. 

Estiver  [ifti 

'verj 

1 

estiveres 

> 

0) 

estiver 

I 

am  or  happen  to  be 

estivermos 

•^ 
^ 

fe 

or 

estiverdes 

if  I  shall  be. 

estiverem 

Infinitivo  pessoal 

. 

Estar 

^ 

estates 

•^ 

estar 

^  u 

I  may  be 

estarmos 

or 

estardes 

fe 

to  be  (I,  you,  etc.). 

estar  em 

_c 

Imperativo. 

Estd  (tu);  esieja(VK)  be,  estae(v6s);  ndo  estejas  (tu); 
ndo  esteja  (V^.)i  wao  esteja.es  (vds)  do  not  be. 

§  39.     Difference  between  ser  and  estar. 
A.  Ser  expresses: 

1.  Existence  in  a  general  meaning,  and  is  therefore 
called  "Verbo  substantive."  Ex.:  Eu  respiro^  pois  sou 
I  breathe,  consequently  I  am  (existing). 

2.  A  permanent  state  of  existence,  an  essential  and 
lasting  condition,  which  may  be  expressed  by  substan- 
tive or  adjective  attribute  or  an  infinitive.  Ex.:  A 
terra  e  uma  esphera  the  earth  is  a  sphere.  Sou  feliz  I 
am  happy.  E  um  lento  morrer  it  is  a  slow  dying. 
Meu  primo  e  soldado  my  cousin  is  a  soldier.  A  rosa 
e  uma  flor,  e  vernielha  the  rose  is  a  flower,    it   is   red. 

3.  Followed  by  the  past  participle  of  a  transitive 
verb,  ser  is  employed  to  form  the  passive  voice. 
N.B. — The  past  participle  is  submitted  to  inflection  like 
an  adjective:  Elles  for  am  censurados,  they  were  blamed. 

4.  Ser  de  means  to  belong  to;  ex.:  de  quern  6  esta 
casa?  To  whom  does  this  house  belong?  E  de  meu  pas 
it  is  my  father's.  Estes  livros  sdo  do  professor  these 
books  belong  to  the  master. 

^  De  before  the  Infinitivo  pessoal  corresponds  to  the  English 
of  with  the  gerund  preceded  by  a  possessive  adjective:  A  certeza 
de  estarmos  salvos  the  certainty  of  our  being  safe. 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  eslar.  43 

B.  On  the  contrary,  estar  is  used: 

1.  If  the  attribute  appears  merely  accidental  or 
temporary.  Ex. :  A  rosa  estd  murclm  the  rose  is  faded. 
Elle  estd  feliz  he  is  (just  now)  happy.  Estamos  ricos 
we  are  rich — vis.,  we  have  at  this  moment  and  casually 
some  means,  Estou  doente,  estou  mal  de  saiidc  I  am 
ill,  I  am  in  bad  health.  (Eu  sou  doente  would  mean 
that  I  have  bad  health.)  Estou  hom  (de  saude)  I  am 
well;  sou  hom  I  am  good.  Estd  hem  it  is  all  right,  he 
(she)  is  well,  you  are  well;  estd  mal  it  is  bad,  or  he 
(she)  is  ill,  you  are  ill. 

2.  If  a  dwelling  is  to  be  expressed  in  any  place 
that  can  be  left  or  the  object  can  be  removed  from: 
A  criada  estd  na  eozinha  the  servant  is  in  the  kitchen. 
But:  Onde  e  a  cozinha?  Where  is  the  kitchen? 

Bemark.—'S.QrQ  it  may  as  well  be  said:  onde  fica  a 
cozinha?  because  the  place  of  the  kitchen  has  been  appointed 
from  the  beginning  (of.  1^^  Lesson,  Remark  2"<^).  Also:  A 
hoca  flea  debaixo  do  nariz  the  mouth  is  underneath  the  nose. 

3.  While  ser  with  the  past  participle  of  the  verb 
forms  the  passive  voice,  estar  with  the  same  indicates 
the  state  or  condition,  as:  0  negocio  estd  feito  the 
business  is  done,  finished.  A  casa  estd  construid a  the 
house  is  built.  Cf.:  A  casa  e  construida  the  house  is 
building.  Elle  estd  preso  he  is  a  prisoner.  Foi  preso 
he  has  been  imprisoned.  A  conta  estd  paga  the  bill  is 
paid.  (Cf. :  e  pago  de  contado  to  be  paid  in  cash. 
Somos  pagos  aos  meses  we  are  paid  monthly.) 

4.  Very  often  estar  with  another  verb  (in  the  In- 
finitive or  with  the  Present  Participle)  is  employed  as  an 
equivalent  for  to  be  with  the  Present  Participle :  Estou 
a  escrever,  estou  escrevendo  I  am  writing.  Estamos  col- 
leceionando  (or  a  colleccionar)  estampiJhas  ha  dois  annos 
we  have  been  collecting  stamps  these  two  years.  Estar 
a  ferver  to  boil,  to  be  boiling.  Such  a  paraphrase  is 
called:  conjugagao  periphrastica  periphrastical  conju- 
gation. 

5.  There  is  a  certain  number  of  adjectives  that 
are  generally  used  with  estar,  such  as :  attento  attentive, 
contente  content;  satisfeito  satisfied;  cansado  tired;  za7i- 
gado  angry — e.g.,    estamos  aitentos,  satisfeitos,  zangados. 


44 


Lesson  5. 


§  40.  The  verbs  of  the  first  coDJugation  (in  -ar) 
form  the  participles  in  -ando  and  -ado;  those  of  the 
second  (in  -er)  in  -endo  and  -ido;  those  of  the  third 
(in  -ir)  in  -indo  and  -ido. 

Palayras. 


Situado,  sito 

situated 

torto  f'tortuj 

crooked, 

a  foz  [fof] 

tortuous 

a  embocadura 

the  mouth 

estreito  ftf- 

narrow,  tight 

[imhukv- 

(of  a  river) 

'trTsttuJ 

'&urv] 

sen,  sua 

his,   her,  your 

hem  'conhecido 

well  known 

its,  their 

[hekum'siffu] 
apraiaf'pi'aivj 

inteiro  [m- 

entire,  whole 

beach,  (aea)- 

'tr>iru] 

shore 

0  bairro 

quarter  of  a 

halnear  [hahn- 

bathing- .  . . 

[u  'ba.}rru] 

town 

'ar]y  adj. 

destruir 

to  destroy 

populoso  fpupw 

populous 

[diftru  'ir] 

lozu]  * 

0  marquez 

the  marquis 

a  travessa  [tris- 

cross-path 

[mvr'kef] 

'V£8VJ 

0  ministro 

the  minister 

ingreme 

steep 

[md  'niftru] 

['tgrdmd] 

a  caidstrofe 

the  catastrophe 

empedrado 

paved 

[kv  'taftrufd] 

[impd'&ra&u] 

rnandou  [man- 

ordered 

0  terrerw  [td- 

the  ground 

'do] 

*  'rrenuj 

(re)edificar 

to  (re)build 

montanhdso 

mountainous 

[(rr9)iffdfi- 

[mdntv  'yozti] 

a  cdlgada 

paved  (or  steep) 

direito  fdi- 

straight 

[kai'aa&n] 

street 

'rvitu] 

a  escada  [}?• 

stairs 

regular  [rvdau- 

regular 

'ka&v] 

'larj 

a  ribeira  frri- 

terrace  on  the 

atravessar 

to  cross 

'bvfrv] 

bank  of  a 

[vtrvvo  'sar] 

river 

cruzar  [kru- 

to  intersect 

que  [Tcd],  rd.  pr. 

which,  who 

'zar] 

antes  ['vnttfj 

before 

entao  fin'ivu] 

then 

de 

reinar  [rrvt- 

to  reign 

0  norte  ['nort^J 

the  north 

'nar] 

condvaem  ['kon- 

lead 

0  sdcco  f'soku] 

the  sock,  socle 

'duzvi] 

a  ynedalha  [m3- 

the  medallion 

a  Baixa 

the  lower  part 

'tfafiv] 

[n'Uifv] 

of  the   town 

0  bronze  ['brozd]  the  bronze 

(of  Lisbon) 

representar 

to  represent 

a  Alta['aHv] 

the  higher  part 

[rreprDzen'tar 

7 

of  .the  town 

a  cidade  [si- 

the  town 

(of  Lisbon) 

'dfatf?] 

0  terremoto 

the  earthquake 

a  colli n  a  fku- 

the  hill 

[terra  'tnotuj 

'lifiv] 

a  maioria 

the  majority 

apra^af'prasv] 

the  square, 

[mvju'riv] 

market-place 

The  Auxiliary  Verb  estar. 


45 


seven 
as 

'^f^:^  }f''itM„, 

after 

0  peixe  ['py}/}]  the  fish 

yesterday 

0  passeio  [pv-     the  walk 

the  day  before 

'sviuj 

yesterday 

concluir                to  conclude 

the  night 

pcoUu'irJ 

last  night 

0  estudo  [if-        the  study 

the  theatre 

'tu&uj 

a  estada  [}/-       the  abode 

the  concert 

'ta&vj 

ingrato                 ungrateful. 

possible 

[VgratuJ 

sete  [s£t9] 
como  f'komuj 
depois  [dd'poyf] 
hantem  ['ontvi] 
ante-hontem 

[§nti — J 
a  noite  ['no}t9j 
hontem  a  noite 
0  theatro 

[ti  'atruj 
0  concerto 

[ko'sertuj 
possivel  [po- 

'sivsij 


9.  Exercicio,     Leitnra  e  yersao. 

Lisboa. 
A  cidade  de  Lisboa  esta  situada  na  iqz  do  rio  Tejo. 
Ella  foi  edificada  em  sete  collinas.  E  grande  e  populosa.  As 
suas  ruas,  pra9as  e  travessas  sao  empedrados.  Como  o  terreno 
e  muito  montanhoso,  ha  muitas  cal^adas  e  escadas  que  con- 
duzem  da  Baixa  para  a  Alta.  Antes  do  terremoto  do  anno 
de  1755  (mil  sete  centos  e  cincoenta  e  cinco),  as  rnas  na  sua 
maioria  eram  tortas  e  estreitas.  Bairros  inteiros  foram  destrui- 
dos  pelo  terremoto.  Foi  o  marquez  de  Pombal  que,  sendo 
ministro  do  rei  Dom  Jose  I  (Primeiro),  depois  d'esta  catastrofe 
mandou  reedificar  a  capital  em  bairros  regulares  que  sao  atra- 
vassados  e  cruzados  por  ruas  direitas  e  largas.  Na  Pra^a  do 
Commercio  esta  um  monument©  do  rei  Dom  Jose  I  que  entao 
estava  reinando.  No  socco  deste  monumento  ha  uma  medalha 
de  bronze,  representando  o  marquez. 

10.  Exercise. 

Translation. 
Yesterday  I  was^  at  church.  Were  you  at  the  theatre 
yesterday?  No,  sir,  I  was  at  the  theatre  the  day  before 
yesterday;  last  night  I  was  at  the  concert.  Where  is  Charles? 
He  will  be  at  his  uncle's  (em  casa  de  sen  tio).  It  is  possible 
that  he  has  been  ill.  This  hat  is  too  large  to  be  beautiful. 
It  would  have  been  easy  for  Charles  always  to  be  faithful 
to  his  master.  We  have  always  been  very  attentive.  Are 
you  satisfied?  He  was  angry  while  (emquanto)  he  was  writing 
that  letter.  The  water  is  boiling.  The  fish  is  boiled.  Our 
walk  has  been  beautiful.  My  sister  had  already  been  in 
London. 

1  A  fact  belonging  to  the  past   is  commonly  given   by   the 
Preterite  perfeito — e.g.,  in  the  above  sentence  by  estive. 


46  Lesson  6. 

Conversa^ao. 

0  meu  nome  6  Fulano^.    Qual      0  meu  nome  e  Sicrano*. 

e  o  seu?  — 
Eu    sou    alemao,     mas    estive      Eu    sou    portugu^s    e    tenho 
por    muito  tempo   em  Por-  estado  na  Alemanhaha  cinco 

tugal.     E  o  senhor?  —  annos  ^favskca.  (these  oyears). 

Tern     sempre     sido     alumno      Nao,    senhor,    estive  primeiro 
d'esta  escola?  (first)  numinternato  (board- 

ing-house) de  Berlim.  — 
Que  tempo  estara  ainda  aqui?      Estarei     ate     estiverem    con- 

cluidos  OS  mens  estudos. 
Esta    satisfeito    com     a     sua      Estou,  sim,  senhor.     Eu  seria 
estada  aqui?  um     ingrato,      se     nao     o 

estivesse;   pois  e  muito  bo- 
nito  aqui. 
Sempre  tem  estado  com  saiide      Nem  (not)  sempre;  mas  agora 
emquanto  ca  esta?  ^  estou  bem  e    dou-me   bem 

(agree)  com  o  clima. 


Sixth  Lesson.    Li(?ao  sexta. 

The  Auxiliary  Verb  haver  to   have,   to  be 
(left),  to  take  place,  to  get,  to  obtain,  etc. 

§  41.  As  for  to  be,  there  are  also  for  to  have 
two  correspondiog  verbs  in  Portuguese :  ter  (see  3*^  Lesson) 
and  haver.  The  latter,  less  common  in  the  meaning 
to  have  than  the  former,  is  especially  employed 

1.  As  a  true  auxiliary  verb  to  form  the  simple 
Future  (Indicative)  and  Conditional  tenses  of  any  verb, 
whereby  it  drops  the  h(av)  and  hangs  its  personal 
endings  on  the  Infinitive  of  the  verb  (see  §§  33, 
34,  38). 

2.  as  an  independent  verb  in  its  meaning  to  he 
(existing  or  at  hand)— -e.g.,  ha  there  is,  there  are  (cf. 
1^^  Lesson).  While  so  employed,  it  is  impersonal  and 
consequently  used  only  in  the  third  person  singular 
and  without  a  pronoun: 

1  The  Portuguese  indicates  by  FuJano  (and  in  the  2"^!  place 
Sicrano)  a  person  (or  persons)  unknown  or  not  to  be  named  or,  as 
meant  here,  a  name  to  be  substituted  by  the  right  one. 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  haver.  47 

3.  To  form  the  compound  Future  (Indicative)  and 
Conditional  tenses:  eu  hei  or  havia  de  comprar  I  shall 
(should)  buy.  Here  it  may  be  used  with  the  pronoun 
and  must  be  followed  by  de.  (Modern  writers  join 
this  preposition  to  the  verb  by  a  hyphen:  hei-de 
comprar). 

4.  In  the  meaning  of  to  obtain:  Elle  houve  o  per- 
ddo  do  rei  he  obtained  the  King's  pardon.  Havendo  o 
premio  da  nossa  canceira  obtaining  the  reward  of  our  toil. 

§  42.     Haver. 

Participio  presente:  havendo. 
Participio  perfeito:  havido, 

Indicativo. 
Presente. 
Eu  hei  [vi]  I  have  nds  h(av)emos  [(vv)emuf]  wa 

tu  has  [afj  you  have  have 

elle  ha  [a]  he  has  v6s  h(av)eis  [(Tsv)vif]  you  have 

ha  there  is  elles  hao  [vu]  they  have. 

Imperfeito. 
Eu  havia  [v'viv]  I  had  nds  haviamos  [v'vivmuj]   we 

tu  havias  you  had  had 

elle  havia  he   had  v6s  havieis  [v'vivij]  you  had 

havia  there  was  elles  haviam  they  had. 

Preterito  perfeito. 
Houve^  ['ovd]  I  had  houvemos  [o'vsmKJ]  we  had 

houveste  [o'veftd]  you  had  houvestes  [o'veftij]  you  had 

houve  hQ  had,  there  was  houveram  [o'vervu]  they  had. 

Preterito  perfeito  composto. 
Tern  havido  there  has  been. 

Mavi-que-perfeito. 
Tinha  havido  there  had  been. 

Future  imperfeito. 
Haver ei  I  shall  have,  etc.  haveremos  we  shall  have,  etc. 

haverds  havereis 

haverd  (there  will  be  or  is      haverdo. 
to  be) 


1  As  this  verb,  with  the  exception  of  the  Present  and  Im- 
perfect, is  rarely  employed  personally,  we  leave  the  pronoun  aside 
and  also  the  uncommon  forms  in  the  following  tenses. 


48  Lesson  6, 

Futuro  lierfeilo. 
Terd  kavido  there  will  be  had,  etc. 

Condicional  imperfeito. 
Haver ia  there  would  be. 

Condicional  perfeito. 
Teria  havido  there  would  have  been. 

Subjunctivo. 
Present  e. 
Haja  [ajv]  that  I  have,  etc. 
hajas 

haja  that  there  he 
hajamos  fv'^muf]  that  we  have 
hajaes  /V'ja?//  that  you  have 
hajam  that  they  have. 

Imperfeito. 
I  Houvesse  [o'vssd]  if  I  had  /  houvessemos  [o'vesdmuf] 

I  houvesses  if  you  had  2o  <  houvesseis  [o'v€8d}J] 

\  houvesse  if  there  were  \  houvessem 

Futuro. 
houver  [o'ver]  if  or  whenever  I  shall  have 
houveres 
houver  if  or  whenever  there  will  he 

hauvermos 

houverdes 

houverem. 

Imperative. 

Haja  let   there   be.     (All   other   imperative  forms  are 

unusual.) 

Jnfinito  pessoal. 
Haver,    haveres,    haver^    havermos,    haverdes^    haverem 

(that)  I,  you,  he,  etc.,  may  have. 

In  the  same  manner  is  conjugated  the  compound 
verb  rehaver  to  have  or  get  back ;  but  this  verb  is  only 
used  in  forms  which  have  the  -v-  (rehavendOj  rehavido, 
rehavia,  rehouve,  etc.) 


I, 

o 

03 


§  43.  There  are  still  other  (compound)  forms, 
Buch  as:  tenha  havido j  tivesse  havido,  ter  (and  tendo) 
havidOy  which  we   do  not  write  at  large,  as  they  are 


The  Auxiliary  Verb  haver.  '  49 

easily  formed  by  themselves  and  rarely  employed.  The 
same  is  to  be  said  for  the  other  auxiliary  verbs,  already 
mentioned.  The  omitted  tenses  may  easily  be  sub- 
stituted. 

§  44.  Yet  there  is  still  a  tense  quite  peculiar 
to  the  Portuguese  language,  which  we  have  not  yet 
spoken  of,  because  we  wanted  to  mention  it  apart:  it  is 
the  Simple  Pluperfect  (mais-qiie-perfeito  simples).  It  is 
formed  from  the  2"^  person  sing,  of  the  Perfect  by 
hanging  the  ending  -ste  into  -ra  (houvesie:  Jiouvera; 
civeste;  tivera;  foste:  for  a;  estiveste:  esiivera): 


thouvera,  tivera 
houveras,  tiveras 
Jiouvera,  tivera 
houveramos,  tivhamos 
houvereis,  tivereis 
houveram,  tiveram 


o  fora,  estivera 

®  foras,  estiveras 

"^  fora,  estivera 

■^  foramos,  estiveramos 

^  foreis,  estivereis 

^  foram,  estiviram 


§  45.  The  student  may  at  the  same  time  be 
conscious  that  from  the  same  person  (2^^  pers.  sing, 
perf.)  there  are  formed  two  other  tenses :  l^J".  the  Im- 
perfect of  the  Subjunctive,  by  changing  the  ending 
-ste  into  -sse.,  and  2^^.  the  future  of  the  same  mood, 
by  changing  -ste  into  -V  (cf.  the  auxiliary  verbs  already 
mentioned).  This  derivation  is  the  same  in  any  regular 
or  irregular  verb. 

§  46.  As  for  the  employment  of  the  Compound 
Future  and  Conditional  tenses^  there  is  some  Httle 
difference  with  the  simple  tense.  Ilei-de  fazer  expresses 
not  only  that  something  will  be  done  by  me,  but  that 
I  intend  or  am  willing  to  do  it.  0  que  elle  havia-de 
faser  corresponds  to :  what  he  ought  to  do.  Nos  Iia- 
viamos-de  ser  mais  economicos  we  ought  to  be  more 
economical.  Nos  seriamos  mais  economicos  we  should 
be  more  economical. 

§  47.  Haver  de^  to  be  obliged  to,  may  also  be 
used  in  other  forms  than  Present  and  Imperfect  tenses: 
Ilouve-de  ser  cortes  he  had  to  be  polite.  Se  ndo  houvesse- 
de  considerar  isso  if  that  were  not  to  be  considered.  Se 
houver('inos)-de  luctar  com  difficuldadas  if  there  are  diffi- 
culties to  be  fought  with,  or  if  we  are  obliged  to  fight 
against  difficulties.  Hade  haver  tempo p^ara  tudo  there 
must  be  time  for  everything. 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  * 


50 


Lesson  6. 


§  48.  In  some  tenses  the  3^^^  person  sing,  of  haver 
indicates  a  time  past  and  corresponds  to  these  .  .  ., 
since  or  ago:  ha  (havia,  haverd,  haveria)  quinze  (15) 
dias  a  fortnight  since  or  ago;  haverd  muito  tempo  it 
will  be  long  since.  Ha  tres  horas  que  estamos  esperando 
or  a  espera  we  have  been  waiting  these  three  hours. 

§  49.  Ha  {houve,  haverd,  etc.)  quem,  followed  by 
a  verb  in  the  S'"^  person  and  in  the  Indicative  or  Sub- 
junctive mood,  means  there  is  a  person  or  there  are 
persons  who  .  .  .—e.g.  Ha  quem  diz  (or  diga)  =  it  is 
said,  somebody  says. 

Que  ha?  =  what  is  the  matter?  I^do  ha  nada  there 
is  nothing  the  matter. 

§  50.  Haver  por  hem  means  to  think  proper.  It 
is  scarcely  used  but  by  or  of  the  King  or  the  govern- 
ment. Haver  por  mal  is  rarely  used  and  means:  to 
take  in  ill  part. 

§  51.  The  reader  will  already  have  noticed  that 
in  the  Imperative  mood  the  second  person  sing,  when 
employed  affirmatively  is  derived  from  the  same  person 
of  the  Present  tense  Indicative  by  losing  the  s;  and 
from  the  Present  Subjunctive,  when  employed  nega- 
tively;—e.g.,  estd!  ndo  estejas! , 

Yet  there  are  still  for  the  auxiliary  verbs  some 
little  irregularities  to  be  noticed:  1.  tens  becomes  after 
losing  the  s:  tern,  because  a  verbal  form  is  not  al- 
lowed to  end  in  n;  2.  es  is  changed  into  se;  3.  the 
Imperative  of  haver  is  not  used  in  the  2°*^  pers.  sing. 
Bemarli.  Addressing  a  plurality  of  persons,  the  Imper- 
rative  form  is  the  3^^^  person  plur.  pres.  subj. :  tenham,  sejam, 
estejam  (hajam  not  to  be  used).  There  is  indeed  an  Impera- 
tive of  the  2°d  person  plur.,  but  it  is  antiquated  and  rarely 
used  by  modern  writers.  The  reader  will  find  it  in  the 
general  conjugation-table. 


Palavras, 

Traduzir 

to  render 

hem  [bvf] 

well  (very) 

[trvd'u'zirj 

pouco(s) 

little  (few) 

outro(s)  ianioCa) 

as  much  (as 

I'-poku] 

many) 

uma  vez  [oefj 

onee 

ultimo  I'uUimu] 

last 

outra  vez 

another  time 

O   U80    ['UZUJ 

the  use,  the 

ds  vezes  [&$- 

sometimes 

employment 

'veztfj 
fazer  [fv'zer] 

a  differ enga 

the  diiference 

to  make,  to 

[difo'resv] 

do 

The  Auxiliary  Verb  haver. 


51 


a  lingua 
'    ['ligwKj 
a  disiinguo 

[diftfsvuj 
fazer  distinguo 

a  pacie'Acia  [jin- 

aprender 

[epren  'derj 
depressa  [d:?- 

'presv] 
a  semana  [sj- 

'mvnv] 
sabemos 
covjuyar 

[ko^u'gar] 
a  interrupguo 

[U9rrup's§uJ 
um  dia  santo 
as  ferias 

I'fcn^f] 
a  (loenga 

jdii'tsv] 
cedo  f'seouj 
rencer  [ve'serj 
vencido 


the  language 

distinction 

to    distinguish. 

discern 
the  patience 

to  learn 

quickly 

the  week 

we  know 
to  conjugate 

tlie  interrup- 
tion 
a  saint's  day 
the  holidays 

the  illness 

soon 

to  overcome 

p.  p.   of  veneer 

11.  Exercicio. 


a  eoragem 

[ku  'rajinj 
0  dnimo 

[  'Tsnimu] 
appUcado 

[epU'ka&uJ 
em  haixo' 

[ihaifu] 
0  erro  f'erni] 

0  dinheiro 
[di'jinrruj 

a  Inglaterra 
[ilv  'terrv] 

passear 
[pes}  'ar] 

ir  a  casa 

em  casa 

de  duas  (horas) 

so  [soj  \ 

unico  I 

a  grammdtica 

fgre  'mntiJcvJ 
desde  [dezifj] 
0  principno 

[pri'sipju] 

Loitura  o  versao, 


the  courage 

diligent 

downstairs 

the  mistake. 

error 
the  money 

England 

to  walk 

to  go  home 
at  home 
at  2  o'clock 
already 

only 

the  grammar 

from 

the    beginning. 


Os  verlos  auxiliares. 

Em  portnguCs  ha  dois  verbos  auxiliares  para  traduzir  o 
veibo  ingles  to  have,  e  outros  tantos,  para  traduzir  to  he.  Os 
primeiros  sao  ter  e  haver;  os  liltimos  ser  e  estar.  No  uso 
d'elles  (in  their  use)  ha  alguma,  diiferen^a.  As  vezes  essa  diffe- 
renQa  e  bem  pouca,  outras  vezes  nao  ha  nenhuma.  Ha  quern 
considera  uma  das  maiores  difficuldades  da  lingua  portuguesa 
o  fazer  distincuo  dos  verbos  ser  e  estar.  Se  nao  houvesse 
maior  difficuldade,  ou  se  essa  fosse  a  linica,  o  estudo  da  lingua 
nuo  seria  difficil.  Mas  haja  paciencia,  que  havemos-de  aprender 
portugu^B  bem  depressa.  Ha  poucas  semanas  que  o  (it)  esta- 
mos  estudando  o  ja  sabemos  conjugar  os  verbos  auxiliares. 
Estes  verbos,  sendo  os  mais  (most)  irregulares,  sao  os  mais 
difficeis.  Nao  havendo  interrup^oes,  como  ja  as  houve  com 
dias  Santos  e  ferias,  e  se  nao  houver  doen^as,  cedo  hao-de  ser 
vencidas  as  primeiras  difficuldades.  Tenham  pois  animo  e 
sejam  applicados. 

12.  Exercicio. 
Translation. 

There  is  a  man  downstairs.  There  are  two  men  down- 
stairs.    There  is  to  be  a  saint's  day  this  week.     There  must 

4* 


62  Lesson  7. 

be  some  mistake.  There  being  no  one  there,  I  went  (see 
§  36,  note)  away.  Is  there  much  money  in  England?  Yes, 
there  is  (transl. :  there  is,  yes,  sir).  Will  there  be  a  concert 
to-night?  No,  there  has  been  a  concert  last  night.  What's 
the  matter?  There's  nothing  the  matter.  I  have  been  walk- 
ing these  two  hours.  I  must  go  home.  We  all  (todos)  intend 
to  go  home  (see  §  46),  we  must  (see  p.  34,  Kemark)  be  at 
home  at  two  o'clock.  Is  it  long  since  you  have  been  learning 
Portuguese?  No,  it  is  only  a  few  weeks.  And  there  has 
been  some  interruption  by  holidays.  Have  you  had  a  gram- 
mar?    Now  we  have,   but  we  had  not  from   the  beginning. 

Conyersa^ao. 

Que  tem  o  alemao?  0   alemao   tern  uma  casa  na 

rua  d'El-rei. 
Ha  ali  grandes  casas?  .  Ha,   sim,   senhor;    e   a  d'elle 

(his)  e  uma  das  maiores. 
Houveterremoto  em  Portugal?      Houve,     mas    ja    ha    alguns 

mezes. 
Tem  havido  terremotos  mais      Tem.     0  (that)  do  anno  1755 
vezes  ?  (mil  sete  cento^  e  cincoenta 

e  cinco)  foi  o  maior. 
Nao     foi    o     criado    comprar      Nao  havia  peixe  nomercado; 
peixe  no  mercado?  como  o  tempo  estiv^ra  man, 

nao  tinha  havido  quem  fosse 

(see  p.  36,  footnote)  pescar 

(to  fish). 


Seventh  Lesson.    Li?ao  setima. 

Employment  and  Con<3ord  of  Tenses. 

Emprego  e  concordancia  de  tempos, 

§  52.  As  we  have  seen,  there  are  two  forms  of 
the  Infinitive:  the  impersonal  one  corresponds  in  its 
employment  to  the  English  form;  the  personal  Infini- 
tive is  a  peculiarity  of  the  Portuguese  language  and 
characteristic  as  for  the  personal  terminations  added  to 
the  simple  form.  It  is  employed  after  a  preposition. 
(N.B. — In  the  regular  verbs  it  is  consonant  to  the  Sub- 
junctive Future.)    Ex.: 

Faze  dUigencia  para  seres  horn. 

Take  pains  to  be  good. 


Employment  and  Concord  of  Tenses.  53 

Instead  of  Fassci  sem  ser  vistOj  you  may  say: 
Passei  sem  me  verem  I  passed  without  being  seen  (lit.: 
without  their  seeing  me). 

Depots  de  (nos)  estarmos  seniados,  conversdmos. 
After  having  sat  down,  we  talked. 

§  53.  While  the  Present  has  only  one  tense,  the 
Past  is  divided  into  two,  or — taking  also  the  Pluperfect 
—into  three  simple  tenses: 

A.  The  Preterito  imperfeito  is  used: 

(a)  In  descriptions  of  character,  opinion,  state,  man- 
ners and  customs,  representing  an  action  as  often  re- 
peated ;  it  embraces  a  space  of  time  or  a  state  already 
existing  and  still  continuing  as  for  the  time  spoken  of: 
elle  tinha  uma  casa;  o  homem  era  pohre;  Tiavia  rnido 
(noise);  havia  reunido  todos  os  sahhados,  an  assembly 
took  place  every  Saturday.  Passdvamos  o  vcrno  no  canijw 
we  used  to  pass  the  summer  in  the  country. 

(b)  If  two  actions  are  represented  as  being  per- 
formed at,  or  as  lasting,  the  same  time,  as: 

fJhovia  emqtianto  eu  passeava. 

It  was  raining  while  I  took  a  walk. 

(As^  for  an  action  being  interrupted  by  another, 
see  B,  (c)). 

(c)  The  Imperfect  is  used  for  all  actions  that  do 
not  immediately  belong  to  the  relation,  but  are  added 
by  the  speaker  in  order  to  express  accessory  circum- 
stances or  his  own  meaning,  as: 

FMes  foram  a  um  siiio  que  ficavq  muiio  longe. 
They  went  to  a  place  that  was  very  far  off. 
A  lebre,  coma  corria  muito,  fioti-se  nas  pernas. 
The  hare,  being  a  good  runner,  trusted  to  its  legs. 

liemarh.  As  in  English,  the  Imperfect  may  often  be 
substituted  by  the  first  Participle— e.g.,  A  lebre,  sendo  horn 
corredor  .  .  . 

B.  The  Preterito  i^rfeito  or  definido  is  used  to  ex- 
press actions  following  one  another.  It  is  the  historical 
tense,  being  peculiarly  appropriated  to  the  narrative 
style  and  therefore  used: 


54  Lesson  7. 

(a)  To  mark  a  (point  of)  time  positively  fixed,  en- 
tirely elapsed  relatively  to  the  present  or  the  time 
spoken  of: 

0  cdo  foi  morto  the  dog  was  killed. 

Na  batalha  de  Aljuharrota  os  Portugueses  venceram  os 

castelhanos. 
In  the  battle  of  Aljuharrota  the  Portuguese  vanquished 

the  Castilians. 

(b)  To  mark  the  beginning  of  an  action  or  a  state  : 

Eu  tive  (uma)  carta  I  got  a  letter.  i 

Elle  teve  medo  he  became  frightened 

Houve  gritaria  there  was  a  clamour.  ; 

(c)  If   one   action  is   interrupted  by   another,    the    ■ 
Imperfect  denotes  the  action  that  was  going  on  when 
the  other  began ;  the  latter  requiring  the  Freterito  per- 
feitOf  as: 

JEmquarito  havia  trovoada,  elle  entrou  em  casa. 
Whilst  there  was  a  thunderstorm,  he  entered  the  house. 

(d)  Very  often  the  Freterito  is  employed  when  in 
English  the  compound  Perfect  is  used,  as: 

Jd  jantou?    Have  you  already  dined  (or  had  dinner)? 
Tive  uma  cJiicara  de  chd  I  have  had  a  cup  of  tea. 
Comprdwos  cafe  we  have  bought  coffee. 

The  compound  Perfect  is,  indeed,  always  rendered  \ 
by  the  simple  Preterite,  and  not  by  the  compound,  j 
when  the  action  of  the  verb  is  altogether  finished  in  1 
the  past  and  has  nothing  to  do  with  the  present  time. 

Compare:  Gomprdmos  assucar  we  have  bought  sugar, 
and:  Temos  sempre  comprado  assucar  ao  ne- 
gociante,  nosso  vizinho. 

C.  Another  tense  peculiar  to  the  Portuguese  is 
the  Simple  Pluperfect  (Mais-que-perfelto  simples)  already  ! 
spoken  of  in  §  44.  There  is  no  difficulty  whatever  in 
its  use.  It  may  anywhere  be  substituted  by  the  com- 
pound form;  yet,  as  the  Portuguese  likes  to  employ 
simple  forms,  the  student  will  do  well  in  equally  prac- 
tising the  simple  Mals-que-perfeito, 

§  54.  The  first  participle  or  gerund  (Farticipio 
Imperfeito  or  gerundlo)  does  not  essentially  diifer  in  its 


Employment  and  Concord  of  Tenses.  55 

use  fropa  the  English ;  it  is  used  to  express  some  reason 
or  cause,  condition  or  manner.  Yet  it  must  not  be 
employed  after  certain  prepositions  which  in  EngUsh 
require  the  gerund,  while  in  Portuguese  the  Infinitive 
or  the  i^ast  Participle  is  used  (cf.  §  52,  examples). 

§  bo.  The  Future  of  the  Subjunctive  Mood,  also 
a  form  connected  solely  with  the  Portuguese  language, 
is  used  to  express  some  uncertain  future  event.  It  is 
nearly  exclusively  employed  after  the  conjunctions  se 
if,  quanct?  when,  eniqiianto  while,  as  long  as.     Ex.: 

Quando  tivermos  dinheiro,  compraremos  essa  casa. 
When  we  shall  have  money,  we  shall  buy  that  house. 
Se  tftiver  em  casa,  a  porta  esiard  aherta. 
If  he  is  (or  be)  at  home,  the  door  will  be  open. 
Emquanto  ndo  fizerem  diligencia,   nao  serdo  succedidos. 
As  'long    as    they    do    not    take  pains,    they    will    not 
sicceed. 
J 
§  56.     The  Conditional  is  employed  as  in  EngHsh. 
Examples : 

Se  tivesse  dinheiro,  compraria  (or  cowprava)  essa  casa. 

If  I  had  money,  I  should  buy  that  house. 

Ainda  que  fosse  rico,  nuo  a  compraria  (or  ndo  a  com- 

prava). 
Even  if  I  were  rich,  I  should  not  buy  it. 
Se  ndo  tivesse  sido  tdo  tarde,  o  liomem  ndo  teria  (or  ndo 

tinha)  estado  cm  casa. 
If  it  had  not  been   so  late,   the   man  would   not   have 

been  at  home. 

So  we  employ  in  the  subordinate  sentence  the 
Imperfect  (or  Pluperfect)  of  the  Conjunctive,  and  in  the 
principal  sentence  the  first  (or  second)  Conditional. 
Instead  of  the  Conditional  the  Portuguese  prefers  to 
employ  the  Imperfect  (and  Pluperfect)  of  the  Indicative 
(see  Ex.). 

§  57.  The  Subjunctive^  being  the  mood  of  un- 
certainty, it  is  used: 

(a)  After  those  verbs  expressing  a  will,  desire,  hope, 
command,    expectation,   aspiration,  merit.     (N.B.— The 

1  The  rules  on  the  subjunctive  mood  need  be  only  read  over 
here  and  can  be  learned  thoroughly  later  on. 


56  Lesson  7. 

subordinate    sentence   is   introduced     by   the   conjunc- 
lion  que^): 

Quero  (mandn^  desejo,  espcro)  que  sejam  modestos. 
I  want  (order,  desire,  trust)  you  to  be  mod^t. 
Merecia  que  fcsse^^attendido.  t 

He  would  deserve  to  b^  attended  to.  ^ 

(b)  After  the  verbs  expressing  thought,  speech, 
beUef,  employed  in  the  negative  or  interrogative,  and 
the  subordinate  sentence  containing  an  unce/tainty: 

Eu  ndo  digo  que  seja  assim.  \ 

I  do  not  say  that  it  is  so.  /* 
Julga  que  elle  tenha  comprehendido  ? 

Do  you  think  he  will  have  understood?  ,' 

(c)  After  verbs  expressing  some  emotion  (joy,  fear, 
fright,  etc.): 

Beceio  que  fido  esteja  em  casa.  [ 

I  fear  he  will  not  be  at  home.  p 

Estimei  que  tivesse  vindo. 
I  was  glad  he  had  come. 

(d)  After  duvidar  to  doubt,  ter  duvida  to  have  some 
doubts,  negar  to  deny,  impedir^  estorvar  to  hinder, 
ignorar  to  ignore,  because  of  the  negation  or  uncer- 
tainty  already  included  in  the  verb: 

Buvido  que  ienhas  chegado  a  tempo. 
I  doubt  that  you  have  arrived  in  time. 
Ndo  tenhas  duvida  que  eu  seja  teu  amigo. 
Don't  have  any  doubt  that  I  am  your  friend. 
0  pae  ignordra  que  o  filho  estivesse  doente. 
The  father  did  not  know  that  his  son  was  ill, 

§  58.  With  respect  to  the  concordance,  it  is  to 
be  noticed  that,  as  in  English,  to  a  main  time  (Fre- 
sente^  Freterito  [perfeito  e  compostoj,  and  Futuro  imperf. 
indie.)  in  a  principal  sentence  corresponds  a  main  time 
in  the  accessory  clause*;  while  to  a  secondary  time  in 


*  This  conjunction  may  not  be  omitted  so  easily  as  in  English; 
there  are  only  a  few  verhs  which  dispense  with  it— e.g.,  Fedir 
to  ask,  beg:  -pego  (que)  esteja  ds  duas  horas  I  beg  you  will  be 
there  at  2  o'clock;  esperar  to  hope:  esperamon  (que)  sejam  pan- 
tuaes  we  hope  you  (or  they)  will  be  punctual. 


Employment  and  Concord  of  Tenses. 


57 


the  priucipal  ^sentence  corresponds  a  secondary  time  in 
the  accessory  clause,  as: 

Mando  ^ue  escreva  I  oirder  him  to  write. 

Julgdra  que  tivesse  escripto  I  thought  he  had  written 


Palayras. 


A  empresa 
[I'prezvJ 
dar  [dar] 
deu  fdeuj 


the  enterprise 


0  give 


^3rd  pers.  pret, 
of  dar)  gave 
0  lucro  f'lukruj  the  gain 
dez  fdef]  ten 

0  accionista        /the shareholder 
[astu  'niftv] 


cO  think 
t\e  position 

to  ^^eem 

to  v]ealise 

to  ameliorate 

the  ambition 


pensar  [pe'sarj 
a  posigao 

fpuzi  'svuj 
parecer 

[pvrQ'serJ 
realisar 

[rivli  'zarj 
melhorar 

[mifiu'rar] 
a  amhigao 

[vmhi'svu] 
ensinar  [isi'nar]  to  teach 
morar  [mu'rarj  to  dwell,  live 
curioso  curious 

[kuri'ozuj 
a  regido  the  region 

[rd^y'vu] 
0  temporal  the  storm 

[tempu  'raij 
durar  fdu'rarj  to  last 
causarfkau'zarj  to  cause 
0  damno  I 

0  estrago  (  ^^®  <iamage 

[if'traguj      ) 
estar  a  espera     to  expect,  to 

[ifperv]  wait 

acahar [vku'har]  io  finish,  ter- 
minate 
enorme  enormous 

[i'norm9] 
avaliar  to  appraise 

[isvvli'ar] 
0  combdio  the  train 

['kom'bo}uj 


0  atraso 

fn  'trazuj 
0  relSgio 

fryiDgtuJ 
adiantado 

[v&ivn  'ta^uj 
ouga !  f'osr?J, 
a  noticia 

[nu'tistv] 
triste  ['triftd] 
esorever 

fffkrd  'verj 
outra  vez 

0  prazer 

[prv  'zer] 
a  bondade 

[bon  'da&d] 
que  horas  sdo? 

i  uma  hora 
i  hora  e  meia 

sao  duas 

(horas) 
sao  horas 
dar  horas 
estar  enganado 

[Igv  'na&uj 
abwrecido 

[vburr9  'si&uj 
a  quietagao 

[kistv'svu] 
0  remSdio 

[rd  'me&iuj 
gasto  ['gaftuj 
0  caso  i'kazuj 
tardar 
levar  [hvar] 

0  descango 
[dif'kvsuj 

se  Bens  quizer 
fki'zerj 


the  delay 

the  watch 

fast,  advanced 

hark! 
the  news 

sad 

to  write 

another  time, 

once  more 
the  pleasure 

the  kindness, 

goodness 
what  o'clock  is 
.  it? 

it  is  one  o'clock 
it  is  half  past 

on§ 
it  is  two 

o'clock 
it  is  time 
to  strike 
to  be  mistaken 

tedious,  bored 

the  quiescence 

the  remedy 

worn 
the  case 
to  be  long 
to  take  along 

or  away 
the  rest 

God  willing. 


58  Lesson  7. 

13.  Exercicio.     Leitura  c  Tersj|o. 

Esta  empresa  tern  dado  bom  lucre;  dea  dez  por  cento 
aos  accionistas  no  anno  passado.  Temos  pensado  muito  na 
sua  posi9ao  que  ^o  primeiro  momento  nos  parecia  (Imp.  of 
parecer)  impossivel  a  realisar,  mas  que  cedo  iavemos-de  me- 
Ihorar.  Ha  muito  tempo  que  tem  sido  a  min|:ia  ambicjao  saber 
bem  a  lingua  portuguesa.  Se  tivesse  quern  ji'a  (it  to  me)  en- 
sinasse,  havia-de  estudar  essa  bella  lingua.  Desde  que  ca 
more  (1st  pers.  pres.  of  morar)  sempre  tenho  tide  bons  vizinhos. 
E   curioso   seres  tu   que  tenha  essa  ideia.     Na  nossa  regiao, 

0  temporal,  que  tem  durado  uns  poucos  de  (tiveral)  dias,  estd 
causando  enorme  damno.  Estamos  i,  espera  que  elle  acabe 
para  avaliarmos  o  estrago  que  tiver  feito.  Ji  chegou  o  com* 
boio?  Ainda  nao;  tera  atraso;  ja  sac  seis  horas  no  meu  relo- 
gio.  Talvez  esteja  adiantado  o  seu  relogio.  "^lao  esta.  Ouga! 
Estao  a  dar  as  seis. 

14.  Exercise. 

Translation. 

What  have  you  there?  It  is  a  hotter.  Is  it  for  me 
(mim)7  No,  it  is  not.  It  is  for  your  neighbour  who  is  there 
at  the  door.  Was  there  no  letter  for  me?    If  there  had  been, 

1  should  have  given  it  you^  It  is  a  long  time  that  I  have  not 
had  any  news  from  my  friend.  I  am  very  sad.  If  there  be 
no  letter  to-morrow,  I  shall  write  (comp.  Future)  again.  It 
is  long  since  we  had  the  pleasure  of  seeing  (Infinitive) 
you  (a  V^-  Ex^).  Have  the  kindness  to  tell  me  (de 
me  dizer)  what  o'clock  it  is.  It  is  two  o'clock.  No,  I  am 
mistaken,  it  is  half  past  one.    It  is  time  for  me  to  go  home. 

ConversaQao. 

Onde  e  {or  fica)  a  sua  casa?  E  {or  fica)  ali  na  rua  vizinha. 

Ha   muito   tempo    que   mora  Tenho   la    morado   ha  qiiatro 

n'ella?  ou  cinco  annos. 

Onde  esteve  V^-  Ex*-  no  anno  Estive  n'uma  praia  balnear. 

passado? 

Houve  la  muito  movimento?  Nao  houve;  se  houvesse,  nao 

teria  la  ido. 

Mas  nao  havendo  movimento,  Nao  6.    A  quieta^ao  6  e  sempre 

sera  {or  ha-de  sfir)  aborre-  tem  sido  o  melhor  remedio 

cido?  para  os  nervos  gastos. 


»    The  complementary  pronouns  follow  here  immediately  the 
pronoun  subject:  eu  Ih'a  teria  dado. 


Exercises  on  the  Auxiliarv  V'erbs. 


59 


Ficando  conherido  aquella 
praia,  nao  tardera  que  haja 
(or  nao  tardera  haver)  mais 
gente. 

ya.  Ex*-  teve  bon'  resultado 
da  sua  estada  all? 


Pode  ser  (it  mat;  he)  que  as- 
sim  seja;  nesse  caso  nao 
hei-de    la     ir     outra     vez. 

Tive.  E  este  anno  hei-de  le- 
var  a  minha  familia,  para 
todos  nos  havermos  bom 
descanQo,  se  Deus  quizer. 


Eighth  Lesson.    Li^ao  oitava. 

Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verbs. 


i                Palayras. 

0  quintal 
[ulcln'tai] 

the  garden 

a  amendoeira 

the  almond-tree 

s 

[vmendu'vir^J 

0  arbusto 

the  shrub,  bush 

florescia 

bloomed, 

[uer'buftuj 

) 

[flurtf'siuj 

flourished 

0  carvalho 

thq  oak-tree 

a  neve  [c  'nev^J 

the  snow,  frost 

[uTcvr  'vnfiu] 

crestar  [hriftar] 

to  blast 

a  faia  [v  'fa}v]  the  beech-tree 

crestou-lhe 

blasted  it 

a  tilia  [b  'tiliv] 
0  olmofu'oimuj 

the  linden 

[krif'ton,] 

0  castanheiro 

the  chestnut- 

0  olmeiro 

the  elm- tree 

t(kiiftv'r)viru] 

tree 

[uoi'mviruj 

a  castanha 

the  chestnut 

0  salgueiro 

the  willow 

[vlvf'tvyv] 

[usal' gviru] 

Todos  OS  Santos 

All  Saints 

0  platano 

the  plane-tree 

f'tO&UZHf- 

[u  'pUtvnuJ 

'svntufj 

derribaram-no 

knocked  it 

0  magusto 

embers  to  roast 

fd^rn- 

down 

[mv  'guftuj 

chestnuts  in: 

'barvunuj 

the  feast   of 

amaUa[v'matu] 

the  wood 

chestnuts  on 

0  grupo 

the  group 

All  Saints 

[u'grupu] 

assado  [v'sa&o] 
comer  [ku  'mer] 

roasted 

a  drvore  friicti- 

the  fruit-tree 

to  eat 

fera  [fru- 

gostar  [guf'tHr]  to  like 

'tifdra] 

0  damasco 

the  apricot 

a  cerejeira 

the  cherry-tree 

[u&a'mafkuj 

[esdvi  '^BirvJ 

a  tdmara 

the  date 

saboroso 

savoury 

[n  'tvmvrv] 

[svbu'rozu] 

a  nespera 
[n  'nef2)3rsj 

the  medlar. 

15.  Exercicio. 

Quintal  e  drvores. 
Temos  urn  quintal  ao  p6  da  casa.    No  quintal  ha  muitos 
grupos  de  arbustos  e  algiimas  arvores  velhas  e  altas:    carva- 
Ihos,  faias,  tilias  e  olmos.    Perto  do  rio  atras  do  nosso  quintal 


60 


Lesson  8. 


ha  salgueiros.  Tambem  havia  um  platano'  nmito  alto,  mas 
OS  ventos  derribaram-no.  Alem  das  arvrres  de  matta  ha 
arvores  fructiferas.  Esta  cerejeira  teve  muita  flbr  e  tera  muita 
fructa  saborosa.  Aquella  amendoeira  tajnbem  teria  mnitas 
amSndoas,  mas  quando  florescia,  a  neve  Crestoa-lhe  as   flores. 

0  castanheiro  junto  a  porta  da  rua  ha  de  »*iar  bellas  castanha^ 
que  havemos  de  comer  no  dia  de  Todos  o&  Santos,  depois  de 
as  termos  assado  no  magusto.  Os  meninos/gostam  de  cerejas? 
Gostamos,  mas  mais  ainda  de  damascos,  di^  tamaras  e  de  n6s- 
peras.  Tivemos  grande  quantidade  de  nesperas  no  anno  passado. 

16,  Exercise. 

In  which  street  is  your  house  ?  Have/  you  not  a  garden 
near  your  house?  Yes  (see  L.  2,  note),  a  large  and  beauti- 
ful garden  with  many  flowers  and  trees.  What  tree  is  that 
behind  the  wall?  That  is  an  elm-tree.  And  all  these  treea 
are  fruit-trees.  We  shall  have  very  much  fruit  this  year. 
Last  year  we  had  very  little.  The  treeij  had  many  leaves, 
but  few  fruits.     There   you  have  also  very  fine  roses.     Yes, 

1  like  roses  very  much ;  also  my  mother  ^likes  them  much. 


Palavras. 


0  jardim 

fser'dij 
vir  [virj 
entre  [enttd] 
0  vizinho 

[uVB'ziyu] 
a  cancella 

[kv  'selvj 
ahre  [atrd/ 
a  rua  [rruv] 
0  tneio  [tnvtuj 

o  alegrete 

[weh'gretd] 
a  espScie 

[v}J'p€8}d] 

O  cravo 

fu'kravuj 
a  cor  [vTcor] 
branco  ['brvkuj 
encarnado 

[inkvr  'na&iij 
amarello 

famv  'rduj 
(de)  cor  derosa 

[kordj  'rozvj 


the  flower- 
garden 
to  come 
come  in 
the  neighbour 

the  trellis-gate 

opens 

the  street,  way 

the  middle, 

midst ;  means 
the  flower-bed 

the  sort,  kind, 

species 
the  pink 

the  colour 

White 

pink 

yellow     ^ 

rose 


a  margarida 

[vmargv  'rid^uj 
0  amor-perfeito 

[uv  'morpdY- 

'fvituj  (pi. 

amores-per- 

feitos) 
olilaz  [uli'Uf] 
a  dahlia 

[u  'ffaliv] 
0  goivo  fu' goHuJ 
roxo  f'rrofu] 
cheira  [f^irv] 
0  jasmim 

fuses' >nij 
0  ardma 

[uv'roma] 
0  girasol 

fugirv  'soij 
aliceriQa  [li  sesv] 
offerecer 

fof^rs'serj 
offercccl-asia 

[ofsrd  'se 

iBzisJ 
ndo  ad  fnuti  so] 


the  daisy 
the  pansy 


the  lilac 
the  dahlia 

the  gillyflower 
violet 
smells 
the  jasmin 

the  aroma, 

smell 
the  sunflower 

the  permission 
to  offer 

I  should  ofter 
them 


not  only 


Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verbs. 


61 


-nias  [mvf]  but        ^ 

colher  [ku'Her]  to  pick 
o  que  quizer        what(evtjr) 

[ulcdki'zer]  you  like 

{quizer  =  Fut.     will,  desire) 

conj.  of  querer 
faga  favor  de  vir  please  to  come 

[faiiSvf^  'vordd- 

'virj 
j)refiro[pryfiru]  I  prefer 


a  uva  [v'uvuj    the  grape 
a  pera  [v  'pens]  the  pear 
a  magd  [vmv  'sv]  the  apple 
0  meldo  the  melon 

[umd'lvuj 
0  ramalhete         the  nosegay 

[urrvmv  'fletd] 
nem . . .  nem[m}]  neither . . .  nor 
a  chuva  the  rain. 

[^  'fuvsj 


17.  Exercicio. 

Jardim  e  flares. 

Tenha  a  bondade  de  vir  para  o  meu  jardim.  Entre  por 
esta  cancella  que  abre  pp.ra  a  rua  do  meio.  Ao  longo  da  rua 
ha  alegretes  com  flores  (\e  toda  a  especie:  cravos  de  varias 
cores:  brancos,  encarnado,a,  amarellos,  cor  de  rosa;  dahlias, 
margaridas  e  amores-perfeitos.  Estamos  no  verao.  Na  prima- 
vera  estavam  em  flor  o  liiaz  e  os  goivos,  que  sac  d'uma  cor 
roxa  e  cheiram  muito  bem.  Tambem  o  branco  jasmim  tern 
um  bello  aroma..  V*-  Ex*-  gosta  de  girasoes  ?  Talvez  ja  haja 
um  em  flor.  Ainda  nao  ha,  nao.  Mas  quando  houver  {supply 
um),  ha  de  me  dar  licen9a  de  Ih'o  offerecer.  Ja  nao  temos 
rosas  bellas;  se  tivessemos,  offerec6l-as-ia.  Hei  de  fazer  para 
termos  flores  todo  o  anno. 


18.  Exercise. 

(a)  Oh,  what  nice  flowers  you  have  in  your  garden!  If 
I  had  some  white  roses,  I  should  give  them  to  my  mother.  — 
I  have  great  pleasure  in  offering  you  not  only  white  roses, 
but  all  kinds  of  other  flowers.  Have  the  goodness  to  pick 
whatever  you  like.  Do  you  like  the  aroma  of  the  jasmin? 
I  do,  but  I  prefer  that  of  the  pinks.  I  shall  have  a  very 
•fine  nosegay  of  white  roses,  red  pinks  and  violet  pansies. 
Please  to  come  when(ever)  you  like  to  pick  flowers  and  fruits. 
In  autumn  we  shall  have  much  fruit:  grapes,  pears,  apples, 
melons,  and  others. 

(b)  Mother,  I  have  got  a  beautiful  nosegay  to  offer  you! 
—Oh,  the  fine  flowers!  How  much  {quanta)  I  like  them! — 
Look  {olha)  at  these  gillyflowers,  how  nice  they  are!  And  they 
smell  so  good  {bem).  We  had  no  daisies  nor  dahlias  in  our 
garden;  our  neighbour  had  (. . .  6  que  [as]  tinha.  N.B. — £  que 
marks  an  emphasis).  We  also  should  have  (some),  if  there 
had  not  been  so.  much  {tanto)  rain.  If  we  are  lo  have  (or 
If  there  be)  fruit  in  autumn,  we  shall  pick  apples,  pears, 
and  grapes. 


62 

Lesson  8. 

Paltfvras. 

0  hordrio 

the   time-table 

a  lingua  ['llgwn]  the  tongue 

[uo  'rariu] 

hontem  [TrntviJ  yesterday 

a  ligdo  de  leitura 

the  reading- 

ao  tod(  [to'.d'uj 

in  all 

[Ui'turv] 

lesson 

fazer  ^^ 

to  do 

a  Undo  de  gram- 

the  lesson  of 

tOdo,  ioda         \ 

all 

mdtica 

grammar 

todos,  todas      j 

[qi'b  'matiku] 

que  [Ij,  before 

which,  that, 

a  Uquo  d'arith- 

the  lesson  of 

a  vowel  hi] 

who 

metica 

arithmetic 

(do)que 

than 

[duritj'mstikuj^ 

cada  I'Jcud'uJ 

each,  every 

a  Uquo  de  dou- 

the  lesson  of 

a  semana 

the  week 

trina  [do- 

doctrine 

[esc^'mvna] 

trinn] 

a  manlid 

the  morning 

a  ligdo  de 

the  drawing- 

[nmv'yv] 

desenho 

lesson 

a  tarde  [tard^J 

the  afternoon 

[dd'smju] 

a  noi^,e  [v  'noUaJ 

the  night 

a  calUgraphia 

the  caligraphy 

0  djji  santo 

the  saint's  day 

fk^ligre'fivj 

um  dia  feriado 

a  holiday 

OS  lavores 

the   needle- 

[fm 'a&u] 

[U  'vortfj 

work 

as  ferias 

the  holidays, 

a  ligdo  de  coisas 

the  intuitive 

rfEru>f] 

vacation 

lesson 

um  dia  de  semana 

ia    working-day 

dar  ligdo 

to  give  or  to 

um  dia  util 

say  a  lesson 

I'utilJ 

a  tosse  ['tJSd] 

the  cough 

tanto  [ivntuj^ 

so  much,  so 

0  problema 

the  problem 

tanta,  tantos, 

many 

[pru  'blemv] 

tantas 

0  algarismo 

the  cipher, 

quanto[lcwvntu],  how  much,  how 

faigv'ri^muj 

number 

quanta,  quan- 

many? 

0  numero 

the  number 

tos,  quantas 

f'numaruj 

tanto(s)  quan- 

as  much  (as 

hoje  [osfj 

to-day 

to(s) 

many). 

10.  Exercicio  verbal. 

Conjugate:  a)  Eu  tive  (tenho   tide,    tivera)    uma   liijao   de 
leitm-a  (deaenho  etc.) 

b)  que  (qiiantas)  liQoes  terei  (teras  etc.). hoje  ?  etc, 

c)  hei  de  ter  iima  li^ao  de  . . .,  duas  li^oes  de 

.  . .  etc. 

d)  teria  (tido)  mais  tempo,  se  nao  tivesse  (tide) 

tantas  liQoes. 

e)  se  tiver  tempo,   hei   de  fazer  o   meu   them  a 

(desenho  etc.). 

20.  Exercicio. 
0  Jiordrio. 
Quantas  li^oes  tivestes  {or  tiveram)  hoje?    Tivemos  uma 
li^So   de  doutrina,    outra    d'arithm^tica   e   duas   de   desenho: 


Exercises  on  the  Auxiliary  Verbs. 


63 


quatro  ao  todo.  Haviamos  de  ter  cinco,  mas  o  professor  de 
calligraphia  tinha  tosse  e  nao  veio  (did  or  had  not  come). 
As  segundas  e  quintas  feiras  sempre  tenho  nma  li(jao  de  gram- 
matica  francesa :  as  terras  e  sextas  [feiras]  ^  uma  de  lingua  in- 
glesa,  e  as  quartas  e  aos  sabbados  uma  ligao  d'alemao.  A 
5ta  fa  (quinta  feira)  6  meio  feriada,  os  domingos  e  dias  santos 
sao  dias  feriados.  As  li^oes  sac  das  oito  horas  de  manha  at6 
ao  meio  dia  e  das  duas  ate  as  quatro  horas  da  tarde  nos  dias 
uteis.  Se  tivessemos  mais  tr6s  licjoes  nas  quintas,  teriamos 
seis  li(j6es  em  cada  dia.  0  menino  gosta  da  liQao  de  coisas? 
Gosto  mais  do  que  dos  problemas;  nao  tenho  memoria  para 
OS  algarismos  e  os  niimeros  grandes.  E  a  menina,  de  que 
ligao  gosta  mais?  A  de  que  mais  gosto,  minha  senhora,  e 
de   lavores,    que   temos   todos  os  dias  das  duas  para. 


a   li^ao 
as  trfis. 


William 


Guilherme 

fgi'/ierm9j 
Joao  [^u'§uj      John 
Helena  [I'lennJ  Ellen 


America 

[v  'merikej 
0  dinheiro 

[di  'jivirnj 
0  pecego 

f'pesagu] 
I  estar  fatto 

ffaituj  de 
I  o  moranqo 

[mu'rvgu] 
a  uva  de  norte 

[norU] 


America 


the  money 
the  peach 
to  be  short  of 
the  strawberry 
gooseberry 


Palayras. 

j    a  groselha  the  currant 

I        [gru'zvfiv] 

geralmente  generally 

[^dral'mentd] 

prequigoso 
[prdgi'sozu] 

mais  [ma}f] 

diligente 
j        [ddli'^entd] 
j    irreqmeto 
i        firrdfci' etuj 

0  erro  [erruj 


more 
diligent, 

industrious 
restless 

the  mistake 


0  thema  ['temvj   the  task 
hem  que  [bvikd]  though  (conj.) 
nenhum  fn}  'jid]  none,  no  (at  all) 
contente  glad,    satisfied. 

[kon'tentd] 


21.  Exercise. 

William  is  my  friend.  I  am  William's  friend  (the  friend 
of  W.).  Here  is  John's  brother.  Where  is  my  sister  Ellen? 
She  is  in  the  kitchen.  I  had  a  cousin  who  went  (see  p.  36, 
note)  to  America.  W^as  he  still  a  boy?  Yes,  he  was  very 
young.  The  children  had  (=  got)  flowers  and  fruits.  Had 
you  not  money  enough  to  buy  some  peaches?  No  (I  had 
not),  I  was  short  of  money.  Are  there  still  strawberries 
[left]^?  There  are  no  more  (Jd  nao  ha)y  but  we  shall  have 
gooseberries  and  currants.  The  boys  would  have  had  a  holi- 
day if  they  had  not  been  so  lazy.     Little  girls  generally  are 


*  The  words  in  []  are  not  to  be  translated  or  may  be  dis- 
pensed with,  while  those  in  ()  are  to  be  employed  in  Portuguese. 


64  Lesson  9. 

more  diligent  than  little  boys.  These  are  so  restless.  You 
have  had  four  mistakes  in  your  task,  though  it  was  very 
easy.  When  you  happen  to  have  no  mistake  at  all,  you  will 
have  a  nice  (and)  new  book.  I  shall  be  glad  if  you  be  more 
industrious  for  the  future.  And  you,  my  boy,  will  be  more 
happy. 

0  professor  poder4  continuar  estes  exercicios,  at6  que  os 
alumnos  tenham  adquirido  uma  certa  facilidade  no  emprego  do^ 
verbos  auxiliares  em  todos  as  suas  formas. 

Conversaijao. 

A  que  horas  comeijam  as  aulas?     (As  sete,  oito,   nove, 

dez.) 
Que  licjoes  ha  de  manha?  (de  tarde?) 
Quantas    liQoes    de  .  .  .   teem    os    meninos    durante   a 

semana? 
Tiveram  bom  professor?  (Answer:  Tivemos,  sim,  senhor.) 
Ha  outras  li^oes  e  outros  professores  todos  os  dias? 
Quantos  dias  ha  na  semana,  e  quaes  (pi.  of  qual  which) 

sao  OS  sens  nomes? 
Quantos   dias  liteis   ha  n'esta  semana,  visto  haver  (as 

there  is  to  be)  um  dia  santo? 


Ninth  Lesson.    Li^ao  nona. 

The  Partitive  Article. 

§  59.  To  indicate  an  indefinite  quantity  or  an 
indefinite  part  of  a  whole,  the  Portuguese  expression 
is  about  the  same  as  the  EngHsh :  bread  is  pdo,  cheese 
is  qudjo;  I  have  taken  tea  eu  tomei  chd;  give  me  water 
de-me  dgua. 

N.B.— The  pleonastical  some,  used  in  English,  is 
only  translated  when  you  wish  to  indicate  the  quan- 
tity referred  to  as  little,  or  if  followed  by  the  plural : 
Do  you  want  some  bread?  Quer  poo?  Have  you  got 
some  money?  Tern  algum  dinheiro?  I  was  some 
moments  late  cheguei  tarde  de  alguns  momcntos. 

§  60.  However,  the  quantity  being  determined  by 
a  noun  expressing  measure,  weight,  or  number,  or  by  a 
substantive  adverb,  the  name  of  the  substance  is  pre- 
ceded by  de:  nm  pedago  de  pdo  a  piece  of  bread;  uma 


The  Partitive  Article.  65 

pouca  de  dgua  a  small  quantity  of  water;  uma  garrafa 
de  vinho  a  bottle  of  wine;   um  tanto  de  leiU  a  certain 
fj  quantity  of  milk. 

Here  also  the  employrpent  is  the  same  as  in  English. 

%  Q\.  If  the  word  which  denotes  quantity  has 
not  the  form  of  a  substantive,  the  substance  is  not 
preceded  by  de  (again  the  same  as  in  English):  Tern 
muito  vinho  he  has  much  wine :  temos  tanto  leite  que  . . . 
we  have  so  much  milk  that  .  .  . ;  ha  pouca  fructa  there 
is  Httle  fruit;  tern  havido  hastantes  batatas  there  have 
been  a  good  deal  of  potatoes. 

§  62.    (a)  Nouns  and  Adverbs  of  Quantity  with  de. 

Um  metro  de  fazenda  a  meter  of  stuff. 
Um  arratel  fv'rratei)  de  assucar  [is'sukar]. 
A  pound  of  sugar. 

.  Dots  arrdteis  de  farinha  two  pounds  of  meal. 
Um  par  de  hotas  a  pair  of  boots. 
Tres  leguas  ['legwvg]  de  distancia  three  miles'  distance. 
Um  quarteirdo  de  ovos  25  eggs. 

(Um)  certo  numero  de  cartas  a  certain  number  of  letters. 
Um  grupo  de  pessoas  a  group  of  people. 
(Uma)  grande  quantidade  d'arame. 
A  great  quantity  of  brass -wire. 
Um  pouca  de  paciencia  a  little  patience. 
Um  nada  de  esperanga  a  want  of  hope. 

(b)  Pronouns  and  Adverbs  of  Quantity  without  de, 

Algum  tempo  some  time. 

Muito  ar  much  air. 

Mais  dgua  more  water. 

Menos  caminho  less  (=  a  nearer)  way. 

JPouca  distancia  little  distance. 

Bastante  trabalho  work  enougn,  rather  much  trouble. 

Quanto  dinheiro?  how  much  money? 

Quantas  pessoas?  how  many  persons? 

Demasiado  vinho  or  vinho  demais  too  much  wine. 

Poucas  toalhas  (too)  few  tablecloths. 

Muitas  collier es  (too)  many  spoons. 

§  63.  The  partitive  genitive  with  de  or  d'  is  also 
used  in  terms  equivalent  to  adjectives  denoting  the 
material  of  which  a  thing  is  made  or  its  origin  or 
purpose,  as: 

Portuguese  ConversaHon-Grammar.  5 


66 


Lesson  9. 


Um  vestido  de  seda  a  silk  dress. 

Um  chapeu  de  palha  a  straw-hat  or  bonnet. 

TJma  camisa  de  linho  a  linen  shirt  or  chemise. 

Um  fato  de  la  a  woollen  suit  of  clothes. 

0  kite  de  vacca  the  cow's  milk. 

A  sola  de  jantar  the  dining-room. 

§  64.     Present  Tense   of  a  Yerb   of  the  First 
Conjugation  (ending:  -ar). 

Eu  acdbo  [v'kat)uj  I  finish 

tu  acdbas  you  finish 

elUf  ella,   ¥'.  acaba  he,  she  finishes,  you  finish. 

nos  acdbamos  we  finish 

vos  acabaes  you  finish 

elleSy  ellas,   V'^.  acabam  they  (or  you)  finish. 

Participles : 

Pres.:  acabando  finishing. 
Past.:  acabado  finished. 


Palavras. 


[sviv] 
['vvmufj 


A  refeigdo 

[rrafvi'svu] 
chamar  [fv  'mar] 
o  almdgo 

[al'mnsu] 
a  ceia 
vamos 

f altar  [fal'tar] 
a  comida 

fku'mtd'vj 
o  jantar 

[u$Bn  'tar] 
jantar 
a  sala  de  jantar 

[ts  'salvff93yn- 

'tar] 
a  hora  de  almo- 

Qar  [Ts'oryff}- 

almu'sar] 
faga  favor  (de) 

['fasvfv 'vor- 

(de)] 
(sej  faz  [faf] 

favor 
a  cMcara 

[n  'fikvrn] 
0  leite  [u'lnttd] 
quei'ia  [korin] 


the  refection, 

meal,   repast 
to  call 
the  breakfast 

the  supper 
let  us  go ! 
to  want 
the  food     • 

the  dinner 

to  dine 

the  dining-room 


the    breakfast- 
hour 

please  (to) 


if  you  please 

the  cup 

the  milk 
should  like 


a  manteiqa 

[Kmsn  't^lQv] 
a  vontada 

[vvon'ta&d] 
ds  sets  (horas) 

[af'svt'zorvj] 
uma  fatia  de 

pdo 
tomar  ftu'mar] 
cortar  [kur'tar] 
0  copo  [u'kopuj 
gosta  de 

['goftv&d] 
0  vinho  de  mesa 

[u  'viyu&j- 

'rnesv] 
levantar 

[Uvvn  'tar] 


a  talhada 
[vtv  'fia&v] 

a  came  fvkarns] 

0  presunto 
[upr9  'zuntu] 

nove  [novd] 

dez  [difj 


the  butter 

the  appetite 

at  six  (o'clock) 

a  slice  of  bread 

to  take 
to  cut 
the  glass 
likes 

table-wine 


to  get  up,  to 
raise,  to  lift 
(up) 

to  rise  from  the 
table 

the  slice 

the  meat 
the  ham 

nine 
ten 


The  Partitive  Article.  67 


0 prato  fu'prntiij  the  plate,  dish 

a  faca  [i^'fahn]  the  knife 

a  travessa            the  dish 

agora  [a'cforvj    now 

a  sobremesa         the  dessert 

dar  fdar],  irr.    to  give 

[vsohrd  'mezv] 

da  [da]             \     .     . 
de  [de]             1  g^^«' 

a  sopa  [n'sopnj  the  soup 

a  colher               the  spoon 

me  [md]               me 

fnkii'/lerj 

a  sede  [se&^J        the  thirst 

0  chd  [u'faj       the  tea 

22.  Exercicio  verbal. 

Please  to  conjugate  the  present  tenses  and  participles 
of  the  verbs:  chamar,  jantar,  gostar,  levantar,  cortar.—Aiter 
some  practice  you  may  add  a  complement  and  employ  a  noun 
instead  of  the  pronoun  of  the  3^'<^  person.  You  may  also  prac- 
tise the  interrogative  and  negative  forms. 

23.  Exercicio. 

Befeigoes, 
Chamam  para  o  almo^o.  Vamos  para  a  sala  de  jantar. 
Sao  dez  Moras.  E  a  hora  de  almc^ar.  Ja  aqui  estao  os 
paes*,  OS  tios^  e  os  primos®,  faltam  ainda  os  av6s\  0  Mama, 
faz  favor  de  me  dar  uma  chicara  de  leite  com  um  pouco  de 
assucar?  Tambem  queria  uma  fatia  de  pao  e  manteiga. 
Tenho  mnita  vontade,  ja  a  tinha  ao  levantar-me.  0  tio  gosta 
do  nosso  vinho?  E  vinho  de  m6sa.  D^-me  um  ovo^  e  uma 
talhada  de  presunto,  se  faz  favor.  Quantas  pessoas  ha  a  m6sa 
de  jantar?  Nove;  nao  sao  muitas.  0  primo  Jaime  nao  tern 
prato  de  sobremfisa,  nem  colher  de  cha.  Tern  faca  a  menina 
Henriqu6ta?     Agora  tem,  mas  nHo  tinha. 

24.  Exercise. 

When  is  your  dinner-hour?  At  six  [o'clock].  Is  (the) 
mother  already  in  the  dining-room?  Yes  (she  is),  but  (the) 
father  and  (the)  brother  Henry  are  not  yet.  The  soup-plates 
(plates  of  soup)  stand  (=  are)  on  the  table;  also  dessert- 
dishes,  colFee-cups  and  tea-spoons.  There  is  broth  (=  soup 
of  meat),  a  big  slice  of  meat,  and  potatoes.  I  should  like 
also  [some]  bread  and  some  cheese  and  some  fruits.  Give 
me  a  glass  of  wine  and  a  small  quantity  of  water,  if  you 
please;  I  am  thirsty  (=  I  have  thirst).   We  rise  from  the  table. 


Querendo  dar  mais  pratica  aos  alumnos,  o  professor  podert\ 
faz§l-o,  reunindo-os  como  para  um  alm690,  um  jantar  ou  uma  ceia, 
e  fazendo-os  pedir  e  agradecer  comestiveis. 

*  Os  paes  =  the  parents  (pae  e  inae) ;  os  tios  =  tio  e  tia; 
08  primos  =  primo  e  prima;  os  avos  =  avo  e  avo. 

*  avo,  ovo,  porto,  olho  and  other  words  which  in  the  singular 
have  [o],  change  it  into  [ojiu  the  plural  (see  2^^  Part,  Lesson  5,§  18). 

5* 


68  Lesson  10. 

Examples:— Eatamos  a  mesa.  Ha  uraa  toalha  branca  na 
mesa.  Em  cima  da  toalha  estao  pratos.  Nas  travessas  ha  comida. 
Tomamos  a  comida  das  travessas,  pondo-a  (putting  itj  nos  nossos 
pratos.  Oa  pratos  estao  em  frente  (in  front)  das  pepsoas.  As  tra- 
veasas  estao  no  meio  da  mf^sa.  Ellas  sao  ovaes.  Os  pratos  sao 
redondos.  A  mesa  e  quadrada.  Tomamos  ch^  n'uma  chicara  e 
vinho  n'um  copo. 

Preguntas:  Onde  estamos?  Que  ha  na  mesa?  Onde  esta  a 
toalha?  Onde  estao  os  pratos?  Que  ha  nas  travessas?  Onde 
est^  a  comida?  Para  onde  tomamos  a  comida?  Que  ha  em  frente 
de  cada  pessoa?  Que  ha  no  meio  da  tnesa?  Onde  estao  as  tra- 
vessas?   Como  sao  ellas?  etc.  etc. 


Tenth  Lesson.    Ligao  decima. 

The  Complements  and  the  Most  Frequent 
Prepositions. 

§  65.  The  Portuguese  does  not  speak  ofi  a  declen- 
sion of  nouns.  He  merely  distinguishes  subject  (sii- 
jeito)  and  object  or  complement  (complementoj ;  and  as 
for  the  latter,  a  complemento  directo  which  corresponds 
to  the  English  accusative,  and  a  complemento  indirecto 
which  corresponds  to  the  English  dative  or  genitive. 
The  latter  may  also  be  called  the  restrictive  complement, 
as  it  indicates  indeed  a  restriction  in  the  meaning. 

§  6Q.  The  object  (accusative)  is  in  the  form 
equal  to  the  subject  (nominative).  The  compl.  indir. 
(dative)  is  introduced  by  the  preposition  a,  which  is 
contracted  with  the  definite  article  into  ao,  a,  aos^  (is 
and  with  aqudle,  etc.,  into  dqudle(s)^  dquella(s),  while 
the  compl.  restrictivo  (genitive)  is  introduced  by  the  pre- 
position de,  contracted  with  the  article,  demonstrative 
;)ronoun,  etc.,  into  do(s),  da(s)t  dum(a),  duns,  deste,  etc. 
see  First  Lesson). 

§  67.  The  prepositions  are  always  followed  by  the 
accusative — that  is:  by  the  noun  in  its  unaltered  form. 
There  is  no  form  like  the  Saxon  genitive. 

§  68.    Prepositions.     Preposigoes. 

a   [e]   to,     at,     in,     within,  alem    de    [v'lvidd]     beyond, 
towards,    against,   till,    on,  besides 

upon,  with,  by,  for,   after,  ante  [vnts]  before,  in  presence 
according  to.  of  (local) 


The  ComplementB  and  the  Most  Frequent  Prepositions.     69 


antes    de    [Snhj    dej    before 

(temporal) 
ao  ^ado  de      )  i      i     i.r,     -j 

[eu'UM,]]  by,  by  the  side 

aope  de  (  "f'  "^"'^  "^y- 
[nu-pcd,]     I      "«="■ 

ao  longo  de  [vu  Idgudo]  along 

apesar  de  [vpg'zards]  in  spite 
of,  notwithstanding 

ap6s  [v'poj]  after,  behind 

ate  [v'te:]  until 

atrds  de  [v  'tra^dd]  behind  (s. 
tras) 
\     atraves  de  [vtrv  'vegds]  through 
I     com  [ho]  with,'  at,  after,  upon, 

I         ^^ 

conformed  [Tcdformd]  accord- 
ing to 

contra  ['kontrv]  against 

de  [dd]  of,  from,  for,  by 

dehaixo  de  [do  'batfit  dd]  under, 
beneath  (s.  sob) 

abaixo  d"  [v  tatfu  dd]  below, 
beneath,  under 

depots  de  [ddpofgdd]  after 

desde  [degdo]  since 

diante  (de)  [dplntd  (do)]  before 


durante  [durmtd]  during 
em/^ [vi,  57 in,  into,  to,  on,  upon, 

during 
em  f rente   de    [t'frentodd]   in 

front  of,  opposite  to 
entre  ["entre]  between-,  among 
excepto     [(v)'ij' sctii]     except, 

save 
for  a  [forv]  except,  save,  besides 
fdra  de  out  of,  withQut 
junto    a  ['guntuv]  joined  to, 

adjacent  to 
para  ['pvrn]  for,  towards,  to, 

in  order  to 
para  com  towards 
por  meio  [mviu]  de,  medianfe 

[medi'vntd]  by  means  of 
perante  [pd'rHntd]  before 


por"^  [pu 


by,  through 


ur]  for, 
segundo^  [sd'gundu]  according 

to 
sob  [subd]  under 
sem  [svi]  without 
sobre  [sobrd]  on,  above 
trds    or    trds    de    [traj(d9)] 

behind. 


§  69.     Examples  exemplos  [i'zeynpluf]. 
Ante  0  perigo  before  (the)  danger. 
Perante  Beus,  0  tribunal,  a  minha  consciencia. 
Before  God,  the  tribunal  my  conscience. 
Antes  da  sua  chegada  before  his  arrival. 
Diante  (d)a  casa  before  the  house. 
Na  mesa  (up)on   the   table^  na  parede  on  the  wall,  no 

ar  in  the  air. 
A  mesa  at  table. 

Sobre  a  mesa  upon  or  above  the  table. 
Debaixo  do  banco  under  the  bench. 
Sob  0  ponto  de  vista  under  the  point  of  view. 
Para  os  pobres  for  the  poor. 

^  Conforme  is  nsed  only  of  something  very  sure,  undoubted, 
while  segundo  is  used  also  of  something  doubtful. 

^  em  is  contracted  with  the  following  article  or  pronoun 
into  110.  na,  nelle,  neste,  etc.  (see  l^t  Lesson);  por  is  contracted 
with  the  following  article  into  pelo,  pela,  pelos,  pelas. 


70 


Lesson  10. 


Para  comer  (in  order)  to  eat. 

Para  o  sul  towards  south. 

Olhar  para  alg%iem  to  look  at  or  after  somebody. 

Ir  pela  rua  to  go  through  the  street. 

Trocar  par  prata  to  change  for  silver. 

Por  engano  by  mistake. 

Feito  pelo  pintor  N.  made  by  the  painter  N. 

Excepto  0  vizinlto  except  the  neighbour. 

AUm  do  visinho  besides  the  neighbour. 

Fdra  de  casa  out  of  the  house. 

Conforme  o  preceUo,  as  lets. 

According  to  the  precepts,  the  laws. 

Segundo  a  lei,  urn  boato. 

According  to  the  law,  a  rumour. 

Junto  a  esta  carta  joined  to  this  letter. 

Estar  ao  lado^  ao  pe  de  cUguem. 

To  be  (sitting,  standing,  etc.)  at  the  side  of  somebody. 

Estar  com  alguem  to  be  with  somebody. 

Bondoso  para  com  alguem  kind  to  somebody. 

Encostar-se  contra  a  parade    to  lean  against  the  wall. 

Atrds  de  or  trds  (de)  a  casa  behind  the  house. 


Palavras. 

Comprar 

to  buy 

a  laranja            the  orange 

[horn  'prar] 

fvlv'rvjL'J 

acoisafu'kotzej 

the  thing 

a  noz  [v  'nofj      the  nut,  walnut 

amigo,  -a,  adj. 

befriended, 

a  aveld  [a,vi)'lvj  the  hazelnut. 

kind 

filbert 

a  loja  [v'lo^nj 

the  shop 

diz  [dif]              says 

a  niercearia 

the  retail  shop 

vir  [vcr]             to  see 

[vm^'stv  'riu] 

0  figo  [u'fhju]     the  fig 

0  caixeiro 

the  clerk 

0  damasco            the  apricot 

[ukat'/viruj 

[u&B'mafku] 

0  mostrador 

the  counter 

acaixafn'kaifvj  the  chest 

[umuftrv  '&or] 

a  amendoa           the  almond 

vdrio  I'variuJ 

various 

[a  'menduvj 

08  gdneros 

the  goods, 

0  vidrofu'vi&ruj  the  glass,  pane 

fu  's:£n9rufj 

victuals 

a  lata  [vlatv]     the  tin  box 

a(8)  pa8sa(8) 

the  rai8in(s) 

0  pau  [upau]  de  the  cake  of 

Mf)pasv(f)] 

chocolate              chocolate 

0  chocolate 

the  chocolate 

0  cesto  [u'scftu]  the  basket 

[ufuku'Ut?] 

mais  [tnalfj         but 

me  hna] 
08  doces 

me 

aconta[vkdntu]  the  bill 

the  sweetmeats 

0  lojista              the  shopkeeper 

[us'&ogi/J 

fulu'siftnj 

as  conservas 

the  preserves 

0  charuto             the  cigar 

[i/fkd's£rvh'J'J 

[ujv  'rutiif 

The  Complements  and  the  Most  Frequent  Prepositions.     71 


-perto  de 

a  rua  [v'rriiv] 

a  praga 

[v  'prasiB] 
estaQdo  central 

do  caminho 

de  ferro 

ftftv'svu  8en- 

'traidukv  'mipu 

ds'ferruj 
0  portdo 

[pur'tvu] 
em  forma  de 

ferradura 

[t'formv- 

(tdfdrrv  '&urvj 
a  escada  [vif- 

'ka&v] 
0  elevador 

futbw  'd'orj 
conduz  [konduf]  leads 
a  plataforma       the  passengers' 
[vplutie  'formv]     platform 

(dos  viajantes) 
nos  [nufj  us 

snbimos  we  ascend, 

[su'bimuf]  mount,  go  up 

Oi,are(French)(      P^^^ 

estende-se  extends, 

[fj'tenddsd]  stretches 


near  to 
the  street 
the  square 

central  rail- 
way-station 


the  portal, 

porch 
in  the  shape  of 

a  horseshoe 


the  staircase, 

stairs 
the  elevator, 

lift 


a  entrada 

[vin'tra&v] 
0  tunnel 

fu'tunfij 
0  monte 

[u'montd] 
0  comprimento 

[iikomprt- 

'mSntuJ 
0  kil&metro 

[ki  'lomdtru] 
0  aluguel 

fuvlu'QsiJ 
uma  casa  de 

aluguel  or 

d'aluguer 
uma  casa  minha 

desejar 

[ddzt  '^arj 
mostrar 

[muf'trar] 
andar 

[vn  'darj 
pagar 

[pv  'gar] 
morar  \ 

fmu  'rar]  ^ 
viver  [vi'ver]  ] 
apresentar 

[upr^zSn'tarJ 


the  entry 
the  tunnel 
the  mountain 
the  length 

the  kilonaetre 
the  hire,  rent 

a  house  to  be 
let,  a  tene- 
ment house 

a  house  of  my 
own 

to  desire,  wish 

to  show 
to  go 
to  pay 

dwell,  to  live 

to  offer, 
.  present. 


2o.  Leitura. 

Numa  loja. 

Deseja  comprar  algumas  coisas  para  pessoas  amigas  e  da 
minha  familia.  Entro  n'uma  loja.  E  uma  mercearia.  Falo 
com  0  caixeiro  que  esta  atras  do  mostrador.  Elle  mostra-me 
varies  g^neros:  chocolate,  doces,  conservas,  laranjas,  nozes, 
avelas,  e  diz:  «V*-  Ex*^-  deseja  v6r  mais?  Ainda  tenho  mui- 
tas  caixas  de  passas,  de  figos  e  damascos  seccos;  grande  nii- 
mero  de  latas  de  conserva,  muitos  cestos  de  laranjas,  diizias 
de  garrafas  de  vinho  doce,  saccos  cheios  de  nozes  e  de  amfin- 
doas.»  Compro  alguns  pans  de  chocolate,  uns  vidros  com 
doces,  duas  garrafas  de  vinho  do  Porto  e  mais  coisas.  Pago 
a  conta  do  lojista  e  apresento  a  um  amigo  o  vinho  e  uma 
caixa  de  charutos :  a  tia  um  arrdtel  de  chocolate ;  a  meu 
primo  uma  lata  de  conservas,  e  umas  laranjas  de  Setiibal  a 
minha  irma. 


72  Lesson  11. 

25a.  Exercise. 

The  Bocio. 
We  live  in  Lisbon  in  the  Avenida  da  Liberdade.  Near 
to  this  street  there  is  the  Rocio,  a  large  square.  On  this 
square  is  a  monument  of  Peter  the  Fourth  and  the  Theatre. 
Opposite  to  the  theatre  Dona  Maria  is  the  central  railway 
station  Bocio.  We  enter  by  a  porch  in  the  shape  of  a  horse- 
shoe. By  the  side  of  the  stairs  there  is  an  elevator.  By 
means  of  this  elevator  we  ascend  the  upper  passengers'  plat- 
form. The  railway  platform  is  behind  the  passengers'  plat- 
form and  extends  up  to  the  entry  of  a  tunnel  which  leads 
us  through  the  mountain.  This  tunnel  has  a  length  of  some 
kilometres. 

Conversai^ao. 
Onde  raora(m)  Va(s).  Bxa(s). . . .  o(s)  seu(s)  amigo(s)?  . . .  a(s) 

senhora(s)  Teixeira? 
Mora(m)  n'uma  casa  de  alaguel  ou  n'uma  casa  sua? 
A  quem  da  V.  o  sen  lapiz?  . .  a  sua  penna? . .  .  os  seus 

livros  ? 
Onde  compra  o  sen  papel?  . . .  os  seus  charutos? 
Onde  6  o  theatro  Dona  Maria? 
Por   meio   de   qu6    subimos    a    plataforma    superior   da 

esta9ao  do  Rocio  ? 
Onde  e  o  elevador? 

0  caes  da  esta9ao  do  caminho  de  ferro,  onde  e?  - 
Como  se  chama  a  estajjao? 
Que  outra  coisa  tem  o  mesmo  nome? 
Que  ha  n'uma  [loja  de]  mercearia? 
Que  deseja  comprar? 
A  quem  deseja  apresentar  o  que  compra? 


Eleventh  lesson.  Li^ao  decima  primeira. 

The  Attributive  Adjective  in  Gender  and 
Number. 

§  70.  The  Portuguese  adjective  is,  like  its  sub- 
stantive, variable  in  gender  and  number  (cf.  Lessons  2 
and  3).     There  are  2  classes  of  adjectives: 

1.  The  qualifying  or  attributive  adjective  (adjedivo 
qiialificativo  or  attrihutivo),  which  attributes  to  the  sub- 
stantive any  quality,  thus  representing  the  adjective  in 
its  proper  meaning:  a  grande  torre,  o  homem  alto^  a 
mesa  e  redonda. 


The  Attributive  Adjective  in  Gender  and  Number.         73 

2.  The  determinative  adjective,  which  renders  its 
substantive  prominent  among  and  distinguishes  it  from 
others — e.g.,  esta  casa,  aquelle  livro,  cada  cdumno,  niinJia 
irma,  etc.  These  latter  will  be  treated  among  the  pro- 
nouns (see  L.  24). 

§  71.  The  attributive  adjective  divides,  according 
to  the  form,  into  two  classes  of  adjectives  (Please  to 
repeat  the  rules  given  in  §§  38 — 40): 

(a)  The  adjectivos  uniformes — i.e.,  those  wdth  only 
one  form  for  both  sexes  or  genders  and  consequently 
invariable.     They  consist  of 

1.  Those  ending  in  -e,  -I,  -ar,  -az^  -«>,  -02,  -im^ 
-ea  and  -0,  and  also  by  -s  in  a  syllable  not  accentuated 
(cf.  §  36). 

2.  Commum,  common  also  has  only  one  form  for 
both  genders;  and  so  have  the  Latin  comparatives  in 
-or:  anterior  id.,  former;  posterior  id.,  latter;  superior 
id.,  upper;  inferior  id.,  lower;  maior  greater;  menor 
smaller,  minor;  melhor  better;  peor  worse;  etc.  As  for 
the  plural,  they  follow  the  rule  of  the  words  ending 
by  -r:  siq)eriores,  etc. 

(b)  The  adjectivos  biformes — i.e.,  those  which  have 
two  forms  and  consequently  a  special  termination  for 
the  feminine  gender.  To  these  belong  all  adjectives  end- 
ing by  any  other  but  the  above  mentioned  termination, 
namely: 

1.  Thode  ending  by  -0  not  accentuated  and  pre- 
ceded by  i,  u  or  a.  consonant:  frio,  mutuo^  justo,  hon- 
doso. 

2.  Those  ending  by  -u  preceded  by  a  consonant: 
nu^  cru. 

3.  Those  ending  by  -do,  -eu  (-eo),  -or  (-or),  -es  ('ejs)y 
-oni,  'Um:  sdo,  hehreu,  tutor,  ingles,  bom,  nenhum. 

§  72.    Examples. 
A.  Adjectivos  Uniformes. 

Singular.  Plural. 

Leve  [Uvd]  light  (of  weight)  Those    ending    by    a    vowel 

verde  ['verd9]  green  take  an.s.* 

differente  [dif9'rent9]  id.  leves,  verdes,  differenies 


74 


Lesson  11. 


leal  [h'ai]  faithful,  loyal 

amdvel     [v  'mavel]     amiable, 

lovely 
legivd  [h's'tvsij  legible 
fdcil  ['fitsii]  easy 
gentil  [jen'tii]  gentle 
aztU  [v'zui]  blue 
singular  [sigu'lar]  id. 

capaz  [kv'pafj  capable 

felUf  [fd'UfJ  happy 
velois  [vd'lof]  quick 
ruim  [rru't]  bad,  naughty 
sd  [so]  only,  alone 
f^mea  ['femiv]  female 
simples  ['simphj]  simple 


leaes  or  leais  {al  becomes  aes 

or  ais) 
amdveis  (el  becomes  eis) 

legiveis  (el  becomes  eis) 
facets  (il  not  accented:  eis) 
gentis  (il  accented:  is) 
azues  (ul  becomes  ties) 
singulares  (adj.  ending  by  -r 

take  es) 
capazes  (adj.  ending  by  aj^take 

es) 
felizes  (adj.  ending  by  i^rtake  es) 
velozes  (adj. ending  by  ozi&kBes) 
ruins  (m  changes  into  ns) 
SOS  (those  in  6  add  s) 
femeas  (those  in  ea  add  5) 
simples  (s  remains  unaltered). 


B.  Adjectivos  Biformes. 


Singular. 
Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Plural. 
Masculine. 


Feminine. 


Quieto  [ht'du] 
frio  [friuj 
formdso  (s.  §  74) 
mi  [nu] 
sao  [svu] 

christdo  [krif'tvuj 
aHewMO  [vh'mvu] 
aldedo  [al'divu] 
comildo 

[humi'lvu] 
heir  do  [hvt'rvu] 

hebreu  [t'breu] 
judeu  [gu'deuj 
animador 

[vmmv'dor] 
portugues 

tdrto  [tortu] 
(8.  §  74) 


quieta  quiet 
fria  cold 
formosa  beautiful 
nua  naked,  bare 
sd  healthy,  sound, 

wholesome 
christd  Christian 
alemd  German 
aided  rustic,  rural 
comilona  glutto- 
nous, greedy 
beirda  or  beird 
of  the  Beira 
hebrea  Hebrew 
judia  Jewish 
animadora 

encouraging 
portuguesa 

Portuguese 
torta  crooked, 
tortuous 


quietos 

frios 

formosos 

nus 

sdos 

christdos 
alemdes 
aldedes 
comUdes 

beirdes 

hebreus 

judeus 

animadores 


quietas 

frias 

formdsas 

nuas 

sds 

christds 
alemds 
aldeds 
comilonas 

beiroas  or 

beirds 
hebreas 
judias 
animadoras 


Portugueses  portuguesas 
tortos  tortas. 


§  73.     The  feminine  form   of  these  adjectives  is 
obtained  as  follows: 


The  Attributive  Adjective  in  Gender  and  Number.         75 

(a)  Those  ending  by  unaccented  -o  change  -o  into 
-a;  hranco,  hranca. 

(b)  Those  ending  by  -u,  preceded  by  a  consonant, 
add  -a:  cru,  crua  raw,  unripe. 

(c)  Those  ending  in  -ao  lose  the  -o:  vdo,  va  (or 
van)  vain. 

N.B. — The  adjectivos  augmentativos^  form  their  fe- 
minine in  -ona :  comildo,  comilona.  —  Beirdo  (native  of 
the  province  of  Beira)  forms  heiroa  or  heird. 

(d)  Those  ending  in  -eo  (eu)  change  this  diphthong 
into  -ea  [viv] :  hehreu,  hebrea. 

Exceptions. — Judeu,  judia;  sandeu,  sandia  foolish. 

(e)  Those  ending  in  -or  add  -a:  ahrasador,  -a 
burning. 

Exceptions.— Jwco^or  colourless;  bicolor  (tricolor)  of  two 
(three)  colours;  multic(ol)or  of  many  colours;  semsabor  tasteless, 
insipid,  which  are  uniforme. 

(f)  Those  ending  in  -es  (-ez)  add  -a:  franceSy 
francesa. 

Exceptions.— CoWes  courteous,  polite;  <?escoWes  nnpoUte; 
soe0  low,  vile,  which  are  uniform. 

§  74.  Those  adjectives  which  in  their  last  syl- 
lable but  one  have  close  o  change  this  sound  into 
open  0  in  the  feminine  (as  well  as  in  the  plural)  form^ 
To  these  belong: 

1.  All  adjectives  ending  in  -oso  (or  -oso) — e.g.,  for- 
moso  ffur'mozuj,  for  mesa  [fur'tnozv] ;  formosos  [fur- 
'mozuf],  formosas  ffur'mozvfj. 

2.  The  adjectives  choco  hatched,  brood(ing);  grosso 
big;  morno  tepid;  novo  new,  young;  porco  dirty:  iorto 
crooked;  fem.:  grossa  f'grosvj,  f'mornyj,  etc. 

3.  The  past  participle  of  ^or  to  put,  and  compound 
words — e.g.,  posto  ['poftu]^  posta  ['poflv],  disposto,  -a; 
expostOy  -a. 

^  Augmentativos  are  those  adjectives  (and  8ubstanti7es)  which 
change  their  ending  into  or  add  the  syllable  -ao,  sometimes  pre- 
ceded by  some  intercalary  letter  or  letters,  thus  expressing  high 
degrees  of  a  quali:fcy  (in  substantives  an  augmentation  of  shape, 
weight,  etc.)— e.g.,  maganao  (from  magano  malicious,  knavish  [per- 
son]); espertalhao  (from  esperto  brisk)  cunning  [fellow]. 


76 


Lesson  11. 


Preliminary  Bemark.  By  adding  the  syllable  -mente  to 
the  feminine  form  of  the  qualifying  adjective,  we  form  the 
adverb ;— e.g.,  antigo^  antigamente  formerly.  Comprehende-se 
facilmente  it  is  easily  to  be  understood.  N.B.— Sometimes  we 
may  employ  the  adjective  form  instead  of  the  adverbial,  espe- 
cially if  accompanied  by  ser:  £  facil  de  comprehender.  Elle 
foi  direito  (instead  of  direitamente)  para  casa  he  went  directly 
home.     (More  particulars  will  be  found  under  Adverbs.) 

PalaTras. 


A  visita  [t>9  'zitaj  the  v;sit 

a  pelle  [peij 

the  skin 

passar  hem 

to  be  in  good 

revestir 

to  vest,  cover 

(mal) 

(bad)  health 

[rrdvtftir] 

como  passou? 

how  do  you  do  ? 

particulartnente  particularly 

como  tent  pas- 

[pTsrtikuhr- 

sado? 

'mentd] 

oxald  [ofv'U]! 

would  to  God! 

0  calgado 

shoes,  boots, 

a  importancia 

the  importance 

[kai'sa&uj 

footgear 

[impur  'tvsfTs] 

amollecido  ^ 

softened 

receitar 

to  prescribe, 

[nmuh'si&u] 

frrQUBi'tarJ 

order 

servem  f'servvij 

serve 

deue  ['dtvd] 

must 

tirar  de  [tirar 

to  tear  oft' 

a  consequencia 

the  con- 

d9] 

[kosa  'kwesivj 

sequence 

a  beterraba 

red  beet,  beet- 

ai^esar de 

in  spite  of 

[bdtd'rrabv] 

root 

[up9'zard9j 

raspar 

to  scrape, 

pleno  [plenu] 

full 

[rrvf'par] 

shave 

diligente 

diligent 

a  raiz  [rre'ifj 

the  root 

fd9li'sent9j 

carnudo 

fleshy,  pulpous 

estudioso 

studious 

[kvr'nu&u] 

f}ftu&!'  'ozuj 

encarnado 

red 

assiduo 

assiduous 

[ikvr  tiad'uj 

[b  'si&wuj 

0  mel  [meij 

honey 

premiado 

rewarded 

0  vinagre 

vinegar 

[prdnt}'adu] 

[vi  'nagrd] 

a  alegria 

the  joy,  merri- 

azedo [v'zedu] 

sour 

[vh'griifj 

ment 

amarqo 

bitter 

illustrado 

illustrated, 

[b  'margu] 

[iluf'tra(ru] 

instructed 

0  xarope 

syrup 

quadrupede 

quadruped 

[fB'rop9] 

[kicv  '(fi-up^&dj 

0  vestiidrio 

clothing, 

a  vitella 

the  calf 

viftu'aryu] 

clothes. 

[vt  'tehj 

20.  L( 

jitiira. 

A  V 

\sita. 

Bons  dias 

,  minha  senhora 

!     Como  esta  V^ 

I    Ex*  ? 

Bons  dias 

,  sr.  doutor!    Es 

jtou  boa,  obrigac 

a!  E  0  doutor. 

'  The  ending  -ido  is  that  of  the  past  participle  of  the  2n<J 
and  S^fl  conjugations,  the  2nd  conj.  having  the  infinitive  in  -er  and 
the  3rd  in  .j,.. 


The  Attributive  Adjective  in  Gender  and  Number.         77 

como  tem  passado?  —  Nao  estou  muito  bom;  tenho  estado 
{or  andado)  constipado  ha?  algum  tempo.  —  Oxala  que  nao 
seja  nada  de  importancia!  Quern,  como  o  doutor,  tem  de  re- 
<3eitar  saude  aos  outros,  nao  deve  estar  nem  ser  doente.  — 
Hei  de  fazer  para  estar  bom  depressa.  E  uma  consequencia 
do  tempo  ruim.  Apesar  de  estarmos  em  pleno  verao,  os  dias 
estao  frios  e  chuvosos  como  emnovembro.  —  E  verdade,  tem 
sido  um  verao  pouco  agradavel.  Onde  esta  q  filho  de  V»- 
Ex*-?  —  Esta  na  aula.  —  E  um  memno  muito  intelligente. 
—  Diligente  e  assiduo  6  o  que  elle  e.  Foi  premiado  por  ter 
sido  0  melhor  alumno  durante  o  anno  passado.  —  Tera  sido 
nma  grande  alegria  para  V*-  Ex*-  —  E  foi.  Nao  estaria  {or 
nao  havia  de  estar)  satisfeita,  se  nao  fosse  assim.  Tendo  sido 
estudioso  em  rapaz,  sera  illustrado  quando  for  homem. 

27.  Exercicio  oral  e  per  escripto. 

First  repeat  the  rules  of  Lesson  2, 
What   is   the  plural  of   alto,  mdu,  orfdo,  sdo,  alemdo, 
casfellao,  aldedo,  comum,  portugues,  simples,  brutal,  azul,  fdcil, 
hdbil,  cruel,  civU,  ruim,  irmdo,   bondoso,  torto,  menor,  maior, 
superior,  encantador  ? 

What  is  the  feminine  of  the  same  adjectives? 
What  is  the  plural  of  the  feminine  form? 

Join  the  uniform  and  biform  adjectives  to  substantives 
of  different  gender  and  number; — e.g.,  um  pensamenfo  chris- 
ido,  uma  obra  christd;  missiondrios  christdos;  igrejas  chris- 
ids,  etc. 

28.  Translation. 

The  quadrupeds  are  covered  with  skins.  The  skins  of 
some  animals  serve  particularly  to  make  shoes  and  boots. 
The  skin,  after  being  torn  off  the  animal,  is  softened  and 
scraped. — The  beetroot  is  a  plant  with  (de)  [a]^  very  thick 
and  fleshy  root  of  white  or  red  colour.  Out  of  the  white 
beetroot  sugar  is  made.— [The]  Sugar,  [the]  honey  and 
{the]  syrup  are  sweet;  [the]  vinegar  is  sour,  and  [the]  beer 
is  bitter. 

#  Conrersaqao. 

De  que  sao  revestidos  os  (animaes)  quadrupedes? 
Para  que  6  que  nos  servem  as  pelles  dos  bois,  das  vac- 

cas,  das  vitellas? 
Como  se  prepara  a  pelle,   depois  de  tirada  do  animal? 
De  que  plant  a,  produzida  na  Europa,  se  faz  assucar? 

^  The  words  in  []  are  not  to  be  translated. 


78  Lesson  12. 

Que  parte  da  beterraba  e  que  serve  para  fazer  assucar  ? 

Como  Ǥ  a  raiz  da  beterraba? 

Que  qualidade  tern  o  assucar?  o  mel?  o  xarope? 

Conheceis  fructos  que  tambem  sao  doces? 

Que  qualidade  tern  o  vinagre?  a  cerveja?  o  sal? 

Qual  6  0  gosto  das  coisas  que  sao  nem  doces,  uem  az6> 

das  ou  salgados  ou  amargos? 
Nomeie  um  liqulido  que  da  sua  natureza  6  insipido! 


Twelfth  Lesson.    Li^ao  decima  segunda. 

The  Position  of  the  Attributive  Adjective. 

§  75.  The  position  of  the  adjective  is  greatljr 
influenced  by:  1.  its  greater  or  lesser  importance  (if 
accented  or  unaccented),  2.  its  category,  and  3,  the 
harmony  of  the  phrase. 

§  76.     The  following  rules  should  be  noted: 

1.  The  unaccented  adjective,  which,  being  rather 
ornamental  than  discriminative,  forms  a  natural  in- 
herent characteristic,  precedes  its  noun:  um  horn  livro; 
rtiau  tempo;  a  branca  neve  the  white  snow;  o  doce  m£l; 
a  negra  sorte  the  dark  destiny.  (Here  horn  and  man 
are  unaccented;  branca  and  doce  do  not  discriminate ; 
negra  is  employed  ornamentally  and  figuratively).  Cf. : 
um  livro  bom,  tempo  mau,  papel  branco^  fructa  doce, 
capa  negra.     Cf. : 

A  inter essarJe  crianga  —  uma  confer enda  interessante. 

Um  simples  aperto  de  moo    a   simple  pressing  of  the 
hand;  uma  phrase  simples;  um  vestido  simples. 

Um  grande  homem  a  great  man. 

um  homem  grande  a  tall  man. 

Bemark. — To  this  group  belong  also  those  adjectives 
employed  in  mere  formal  addresses,  as  in  writing  letters,  etc. 
— e.g.,  Illustrissimo  Senhor,  Excellentissima  Senhora;  de 
ya.  ji^x°-  attento  servidorj  respeitoso  aMnirador,  etc.;  yet  in 
these  finishing  formulas  they  may  also  follow,  especially  if 
several  are  employed  to  accompany  the  same  noun; — e.g.,  ad- 
mirador  respeitoso  e  gratissimo  (abbr. :  adm<^-  resp.  °-  e  grat^^). 

2.  The  accented  adjective,  which,  being  rather 
discriminative  than  ornamental,  forms  a  mere  accidental 
characteristic,  follows  its  noun.     To  this  group  belong: 


The  Position  of  the  Attributive  Adjective.  79 

(a)  Adjectives  denoting  nationality,  religion,  dignity^ 
employment,  material — e.g. : 

A  literafura  espanhola  the  Spanish  literature. 

um  pintor  neerlancUs  a  Dutch  painter 

a  igreja  cathdlica  the  Catholic  church 

a  guarda  municipal  the  town  militia 

0  govern  ador  civil  the  (Lord)  Mayor 

0  gado  lanifero  (or  lanigero)  wool-bearing  animals 

dgua  mineral  mineral  water 

a  industria  mineira  the  mining  (industry). 

(b)  Adjectives  denoting  qualities  perceptible  by  the 
senses — e.g.,  colour,  shape,  size,  taste,  smell,  etc. — e.g.: 

Uma  sola  comprida  a  long  hall 
uma  janella  ogival  a  pointed  or  arched  window 
uma  faca  aguda  a  pointed  knife 
um  vestido  castanho  a  brown  dress 
uma  herva  aromdtica  an  aromatic  herb 
uma  amtndoa  amarga  a  bitter  almond, 
(but:  uma  amarga  decepcdo,  because  here  the  adjective 
is  employed  figuratively). 

(c)  The  verbal  adjectives  or  participles — e.g.: 
ZIma  janella  pintada  a  painted  window 

a  rainha  reinante  the  queen-regent. 

(d)  Adjectives  accompanied  by  an  adverb  or  an 
adverbial  phrase,  such  as  muito  very,  pouco  little, 
hastante  enough,    demais  or  dentasiado  too,  tdo  so,  etc. 

Uma  carta  muito  extensa  a  very  long  letter 

uma  tarefa  pouco  agraddvel  a  rather  disagreeable  task 

uma  porta  demasiado  estreita  too  narrow  a  door 

um   aluguel    relativamente   barato  a  hiring  of  relative 

cheapness 
um  liomem  digno  de  fe  a  man  worthy  of  belief. 

3.  Many  adjectives  may  precede  or  follow  the  noun, 
this   being    often    without    any   importance,    but   still 
oftener  denoting  difference. 
Urn     horn     homem     a     good-      um    homem    horn    an    honest 

natured  man  man 

um  pohre  homem  a  poor  man      um  homem,  pdbre  an  indigent 

(to  be  lamented,   unhappy)  man 

certa  noticia  a  certain  news        uma  noticia  cert  a  exact  tidings 
um  hello  homem  an  excellent      um  homem  hello  a  handsome 

man  man 


80  Lesson  12. 

meu    caro    amigo    my     dear  uma  viagem  cara  an  expensive 

friend  journey 

uma  alta  personagem  a  high  urn  tecto  alto  a  high  roof 

personage 

um    franco     riso      a     frank  a  entrada  franca  free  entry 

laughter 

uma  leve  duvida  a  slight  doubt  um  fardo  leve  a  light  burden 

meu  proprio  proceder    [pru-  uma  maneira  propria  an  ap- 

Sdder]  my  own  behaviour  propriate  manner 

0  prdprio  amdr  real  love  o  amor  prdprio  self-love. 

§  77.  If  a  noun  is  accompanied  by  several  ad- 
jectives, the  harmony  of  the  phrase  decides  the  po- 
sition of  the  adjective,  yet  without  contradicting  the 
rules  above.  Cf. :  um  hello  dia  —  um  dia  hello  e  (and  I) 
soalheiro  (or:  um  hello  dia  soalheiro,  as  a  fine  day  gene- 
rally is  a  sunny  day;  uma  grande  hatalha  sanguinolenta 
a  great  and  bloody  battle ;  but :  uma  hatalha  sanguino- 
lenta e  victoriosa,  as  in  English ;  os  tenues  ramos  floridos 
or  OS  ramos  tenues  e  floridos  the  thin,  blooming  twigs,  etc. 
§  78.  Though  as  a  rule  short  adjectives  precede 
the  noun,  there  are  also  those  which  always  follow 
it— e.g.:  frio,  secco,  gordo,  quente^  ameno,  etc 

§  79.  An  adjective  qualifying  two  substantives 
must  be  plural: 

Patdo  e  Carlos  estao  crescidos. 
Paul  and  Charles  have  grown,  are  talL 
Minha  irmd  e  minha  prima  sao  appUcadas. 
My  sister  and  my  cousin  are  diligent. 

If  the  nouns  (or  pronouns)  are  of  different  genders, 
the  adjective  is  put  in  the  plural  masculine,  provided 
the  nouns  denote  persons  or  living  heings — e.g.: 
Eomens  e  mulheres  estavam  satisfeitos. 
Men  and  women  were  satisfied. 

If,  on  the  contrary,  things  sue  spoken  of,  the  gender 
of  the  last  substantive  prevails — e.g.: 
Contos  e  anecdotas  honitas,—where&s: 
Anecdotas  e  contos  honiios. 

§  80.  To  a  noun  in  the  plural  are  added  several 
adjectives  in  the  singular,  if  each  adjective  would  be  ac- 
companied, when  alone,   by  the  noun  in  the  singular: 

As  linguas  inglesa  e  portuguesa. 

The  English  and  Portuguese  languages. 


The  Poeition  of  the  Attributive  Adjective. 


81 


Palayras. 


A  habitagdo 
['ettitis  'siiuj 

hdbitar 
0  alicerce 

[uh'ssrsd] 
a  parede 

[py  're&9j 
0  pavimento 

[pwi  'meninj 
0  sobrado 

[su'brad'uj 
assentar 
cresce  [kref'sd] 
seguro  [sd'guruj 
0  casco  ['kafkuj 
geral  [^d'ral] 
geralniente,  em 

geral 
0  tijolo  [ti'^olu] 


the  dwelling 
(-place),  habi- 
tation 
to  dwell,  live 
the  foundation, 


the  wall 

the  pavement 

the  floor 

to  rest,  settle 

grows  up 

safe 

the  skull 

general 

gene]*ally 


the  (burnt) 
brick 

0  adoho  /» '&(A>u]  the  sun-dried 
brick,  adobe 

the  clay 

baked 


0  harro  [ubarru] 
cozido 

[ku'zi&uj 
cru  [kru] 
a  madeira 

mv'&Tsirv] 
0  madeiro 

[mv'ffeiru] 


raw 

the  wood 

the  block 


a  trave  ['travd] 
a  viga  ['vigv] 

a  lenha  ['lv?jvj 
0  lenho  [l^puj 
aparar 

[epB  War] 
0  machado 

[mv'fa&u] 
a  face  [fvsd] 
0  quadrado 

[kwv  '&ra&u] 
0  rect(Mgulo 

[rre  'tvgulu] 
0  telhado 

[tv'/ia&uj 
a  telha  ['tvfiv] 
assente  [v  'sentdj 

a  ripa  ['rripv] 
0  zinco  f'zikuj 
a  lousa  ['lozv] 
tornarftur'narj 
demasiado 

[ddtnnzt'ad'a] 
quente  [kentd] 
inclinado 

[ikh'nad'uj 
a  facilidade 

[fvsdU'&a&sJ 
a  chuva  ['fuwj 


the  beam,  joist 
the  little  beam 

or  joist 
the  wood 
the  block 
to  cut,  clip 

the  axe 

the  side 
the  square, 

quadrangle 
the  rectangle 

the  roof 

the  tile 
sitting;  firm, 

solid 
the  lath 
the  zinc 
the  slate 
to  make 

too  (much) 

hot 

inclined 

the  facility 

the  rain. 


29.  Leitura. 


A  habitagdo. 
Os  homens  habitam  em  casas.  Dma  casa  tern  alicerce, 
parades,  pavimentos  ou  sobrados,  e  telhado.  0  alicerce 
e  a  raiz  d'onde  a  casa  cresce.  Sem  bom  alicerce  nao  ha  casa 
segura.  As  parades  sac  o  casco  da  casa;  geralmente  sac  feitas 
de  pedra,  mas  ha  parades  feitas  de  tijolos  e  tambem  de 
adobes.  Os  tijolos  sao  de  barro  muito  bem  cozido.  Os  ad6bos 
sao  tambem  de  barro^  mas  cru.  Ha  barro  vermelho  e  barro 
branco.  Os  pavimentos  ou  sobrados  ^ao  em  geral  de  madeira. 
Os  sobrados  assentam  sobre  vigas  que  sao  madeiros  mais  ou 
menos  grosses;  e  as  vigas  assentam  sobre  as  traves,  que  sao 
lenhos  grosses  e  compridos,  aparados  a  machado,  com  quatro 
faces  regulares  em  rectangulo.  0  telhado  e  geralmente  for- 
mado  de  telhas  assentes  sobre  ripas.  Ha  telhados  feitos  de 
zinco,  e  tambem    os    ha   feitos    de  lousa.     Mas   o   zinco    e  a 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  6 


82  Lesson  12. 

lousa  tornam  as  casas  demasiado  quentes  no  verao.  Os  te- 
Ihados  sao  inclinados  para  deixarem  correr  com  facilidade  a- 
agua  das  chnvas. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  0  primeiro  Livro  de  Leitura.) 

30.  Exercicio  oral  ou  per  escripto. 

The  verbs  of  the  present  tense  of  No.  29  to  be  change<d : 
1.  into  the  preterito  imperfeito,  2.  itito  the  futuro,  3.  into  the 
presente  do  conjunctivo,  4.  into  the  pret.  imperf.  do  con- 
junctivo. 

N.B. — Cresce(r)  forms  1.  crescia,  2.  crescera,  3.  cresQa. 
4.  crescesse;  assentar  forms  1.  assentavam,  2.  assentarao; 
3.  assentem,  4.  assentassem;  tomar  forms  like  assentar.  — 
In  the  Subjunctive  begin  each  sentence  by  que. 

Ex.:  Os  homens  habitavam  em   casas.     Uma  casa  tinha 
alicerce  .  .  . 
Os    homens   habitarao   em    casas.     Uma    casa   tera 

alicerce  ... 
Nao  ha  quem  duvide  que   os   homens  habitem  em 

casas;  que  uma  casa  tenha  alicerces  .  .  . 
Nao  havia    quem   duvidasse  que   os   homens  habi- 
tassem  .  ,  .  etc. 

31.  Tema. 

(The)  Portuguese  literature  is  very  interesting,  but  little 
known.  The  prevailing  religion  in  Portugal  is  the  Catholic. 
In  the  Museum  "das  Janellas  Verdes"  in  Lisbon  are  pictures 
of  Portuguese,  Spanish,  Italian,  Dutch^  and  German  artists. 
On  (the)  Portuguese  soil  are  to  be  found  many  springs  of 
mineral  water.  In  Germany  there  are  besides  the  national 
wines  also  French  and  Portuguese  wines  and  good  German 
beer.  Men  and  women  are  small  in  that  country.  The  books 
and  letters  on  the  table  were  open.  The  Spanish  and  Italian 
languages  are  very  melodious.  Cervantes  was  a  great  Spa- 
nish poet,  and  Raphael  a  celebrated  Italian  painter. 

OonversaQao. 

Se  fSsse  rico,  estaria  mkis  contente  ou  feliz? 

Quando  eras  novo,  em  que  coll6gio  estavas? 

Teremos   de    continuar  a  marcha    apesar    de   estarmos 
cansados  ? 
*Teve  Y^-  Ex*  a  visita  d'uns  parentes    aflfastados   (dis- 
tant) antes  de  ir  ao  campo? 

0  meu  amigo  (you)  falar-lhe-ha,  se  ella  estiver  em  sua 
casa? 


Comparison  of  the  Adjective.  83 

No  caso  que  nao  esteja,  dara  o  meu  recado? 
E  este  o  caminho  para  a  proxima  cidade? 
Esteja  V*'  Ex*-  descansado  (easy),  que  este  e  o  camir^o 
certo  (right). 

Exercise:  Conjugate  the  phrases  of  the  conversation  by- 
changing  persons,  numbers  and  genders^  as  well  as 
the  interrogative  form  into  the  negative  or  positive, 
or  negative-interrogative  form. 


Thirteenth  Lesson.  Li^ao  decima  terceira. 

Comparison  of  the  Adjective. 

§  81.  The  comparison  of  Portuguese  adjectives  is 
analogous  to  the  compound  form  of  the  English.  As 
for  the  Comparative,  we  distinguish  1.  that  of  a  higher 
degree  (comparativo  de  superioridade)  and  2.  that  of  a 
lower  degree  (comparativo  de  inferioridade).  The  former 
is  formed  by  putting  the  adverb  mats  (more)  before 
the  adjective,  the  latter  by  employing  the  word  menos 
(less)— e.g.: 

Positivo.                   Compar.  de  sup.  Compar.  de  inferior, 

hello,  -a  beautiful^      mais     heUo,    mais  menos  hello,  mefws 

bella  more  beau-  bella  less  beauti- 

tiful  fal 

N.B. — There  is  no  comparison  equivalent  to  the 
simple  or  Anglo-Saxon  form  of  Enghsh  comparison — 
e.g.:  alto  high;  mais  alto  higher;  Buperlativo  o  mais 
alto  the  highest. 

§  82.  The  Superlative  too  has  two  forms;  we 
distinguish : 

1.  the  relative  Superlative  (superlativo  relativo  or  ex- 
chisivo).  This  compares  several  objects  and  denotes  that  a 
certain  quality  exists  in  one  of  them  in  the  highest 
(or  lowest)  degree  relatively  to  others  of  the  same  kind ; 
eoocluding  these  from  this  same  degree.  It  is  formed  by 
the  words  o  mais  and  o  menos  (cf.  §  81  N.B.),  the  more 
and  the  most; 

1  In  the  comparison  the  adjective  is  subject  to  the  same 
rules  concerning  gender  and  number  as  in  the  positive  form. 

6* 


84 


Lesson  13. 


2..  the  absolute  Superlative  (superlatho  absoluto  or 
simples)  which  denotes  simply  that  an  object  possesses  a 
quality  in  a  very  high  degree.  It  does  not  compare 
nor  select,  but  attributes  in  an  absolute  manner  some 
quality  in  a  very  high  degree.  It  corresponds  to  the 
Enghsh  most  preceded  by  the  indefinite  article,  or  to 
the  adverbs  very,  extraordinary,  extremely,  etc. 

The  absolute  or  simple  superlative  is  formed  by 
the  ending  -issimo  added  to  the  adjective  (see  the  follow- 
ing Lesson). 

§  83.  There  are  some  adjectives  which,  besides 
their  regular  comparison,  have  an  irregular  Latin  one, 
as  well  as  an  absolute  superlative. 


Positivo.        Comparativo. 


Superlativo 
relativo  or 
excluaivo. 


Superlativo  abso- 
lute or  simples 
superlativo. 


alto  high 


horn  good 


mau  bad, 
evil 

grande 
great 


pequeno 
little, 
small 


mais    alto  J    su- 
perior 'higher 


mais  bom  (rare), 
melhor  better 

fnais  mau.  peor 
worse 

mais  grande 
(rare),   ^aior 
greater 


mais  pequeno 
more  little, 
menor  smaller 


0  mais  alto,  o  su-\(ooYum)  altissi- 
premo,  o  summoi  mo,  suprSmo, 
the  highest  |     stmimo    very 

high,  (a)  most 
high. 


0  mais  bom  (rare), 
0  melhor  better 

0  mais  mau,  o  peor 
the  worst 

0    mais  grande 
(rare),   o  maior, 
0  mdximo  the 
greatest 

0  mais  pequeno 
the   most   little, 
0  menor,   o    mi- 
m'mo  the  smallest 


(o  or  um)  dptimo 
the  best. 

(0  or  um)  pessi- 
mo  very  bad. 

(o  or  um)  mdxi- 
»wo  very  great. 


(0  or  um)  mini- 
mo  very  little, 
very  small. 


Please  to  notice  that  alto  in  its  proper  meaning, 
mau  in  its  meaning  et>il,  and  pequeno  in  its  meaning 
little,  have  a  regular  comparison;  cf.:  a  drvore  mais 
alta;  a  mais  alia  or  a  supretna  confianga;  o  summo 
pontifice  (pope);  o  solo  mais  mau;  a  medida  peor;  o  pc- 
dago  mats  pequeno;  a  menor  duvida. 


Comparison  of  the  Adjective.  85 

As  an  outer  characteristic  of  the  Latin  absolute 
Superlative  you  may  notice  that  it  can  be  employed 
not  only  with  the  definite,  but  (and  mostly)  also  with 
the  indefinite  article — e.g. :  a  Jwra  suprema;  umaprova  su- 
prema  (or  uma  suprema  or  summa  prova)  de  amor  (N.B. 
summo,  -a  always  precedes  the  substantive. 

§  84.  "Much"  before  a  comparative  is  hem  or 
muito,  which  latter  is  also  employed  in  the  form  of  the 
absolute  Superlative:  muito  or  muittssimo  melhor;  hem 
mais  alto,  hem  maior.  These  two  adverbs,  before  a 
Positive,  are  translated  by  "ver}^"  or  "most":  hem  or 
mitito  simples  =  very  or  m<fst  simple. 

§    85.      "Little"    before    a   comparative   is  pouco, 
equally  employed  in  the  superlative  form :  (muito)  poucot 
melhor. 

N.B. — The  adverbs  wais  and  menos,  employed  in 
the  comparison,  are  themselves  comparatives  (of  muito 
and  pouco). 

§  86.  "Than"  after  a  comparative  is  translated 
by  que  or  do  que.  By  que  (or  do  que),  if  the  2^^^  degree 
of  a  comparison  is  employed  without  a  verb;  only  by 
do  que  if  it  contains  a  verb —e.g.: 

A  torre  e  mais  alta  que  (or  do  que)  uma  casa. 
A  torre  e  mais  alta  do  que  nds  pensamos. 

§  87.  "As  .  .  as"  before  an  adjective  in  a  com- 
parison (comparativo  dHgualdade)  is  translated  by  (tao) 
.  .  .  como — e.g.: 

A  casa  e  (tCio)  alta  como  uma  torre. 

§  88.  "So  (much  . . .)  that"  in  a  comparativo  d'igual- 
dade  is  translated: 

L  by  tao  . .  .  que  which  immediately  precedes  the 
adjective:  Tao  adversa  nos  foi  a  sorte,  que  ...  so  ad- 
verse was  Destiny  to  us,  that  .  .  . 

2.  by  tanto  que,  which  is  employed  separated  from 
its  adjective:   Tanto  nos  foi  adversa  a  sorte  que  .  .  . 

§  89.  "All  the  more  (so),  as,"  "the  (more)  . .  .  the 
(more)"  in  a  comparative  is  translated  by  tanto  (mais); 
quanto  (or  que)'^ — e.g.: 


86  Lesson  18. 

A  nossa  surpresa  foi  tanto  maior^  tanto  mats  agraduvel, 
quanta  (or  que)  estavamos  longe  de  esperiU-a. 

Our  surprise  was  so  much  the  greater,  all  the  more 
agreeable,  as  we  were  very  far  from  expecting  it. 

Quanto  mais,  melhor  the  more,  the  better. 

Quanta  mats  tern,  (tanto)  mais  quer. 

The  more  he  has,  the  more  he  wants. 

Bemark. — Sometimes  a  Portuguese  adjective  has  the  form 
of  a  Comparative  without  there  being  a  comparison: 

Uma  casa  par  mais  madesta  que  seja,  ha  de  ser  limpa. 
However  modest  be  a  house,  it  must  be  clean. 
Par  menas  lisongeira  que  fosse  a  nossa  acolkimento  . . . 
Although  our  reception  was  little  flattering  .  .  . 


Palavras. 

A  trovoada 

the  thunder- 

eis ahi  [vizv'i]  that  is  (the 

[truvu'a&ej 

storm 

reason) 

0  pernio 

the  danger, 

porque                  why 

[pur' que] 
a  cruz  [kruf]     the  cross 

[p9  riguj 
perigoso 

peril 
dangerous 

[pary'gozu] 

collocado              put 

a  gente  [s^rUd] 

people 

[kulu'ka&u] 

0  conductor 

the  conductor 

hem  como             as  well  as 

[kdndu'torj 

[be'komuj 

a  electricidade 

the  electricity 

0  ponto  f'pdntuj  the  point 

[iMrdsfi'Sfa&d] 

elevado                 elevated,  high 

a  atmosphera 

the  atmo- 

[ib'va&uj 

[vtmuffsrv] 

sphere,  air 

terminam             terminate 

a  pessoa 

the  person 

[tdr'minvu] 

[pd'sov] 

0  objeto               the  object 

portanto 

consequently 

[ob?  'getuj 

[pur'tvntu] 

0  metal  [md'taij  the  metal 

a  probahilidade 

the  probability 

de  preferencia     with  predi- 
[chprgfg-               lection 

[prubvbQli- 

'&a&9j 

'rensii^J 

prodmir 

to  produce 

atacado                affected 

[pi'udu'zir] 

[vtn  'kad'uj 

a  descarga 

the  discharge 

0  local  [lu'kal]  the  locality 

fdifkargvj 

0  compartimento  the  room 

eUctrico 

electrical 

[kdmpvrti- 

[i'letrikuj 

'mentuj 

isolado  [izu- 

isolated 

afastado            \ 

[vM'ta&u]       ^i  ^^ 

'la&uj 

0  raio  frrafuj 

the  flash  of 

distante.               °'*^^^ 

lightning 

[dif'ivntd] 

cat  [kay] 

falls 

a  diamine           the  chimney 

proximo  (de) 

next,    near  (to) 

[fvmr'nej 

f'prDsimuJ 

a  aUura[ai'turv]  the  height 

Comparison  of  the  Adjective. 


87 


quer  dizer  that  is  (to  say) 

[herdi'zer] 
por  €xem2^lo        for  instance 

'  [puri'zemplu] 
pelo  menos  at  least 

[p9lu  'nienufj 
aindaque  (anh^.)  though,  even 

[v'lnd'B  Icd] 
de  mais  a  mais  all  the  more 

[ddmaiz-  so,  moreover 

n  'maij] 


aguentar  to  suffer,   bear 

fegwen'tarj 
pois  que  as 

fpot/'Jc!)] 
ficar  enxarcado\ 

[ifvr'ka&uj    \  to  become  wet 
ficar  molhado   [      or  drenched 

[mu'fia&u]     I 
0  fato  [fain]       the  clothing 
attreito-  affected  by 

[v  'tryUu] 


82.  Leitura. 

A  trovoada. 

E  perigoso  estarmos  no  meio  de  muita  gente  durante 
nma  trovoada,  porque  sendo  cada  pessoa  um  conductor  da 
electricidade  da  terra  para  a  atmosphera,  quanto  maior  f6r  o 
niimero  das  pessoas,  tanto  maior  sera  o  niimero  de  condu- 
etores  e  portanto  a  probabilidade  de  se  produzir  a  descarga 
el^ctrica.  As  arvores  isoladas,  os  edificios  altos  etc.  sao  peri- 
gosos  quando  ha  trovoadas^  pois  o  raio  cae  primeiro  no  que 
e  mais  alto,  por  ser  o  que  Ihe  fica  mais  proximo.  Eis  ahi  por 
que  as  cruzes  altas  coUocadas  sobre  as  egrejas,  bem  como  o 
ponto  mais  elevado  das  torres  —  principalmente  quando  estas 
terminam  em  algjjm  objecto  de  metal  mais  ou  menos  agudo 
—  sao  de  preferencia  atacados  pelo  raio.  Dentro  das  casas, 
0  melhor  local  para  se  estar  (for  people  to  stay)  durante  um^ 
trovoada  6  o  meio  das  salas,  dos  quartos  ou  dos  comparti- 
mentos,  pois  quanto  mais  afastado  se  estiver  das  parades  ou 
das  chamines,  menor  sera  o  perigo. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  Pao  Nosso.) 


33.  Tema. 

In  the  field,  the  best  place  during  a  thunderstorm  is  the 
one,  where  we  are  the  most  separate,^  [from]  and  never  sonear- 
[to]  (de)  a  tree  that  the  distance  of  it  i>e  less  than  its  height.  That 
is  [to  say,]  if,  for  instance,  a  tree  has^  a  height  often  meters, 
we  must  be  distant  from  it  by  at  least  ten  meters.  Even 
if  we  have*  to  bear  the  rain  and  become^  drenched,  all  the 
more  so  as  (pois  que  de  mais  a  mais)  (the)  wet  clothing  is 
[a]  better  conductor  than  the  dry  [one].  (The)  women  are 
less  affected  by  the  flash  of  lightning,  than  (the)  men. 


^  See    §  81  footnote, 
junctive.     ^  Infinitive. 


see   §   88,  1.     ^   Gerund. 


Sub- 


Lesson  14. 


Oonyersa^ao^ 

Qual  e  o  logar  |  ^^^^  ««g^^P        \   durante    uma    tro- 
°      \  menos  pengoso  |  voada: 

(1)  dentro  das  casas? 

(2)  no  campo? 

Onde  e  perigoso  estarmos  emqnanto  ha  trovoada? 

Porque  (por  que  razao)? 

0  raio,  onde  cae  de  preferencia? 

Porque? 

Quando  sera  menor  o  perigo  de   sermos  atacados  pelo 

raio? 
Quaes  (sSo)  as  pessoas  menos  attreitas  ao  raio? 


Fourteenth  Lesson.  Li^ao  decima  quarta. 

The  Absolute  Comparative  and  Superlative. 

§  90.  As  already  mentioned  (§  82, 2),  there  is 
beside  the  relative  Superlative  an  absolute  one,  and  also 
an  absolute  comparative  form  of  a  certain  number  of 
adjectives.  This  comparativo  absoluto  is  of  Latin  origin 
and  has  the  accented  ending  -or.  They  are  the  follo- 
wing: 

Comparativo.  Superlativo. 

anterior  fvnt9ri'or]  former,  anterior  — 

posterior   [puftdri'or]  latter,    hinder,  — 

posterior 
cUerior  fsit$ri'orJ  hithermost 

ulterior  [uit^rt'or]  ulterior  ultimo  ['uUimu] 

exterior  [(v)tft9rt'orJ  outer,    exterior,'  extremo  [iftremuj 

external 

interior  [intQrt'or]  inner,   inside,   in-  intimo  ['intimu] 

terior 

superior  [sup9r}'or]  higher,  superior  supremo  [su'premuj, 

summo  ['sumu] 

inferior  [infsri'or]  lower,  inferior  infimo  ['infimu]. 

§  91.  Employed  in  a  relative  sense — i.e.,  when 
comparing  several  objects  these  adjectives  are  followed 
by  the  preposition  a  (to)e — .g. : 

A  descoberta  da  Amh-ica  e  anterior  d  da  India. 

The  discovery  of  America  is  anterior  to  that  of  India. 


The  Absolute  Comparative  and  Superlative.  89 

§  92.  The  Superlatives  corresponding  to  the  ab- 
solute Comparatives  are  employed  in  an  absolute  sense 
as  well  as  in  a  relative — e.g.: 

A  descdberta  do  Brasil  e  ulterior  d  das  costas  da  Africa, 
e  a  da  India  S  a  ultima  i^^.  sup.)  das  descobertas. 
Nos  ultimos  (abs.  sup.)  siculos  os  Portugueses  nao  fizeram 
descobertas  de  maior  valia  (=  importance). 

BemarJc. — Some  of  these  Comparatives  and  Superlatives 
are  also  employed  as  substantives,  as  in  English. 

§  93.  Most  usual  is  the  pure  absolute  Superlative, 
which,  without  comparing,  denotes  a  very  high  degree  of 
a  quality.  It  is  formed  by  adding  the  ending  -isslmo  to 
the  root  of  the  adjective,  and  subject  to  the  same 
inflection— v.g.:  altissimo,  -a  (from  cdto)  very  high;  for- 
mostssimo,  -a  (from  formoso)  most  beautiful ;  extensissimo, 
-a  extremely  vast. 

§  94.  According  to  the  ending^  of  the  adjective  or 
its  root,  a  certain  number  of  them  undergo  a  shght 
change    in    the  formation    of   the   superlativo  absolute : 

(a)  The  adjectives  ending  in  -co  change  this  ter- 
mination into  -quissimo:  hranco,  hrahquissimo.  (Exc.  : 
parcOj  parsiriaonious,  parcissimo), 

(b)  Those  ending  in  -go  change  it  into  -guissimo, 
largOy  larguissimo.  (Exc. :  amigo,  befriended,  amicissimo; 
antigOf  ancient,  antiqicissimo.) 

(c)  Those  ending  in  -^  change  this  letter  into  c: 
felijn,  felicissimo. 

(d)  Those  ending  in  -do  (-an)  and  -m  change  this 
termination  into  -(aMissimo:  sdo,  sanissimo;  bom,  honis- 
simo;  commum,  communissirno. 

(e)  Those  in  -vel  form  'bilissimo :  agradavel,  agrada- 
hiUssimo. 

(f)  Those  in  -r  and  -s  form  -issimo:  particular,  xmr- 
ticidarissimo^  portugues,  portuguesissimo. 

(g)  Those  ending  in  -fico  change  this  termination 
into  -ficentissin^o :  magnifico,  magnificentissimo. 

(h)  'the  following  adjectives  form  the  absolute 
Superlative  by  adding  'illimo:  fcicil,  easy,  facillimo; 
difftcil,  difficult;  difficilliino;  humilde,  humble,  liumillimo; 
semelhante,  similar,  similimo. 


90  Lesson  14. 

(i)  The  following  adjectives  form  the  superlative 
in  -errimo: 

acre  sharp,  acerrimo. 

dspero  rough,  asperrimo 

celebre  famous,  celeberrimo 

integro  righteous,  integer rimo 

livre  free,  liber  rimo 

miser 0  miserable,  miserrimo 

pobre  poor,  pauperrimo 

salubre  wholesome,  salutary,  saluberrimo. 

(k)  The  following  adjectives  have  an  irregular 
Superlative,  derived  from  the  Latin  form: 

cruel  cruel,  crudelissimo  (beside  crtieUssimo) 

doce  sweet,  mild,  dulcissimo 

fiel  true,  faithful,  fidelissimo 

frio  cold,  frigidissimo 

geral  general,  generalissimo 

nobre  noble,  nobilissimo 

sdbio  wise,  learned,  sapientissimo 

sagrado  sacred,  holy,  sacratissimo 

simples  simple,  simpliclssimo. 
Note. — You  must  not  without  any  further  consideration 
form  an  absolute  Superlative  of  any  adjective.  There  are  a 
good  many  of  them  that  do  not  admit  the  addition  of  -issimo. 
If  not  sure,  it  will  be  better  to  design  a  high  degree  of  some 
quality  by  employing  muito,  bem,  summamente,  etc. — e.g., 
muito  meigo,  bem  cortes,  cdtamente  lisongeiro,  summamente 
enfadonho  (most  tedious). 

§  95.  Present  Tense  of  a  regular  Verb  of  the 
second  Conjugation  (in  er): 

dever,  must^  ought,  to  be  obliged  to,  to  owe. 

(For  the  present 'tense  of  the  first  Conjug.  see  §  64.) 

Eu  devo  feu  'devul  I  must,  am  obliged,  owe. 

tu  deves  [tu  'devifj  ^  you  must,  are  obliged,  owe. 

elle,  elltty   V^-  deve  ['devd]  he,  she,  you  must,  etc. 

nds  devemos  [de'vemuj]  we  must,  etc. 

v6s  deveis  [dd'vvtf]  you  must,  etc. 

elUs,  ellaSy  F<*«  Ex<^^-  devem  ['devvij  they,  you  must,  etc. 

Part.pres.:  devendo.  Part,  passado:  devido. 

^  The  verbs  which  in  their  last  syllable  but  one  have  un- 
accented short  e  [d]  change  this  vowel,  when  accented  into  close 
e  [e]^  if  the  last  syllable  contains  o  or  a;  and  into  open  e  [ej,  if 
the  last  syllable  has  an  e. 


The  Absolute  Comparative  and  Superlative. 


91 


34,  Exercise. 

CoDJugate  by  word  of  mouth  and  in  writing  the  Present 
and  the  Compound  Perfect  (preterito  indeflnido  composto)  of 
1.  parecer^  [pvrd'ser]  to  seem,  2.  enternecer^  [tntdrnd'ser] 
to  affect,  move;  3.  estender  [iften'der]  to  extend. 


Palavras. 

A  regiao 

the  region 

0  perfume 

the  perfume 

[risVvu] 

[pdr'fumd] 

a  eoctensao 

the  extension 

a  myriade 

the  myriad 

[rvjiften'svuj 

[m}'rw&3j 

a  inveja  [i've^is] 

the  envy 

enibalsamar 

to  embalm 

0  encanto 

enchantment, 

[imbals'B'mar] 

[i'Tcnntu] 

charm 

a  encosta 

the  slope 

cai»'ichar 

to  make  a  fancy 

[t'koftv] 

[hsprifar] 

of... 

prddigo 

prodigal 

em  .  .  . 

['pro&igu] 

accumular 

to  heap 

par  toda  a  parte 

everywhere 

[vkumu  'la,rj 

tudo  [tu&u] 

everything 

enlevar  [ild'var] 

to  rejoice 

perpetiio 

perpetual 

amar  [is' mar] 

to  love 

[pdr'petuni] 

a  maravilha 

the  wonder 

esplender 

to  beam, 

[mvrv  'vidv] 

[ifplen'der] 

sparkle 

raro  ['rraruj 

rare 

0  riso  ['rrizuj 

the  smile 

a  joia  [so^vj 

the  jewel 

a  campina 

the  field,  plain 

lemhrar 

to  remember 

[kvm'pinv] 

[lem'brarj 

a  cUusula 

the  clause 

aconchaf'kofvj  the  shell 

['klauzuln] 

a  saphira 

the  sapphire 

exequivel 

practicable 

[s^'firaj 

[izi'kwiveij 

de  dia 

during  day- 

mbtii [suWtH] 

subtile 

time 

tenaz  [td'naf] 

tough, 

engastar-se 

to  be  enchased 

tenacious 

[igvf'tars^] 

0  magistrado 

the  magistracy 

semelhar  alguem 

to  resemble 

fmvjif'traduj 
a  lei  [lv%] 

[sdm}  'fiarj 

somebody 

the  law 

0  tdboleiro 

the  flower-bed 

a  cdlamidade 

the  calamity 

[tntiu'lvii-u] 

[kvlvmi'&a&dj 

1 

a  esmeralda 

emerald. 

ingreme 

steep 

[tsm9'raidvj 

f'igrdmdj 

serpentear 

to  wind, 

com  respeito  a 

with  respect  to, 

[s9rpent}'arj 

meandre 

concerning 

encrustar 

to  incrust 

a  vista 

the  view 

[ikruf'tar] 

a  residencia 

the  dwelling- 

a  crista  f'kriftv J 

the  crest 

[r9z}' densyv] 

place 

0  espectaculo 

the  spectacle 

chao,  eha 

plain 

ftfpe'takuloj 

.     ffyu^/^J 

beijar  fbufjarj 

.to  kiss 

atroz  [v'trjfj 

atrocious,  cruel 

*  c  before  o  and  a  =  f . 


92  Lesson  14. 

audaz  fau'(faf]  audacious  I   porem [pu  rvi]  \  i,Q^gyg,. 

feroz  Ifd'roj]  wild,  savage  no  entretanto    ( 

particular  particular  o  diadema            the  diadem. 

fpsrttktc'larj  \       [die'^emsj 

35.  Exercise. 

Change  the  following  adjectives,  giving  them  the  form  of 
the  absolute  Superlative.  Inimigo  acre.  Pessoa  affavel.  Sabor 
Bgradavel.  Mao  amiga.  Costumes  antigos.  Inverno  aspero. 
Crime  atroz.  Homem  audaz.  Boa  alma.  Papel  branco.  Su- 
jeito  capaz.  Autores  c^lebres.  Campinas  chas.  Delicto  com- 
miim.  Dor  cruel.  Questao  difficil.  Palavras  doces.  Hora 
feliz.  Tigre  feroz.  Servo  fiel.  CJdusulas  exequfveis.  LiijSo 
facil.  Feia  ingratidSo.  Voz  fraca.  Agua  fria.  Phrase  hu- 
milde.  Magistrado  integro.  Lei  justa.  Vista  linda.  Vontade 
livre.  Espectaculo  magnifico.  Mds  novas.  Misero  estado. 
Ac^ao  nobre.  Casos  particulares.  Gente  pobre.  Termos  pr6- 
prios.  Cdlculo  provavel.  Conselho  prudente.  Diadema  rico. 
Verdade  sagrada.  Sitio  salubre.  Ares  sSos.  Estilo  simples. 
Coisa  subtil.  Substancia  tenaz.  Terrivel  calamidade.  Triste 
situa9ao.     Despfisa  util.     VSos  cuidados. 

m.  Leitnra. 

Portugal. 

Portugal  ^  uma  das  mais  lindas  regioes  do  mundo.  Pe- 
queno  em  extensSo,  de  nenhum  outro  deve  ter  inveja.  este  pais 
de  encantos.  A  natureza  parece  ter  caprichado  em  accnmnlar 
nelle  bellezas  de  toda  a  ordem,  que  enlevam  os  olhos  e  en- 
ternecem  a  alma.  Portugal,  minha  patria  bem-amada,  es 
nma  pequenina^  maravilha  e  uma  rara  joia  I  Debaixo  do  teu 
ceu  quasi  sempre  azul,  que  lembra  uma  concha  de  saphira, 
onde  de  dia  se  engasta  um  formosissimo  sol  e  de  noite  as  mais 
bellas  estrdUas,  os  tens  campos  semelham  um  taboleiro  de 
esmeralda,  que  os  rios,  serpenteando  em  todas  as  direc^oes, 
encrustam  de  fios  de  prata.  Monies  verdes,  cobertos  d'arvores 
ate  as  cristas,  nSo  os  tem  mais  pittorescos  o  mundo  todo;  — 
e  beijados  por  um  clima  dulcissimo,  que  o  perfume  .de  my- 
riades  de  flores  embalsamam  na  primavera,  os  tens  valles,  as 
tuas  encostas,  os  teus  campos  sdo  no  estio  prodigos  de  fru- 
ctos,  —  e  por  toda  a  parte,  e  em  tudo,  parece  esplender,  per- 
p^tuo,  0  riso  da  natureza.      (Trindade  Coelho:  P^  Nasso.) 

^7.  Tema. 

I  got  (==  had)  a  most  amiable  letter  from  the  verj 
learned  professor.    The  airs  of  this  region  must  be-  extremely 

^  Dimioutive  of  pequena  small:  a  dear  little  .  .  . 


The  Numerals.  93 

wholesome.  Not  only  are  the  airs,  but  also  the  water  is  most 
salutary.  The  climate  of  the  northern  countries  of  Europe  is  very 
cold  and  rough,  while  that  of  the  southern  countries  is  extraor- 
dinarily mild.  The  Avenida  da  Liberdade  in  Lisbon  is  a  very 
large  and  beautiful  street  with  quite  modem  houses  and 
healthy  habitations.  In  the  quarter  (of  the)  Mouraria,  how- 
ever, the  streets  are  very  strait  and  steep,  showing  extre- 
mely poor  and  miserable  little  houses.  That  quarter  is  very 
old;  it  is  [originates]  of  the  times  of  the  Moors,  and  conse- 
quently anterior  to  the  Portuguese  monarchy.  Though  it  be 
inferior  as  a  dwelling-place,  for  its  views,  it  is  superior  to 
any  other  quarter. 

Conyersaqao. 

Que  diz  oescriptor  Trindade  Coelho  de  Portugal?  (s^e  36). 

Em  que  parece  a  natureza  ter  caprichado? 

Que  e  que  lembra.  o  ceu  de  Portugal? 

Que  semelham  OS  campos? 

Como  sao  os  montes? 

Como  e  0  clima  ? 

Como  sao  os  valles,  as  encostas,  os  campos? 

Onde  parece  esplender,  perp^tuo,  o  riso  da  natureza? 


Fifteenth  Lesson.    Li^ao  decima  quinta. 

The  Numerals. 

Adjectives  e  Substantives  ntimeraes. 

§  96.     There  are  to  be  distinguished  three  classes 
of  numbers: 

1.  Cardinal  Numbers  (ntimeros  cardinaes); 

2.  Ordinal  Numbers  (numeros  ordinaes)  and 

3.  Multiplicative  Numbers  (numeros  multiplicativos). 

I.  Cardinal  Numbers.    JVimieros  cardinaes. 

Zero  ['zeru]  0  oUo  [oUu]  8 

i*m,  uma  1  nove  [nov9j  9 

dois  (dous)j  fem.  duas  2              dez  [def]  10 

tr^s  3  onise  [d09]  11 

quatro  4  doee  [dozd]  12 

cinco  5  treee  [treze]  13 

seis  6  quatorze  [kv'torzd]  14 

sete  7  quinze  [Mzd]  15 


94 


Lesson  15. 


dezaseis  [ddzv'svif]  or  dezeseis 

16 
dezasete  [[ddzv'  SEtd]  or  dezesete 

17 
dezoito  [dd'zoitUy  dd'zoUu]  18 
dezanove  [dQzv'novd]  or  deze- 

nove  19 
vinte  [vintd]  20 
vinte  e  um  [vinti'u]  21 
vinte  e  dous  22 
w»<e  e  tres  23 
f  in^e  e  quatro  24 
vinfe  e  ciwco  25 
vm^e  e  seis  26 
vinte  e  sete  27 
t?i«^e  e  oitofvinti  'oitu,  vtn  'tottuj 

28 
vinte  e  nove  29 
trinta  [trtntv]  30 
^nw^a  e  um  31 
^rm^a  e  oi^o  [trtntnmtu]  38 
quarenta  [kwv'rentv]  40 


cincoenta  [slM'entts]  50 

sessenta  [sd'sentv]  60 

setenta  [sd'tentv]  70 

oitenta  [of'tentvj  80 

noventa  [nu'veniv]  90 

cem,  cew^o  /se'?,  sentu]  100 

cew^o  e  Mm  101 

duzentos  200 

trezentos  300 

quatrocentos  400 

quinhentos  [ki'yentuf]  500 

seiscentos  600 

setecentos  700 

oitocentos  800 

novecentos  900 

wi^  1000 

wiZ  e  Mm  1001 

c^ows  >wiZ  2000 

cem  miZ  100,000 

t«m  mUhdo  [mi'Mu]  1,000,000 

(iois  milhoes  2,000,000. 

Mm  billido  a  milliard. 


§  97.     Observation. 

1.  f7m  and  6?ois  have  a  feminine  form:  w/wa  and 
(?Mas— -e.g.:  Tenho  um  nariz  e  tima  boca,  dois  olhos  e 
duos  mdos. 

2.  Cento  in  the  plural  is  also  inflected  like  an 
adjective:  -centos,  -centas — e.g.:  quatrocentos  soldados^ 
seiscentas  balas. 

Bemark.—A  hundred,  one  hundred,  if  not  followed  by 
another  number  (but  mil  or  milhao),  is  rendered  by  cem 
(without  um!):  a  hundred  men  cem  homens^;  but:  cento  e 
um  homens  101  men;  cem  mil  reis;  cem  milhdes  de  metres 
cubicos. — Cento  is  also  employed  as  a  substantive — e.g.; 

Quanta  custa  o  cento  d'estes  6vos?     Um  cento  custa  dois 
mil  reis,  mas  duzentos  custam  tres  mil  oitocentos. 
So  employed,  cento  must  be  preceded  by  the  article  and, 
if  followed  by  another  substantive,  joined  to  this  by  de, 

3.  Mil  is  never  preceded  by  um.^  It  must  be 
employed   to   render   the   English    expressions:    eleven 

^  Cem,  mU—AB,  indeed,  aoy  other  number,  marking  a  plura- 
lity— may  be  preceded  by  una,  umas,  which  means  some  or  about: 
Uns  cem  homens,  umas  cem  mulheres  =  some  (or  about)  a  hundred 
meo,  women. 


The  Numerals.  95 

hundred,    twelve  hundred,  etc.  mil  e   cem,    mil  duzen- 
toSj  etc. 

4.  The  expression  "in  the  year"  is  rendered  by 
no  anno  de  or  simply  by  em:  In  the  year  nineteen- 
hundred  and  eleven  =  no  anno  de  ^or  em)  mil  nove 
centos  e  onze. 

5.  The  number  one  being  preceded  by  another,  the 
substantive  follows  in  the  plural  form,  as  in  English: 
Mil  e  uma  noites  1001  nights. 

6.  The  units  may  be  joined  to  the  tenths  by  the 
conjunction  e  or  by  a  hyphen:  trinta  e  otto  or  trinta- 
oito,  vinte-um,  etc. 

7.  The  days  of  the  month  (except  "the  first,"  o 
primeiro)  are  expressed  by  cardinal  numbers,  preceded 
by  0,  a,  em  or  no  dia:  the  25*^  of  May  em  (or  no  dia) 
vinte  e  cinco  de  maio;  the  7*^  of  August  em  (or  no  dia) 
sete  de  agosto. 

Nasceu  a  dezoito  de  junho. 

He  was  born  on  the  18*^  of  June. 

In  official  writings  the  plural  is  usually  employed : 
Acs  vinte  e  quatro  dias  de  dezemhro. 
On  the  24*^  of  Decembre. 

Note.—T\iQ  names  of  the  months  are  Janeiro,  fevereiro, 
margo,  dbril,  maio,  junho,  julho,  agosto,  setemhro,  outubro, 
novenibro,  dezemhro.     They  are  written  with  a   small  letter. 

Trinta  dias  tern  novembro, 

Abril,  junho  e  setemhro; 

Vinte-oito  terd  urn, 

E  OS  outros  mais:  trinta  e  um. 

The  date  of  a  letter  is  either  given  as  in  English, 
as:  Lisbon,  the  4^^  of  February,  1911,  Lisboa  4  de 
fevereiro  de  1911  or:  Lisboa,  em  (or  a)  4  de  fevereiro 
de  1911.  "What  day  of  the  month  is  it?"  =  A  quantos 
estamos  de  mes?  It  is  the  2^*^  of  November:  estamos  a 
dais  de  novembro. 

8.  The  age  of  a  person  is  generally  expressed  by 
ter  .  .  .  annos  and  fazer  .  .  .  annos,  as:  How  old  are  you? 
=  quantos  annos  tem?  (or  less  familiar:  Que  idade  tern? 
Que  idade  e  a  sua?  Qual  e  a  sua  idade?)  I  am  56 
years  old  =  Tenho  56  annos. 


96  Lesson  15. 

Quando  faz  (or  vae^  fazer^)  annos? 

When  is  (or  will  be)  your  birthday? 

(Literally :  when  do  you  make  (or  when  are  you  going 

to  make)  /ears?) 
Fago  (or  vou  fazer)  annos  em  quinze  de  margo. 
My  birthday  is  on  the  fifteenth  of  March. 
Quantos  annos  faz  (or  vae  fazer)? 
How  old  will  you  be? 
Fago  (farei  or  vou  fazer)  doze  annos. 
I  shall  be  12  years  old. 

No  meu  dia  d' annos  or  no  dia  dos  meus  (vinte)  annos  .  .  . 
On  my  birthday,  on  my  twentieth  birthday. 
Minha  irma  vae  fazer  dezdito  a/nnos  no  mes  que  vem. 
My  sister  will  be  eighteen  years  old  next  month. 

'N.B.— Minha  irma  terd  18  annos  would  be:  my  sister 
is  about  18  years  old. 

Elle  casou  (promoveu,  morreu)  aos  25  annos  de  (sua) 

idade. 
He  married  (was  promoted,  died)  in  his  25^^  year. 

§  98.     The  multiplication  is  expressed  by  vez,  vezes 
(times)  — e.g.: 

Quatro  vezes  cinco  (sSo)  vinte. 
Four  times  five  are  twenty. 

Some  (or  about)   30,   40,   etc.  is:  uns  trinta,  quarenta, 
or  trinta  (quarenta)  e  tanios. 

§  99.     Present  Tense  of  a  regular  Verb  of  the 
third  Conjugation  (in  in)  dividir  [ddV9dir^]  to  dirfde. 

Divido  [dd'vidu]  I  divide  dividimos  [d^va'dimuf]  we  di- 

divides  [dd  'viddf]  you   divide  vide 

divide  [dd'vidd]   he,    she    di-      dividis  [ddvd'dij]  you  divide 
vides,  you  divide  dividem  [dd  'vidvi]  they  divide. 

Part.pres.:  dividindo  [dsvs  dtndu] . 

Part,  perf.:  dividido  [ddV9'didu]. 

Exercise:  Write  and  practise  the  Present  Tense  and  the 
Participles  of  the  following  verbs: 

diminuir  [dsmmu'ir]  to  diminish 

repartir  [rrdpvr'tir]  to  distribute,  divide,  part. 

cumprir  [kum'prir]  to  fulfil 

reunir  [rrdunir]  to  unite,  join. 

Ex.:  Bimintio,  reparto,  cumpro,  reuno,  etc. 
*  8<i  pers.  of  ir  to  go.  —  ^  to  do,  make.  —  '  see  p.  5,  N.B. — 


The  Numerals. 


97 


Palayras. 


A  arithmetica 

[arit'meitkvj 
as  4  operagdes\ 

d'arith-  \ 

metica,  I 

as  4  operagoes 

funda- 

mentaes 
sommar 

fsu  'mar] 
muUiplicar 

[muit^pli'ka)-] 
a  addigao 

[adi'svu] 
a  suhtracgao 

[uaubdtra- 

'sBuJ 
a  diminuigao    i 

[n&aminui-     I 

'svu]  J 

a  maltiplica- 

rao  [vmiiit/- 

jjlike  'svttj 
a  divisao 

[nd'9vi'zvuj 
0  prohlema 

[upru'blewv] 


arithmetic 


the  first  four 
rules  of 
arithmetic 

to  sum  (up) 
to  multiply 
the  addition 


the  subtraction 


the  multiplica- 
tion 

the  division 

the  (arithmeti- 
cal) problem 


a  parcella 

[vpvr'selv] 
a  somvia  [' somv] 

mais  [may/] 
igual  a 

[i  'gwdiv] 
a  prova 

fe  'prow] 
o  total  [utu'taij 
ao  total 

0  resto  /w  'rreftuj 
0  wimero  addi- 

tivofydativuj 
0  numero  sub- 

tractivo 

[si(b3tra'ticu] 
e  assim  em 

seguid^ 
o  systema 

[sif'tenvs]  de 

numera^ao 
0  valor 
povoado 
0  censo 
augmentar 

faumen'tarj 


the  entry 

the  sum, 

addition 
and,  plus   (lat.) 
equal  to 

proof 

the  totality 
in  the  whole  • 
the  rest 
the  minuend 

the  subtrahend 


and  80  on 

the  system  of 
numaration 

the  value 
populous 
the  census 
to  increase. 


38.  Leitura. 

A  liguo  d' arithmetica. 

As  quatro  opera(j6es  fundamentaes  da  arithmetica  sac  as 
seguintes:  —  sommar,  diminuir,  multiplicar  e  repartir,  —  ou 
addi^ao^  subtracQao,  multiplica9ao  e  divisao.  —  Exemplo  de 
uma  somma:  tenho  seis  (6)  ma^as  e  dao-me  mais  quatro  (4): 
com  quantas  ma^as  fico?  Resolve-se  pela  somma:  6  mais  4, 
dez  (10).-  Fico  com  10  ma^as,  —  6  chama-se  uma  parcella: 
4  e  outra parcella;  10  e  a  somma  ou  total.  Outro  exemplo: 
vamos  reunir  os  numeros  sete  centos  e  trinta  e  seis  (736)  e 
quatro  centos  e  vinte-um  (421)  n'um  so  numero:  a  somma  ^ 
mil  cento  e  cinquenta-sete  (1157);  isto  e:  736  mais  421  e 
igual  a  1157.  Este  ultimo  numero  e  formado  de  4  algaris- 
mos,  dos  quaes  o  ultimo^  7,  indica  as  unidades,  que  formam 
a  primeira  columna;  o  penultimo,  5,  a  classe  das  dezenas  ou 
a  segunda  columna;  o  antepen ultimo,  1,  a  das  centenas  ou 
terceira  columna;  e  o  primeiro  a  dos  milhares  que  vem  a  ser 
a  quarta  columna.  —  Agora  vamos  fazer  uma  subtracgao, 
tirando  do  numero  oito  mil  quatro  centos  e  sessenta-oito  (8468) 
Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  7 


98  Lesson  15. 

o  numero  cinco  mil  trezentos  e  vinte-um  (5321).  0  primeiro 
numero  e  o  additivo,  o  segundo  o  snbtractivo,  e  o  resto  6 
tres  mil  cento  e  quarenta-sete  (3147).  Para  fazer  a  conta 
dizemos  assim :  de  8  tirando  1  ficam  7;  de  6  tirando  2  ficam  4; 
de  4  tirando  3  fiea  1  etc.  Podemos  tambem  operar  dizendo 
assim:    1  para  8,  7;   2  para  6,  4;  3  para  4,  1;  5  para  8,  3. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  Pao  Nosso.) 

39.  Exercise. 

We  have  ten  fingers  on  our  two  hands  and  ten  toes 
on  our  two  feet;  we  may  (=  podemos)  therefore  say  that 
ten  is  a  natural  number  for  numeration,  and,  as  every  one 
knows,  ten  is  the  number  on  which  our  system  of  numeration 
is  based.  Ten  thousand  plus  one  thousand  plus  one  hundred 
plus  ten  plus  one,  is  written  11,111,  that  is:  eleven  thou- 
sand one  hundred  and  eleven.  The  first  number  on  the  right 
signifies  so  many  units,  the  next  to  the  left  so  many  hun- 
dreds, the  next  so  many  thousands,  and  so  on,  the  value 
of  each  place  increasing  tenfold  (see  §  106),  as  we  go  from 
right  to  left.  Thus  200,000  -f  40,000  -f  5000  +  700  +  90  -f  3 
is  two  hundred  and  forty-five  thousand  seven  hundred  and 
ninety- three,  245,793. 

At  the  census  of  1905  the  population  of  the  ten  most 
populous  towns  of  the  world  was  the  following:  1.  (see  §  106) 
London,  with  4,715,000;  2.  New  York  with  3,476,000; 
3.  Paris  with  2,764,000;  Berlin  with  2,040,000;  5.  Vienna 
with  1,870,000;  6.  Tokio  with  1,820,000;  7.  Chicago  with 
1,699,000;  8.  Philadelphia  with  1,294,000;  9.*  St.  Petersburg 
with  1,265,000;  10.  Constantinople  with  1,125,000  inhabi- 
tants. —  As  Portugal  at  the  census  of  the  year  1900  has 
5,423,132  inhabitants,  that  whole  country  has  only  about 
708,000  more  than  the  capital  of  England. 

Gonversa^ao  com  um  menino. 

0  menino  em  que  dia  e  mes      Fa^o  annos  em  25  de  maio. 

faz  annos?  — 
Entao   ainda    nao   fez    annos      NSo  fiz   ainda,   hei  de  faz^l- 

n'este  anno?  os  no  proximo  m6s. 

Seu  irmao  ja   tem   16  annos      Ja,    sim,  minha    senhora;   ja 
feitos?  OS   fez  ha   quinze  dias,  em 

18  de  mar^o. 
Quantos    annos   tem    (a)    sua      Tera    21    annos;    nasceu    em 
prima  Dona  Virginia?  1889.     E  verdade  (indeed), 

vae   fazer   22   no  m6z   que 
vem. 


The  Numbers, 


Ha  quantos  annos   o  menino 
ja  vae  a  escola? 


Quantos  alumnos   ha  na  sua 

classe  ? 
Nao  ha  classe,  em  que  o  nii- 

mero  dos  alumnos  chega  a 

cem? 
A  que  hora  comeQam  as  aulas  ? 


Entrei  (/  entered)  no  primeiro 
de  abril  do  anno  passado, 
logo  (so)  ha  pouco  mais  de 
um  anno  que  ando  (J  go) 
na  escola. 

Havera  50  e  tantos. 

Nao  ha,  nao,  minha  senhora; 
o  maximo  e  de  60;  somos 
ao  todo  519  em  toda  a  escola. 

No  verao  come^am  as  7,  e  no 
inverno  as  8. 


Sixteenth  Lesson.    Li?ao  decima  sexta. 

The  Numbers. 
IL  Ordinal  Numbers.     ]V^umet*os  ordinaes. 

§  100.  The  ordinal  numbers  are  formed  out  of 
the  cardinal  numbers  and  considered  adjectives— i.e., 
they  are  subject  to  the  same  inflection  (feminine  and 
plural  form):  primeiro,  -a,  -os,  -as.  Their  formation 
from  the  units  is  altogether  irregular;  there  are  besides 
also  some  modifications  preceding  the  termination  -esimo 
added  to  the  number  beyond  vinte,  as  will  be  seen 
by  the  following. 

The  ordinal  numbers  are  generally  put  before  the 
noun;  they  are: 

0 primeiro  [prim'viru]  the  1^^ 
0  segundo  [sd'gtmdii]  the  2"<^ 
0  terceiro  ftdr'svmij  the  3^*^ 
0  quarto  [kwartu]  the  4^^ 
0  quinto  [JcTntu]  the  5^^ 
0  sexto  [stnftu]  the  6*^ 
0  setimo  [setimu]  the  7^^ 
0  oitavo  [oftavu]  the  8^^ 
0  nono  [nonu]  the  9*^ 
0  decimo  ['desmu]  the  10*^^ 
0  undecimo  or  decimo  primeiro, 

0  onseno  [d'eenu]  the  11*^ 
0  duodecimo  [duu'destmu]   or 

decimo  segundo  the  12*^^ 
0  decimo  lerceiro  the  13^^ 


0  decimo  quarto  the  14'^ 
0  decimo  quinto  the  15^^ 
0  decimo  sexto  the  IG*"^ 
0  decimo  setimo  the  17*^' 
0  decimo  oitavo  the  18*^ 
0  decimo  nono  the  19*^ 
0    vigesimo    [vi'jeeimu,    vige- 

simu]  the  20'!^ 
0  vigesimo  primeiro  the  21** 
0  trigesimo  [tri'geeimu,  jesimu] 

the  SOtii 
0  quadragesimo    [kuvdrv  — ] 

the  40^^ 
0  quinquagesimo  [hwikwv  — / 

the  50t>^ 

7* 


100  Lesson  16. 

0  sexagesimo   (aehsv  —]  the  o  quadrigenUsimo  the  400^^ 

60*^  0  qumgentesimo  [kwi^ent  — ] 
0  8eptuagesimo  [septuv  —]  the  the  500*^ 

70*^  0  sexcentesimo  [sefsm'tezimu] 
0  octog^simo  [oUu  —]  the  80^^^  the  600*^ 

0  nonagesimo  [nonv   —]  the  o  septingentesimo  the  700*^ 

9(X<^^  0  octingentesimo  the  800^ 

0  centisimo  [sen'tejsimu,  sen-  o  nonigentesimo  the  900*^ 

'tesimuj  the  100*^  o  millesimo  the  1000^^ 

0  centisimo  primeiro  the  101 ''^  o  millionisimo  the  1,000,000**^ 

0  ducentesimo  the  200^*^  o  penuUimo  the  last  but  one 

0  trecentisimo  the  800**^  o  ultimo  the  last. 

§  101.    Use  of  the  Numbers. 

1.  To  distinguish  monarchs  of  the  same  name, 
ordinal  numbers  are  used  as  for  the  units,  hke  in 
EngHsh,  but  without  the  article— e.g.:  Eduardo  Setimo; 
Dom  Manuel  Segundo,  Dom  Pedro  Quarto.  With  the 
tens  the  cardinal  numbers  are  generally  employed :  Luis 
Quatorze;'  but  Henrique  Trigesimo  segundo  de  Reuss. 

2.  Tq  catalogue  books,  chapters,  etc.,  cardinal  as 
well  as  ordinal  numbers  may  be  employed ;  in  this  latter 
case  they  generally  follow  the  noun:  Tomo  segundo  or 
dois;  capitulo  vigesimp  terceiro  or  vinte-tres;  pagina  de- 
cima  oitava  or  desoito. 

3.  Fractious  (fracgdes)  are  mostly  expressed  by 
a  .  .  .parte — e.g.:  a  terga,  quarta,  quinta parte;  as  quatro 
deci^nas  (partes)^  etc.  They  may,  however,  also  be  ex- 
pressed by  the  substantivated  ordinal  numbers — e.g.: 

(  meio,  meia  (without  the  ^U  um  quarto 

Va  I       article)  ^/t  tres  sHimos 

\  (a)  metade  '/lo  sete  dScimos 

Vs  um'terQO  '/a  tres  oitavos. 

Partly  is  em  parte;  for  the  most  part  =  pela  maior  part. 

Examples. 

Half  a  meter  of  cloth  meio  metro  de  panno. 

Half  a  bottle  of  wine  meia  garrafa  de  vinJio. 

I  got  half  of  the  money  recebi  (a)  metade  do  dinheiro. 

6\/a  metres  of  linen  seis  meiros  e   meio  de  panno  de 

lin?io. 
2Va  yards  of  silk  duas  varas  e  meia  de  sMa. 


The  Nnmbera.  101 

4.  Fractions  smaller  than  a  tenth  sc^  vS»)met:'mes 
formed  by  adding  -avo  to  the  cardinal  numbers,  as: 
*/ii  um  on^avo  (better:  um  undecimo,  uma  undecima 
parte  or  uma  decima  prinieira  parte ;  ^/so  tres  dnquentavos. 

5.  The  decimal  numbers  (niimeros  decimaes)  are: 
Vio  um  decimo  Viooo  um  millesimo 

Vioo  um  centesimo  Vioooo     um     decimo-millesimo 

etc. 
or  uma  decima,  centesima,  millesimal  parte,  etc. 

§  102.     Biyision  of  Measures  and  Weights. 

0  metro  ['mstru]  the  metre 

0  decimetre  [dd'sim9tru]  the  decimetre 

0  centimetro  [sen'timdtru]  the  centimetre 

0  millimetro  [md'limstru]  the  millimetre 

0  decdw^tro  [dg'kamdtruj  the  decametre 

0  hectometro  [ek'tomstruj  the  hectometre 

a  medida  linear  [mddidv  lint'ar]  the  lineal  measure 

a  medida  de  superficie  a  superficial  measure 

a  medida  de  volume  the  cubic  measure 

a  medida  de  capacidade  [Tcvpvsi'dad?]  the   measure  of 

capacity 
a  medida  dp  peso  [pesu]  the  measure  of  weight. 
0  gramma  ['grvmv]  the  gram 
0  lcilo(gramma)  [kilu  grvmv]  the  kilogram 
0  decigramma  [desi'grvmvj  the  decigram 
0  centigramma  [senti' grvmv]  the  centigram 
0  decagramma  the  decagram 
0  hectogramma  the  hectogram 
0  metro  quadrado  the  square  metre 
0  mstro  cubico  the  cubic  metre 
0  litre  I'litru]  the  liter 
0  deciHtro  [d'lSQ'litru]  the  deciliter 
0  hectoiitro  fehtD'Htru]  the  hectoliter 
a  tonelada  [tunp'lada]  (=  13V2  quintaes)  the  tun 
0  quintal  fktn'tai]  the  Portuguese  quintal  (of  58®/i  kilos) 
0  quintal  metrico  two  hundredweights. 

§  103.     Division  of  Time. 

Names  of  the  Days. 

Domingo  [du'mtgu]  Sunday  quinta  feira  Thursday 

segunda  feira  [fvtrv]  Monday  sexta  feira  Friday 

terga  feira  Tuesday  sabbado  ['subvduj  Saturday. 
quarta  feira  Wednesday 


10*2  Lesson  16. 

'  *  '     §  104.     Observations, 

1.  On  Monday,  on  Tuesday,  etc.  is  na  segunda 
(feira),  etc.  or  only  segunda  feira,  etc.;  feira  is  often 
omitted.  You  may  also  write  with  a  hyphen :  segunda- 
feira,  terga-feira,  etc. 

2.  The  names  of  the  days  are  written  with  a  small 
letter. 

3.  For  the  dates  see  §  97,  7. 

4.  The  hours  of  the  day  are  expressed  by  the 
cardinal  numbers: 

'What  o'clock  is  it?     Que  horas  sdo? 

It  is  one  o'clock,  half  past  one  e  uma  hora,  e  kora  e 

meia. 
It  is  two  o'clock  sdo  duas  horas. 
It  is  half  past  three  sdo  tres  (horas)  e  meia. 
It  is  a  quarter  past  4  sdo  quatro  (horas)  e  (um)  quarto. 
At  what  o'clock  a  que  hora(s)? 
At  7,  8,  9  (o'clock)  as  sete^  oito,  nove  (horas). 

It  is  a  quarter  «&t  5  H^  ^*«^^  T"^'  ^'^  ^'^''^''• 
J.L    o  a  4uaxtoi  pnm.  ^  ^  g  ^^  quarto  para  as  ctnco. 

It.  is  noon  e  meio-diaf  sdo  as  doze  da  noite. 

It  is  midnight  S  meia  noite,  sdo  as  doze  do  dia. 

About  noon  pelo  meio  dia. 

About  one  o'clock  pela  uma  hora. 

About  2  o'clock  pelas  duas  horas. 

The  train  starts  at  ten  minutes  to  7  o  combdio  sae  as 

7  menos  10. 
It  is  striking  ten  o'clock  ddo  or  estdo  a  dar  des  horas. 
Has  it  already  struck  eleven?     Jd  deram  as  onze? 
It  will  strike  immediately  . . .  vdo  dar  agora  (doze  horas). 
It  has  just  struck  eight  acabam  de  dar  as  oito. 

5.  Indicating  a  day-time  by  a  certain  hour,  the 
Portuguese  says:  da  manhd,  da  iarde,  da  noite — e.g.: 
as  dee  da  manhd,  da  noite;  as  quatro  da  tarde,  at  ten 
o'clock  in  the  morning,  at  night;  at  four  in  the 
afternoon.  If  the  day-time  is  not  precisely  indicated, 
he  says  de  manhd^  de  tarde^  etc.,  or  pela  manhd^  pela 
tarda,  etc.,  in  the  morning,  in  the  afternoon:  Lri  dt' 
tarde^  I  shall  go  in  the  afternoon. 

6.  The  expressions:  a  quarter  of  a  year,  half  a 
year,  etc.,  should  be  rendered  by  three  months,  six 
months,  etc.,   as:  tres  meses,  seis  meses  (ov  meio  anno), 


The  Numbers. 


108 


nove  nieses,  etc.     A  week :  uma  semana  or  oito  dias.     A 
fortnight,  (iiiinze  dias. 

§  105.    The  numeral  adverb  is  expressed  by  the 
corresponding  ordinal. 

First(ly)   is  primeiro   or  prinieiramente  or  em  primeiro 

lugar. 
Secondly   is  segundo   or  segundamente  or   em    segundo 

lugar. 


UOi 

rdl 


Thirdly  is  ierceiro  or  ierceiramente  or  em,  terceiro  lugar. 


Palayras. 

A  parte  inteira 

the  whole 

a  linha  ['UpeJ 

the  line 

a  parte  deci-     i 

fractional 

avatiar 

to  value 

mal                1 

number, 

[vvelt'arj 

a  dizima 

decimal 

0  conjtincto 

the  totality 

['dizimv] 

fraction 

!        [ko'juntoj 

a  operagao 

a  ajuda 

the  help 

decimal 

the  decimal 

[v'swyvi 

a  operagao 
de  dizima 

operation 

a  jJOTQcio 

the  portion 

[pur'svu] 

ao  contrario  de 

to  the  con- 

seccos [sekiif] 

dried  fruit 

trary  of 

0  feijao 

the  bean 

conmstir  de,  em 

to  consist  of, 

[fei'svu] 

in 

a  balanga 

the  wages 

separar 

to  separate 

[bu'lvnsvj 

a  virgula 

the  comma 

0  anno  hissexto 

the  leap-year 

['virgulul 

fbt'svtftuj 

a  casa 

the  partition, 

intercalado 

intercalary 

class 

[intjrkv'la&u] 

r 

cada  um 

each  (one) 

0  seculo 

the  century 

a  letra 

the  type 

f'sektduj 

0  systema 

the  metrical 

a  era  ['erv] 

the  Christian 

metrico  [sif- 

system 

christao 

era 

'temv  'mstrikitj 

0  solsticio 

the  solstice 

0  meridiano 

the  meridian 

[soif'tistuj 

[nidrd&j  'mm] 

0  equindxio 

the  equinox 

terrestre 

terrestrial 

[iki  'nokstuj 

[tar  'rsftraj 

bastar 

to  be  sufficient 

0  globo  fgloduj 

the  globe 

a  primavera 

Spring 

terrestre 

fprimv  'vervj 

rndicar 

to  indicate 

0   verao             | 

[tndiJcarJ 

[vyi-vu] 

Summer 

0  guadrante 

the  quadrant 

0  estio  [}f'tiu]  J 

[ktov'  &rviiti)J 

0  outomno 

Autumn 

derivar 

to  derive 

[o  'tonuj 

medir 

to  measure 

0  inverno 

Winter 

a  saber 

namely 

[tvernu] 

a  exte^isdo 

the  extension 

a  Pascoa 

Eastern 

ft/ten  'svuj 

f'pafkmj 

104                                           Lesson  16. 

0  Pentecostes        Whitsuntide 

!    arranjar 

to  arrange, 

[pentykoftif] 

1 

procure 

0  dia  do  anno    NewYear^sDay 

1    em  malar 

to  embale 
the  Dox 

novo  or  do 

1    a  mala  ['main] 

amw  bom 

1    a  guia  f'givj 

the  luggage- 

darashoas  festas  to  send  the 

ticket 

(pelo   anno          greetings    of 

vou  fvouj 

I  go,  am  going 

novo,  pela            the  season 

vd  [vsl] 

go! 

Pdscoa,  pelo 

ate  logo              \ 
[vtelogu] 

Natal) 

till  presently. 

0  Natal  [itr?'taij  Christmas             j 

ate  jd  /jay       1 

levar                    to  take                | 

40.  Leitura. 

0  systeniQ,  decimal  ou  metrico. 

Ac  contrario  do  niimero  inteiro,  o  qual  tern  so  uma  parte, 
o  mimero  decimal  consiste  sempre  de  duas  partes,  separadas 
per  uma  virgula.  A  parte  que  fica  a  esquerda  da  virgula, 
cbama-se  parte  inteira;  a  que  fica  a  direita  da  virgula, 
chama-se  parte  decimal  e  tambem  dizima:  e  cada  uma  das 
suas  letras  representa  uma  casa.  A  parte  inteira  indica  uni- 
dades;  a  parte  decimal  indica  frac96es  ou  partes  da  unidade. 
0  primeiro  algarismo  d'uma  parte  decimal  indica  d^cimas,  o 
segundo  indica  centesimas;  o  terceiro,  se  o  tiver,  indicara 
mill^simas ;  o  quarto  decimas  mill^simas.  —  0  syst6ma  metrico 
tem  per  unidade  o  metro.  0  metro  e  uma  medida.  Esta 
medida  e  igual  a  decima  million^sima  parte  do  quarto  (ou 
quadrante)  do  meridiano  terrestre.  Do  metro  derivam  todas 
as  medidas,  a  saber:  1.  as  medidas  lineares,  com  que  medi- 
raos  0  comprimento  ou  extensao  das  coisas:  das  linhas  por 
exemplo;  —  2.  as  medidas  de  superficie,  com  que  avaliamos 
no  sen  conjuncto  as  coisas  que  teem  ao  mesmo  tempo  com- 
primento e  largura,  como  um  campo;  —  3.  as  medidas  de 
volume,  com  que  avaliamos  no  seu  conjuncto  as  coisas  que 
teem  ao  mesmo  tempo  comprimento,  largura  e  altura,  como 
e,  por  exemplo,  uma  sala,  ou  uma  por9ao  de  lenha  ou  de  ma- 
deira de  comprimento  igual ;  —  4.  as  medidas  de  capacidade, 
com  que  medimos  liquidos:  por  exemplo,  vinho  ou  azeite;  e 
sficcos,  como  p.  ex.  trigo  ou  feijao;  —  5.  e  finalmente,  as 
medidas  de  peso,  com  as  quaes  avaliamos,  com  ajuda  de  uma 
balan^a,  o  peso  das  coisas. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  Pao  Nosso.) 

41.  Thema. 

The  Year  and  its  Divisions. 

The  first  day  of  a  year  is  New  Year's  Day.  The 
year  is  divided  into  4  seasons  (Spring,  Summer,  Autumn  and 


The  Numbers.  105 

Winter)  12  months,  (January,  February,  March,  April,  May, 
June,  July,  August,  September,  October,  November,  and  De- 
cember), 52  weeks,  and  365  days.  A  leap-year  has  one  day 
more  (=  a  wais)— namely,  366  days.  The  intercalary  day 
is  the  29*^  day  of  the  2°^  month,  which  is  denominated  Fe- 
bruary. (The)  September  was  formerly  the  seventh,  October 
the  eighth,  November  the  ninth,  and  December  the  tenth 
month  of  the  year ;  actually  (==  to-day)  these  months  are  the 
ninth,  tenth,  eleventh,  and  twelfth.  The  TAreek-days  are  for  the 
most  part  (pela  sua  maior  parte)  indicated  by  "feira"— i.e., 
fair,  whereas  the  Sunday,  as  the  day  of  the  first  fair^  is  not 
indicated  as  such  (=  como  tal),  but  as  the  day  of  the 
Lord  {domingo  being  derived  from  JDominus  the  Lord).  The 
week  has  7  days,  and  the  day  has  24  hours ;  every  hour 
counts  60  minutes  and  every  minute  as  many  seconds.  In 
the  year  take  place  two  equinoxes:  on  the  2]st  of  March  and 
the  2Z^^  of  September,  and  two  solstices :  on  the  22"<i  of  June, 
2  days  before  Saint  John's,  and  on  the  22"<^  of  Dezember, 
8^  days  before  Christmas.  On  Christmas,  New  Year's  Day,  and 
Easter  we  send  greetings  of  the  season  to  our  friends.  The 
31^^  of  December  is  the  last  day  of  the  year.  A  hundred 
years  form  a  century.  We  live  in  the  twentieth  century 
of  the  Christian  era. 

Conversa^ao. 

No  Hotel, 

A  que  boras  deseja  V«-  Ex''-       V^-  chame-me  as  sete  e  meia. 

ser  acordado? 
E   0   almoQo   a   que    hbras    o      Tres    quartos    de    hora   mais 

deseja?  tarde,  as  oito  e  um  quarto. 

ya.  Exa.  j^  yae  partir  no  com-      Vou.  V^.  arrange-me  um  trem ; 

boio  das  nove  e  dez?  quantos  minutos  leva  ate  a 

estaijao  ? 
Levara   doze  minutos  quando      Entao  basta   que   o  carro   ca 

muito.  esteja  as  nove  menos  cinco. 

E  a   bagagem  —  V^-  Ex«-  le-      Nao,    senhor.     Ja    esta    tudo 

va-a  no  carro?  emmalado;  as  malas  podem 

ir  ja  para  a  esta^ao.  0  senhor 
leve-as  para  baixo! 
Sim,  senhor.     Vou  ja  despa-      Quando    trouxer     (fut.    conj. 

cha-las  e  entregar-lhe  a  guia.  of    trazer)    a    guia^    traga 

Va    Ex^-    manda    mais    al-  (imper.  of  trazer)    tambem 

guma  coisa?  uma  chicara  de  cha! 

As  ordens  de  V*^  Ex^- ;  ate  logo !      Va  com  Deus !  ate  ja ! 


106  Lesson  17. 


Seventeenth  Lesson.  Ligao  decima  setima. 

Numbers  (Continued). 

III.  Mnltiplicatiye  Nnmbers. 

§  106.  The  multiplicatiyes  (numeros  muUipUca' 
tivos)  are: 

Simples  simple  o  ddbro  (de)  {  ,     , ,    ., 

duplo,  -a      \  ^^^^^^  0  duplo  (de)  /  ^^'^^^^  ^^^"' 

dob'rado,  -a  I  o   tripUcadOj   triplice,  pop.   o 
triple  threefold  tresdobro,  the  triple 

quadruplOf  -a  fourfold  (o)  sextuploi  septuplo,  dduplo, 
quintuple,  -a  fivefold  dScuplo,  centuplo  (the)  6,  7, 

0  inteiro  the  whole  8,  10.  100  fold 

miiltiplu  manifold. 

All  the  other  multiplicatives  are  not  used;  they 
are  generally  periphrased  (as,  indeed,  also  most  of  the 
mentioned  may  be)  by  the  numbers  of  repetition  (nu- 
meros Uerativos);  unia  vez,  duas  vezes,  etc. — e.g.  2Y.2 
=  4,  duas  vezes  dots  sdo  quatro.  Elle  e  cent  vezes  mats 
rico  do  que  eu,   he  is  a  hundred  times   richer  than  I. 

§  107.  The  most  important  collective  Numbers 
(numeros  coUectivos)  are: 

TJm  par  a  pair,  a  couple  (urn  par  de  luvas;  um  par  de 

magas) 
um  casal  de  rolos  a  brace  of  doves 
uma  duzia  a  dozen 
meia  dueia  half  a  dozen 
duzia  e  meia  one  dozen  and  a  half 
uma  groza  or  doze  dusias  a  gross 
uma  quineena  fifteen 
una  vintena  a  score 

uma  trintena,  quarantena  some  thirty,  forty 
uma  sessentena  threescore,  sixty 
um  quarieirdo  twenty -five 
uma  centena,  um  cento  a  (or  some)  handred 
um  milhart  um  milheiro  a  (or  some)  thousand. 


^  Vae,  present  of  ir  =  to  go :  pom,  vaes,  vae,  vdmos,  ides,  vdo. 

*  Fazer  to  do,  make,  is  irregalar:    Pres.:  fa^o,  fazes,  faz, 

etc.;  Pret.:  fiz,  fizeste,  fez,  fizemos,  fizestes,  fizeram.    Part.:  feito. 


The  Numbers.  107 

§  108.    The  Augmentativ^s  and  Diminutives. 

AugmentattVQS   [aumentvtivuf]  e  diminutivos 

[ddminu  'tivufj. 

As  the  ending  -issimo  modifies  the  adjective,  other 
terminations,  peculiar  only  to  the  Portuguese  langu- 
age, modify  the  original  meaning  of  substantives:  cer- 
tain terminations  add  to  the  noun  the  idea  of  some- 
thing unusually  big  (or  clumsy  or  grotesque),  they 
augment  some  quality  already  prominent,  while  others 
add  the  notion  of  littleness,  daintiness;  they  diminish  a 
quaUty  already  existing.  It  is  easily  understood  that 
the  former  convey  an  idea  of  antipathy,  while  the 
latter  indicate  one  of  sympathy  or  pity. 

§  109.  To  fonn  the  Augmentativos,  we  add  to  the 
noun  the  syllable  -ao  (fem.:  -owa),  sometimes  modified 
also  according  to  the  ending  of  the  substantive.  To 
Ibrm  the  Diminutivos,  we  employ  the  ending  -inho,  -inha 
or  -ito,  -ita.  Those  derivations  which  intercalate  a  -jst-, 
generally  denote  only  size  without  any  secondarj^ 
meaning— e.g.:  cadeirajsinha  =  a  little  chair,  while 
cadeirinha  means  a  sedan(-chair). 

The  employment  of  both  the  augmentative  and 
the  diminutive  modifications  takes  place  only  in  familiar 
intercourse,  and  may  be  avoided  by  a  foreigner.  Here 
we  bring  them  to  the  student's  notice  to  enable  him 
to  understand  those  words  and  for  the  sake  of  com- 
pleteness. 

1.  Augmentativos  (termination  -do). 
0  garrafao  [gvrrv'fvu]   the    great   bottle    (of    a  gar- 

rafa) 
um  hofetdo  [hufd'tvu]  a  heavy  slab  (of  a  bofetada) 
palavrao   [pvl^'vruu]  a  long    and    difficult    (also:    an 

ugly)  word  (of  palavra)  * 

0  casacao  [kvsv'Mu]  great-coat  (of  casaco) 
0    papeldo    [pvps'lnu]    thick     paper,     pasteboard     (of 

papel) 
0  papao  [pv'pvu]  bugbear  (of  papar  devour  or  papas 

pap) 
0  liomenzarrao  [omvjzv'rrvu]  the  great  (or   important) 

man 
0  mocetdo  [mus9'tvu]    \  big  fellow  {oimogo  young  man) 
0  rapa^do  [rrvpv'gvu]  /  great  boy  (of  rapae  the  boy). 


108  Lesson  17. 

6.  Diminutivos  (termination  -(z)inho,  -(z)ito,  etc.). 
Masculine.  Feminine. 

0  homenzinho  the  little  man      A  mulhersinha  the  little  wo- 
man 
a  mulherinha   the  intriguing 
woman 
0  fHhinho  the  little- son  a  filhinha  the  little  daughter 

0  rapazito,    o   rapasinho    the      a  rapariguita,  a  rapariguinha 

little  boy  the  little  maid 

0  caozinho  the  little  dog  a  cadellinha  the  little  bitch 

0  pohrezinho   the   little    poor      a    prohrezinha  the    poor   (or 
person  or  beggar  beggar)  maid. 

coitadinho,  -a  poor  darling! 

Familiar  language  also  adds  to  certain  adjectives 
and  even  to  adverbs  the  diminutive  endings.  J5  boni- 
tinha  she  is  rather  pretty;  estd  melhorzinha  she  feels  a 
little  better;  uma  casa  pequenina  quite  a  small  house; 
die  estd  grandinho  he  is  rather  tall  (for  his  age);  dla  e 
hoasinha  she  is  a  dear  little  thing. 

§  110.    Examples  from  Portuguese  Authors. 

Velho  tao  velhinho  nenhum  outro  havia  ... 
Para  cumprir  cem  annos  Ihe  faltava  um  dia, 
Ha  noventa  e  quatro  que  6ra  ja  pastor  \ 
Zagalzinho^  alegre,  desdfe  tenra  infancia. 
Ja  de  surraosito^  cheio  a  tiracol*  — 


Branqueadinho^  a  neve®  e  doiradinho^  a  sol. 

Gruia  0  jumentinho^  uma  velhinha  errante  .  . 

A  molheirinha*  atras,  o  jumentito  adiante! 

Descalcinha^^  e  pobre  .  . 

Pobres  de  pobres  (=  the  poorest  of  the  poor)  sao  pobresinhos  . .  . 

Alvas  ermidinhas^*  sob  azues  magaados^^  .  . 

Ao  filhinho  a  noite  naO  Ihe  causa  medo  .  .  . 

Uma  igrejasinha  que  6  como  um  pombaP^  .  . 

NSo  se  esJ^uece  da  vaquinha^*  loira^* 

Que  se  poz  de  joelhos  ante  a  mangedoira^*, 

Quando  nas  palhinhas^'  dormitava**  Deus**. 

*  Herdsman.  ^  shepherd.  '  bread-bag.  *  a  tiracol  in 
bandoleer-belt.  ■'  branqueado  whitewashed.  **  by  the  snow. 
^  doirado  pfilded— i.e.,  made  brown.  **  ojumento  ass.  *  moleira 
the  miller's  wife.  "*  descalga  barefooted.  '^  ermida  hermitage. 
'*  magoado  =  bruised ;  here  violet  blue.  "  dove-house.  '*  vacca 
cow.  '^  bright  yellow,  fair.  ^^  manger,  crib.  ''  pnlha  straw. 
**  slumber.     '®  Deus  for  Jesus.  * 


The  Ni 

imbere. 

109 

Palarras. 

0  multiplicando 

the  multi- 

tirar [tirar] 

to  subtract 

[multdpli- 

plicand 

0  ultimo 

the  last 

'kvnduj 

fuHimu} 

feito  [fvHu] 

executed,  made, 

0  penuUimo 

the  last  but 

done 

[upd'nuitimoj 

'      one 

0  multiplicador 

multiplier 

Q  antepenultimo 

the  antepenult 

[muit^plikv- 

[uvntdpd- 

dor] 

nuitimu] 

OS  factores 

the  factors, 

0  primeiro 

first 

[u/fa'torifj 

submultiples 

[pri'mviru] 

0  producto  geral  the  total  (sum) 

primeiro 

firstly 

0  producto  par- 

the  quota 

saber  f'svberj 

to  know 

cidl  [upru- 

seguinte 

following 

'ffutu  pvr- 

[sdglntd] 

'sfaij 

praticamente 

practically 

a  unidade 

the  unit 

['pratikv- 

[vuni&a&d] 

'mentej 

a  dezena 

the  ten 

dar  um  trago 

to  draw  a  line 

[v^d'zenv] 

['trasuj 

a  conta  [vlcdntv] 

the  account; 

por  baixo 

underneath 

bill 

[pur  baixuj 

a  centena 

figure  marking 

chegar  f/fgarj 

to  arrive,  reach. 

[vsen'tews] 

the  hundreds 

to  mount  to 

0  milhar 

figure  marking 

apurar 

to  make  clean, 

[umi'fiar] 

the  thousands 

[vpu'rar] 

to  obtain 

a  columna 

the  column 

a  virgula 

the  comma 

[TsJcu'lunv] 

['virgulv] 

a  tdboada 

the  multiplica- 

a potencia 

the  power 

[vtvbu'a&vj 

tion-table 

[pu'tesivj 

ddo-me  [dvumd]  they   give  me, 

0  numerador 

the   numerator 

I  am  given 

0  denominador 

the    denomina- 

resolver 

to  resolve 

tor 

[rrdzotver] 

0  resto 

the  remainder 

vamos  ['vvmuf] 

we  go;  here: 

valente 

brave 

we  are  going 

ao  par 

at  par 

to  .  .  .,    we 

0  principe 

the  Crown 

shall 

herdeiro 

Prince. 

fazer  [fvzer] 

to  make 

42.  Prolblemas  de  multiplicai^ao. 

Para  saber  multiplicar  ^  precise  saber  primeiro  a  ta- 
boada.  Eis  aqui  um  exemplo  de  multiplica^ao :  dao-me  de- 
zeseis  ma^as  por  dia  dnrante  qaatro  dias:  quantas  ma^as  me 
dSo  ao  todo?  Este  problema  resolve-se  pela  multiplica9ao. 
0  multiplicando  16  e  multiplicado  pelo  multiplicador  4.  0 
producto  6  egual  a  sessenta  e  quatro.  Vejamos  (Let  us  see) 
agora  come  6  practicamente  feita  a  multiplica9ao  seguinte: 
Trezentos  e  vinte-  e  oito  a  multiplicar  por  quarenta  e  cinco. 
Collooam-se   os   dois    factores    (nome    commum  do    multipli- 


110  Jjmmm  17. 

ihlwiMii'  do  ontro,  e,  tendo  dado  1 
:  dnco  vezes  oito,  qxiarenta. 
o  tiliBU  algHiBM^  zerO;  e  yao  quatro  (tr.:  we 
ftn);  emeo  foes  dots,  des,  e  qoatro,  qiiatorze;  escre- 
^VDOi  qoatro  e  vae  vbi  (=  «e  earrjf  mk);  cineo  vezes  tr^, 
qainze,  e  xim,  ittiw if,  Aporsmos  aasxzs  o  prixneiro  prodncto 
parcial,  e  mil  auatmdm  e  qiiarenta.  Depois  de  aporado  da 
o  Hgado  pso&Mto  paieial,  de  treaoiiot  e 


qoBiatze  nul  setecexttos  e  ses- 


eertft  pivte  d*nm  todo.     Ha  £rae- 
ao  w  <»iwfm  (==  are   written)  os 
dez  on  alguma  potendft 
d«  —  e  hwt^/Sm  -wwignm.    'Emqaajitoqiie  as   priznesaa 
nulUA  n'nma  Hniia  eom  s  psrte  iiieini,  MpBudas  d^ella 
pc7   Tuna    Tirgala,    as  iiftiiBM  i  niiwiaw  wi   cm  (se) 
o   imixierador  eomo  o   demmaadar  (lnMi2. 
wmm,  flwf  <2eM.X    com  am  trs^  eaJU^  9Dm  ^  =  dois 
i;  ^«  =  dnco  decxoio  atevos.    Urn  £»  i  van  TigMsa 
T%^ma  nona,  txigfiom  oa  tiig<iuiMi  primira  psrto 
de  am  mez.  Trindade  Co«Ilio:  Pio 


4S.  Exercise. 

fioir  Uttie  docs  cac  baif  <^  tiic  world  know  how  the 
Giker  Mtf  fifcs!  Baw  mmmj  mtOKm  ipgien  have  I  than  jofo, 
if  I  kcfte  ""/is  of  s  docai,  aad  jim  Ac  xccuBiider  ?  6  ia  three 
he  fsn^  pert  cT  S;  Imrccin  Oe  fiwth  part  of  8  ia  2, 

6  ii  3  tiiMC  2L  Twice  tve  liiMC  tfc  it  haif  ^  kimdzed. 


Iwmjma^  I  tiNHi^  tt«tt¥ch— iliwT  jno^  (^) 


twice  as  wise,  aad  aoieh 

s  ttoHmd  toMC  k^fiv  than  now.    Portagacse 

■Jijert  to  the  dcoicl  wpibtm :  a  hnadnd  w^ 

Um.  fwfnoBi  ■■¥■  «^  «0  r^,  and  s  tiioo- 

reis— i.e.,  »  aifflmi  oif  rfif — ^is  a  amCo.    An 

is  wonJi  aboot  fear  ilMwd  §fc  haadied  rn« 

tfcc  adhmfs  is  at  par.   Twenty  Hi»  are  a  «Mai  aad 

225  fifis  cooc^powl  to  a  nhitling,  wii^  atociooa  ec^respoada 

kiBgofPortogal,  Manuel  IL. 

to  Oc  flnoM  »  the  \^d[Yfbtmaj,  1908,  the  day 

Charles  L,   and  las  dd«^  brother, 

ttc  GkowB 


BLghteentli  Lesson.    lic&o  deoima  oitavi* 

He^xLlar  Yarte.     Verh^ 


§  111.  £t  the  tenumatioQ  of  dw^ioiBitife  nood 
e  di^mguii^  ^iree  difiBWiutlbnasrf  eonpqftfnii — ^til: 

Tlie  V^  oonj.  mith  the  infinitive^  «d£i^  m  >«r,  aa: 
"^a^pwBT  to  bay. 

The  ^^  eoDJ«  vi&  the  infimtiTe  cndimr  m  <€r,  as: 
^tder  to  adi 

The  S'^conj.  wi^  ^le  infinHrre  cndiii^  In  <«r,  as: 
iMUFUr  to  dqwit. 

^^  ^  — Theee  tcfxniDaticHis  hape  ahravs  die  tonoeai 


§  112.    That  part  <d  ^le  Tob  htfmt  tt 

iQaheredL    Tbdse  tamiDatioii  ktteR  idadi  c^anderiBa 
e  di£S»<eiit  petsoifts  and  teneas,  aia  ftddU  to  ^M  root 


112 


Lesson  18. 


§  113.      We  distinguish: 

1.  Forms  where  the  root  has  the  tonical  accent ;  and 

2.  Forms  where  the  termination  has  the  tonical 
accent. 

Every  verb  has  11  of  the  former — viz.: 
Pres.  ind. :  singular  and  S""^  pers.  of  the  plural  (4) 
Pres.  subj  :        „  „      „      „      „     „        „       (4) 

Imperative:        „  „      „      „      „     „        „      (3). 

All  other  forms   have  their  tonical  accent    on  the 
termination — e.g.,  compro,  but  comprdmos. 
§  114,     We  distinguish  further: 

1.  Primary  tenses  (raizes  da  formagao  dos  tenij^os): 

(a)  The  infinitive  (infinitivo  or  infinito). 

(b)  The  present  indie:  1^*  pers.  sing,  and  2"'^  per- 

sons sing,  apd  plur. 

(c)  The  preterite  (pretcrito  perfeito) ;  2^*^  pers.  sin^. 

2.  Derived  tenses  (tempos  derivados),  which  com- 
prehend all  the  rest  and  are  formed  as  follows: 

(A)  From  the  Infinitive:  1.  Present,  2.  Imperfect, 
3.  Perfect,  4.  Future  indie,  5.  Conditional,  6.  The 
two  participles. 

The  terminations  are  added  partly  to  the  stem, 
partly  to  the  infinitive. 

Indicativo. 


Inftnito', 

Gomprar: 

vender: 
partir: 


1.  Pres.   \2.  Pret.  imp.\S.  Pret. perf.l  4.  FtUuro. 

compr-ei        \  comprar-ei 
vend-i  \  vender-ei 

\part-i  Ipafiirei 


compr-o       \compr-ava 
vend-o         i  vend-ia 
part-o         \  part-ia 


5.  Condicional.  6.  Fart.  imp.  7.  Part.  perf. 

compr-ando    compr-ado 
vend-endo       vend-ido 
part-indo       part.ido. 


comprar-ia  (ov  compr-aria) 
vender-ia  (^or  vend-eria) 
partir-ia  (or  part-iria) 


(B)  From  the  Present  Indie.  1^^  pers.  sing.:  The 
Pres.  Subj.  by  changing  the  ending  o  into  -e  in  the 
1*^*  conj.  and  -a  in  the  2°^  and  S*"^  conj.;  and  from  the 
2nd  persons  sing,  and  plur.:  the  corresponding  persons 
of  the  Imperative  by   dropping  the  -s. 


Regular  Verbs. 


113 


Fres.  md. 
Compr-o : 

oend-o: 

part-o: 


1.  Pres.conj. 
compr-e 

vend-a 

part-a 


Pres.  ind. 

tu  compras: 
vos  compraes: 
tu  vendes: 
v6s  vendeis: 
tu  partes: 
vos  partis: 


2.  Imperativo. 

compra  (tu) 
comprae  (v6s) 
vende  (tu) 
vendei  (vds) 
parte  (tu) 
parti  (v6s). 


JVb^e.— The  3^<^  person  sing,  and  the  1^*  and  S^^^^ persons 
plur.  of  the  imperative  are  equal  to  the  same  of  the  subjunc- 
tive present,  except  that  the  subiect,  if  employed,  gene- 
rally follows  the  verb— e.g, :  compre,  venda,  parta  V^  JSx^,  o 
senJior,  etc.  Yet  it  may  also  preceed:  F«'  coiw/?re,  venda, 
parta!  The  negative  form  of  the  imperative  takes  also  the 
subjunctive  mood— e.g. :  Nao  fompres,  ndo  compreis!  Don't 
buy!  Nao  vendas,  ndo  vendaes!  Ndo  partas,  ndo  partaes! 
Ndo  partdmoSj  ndo  vendam  V^«  or  F^*  ndo  vendam! 

(C)  From  the  Preterite  perfeito,  2"*^  pars.  sing. 
(cf.  §  48),  by  changing  the  termination  -ste  into  -ra, 
-sse  or  -r,  we  form  the 


.=.. 

1.  Fret,  mais-que- 
perf. 

2.  Pret.  imp. 
conj. 

3.  Fut.  imp. 
conj. 

cmnpraste: 

vendeste: 

partiste: 

comprd-ra 

vende-ra 

parti-ra 

compra-sse 

vende-sse 

parti-sse 

compra-r 

vende-r 

parti-r. 

§  114.   First  Conjugation.   Infinitiyo:  Conviprar 
to  buy. 

A.  Simple  Tenses. 

Infinitive  pessocU. 
Para  eu  comprar  to  buy  (I)       para  nos  comprarmos  to  buy 

(we) 
para    tu    coi^prares    to    buy     para  vos  comprardes  to   buy 

(you)  (you) 

para  elle  comprar  to  buy  (he)     para  elles  comprarem  to  buy 

(they). 

Indicativo. 
Presente. 

Eu  compro  I  buy,  etc.  nds  comprdnio8  we  buy,  etc. 

tu  compras  vds  compraes 

die  compra  elles  compram. 

Portuguese  ConversatiOD-Grammar.  8 


114  LesBon  18. 

Imperfeito. 
Comprava  I  bought,  etc.  cowpravamoj*  we  bought,  etc. 

compravas  compraveis 

comprava  compravam. 

Preterito  perfeito  (definidoj. 

Comprei  I  bought,  etc.  comprdnios  we  bought;  etc. 

compra^ste  comprastes 

comprou  comprarani. 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito. 
Comprdra  I  had  bought,  etc.      comprdramos  we  had  bought, 
comprd/ras  comprdreis  [etc. 

comprdra  comprdrani. 

Futuro. 
Comprarei  I  shall  buy,  etc.         compraremos  we    shall    buy, 
camprards  comprareis  [etc. 

comprard  comprardo. 

Condicional. 
Compraria  I  should  buy,  etc.      comprariamos  we  should  buy, 
comprarias  comprarieis  [etc. 

compraria  comprariam. 

Imperativo. 
Compra!  buy  (thou)!  compremos  let  us  buy  I 

Compre  V,  Ex^-    (o  Senhor)!     comprae  buy  (ye)! 

buy!  (sing.)  comprem    (V^^  Ex^^)!    buy! 

^  (plur.) 

Imperativo  negativo.  . 
Nao  compres  (tu) !  Nao  compremos  (nos)  ! 

Nao  compre  (Y^)!  Nao  compreis  (v6s)! 

Nao  comprem  (V^^)! 

Conjunctivo  or  Subjunctivo. 

Preaente. 

Que  eu  compre  that  I  buy,  etc.      qiie  nos  compremos   that  we 

que  tu  compres  que  v6s  compreis     [buy,  etc. 

que  elle  compre  que  elles  compreni. 

Imperfeito. 
Se  eu  comprasse  If  I  bought,  etc. 
se  tu  compr€isses 
se  elle  comprasse 
se  nds  comprdssemos 
se  vds  comprasseis 
se  elles  comprassem. 


Regular  Verbs. 


115 


Futuro. 

Se  eu  comprar  If  I  shall  (or  am  to)  buy,  etc. 

se  tu  comprares 

se  elle  comprar 

se  nds  compflarnios 

se  vos  comprardes 

se  elles  comprar eni. 

Participio. 

Passado. 

Comprado  bought. 

Gerundio. 
Presente.  Comprando  buying. 

§  115.   Difference  between  Imperfeito  and  Pre 
terito  perfeito  {cf.  §  53).^ 
The  Imperfeito  is  employed: 


1.  If  t^   actions   are   repre-       1. 
sented  as  being  performed 

at  or  as  lasting  the   same 
time  (see  Ex.  1). 

2.  If  one  action  is  interrupted 
by  another,  the  Imperfeito 
denotes  the  action  that  was 
going  on  when  the  other 
began,  while  the  latter  re- 
quires the  Preterito  perfeito. 

3.  In  descriptions  of  character, 
opinion,  statCj'^manners,  and 
customs,  as  well  as  repre- 
senting an  action  as  often 
repeated  (see  Ex.  3  and  cf. 
§  120,  A  3). 

4.  The  Imperfeito  is  used  for  4. 
all  actions  that  do  not  im- 
mediately belong  to  the  re- 
lation, but  are  added  as  ac- 
cessory circumstances  or  the 
ovm  meaning  of  the  speaker. 


The  Preterito  perfeito  is 
employed : 

To  mark  a  time  positively 
fixed,  entirely  elapsed,  an 
action  quite  accomplished. 


2.  To  express  actions  following 
one  another,  interrupting 
others.  It  is  the  historical 
tense,  being  peculiarly  ap- 
propriate to  the  narrative 
style. 

While  the  Imperfeito  des- 
cribes, the  Preterito  perf, 
narrates  (cf.  2);  it  represents 
an  action  as  performed  only 
once. 


The  Preterito  denotes  a 
cJiangement  in  the  state  of 
things;  some  action  majck- 
ingsi  progress  of  the  events. 


3. 


1  As  these  rules,  already  given  for  the  most  part  in  §  53, 
are  very  important,  we  repeat  them  here,  completing  them  by 
adding  others, 

8* 


116  Lesson  18 

5.  It  marks  an    indefinite  or      5.  The  Preterito  marks  a  de- 
illimited  duration.  finite  and  limited  duration; 

one  without  any  reference 
to  another  action  or  state. 

6.  It  is  employed  in  a  hypo- 
thetical clause  (instead  of 
the  Conditional). 

7.  It  is  used  in  indirect 
speech. 

Remark.— The  Preterito  perfeito  is  one  of  the  most  im- 
portant, while  most  usual,  tenses  in  the  Portuguese  language. 
It  is  very  often  employed  instead  of  the  English  Perfect  (e.g., 
for  "I  have  bought"  eu  cowprei  of.  §  53,  B,  d).  More  details 
for  the  use  of  these  tenses  are  given  in  the  nineteenth  lesson. 

Examples. 

1.  Emquanto  o  cortejo  passava  pelas  ruas,   os  sinos 

tocavam. 
Whilst   the    procession    passed    through   the  jtreets, 
the  bells  were  ringing. 

2.  Eu  estudava  a  ligdOy  quando  tu  chegaste. 

I  was  studying  my  lesson  when  you  arrived. 

3.  Quando   estava   na  praia,    tomava  banhos   todos  os 

dias. 
When    I    was   at  the    seaside,    I    took   baths   every 

day. 
Eu  fui  d  praia,  mas  ndo,  tomei  banho. 
I  went  to  the  beach,  but  did  not  take  a  bath. 
EUe  falava  muito  alto  \  he  spoke  very    loud   (as  a 

I       habit) 
EUe  falou  muito  alto     i  he  spoke  very  loud   (on  a 
J       certain  occasion). 

4.  Chovia  or  estava  a  chover  it  was  raining. 

Choveu,  prindpiou  a  chover,   o  tempo  tornou-se  chu- 

voso. 
It  began  to  rain,  the  weather  became  rainy. 

5.  Eramos  amigos  we  were   friends   (and   are  so  still). 
Fomos  amigos  we  were  friends  (but  now  no  longer). 

6.  Eu  voltava  (instead  of:  voltaria),  se  me  mandassem 

chamar.  , 
I  should  go  back  if  I  were  sent  for. 

7.  EUe  disse-me  que  nao  pensava  em  partir. 

He  told  me  that  he  did  not  think  of  departing. 


Regular  Verba. 


117 


§  116.     Regular  Verbs  of  the  First  Conjugation, 


Abotoar  to  button 

ahrevi'ar  [vtrdviar]  to  shorten 

acahar  to  finish 
;  accordar  to  awake 

achar  [vfar]  \  ^    ^  a 

encontrar       f    ^ 

admirar  [vddmirar]  to  admire 

alisar  to  smooth 

apanhar  [vpuyar]  to  catch 

asseniar-se  to  sit  down 

atirar  com  to  fling 

avistar  [vviftar]  to  perceive 

banhar  to  bathe 

cacarejar  to  cackle 

calgar  to  put  on  (shoes,  gloves) 
f,  caminhar  [hvmiyar]  to  go, 
■       stride,  walk 

cantar  [kvniar]  to  sing,  crow 
^  cansar  to  tire 

chamar  [fvmar]  to  call,  to  be 
called 

collocar  to  put 

corar    [ko'rar]     to     bleach, 
redden 

deitar  to  lay  down 

deitar-se  to  lie  down 

deixar  [dvifar]  to  leave  off, 
t      let,  forbear 

deleitar  [ddvitarj  to  delight 

descansar  to  rest 

rfoir«r  fdot'rar]  to  gild 

encadernar     [ikvdornar]      to 
bind  (boohs) 

enflar  to  thread;  to  put  on 

enxugar  to  dry  (p.  p.:  enxuto) 

escovar  to  brush 

escutar  to  listen  to 

esfregar  to  rub 

espantar  [ifpvntar]  to  frighten 

estacar  fijMar]  to  stop 

es^icar  liftikar]  \  .       ,     ^  , 

es^irar  /J/-^?r4  f  ^^  ^^^'^^^^ 

/aZar  ffvlar]  to  speak 

/tar  to  spin 

frequent ar  to  attend 


gastar  [gvftar]  to  expend,  use, 

consume 
gorgeiar  [gurgiar]  to  warble 
ignorar  [ignurar]  to  ignore 
illustrar  to  illustrate 
mi^ar  to  imitate    - 
langar  to  throw 
Zat?ar  to  wash 
levantar-se  [hvvntars?]  to  rise, 

get  up 
Ze'i?ar  [Idvar]  to  take  (away) 
limpar  [Itmpar]  to  clean 
Zivrar  [livrar]  to  free 
Zo«?;ar  [lovar]  to  praise 
mandar  [m^ndar]  to  send,  to 

©rder 
ma«<?ar  chamar  to  send  for 
mudar  (de)  to  change 
nadar  to  swim 
oZAar  to  see 
passar  to  pass,  go 
P^^a**  em  \   .     .  , 
tomar        i  ^^  ^^^^ 
pendurar  to  hang 
pensar  fpesar]  to  think 
pentear  to  comb 
praticar  [pratikar]  to  practise 
precisar  to  want 
principiar  [prtstpt  'ar]  to  begin 
procurar  [prukurvr]   to    look 

for 
projectar  [prujdarj  to  intend, 

to  have  in  view 
quebrar-se   [kd'brarsd]   to    be 

broken 
receiar  to  fear 
recreiar  [rrgkrmar]  to  refresh, 

delight 
rec2^ar  [rrgkuzar]  to  refuse 
repar  [rrdgar]  to  water 
re^ar  to  pray 
salvar  [sa^var]  to  save 
sawar  [svnarj  '\o  cure,  heal 
sarar  [svrar]  to  heal 
stf/ar  to  soil 


118 

Lesson  18. 

tirar  to  take  off,  draw  out 

viajar  to  travel 

tomar  [tumar] 

to  take 

virar  to  turn 

trafar  to  treat,    deal    (with), 

voar  [vuarj  to 

% 

strive 

voUar  [voltar] 

to  return. 

Palayras. 

0  ruido 

the  noise 

a  bofboleta 

the  butterfly 

[rru'i&u] 

[burbu'letvj 

0  cdbide 

the  rack 

0  banco 

the  bench 

[kv'U&9] 

0  gftrgeio 

the  warbling 

0  casaco 

the  coat 

[gur's^iu] 

[kv'zaku] 

0  ouvido 

the  hearing, 

0  ccUete 

the  waistcoat 

[o  'vi&u] 

ear 

[ku'Utd] 

0  lavatdrio 

the  washing- 

OS  calgoes 

the  breeches 

[Ivvv'toriiiJ 

stand  * 

[kai'soif] 

' 

a  toalha 

the  towel 

as  ceroulas 

the  drawers, 

[tu'afiv] 
0  nd  [nv] 

[s9'rolvfJ 

pants 

the  knot 

a  camisola 

the  vest 

0  estabelecimento  the  swimming- 

fkvmi'zohj 

de  natagao 

school 

as  chinellas 

the  slippers 

0  natatorio 

the  bathing- 

[fi'n^lvf] 

place 

0  colarinho 

the  collar 

0  rnestre  de 

the  teacher  of 

[kulv'rijiu] 

natagao 

swimming 

a  gravata 

the  cravat 

poe 

put,  he  puts 

fgrv  'vatvj 

em  sequidu        \ 

0  toucador 
[tokv  'fforj 

the  dressing- 
table 

r      ''At 

[89  gtovj 
entao  fm'tvuj 

then,  after 
that. 

cuidadoso 

carefnl 

depots 

a  esteira 

the  mat 

[d^'poifj 

ft/'tvirnj 

48.  L< 

sitiira. 

Ao  deitar-se  e  levantar-se. 

Agora,  Jose,  deixa  de  regar  as  tuas  flores!  Sao  oito 
■loras  e  tempo  para  acabares.  Has  de  ir  (to  go)  deitar-te.  A 
Maria  ja  te  chamou,  ella  deseja  levar-te  a  cama.  Anda  depressa, 
mas  sem  ruido,  para  nao  acordares  teus  irmaozinhos.  Tira 
0  teu  fato,  mas  nao  atires  com  as  tuas  coisas  para  o  chao! 
Oiha  aquelle  cabide:  pendura  ali  o  teu  easaquinho,  o  collete 
e  as  cal^oes.  E  nas  costas  desta  cadeira  deitards  a  tua  camisa, 
as  ceroulas  e  as  meias.  Colloca  as  tuas  botas  ou  sapatos 
f6ra  da  porta  para  que  o  criado  as  limpe  antes  de^te  levan- 
tares.  As  tuas  chinellas,  essas  ficam  bem  ao  p6  da  cama. 
P5e  o  teu  colarinho  e  a  gravata  em  cima  do  toucador !  Assim 
encontrards  tudo  no  seu  lugar,  sem  que  precises  procural-o 
^manba  de  manha.  Jd  lavaste  as  maos?  Bem,  deita-te,  reza 
e  dorme! 


'   Regular  Verbs.  119 

Depois  de  ter  bem  passado  a  noite,  Jose  ^  accordado 
pelo  criado  que  o  chama:  «0  menino,  accordel  Levante-se! 
Sen  papa  ja  o  esta  esperando  no  jardim!  Ja  sao  sete  horas! 
E  e  verdade:  o  gallo  canta,  as  gallinhas  cacarejam  e  os  pas- 
saros  gorgeiam,  deleitando  os  ouvidos.  Jos^  esfrega  os  olhos, 
estica  as  pernas  e  salta  da  cama.  Elle  muda  de  camisa,  cal^a 
as  meias,  as  ceronlas  e  os  cal^oes^  enfia  as  chinellas  e  depois 
lava-se  bem  com  nma  esponja  ao  lavatorio.  Elle  usa  de 
muita  agna  fria  e  gasta  bastante  sab^o.  Elle  gosta  at^  to- 
mar  banho  de  manha,  mas  receia  que  leve  muito  tempo,  por- 
que  seu  pae  esta  a  espera  d'elle.  Esfregando-se  bem  com 
uma  toalha,  enxuga  a  cara  e  o  peito;  entao  pega  numa  es- 
cova  para  escovar  os  dentes,  e  com  um  pente  alisa  o  cabello. 
Depois  de  penteado  enfia  o  coUete  e  a  jaqueta,  abotoa  o 
colarinho  e  ata  um  Undo  no  na  sua  gravata.  Afinal  tira  as 
chinellas  e  calcja  os  sapatos  que  o  criado  j4  limpou  e  collocoii 
fora  da  porta  do  quarto.  Agora  esta  prompto  para  passar 
para  baixo  e  almo<jar  com  o  pae  que  em  seguida  o  acompanha 
a  escola.  Pois  o  Jos^zinho  freqiienta  uma  escola  de  meninos 
onde  trata  de  aprender  quanto  um  menino  precisa  saber. 
Mas  logo  que  as  aulas  acabam,  elle  toma  o  seu  fato  de  banho 
e  caminha  para  o  estabelecimento  de  nata<jao,  onde  ha  um 
grande  natatdrio  para  os  meninos  nadarem  debaixo  da  inspec^ao 
d'um  mestre  de  nata^ao. 

44.  Exercise. 

(a)  Read  and  write  the  first  part  of  43,  changing  the 
2^^  person  of  the  Imperative  into  the  3r<i— e.g. :  Agora,  Jos^, 
deixe  de  regar  as  suas  flores ! 

(b)  Read  and  write  the  2'^^  part  (from :  Depois  de  ter . . .), 
changing  the  Present  Tense  (1)  into  the  Past  Tenses  and  (2) 
into  the  Future. 

45.  Thema. 

Our  little  brother  went  to  bed.  He  took  off  his  things 
and  hung  them  (-as)  for  the  most  part  on  a  rack  behind  the  bed- 
room door.  But  his  shirt,  vest,  and  pants  were  carefully  put  on 
a  chair  near  the  bed,  while  the  slippers  and  stockings  remained 
on  the  mat  by  the  bedgide.  Before  he  lay  down,  he  took  a  glass 
of  milk  and  a  slice  of  bread  and  butter,  for  he  had  had  no  supper. 
He  had  passed  the  afternoon  in  the  garden,  watering  his  flowers 
and  catching  butterflies.  When  he  was  tired,  he  sat  down  on  a 
bench  to  rest,  ^nddelightedhis  (==  thejears  by  listening  to  the 
warbling  of  thr ftrSS"^  TferftS  tftHSglf'that  it  would  be  time 
to  finish  and  go  to  bed.  In  that  moment  his  (=  the)  mother 
sent  for  him,  ordering  the  maid-servant  to  take  him  [tr.  that  she 


120  Lesson  19. 

took  him)  to  bed.  As  by  working  in  the  garden  he  had  soiled 
(imp.  subj.)  his  clothes  and  boots,  the  man-servant  will  have  to 
clean  these,  while  the  maid- servant  will  brush  those.  When  little 
Joe  awakes  (fut.  subj.)  to-morrow  morning,  he  will  find  his 
things  clean  and  prepared. 

Conversa^fio. 

A  que  horas  ha-de  o  nosso  irmaozinho  ir  para  cama? 

Quern  0  leva  para  la,  ajudando-lhe  a  despir  (undress)^ 

Que  mais  tera  a  criada  que  (to)  fazer? 

Como  passou  o  Jose  a  tarde  ? 

Que  fez  (did)  elle  quando  estava  cansado  ? 

Que  (e  que)  tomou  antes  de  se  deitar? 

Onde  coUocou  as  suas  coisas?  (1)  a  jaqueta?  (2)  as  cerou- 

las?  (3)  as  meias?  (4)  o  collarinho?. 
Para  que  precisa  elle  de  collocar  tudo  bem  no  seu  lugar? 
Que  fara,  depois  de  deitado  e  antes  de  adormecer  {to  fall 

asleep)  ? 
A  que  horas  ha  de  levantar-se  ? 
Como  se  prepara  para  almo(jar  com  seu  pae? 
Para  onde  o  acompanha  depois  o  pae? 
Que  faz  o  Jos^zinho  na  escola  ? 
E  que  faz  depois  de  acabadas  as  aulas? 
Que  ha  no  estabelecimento  de  nata(jao? 
Como  nadam  ali  os  meninos  ? 
Os  meninos  gostam  de  nadar  e  de  tomar  banho? 
Que  fazem  depois  de  ter  tornado  banho? 
Que  parte  de  dia  6  a  melhor  para  tomar  banho  ? 
Ha  entre  os  meninos  algum  que  seja  bom  nadador  ? 
Porque  nao  se  recommenda  ficar  muito  tempo  na  agua? 


Mneteenth  Lesson.    Licao  decima  nona. 

Regular  Verbs. 

B.  Compound  Tenses  with  ter  (Active  Voice), 
and  ser  (Passive  Voice)* 

§  117.  As  the  compound  tenses  do  not  offer  any 
difficulty,  as  soon  as  we  know  the  auxihary  verbs,  we 
gave  their  forms  in  the  conjugation  of  those  verbs 
(of.  L.  3 — 6).  The  compound  tenses  of  the  auxiliary 
verbs  and  of  the  active  voice  of  the  transitive  verbs  are 
formed  by  aid  of  the  verb  ter,  joined  to  their  past  parti- 


Regular  Verbs.  121 

ciple,  while  the  passive  voice  is  formed  by  the  verb 
ser,  joined  to  the  past  participle.  Haver  is  scarcely  used 
in  compound  tenses,  but  for  the  compound  future  and 
conditional,  where  it  is  joined  to  the  following  infinitive 
by  de  and,  in  contrast  to  the  simple  future  or  condi- 
tional, expresses  a  necessity  or  intention. 

Hei-de  comprar  I  shall  (I  intend)  to  buy. 

0  sol  ha-de  derreter  a  neve  the  sun  will  (=  must)  melt 
the  snow. 

§  118.  Note.— The  intransitive  verbs  follow  on 
the  whole  the  same  rules  as  in  Enghsh.  Their  com- 
pound tenses  are  formed  by  ter;  yet,  if  you  want  to 
express  a  state,  the  result  of  an  action,  you  employ 
estar — e.g. :  o  comhoio  estd  chegado;  a  arvore  estd  cahida; 
a  casa  estd  voltada  para  o  sid  (lies  towards  the  south); 
a  industria  estd  decahida,  etc. 

§  119.     Ter  comprado  to  have  bought. 

Indicativo. 
Preterito  composto. 
Eu  tenJw  comprado  I  have  bought,  etc. 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito  composto. 
Eu  tvnha  comprado  I  had  bought,  etc. 

Future  composto. 

Hei  (or  tenko)  de  comprar  [l^^f^^Y intend  to  buy. 
terei  de  comprar  I  shall  have  to  buy. 

Futuro  anterior. 
Terei  comprado  I  shall  have  bought. 

Condicional  imperfeito. 
Hama  Cor  teria)  \  1  should  have  or  I  ought  to  buy, 
de  comprar       j  I  should  have  been  obliged  to  buy. 

Co^idicional  passado. 
Teria  comprado  I  should  have  bought. 

Conjunctivo  passado. 
Que  eu  tenha  comprado  that  I  have  bought. 


122  Lesson  19. 

Maia-que-perfeito. 
Se  eu  tivesse  comprado  if  I  had  bought. 

Futuro  anterior. 
Quando  eu  tiver  comprado  when  I  shall  have  bought. 

Infinitivo  e  Participios. 
Tassado. 
Ter  comprado  to  have  bought. 

Futm'o. 
Haver  (oy  ter)  de  comprar  to  have  to  buy. 

Participio  composto. 
Tendo  comprado  having  bought. 

§  120.  As  already  said,  the  Preterite  simples  is 
often  employed  instead  of  the  Prefcrito  perfeito  com- 
posto (the  English  "I  have  [done]"): 

A.  The  Preterito  simples  B.  The  Preterito  composto 

indicates :  indicates : 

1.  Something  belonging  to  the  1.  Something  belonging  to  the 
past:  elle  foi  professor  (he  past  and  still  continuing  in 
is  no  more).  the  present:   Elle  tern  sido 

professor  (he  is  so  still). 

2.  A  past  state :  esteve  muito  2.  A  still  lasting  state :  tern 
occupado  he  was  very  busy.  estado    muito   occupado  he 

has  been  very  busy. 

3.  An  isolated  singular  action  3.  A  habit  still  enduring : 
(even  when  repeated) :  Es-  Tern  escripto  com  regulari- 
creveu  algumas  vezes  he  dade  he  has  written  regu- 
wrote  sometimes.                           larly    (and    still    continues 

writing). 

Ex.:  '^Eu  fuQO  assim,  eu  tenho  feiio  sempre  assim,  in- 
conscientemente ;  e  o  que  escrevi  nuo  e  mais  do 
que  a  revelaC'do  do  que  tenho  sentido/'  (Trindade 
Coelho.) 

As  a  rule  you  may  recognise  which  tense  to 
employ  by  some  adverb  contained  in  the  clause: 

Havia   cinco  annos   que    era  professor  he   (then)   had 

been  a  teacher  for  3  years. 
Ha  cinco  armos  que  foi  professor  he  (then)  had  been  a 

teacher  3  years  ago. 
Ha  cinco  annos  que  tern  sido  professor  he  has  been  a 

teacher  these  3  years. 


Regular  Verbs.  123 

§  121.     Observations. 

(a)  The  interrogative,  negative,  and  interrogative- 
negative  forms  of  the  verb  may  be  formed,  as  sdready 
said,  by  the  transposition  of  the  noun  or  pronoun  after 
the  verb,  or  simply  by  the  accentuation  or  punctuation 
— e.g.:  Eu  compro.  Compro  (eu)?  Eu  ndk)  compro. 
Noo  compro  (eu)? 

(b)  In  the  regular  verbs  the  Infinitivo  pessoal  is 
equal  to  the  Futuro  do  Conjunctivo. 

§  122.  The  Passive  Toice  (VO0  passiva)  is  formed 
by  joining  the  auxiliary  ser  to  the  past  participle  of 
the  active  verb  (of.  L.  4J.  The  past  participle,  when 
coupled  with  ser,  is  considered  an  adjective  and  conse- 
quently agrees  in  gender  and  number  with  the  noun 
or  pronoun  to  which  it  refers,  even  when  the  verb  ser 
is  omitted: 

0  terxeno  foi  vendido  the  ground  was  sold. 

A  casa  foi  vendida  the  house  was  sold. 

Os  terrenos  foram  vendidos  the  grounds  were  sold 

As  casas  foram  vendidas  the  houses  were  sold. 

Note.     Instead  of  ser  we  may  employ  also  ficar: 
0  Uvro  ficoii  vendido,  etc. 

§  123.  If  there  be  several  subjects  belonging  to 
the  same  participle,  this  latter  takes  the  form  of  the 
plural.  If  the  subjects  are  of  different  gender,  the 
masculine  is  preferred-  to  the  feminine  in  modifying  the 
participle.  If  the  participle  follows  such  different  sub- 
jects, the  mascuUne  ending  is  applied  to  the  participle; 
if  preceding,  this  is  not  necessary. 

Foram  comprados  muitas  uvas  e  figos  (or  muitos  figos 

e  uvas). 
^As  uvas  e  os  figos   (que   foram)    comprados* no    mer- 
cado  .  .  . 

Note. — The  subject  being  v6s,  employed  for  a  single  per- 
son, the  participle  is  employed  in  the  singular ;  also  if  the 
subject  is  F^  Fx^,  F«,  etc.  the  participle  agi-ees  with  the  sex 
of  the  person  addressed: 

ya  ;Ex^.  senhor  Nogueira,  foi  convidado. 

F«  Fx^,  minha  senhora,  foi  convidada. 

Vos  sois  adorado,  Sen/wr,  pelo  ciu  e  pela  terra. 


124  Lesson  19. 

§  124.     Ser  chatnado  to  be  called  or  summoned. 

Indicativo. 
Presente. 
Eu  sou  chamado,  -a  I  am  called  or  summoned,  etc. 
tu  es  chamado,  -a 
elle  e  chamado 
ella  e  chamada 
Plur.  nds  somos  chamados,  -as 
v6s  sois  chamados^  -as 
elles  sao  chamados 
ellas  sdo  chamadas. 

Imperfeito. 
Fm  era  chamado,  -a  I  was  called  or  summoned,  etc. 

Preterito  absoluto. 
Eu  fui  chamado,  -a  I  was  or  have  been  called  or  sum- 
moned, etc. 

Preterito  composto. 
Eu  tenho  sido  chamado,  -a  I  have  been  called. 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito. 
Eu  fora  chamado,  -a  I  had  been  called. 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito  composto. 
Eu  tinha  sido  chamado,  -a  I  had  been  called. 

Eutu/ro. 
Eu  serei  chamado,  -a  I  shall  be  called,  etc. 

Futuro  composto. 
Eu  hei  de  ser  chamado,  -a  I  shall  or   must  be  called 
etc. 

Futuro  anterior. 
Eu  terei  sido  chamado,  -a  I  shall  have  been  called. 

Condicional  presente. 
Eu%eria  chamado,  -a  I  should  be  called,  etc. 

Condicional  composto. 
Eu  teria  sido  chamado,  -,a  I  should  have  been  called. 

Imperativo. 
Sii  chamado,  -«  (May  you)  be  called,  etc. 

Participle. 
Sefido  chamado,  -a  being  called,  etc. 


Regular  Verbs.  125 

Farticipio  passado. 
Tendo  sido  chamado,    -a  having    been   (or    as    I    was) 
called. 

Infiniti'co  passado. 

Ter  sido  chamado,  -a  to  have  been  called^  etc. 

Subjunctivo. 
Presente. 
Que  eu  seja  chamado,  -a  that  I  be  called. 

Imperfeito. 
Que  eu  fosse  cliamado,  -a  that  I  was  called. 

Preterito  composto. 
Que  eu  tenha  sido  chamado,  -a  that  I  have  been  called. 

Preterito  mais-que-perftito  composto. 
Que  eu  tivesse  sido  chamado,  -a  that  I  had  been  called. 

Futuro. 
Se  eu  for  chamado,  -a  if  I  shall  be  called. 

Futuro  anterior. 
Se  eu  tiver  sido  chamado,  -a  if  I  shall  have  been  called. 

§  125.  The  passive  voice  may  be  and  is  frequently 
expressed  by  the  active  form  with  the  pronoun  .se — i.e., 
reflectively;  thus: 

Com   a  farinha  de  milho   faz-se   a  brda  (=  e  feita  a 

broa). 
Out    of    the    flour  of  Indian    corn   is    made  bread   of 

maize. 

Yet  this  form  must  only  be  employed,  if  no 
ambiguity  result,  as — for  instance :  0  delinquents  enfor- 
cou-se  or:  enforcou-se  o  delinquente  would  be  rather: 
the  criminel  hanged  himself,  while  "was  hanged"  must 
be  rendered  in  this  case  by  "foi  (or  ficou)  enforcado." 

§  126.  The  preposition  "by"  in  the  passive  voice 
is  rendered  by  par, 

Palavras. 


a  tecedeira 

the  woman 

0  linho  ['lit)ul 

the  flax 

weaver 

0  no  ffiuj 

the  thread 

0  fuso 

the  spindle 

a  substancia 

the  substance 

em  seguida 

afterwards 

[subdf'tvsftv] 

[isygi&v] 

0  tear  [t}'ar] 

the  weavers 

depots  de 

after 

loom 

emfim  fifi] 

at  last,   finally 

a  urdidura 

the  warp(ing) 

126 


Lesson  19. 


assedar 

0  sarilho  \ 

a  dohadoura     \ 
secco  f'sekuj 
mctgar  [mv'sar] 
bater  [hv  'ter] 
o  mago  f'masuj 
a  magadeira 

[missv  'dvirv] 
espadelar 

[}fpv&9'lar] 
sedeiro 

[s^'&vtru] 
a  roca  [rrokv]  \ 
a  magaroca      \ 
estonietUar 

[}ftumen'tarj 
0  tomento 

[tumentu] 


to  hatchel 

the  reel 

dry 

to  break,  brake 

to  beat 

the  flax- brake 

the  flax-dresser 

to  swingle 

the  flax-comb 

the  distaff 
to  hackle 

the  awn,   chaff 
(of  flax) 


A  torre  [torrd]    the  tower 
severo  [sd'veruj  severe 
erguer  [ir'ger]    to  raise 
0  cabadelo  sandy  beach 

fkahv  '&elu] 
o  ierraro  the  terrace 

fte'rr&su] 
a.  descoberta         discovery 

fdiffcu'bsrtiij 
avangar  to  advance 

construir  to  construct 

f'kdftru'irj 
datar  to  date 

0  dnqulo  the  angle 

[vgiilu] 
0  hexdgono  hexagon 

fig  'zagunuj 
o  cupulo 


a  curttna 
[kur'tmvj 

a  ameia 
/» 'mvfvj 

grandioso 
[grvnd}'ozu] 

ornar  fur'narj 

0  escudo 


the  cupola 
the  curtain 

the  battlement 

grand 


a  estriga 

[if'trige] 
a  meada 

[mfadvj 
a  estopa 

[if'topv] 
grosseiro 

[gru'svyru] 
0  tecido  [td' ai&u] 
0  cabo  ['katuj 
ordinario 

[ordi  'nar}uj 
a  corda  ['kordej 
o  barbante 

[bTsr'bvntd] 
o  lengo  ['lesuj 

emquanto 
li'kwvntu] 


a  cruz  [krufj 
a  varanda 

/vB  'rvndv] 
0  arco  ['arkuj 
0  parapeito 

fpvrv  'pvituj 
rendilhar 

[rrendi' fiar] 
0  andar 
a  abdbada 

/» 'bobv&TB] 
0  pavimento 

Urreo 
a  nervura 

fnar'vurej 
entrelagar 

[irdrslv  'sarj 
0  ingresso 

[i'gresuj 
0  accesso 

[v'sesuj 
a  escada  de 

caracol 

[kerv'koij 
a  guarita 

[giw  'rits] 


the  strike  (of 

flax) 
the  skein 

the  (flax-)tow 

coarse 

the  web,  tissue 
cable,  rope 
ordinary 

the  cord,    rope 

the  pack- 
thread, twine 

the  handker- 
chief 

whilst. 


the  cross 
the  veranda 

the  arch,  bow 
the  parapet 

to  indent 

the  story 
arched  roof, 

vault 
the  ground 

floor 
the  nervure 

interlace 

ingress 


winding    stairs 


to  ornate  j    a  guarita  the  watch- 

the  shield  [gvm'ritv]  tower. 

0  lado  da  terra  the  landside       | 

46.  Leitura. 
0  linho. 
0  linho  e  uma  planta  baixa  de  fl6r  azul.  Das  hastes  d'essa 
planta  util  e  tirade  urn  fio.    Esse  fio  6  a  substancia  de  que  6 


Regular  Verbs.  127" 

feito  0  panno  de  linho.  Depois  de  estarem  bem  seccas,  as 
hastes  da  planta  sao  ma^adas  ou  batidas  a  ma^o  pelas  ma(ja- 
deiras.  Em  seguida  sao  espadeladas,  depois  levadas  ao  sedeiro 
e  emfim  fiadas  na  roca.  0  linho  ha  de  ser  espadelado  para  ser 
estomentado  ou  para  se  H?e  (of  it)  tirarem  os  tomentos  que  6 
a  estopa.  Os  denies  de  ferro  do  sedeiro  separam  o  linho  da 
estopa :  esse  fica  assedado.  Esta  e  mais  grosseira  que  o  linho ; 
tambem  e  fiada  na  roca,  e  d*ella  serSo  feitas  cordas  e  bar- 
bantes,  tecidos  grosseiros,  cabos  ordinarios  etc.  Com  o  linho 
assedado  fazem-se  as  estrigas,  e  estas  sao  fiadas  na  roca.  Ao 
fiar,  fazem-se  no  fuso  as  ma^arocas.  Das  ma^arocas  fazem-se 
meadas  no  sarilho.  As  meadas  vao  a  lavar  (go  or  are  to  be 
washed)  ;  depois  sao  cosidas  com  cinza ;  outra  vez  sao  lavadas ; 
e  em  seguida  postas  ao  sol  a  (=  to)  c6rar.  Depois  de  en- 
xutas,  as  meadas  vao  a  dobadoura,  para  se  fazerem  os  novellos. 
Os  novellos  v§o  para  a  tecedeira,  e  esta  faz  com  elles  a  urdi- 
dura  no  tear.  Em  seguida,  lan<jando  o  fio  por  entre  a  urdidura, 
a  tecedeira  faz  o  panno.  Para  tudo  isto  ha  tambem  machinas 
muito  perfeitas  nas  fabricas  de  fia9ao   e  tecidos. 

Trindade  Coelho:  0  primeiro  Livro  de  Leitura. 

47.  Exercise. 

The  Tower  of  Belem. 

One  of  the  -most  beautiful  monuments  in  Portugal  is  the 
Tower  of  Belem,  called  also  "Torre  de  Sao  Vicente,"  magnificent 
and  severe,  raised  upon  a  rock  on  a  sandy  beach  of  the  Tagus 
with  its  terrace  advancing  still  over  the  river.  The  tower 
was  built  in  memory  of  the  discoveries  of  the  Portuguese, 
and  its  construction  dates  from  the  beginning  of  the  sixteenth 
century.  The  square  tower  shuts  up  the  terrace  from  the 
landside.  The  two  angles  of  the  terrace  which  are  looking 
upon  (para)  the  sea  are  cut  so  that  by  their  base  is  formed 
an  hexagon,  in  the  little  angles  of  which  (do  qual)  are  rising 
watch-towers  with  cupolas,  as  well  os  from  the  two  inferior 
and  the  four  superior  angles  of  the  tower.  The  terrace  and 
the  platform  of  the  tower  are  protected  by  curtains  of  grand 
battlements;  each  of  these  ornated  by  (com)  its  shield  and 
cross  of  Christ.  At  half  the  height  of  the  tower  projects 
an  open  veranda  with  columns,  arches,  and  indented  parapets. 
Inside  in  every  story  a  large  central  room  is  (to  be)  found 
whose  arched  roof  in  the  ground-floor  has  no  nervures,  while 
very  rich  interlaced  nervures  are  in  the  upper  stories.  By  very 
little  doors  ingress  is  given  to  the  very  narrow  interiors  of 
the  square  watch-towers.  Winding  stairs  give  access  to  the 
superior  stories. 


128  Lesson  20. 

Conyersa^ao. 

Que  especie  de  planta  e  o  linho? 

Qual  e  a  parte  litil  da  planta? 

De  que  servem  os  fios  tirades  da  haste  do  linho? 

Como  se  prepara  a  substancia  que  Sao   os  fios,   para  se 

fazer  o  fio  de  fiar? 
Que   vem    a    ser  a    estopa?     Como  e?     E    que    se   faz 

d'ella? 
Quaes  sao  os   processes    passados   pelos   fios   depois  de 

fiados  na  roca? 
Como  se  chamam  os  apparelhos  que  servem  nesses  pro- 
cesses ? 
Onde    s5o    esses    apparellos    substituidos    per   machinas 

muito  perfeitas? 
Como  se   chama   urn   dos    mais  belles   monumentos  em 

Portugal? 
Onde  se  encontra  a  « Torre  de  Belem»? 
Com  que  intento  (intention)  foi  ella  construida? 
De  quando  data  a  sua  construc^ao? 
De  que  duas  partes  consiste  o  monumento? 
Como  e  construido  o  terrace? 
Como  6  protegido   o  terra9o   assim  como   a   plataforma 

da  torre? 
As  ameias  como  sao  ornadas? 
Que  e  que  projecta  a  meia  altura  da  torre? 
Que  ^  que  se  encontra  no  interior? 
Como  sao  feitas  as  abobadas  no  pavimento  terreo?  nos 

andares  superiores? 
Come  se  entra  nas  guaritas?  nos  andares  superiores? 


Twentieth  Lesson.    Li^ao  vigesima. 

Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs. 

Verhos  pronominaes  ou  reflexivos, 

§  127.  As  we  learned  in  the  last  chapter  (§  125), 
the  Passive  Voice  may  be  and  is  often  rendered  by 
the.  reflective  form  of  the  verb.  Thus  employed,  any 
verb,  even  the  intransitive  one,  may  adopt  thi  passive 
form.  This  form  may  in  English  be  rendered  either 
by  the  saine  passive  form  or  by  the  active  form  with 
the  impersonal  pronouns  one,  we,  you,  or  they,  or  people 
as  a  subject— e.g.: 


Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs.  129 

Juntam-se  os  papeis  the  papers   are   gathered,   you   or 

we  gather  the  papers. 
Esfe  livro  Use  com  agrado  this  book  is  read  (one  reads 

or  people  read  this  book)  with  pleasure. 
Fakt-se  d'elle  com  muito  eloglo  he   is  spoken   of  (they 

speak  of  him)  with  high  praise. 

Observations. 

(a)  In  the  last  phrase  we  may  also  employ  the 
active  form,  with  the  verb  in  the  plural,  just  as  in 
English : 

Falam  delle  com  muito  elogio. 

(b)  In  other  cases  we  ma}'  substitute  the  passive 
or  impersonal  form  by  the  gerund--  e.g. :  instead  of 
^'quande  se  dorme,  ndo  se  precisa  comer" : 

Dormindo  nao  se  precisa  comer. 

When  you  (we,  people)  sleep,  you  (we,  people)  need  not 
eat. 

(c)  Here  also  the  second  reflective  form  might 
be  rendered  by  the  active,  as  in  Enghsh:  Dormindo, 
a  gente  nao  xwecisa  comer. 

§  128.  The  following  is  the  whole  conjugation 
of  the  reflective  verb,  the  3^^  person  of  which  we  have 
already  learned. 

As  for  the  reflective  pronouns  (Enghsh:  myself,  etc.), 
there  is  only  the  one  characteristic  form  (se),  already 
dealt  with,  which  marks  the  3^^  pers.  sing,  and  plur. 
For  the  other  persons  the  accusative  of  the  pronoun 
is  employed,  thus:  me  [m^],  te  [td],  se  [so],  nos  [mf], 
vos  [voJJ. 

Infinitivo. 
Infinitivo  impessoal. 

Lavar-se  to  wash  oneself. 

Infinitivo  pessoal. 
Para  eu  me  lavar  that  I  (may)  wash  myself,  etc. 
para  tu  te  lavares 
para  elle  se  lavar 
para  nos  nos  lavarmos 
para  vos  vos  lavar des 
para  elles  se  lavarem. 

Portuguese  Conversatiou-Grammar. 


130  Lesson  20. 

Participio. 
Presente. 
Lavando-me  washing  myself. 
Passado. 
Tendo-me   lavado    (=--    depois  de  me  ter  lavado)   after 
having  washed  myself. 

Indicative. 
Presente. 
iii'M  Zat;o-me,  I  wash  myself,  etc.      nds  lavdmo^-nos 
tu  lavas-te  '  vos  lavaes-vos 

elle  lava-se  elles  lavam-se. 

Preterito  imperfeito. 
Eu  lavava-me  I  washed  my-      nds  lavavamo^-nos 

self,  etc.  vds  lavaveis-vos 

tu  lavavas-te  dies  lavavam-se. 

elle  lavava-se 

Preterito  perfeito. 
Eu  lavei-me  I  washed  myself     nds  lavdmo^-nos 
or  I  have  washed  myself,  etc.      vds  lavdstes-vos 
tu  lavaste-te  elles  lavaram-se. 

elle  lavou-se 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito. 
Eu  lavdra-me  I  had  washed      nds  lavdramo^-nos 

myself,  etc.  v6s  lavdreis-vos 

tu  lavdras-te  elles  lavaram-se. 

elle  lavdra-se 

Preterito  perfeito  composto. 
Eu  tenho-me  lavado  I  have  washed  myself. 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito-composto. 
Eu  tinha-me  lavado  I  had  washed  myself. 

Futuro. 
Eu  hei-de  me  lavar  or  lavar-me-(h)ei  or  eu  me  lavarei  I 
shall  wash  myself,  etc. 

Futuro  passado. 
Ter-me-(h)ei  lavado  ov  eu  me  terei  lavado  I  shall  have 
washed  myself,  etc. 

Gondicional. 
Eu  havia  de  me  lavar  or  lavar-me-(h)ia  I  should  wash 
myself.  «tc. 

»  Condicional  passado. 

Ter-me-(h)ia  lavado  or  eu  me  teria  lavado  I  shoald  have 
washed  myself. 

»  The  8  of  the  1st  pens.  pi.  drops  before  the  pronouns  o(«), 
a(8),  no^,  vos. 


Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs.  131 

Imperativo, 
Lava-te!    Lave-se!    Lavae-vos!    Wash  yourself! 
Ndo  te  laves!    Ndo  se  lave!    Nao  vos  laveis!    Do  not 
wash  yourself. 

Conjunctivo. 
Presente. 
Que  eu  me  lave  that  I  wash  myself,  etc. 
que  tu  te  laves 
que  elle  se  lave 
que  nos  nos  lavemos 
que  vos  vos  laveis 
que  elles  se  lavem. 

Imperfeito. 
Que  or  se  eu  ine  lavasse  that  or  if  I  washed  myself,  etc. 
que  or  se  tu  te  lavasses 
que  or  se  elle  se  lavasse 
que  or  se  nos  nos  lavassemos 
que  or  se  vos  vos  lavas seis 
qu^  or  se  elles  se  lavass&in. 

Preterito  composto. 
Que  eu  me  tenha  lavado  that  I  have  washed  myself,  etc. 
que  tu  te  tenhas  lavado. 

Mais-que-perfeito-eomposto. 
Que  or  se  eu  me  tivesse  lavado  that  or  if  I  had  washed 

myself,  etc. 
que  or  se  tu  te  tivesses  lavado 
que  or  se  e?/e  se  tivess^  lavado. 

Future. 
Se  or  quando  eu   me   lavar  if  or   when   I    shall   wash 

myself,  etc. 
se  or  quando  tu  te  lavares 
se  or  quando  elle  se  lavar 
se  or  quando  nos  nos  lavarmos 
se  or  quando  v6s  vos  lavardes 
se  or  quando  elles  se  lavarem. 

§  129.  The  position  of  the  reflective  pronoun  is: 
1.  in  a  simple  principal  phrase,  if  not  negative,  after 
the  verb  (or  the  auxiliary),  to  which  it  is  joined  by  a 
hyphen — e.g.:  Lavo-me;  lavaste-te? 

2.  If  however  the  phrase  is  negative,  the  pronoun 
precedes  the  verb:  Ndo  me  lavo\  ndo  te  lavaste?  Nunca 
se  lavava. 

9* 


132  Lesson  20. 

3.  If  an  adverb,  conjunction,  or  complement  begins 
the  phrase  or,  without  beginning  it,  precedes  the  verb, 
the  pronoun  may  be  put  before  or  after  the  verb. 

"O  homem  precisa  alimentar-se  para  viver:  se  nao 
se  alimentasse,  morria.  Os  homens  aUmentam-se  de 
carnes,  e  tambem  se  alimentam  de  vegetaes."  \ 

4.  In  subordinate  sentences   the   pronoun  precedes' 
the    verb:    Quero   que   te  laves   (as  nidos).     I  want  you 
to  wash  yourself  (your  hands). 

5.  After  the  "verbo  de  realce"  E  que  which  is 
employed  to  put  an  emphasis  upon  some  word,  you 
may  put  the  pronoun  behind  or  before  the  verb:  E  que 
esta  lei  presta-se  (or  se  presta)  a  tudo  quanto  seja  fraude. 
The  case  is  that  this  law  complies  wdth  anything  like 
fraud. 

Here   also  E  que  may    be    omitted    or  considered 
as  not  existing,    and  thus  the  phrase  becomes  a  prin-! 
cipal  one. 

Note. — The  same  rules  apply  to  the  pronoun  complement, 
even  if  not  employed  reflectively,  and  whether  accusative  or 
dative— e.g. : 

Eu  lava -a  I  wash  her  or  it. 

Lavaste-os?  Did  you  wash  them? 

Ndo  as  lavei  I  did  not  wash  them. 

Nunca  te  lavou  a  roupa  she  never  washed  your  linen 
{te  is  here  dative). 

Se  a  lavadeira  nao  me  tivesse  lavado  a  roupa  .  .  . 

If  the  washerwoman  had  not  washed  my  linen  .  .  . 

§  130.  The  reflective  verbs  in  English  and  Por- 
tuguese languages  do  not  always  correspond  to  each 
other.  As  indeed  the  reflective  verbs  in  English  are 
rare,  some  neuter  or  passive  verbs  in  English  require 
the  reflective  form  in  Portuguese.  Such  verbs  are: 
Admirar-se  to  wonder  chamar-se  to  be  called 

afogar-se  to  be  drowned  compor-se   (see  §   213)  to  be 

approximar-sey,  .      .  comj 


chegar-se  }  ^  approxima  e  contentar-se   to  be  contented 

apresentar-se  a  to  wait  upon  or  satisfied 

{apresentar-se  to  offer  oneself)  decidir-se  to  decide 

arrepender-se  to  repent  ,  . .  /  to  lie  down, 

(as)sentar-se  to  sit  down  *      '      i  to  go  to  bed 

atrever-se  to  dare  descuidar-se  de  to  neglect 

calar-se  to  be  silent  dignar-seto  deign,  to  he  pleased 


Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs.  138 

empenhar-se  to  endeavour  lemhrar-se  to  remember 

encontrar-se  to  be  (found)  levontar-se  to  get  up,  to  rise 

encontrar-se  corn  to  meet  queixar-se  to  complain 

enganar-se  to  be  mistaken  referir-se  to  refer 

escapar-se  \  .  regosijar-se  to  rejoice 

evadir-se     j  ^ "  resentir-se  to  resent 

esquecer(-se  de)  to  forget  restdbelecer-se  to  recover 

fazer-se  to  become  retirar-se  to  retire 

informar-se  to  inquire  tornar-se  to  become,  turn  out 

irritar-se  to  grow  angry  recwsarf'-se^  to  refuse 

ir-se  (embora)  to  go  away  dfesawimar('-se>  \  to  discourage, 

jaciar-se  to  boast  desaletdar(-se)  f  to  lose  courage 

^o^e. — The  three  last  verbs  may  be  employed  as  active, 
neuter^  or  reflective  verbs ;  as  for  esquecer,  it  must  be  follow- 
ed by  de  if  employed  reflectively,  and  personally.  Without 
de,  it  may  be  used  as  an  active  verb  (which  is  considered  a 
gallicism);  but  more  frequently  as  a  neuter  and  in  the  8^<^  per- 
son; neuter,  it  is  employed  without  pronoun  or  de. 

Esqueceu-se  de  alguma  cousa  | 

JEsqueceu  alguma  cousa  ,  he  forgot  something. 

Esqueceu-lhe  alguma  cousa      j 

Eu  desanimei  or  desanimei-me   \  I  god  discouraged.  I 
Eti  desalentei  or  desalentei-me     \       lost  courage. 
0  seu   mallogro  dcsalentou-o  his  ill-success  discouraged 
him. 

§  131.  Whenever  the  Portuguese  se,  nos,  vos  have 
not  a  reflective  sense,  but  express  a  reciprocal  action, 
they  are  translated  by  each  other  or  one  anothey: 

Os  dois  irmaos  parecem-se  (Nos  parecemo-nos). 

The  two  brothers  resemble   (we  resemble)  one  another. 

§  132.  Very  often  we  can  hardly  distinguish 
whether  a  verb,  employed  with  -se  (i.e.  in  the  3^'<^  per- 
son), is  reflective  or  passive.  In  this  latter  case  it  can 
always  be  substituted  by  the  past  participle  preceded 
by  a  form  of  the  verb  ser.  0  sifio  ouve-se  (=  is  heard). 
Sometimes  the  difference  is  immaterial:  0  corpo  cdimenta- 
se^  the  body  is  nourished  or  nourishes  itself.  If  there  is 
a  second  pronoun,  we  may  be  sure  that  the  verb  is 
employed  in  the  passive  voice — e.g.: 

A  cavallo  dado  ndo  se  Ihe  olha  o  dente  (=  o  dente  nuo 

e  olhado). 
Look  not  a  gift-hors^e  in  the  mouth. 


134 


Lesson  20. 


Quando  ha  vento,  molha-se  a  vela  (- 

Ihada)  (prov.). 
Strike  the  iron  while  it  is  hot. 
Contenta-U,  gato,  que  farta  o  farto. 
Great  wealth,  great  weariness. 


a  vela  fica  mo- 


Palayras. 

Vestir-se 

t6  dress 

a  extremidade 

the  extremity 

fvi'ftirs^J 

[I'ftrami&a&d] 

despir-se 

to  undress 

saliente 

prominent 

[dif'pirs^J 

fsvlt  'entpj 

divertir-sd 
[divdrtirsd] 

a  unlia 

the  nail 

to  amuse 

['urjv] 

recrear-se 

oneself 

guarnecer  de 

to  provide  with 

[rdkry  'arsd] 

gicvrnd'  ser] 

dedicar-se  a 

to  give   oneself 

estar  em  pe 

to  stand 

up  to 

[i/'tanm'pe] 

guardar-se  de 

to  beware  of 

pisar  [pi'zar] 

to  tread 

fgiovr  'dars9&9] 

0  traballio 

the  work 

refrescar-se 

to  refresh 

[trE  'bafiu] 

[rdfry'harsBj 

oneself 

0  tacto  f'tatuj 

the  touch 

cdimentar-se 

to  nourish 

particularmente 

particularly 

[vlimfi^'tars9] 

oneself 

Ipertikular- 

asxemelhar-se 

to  equal,  to 

'  mentc] 

[issdmi  'ftarsd]^ 

resemble,    to 

0  dedo  pollegar 

the  thumb 

parecer-se 

be  (alike) 

[puh  'gar] 

[perd'sersB] 

0  dedo  pollegar 

the  big  toe 

0  vegetal 

the  vegetable 

do  pe 

[vd^d'tai] 

opponivel 

opposite 

a  bebida 

the  drink 

[opu  'nivel] 

fbybutvj 

a  gemma  d'ovo 

the  yolk 

engordar 

to  fatten 

f'^emti  '&ovuJ 

[igur'dar] 

a  clara  (d'ovo) 

the  white  (of 

sdlido  ['soliffu] 

solid ;  thorough 

an  egg) 

malar  a  sede 

to  quench  one's 

incolor 

colourless 

(a  fome) 

thirst 

cozido 

boiled 

figurar 

to  figure 

0  miolo 

the  kernel 

suar 

to  sweat 

[mt'olu] 

a  baga  fbagaj 
0  8u6r  [su'dtJ 

the  drop 

oval  fu'vaij 

oval 

the  sweat 

envoi  ver 

to  involve 

0  estomago 

the  stomach 

flvui  'ver] 

[I'ftomvgu] 

prdprio  para 

eatable 

0  8UCC0  ['sukuj, 

the  gastric 

comer 

gdstrico 

juice 

sabordso 

savoury 

['gaftriku] 

[svbu'rozul 

digerir 

to  digest 

nnfritivo 

nourishing 

[dis9'rir] 

[nutrj  tivu] 

0  condimento 

the  seasoning 

0  producto 

the  product(ion) 

fkondi'mentuj 

[pru'dutu] 

salivar 

to  spit 

0  reino  animal 

the  animal 

[mli'vnr] 

kingdom 

Pronominal  or  Reflective  Verbs. 


135 


0  reino  vegetal 

the  vegetable 

0  cnixeiro 

the  clerk 

kingdom 

f'kai'MruJ 

delgado 

thiu 

0  guarda-livros 

the  book- 

[ddiga&u] 

keeper 

acastanhado 

brownish 

seja  0  que  for 

whatsoever  it 

[vJcyfte  'yaifuj 

be 

liquido['likwi&u]  liquid 

a  respeito  de 

as  for 

Hjo  f'rrisuj 

hard,  strong 

a  escri(p}tura- 

the  bookkeep-  . 

alimentar 

alimentary 

gdo  (mercantile 

)     ing 

a  natureza 

Nature,  quality 

em  (or  por)  par- 

by  single  and 

0  requerente 

the  solicitor 

tidos  simples 

double  entry 

[rraka  'rentd] 

e  dobrados 

0  caixa 

the  cashier 

(em)  caso  (que) 

in  case. 

48.  Leitura. 

Alimentagd. 
0  homem  precisa  alimentar-se  para  viver:  se  nao  se  alimen- 
tasse,  morria.  Os  homens  alimentam-se  de  carnes,  e  tambem  se 
alimentam  de  vegetaes.  As  carnes  e  os  vegetaes,  chamados 
alimentos  solidos,  ou  comidas,  matam-nos  a  fome.  Ha  alimentos 
que  nos  engordam;  e  outros  que  nao  nos  engordam,  mas  pelos 
quaes  6  conservado  ao  corpo  o  seu  calor  natural.  Os  animaes 
e  OS  vegetaes  fornecem-ncs  os  alimentos  solidos;  mas  alem 
d'estes,  precisaraos  tambem  de  bebidas.  As  bebidas  matam- 
nos  a  s6de.  0  nosso  corpo  ^  formado  de  muitas  substancias. 
Entre  as  substancias  que  formam  o  nosso  corpo  figura  a  agua. 
Quando  p  nosso  corpo  se  resente  da  falta  d'agua,  somos  avisados 
pela  s6de  de  que  precisa  d'ella.  Quando  suainos  perdemos 
agua,  pois  esta  sae-nos  do  corpo  em  bagas  de  suor.  Eis  ahi 
porque  suando  sente-se  (or  a  gente  sente  or  porque  quando  sua- 
mos  sentimos)  sfide.  0  estCmago  produz  um  succo,  cbamado  succo 
gastrico,  muito  preciso  para  digerir  a  comida.  Os  condimentos, 
que  nos  fazem  salivar,  fazem  com  que  se  produza  esse  succo 
em  maior  abundancia.  0  corpo  humano  carece  de  substancias 
varias  para  bem  se  nutrir.  Essas  substancias  encontram-se 
nos  varies  alimentos;  e  d'estes,  uns  possuem  grande  niimero 
de  taes  substancias,  e  outros  so  possuem  algumas.  0  pao,  a 
came,  os  legumes  verdes  e  seccos,  as  batatas,  os  ovos,  e  tambem 
a  agua  e  o  leite  pertencem  ao  niimero  dos  primeiros. 
Trindade  Coelho:  0  Primeiro  Livro  de  Leitura  (adapted). 

49.  Thema. 

Solicitagdo  d'um  emprego. 

Lisboa,  8  de  Abril  de  1908. 
Ulmo  e  Ex"ioi  Senhor: 
Tenho   a  honra  de  apresentar-me    come  requerente   do 
emprego  de   caixeiro   (guarda-livros,  caixa,  ou  seja  o  que  for) 

'  See  §  18.  ~ 


136  Lesson  20. 

na  estimada  casa  de  V^-  Ex^- ,  annunciado  no  «Diario  de  No- 
ticias»  d'hoje. 

Frequentei  durante  seis  annos  a  Escolade...,  e  estive  dois 
annos  em  casa  do  sr.  A.  B.  a  quern  tenho  licenQa  de  me 
referir.  Tive  nma  solida  instruc9ao  na  arithmetica  emquanto 
a  exactidao  e  promptidao;  e  esta  carta  informara  a  Va-  Ex«- 
a  respeito  da  minha  letra.  Tambem  estou  bem  versado  na 
escriptura9ao  mercantil  em  partidos  simples  e  dobrados. 

Gaso  (que)  V*^-  Ex*-  deseje  v6r-me  antes  de  se  decidir, 
digne-se  de  m'o  fazer  saber,  para  que  eu  me  apresente  a 
V*-  Ex''^-  a  qualquer  hora  que  marcar. 

Sou  com  toda  a  considera^ao  e  respeito 

De  Va-  Ex*-  criado  att^  e  obrg^^o 
Joao  da  Silva  Nogueira. 

50.  Exercise. 

A.  The  Foot  and  the  Hand. 

The  foot  and  the  hand  are  both  members  of  the  human 
body.  They  are  composed  of  bones,  flesh,  and  skin,  and  are 
more  long  than  large.  On  their  extremities  they  have  five 
prominent  parts  provided  with  nails.  These  prominent  parts 
are  called  fingers.  Of  the  two,  the  foot  is  the  more  solid  and 
big  and  the  one  which  has  the  hardest  bones.  With  the  feet 
people  can  stand,  walk,  and  tread.  With  the  hands  we  can 
execute  numerous  works.  Of  the  two  members,  the  hand  is 
the  one  in  which  the  sense  of  touch  is  the  more  refined.  What 
particularly  characterises  the  hand  is  the  thumb  being  (infini- 
tive) separated  from  the  other  four  fingers  and  opposite  to 
each  of  them,  whilst  the  big  toe  is  joined  to  the   other  toes. 

B.  The  Egg  and  the  Nut. 

The  egg  and  the  nut  resemble  one  another  by  their 
exterior  form.  Both  are  oval.  The  interior  of  both  is  en- 
cased by  a  shell.  The  interior  is  not  only  eatable,  but  also 
nourishing  and  savoury.  The  egg  is  a  production  of  the 
animal  kingdom,  and  the  nut  is  a  production  of  the  vegetable 
kingdom.  The  shell  of  the  egg  is  more  or  less  white  and 
thin,  and  may  easily  be  broken  between  the  fingers.  The 
shell  of  the  nut  is  brownish,  thick  and  hard,  and  can  only 
with  difficulty  be  opened  by  the  hand.  The  nourishing  sub- 
stance in  the  egg  is  liquid,  but  when  it  is  boiled,  it  becomes 
firm.  It  is  composed  of  the  yolk  and  the  white.  The  yolk 
is  yellow,  and  the  white  is  colourless  when  raw,   but  white 


'  See  §  18. 


Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugations.  137 

after    being    boiled.     The    nourishing  substance   of  the    nut, 
called  the  kernel,  is  of  a  firm  quality. 

Conyersa^ao. 

A.  (bate  na  porta.)     B.  Pode  entrar!  {or  Entre  quern  6!). 

Abre-se  a  porta.,  dando  ingresso  a  um  homem  que  se  approxima, 

inclinando-se: 

A.  Va-  Ex^-  da- me  licen^a? 

B.  Dou  (see  §  184  and  p.  29,  note).  Chegue-se  para 
ea.     Que  e  que  deseja? 

A.  Falaram-me  n^im  emprego  de  caixeiro  que  se  pre- 
tend e  preencher. 

B.  E  verdade.     E  V^-  encontra-se  nas  condi9oes  . .  ? 

A.  Atr6vo-me  de  solid tal-o.     Chamo-me  .  .  . 

B.  Sente-se!  Pdde  dar-me  informa96es  sobre  alguma 
collocaQao  anterior? 

A.  Pode  V*-  Ex^-  tomal-as  com  a  casa  dos  senhores  . . ., 
donde  me  retirei  ha  um  mfis. 

B.  Porque  se  retirou?  Descuidou-se  das  suas  obriga96es? 
Nao  se  empenhou  bastante  em  satisfazer  os  patroes? 

A.  Nao  foi  isso.  Fiquei  doente  e  tive  de  me  ir  embora 
para  me  restabelecer.  Levantei-me  da  cama  ha  dias 
apenas. 

B.  Bem,  hei-de  informar-me,  antes  de  me  decidir.  Mas 
V^-  lembre-se  que  tern  de  se  contentar  com  pouco  or- 
denado  e  que  espero  dos  mens  empregados  que  nunca 
se  escapem  a  trabalho  algum,  nem  se  esque9am  dos 
seus  deveres, 

A.  V*-  Ex*-  nao  tera  de  queixar-se. 

B.  Muito  bem.  Caso  (que)  se  dedique  seriamente  ao  seu 
emprego,  nao  terei  eu  de  me  irritar,  nem  V^-  de 
arrepender-se.  Entao  retire-se  por  emquanto  (for 
the  present)  e  nao  (se)  desanime  at^  receber  a 
minha  decisao!     Va-se  (see  §  217)  com  Deus! 

A.  Deus  guarde  a  Va-  Ex»! 


Twenty-first  Lesson.    Li§ao  vigesima 
primeira. 

Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugations. 

Paradigma  das  conjugagoes  regulares. 

Having   in   the  three   last  lessons  dealt  with  the 
formations    of    the    tenses    and    moods    of    a    regular 


188 


Lesson  21. 


verb  and  given  all  the  fonns  (including  the  passive  and 
the  reflective)  of  a  verb  of  the  first  conjugation,  we 
now  present  a  paradigm  of  all  three,  thus  repeating 
the  first,  in  order  to  facilitate  a  summary  view,  yet 
omitting  the  EngHsh  translation,  easily  supplied,  however, 
after  the  18*^  lesson, 

§  133.  The  Portuguese  calls  Yerbo  adjectito  a  verb 
that  unites  in  one  word  the  verb  ser  or  cstar  and  an 
attribute,  thus  expressing  an  action,  a  state,  or  a  quality 
of  the  subject — e.g.:  saltar,  comer,  partir;  salto,  I  jump, 
equivalent  to  estou  saUando,  I  am  jumping;  come,  he 
eats,  equivalent  to  estd  comendo,  he  is  eating,  etc. 

§  134.  The  verbo  adjedivo  may  be  transitive 
or  intransitive,  according  to  its  expressing  an  action, 
or  a  state;  respectively  a  quality  of  the  subject.  Being 
transitive,  it  has  an  active  and  passive  voice  (vo^  activa 
or  passiva).  In  the  compound  t-enses  of  the  former,  it 
is  conjugated  with  ter,  in  all  tenses  of  the  latter  with 
ser. 

§  135.    Conjuga^oes  regulares  do  verbo  adjectivo. 
Voz  activa  [voza.'\ 

1'*.  conjugagao.  2^.  conjuga^do. 

Infinit(iv)os  e  Partii 
Presente  impessoal. 


3".  c(nijugaQdo. 

icipios. 


Louv-ar,  to  praise 


Louv-ai' 

louv-ares 

louv-ar 

louv-artnos 

louv-ar  des 

louo-aretn. 


Ter  louvado. 


Ter    j  louvado, 
teres   )  devido, 
ter     }  applaudido 


Dev-er,    to  owe, 
to  be  obliged, 
must,  ought 

Presente  pessoal. 
Dev-er 
dev-eres 
dev-er 
dev-ermos 
dev-er  des 
dev-er  em, 

Preterito  impessoal. 
Ter  devido. 


Applaud-ir,  to  ap- 
plaud. 


Applaud-ir 

applaud-ires 

applaud-ir 

applaud-irrnos 

applaud-irdes 

applaud-irem. 


Ter  applaudido. 


Preterito  pessoal. 

termos  I  louvado, 

terdes  1  devido, 

terem  I  applaudido. 


Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugations. 


189 


Harder  or 


Ter  or  haver  \ 
teres  „  haveres  \ 
ter     y,   hav^r     ) 


Louv-ando, 
Louv-ado. 

Tendo  louvado. 


Louv-o 

louv-as 

louv-a 

louv-dmos 

louv-aes 

louvam. 


Louv-ava 

louv-avas 

louv-ava 

louv-dvatnos 

louv-dveis 

louv-avam. 


Louv-ei 

louv-aste 

louv-ou 

louv-dmos 

louv-a^tes 

louv-aram. 


Futuro  impessoal. 
ter  de  louvar,  de  dever,  de  applaudir. 

Futuro  pessoal. 
de  louvar,        ter mos  or havermos\de  louvar. 
de  dever  terdes    „  haver des  \de  dever y 

de,  applaudir  terem    „  haverem  I  de  applaudir. 

Participio  imperfeito. 

Bev-endo,  Applaud-indo, 

Participio  perfeito. 
Bev-ido.  Applaud-ido. 

Participio  perfeito  composto. 

Tendo  applaudido. 


Tendo  devido. 

Indicative. 
Presente. 

Dev-o 

dev-es 

dev-e 

dev-emos 

dev-eis 

dev-em. 

Preterito  imperfeito. 

Dev-ia 

dev-ias 

dev-ia 

dev-iamos 

dev-ieis 

dev-iam* 

Preterito  perfeito. 

Bev-i^ 

dev-e8te 

dev-eu 

dev-emos 

dev-estes 

dev-eram. 


Applaud-o 

applaud-es 

applaud-e 

applaud-imos 

applaud-is 

applaud- em,. 


Applaud-ia 

applaud-ias 

applaud-ia 

app  laud-iainos 

applaud-ieis 

applaud-iam. 


Applaud-i 

applaud-iste 

applaud-iu 

applatid-lm^os 

applaud-istes 

applaud-iram. 


Preterito  perfeito  composto. 
Tenho  louvado,  devido,  applaudido,  • 

^  In  the  meaning  of  must  or  ought  this  tense  is  not  used, 
but  is  replaced  bj^  the  Imperfect. 


140 


Lesson  21. 


Preterito  mais-que-perfeUo.^ 

Loiivd-ra  Devc-ra  Applauctf-ra 

louvdras  devc-ras  applaiLcl^ras 

louvd-ra  deve-ra  applaudhra 

loiwd-ramos  deve-ramos  applaudi-ratnos 

louvd-reis  deve-reis  applaudi-rels 

louvd-ram.  deve-rani,  etpplaud^ratn, 

Preterito  mais-que-perfeito  composto. 
Tinha  louvado,  devido,  applaudido. 


Louv-arei 

louv-ards 

louv-ard 

louv-aremos 

louv-areis 

louv-ardo. 


Fuiuro  imperfeito.^ 

Dev-erei 

dev-erds 

dev-erd, 

dev-ere^nos 

dev-ereis 

div-erdo. 


Applaud-irei 

applaud-irds 

applaud-ird 

applaud-irern  os 

applaud-ireis 

applaud-irdo. 


Louv-aria 

louv-arias 

louv-aria 

louv-arianios 

louv-arieis 

louv-ariam. 


Futuro  imperfeito  composto. 
J  lei  or  tenJio  de  louvar,  de  dever,  de  applaudir. 

Futuro  preterito  composto. 
Terei  louvado,  devido,  applaudido. 

Condicional. 
Presente  (imperfeito). 
Bev-erifi 
dev-erias 
dev-eria 
dev-eriamos 
dev-erieis 
dev-eriani. 


Applaud-iria 

applaud-ii'ias 

applaud-iria 

applaud-iriamos 

applaud-irieis 

applaud-iriani. 


Louvd-ra 
louvd-ras 
louvd-ra,  etc. 


(cf.  Mais-que-perfeito). 
Beve-ra 
Deve-ras 
deve-ra  etc. 


Applaud-ira 
applaud-iras 
applaud-ira  etc. 


Perfeito. 
Teria  louvado,  devido,  applaudido 

ou 
Tivera  louvado,  devido,  applaudido. 

*  For  the  formation  of  this  tense  cf.  §  114,  c. 
^  For  the  formation  of  this  tense  cf.  §  44,  1. 


Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugations. 


141 


Louv-a  (til} 
louv-ae  (vos). 


Imperativo. 

I)ev-e(tu)(ot^.B.) 
dev-ei  (vos) 


Applmid-e  (hi) 
applaud-i  (vos). 


N.B. — The  verb  dever  in  its  meaning  "must"  has 
no  Imperative.  In  its  meaning  "to  owe"'  this  form  is 
given  periphrastically:  fica  deven<lo,  ndo  fiques  devendn. 
The  above  imperative  forms  of  dever,  one  of  the  few 
quite  regular  verbs  in  -er,  is  meant  only  for  a  gram- 
matical model. 


Gonjunctivo. 

Presente. 

Louve   " 

Dev-a 

Applaud- a 

louv-es 

dev-as 

applaud-as 

louv-e 

dev-a 

applaud-a 

louv-enios 

dev-dmos 

applaud-d7nos 

louv-eis 

dev-aes 

applaud- a  €s 

lour -em. 

dev-am. 

Preterite  imperfeito. 

applaud-ani. 

Loum-sse 

Beve-8se 

Applaudi-sse 

louvd-sses 

deve-sses 

applaudi-sses 

louvd-sse 

deve-8se 

applaudi-sse 

louvd-ssemos 

deve-ssemos 

applaudi-ssenios 

louvd-sseis 

deve-sseis 

appluudi-sseis 

louvd-ssem. 

deve-ssem. 

applaudi-ssenu 

Preterite  perfeito  cemposto. 

Tenha  louvado,  devido,  applaudido. 

Preterito  mais-qtie-perfeito  composto. 

Tivesse  louvado^  devido^  applaudido. 


Louva-r 

louva-res 

louva-r 

louva-innos 

louva-rdes 

louva-rem. 


Future  imperfeito.  * 

Deve-r 

deve-res 

deve-r 

deve-rmos 

deve-rdes 

deve-rem. 


Applaudi-r 

applaudi-res 

applaudi-r 

applaudi-mios 

applaudi-rdes 

applaudi-rem. 


Future  imperfeito  composto. 
Houver  de  louvar,  de  dever,  de  applaudir. 


Cf.  §  113,  C. 


142 


Lesson  21. 


§  136.  ISummary  Table 

of  the  Endings  of  Regular  Verbs  in  their  Simple  Tenses. 
First  Primitive  Tense,  Infinitivo  and  Deriyed. 


1.   COHJ 

i.      2.  conj. 

3.  conj. 

1.  conj. 

2.  conj.      3.  co>}j. 

Infinite 

>. 

Pret.  perf. 

Fres.  impessodl. 

ei 

i                 i 

ar 

er 

ir 

aste 
ou 

este           iste 
eu             iu 

Pres.  pessoal. 

dmos 

emos          imos 

ar 

er 

ir 

astes 

estes          istes 

ares 

eres 

ires 

dram. 

eram.        iram. 

ar 

er 

ir    , 

Futuro  imperfeito. 

armos 

ermos 

irmos 

ardes 

erdes 

irdes 

arei 

erei           irei 

arem. 

erem. 

irem. 

ards 
ard 

eras          irds 
erd          •  ird 

Indicativ 

0. 

aremos 

eremos      iremos 

Presente. 

areis 
aruo. 

ereis          ireis 
erao.          irao. 

0 

0 

0 

as 

es 

es 

Condicionai. 

a 

e 

e 

aria 

eria          iria 

dmos 

emos 

vmos 

arias 

erias         irias 

aes 

eis 

is 

aria 

eria           iria 

am. 

em. 

em. 

ariamos 

eriamos     iriamos 

Pret.  imperf. 

arieis 

erieis        irieis 

ariam. 

eriam.       iriam. 

ava 

la 

ia 

avas 

ias 

ias 

Participio  imperf. 

ava 

ia 

ia 

ando. 

endo.         indo. 

dvamos 

iamos 

iamos 

dveis 

ieis 

ieis 

Participio  perfeito. 

dvam. 

iam. 

iam. 

ado. 

ido.           ido. 

Second  Priniitiye  Tense^  IndicaUvo  presente  (see  above) 
and  Derived. 


1.  conj. 

2.  conj. 

3.  conj. 

1. 

conj. 

2.  conj. 

3.  c& 

Conjuncti 

VO. 

I 

mperativo. 

Presente. 

e 

a 

a 

a 

e 

e 

es 

as 

as 

e 

a 

a 

e 

a 

a 

emos 

dmos 

dmos 

emos 

dmos 

dmos 

ai 

ei 

i 

eis 

aes 

aes 

em. 

am. 

am. 

em. 

am. 

am. 

Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugations. 


14S 


Third  Primitiye  Tense,  2°^  Pers.  Sing,  of  the  PreU  perf. 

(see  above)  and  Deriyed. 

Same  endings  in  all  3  conjugations,  whether  regular  or  irregular. 
Indicativo.  Conjunctivo. 


Mais-que-perf. 
ra 
ras 
ra 

ramos 
reis 
ram. 


Pret.  imp. 
sse 
sses 
sse 

ssemos 
sseis 
ssem. 


Futuro  imperf. 

r 

res 

r 

rnios 

rdes 

rem. 


§  137.     Terbs  of  the  2°^  and  3"^  conjugations. 

N.B.— Those  verbs  marked  by  *  are  irregular.  Of 
the  regular  ones,  those  ending  in  -cer,  -ger,  -guer,  -guir 
are  subject  to  the  well-known  rules  of  the  phonetic 
law  concerning  c  and  g.  Others  submit  to  the  phone- 
tics mentioned  in  the  following  lesson  (22). 


Adoecer  to  fall  ill 
agradecer  to  thank  (for) 
amanhecer  to  dawn 
apodrecer   to   make    or  grow 

rotten 
apparecer  to  appear 
bater  to  beat 
collier  to  pick,  to  gather 
commover  to  move 
conter  to  contain 
converter  to  convert 
coser  to  sow 
coger  to  cook 
defender  to  defend 
desapparecer  to  disappear 
esquecer(-se)  to  forget,  to  be 

forgotten 
*faser  to  do,  make 
fornecer  furnish 
merecer  to  merit 
nascer  to  be  born;  to  spring, 
parecer  to  seem     [rise,  grow 
percorrer  to  run  through 
*poder  can^  to  be  able 
proteger  to  protect 
*saber  to  know 


abrir  to  open 

affligir  to  afflict 

aggredir  to  attack,  assault 

condusir  to  lead ;  -se  to  behave 

consistir  (de)  to  consist  (of) 

franzir  to  gather  into  plaits ; 

—  «s  sdbrancelhas  to  frown 
fugir  to  flee,  to  fly 
Hmpedir  to  hinder,  prevent 
insistir  (em)  to  insist  (upon) 
*ir  ter  com.  to   call  upon,  to 

go  to 
lu0ir  to  light,  to  shine 
mentir  to  lie 
*ouvir  to  hear 
partir  to  part,   to  divide;  to 

depart 
*pedir  to  ask,  beg 
perseguir  to  persecute 
possuir  to  possess 
produzir  to  produce 
prohibir  to  forbid,  prohibit 
proseguir  to  prosecute 
*provir  to  come  from 
reduzir  to  reduce 
sentir  to  feel,  smell 


144 


Lesson  21, 


tecer  to  Aveave 
varrcr  to  sweep 
*ver  to  see. 


servir  to  serve,  to  be  of  nse; 

— se  de  to  make  use  of 
sorrir  to  smile 
4 
Palavras. 


0  2)oente 

[pu  'ent?] 
0  chao  [f^u] 


oc- 


the  west 

cident 
the  floor, 

ground 
the  direction 


a  direcgao 

[dire'svu] 
0  alimento  the  nourish- 

[vU  'mentuj  ment 

0  legume  the   vegetables 

[h'gumd] 
a  ponta  [pontTs]  the  horn 
o  gado  vaccum    the  cattle 

['ga&u'vakum] 
0  cervo  f'servuj  the  stag 
a  armagdo  the  horns 

[vrmv  'svu] 
descangado  quiet 

[difkvn  'sad^u] 
opapel  [pv'peij  the  part 
fazer  o  papel      to  play  the  part 


de 
as  palmas 

I'paimefJ 
a  gallinha 

[gis'liyv] 
a  ave  favdj 


of 
the  applause 

the  hen 

the  bird 


a  ave  de  rapina  the  bird  of  prey 
estudioso  studious,  dili- 


[iftu&i' Qzu] 
preguiQoso 

[prdgi'sozu] 
0  pato  ['patuj 


gent 


the  duck 


0  obscquio 

[ott'zekin] 
0  trabalho  de 

ferias 
Duarte 

[du'art9], 

Eduardo 
precisar 

[prdsi'zar] 
0  castigo 

[kvf'tigu] 
a  pregui^a 

[pr9  'gisv] 
a  lebre  ['U'brd] 
a  raposa 

frra  'pozv] 
pardo  I'parduJ 
rachado 

[rrv  'fa&uj 
0  focinlio 

[fu'siyu] 
as  barbas 

f'barbvfj 
timido  ['timt&u] 
a  casca  ['kajkv] 
cagar  [ke'sar] 
saboroso 

[svbu'rozu] 
0  pilo  f'j^eluj 
0  chapelleiro 

[fvpo  'hp'uj 


the  favour 

the    holiday 

work 
Edward 


to  need 

the  punishment 

the  laziness 

the  hare 
the  fox 

grey 
cleft 

snout,  mouth 

the  whiskers, 

the  beard 
timid 
the  bark 
to  hunt;  catch 

savoury 
the  hair 

the  hatter. 


51.  Leitnra. 


0  sol  nasce  no  oriente  e  desapparece  no  poente.  A  herva 
cresce  no  prado,  enverdecendo  o  chao.  0  Tejo,  depois  de 
nascido  na  Hespanha,  percorre  este  pais  em  direccao  occidental 
6,  atravessado  tambem  Portugal,  vae  lan^ar-se  no  Atlantic© 
ao  p6  de  Lisboa.  0  alimento  ordinario  do  homem  consiste  de 
pao,  carne,  leite,  ovos  e  legumes.  Os  animaes  de  pontas,  taes 
como  o  gado  vaccum,  os  cervos  e  outros  mais,  receberam  a 
sua  arma^ao  para  se  defender(em),  ao  serem  aggredidos. 
Guilherme  devia  ser  mais  modesto ;  assim  mereceria  a  estima  de 
toda  a  gente.  0  senhor  apparega  em  minha  casa  na  tarde  de 
amanba!     Nao  se    esqueQal     Nao    me   hei  de   esquecer,   lique 


Paradigm  of  the  Regular  Conjugation.  145 

\&.  Exa.  descan9ado!  A  nossa  melhor  actriz  adoeceu  infeliz- 
mente;  se  nao  tivesse  adoecido  {or:  se  nao  adoecesse),  teria 
sido  muito  applaudida.  Ainda  ante-hontem,  fazendo  o  papel 
da"  Ophelia,  recebeu  muitas  palmas,  que  agradecia,  sorrindo 
commovida.  0  alumno  ja  lia,  escrevia  e  fazia  contas,  mas 
ainda  nao  sabia  desenhar.  Nao  sabias  que  a  raposa  persegue 
as  lebres  ?  Eu  nao  tenho  duvida  que  ella  persiga  (§  224)  as 
lebres,  mas  queria  que  nao  perseguisse  as  gallinhas  e  os 
patos.  Se  conhecesse  um  meio  que  o  impedisse  e  que  prote- 
ge3Se  essas  aves,  havia*de  empregal-o  (or:  erapregal-o-ia). 

62.  Thema. 

The  Studious  Pupil  and  the  Lazy. 

On  the  last  day  of  the  holidays  Edward  went  to  his 
schoolfellow  Joseph  and  asked  him  (Ihe)  the  favour  that  he 
[might]  let  him  copy  his  two  holiday-tasks  which  (os  quaes) 
should  be  presented  at  school  the  following  day.  Joseph 
asked,  astonished,  whether  he  had  not  yet  begun  them.^ 
Edward  answered  that  he  had  had  no  time  for  it,  that  he 
had  played  a  great  deal  with  his  brothers  and  sisters,  that  he 
had  walked  in  the  fields  and  woods,  and  that  he  had  caught 
butterflies.  Then  Joseph  answered  that  Edward,  having 
walked  so  much,  must  be  very  tired  and  needed  to  rest;  but 
that  the  following  day  he  would  receive  the  just  punishment 
for  his  laziness. 

53.  Exercise,  t 
Change    the    indirect   language    of   the  above    into    the 
direct. 

Comersacao. 
A  Lebre. 

(By  aid  of  the  words  in  parenthesis  a  whole  sentence 
is  to  be  formed). 
Que  6  uma  lebre  ?  (animal  quadrupede) 
Que  cor  tern?  (parda) 
Como  e  a  cabe9a?  (arredondada) 
Como  sao  as  orelhas?  (compridas  e  movediyas) 
Como  6  0  beiyo  superior?  (rachado) 
Que  tern  no  focinho?  (barbas) 
Como  sao  os  p6s  anteriores?  (curtos) 
Como  sao  os  p^s  posteriores?  (compridos) 
Como  e  a  cauda?  (muito  curta) 
Como  e  a  lebre?  (timida) 
Que  come  ella?  (sementes,  couves  e  cascas) 

^  In  indirect  discourse  the  Indicative  is  to  be  employed. 
Portuguese  CIonversallon-Grftinmar.  10 


146  Lesson  22. 

Quaes  sao  09  aniraaes  que  a  perseguem?  (raposas,  gatos 

bravos,  aves  de  rapina) 
Quern  a  ca^a?  (0  homem) 
Como  e  a  carne?  (aaborosa) 
Quern  utilisa  os  p6los?  (chapel leiros). 


Twenty-second  Lesson.    Li^o  vigesima 
"^^  segunda. 

Phonetical  and  Orthographical   Peculiarities 
of  otherwise  Regular  Verbs. 

A.  In  the  First  Conjugation. 

§  137a.  (a)  Those  verbs  of  the  1*^^  conj.  which  in 
their  radical  syllable  have  a  close  a  fvj,  not  followed 
by  m,  n  or  nJi,  change  this  v  into  open  a  wherever 
it  has  the  tonical  accent  (cf.  §  5).  Ex. :  lavar  [Iv  'var]  : 
lavo  ['lavu].     0  comboio  para  ['parvj. 

(b)  If,  however,  the  v  is  followed  by  m,  n  or  nh, 
it  remains  close :  chamar  [fe  'mvr] :  charm  [^famu] ;  sa- 
nar  :  sano   f'svnuj,    apanhar  :  apanho   fv  'pvjm]. 

^ACupL.  ytmhar  [gerjtar] : gmtlio  [gajiu]  L-gakf. 

§  138.  (a)  Those  verbs  of  the  1^*  conj.  which  in 
their  radical  syllable  have  an  atonic  e  [d],  not  fol- 
lowed by  m,  w,  nh  or  by  one  of  the  palatals  j,  eh,  Ih 
modify  it,  when  tonical,  into  open  e  [e].  Ex.:  con- 
certar  [hdsdr'tar]  to  m^ndi :  concerto  [hosertu];  confes- 
sar:confesso  fko'fesuj;  levar;  medrar;  seccar;  segar. 

(b)  If,  however,  one  of  those  consonants  follows, 
as  well  as  in  the  verb  chegar,  the  atonic  e  [o  or  i] 
becom-es  close  e  [e]  or  [v]  (see  §  5  A,  Remark):  remar  : 
remo  ['rremuj;  acenar  :  acena  [v'senv];  chegar  :  chego 
f'f'BgiiJ,  chega  f 'fegvj ;  desejar  [ddzi' gar] :  desejo [dd' s^gu] ; 
fechtr  [fj'farj  :  fecho  ffi^fuj;  ajoelhar  [vgivi'fiar] :  ajodho 
[vgtvwf^u].  Except.:  invejar  to  envy  :  invejo  [I'vEgu] 
with  open  e  [e]. 

(c)  On  the  other  hand  another  verb  belongs  to  this 
group  (b):  pesar  in  its  meaning  to  be  sorry:  pesa-me 
['pezvmd]  I  am  sorry,  I  worry,  with  close  e,  while  the 
same  verb  in  its  meaning  to  weight  has  open  e  [e]  in 
the  tonical  syllables:  peso  [pezu]. 


t 


Phon.  and  Orth.  Peculiarities  of  otherwise  Regular  Verbs.     147 

§  139.  Verbs  ending  in  -ear  change  e  into  ei  fvtj^ 
whenever  the  e  would  have  the  tonical  accent:  nomear 
fnmm  'arj  to  name  :  nomeio  fnu  'mvtuj.  Except. :  the  verb 
rwiiiflu  (or  better  criar)  to  create,  breed,  bring  up;  which 
conjugates:  mo,  crias,  cria,  criam,  etc.,  while  its  com- 
posites follow  the  general  rule :  procrear  to  procreate : 
procreio  (but  also  procrio) ;  recrear  to  delight,  to  recover : 
recreia. 

N.B. — Becriar,  to  recreate,  conjugates  like  criar. 

§  140.  Verbs  ending  in  -io/r  conserve  the  i 
even  when  tonical:  copiar :  copio  [Jcu'piuJ. 

Yet  there  is  a  small  group  of  verbs  which  follow 
the  rule  of  those  in  -ear:   negociar  to   negotiate  :  nego- 
ceio;   diligenciar  to  endeavour,   to  effect,    bring  about: 
diligenceio ;  odiar  to  hate :  odeio ;  premiar  to  distinguish,  ^  ^^ 
to  reward  ipremeio;  remediar  to  remedy,  repair :  remedeia.   ^^ 

§  141.     An  atonic  o  fuj,    not  followed  hy  m,  n       ^ 
or  nh,    changes   in  accented  syllables   into  open  o  [o]: 
tocar   to   touch,    to  play   (an  mQiiMmeni)  \ ' tocO  [toku]; 
cortar  to  cut :  corto  f'kortuj. 

If,  however,  followed  by  m,  «,  nh  or  a  vowel  (verbs 
in  -oar),  the  atonic  o  changes  into  close  o  foj:  assomar 
fvsu'marj  to  climb  up,  to  peep  out,  to  appear :  owsdmo 
fv'somuj;  abonar  to  bail  :  abono  [v'bonuj;  sonhar  to 
dream  :  sonJio  f'sojiuj  iperdoar  to  pardon  \perd6o  [pdr'- 
douj. 

Exceptions  to  this  rule  are  the  verbs  tomar  to 
take  and  domar  to  tame,  which  change  close  o  into 
open  0  foJ:  tdmo  ['tomuj,  domo  ['tomuj.  (N.B. — Tomo 
is  volume;  domo  dome). 

§  142.  The  unaccented  close  o,  which  is  found 
before  f,  is  modified  into  open  o  [o] :  soltar  [sol' tar]  to 
release,  loosen,  free  :  solto  ['soUii]. 

N.B. — The  nasal  o  [d]  is  and  remains  always 
close:  contar  [hon'tar]  to  count :  cow^o  f'JcdnttiJ. 

§  143.  The  verbs  in  -gar  intercalate  u  between 
g  and  a  following  e:  pagar  to  pay  :  pagues,  pague,  pa- 
guemos,  pagneis,  paguem;  pagiiei. 

The  verbs  in  -car  change  before  e  the  c  into  gw: 
tocar  :  toques,  toque,  etc. 


^      ^    .     A  ^yo   ^.  .  O^  m  ^. 


3  Ujruy^    ^^y-zl^l^ 
Q  0  -^^^   . 


148  Lesson  22. 

The  verbs  in  -gar  lose  the  cedilla  before  e:  cmne- 
gar :  comeces,  etc. 

Those  in  -jar  may  change  the  j  into  g  before  an 
e  or  conserve  it:  viagei  or  ^aagt^    viagemos  or  viimmi^. 

B.  In  the  Second  Conjugation. 

§  144.  Unaccented  close  a  fvj  of  the  radical 
syllable  changes,  when  accented,  into  open  a  {vj: 
abater  fvtv'terj  to  ahsiie  :  abato  [v'batuj. 

§  145.     Atonic  e  [o]  of  the  radical  changes: 

1.  Into  accented  close  e  [e]  in  the  first  person 
sing.  pres.  ind.  and  the  accented  forms  derived  from 
it  (i.e.:  the  singular  and  the  S*"^  pers.  plur.  of  the  sub- 
junctive): gemer  to  groan  :  gemo  ['s^mu],  gema,  gemas 
['semy(f)],  gemam  (N.B. — a  or  o  in  the  ending!); 

2.  Into  open  e  [e]  in  the  2^^  and  3^^  pers.  sing, 
and  in  the  S''^  pers.  plur.  pres.  ind.  and  the  derived  forms 
(2°*^  pers.  imperative):  germs  ['s^m}/],  geme  /"'jfws/t 
gemem  ['jtmmj  (N.B.  — e  in  the  ending  1). 

§  146.     Atonic  o  [u]  becomes  in  the  same  cases: 

1.  close  0  [o]:  comer  to  eat:  como  f'JcomuJ,  coma(s) 
f'komv(f)J, 

2.  open  0  foj:    comes  ["komif],  come  ['homd]^  etc. 

§  147.  Unaccented  close-  o  [o]  becomes  open  o 
[o]  in  all  those  forms  where  9  becomes  e  (cf  §  145,2): 
volver  to  turn  :  volvcs^  volve,  volvem. 

§  148.  Verbs  ending  in -cer  take  a  cedilla  before 
a  and  o:  conhecer  to  know  :  conJiego,  conhega,  etc. 

§  149.  Verbs  ending  in  -ger  change  g  into  j  be- 
fore a  and  o:  proteger  to  protect :  ^o^e;o,  proteja. 

§  150.  Verbs  ending  in  -guer  drop  the  w  before 
a  and  o :  erguer  to  raise :  ergo,  erga,  ergas,  etc. 

C.  In  the  Third  Conjugation. 

§  151.  Unaccented  close  a  fvj  of  the  radical  syl- 
lable changes,  if  not  followed  by  m,  n  or  7ih,  into  open 
a  [a]  when  accented:  ahrir  [v'hrir]  to  open  :  ahro 
['  ahru]. 


Fhon.  and  Orth.  Peculiarities  of  otherwise  Regular  Verbs.       149 

If,  however,  it  is  followed  by  m,  n  or  7i7i,  it  remains 
close:  ganir  to  howl,  yelp  :  gane  f'g^njj;  bramir  to  roar: 
bramo  ['br^mu]. 

§  152.  The  atonic  e  [d]  of  the  radical  syllable 
changes : 

1.  Into  i  in  the  first  person  sing.  pres.  ind.  and 
the  derived  forms  (pres.  subj.— N.B. — before  a  and  o): 
despir  to  undress  :  dispo,  dispa,  etc.  (cf.  §  156). 

2.  Into  open  e  [e]  in  the  2'^*^  and  'd^^  pers.  sing,  and 
3^*^  pers.  plur.  pres.  ind.  and  sing,  of  the  imperative 
(N.B.— before  e):  despes^  despe,  despem. 

Memark. — The  verbs  aggredir  to  assault,  denegrir  to 
blacken,  to  slander,  prevenir  to  anticipate,  to  prevent,  pro- 
gredir  to  proceed,  to  thrive,  remir  to  redeem,'  transgredir  to 
transgress,  change  the  e  of  the  penultimate  into  i  when  ac- 
cented: aggrido,  aggrides,  aggride,   aggridem,  aggrida(s),   etc. 

§  153.  Close  e  fej,  whether  oral  or  nasal,  be- 
comes i  in  the  same  forms  where  9  becomes  i  (s.  §  152,1), 
remaining  e  feJ  in  all  others:  sentir  to  feel,  smell :  sinto, 
sinta(s),  sintam  (s.  §  156);  sente(s),  etc. 

§  154.     Atonic  o  [u]  becomes : 

1.  C7  in  the  same  forms  where  atonic  e  [d]  be- 
comes i  (s.  §  152,1):  dprmir  to  sleep  :  cZ;(r;«o,  durma, 
durmas^  durmam  (s.  §  156). 

2.  Open  0  [o]  in  those  persons  where  atonic  e  be- 
comes [e]  (s.  §  152,2):  dormes,  dorme,  dormem. 

Remark.— In  the  Verbs  sortir  to  supply,  cortir  to  tan, 
ordir  to  warp,  to  plot,  o  changes  into  u  wherever  accented: 
curto,  curteSf  curte,  curtem,  curia(s),  curiam,  surte,  urdo,  etc. 
The  same  change  occurs  in  cortir  even  in  unaccented  forms, 
which  might  be  confounded  with  those  of  cortar:  curtdmos, 
curtaes,  etc.  N.B.  — Instead  of  ordir  you  may  write  urdir, 
which  is  more  modern. 

-     §  155.     Atonic  it  (and  6)  of  the  infinitive  becomes 
open  0  [o]  in  the  2°^  and  3^^  pers.  sing,  and  the  Z^^  pers. 
plur.  pres.  ind.  and  in  the  following  verbs: 
Acudir  to  succour  descobrir  to  discover 

btdir  to  stu*  cuspir  to  spit 

consumir  to  consume  desfruir  to  destroy 

ctibrir  (better:  cohrir)  to  cover      engulir  to  swallow 


150  Lesson  22. 

ftigir  to  flee,  fly,  escape  svhir  to  mount,  ascend 

refugir  to  retrocede  sumir  to  sink;  — se  to  vanish 

sacudir  to  shake  (off),  to  toss      tussir  (or  tossir)  to  cough. 
Thus:  acodes,  acode,  acodem. 

Pres.  ind.  of  consumir:  consiimo,  consomes,  consome,  consumi- 
mos,  consumis,  consomem. 
•»       ■»      7>   destruir:   destruo,  destroes,  destroe,    destruimos, 
destruiSf  destroem. 

Remark.— In  construir  and  reconstruir  the  ii  is  generally 
conserved:  construo,  construes  (or  constroes),  construe  (or  con- 
stroe),  construimos,  construis,  construem  (constroem). 

§  156.  The  vowel  of  the  radical  syllable  beiDg 
close  e  [e]  or  atonic  e  [d]  or  o  [u]  (see  §§  152 — 154), 
it  undergoes  the  same  modification  in  the  1'^'^  and  2"^ 
pers.  plur.  pres.  subj.  as  in  the  sing,  and  in  the  3"^*^  pers. 
plur.  of  this  form:  ferir  to  wound  : /?ramo5,  firaes. 
Pres.  conj.  of  vestir  to  dress:  vista(s),  vistdmos,  vistacs,  vistam. 
»        »      ■>    mentir    to   lie:    minta(s),    mintdmoSj    ynintaes, 

mintam. 
»        »      »    donnir  to  sleep:  durma(s),  durmdmos,  durmaes, 
durmam. 

§  157.  Those  verbs,  where  the  infinitive-ending 
'ir  is  preceded  by  g,  gu  (or  qu),  are  subject  to  the 
rules  of  §§  149  and  150.  Ex.:  corrigir :  corrijo,  corrija; 
seguir  to  follow  :  sigo,  siga,  frcmquir  (antiquated)  to 
cultivate :  franco,  franca. 

BemarJc.—ln  argu'ir,  to  ai^gue,  the  u  is  audible: 
arguo,  argues,  argt'te,  arguimos,  arguis,  arguem. 

The  same  in  delinqu'ir,  to  offend  against  a  law: 
delinquo,  delinqiles,  delinque,  delinquimos,  etc. 

§  158.  In  the  verbs  ending  in  -ahir,  the  h  is  not 
a  part  of  the  radical,  but  serves  merely  to  separate  a 
and  i.  So  as  not  to  leave  any  doubt,  for  instance,  in  the 
1^*  and  2°*^  pers.  plur.  pres.  ind.  the  i  has  the  tonical  accent, 
and  not  the  a:  sahimos,  sahis.  Modern  orthography 
drops  the  h,  putting  an  accent  instead,  thus:  sdio,  saes, 
saCj  saimoSf  sais,  sdem;  saia(s),  satamos^  etc.;  sdia(s), 
saidmos,  etc. 

§  159.  Verbs  in  -uzir  drop  the  c  of  tlie  3^'^  pers. 
sing,  pres,  ind.,  thus  condtiz  instead  of  conduze.  (N.B. 
— The  imperative  is:  conduze.) 


Phon.  and  Orth.  Peculiarities  of  otherwise  Regular  Verbs.       151 


PalaTras. 


0  algodao 

[aigu'&vu] 
,0  algodoeiro 
[algu&u  'viruj 

0  ourigo 
[o  'risuj 


the  cotton 

the  cotton-tree 

the  prickly- 
shell,  hedge- 
hog 


a  felpa 

['fdpvj 
a  pennugem 

[p9  'nu^v}] 
0  cotdo 

[ku'tvuj 
macio  [mv  'siu] 
drodafrrod^sjde  round 
0  casulo 

[Jcs'zuluJ 
cardar 

fkvr'&arj 
apropriar 

[vprupri  'ar] 
0  tecido 

[t9  'si&uj 
a  xyelle  [peh] 
0  calgado 

[Teal  'sa&uj 
raspar 

[rrvfpar] 
o  tanque  [tvkd] 
a  cantada 

[hv  'ma&ej 
0  ianino 

[tis  'ninu] 
repassar  \ 

[rrdpu  'sarj    \ 
amollecer 

[nmtdd'serj    j 
a  cosiureira 

fkuftu  rvir^] 
0  vestido 

[vif'ti&uj 
a  ronpa  hranca  the  linen 

['rropv'brvkej 
6  fato  ['fatuj      the  clothes 
cortar  [kur  'tar]  to  cut 
a  tesoiira  the  scissors 

ftd  'zoruj 
a  fit  a  metrica       the  metric 

['fitv'metrikv]      measure 
0  molde  the  pattern 

f'mDl&d] 


the  down 

smooth 

round 

the  capsule 

to  card 

to  appropriate; 

make  fit  to 
the  tissue 

the  skin 
shoes  and  boots 

to  scrape 

the  tank 
the  layer 

the  tan 


to  soak 


the   seamstress 


the  dress,  cloth 


alinhavar 

[vHye  'varj 
a  costura 

[kuf'turv] 
0  alfaiate 

[aifvi  'aid] 
0  vestudrio 

[vyftu  anu] 
0  fio,  0  linho 
a  agtdha 

/» 'gufia] 
0  traje  ['tra^}J 
curioso 

[kurf'ozu] 
padecer  | 

fpv&9  's9r]     I 
soffrer  ( 

[su'frerj       J 
exercer 

[izdr'ser] 
a  raiz  [rrv'if] 
abranger 

[vbrv'^er] 
infelizmente 

[tfdlis' mentd] 
0  minhoto 

[mi  'yotu] 
0  ribatejdno 

[rribeti'  ^vnu] 

0  alemtejdno 
[vlvili  '^Tsnu] 

0  mirandes 

[mirvn  def] 
passar  para 
abster  [ubf'terj 
aftexao 

[flek'siuj 
acertar[vs9rtar] 
oral  [o'rai] 
dtono  [' atunu]  \ 
surdo  f'sur&uj  j 
a  transforma- 

cdo  [trvf- 

furma'svuj 
a  modifi,cagao 

[mo&dfica- 

'svii] 
no  entanto 

[num'tvntu] 


to  baste^  to 

stitch 
the  sewing 

the  tailor 

the  clothiug 

the  thread 
the  needle 

the  costume 
curious 


to  suffer 


to  practise 

the  radical 
to  embrace 

unhappily 

the  inhabitant 

of  the  Minho 
the   inhabitant 

of  the  Elba- 

tejo 
the   inhabitant 

of  the  Alem- 

tejo 
the  inhabitant 

of  Miranda 
to  pass  to 
to  abstain 
the  inflexion 

to  hit 
oral 

atonic 

the  transforma- 
tion 

the  modifica- 
tion 

the    change 

meanwhile,  vet 


152  Lesson  22. 


phonkico  phonetical 

[fti'nstiku] 
pcUenfear  manifest 

fputint}  'arj 


hasear  fbvzi'arj  to  rest  upon 
a  pronuncia         the    pronuncia- 
fpru'nuii}yj         tion. 


»4.  Leitnra. 

(a)  0  algoddo. 

0  algodao  e  produzido  per  uma  arvore  cbamada  algodoeiro. 
0  algodoeiro  produz  uma  especie  de  ouri9os.  Estes  ouri^os 
abrem  quando  estao  maduros  e  mostram  no  meio  nmas  se- 
mentes  escuras.  A  roda  d'essas  semen tes  escuras  ve-se  uma 
felpe  ou  pennugem  macia,  como  cotao.  Essa  felpa  e  o  algodao. 
Depois  de  tirada  do  ouri9o  ou  casulo,  a  felpa  e  cardada  e  em 
seguida  reduzida  a  fio  em  machinas  apropriadas;  e  com  esse 
fio  fazem-se  os  tecidos  ou  pannos  de  algodao. 

(b)  As  pelles. 

As  pelles  servem  principalmente  para  fazer  cal9ado.  Os 
bois,  as  vaccas  e  as  vitellas  sao  os'animaes  que  nos  fornecem 
mais  pelles  para  cal^ado.  A  pelle  depois  de  tirada  do  animal 
e  mettida  em  agua  para  que  amollecja  e  em  seguida  e  raspada 
para  que  Ihe  saia  todo  o  pello  e  restos  de  came.  Depois  de 
bem  raspadas,  as  pelles  se  curtem,  sendo  mergulhadas  em  tan- 
ques  e  separadas  umas  das  outras  por  camadas  de  casca  de 
carvalho  pulverisada.  A  casca  de  carvalho  cont^m  muito  tanino, 
e  este  repassa  as  pelles  e  faz  com  que  nao  apodre^am.  0  azedo 
ou  acre  da  casca  de  carvalho  provem  do  tanino. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  0  primeiro  Livro  de  Leitura.) 

55.  Exercise. 

Transpose  No.  52  into  the  corresponding  forms  of  in- 
direct language,  wherein  it  must  be  remembered  to  employ  the 
indicative. 

Ex.:    Affirmaram-me  que  o  algodao  ira  produzido  .  .  ., 
que  0  algodoeiro  produzia  ... 

5(>.  Thema. 

(a)  The  Seamstress, 
The  seamstress  makes  clothes  and  linen  for  women.  She 
makes  also  children's  clothes  and  men's  linen.  The  seamstress 
first  cuts  what  she  intends  to  sew,  making  use  of  the  chalk, 
the  scissors,  the  metric  measure,  and  the  ruler,  and  she  might, 
if  she  wanted  to,  employ  also  patterns.  Thereupon  she  bastes 
and  then  she  sews,  making  use  of  a  needle  and  thread.  With 
a  hot  iron  she  opens  and  irons  (tr. :  correr)  the  seams. 


Phon,  and  Ortli.  Peculiarities  of  otherwise  Regular  Verbs.       153 


(b)  The  Tailor. 
The  tailor  occupies  himself  in  making  clothing  for  men. 
The  costumes  of  the  Portuguese  people  are  very  carious 
and  in  various  regions  of  Portugal  even  very  fine  (sup.  abs.j. 
People  should  always  wear  these  clothes,  which  do  not  resemble 
those  of  other  nations.  Unhappily,  fashion  allows  (fas)  national 
clothing  to  fall  into  oblivion  (cair  em  esquecimento).  But 
the  inhabitants  of  the  Minho,  the  Ribatejo,  the  Alemtejo  and 
of  Miranda  still  dress  after  (d)  their  own  fashion. 

Conversa^ao. 


Previno  os  senhores  que  ainda 
devemos  exercitar  os  verbos 
que  apprenderam  na  ultima 
li9ao.  Qual  a  mudan9a  que 
soffrem  os  verbos  da  terceira 
conjugaQao,  cuja  raiz  temum 
e  surdo? 

Dizendo  a  llexao  do  presente, 
abrangeu  outra  mudanpa  dos 
mesmos  verbos.     Qual  e? 


0  senhor  nao  conhece  verbos 
da  mesma  categoria  que  nao 
transformem  o  e  surdo  em 
e  aberto? 

Como  6  que  se  distinguem  dos 
outros  verbos? 


Ja  nao  duvido  que  o,s  senhores 
conhe^am  tambem  os  verbos 
que,  parecendo-se  com  os  ja 
tratados,  teem  no  entanto  um 
e  fechado  na  penultima  syl- 
laba  do  infinito. 


Bem,  jabasta!  Naomintamais! 
Exige  a  justi^a  que,  pedindo 
desculpa,  se  rectifique  o  que 
eu  dizia:  nao  mentiu,  dizendo 


0  e  surdo  passa  para  i  na  pri- 
meira  pessoa  do  singular  do 
presente  indicativo  e  nas  tres 
do  singular  e  terceira  do  plu- 
ral do  presente  conjunctivo; 
por  exeraplo:  visto,  vestes, 
veste,  vesttmos,  vestis,vcstem. 

0  e  surdo  passa  para  e  aberto 
n  a  segunda  pessoa  do  singular 
e  nas  terceiras  pessoas  do 
singular  e  plural  do  presente 
indicative,  assim  como  no 
singular  do  imperativo. 

Conhe^o,  sim,  senhor.  Sao  entre 
outros  OS  verbos  aggredir, 
denegrir,  prevenir,  progredir, 
remir,  transgredir. 

Ellesmudamo  e  surdo  da  penul- 
tima syllaba  do  presente  do 
infinitivo  para  i  todas  as  vezes 
que  e  accentuada,  p.  ex.  pre- 
vino,prevines,previne,preve' 
nimos,  prevenis,  previnem. 

Nesses  verbos,  o  e  fechado,  seja 
elle  oral  ou  nasal,  passapara  i 
nas  mesmas  pessoas  em  que  e 
surdo  passa  para  ^,  conser  van- 
do- se  nas  outras  pessoas :  min- 
to,  mentes,  mente,  men  times,, 
mentis,  mentem;  minta, 
mintas  etc. 

0  verbo  fugiry  pertencendo 
aquelles  que  no  infinitivo 
teem  u  oral,  muda  essa  vogal 
em  0  aberto  na  2*  pessoa  e 


154  Lesson  23. 

a  flexSo  de  mentir.    Ate  que  na  3*  do  singular  e  na  3" 

acertou;  muito  bem!   Agora  do  plural  do  presente  fndi- 

desejo  que  conjugue  fugir.  cativo    e    no    singular    do 

imperativo :  fujo,  fdges,  fuge, 
fugirnoSj  fugis,  fogem;  foge. 
A  1*  pessoa  sing,  do  pr.  ind.      Na  pessoa  mencionada,  assim 
d'esteverbo,sendoplionetica-  como  em  todo  o  presente  do 

mente  regular,  patenteia  to-  Q.oii}\mQtv^o(fuja,fujas,fuja^ 

daviaumamodifica^aoortho-  fujdmos,  fujaes,  fujam)^  o  g 

grapbica.    Indique  o  senbor  passa  para  j,  porque  precisa 

em  que   consiste  e  a  regra  conservaramesmapromincia 

em  que  se  baseia.  antes  de  a. 


Twenty-third  Lesson.    Li0o  vigesima 
terceira. 

Exercises  on  the  Full  Verbs,  especially  of 
the  Preceding  Lesson. 

N.B. — Here  Lessons  3 — 7,  especially  the  subjunc- 
tive moods  and  their  employment,  are  to  be  repeated. 

The  verbs  printed  in  italics  are  to  be  conjugated 
by  word  of  mouth  in  those  tenses  \vhich  have  some 
peculiaritv. 

67. 
As  batatas* 

As  batatas  nascent  de  uma  planta  chamada  batat«ira.^ 
A  rama^  da  batateira  ^  verde.  A  batateira  da  flores  cor  de 
violeta,  ou  brancas.  Estas  flores  trans formam-se  em  fructo- 
com  a  forma  de  pequeninas  bolas^  cor  de  viol^ta.  Estas  pe- 
qaeninas  bolas  sao  venenosas.  Arrancada*  uma  batateira,  o 
pe  traz  agarradas^  [a  elle]  varias  batatas,  umas  grandes,  ou- 
tras  mais  pequenas.  Cada  batata  apresenta  por  fora  varies 
botoes^  gomos**  ou  borbulhas^,  os  quaes  teem  o  nome  de 
<iiolhos^.  Enterrando  uma  batata,  nasce  com  o  tempo  uma 
batateira.  Partindo  uma  batata  de  modo  a'  separar  inteiros 
OS  varies  olhos  que  ella  apresenta,  e  enterrando  em  separado^ 
cada  um  d'esses  olhos,  de  cada  um  nasce  uma  batateira,  que 
com  o  tempo  dard  batatas. 

*  These  excerpts  55 — 60  are  taken  from  0  Primeiro  Livro 
de  Leitura  by  Trindade  Coelho.  The  student  is  advised  to  care- 
fully read  and  translate  these  excerpts,  as  well  as  No.  61,  and 
to  retranslate  them  into  Portuguese. 


Exercises  on  the  Full  Verbs.  155 

As  batatas  sao  um  magnifico  alimento  nao  so  para  as 
pessoas  mas  para  os  animaes.  Depois  de  apanhadas^,  as 
batatas  devem  ser  conservadas  em  sitios  sficcos  e  frescos.  A 
humidade^^  fas  apodrecer  as  batatas.  0  calor  fas  com  que 
germinem.^^  A  batata,  depois  de  germinar^^j  adquire  um  gosto 
pessimo,  e  nao  se  pode  comer. 

^  Potato-plant.  ^  foliage.  ^  ball.  ^  arrancar  =  to  pull 
out,  to  root  up.  ^  agarrar  =  to  cling  (of.  §  54).  ^  bud.  '  so 
as  to.  ^  separately.  ^  apanhar  =  to  pick  up,  to  gather.  '^^  damp- 
ness, moisture.     ^^  to  germinate. 

58. 
As  fridas. 

As  fructas  nascem  das  arvores  fructiferas,  T)u  arvores  de 
fructo.  Todas  as  arvores  produzem  fnicto ;  mas  as  chamadas 
arvores  fructiferas  sao  propriamente  as  que  prodnzem  fructos 
que  podemos  comer.  As  arvores  de  fructo  cobrem-se  de  floras 
na  primavera.  Das  flores  nascem  os  fructos,  e  estes  sao  co- 
Ihidos  depois  de  maduros.^ 

0  pecegueiro^  dd  pScegos^,  a  pereira*  dd  peras,  a  ma- 
cieira^  da  ma^as,  a  larangeira^  da  laranjas,  a  ameixoeira'^  da 
ameixas,  a  amendoeira^  da  amfindoas,  a  cerejeira^  ou  cerdeira^ 
da  cerejas,  a  gingeira^*'  da  ginjas^\  o  castanheiro  da  castan- 
has,  0  marmeleiro^^  da  marmelos,  o  limoeira  da  limoes,  o 
daraasqueiro^^  da  damascos,  a  nogueira  da  nozes,  a  roman- 
zeira**  da  romas,  a  figueira  da  figos,  a  tangerineira  da  tange- 
rinas^^,  etc. 

As  arvores  de  fructo  sao  podadas'^^  no  inverno.  0  po- 
dador^'  serve-se  principalmente  da  navalha^^  do  podao^^  e 
da  tesoura^*^,  com  os  quaes  corta  os  ramos  iniiteis.  As  fru- 
ctas comem-se  mais  por  gOso^^  do  que  para  sustento;  mas 
todas  as  fructas  conieem  elementos  preciosos  para  a  saiide. 
As  fructas  comem-se  geralmente  emquanto  frescas,  e  so  devem 
comer-se  bem  maduras.  As  fructas  tambem  se  podem  con- 
servar,  quer^^  seccando-as,  como  se  faz  por  exemplo  a  ameixa, 
ao  figo  e  a  pera;  quer  fazendo  com  elias  os  chamados  doces 
de  calda^^,  ou  de  compdta^^;  e  ainda  outros  variedades  de 
doces.  Com  as  fructas  frescas,  faeem-se  tambem  as  chamadas 
fructas  de  conserva.'^^ 

^  Ripe.  ^  peach-tree.  •'  peaches.  *  pear-tree.  ^  apple- 
tree.  *^  or"Jinge-tree.  ^  peach-tree.  '^  almond-tree.  ^  cherry  tree. 
^"  mahaleb.  ^^  mahaleb-cherries.  ^-  quince- tree.  ^■'  apricottree. 
^^  pomegranate-tree.  ^^  oranges  of  Tanger.  ^^  podar  =  to  prune, 
lop,  clip.  ^"  clipper.  ^^  knife.  ^^  pruning-saw.  '^^  pruning-shears. 
*^  pleasure.  ^^  guer  .  .  .  qiier  =  either  ...  or.  ^^  juice,  jam. 
*^  stewed  fruit.     ^^  preserved. 


156 


Lesson  23. 


Coiiversa^ao. 


Porque   plantamos   urn    grao 

de    ma9a    (urn     carO^o    de 

p6cego,  de  ameixa)  etc.? 
Que     esperamoa     (desejamos), 

plantando  niua  arvore  fru- 

ctifera? 
Que  e  precise    {nun    nma  dr- 

vore  fructifera  dar  fructa  no 

verao  ou  outOnoV 
Como  e  que  se  consomem    as 

fructas  ? 


Porque   sao   podadas    a3    ar- 

vores  ? 
Quaes  os  instrumentos  de  que 

0  podador  se  deve  servir? 

Para  que  fim  cultivamos  a  ba- 
tata? 

Como  6  precise  conserval-a? 


Que  seria  se  as  batatas  esti- 
vessem  num  sitio  quente? 

Porque  se  deve  evitar  que 
germinem? 


Para  que  nasija  uma  macieira 
(um  pecegueiro,  uma  ameixo- 
eira)  etc. 

Esperamos  (desejamos)  que 
cre99a  e  que  produza  fru- 
ctas. 

E  precise  que  na  primavera  se 
cubra  de  flores. 

Consomem-se  (or:  s5o  conso- 
midas)  frescas,  seccas,  co- 
zidas,  feitas  em  doces  de 
calda,  de  compota  etc. 

Podam-se  as  arvores  para  as 
livrar  dos  ramos  inuteis. 

E  precise  que  se  sirva  (e  pre- 
cise servir-se)  da  navalha, 
do  podao  e  da  tesoura. 

Para  que  nos  forne^a  alimento, 
a  nos  e  aos  nossos  animaes 
dom^sticos. 

E  precise  que  seja  conservada 
em  sitio  secco  e  fresco  para 
que  a  humidade  nao  a  apo- 
drecja. 

0  calor  as  faria  germinar  (or : 
faria  com  que  germinassem). 

Para  que  com  a  germina^ao 
nao  adquiram  (ou  ganhem) 
um  gOsto  p^ssimo  que  nao  se 
Ihes  deixe  comer. 


59. 

A  lavra.^ 

A  lavra  faz-se  com  o  arade^  ou  com  a  charrua.-  0 
arado  e  a  charrua  sao  puxados*  per  bois,  e  tambem  o  podem 
ser  por  cavallos  ou  rauares.*  0  arado  e  a  charrue  rasgam^ 
a  terra  com  a  rfilha^  abrindo  no  cbao  sulcos^  ou  r^gos.^  A 
terra  antes  de  lavrada®  esta  mais  ou  menos  dura;  depois  de 
lavrada  fica  fofa.®  So  depois  de  f6fa,  a  terra  esta  propria 
para  receber  a  semente.**  0  lavrador**  que  deitasse  a  se- 
mente  na  terra  antes  de  a  lavrar,  pdrdia  o  tempo  e  a  semente, 


May  be  extended  and  varied  by  the  teacher. 


Exercises  on  the  Full  Verbs.  157 

pois  esta  comiam-na  03  passaros,  e  a  que  nao  comessem  os 
passaros  nao  nascia.  A  semente  precisa  de  terra  humida  e 
fofa  para  nascer  e  de  se  esconder^^  debaixo  da  terra 

^  Tillage.  '^  plough.  ^  to  pull,  to  draw.  ^  mule.  ^  tear. 
"  coulter.  ^  furrow.  ^  till.  ^  loose.  ^"  seed.  ^^  husbandman. 
^-  to  hide. 

(JO. 

A  sementeira^ 

Depois  de  lavrada  a  terra,  o  lavrador  4eita-lhe  a  se- 
mente. A  seroente  vae-  n'um  sacco,  e  este  debaixo  do  bra9o 
esquerdo  do  lavrador,  e  dependurado^  do  hombro.  0  lavra- 
dor espalha^  a  semente,  jogando^-a,  com  a  mao  direita,  para 
a  frente  e  para  os  lados,  Ao  mesmo  tempo  que  semeia^,  o 
lavrador  vae  and<indo.  A  sementeira  faz-se  tambem  com  in- 
strumentos  apropriados,  chamados  semeadores  mechanicos.'^ 

^  Sowing.  -  present  of  ir  (s.  §  214).  ^  hanging.  ^  to  spread.  ''  to 
throw.     '^  to  sow.     "'  sowing-machine. 

€onYersa<^ao. 

(See  note  p.  156.) 

Porque    se    poem    os    bois   a      Para  que  a  puxem  {or:   para 

charrua?  que  seja  puxada  por  elles).. 

Para  qu6  se  emprega  a  char-      E*ara  que  rasgue  a  terra  com 

rua  ou  o  arado?  a  relha   e   abra   sulcos   ou 

rfigos. 
Porque  e  preciso  rasgar-se  a      Para  que  fique  fofa. 

terra? 
Que  havia-de  dizer  V.  se  dese-      Pegue  com  o  sacco  da  semente 
jasse    ensinar   a   alguem    a  debaixo  do  bra^o  esquerdo, 

semear?  de   maneira   que   fique   de- 

pendurado  do  hombro  e  jo- 
gue  a  semente,  espalhando 
-a  com  a  direita  para  a 
frente  e  para  os  lados. 

61. 

A  grade.^ 
Semeada  a  terra,  o  lavrador  passa  a  grade  por  cima 
d'ella.  A  grade  alisa  a  terra;  e  alisando-a,  faz  com  que  de- 
baixo d'ella  se  esconda  a  semente.  Encontrando-se  coberta^, 
a  semente  nao  tarda  a  germinar.  Pouco  tempo  depois,  toda. 
a  terra  comega  a  verdejar*,  cdbrindo-se  de  uma  especie  de 
relva.*  E  a  seata®  que  comega  a  nascer.  Cada  grao  que 
germinou  produsiu  uma  pequenina  haste;  as  hastes  vao^  cres- 


158  Lesson  23. 

cendo  pouco  a  pouco;    vdo  com  o  tempo  creando   espiga^;   e 
na  espiga  vdo  medrando^  os  graos. 

^  Harrow.  -  to  smooth.  ''  P.  part,  of  cobrir.  ^  to  become 
green.  ^  turf.  **  (standing)  corn.  ^  Fres.oi  ir  (s.%  214);  vao  crescendo 
periphrastically  for  crescem.     ^  ear  (of  corn).    ^  to  grow,  to  thrive. 


A  monda.^ 

Na  primavera,  a  seara  esta  ja  muito  desenvolvida,  e  ate 
ondula^  em  dias  de  vento,  produzindo  a  vista  um  agradavel 
aspecto.*  Mas  misturados  com  as  hastes  da  seara,  apparecem 
entao,  frequentemente,  hervas  damninhas.*  Essas  herves  e 
precise  arrancal-as,  pois  roubam^  d  terra'  o  sustento  que  6  s5 
para  a  seara,  e  portanto^  nao  deixam  medrar  esta.  0  tra- 
balho  on  operaQao  de  arrancar  essas  hervas  damninhas  chama- 
se  monda. 

*  Weeding.  -  undulate.  ^  sight.  "*  weeds.   ^  to  rob.  ^  therefore. 


Conselkos  d'uma  mae  (A)  e  d'um  amigo  idoso  (B)  para 
um  moQO  (G)  em  vesper as^  de  ir  para  fdra.^ 

A.  Men  filho,  quando  te  fores  embora  (see  §  34  foot-note 
and  p.  37),  nao  te  esqnecas  de  te^  despedir  dos  tens 
professores,  para  que  te  nao  tenham  em  conta^  de 
malcriado!^  Seria  uma  desapprobacjao  que  me  to- 
casse  a  mim,  porque  fui  eu  quem  te  criei. 

C.  Nao  receie  minha  Mae,  que  eu  nao  me  comports  bem. 
Diligenceio  (§  139)  sempre  fazer  honra  a  educacao 
recebida. 

B.  E  um  cuidado  que  sempre  se  premeia,  pois  a  um 
joven  bem  comportado  acolhe^-se  com  prazer  em 
toda  a  parte. 

A.  E  faze  para  nao  chegares  tarde  a  esta^aol  Sabes  a 
que  horas  abre  a  bilheteira?*^ 

C.  Acho  que  abre  as  tres  menos  dez,  e  consta-me**  que 
fecha  cinco  minutos  antes  da  partida  do  comboio. 

B.  Se  assim  o  deseja  (or:  desejar)^  tomo-lhe  (or:  tomar- 
Ihe-ei)  o  bilhete  e  cUamo  tambem  um  portador*  que 
Ihe  leve  a  bagagem.^® 

C.  Muito  obrigado  a  V«-Ex»  ,  mas  nSo  sera  melhor  que 
tome  um  trem  de  pra(ja?** 

A.  Ainda  que  tomes  trem,  nao  escusas  d'um  portador 
que  te  acompanhe  ao  caes  {or:  d  plata -forma),  e  ate 
a  portinhola**  do  comportamento.**  E  escuta^*:  nao 
te  assomes  muito  d  janella,  para  nao  te  constipai'es** 


Exercises  on  the  Full  Verbs. 


159 


(para  que  te  nao  constipes).     E  nao  consintas^''  que 
se  abra  a  janella  do  lado  do  vento! 

B.  0  meu  joven  amigo  pode  dormir  em  caminho  de 
ferro  ? 

C.  Eu  raras  vezes  durmo;  receio  que  alguma  paysagem 
passe,  sem  que  eu  a  perceba. 

B.  Teiii  razao.  Seria  pena  que  Ihe  escapasse  coisa  al- 
guma. Mas  entao  sera  precise  que  se  erga  de  vez  em 
quando,  para  nao  flcar  (or:  para  que  nao  fique)  com 
somno. 

A.  Sim,  e  nao  comas  muito,  porque  isso  faz  adormecer. 

C.  Tambem  sinto  pouca  vontade  de  comer  emquanto 
viajo. 

A.  Tu  ainda  tens  (por  ahi)  algumas   pequenas   dividas 

que  pagar? 
C.  Nao  tenho,  minha  Mae.     Paguei  tudo  quanto  devi. 

A.  Melhor.  Prefiro  que  nao  haja  nada  que  te  pese 
(§  138  c)  na  alma,  Lamental-o-ia,  se  nao  me  dissesses 
a  verdade. 

C  Perdoe-me,  minha  Mae!  Nunca  Ihe  menti,  nem  Ihe 
minto  agora.     Nao  ihe  pese  (§  138c)  isso! 

B.  Como  veste  em  viagem? 

C.  Visto  fato^^  de  flanella  e  levo  casacao.^^ 

A.  E  olha,  ainda  que  parega  sup^rfluo  lembrdl-o:  nao 
cuspas  no  chao,  nem  tussas  quando  puderes^^  evital-o, 
para  nao  incommodares^^  os  outros  viajantes. 

B.  Agrade90  todos  os  sens  conselhos,  minha  Mae,  ate 
OS  superfluos. 

'  On  the  point  (=  at  the  eve)  of.  ^  to  go  abroad.  ^  to 
take  leave.  *  to  take  for,  ^  ill-bred.  ^  to  receive.  '  book- 
ing-office. 8  I  am  told.  '-*  porter.  ^*  luggage.  ^^  cab,  hansom. 
^■^  platform.  ^^  door.  ^*  compartment.  ^^  to  hark,  listen  atten- 
tively. ^^  to  catch  cold.  ^^  to  consent.  ^^  clothes.  ^^  great- 
coat.    ^^  fut.  subj.  of  poder  (s.  §  198).     -^  to  molest. 


Palavras. 


0  vaqueiro  the  cowherd 

fvK  'kT8%ru] 
apascentar  to  pasture 

[epv/sen'tarj 
a  vacca  [vakvj  the  cow 
cofitiguo  contiguous 

[kon  'tigwuj 
attrahir  to  attract 

[Btrn  'ir] 
0  desejo  the  desire 

trepar  [tr9'parj  to  climb 


pisar  [pi'zar] 
enxotar 

[ifu  'tar], 
corar  [ko'rarj 
irracional 

[irrvs}u  'naij 
0  appetite 

a  vergonha 

fv9rgopvJ 

indifferente 


to  tread 

to  drive  away 

to  blush 
irrational 

the  appetite, 

covetousness 
the  shame 

indifferent 


160  Lesson  23. 

soprar  to  blow  i  a  consUpagrio      the  cold 

fsu  'prar]  j        [  kdjtipv  's7?  u] 

mpero [' nfi)9ru]  rough;  harsh,  |  o  corrente  d'ar    the  draught 

sharp  ;  estorvar  to  disturb. 

G4.  Leitura. 
0  vaqueiro. 

Um  rapaz  anda  apascentando  uma  vacca  n'um  prado  con- 
tiguo  a  um  jardim.  N'essa  occasiao  y6  n'uma  arvore  uuias 
cerejas  maduras,  que  o  attraem,  e  o  luovem  a  desejos  de  as 
apanhar.  Abandona  no  mesmo  instante  o  animal,  e  trepa  a 
arvore.  A  vacca  porem,  quando  nao  ve  o  pastor,  entra  no 
jardim,  come  a  melhor  herva,  e  pisa  muita  outra  com  os  pes. 

0  rapaz  desce  fnrioso  da  arvore,  enxota  o  animal,  e  bate-lhe 
barbaramente.  Aproxima-se  logo  o  pae  e  diz-lhe:  «Qnem 
merece  um  tal  castigo,  tu  on  o  animal  irracional?  Obedeces 
ao  appetite  menos  do  que  elle?»  E  o  rapaz  cora  de  vergonha 
diante  do  pae. 

<>o.  Theiua. 

I  am  glad  that  you  are  determined  to  accompany  us. 
If  to-morrow  the  weather  be  good,  we  shall  ascend  the 
mountain  which  offers  so  beautiful  a  view.  The  weather 
does  not  appear  to  become  good,  the  wind  blowing  from  east. 

1  am  afraid  that  we  shall  have  rough  weather  for  some  days 
more.  If  it  was  not  for  our  journey,  it  would  be  indifferent 
(not  matter),  but  as  it  is,  it  disturbs  rather  (it  is  rather 
annoying).  Are  you  not  afraid  of  catching  a  cold?  I  gave 
you  this  great-coat  that  it  might  protect  you  from  the 
draught.  Now  it  is  time  for  us  to  go  hcjme  (=  it  is  time 
that  we  go  home),  that  we  may  sleep  a  couple  of  hours 
before  departing  (infmitive). 

Conversacjao. 

Transforme  o  exercicio  n®.  62: 

1.  empregando  o  preterite; 

2.  sendo  o  proprio  rapaz  que  conta  este  case; 

3.  sendo  o  pae  que  conta  o  caso  ao  rapaz; 

4.  sendo  dois  rapazes  em  vez  de  um,   e  muitas  vaccas 
em  vez  do  uma; 

5.  sendo  os  dois  rapazes  que  contam  o  caso? 

6.  sendo  o  pae  que  conta  o  caso  aos  filhos. 


On  the  Pronouns. 


161 


I 


Twenty-fourth  Lesson.    Li^ao  vig6sima 
quarta. 

On  the  Pronouns.     Pronomes. 
§  160.    There   are    six   kinds  of    pronouns — viz.: 
1.  the  Personal;  2.  the  Demonstrative;  3.  the  Possessive; 
4.  the  Interrogative;  5.  the  Relative;  6.  the  Indefinite 

Pronoun. 

T.  The  Personal  Pronouns.     Pronomes  pessoaes. 

§  161.     The  personal  pronouns  are  the  only  words 
!   of  Portuguese  language  which,  like  the  Latin  and  Ger- 
man, modify  their  original  form  (subject  or  nominative), 
to  express  the  different  complements  (genitive,  dative  or 
accusative),  as  here  represented: 

I  Singular,  Plurai. 

Nam.  j  Eu  nds 

Gen.    j  de  mini  de  nds 

Dat.    I  me;  a  mim  nos;  a  nds 

Ace.  me  nos 


Norn,  i 
Gen. 
Bat. 
Ace. 


Tu 

de  ti 
te;  a  ti 
te 


vos 

de  vos 
vos;  a  vos 
vos 


Nom.  Elle,  ella  elles,  ellas 

Gen.  d'elle,  d'ella;  de  si  d' elles,  d- ellas;  de  si 

Dat.  Ihe ;  a  elle,  a  ella ;  a  si      Vies ;  a  elles,  a  ellas ;  a  si 

Ace.  0,  a;  so  os,  as;  se. 

§  162.  (a)  The  forms  nos,  vos,  elle(s),  eUa(s)  are  stih- 
ject  only  wiien  employed  without  a  preposition,  and  may, 
as  well  as  the  atonic  forms  of  the  complements,  be 
called  conjunctive  (conjunctos),  as  they  are  always  joined 
to  the  verb;  while  the  others  (mim,  ti,  si),  being  sepa- 
rated from  their  verbs  by  a  preposition,  may  be  considered 
absolute  (absolutes). 

(b)  The  absolute  pronoun  is  often  employed  with 
the  conjunctive  when  a  stress  is  laid  on  it — e.g.:  dd- 
llio  a  die,  give  it  to  him,  instead  of  dd-lh'o,  give  it 
him.  Yet  the  conjunctive  forms  of  the  subject  may  be 
also  employed  quite  alone,  in  which  case  they  are  also 
absolute.     Ex.:  Eu?  Tu  nao,  elle  ou  eJJa. 


Portuguese  Comersation-Grammar. 


II 


162  Lesson  24. 

§  163.  (a)  Eu  and  ki  are  alivays  subject;  nos,  ros, 
elle(s)y  ella(s)  are,  as  already  said,  subject  when  em- 
ployed ivithout  a  preposition. 

When  governed  by  a  preposition,  they  are  com- 
plements of  the  genitive,  dative,  or  accusative— e.g.: 
lemhra-se  de  nos;  dei  a  elles;  7'ecebemos  para  ella. 

(b)  Mini,  ti,  si  are  always  complements  and  go- 
verned by  a  preposition;  elle(s),  eUa(s),  nos,  vos  are  also 
complements  as  soon  as  they  are  joined  to  a  prepo- 
sition (see  a).  Deu-me  (a  mim),  he  gave  me;  viu-me  (a 
mint),  he  saw  me.     Tenho-o  d'elle,  I  have  it  from  him. 

(c)  The  first  and  second  persons  (sing,  and  plur.), 
as  well  as  the  pronoun  se  of  the  third  person,  joined 
to  the  preposition  com,  are  assimilated  with  it  and  take 
a  new  ibnn  —  viz. :  com(m)igo,  comtigo,  comsigo,  comnosco, 
comvosco,  with  me  (myself),  thee  (thyself),  him(self),  her- 
(self),  them(selves),  us  (ourselves)  you(rself),  yourselves. 

Elle  foi  com(m)igOj  he  went  with  me. 

Venha  cmnnosco,  come  with  us. 

Levou-o  comsigo,  he  took  it  with  him. 

Isso  ndo  e  comsigo^  that  is  no  concern  of  yours. 

(d)  Me,  te,  nos,  vos,  se  do  not  admit  of  any  preposi- 
tion. They  are  forms  of  the  accusative  or  dative  and 
correspond  to  the  Portuguese:  a  mim,  a  ti,  a  nos,  a  vos, 
a  si  to  me,  to  you,  to  us. 

Elle  levou-me  he  took  me. 

Eu  mostrei-te  ...  I  showed  you  .  .  . 

Nos  persuadimo'vos  we  persuaded  you  .  .  . 

Vds  devolveste-nos  .  .  .  you  gave  us  .  .  .  back. 

Eu  dei-vos  o  conselho  I  gave  you  the  counsel. 

(e)  Lhe,  Ihes  are  forms  of  the  S'"^  person,  without 
distinction  of  the  gender.  They  express  the  dative- 
complement  and  are  employed  without  a  preposition: 
mostrei'lhe(s),  I  showed  it  (to)  him,  her,  them,  you. 

N.B. — As  lhe,  Ihes  are  also  employed  in  addressing 
somebody,  you  may  avoid  a  misunderstanding  by  em- 
ploying a  double  form: 

Mostre%'lhe(s)  a  elle    (a  elles)     I  showed  him  (them) 
»  »       a  ella    (a  ellas)    »       »         her        » 

»  »       a  voce  (a  voces)   »       >        you. 


On  the  Pronouns.  163 

The  prepositional  form  may  also  precede  the  other 
•—e.g.:  <iNesse  meu  artigo  sohre  o  Coragdo  JDoente,  que 
a  voce  Ihe  agradou  tanto»  .  .  .  (Tr.  Coelho :  Cartas). 

In  that   article   of  mine  on   the  "Sick  Heart,"    which 
pleased  you  so  well  .  .  . 

Or  it  may  even  substitute  the  simple  form — e.g.: 
<iHomenagens  que  de  todo  a  hand  a  me  vem  chegando  .  .  . 
a  elle  as  endosso>->   (ibid.). 

Homages  which  from  all  sides  come  to  me  ...  I  endorse 
them  to  him. 

(f)  0,  a,  OS,  as,  him,  her,  it,  them,  are  complements 
of  the  accusative  of  the  3^^^  person  of  the  transitive  verb 
(with  distinction  of  gender)  and  are  employed  without 
a  preposition. 

Vejo-o  (-a,  'OS,  -as)  I  see  him  (her,  it,  them). 

(g)  The  reflective  pronoun  se  has  the  forms  se,  si, 
'Sigo,  and  is  employed  without  distinction  of  the  number 
and  gender:  se  without  a  preposition ;  si  with  the  pre- 
positions a,  de,  em^  por  (per),  para,  sobre;  sigo  with  com 
(comsigo).     Ex. : 

Lava-se,  he  (she)  washes  himself  (herself).    (You)  wash 

yourself  (see  Remark  II.). 
0  komem  ndo  vive  s6  para  si. 
Man  does  not  live  for  himself  alone. 
Pensou  comsigo  he  (she)  thought   by   him-(or  her-)self. 

JRemark  I. — The  absolute  pronouns  may  still  be  streng- 
thened by  mesmo  or  proprio :  N6s  mesmos  we  .  .  .  ourselves, 
eu  propria  I  .  .  .  myself,  para  si  mesmo,  comigo  mesmo.   etc. 

Memark  //.—As  se  is  the  reflective  pronoun  of  the 
S^^  person,  and  the  person  spoken  to  is  always  in  the  S^^  person, 
se  may  be  also  "you"— e.g.: 

Lembrou-se,  he  or  she  or  you  remembered. 

Bemark  ///.—Also  the  forms  si  and  sigo  are  employed, 
when  addressing  a  person,  but  only  in  familiar  style— e.g., 
Lemhrei-me  de  si  I  thought  of  you;  irei  comsigo  I  shall  go 
with  you. 

§  164.  (a)  The  forms  me,  te,  se,  nos,  vos,  Ihe,  Ihes, 
0,  a,  OS,  as,  are  joined  by  a  hyphen  (-)  to  their  preced- 
ing verb: 

Offendeu-me  (but:  elle  nao  meoffendeu):  desculpo-te; 
affirmoU'lhe(s) ;  affirmei-o;  perdoai-nos;  feriu-se. 

11* 


164  Lesson  24. 

(b)  The  pronouns  o,  a,  os,  as  are  changed  into  lo, 
lay  los,  las: 

1.  when  preceded  by  a  verbal  form  ending  in  r, 
s,  or  <8r,  which  ending  is  dropped.  The  vowel  (a  or  e) 
preceding  these  final  letters  may  take  an  accent  (d,  e): 
chamd-lOy  chamdmo-las,  tra^e-la,  trasemo-los ;  pde-lo  tu?  do 
you  put  it?  trd-lo!  bring  it  or  him  I 

BemarTc. — This  modification  may  also  be  expressed  thus : 
A  verbal  form  ending  in  r,  s  ov  z  changes  into  I  when 
followed  by  0(5^,  aC5> ;  chamdl-o,  chamdmol-os,  etc.  This  form 
is  even  more  modern. 

2.  When  following  the  pronouns  nos  and  cos  or 
the  adverb  eis,  which  then  also  lose  their  final  s:  es- 
creve-no-lo  he  writes  it  to  us;  ei-lo  here  it  is. 

(c)  These  same  pronouns  o,  a,  os,  as,  take  the  forms 
no,  na,  nos,  nas,  when  preceded  by  a  nasal  sound: 
deixam-no,  deixavam-na,  deixaram-nos,  ddo-no;  estdo-no 
fa^endo,  they  are  doing  it,  pde-no  he  puts  it  or  *'put 
it!"     Ex.: 

Jehovah  disse  a  Mouses:  Fase-te  uma  serpente  ardent e 

e  poe-na  sobre  uma  haste. 
Jehovah  said   unto  Moses:    Make  thee   a  fiery   serpent 

and  set  it  upon  a  pole. 

(d)  The  dative-complements  me,  te,  Ike,  being  fol- 
lowed by  the  accusative-complements  o,  a,  os,  as,  drop 
their  e,  substituting  it  by  an  apostrophe:  disse-ni'o; 
mostrei-fas,  affirmava-Wo. 

(e)  Lhes  joined  to  these  accusative  pronouns  forms 
Ih'os,  Was,  which  may  be  ''them  to  him,''  ''them  to  her," 
or  ''them  to  them."  JDou-lh'os,  I  give  them  to  her,  to  him, 
or  to  them. 

§  165.  The  position  of  the  conjunctive  pronoun- 
complement  is: 

(a)  In  positive  and  simple  sentences  generally  behind 
the  verb :  in  negative  sentences  and  those  beginning  with 
an  adverb,  a  preposition,,  conjunction,  etc.,  before  the 
verb. 

Elle  disse-me;  eu  explico-te  or  eu  te  explico;  elle  me 
nao  disse  or  (elle)  ndo  me  disse;  se  me  ndo  dissesse. 
Eu  dou-lhe;  eu  ndo  Ihe  dou;  para  que  Ihe  ndo  de. 
Nds  temol-o;  nds  ndo  o  temos:  hontem  ndo  o  tinhamos. 


On  tbe  Pronouns.  165 

Remark  I. — In  negative  clauses,  the  adverb  nao  may 
precede  or  follow  the  pronoun-complement;  it  always  precedes, 
when  the  subject  is  not  expressed :  elle  me  nao  disse ;  nao  me  disse. 

(b)  The  conjunctive  pronoun-complement  must  be 
put  after  the  verb  of  a  positive  sentence  whenever  the 
pronoun  subject  is  omitted,  as  the  former  cannot  begin 
a  sentence  ^•  tcnho-o,  conhego-os,  and  not:  o  tenho,  as  co- 
nhego.  Yet  you  may  say:  die  honrou-me  or  elle  me 
honrou. 

(c)  In  the  future  and  conditional  tenses  it  is  put 
between  verb  and  ending:  rcsponder-te-(h)ei,  dar-lh' o-(h)ia 
I  shall  answer  you,  I  should  give  it  him. 

(d)  With  the  infinitive,  the  pronoun  complement 
may  precede  or  follow  it: 

«0  rei    ha-de  te  chamar  e  dizer-te  se  me  nao  queres 
vender,  mas  tu  nao  me  vendas».    (Anna  de  C.  Osorio.) 

(e)  It  is  the  same  with  the  compound  tenses: 
Nos  temos-lhe  dito;  eu  o  tenho  sahido  ha  muito;  but 
only:  tenho-o  sahido,  etc. 

§  166.  If  there  are  several  complements  of  different 
cases,  accusative  and  dative,  in  the  same  sentence,  the 
dative  precedes  the  accusative :  dcl-Wo.  If  the  comple- 
ments are  only  of  the  accusative,  that  of  the  person 
or  personified  thing  is  put  in  the  dative:  Essa  sonata 
ouniUta  focar  (a  ella),  I  heard  her  playing  this  sonata. 

§  167.  In  order  to  be  emphasised,  the  conjunctive 
pronoun-complement  may  be  repeated  by  an  absolute 
(cf.  §  162  [bj):  Elle  disse  m'o  a  mini  he  said  it  to  mc.  This 
absolute  pronoun  may  also  precede:  a  mim  me  disse  or 
a  mini  disse-me;  a  elle  eu  mo  (Ihc)  disse  nada.  (N.B. — 
In  this  latter  sentence  the  conj.  pronoun-complement 
may  be  omitted,  but  not  the  subject  eu.) 

Remark. — This  construction  is  also  employed  where  in 
English  a  possessive  pronoun  or  a  preposition  is  used — e.g., 
Conhecia-Ihe  a  voz  I  knew  his  voice,  or  I  knew  him  by  his 
voice.     Tomei-lhe  a  mdo  I  took  her  (by  her)  hand. 

§  168.  When  a  personal  pronoun  is  followed  by 
an  appositive  noun  or  number,  in  Portuguese  the  ar- 
ticle is  generally  put  between: 

^  In  Brazil  the  construction  <o  tenho,  as  conhego,  Ihe  digo,^- 
etc.,  is  also  employed. 


166 


Lesson  24. 


Nos,  OS  inglezes  gostamas  viajar.     But   also:   JSfds  re- 

publicanos  somos  assim. 
Vamos  OS  dais  or  even:   vamos  ambos  os  dais,  ambas 

as  duas:  vamos  os  tres  or  todos  (os)  ires,  let  us  go 

both  (or  all  three). 


0  carvdo 

JTttlU 

the  coal 

voltar 

to  turn  round, 

[Icvr  'vvu] 

to  return 

0  mineiro 

the  miner 

tirar 

to  draw  out. 

[mi  'nviruj 

to  take  from 

advertir 

to  advertise 

a  pancada 

the  blow 

[v&dv9r'tir] 

[pvUdeJ 

pouco  a  pouco 
a  fenda  [fendvj 

by  degrees 

0  mendigo 

the  beggar 

the  crack 

[mm  dign] 

reparar 

to  repair 

arrastar 

to  drag 

[rdpvrar] 

[nrref'tar] 

0  espinheiro 

the  thornbush, 

0  pantano 

the  pool 

bfpi'yTslru] 

brier 

['pvntvnuj 

maldoso 

wicked 

voltar  a  si 

J  to  recover 

[mai'dozu] 

recobrar  os 

0  vime  [vimd] 

the  osier 

sentidos 

cubigar 

to  covet 

0  gemido 

the  groan 

[kubi  'sarj 

[s9mid^uj 

par  pS  de 

near  to 

affiictivo 

afflicting 

dormir  a  sesta 

to  take  a  nap 

[vfli  tivuj 

[■scfU] 

approximar-se 

to  approach 

0  mollio  [mjfiu] 

the  bottle 

[yprosi- 

0  feno  [fenuj 

the  hay 

'nmrsd] 

atar 

to  tie 

0  ladrdo 

the  robber 

esfomeado 

famished 

[h'd'rvu[ 

[iffomt'adu] 

enxotar 

to   drive  away 

Hermano 

Hermano 

[Ifu'tar] 

[ir'meniij 

bastante 

rather 

0  cortador 

the  butcher 

[bnf'tvnt9j 

fkurtv  '&or] 

maltratar 

to  treat  ill 

pedir  esmola 

to  beg,  8sk 

por  nome 

named 

[is'molvj 

alms 

camportar'-^e 

to  behave 

novatnente 

anew. 

66.  Exercfclo. 

Se  a  luz  do  sol  nao  nos  impedisse,  veriamos  as  estrellas 
dmante  o  dia;  mas  assim  esta  luz  impede  que  n6s  as  per- 
cebamos.  0  carvao  se  encontra  na  terra;  elle  e  extraido  pelos 
mineiros;  s5o  elles  {or:  estes)  que  o  extrdem.  0  amigo  que 
te  adverte  para  que  [tu]  nSo  commettas  uma  falta,  t^  aquelle 
que  mais  te  estima.  Estas  paredes  caem  pouco  a  pouco,  por 
isso  que  as  fendas,  n^ellas  nao  se  reparam ;  ^ra  preciso  repar^- 
las.  Nao  quer  vir  comigo?  Hoje  nao,  mas  k,manha  vou  ter 
comsigo  para  Ihe  falar  numa  coisa  que  muito  nos  interessa  a 


On  the  Pronouns.  167 

ambos.     Entao  nao  me  pode  diz6-lo  ja  agora?     Nao  posso;  so 
amanha  poderei  dizer-lb'o. 

67.  Leitura. 

(a)  0  espinheiro  maldoso. 

0  vime  disse  um  dia  ao  espinheiro :  «Dize-nie  ca!  Porque 
e  que  cubi9as  tu  tanto  o  fate  das  pessoas  que  passam  por  pe 
de  ti?  0  que  queres  tu  com  isso?»  0  espinheiro  respondeu: 
«Nao  quero  nada.  Nao  Ihes  quero  tirar  o  fate,  mas  apenas 
rasga-lo. 

(b)  0  cdo  e  a  vacca. 

Um  cao  dormia  a  sesta  sobre  um  molho  de  f6no  que 
estava  mal  atado.  Aproximou-se  uma  vacca  esfomeada.  0 
cao,  mal  a  viu,  come^ou  a  ladrar,  e  impediu  que  ella  comesse 
do  feno.  A  vacca,  cheia  de  fome  e  de  tristeza,  disse:  <Se  tu 
nao  pedes  comer  o  f^no,  porque  nao  queres  que  eu  o  c6ma?» 

68.  Thema. 

The  Faithful  Dogs. 
A  butcher,  named  Herman,  went  one  day  into  the 
country  (ao  campo)  to  buy  some  cattle.  On  the  way  a  man 
begged  an  alms  from  him.  Herman  turned  round,  that  the 
beggar  should  not  perceive  the  money  he  had  with  him, 
opened  his  purse,  and  took  a  silver  coin  from  it.  In  the  same 
moment  the  man  assaulted  him  by  giving  him  so  heavy  a 
blow  on  his  head  that  he  fell  down  (no  chdo).  The  two 
dogs  of  the  butcher  threw  themselves  immediately  on  the 
beggar,  flung  him  to  the  ground  (a  terra),  and  dragged  him  to 
the  near  pool.  Then  they  returned  to  their  master,  licking  his 
face  until  he  recovered.  Hereupon  Herman  heard  a  distressing 
groan.  He  approached  and  found  the  robber  whom  the  dogs 
were  about  to  assault  anew.  But  the  butcher  drove  them  away 
and  drew  that  man,  who  found  himself  rather  ill-treated,  on 
to  dry  ground. 

ConYersa<jao. 

Onde  dormia  o  cao?  (The  answers  to  be  formed 

Quem  se  aproximou?  after  No.  63b). 

Como    se    conduziu    entao    o 

cao? 
Que  disse  a  vacca? 
Aonde  foi  o  cortador?  Foi  um   dia  ao  campo   (para) 

comprar  algumas  rezes. 
Que  Ihe  succedeu  no  caminho?      No  caminho  pediu-lhe  esmola 

um  homem. 


168 


Lesson  25. 


0    Hermano    como    se    com- 
portou? 

E  depois? 

Que  6  que  aconteceu  entao? 


Que  fazem  entao   os   caes  do 
cortador  ? 


E  em  seguida? 


Elle  voltou-se  para  que  o 
mendigo  nao  percebesse  o 
dinheiro  que  trazia  comsigo. 

Abriu  a  bolsa  e  tirou(-lhe) 
uma  moeda  de  prata. 

No  mesmo  instante  o  homem 
aggrediu-lhe,  dando-lheuma 
pancada  tao  forte  iia  cabe^a 
que  elle  caiu  no  chao. 

Os  dois  caes  saltam  logo  sobre 
0  mendigo,  deitam-no  a  terra 
e  arrastam-no  para  um  pan- 
tano  proximo. 

E  seguida  voltam  para  o  seu 
dono  e  lambem-lhe  a  cara 
tantas  vezes  que  elle  recobra 
OS  sentidos. 


Twenty-fifth  Lesson.    Li^ao  vigesima 
qninta. 

Demonstrative  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 
A.  The  Demonstratiye  Pronouns. 

§  169.  We  distinguish  conjunctive  and  absolute 
demonstrative  pronouns,  indicating  the  former,  which 
accompany  a  noun,  as  adjectives  (pronomes  adjecUvos) 
and  the  latter,  used  instead  of  a  noun,  as  substantives 
(pronomes  suhstantivos). 

N.B. — The  noun  indicated  by  a  demonstrative  ad- 
jective may  not  be  expressed,  but  only  understood, 
which  does  not  influence  its  fonu. 


Pronomes  adjeciivos: 
Masculino                   Feminino 
este,                   est  a  this 

Pronomes  suhstantivos : 
isto  this 

esse, 

aquelle, 

outro, 

''^^,;    Ithat 
aquella  f 

outra  the  other 

aquillof  ^^^^ 

outrem  somebody  else 

0  mesmo, 

tanto, 

tnl, 

a  inesma  the  same 
tanta  so  much 
tal  such  a 

0  mesmo  the  same 

tanto  so  much 

0,  a,  OS,  as  that  or  those 

(which);  he,  she  or  they 

(who). 

Demonstrative  and  Possessive  Pronouns.  169 

§  170.  The  proiionies  adjectivos  form  their  plural 
alike  the  nouns;  este,  estes;  tal,  taes. 

The  pronomes  suhstantivos  have  only  a  masculine 
and  singular  form,  except  o,  which  has  a  feminine 
and  a  plural  form. 

§  171.  (a)  Este,  esta,  isto  indicates  an  object  near 
to  the  person  speaking  or  one  mentioned  in  the  last 
place  (=  latter). 

(b)  Esse,  essa,  isso  indicates  an  object  near  to  the 
person  spoken  to,  or  one  mentioned  in  the  first  place 
(=  former);  it  may  also  be  employed  independently, 
without  any  reference  to  another. 

(c)  AqueUe,  aqtiella,  aquillo  indicates  an  object  equally 
distant  from  both  persons,  the  speaker  and  the  one  ad- 
dressed.    Ex.: 

Estes   (mens)  oihos;   esses   (sens)  olhos ;    aquelle   ceu: 
aquella  igreja.     Que  e  isso? 

N.B. — Instead  of  aquelle,  etc.,  you  may  also  some- 
times employ  este,  etc. — e.g.:  este  ceu,  esta  igreja. 

Remark. — Esta,  essa  in  commercial  style  and  employed 
absolutely,  means :  esta  praga  (or  cidade),  essa  praca. 

§  172.  By  an  alliance  of  oiUro  with  este,  esse  or 
aquelle  the  compound  pronouns  esfoiitro,  ess'outrOf 
aquelVoatro,  pi.:  esfoutros,  etc.,  are  formed. 

§  173.  These  pronouns,  being  preceded  by  the 
prepositions  em,  de,  a,  form  a  crasis  with  them  (Port. : 
erase) — i.e.,  they  melt  together: 

(a)  With  em:  n'este  (or  neste),  n'esta,  n'isto,  n' aquil- 
lo, etc. 

(b)  With  de:  d'este  (or  deste),  d'esse,  d'isso,  d' aquel- 
le, etc. 

(c)  With  a:  dqiieUe(s),  dquella(s),  aquillo.  (Only 
those  demonstratives  beginning  with  a.) 

JRe/warfe.—The  Englishf/zi5,  that,  employed  absolutely,  is  not 
always  rendered  by  isso,  aquillo,  but  only  when  no  substan- 
tive is  to  be  substituted— e.g. : 

What  is  that?     Que  e  isso?    Aquillo  que  e? 

That  is  a  book,  iaso  e  um  livro. 

But:  Who  is  that?  Quern  e  esse  homem,  aquella  senhora? 

That  is  my  father,  esse  (homem)  e  meu  pae. 


170  Lesson  25. 

Is  this  your  book  (=  is  this  book  yours)  ? 

JE  este  0  sen  livro? 

No,  that  is  not  my  book,  that  is  my  brother's. 

JSdo,  esse  ndo  e  o  men  (Uvro),  e  o  de  men  irmdo. 

§  174.  Este^  esta,  csse^  essa,  aquelle,  aquella  are 
frequently  employed  for  a  noun  or  personal  pronoun 
strongly  emphasised.     Ex.: 

0  Carlos,  esse  e  que  tern  foveas. 
It  is  Charles  who  has  strength! 
A  natureza,  essa  e  sempre  victoriosa. 
It  is  Nature  that  is  always  victorious. 
A  indulgencia  d'elle  ?    Com   essa   ndo   contes !    Olha  o 
cavalleirOy  aquelle  e  que  sahe  montar! 

Essa  is  frequently  employed  without  any  substan- 
tive in  the  idioms:  Or  a  essa!  (Why!)  Essa  e  hoa!  Mais 
essa!  etc.,  where  «graga»  or  «a^neira,T>  etc.,  is  to  be 
supplied. 

§  175.  The  English  "he  who,"  "she  who,"  "they 
who"  are  given  in  Portuguese  b}^  o  (a,  os,  as)  que  or 
aqtielle(s),  aquella(s)  que. 

B.  The  Possessive  Pronouns. 

§  176.  It  is  a  peculiarity  of  these  pronouns  that 
they  are  preceded  by  the  definite  article: 

Are  excepted:  1.  Those  expressing  parentage; 

2.  Those  you  address  a  person  with  (men  Amigo^ 
minha  Senhora); 

3.  Those  which  constitute  an  essential  part  of  a 
title:  Vossa  Majestade,  Sua  Altera,  Vossa  Excellencia, 
Sua  Reverendlssima,  etc.; 

4.  Those  predicatively  employed  (see  §  178). 

Kote. — The  general  rule  and  that  under  1.  are  not 
always  observed. 

§  177.  We  distinguish  conjunctive  and  absolute 
possessive  pronouns  (adjectivos  e  pronomes  posseftsivos), 
yet  there  is  no  other  difference  between  them  but  that 
the  adjectivos  are  and  the  pronomes  are  not  accompanied 
by  a  noun. 

Este  i  0  meu  chapeu ;  este  chapeu  e  o  men. 

This  is  my  hat;  this  hat  is  mine. 


Demonstrative  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 


171 


o  men,    fern,  a  minha   Plur.  os  mens,    fern,  as  minhas  my; 

mine 
0  ieu,         »      a  hia  os  teus,         »      as   tuas  (thy), 

your;  (thine),  yours 
0  sen,         »      a  sua  os  sens,      fern,  as    suas     his, 

her,  your;  his,  hers,  yours 
0  nosso,     »      a  nossa  os  nossos,  fern,  as  nossas  our; 

ours 
0  vosso,      »      a  rossa  os  vossos,     »      as  vossasjour; 

yours. 

Declension. 

N.  (&  A.  0  men  vestido  my  dress.     G.  do  meu  vestido, 

D.  ao  meu  vestido. 
»    »    »    a  tua  penna  your  pen.     G.  da  tua  penna. 

D.  a  tua  penna. 

§  178.  If  predicatively  employed  (with  s^)  or, 
when  governed  by  ser  or  a  preposition,  it  expresses 
rather  origin  than  possession,  the  possessive  pronoun  is 
also  not  preceded  by  the  article.  So  employed,  it  may 
precede  or  follow  the  noun.     Ex.: 

^'  meu  it  is  mine. 
(EUe)  e  meu  amigo,  e  amigo  meu. 
He  is  my  friend  or  a  friend  of  mine. 
\       (^  o  meu  amigo  would  mean:  it  is  my  friend.) 
Onze  rios  sdo  seus  trihutdrios  (do  Tejo), 

leven  rivers  are  its  tributaries  (=  are  tributary  to  it). 
A  culpa  e  minha  the  fault  is  mine,  it  is  my  fault. 
Foi  culpa  minha,  por  culpa  minha. 
It  was  my  fault,  for  my  fault. 
£  ideia  tua  that  is  your  idea. 
E  tua  esta  ideia  this  idea  is  yours. 
Por  tua  causa  for  yjui-  sake. 
Com  sua  licenga  with  his  (her,  your)  permission. 
Para  maior  conveniencia   nossa    for   our    greater    con- 
venience. 

Be7narJcs. 

1.  Your,  yours  ip  rendered  by  seu,  sua,  etc.,  when  no 
misunderstanding  can  result— e.g.: 

Have  you  got  your  paper?    Beceheu  V^-  o  seu  jornal? 
Where  do  you  buy  your  pens? 
Onde  compra  as  suas  pennas? 


172 


Lesson  25. 


If,  however,  an  ambiguity  might  take  place,  seit,  sua  is 
supplied  by  o  (a,  os,  as)  de  F«-  Ex^^-,  etc.;  or  on  the  other 
side  by  o  (a,  os,  as)  d'eUe(s)  or  d'ella(s)—e.g. : 

Have  you  lost  your  glove  or  his? 

Perdeu  7"^    Ex^-  a  sua  luva  ou  a-  d''eUe  ? 

His  money  is  safe,  but  yours  is  not. 

0  dinheiro  d'eUe  estd  seguro,  mas  ndo  o  estd  o  de  Y'- 

2.  The  possessive  pronouns  are  also  sometimes  employed 
with  the  indefinite  article  or  pronoun — e.g.: 

JJm  amigo  meu  or  um  meu  amigo. 

A  friend  of  mine,  one  of  my  friends. 

Uma  carta  minha  a  letter  of  mine,  one  of  my  letters. 

Alguns  sens  amigos  some  of  his  friends. 

3.  Also  they  are  met  together  with  the  demonstratives: 
Este  meu  piano  this  plan  of  mine. 

Essa  sua  quinta  that  country-house  of  yours. 
Aquelles  sens  parentes  those  parents  of  his. 
These  associations  are  more  frequent  in  Portuguese  than 
in  English. 

Palavras. 


A  vibora 

the  viper 

roer  [rro'erj 

to  gnaw 

f'viburBj 

velar  [m'lar] 

to  watch,  to 

a  cobra  [kobrsj  the  snake, 

wake 

' 

serpent 

0  naturalista 

the  natural 

0  reptil 

the  reptile 

[nuturis  'liftuj 

philosopher 

[rrey  'Hi] 

0  besoiro 

the  beetle, 

corpoUnto 

corpulent, 

[hd'zoyru] 

chafer 

[kxirpu'lentu] 

thick 

0  gafanhoto 

the  locust, 

inojfensivo 

inoffensive 

[g^f^'yotu] 

grasshopper 

[inufen  'sicuj 

.  danwinho 

pernicious 

ao  pcsso  que 

while 

fdu  'niyu] 

insidioso 

insidious 

parade 

motionless 

[isiftt'ozuj 

[pv  'ratfu] 

0  denie  canino 

the  eye-tooth 

meditar 

to  meditate 

[hv  'ninuj 

[mdtfi'tar] 

oco  [okuj 

hollow 

0  segredo 

the  secret 

a  mordedura 

the  sting 

[to  'greduj 

[mur^e'durnj 

nada  f'na&i?] 

nothing 

0  orificio 

the  orifice, 

primeiro 

first 

[oro'fisiu] 

opening 

Justo 

just 

0  rato  frrntuj 

the  rat,  mouse 

f'suftuj 

0  ratinho 

the  mouse 

caprichdso 

capricious 

[rm  'tipuj 

[kvprifozu] 

a  ra  [rrvj 

the  frog 

encobrir 

to  cover,  hide 

0  mocho  f'mofiij 

the  horned-owl, 

[iku'brirj 

wood-owl 

descobrir 

to  discover 

0  roedor 

the  gnawer, 

excellente 

excellent 

[rrui'dor] 

rodent 

[mfs^'lcnU] 

Demonstrative  and  Possessive  Pronouns. 


173 


0  chapeu  de      \  '  averiguar  to  inquire,  to 

chma  \  the  umbrella  I       [vv^rigu' arj         determine 

o  guarda-chuva  \  j  veneer  to  overcome 

a  galocha  india-rubber-  j  ora .  .  .  ora  now  .   .  .    now 

fgvlop]  shoe  j       ['oru]  either  .  .  .  or. 

69.  Leitura. 

A  vlbora  e  a  cobra. 
Deante  de  uma  vibora  e  de  nma  cobra,  qualquer  pessoa 
que  nao  conhecesse  a  differen^a  entre  estes  dois  reptis,  talvez 
temesse  mais  a  cobra  do  que  a  vibora.  Pols  esta  raro  (instead 
of  raramente)  tem  de  comprimento  mais  de  dois  pes,  e  aquella 
6  muito  maior  e  em  geral  muito  mais  corpolenta.  A  cobra  e 
inoffensiva,  ao  passo  que  a  vibora,  essa,  com  a  sua  apparencia 
fraca,  e  um  dos  mais  perigosos  animaes.  0  veneno  d'este  in- 
sidioso  reptil  e  muitas  vezes  mortal.  Elle  segue  por  um  canal 
finissimo  ate  a  raiz  dos  dentes  caninos;  e  penetrando  n'estes 
por  serem  6cos,  sae,  na  occasiao  da  mordedura,  por  um  pe- 
quenino  orificio.     A  vibora  alimenta-se  de  ratos,  ras  etc. 

0  mocho, 
Tambem  o  mOcho  se  alimenta  de  ratos  e  outros  roSdores. 
Calculou  um  naturalista  que  uma  so  d'estas  aves  destroe  por 
anno  quasi  1500  roSdores,  afora  insectos,  como  besoiros,  ga- 
fanhotos  e  aves  damninhas.  Como  os  sabios  e  os  que  estudam, 
o  m6cho  vela  tambem  emquanto  os  outros  dormem.  Parado, 
a  posi^ao  do  mocho  nao  e  outra,  senao  a  (mesma)  dos  que 
leem:  parece  dobrado  sobre  si  mesmo^  como  a  meditar. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  0  Segundo  Livro  de  Leitura.) 

70.  Thema. 

My  secret  cannot  be  of  any  use  to  you,  if  I  have  not 
first  yours.  Your  wish  is  just,  and  so  is  mine  also.  I  have 
lost  my  handkerchief,  please  to  lend  me  yours.  Does  this 
lesson  deal  with  the  demonstrative  or  the  possessive  pronouns  ? 
It  deals  with  one  and  the  others.  These  are  more  easily  to 
be  learned  than  those.  But  there  is  no  great  difficulty,  neither 
in  the  one  kind  nor  in  the  other  (tr. :  in  both).  At  any  rate, 
the  difficulties  are  such  and  so  many  that  we  need  all  our  atten- 
1;ion  to  overcome  them.  Capricious  children  want  now.  this, 
now  that;  if  you  offer  them  a  pear  or  an  apple,  they  take 
this  and  ask  (pedir)  for  that.  One  lie  covers  the  other,  but 
one  truth  discovers  the  other.  The  same  causes  do  not  always 
produce  the  same  effects.  Health  and  wealth  are  two  magni- 
ficent things:  but  what  is  the  use  of  the  latter  without  the 
former  ? 


174 


Lesson  26. 


Conversaijao. 

No  guarda-roupa. 


De   quern    e   este    chapeu   de 

chuva? 
E  est'outro  guarda -chuva,  6  o 

ten? 
De  quern  sera?     A  quern  per- 

tence? 
Este  chapeu  6  o  de  V^  Ex*^  ? 


Um  amigo   meu  usa  chapeus 
taes,  deixe  ver,  se  e  d'elle. 


E  meu.     Tambem  essas  galo- 

chas  sao  miahas. 
Nao  e.     E  um   guarda-chuva 

de  senhora. 
A  Lucinda    proeura   o   d'ella. 

Sera  esse? 
Nao,  deve  ser  de  outrem.    Eu 

nao  USD  tal  chapeu  (or:  eu 

nao  uso  chapeus  d 'esses  or 

d'esses  chapeus). 
Isso  ^  muito  difficil  averiguar, 

pois  todos  pareeem  os  mes- 

mos. 


Twenty-sixth  Lesson.    Licjao  vigesima 
sexta. 

Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns. 


C.  The  InteiTogatlYe  Pronouns. 


Nom,  quern? 
who? 

Gen.    de  quern? 

of  whom? 

whose? 
Bat.    a  quern? 

to  whom? 

Ace.    quern? 
whom? 


que   (o  que) 

what? 

which  ? 
de  que  of 

what  or 

which? 
a  que  to  what 

or  which? 

que  what? 
which? 


qual,  quaes? 
which  (of)? 

de    qualy   de 

quaes  of 

which? 
a  qual,  a 

quaes?  to 

which? 
qual,  quaes 

which? 


qaanto(s)  ?  how 
much?  how  many? 

dequanto(s)  of  how 
much  or  many? 

a  quanto(s)  to  how 
much  or  many? 

quanto(s)  how  much 
or  many? 


§  179.     Use  of  the  interrogative  pronouns: 
1.  Quern  is  always  employed  absolutely  as  a  sub- 
stantive; it  asks  only  for  persons  and  may  be  employed 
with  the  verb  in  the  sing,  or  in  the  plur.,  in  direct  or 
indirect  speech— e.g.  : 

Quern  estd  ahi?    Who  is  there? 

Quern  serdo  os  paes  d'estes  meninos? 

Who  may  be  the  parents  of  these  children? 


Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns.  175 

Ndo  set  a  quern  eu  disse  .  .  . 

I  don't  know  to  whom  I  said  .  .  . 

De  quern  e  esta  casa?    Whose  house  is  this? 

Ndo  sei  dizer  de  quern  e. 

I  cannot  tell  to  whom  it  belongs. 

A  quern  falou  nisso?    To  whom  did  you  speak  of  this? 

2.  Que  (que)  is  used  interrogatively: 

(a)  employed  substantively  and  generally,  for  things 
—e.g.: 

Que  diz?    What  do  you  say? 

De  que' procede  isso?    What  does  this  come  from? 

Para  que  fez  isso?    What  did  you  do  that  for? 

(b)  adjectively  and  generally  employed,  for  per- 
sons and  things: 

Que  tempo  estd?    What  sort  of  weather  is  it  to-day? 
De  que  autor  e  este  livro  ?  By  which  author  is  this  book  ? 
A  qtce  fim?    To  what  purpose? 

3.  0  que  (que)  is  used  as  an  exclamation,  yet  also 
as  a  real  interrogation: 

0  que?!     What?! 

0  que  sdo  as  descripgdes  dos  maiores  poetas  em  com- 
paragdo  da  linguagem  viva  da  natureza  ?!  0  que  e 
a  liberdade  do  honiem  mats  livre?  Faeer'  o  seu 
dever. 

4.  Qual,  employed  as  a  substantive  and  as  an  adjec- 
tive, asks  for  persons  as  well  as  for  things,  but  out  of 
a  selection.  It  is  either  followed  by  a  genitive  in  the 
plural  or  this  case  is  to  be  supplied: 

Qual  dos  dois,  das  duas  ?  A  qual  d^estes  senhores  per- 
tence  o  cavallo  ?  Quaes  d'esses  homens  o  aggrediram  ? 
Be  qual  provincia  e  natural? 

N.B. — Here  you  may  say:  de  que  provincia  .  .  ., 
which  has  a  more  general  meaning,  while  de  qual  pro- 
vincia ...  is  employed  with  reference  to  a  small  num- 
ber of  provinces. 

Bemark  I.— Qual  may  be  preceded  by  taV;  in  this  case 
it  has  not  an  interrogative,  but  a  comparative  meaning:  su^h 
as,  the  same  as — e.g.: 

Elle  voltou  tal  qual  foi,  he  came  back  the  same  as  he 
went. 


176  Lesson  26. 

Both  pronouns  may  accompany  a  noun  and  be  separated 
from  another: 

Qual  pae,  tal  fllho  like  father  like  son. 
<^Tal  tnulher  me  fosse  ella,  qual  marido  eu  IJie  sou,* 
Would   that   she   were  such  a  wife  to   me   as   I  am  a 
ijusband  to  her! 

Bemark  II.  —  Tal  may  be  only  supposed  as  accompaning 
qual  : 

0  caraeter  deste  sujeito  e  qual  eu  desejo.    <iQuaes  para 
a  cova  as  providas  formigas  levam  as  provis5es.> 

Qual  .  .  .  qual  means  the  one  .  .  .  the  other:  qual  mais, 
qual  menos. 

5.   Quanta  is  used  interrogatively: 

(a)  Employed  without  a  noun  and  in  a  general 
meaning,  for  things: 

Quanta  gastou?    How  much  did  you  spend? 

Quanta  vae  do  Natal  a  Fdschoa? 

How  much  (time)  is  it  between  Christmas  and  Easter? 

Here  quanta  remains  unaltered. 

(b)  Employed  with  a  noun,  after  persons  and 
things,  being  subject  to  the  rules  of  the  adjective 
(feminine  and  plural):  Quanta  espagoP  —  quanta  gente? 
—  quantas  dias?  —  quantas' naitefik 

Bemark  III.-  Quanta  is  ofteij  employed  instead  ,o{tudo 
0  que,  meaning  then  "all  that"  or  "whatever"— e.g. : 

Fiz  quanta  pude   I  did  all  (whatever)   I  could  (cf.  the 
Relative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

Bemark  JF.— The  interrogative  qtuinto  is  not  to  be  con- 
founded with  the  adverbial  qtMnto,  which  signifies  "how, 
how  much,"  being  employed  exclam^torily  and  taking  the 
form  quao  before  adjectives— e.g. : 

Quanta  S  bonita  esta  vista!    Quao  (or  qus)  bonita  e! 

Not  to  be  confounded  neither  with  the  exclamatory  qv^ 
which  may  stand  instead  of  quao  or  quantOy  nor  this  with 
the  adverbial  que :  Que  de  gente !  How  many  people !  (What 
a  crowd !)  Q^e  bonita  vista  /  Que  vista  tdo  bonita !  What  a 
nice  view!  , 

D.  The  Relative  Pronouns. 

§  180.  These  pronouns  are  in  part  the  same  as 
the  interrogative,  from  which,  however,  they  are  easily 


Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns.  177 

to  be  distinguished,  as  they  refer  only  to  an  antecedent, 
while  the  interrogative  pronouns  (and  adjective)  only 
refer  to  something  following: 

1.  Que  who,  which,  that,  is  equally  employed  for 
persons  and  things  without  distinction  of  gender  and 
number,  as  in  English — e.g.: 

0  homem  (a  mulher,   aquelle,  aquella)  que  commetteu  o 

furto. 
The  man  (woman)  that  (he,  she  who)  committed  the  theft. 
Os  ratos  (as  ras)  que  escaparam. 
The  rats  (the  frogs)  which  escaped. 
0  mais  hello  que  ha  the  most  beautifal  existing. 

2.  Quern  is  synonymous  with  aquelle(s),  aqiiella(s)  qve 
he,  she,  they  who.  It  refers  only  to  persons  and  is 
invariable: 

Q;iiem   tern   telhado  de   vidro,    ndo  atire  pedras  ao  do 

vizinho. 
Those  who  live  in  glass-houses  should  not  throw  stones 

(lit. :  He  who  has  a  glass  roof  must  not  throw  stones 

to  that  of  the  neighbour). 

Thus  employed,  quern  has  the  value  of  a  relative 
pronoun  joined  to  a  personal  one;  it  is  considered  to 
be  of  masculine  gender  and  singular  number. 

Quern  has  generally  the  verb  in  the  singular,  but 
may  have  it  also  in  the  plural — e.g.: 

«JVao  foram  elles  s6s  quern  vos  mataram.* 

As  a  merely  relative  pronoun,  quern  is  employed 
only  joined  to  a  preposition: 

0(s)  poeta(s)  por  quern  tenho  mais  admiragdo  .  .  . 

Preceded  by  the  prepositions  de  or  a,  quem  corre- 
sponds to  the  genitive  and  dative  (or  accusative)  of 
"who"  or  "he  who." 

De  quem  eu  me  queixo  ...  He  whom  I  complain  of .  .  . 

A  quem  eu  disse  isso  ...  He  to  whom  I  said  that  .  .  . 

A  quem  eu  qtiero  mais  ...  He  whom  I  like  best  .  .  . 

3.  Qual  "which,"  has  only  one  form  for  the  two 
sexes,  but  it  fornis  the  plural  qu^es.  It  is  mostly  pre- 
ceded by  the  definite  article,  which  is  dropped,  however, 
when  qual  is  preceded  by  tal  (see  §  179,  Remark  I  and  II). 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  12 


17S  Lesson  26. 

Encontrei  um  homem  o  qual  me  reconheceu. 

Urn  povo  nao  tern  ideias,  para  as  quaes  ndo  tenha  pa- 

lavras. 
<I)eclaro    que    desejo    occupar-me    immediatamente    da 

questdo  Hintnn,  para  resolver  a  qual  deve  marcar-se 

successivamente  sessdo  todoft  os  dias  uteis^    (Affonso 

da  Costa). 

Generally  the  pronoun  que  is  preferred  to  qual.  Yet 
you  must  ernploy  qual  and  not  qan: 

(a)  Whenever  the  relative  depends  on  certain  pre- 
positions {durante,  para,  sohre,  sob,  em  cima  de,  etc.): 

0  inverno  durante  o  qual  estive  em  Lisboa  .  .  . 

(b)  When  by  que  a  misunderstanding  might  be 
caused.  For  instance,  in  the  clause :  A  mde  do  pcqueno 
que  encontrei^  it  is  not  clearly  understood  whom  I  met 
with.  So  I  must  say:  A  mde  do  pequeno  a  qual  en- 
contrei, if  I  met  the  mother,  and  A  mde  do  pequeno  o 
qual  encontrei,  if  I  met  the  boy. 

(c)  Whenever  the  relative  clause  is  not  a  necessary 
or  ornamental  complement  of  the  antecedent,  but  con- 
tains a  new  idea,  a  motive,  etc.: 

«0  sapo  devora  as  lesmas,  as  quaes  fazem  muitos  estragoa 

nas  hortas.^ 
The  toad  devours  the  slugs  which  cause  a  good  deal  of 

damage  in  the  kitchen -gardens. 

4.  Cujo  "whose,  of  which"  has  different  forms  for 
genders  and  numbers,  in  which  it  agrees  with  the 
following  noun. 

0  aborrecimenio  e  uma  doen^a  cujo  remedio  e  o  trahalho, 
Tediousness  is  an  illness  the  remedy  of  which  is  laboui*. 
A  parede,  cujas  fendas  ndo  se  reparam,  cae  pouco  a 

pouco. 
The  wall,   whose   clefts  are  not  repaired,  is  falling  to 
ruin  by  degrees. 

5.  Quanto  has  the  meaning  of  tudo  o  que  "all  or 
everything  that,  whatever,"  having  also  different  forms 
for  gender  and  number. 

Fig  quanto  pude, 

1  did  everything  (all,  whatever)  I  could. 
Soff'reu  quantos  males  ha  no  mundo. 

He  suffered  all  the  misfortunes  in  the  world. 


Interrogative  and  lielative  Pronouns. 


179 


6.  0  quo  is  "(that)  which,"  "what,"  if  not  inter- 
rogative or  exclamatory. 

0  que  ndo  tern  remedio,  remedlado  estd. 
What  can't  be  cured  must  be  endured. 
Elle  tinha  sahido  o  que  eu  ndo  sdbia. 

He  had  gone  away,  which  I  did  not  know. 

7.  In  English  you  may  separate  the  preposition 
from  the  relative  pronoun,  putting  it  at  the  end  of  the 
clause;  also  the  relative  pronoun  may  be  omitted.  In 
Portuguese  the  preposition  always  precedes  the  pronoun, 
which  cannot  be  omitted. 

Tudo  em  que  faldmos  all  (that)  we  spoke  of. 
A  carta  com  que  F^  Ex'^-  me  honrou. 
The  letter  (that)  you  honoured  me  with. 

Bemark. — Relative  clauses  must  not  be  confounded  with 
indirect  interrogations.     For  instance: 

Chegaram  emfim  das  coldnias  os  generos  os  quaes  pedira 

ha  muito. 
There  arrived  at  last  from  the  colonies  the  goods  I  had 

long  since  asked  for.     (Relative  clause.) 
Ndo  sei  dieer  quaes  (sdo)  os  generos  que  chegaram. 

1  can't  say  which  goods  arrived.  (Indirect  interro- 
gation. The  direct  interrogation  would  be:  Quaes 
sdo  OS  generos  que  ...  or  elliptically:  quaes  os  generos 
que  ...  or  quaes  (or  que)  generos  chegaram  ? 


Pulavras. 


0  mundo 

f'munduj 
a  praga  ['prarjuj 
ser  de 
sandeu 

fsvn'deuj, 

fem.  sandia 

[svn'divj 
Spico  ['epikuj 
porfiar 

[purf}'ar] 
0  feito  ['fv}tu] 

a  porgao 
[pur'bvuj 

de  ordindrio 

08  Lusiadas 
[u$lu'ziTsffvf] 

numerar 


the  world 


the  plague 
to  belong  to 
fool,  foolish 


epic 

to  persist,  per- 
severe 

the  heroic 
deed,  exploit 

the  portion 

ordinarily 
the  Lusiad 

to  mark  with 
cyphers 


a  regua  nume- 

rada 
tra(;ar 
pretender 

[prdten'dcr] 
0  oleado 

folt'a&uj 
a  pasta  f'psjtv] 
sei  /sBtj 


0  mode  fmoduj 

temo  [temuj 

tenro  f'terruj 
sir  capaz 

[kv'paf] 
apprehender 

fttprjeii'derj 


the  measure, 

rule 
to  draw 
to  pretend 

the  oilcloth 

the  portfolio 

I  know 

I  saw   or  have 
seen 

the  manner, 
mode 

tender,  affectio- 
nate 

tender 

to  be  able 

to  apprehend, 
seize 


180 


Le88on  26. 


pezar  ['pd'znr] 
posso  [phsyj 
fito,  part.  perf. 

of  fitar 
o  ai  [d}J 
o  fluido  f'flui(%ij 
0  esplendor 

[ifplen  dor] 
a  ingratidao 

[igrp.ti' disu] 
a  estrella  fixa 

flf'treh  'fiksvj 
miserdvel  j 

[mizd'ravti]  I 
misero  j 

['mizd^'uj      ) 
elle  qwr 
a  vitrina 

[vd'trinv] 
misturado(s) 

[mtftu- 

'ra.d'u(s)] 


sorrow 

I  can 

to  fix,  to  stare 

at 
the  sigh 
the  fluid 
the  splendour 

the  ingratitude 

the  fixed  star 


miserable 


he  is  willing  to 
show-window 

confu^dly, 
pell-mell 


quotidiano 

fkCw)oti(7f- 

enuj 
requintado 

frrdJcm'ta&uJ 
a  bussola 

f'busulvj 
0  norte  [norto] 

accusar 

a  procedencia 

fprusj- 
ffensyej 
a  petala 

I'pctvhJ 
verificar 

[verdfikarjy 
justificar 

fsuftafi'kar/ 
desembocar 

[dezimbii  'kiir] 


daily 

refined 

the  compass 

the  line,  rule, 

guide 
to  accuse 
the  origin 

the  petal 

to  verify,  to 

prove 
to  justify 

to  discharge 
itself. 


71.  Ex§rcicio. 

Quern  criou  o  mundo?  Foi  Deus  quern  o  criou.  Quaes 
foram  as  dez  pragas  do  Egypto?  Nao  me  sabe  dizer,  quaes 
ellas  sejam  ?  Em  que  logar  da  terra  ha  perfeita  felicidade?  Nao 
conheQO  logar  algum  em  que  a  haja.  Quern  p(5de  ser  todo  seu, 
em  ser  d'outrem  6  sandeu  (prov.).  Mais  faz  quern  quer  do  que 
quern  pode  (prov.).  Quem  porfia  mat  a  capa  (prov.).  Camoes, 
cujo  poema  ^pico  «0s  Lusiadas»  e  um  dos  maiores  monu- 
mentos  literarios  de  todos  os  tempos,  cantou  n'elle  os  feitos 
dos  Portugueses  no  oriente.  Uma  bahia  6  uma  por^ao  de  mar 
que  entra  pela  terra  e  cuja  entrada  e  de  ordinario  estreita. 
As  r^guas  numeradas  de  que  nos  servimos,  permittem  dar  as 
iinhas  que  se  tra^am  com  ellas,  o  tamanho  exacto  que  se 
pretende  dar-lhes.  A  pasta  sobre  a  qual  escrevemos  e  onde 
mettemos  papeis,  6  geralmente  feita  de  papelao.  coberto  de 
oleado.  Quanto  cnstou  a  tua?  Nao  me  lembra  (or:  nao  me 
lembro)  ja  quanto  paguei,  nem  a  quem  (or:  de  quem)  a  com- 
prei;  ainda  esta  tal  qual  a  recebi. 


Eu,olhos,  sei  d'uns 
Que,  desdequeosvi, 
Nfto    vi    mais    ne- 
nhuns  .  .  . 


72.  Leitura. 

iV'ww  album. 

Ve  tu  por  ahi 
Se  os  achas;  senao, 
Descubro-os  em  ti. 


Que  lindos  quesao! 
Que  mododeolbar! 
Que  terna  expres- 

sao! 


Interrogative  and  Relative  Pronouns.  181 

Ja  tenho  pezar  Saspiros  e  ais  Quedoceesplendor! 

De  OS  ver,   porque  Foi  o  que  tirei  Tao  doce,  que  eu 

emfim  ...  De  v6r  ollios  taes.  Nao  posso  suppor 

Que  posso  esperar?  g^  ^endo-os,  se  ere  ^         •  .       .      .  , 

ver  fit^s  em  mim  Na  gra^a,  na  cor  Q»^eex,staoutroc6u 

Taes  olhos,  jamais ;  Nofluido,  oun5o  sei  ^^^^^  ^®  ^^^^'^ 

Decerto,  e  assim, 


E  esta  vida  um  mar;  e  n'este  mar 

Qaal  e  o  astro  que  nos  alumia? 

Que  norte,  estrella  on  biissola  nos  guia? 

Um  olhar  de  mulher!  um  terno  olhar  (idem). 

73.  Thema. 

Which  of  the  boys  is  the  one  whom  you  like  best? 
What  black  ingratitude!  What  sort  of  wine  grows  in  the 
region  of  the  Douro?  Stars  which  have  their  own  light  are 
called  fixed  stars.  There  is  nothing  so  miserable  as  a  man 
who  is  willing  to  do  everything  and  not  able  to  anything  (nada 
pode).  That  is  indeed  (bem)  the  most  beautiful  existing. 
Sometimes  there  are  goods  behind  the  show-windows  of  the 
shops  which  show  the  most  refined  taste,  pell-mell  with  that 
which  we  need  for  our  daily  life.  What  did  you  think  of 
when  doing  this  task  ?  What  were  you  occupied  with,  and 
what  did  you  speak  of?  Look  at  those  flowers,  how  beautiful 
they  are!  What  perfume  and  what  tender  petals!  What  is 
he  accused  of?  The  crime  he  is  accused  of  is  a  theft.  The 
things  whose  origin  he  was  not  able  to  prove  were  apprehended 
(or  seized),  which  is  quite  (muiio)  justified. 

ConversaqSo. 

Quern  e  Camoes  e  qual  (^)  o  poSma  que  escreveu? 

Que  6  essa  po^ma?  or:  Que  sac  os  Lusiadas? 

De  quem  canton  elle  os  feitos? 

Que  (6  que)  se  entende  por  uma  bahia? 

Quaes  saO  os  principaes  rios  de  Portugal? 

Em  qual  dos  oceanos  desembocam? 

A  quantos  estamos  do  mez  or  que  dia  do  m^z  temos? 

{Or:  Em  que  dia  do  mez  ou  da  semana  estamos?) 

Como  se  chama  aquelle  rapaz  cuja  mae  esta  doente? 

Nao  tem  essa  senhora  quatro  filhos,  dos  quaes  o  amigo 

de  V^  Ex*-  e  o  mais  novo?  * 

Que  6  que  tornou  tao  triste   aquella   rapariga    que    de 

ordinario  esta  tao  alegre? 


182  Lesson  27. 

Twenty-seventli  Lesson.    Li§ao  vigesima 
setima. 

Indefinite  Pronouns.  Pronomes  indefinidos. 
§  181.  The  indefinite  pronouns  are  either  joined 
to  a  noun  (pronomes  adjectivos),  or  they  are  of  substantive 
nature,  being  employed  absolutely  and  only  in  the 
singular  number  (pronomes  substantivos).  N.B.—The 
noun  may  be  not  expressed. 

I.  Adjective  Pronouns. 

uni^  wna;  uns,  umas  a(n),  one:  some 

algum,  alguma;  alguns,  olgumaH  some,  any;  such 

nenhurriy  nenhiitna;  nenhuns,  nenhumas  no,  none 

outrOy  -a,  -OS,  -as  another,  some  more 

tal,  toes  such  a  (one),  such 

certOy  -a,  -os,  -as  (a)  certain 

cada  (m.  and  f.)  each 

todo,  -a,  -OS,  -as  (followed  by  the  definite   article)  the 

whole;  all 
qualguer,  pi.:  qimesque>'  any,  whosoever,  whatsoever 
um  e  outro  the  one  and  the  other,  either 
amhos,  ambas  both 
utn  ou  outro  one  or  the  other 

nem  titn,  nem  outro  neither  one  nor  the   other,   neither 
miiito,  -a  many  a;  pi.  muitos,  nmitaa  manv 

diversos  \  aiff^^ent,  various. 
vartos      j 

II.  Substantive  Pronouns. 

Alguem  somebody,  anybody  algo  something 

ninguem  nobody,  none  alguma  coisa  something 

outrem  somebody  else  tudo  everything,  all 

nada  nothing  cada  wn,  cada  uma,  cada  qual 

quemquer  whosoever  everybody,   anybody,   each. 

Note. — The  boundary-line  between  the  indefinite  and  the 
demonstrative  pronouns  is  sometimes  quite  vague,  so  that  the 
grammarians  count  some  of  them  now  to  the  former,  now 
the  latter.  We  also  have  already  classed  some  (as  outro,  tal) 
among  the  demonstrative,  giving  here  a  repetition  of  them. 
Some,  as  muito,  tanto,  are  often  classed  among  the  indefinite 
numbers. 

§  182.    Explanatory  Rules. 
1.    Xenhum,    ninguem  and  nuda^    pronouns    whicli 
include    a    negation,    are    employed,     as    in    English, 


Indefinite  Pronouns.  188 

without  the  negative  adverb  "not,"  when  preceding  the 
verb:  nenhum  d'elles  veio  none  of  them  has  come;  nin- 
gueni  a  viu  nobody  has  seen  her;  ninguem  foi  visto 
nobody  was  seen;  nada  aconteceu  nothing  has  happened. 

Nada  as  an  exclamation  is  "Not  at  all!"  "God 
forbid!" 

If  however  these  pronouns  follow  the  verb,  this  is 
preceded  by  «w<Xo>;  ndo  veio  nenhum  Welles;  ndo  a  viti 
ninguem;  ndo  aconteceu  nada, 

Nenhum  may  precede  the  noun  or  follow  it:  ne- 
nhuma  regra  ...  or  regra  nenhuma  .  .  . 

2.  Algum  is  also  employed  in  a  negative  sense  and 
then  follows  the  noun:   em  tempo  algum  at  no  time(s). 

o.  Cada  is  never  employed  absolutely:  when  an  ad- 
jective, it  precedes  the  noun;  when  a  substantive,  it  is 
followed  by  the  indefinite  article  or  by  qual.  *A  hydra 
repuhlicana  tern  cada  uma  das  suas  sete  cabegas  assente 
em  cada  uma  das  sete  coUinas  da  cidade  de  Lishoa.* 

4.  Amhos  is  always  followed  by  the  definite  article 
or  a  pronoun  in  the  plural:  ambos  os  (or  estes^  aquelles, 
seus)  rapazes;  amhos  elles, 

5.  Outro  in  the  meaning  of  "another"  is  employed 
without  an  article: 

Este  capo  ndo  estd  limpOj  di-me  outro, 

6.  Qualquer  may  precede  or  follow  the  noun.  In 
the  latter  case  the  noun  is  employed  with  the  indefinite 
article— e.g. : 

Qualquer  dia  Id  irei.     Dei-lhe  uma  coisa  qualquer. 

7.  Certo  is  generally  employed  without  an  article;  it 
may,  however,  also  be  accompanied  by  one:  Falou  com- 
certa  energia.     Tern  um  certo  modo  de  fcdar. 

8.  Muito  in  its  meaning  "many  a"  has  no  plural: 
Ha  muita  hora  que  se  perde  na  ociosidade. 

There  is  many  an  hour  lost  in  idleness. 

9.  Algo  is  taken  from  the  Spanish.  It  is  better 
to'  employ  alguma  coisa  instead.  If  followed  by  some 
complement,  this  is  joined  to  either  of  them  by  de: 
alguma  coisa  or  algo  de  hello. 


184 


Lesson  27. 


"N.B.—Algo  can  be  also  an  adverb,  preceding  thus 
adjectives  or  adverbs: 

Uma  tarefa  algo  espinhosa  a  somewhat  delicate  task. 
Trahalhou  algo  difficultosamenfe. 
He  worked  with  some  difficulty. 

10.  Quemquer  and  qualquer,  if  accompanied  by  que 
and  expressing  an  uncertainty,  are  followed  by  the  verb 
in  the  conjunctive  mood: 

Quemquer  que  seja;   quaesquer  perigos   que  possa  haver. 

Otherwise  they  are  followed  by  the  indicative: 

Qualquer  (pessoa)  p6de  faze-lo.     Quemquer  se  arremessava 
d  agua. 

Palayras. 


0  argueiro 

the  splint, 

a  comadre 

the  godmother 

fvr'gvfruj 

straw 

[ku'ma&r?] 

0  ocio  ['ofiiuj 

0  compadre 

the     godfather 

a  ociosidade 
[ostuzi- 

the  idleness 

[ko  padre] 
mirar  [mirar] 

to  look  at 

'fra&9] 

0  rasto  [rraftu] 

the  track, 

a  communicagao 

the  communi- 

trace 

[kumunikv- 

cation 

Ignacto[ig'nvs}u 

7Ignace 

'avu] 

entender 

to  be  of  opinion 

benevolo 

benevolent 

apanhar 

to  pick  up 

[hd'nevulu] 

[vpv'par] 

recompensar 

to  recompense 

travar-se 

to  come  to 

[rrdkompe- 

[trv'varsd] 

blows 

sarj 

a  contenda 

the  quarrel 

punir  [pu'nirj 

to  punish 

[kontendvj 

determinar 

to  determine 

a  briga  [brigej 

the  fight 

fdatprminarj 

assanhado 

hot 

dispensar 

to  dispense 

[vse'ya&u] 

[difpesar] 

collocar-se 

to  put  oneself 

hemfazejo 

beneficent 

['kulu'karsd] 

fbvtfv'zvguj 

d'este  modo 

thus,  in  the 

0  merito 

the  merit 

following 

['merituj 

manner 

queixar 

to  complain 

0  miolo  [mi'olu]  the  kernel;  the 

fksi'farj 

brain 

0  etitendimento 

the  intelligence 

a  casca 

the  shell 

[entendi- 

^ 

[kafkB] 

'mentuj 

guardar 

to  keep 

fingir-se 

to  feign 

[gmr'dar] 

ff-t'sirsaj 

a  sentenqa 

the  sentence 

0  hicho  fubifuj 

the  animal, 

[sen'tese] 

worm 

0  resultado 

the  result 

a  malicia 

the  malicious- 

[rrdzul'ta9u] 

[nw'lisyv] 

ness 

a  demanda 

the  plea 

a  fera  ['fens] 

the  wild  beast 

[dd'mvnds] 

Indefinite  Pronouns.  185 


0  paldcio  do     \ 

aTJZ't         the  "town-hal. 


o  arrabalde         tlie  suburb 
[vrrvtaMd] 


a  unificagao         the  unification. 
municipal      '  i        [un9fiku  'snuj 

74.  Exercicio. 

Ninguem  v§  o  argueiro  no  seu  olho.  Toda  a  energia  se 
perde  na  ociosidade.  Alguns  insectos  vivem  apenas  um  dia. 
Cada  um  deve  fazer  conhecer  aos  outros  tudo  o  que  (or  tudo 
quanto)  julga  litil ;  esta  communica^ao  ben^vola  produzira  cedo 
ou  tarde  algans  fructoa.  Todo  o  honaem  sera  recompensado 
ou  punido  segundo  os  sens  actos.  Ninguem  pode  ser  dispensado 
de  ser  juste  e  bemfazejo.  Certos  ventos  reinam  em  certos 
mares  em  esta96es  determinadas.  Todos  os  homens  hao-de 
morrer.  Nenhuma  criatura  humana  pode  voar.  Ninguem  e 
bom  juiz  em  causa  propria.  A  vontade  de  brilhar  nao  ajunta 
realmente  nada  ao  merito  da  pess6a.  Cada  um  queixa-se  da 
sua  memoria,  ninguem  se  queixa  do  seu  entendimento.  Mais 
vale  pouco  que  nada.  Nada  duvida  quern  nada  sabe.  Nin- 
guem se  metta  onde  o  nao  ehamam.  Cada  qual  com  seu 
egual. 

75.  Leitnra. 

0  lido  e  a  raposa. 

Era  uma  vez  um  liao  muito  velho,  e  que  de  velho  que 
era  ja  nao  ia  a  ca^a.  Lembrou-lhe  entao  fingir-se  doente,  e 
qualquer  bicho  que  o  ia  visitar  comia-o  logo,  e  foi  assim 
comendo  muito  animal.  Mas  um  dia  uma  raposa  conheceu-lhe 
a  malicia,  e  em  vez  de  entrar,  disse-lhe  da  porta:  0'  senhor 
liao,  esta  melhorzinho? 

—  Nao,  respondeu  a  fera,  —  Cada  vez  peor!  Entre  e 
descanse  um  bocadinho,  6  comadre  ♦  .  .  Mas  diz-lhe  a  raposa 
a  mirar  o  chao: 

—  Nada,  compadre!  n'essa  nao  caio  eu.  Aqui  ha  o  rasto 
de  muitos  que  entraram,  mas  nao  vejo  o  rasto  dos  que  sairam 
(o»';  de  nenhuns  que  tenham  saido)! 

(Trindade  Coelho:  0  Segundo  Livro  de  Leitura). 

76.  Tliema. 

The  Nut. 

One  day  two  boys  found  a  nut.  "This  nut  is  mine," 
called  out  Ignaee,  *'for  I  was  the  first  who  saw  it.  "Not  at 
all!"  replied  Bernard,  "I  am  of  opinion  that  it  is  mine,  be- 
cause [it]  was  I  who  picked  it  up."  And  both  came  to  blows 
in  a  hot  fighi.  "I  shall  (tr. :  jfew  vou)  finish  your  quarrel," 
said  another  and  bigger  boy  who  passed  that  way.     He  put 


186  Lesson  28. 

himself  in  the  middle  of  the  two  boys,  opened  the  nut,  and 
spoke  thus:  "One  half  of  the  shell  belongs  to  him  who  first  saw 
the  nut;  the  other  to  him  who  picked  it  up;  and  the  kernel 
I  keep  for  myself  for  my  sentence."  ^'That,"  he  added 
laughingly  (a  rir),  "is  the  ordinary  result  of  most  pleas." 

Conyersai^ao. 

Que  cidade  6  esta  em  que  estamos? 

Onde  e  situada? 

Qual  (6)  0  numero  da  sua  popula9ao? 

Quaes  sSo  as  ruas  mais  importantes? 

Quaes  s5o  os  bairros  mais  bonitos? 

Nomeiem  alguns  hoteis  dos  mais  frequentados ! 

Quern  sabe  alguma  coisa  da  histdria  d'esta  cidade? 

Em  que  annos  foi  edific^do  o  palacio  do  municfpio? 

Como  se  chamam  os  arrabaldes,   as  povoa^oes  visinhas 

etc.? 
A  que  Estado  pertence  esta  cidade? 
Quaes  sao  as  provincias  d*elle? 

Quantos  Estados  pertencem  ao  Reino  da  Gran-Bretanha? 
Quem  e  o  Rei  actual? 
Em  que  anno  subiu  ao  thrdno? 
Nomeiem  quaesquer  outros  monarchas  ingleses! 


Twenty-eighth  Lesson.    Li^ao  vig6sima 
oitava. 

The  IrregTilar  Verbs. 

Os  verhos  irregulares, 
§  183.     Note  the  following  rules: 

1.  All  compound  and  derived  verbs  follow  the 
original  verb,  if  not  indicated  as  an  exception— e.g.; 
demo(n)strar  like  mostrar;  surprender  like  prender;  re- 
partir  like  paHir,  etc. 

2.  All  tenses  not  indicated  are  regular..  All  irregu- 
lar forms  are  given  in  italics. 

The  first  coigugation  (verhs  in  ar)  has  only  two, 
irregular  verbs,  of  which  one,  estar^  has  already  beefll 
dealt  with  among  the  auxiliary  verbs.    The  second  i8:i 


The  Irregular  Verbs.  187 


§  184.     nar 

to  give. 

Indicative. 

Conjunctivo. 

Presente. 

dou  I  give 

de  that  I  give 

dds 

des 

dd 

de 

damos   ^ 

demon 

does 

dels 

dao. 

deem. 

Imperfeito. 

dava  I  gave 

desse  that  I  gave. 

Preterito  perfeito. 

4ei  I  gave,  I  have  given 

deste 

deu 

dh)i08 

dSstes 

dSram. 

Mais-qiie-perfeito  simples. 

dera  I  had  given. 

Futuro. 

darei  I  shall  give 

(se  eu)  der  if  I  shall  give,  if 

dardfi 

deres                  [I  am  to  give 

dard 

der 

darevnoA 

dermos 

dareis 

derdes 

dardo. 

dh-em. 

All  the  rest  is  regular. 

The  irregular  forms  dhsc,  de^-a,  der  are  regularly 
formed  from  deste  (2°'^  pers.  sg.  pret.)  by  changing  the 
ending  -ste  into  -sse,  -ra,  -r. 

§  185.  Idioms  with  dar, 

Dar  um  abraro  a  to  embrace 

dar  entrada  a  to  let  in:  to  admit 

dar  fe  a  to  believe  or  to  have  faith  in 

dar  horas  to  strike  (the  clock) 

dar  occasido  to  offer  an  opportunity 

dd-se  a  occasido  de  there  is  an  opportunity  for 

dar  parte  to  communicate;  to  impart 

dar  um  passeto  to  go  for  a  walk,  to  walk 

dar  um  sdlto  to  jump 

dar  OS  hons  dias  to  bid  good  day 


188  Lesson  28. 

dar  as  boas  festas  to  send  or  express  the  compliments  of 

the  season 
dar  OS  pesames  to  condole 
dar  OS  parabens  a  to  congratulate 
dar  a  luz  to  publish  (book);  to  bear,  to  bring  forth 
dar  a  to  lead  to,  to  end  in 
dar  de  espdras  to  spur 
dar  em  alguem  to  strike  one 
dar  em  (doido)  to  become  (mad) 
dar  no  alvo  to  hit  the  mark     , 
dar  nos  olhos  or  na  vista  to  be  evident  or  striking 
dar  pelo  nome  de  to  answer  to  the  name  of 
estajanella  da  para  a  rua,   o  jar  dim  this  window  looks 

or  opens  into  the  street,  etc. 
dar-se  (a)  to  dedicate  oneself;    to  thrive;  to  occur,  to 

happen 
dar-se  (bem)  com  to  agree  with 
pouco  se  me  da  I  care  but  little 
quem  me  dera  (saber)!  how  fain  would  I  (know)! 

§  186.  Concerning  the  verbs  in  -car,  -par,  -gar, 
-jar  see  §  143. 

§  187.  The  verbs  in  -ear  change  e  into  ei  in  all  those 
forms  where  the  radical  is'  accentuated — e.g.:  nomear  to 
name,  recear  to  fear,  lisongear  to  flatter,  gorgcar  to 
chirp,  warble: 

nomeio,  nomeias,  nomeia,  nomeamos^  nomeaes,  no- 
meiam;  nomeie,  nomeies,  nomeie,  nomeemos,  nomeeis^  no- 
meiem  (cf.  §  139). 

§  188.  Crear  (or  criar)  to  create,  to  bring  up, 
changes  in  the  same  forms  the  c  in  i:  crio,  crias,  cria, 
ereamos,  creaes,  criam;  crie,  cries,  crie,  creemos,  creeis, 
criem  (see  §  140). 

N.B. — The  compound  verbs  of  crear  (with  the  ex- 
ception of  recrear  (better  recriar)  to  create  once  more, 
to  bring  up  again)  change  the  e  into  ei: 

procrear  to  procreate,  to  beget  :  procrcio  (yet  also 
procrio),  procrda. 

But:  a  natureza  recria ;  and  ella  recreia  she  diverts, 
delights. 

§  189.  The  verbs  in  -iar  keep  their  ?,  in  the 
pronunciation  as  well  as  in  the  orthography:  coxnar  to 
copy :  mplo. 


The  Irregular  Verbs.  189 

190,  In  some  verbs  in  -iar  the  modification  of 
the  i  into  ei  is  admissible  and  usual.  Such  verbs  are: 
diligenciar,  agenciar,  reniediar,  negociar,  odiar,  premiar: 
thus:  diligenceio,  agenceia,  etc. 

§  191.  Not  so  in  the  verbs  adiar,  afiar,  alumiar, 
annunciar,  aviar,  contrariar,  confiar,  copiar,  par,  miar, 
piar,  saciar,  tosquiar,  varlar,  which  form:  adio,  alumia. 
annunciam,  etc. 

Second  Conjugation.    Yerbs  in  -er. 

§  192.     Haver  to  have;  to  be,  to  exist  (see  L.  6). 

Eehaver  follows  the  same  model,  but  is  used  only 
in  the  forms  that  have  -v-:  rehavendo,  rehavido,  rehavia, 
rehouve,  rehaja^  rehouvesse. 

§  193.     Fa^er  to  do,  to  make,  to  cause,  to  let. 

Pres.  Indicat.  Fago,  fazes,  faz,  fazimos,  fazeiSj  fazem-. 

Fres.  Conjunct.  Faga,  fagas,  faca,  facdmoSf  fagaes,  fagam. 

Fret,  imperf.  ind.  Fazia,fazias,fazia,faziamos,faziei$yfaziam. 

Fret.  perf.  ind.  Fiz,  fizeste,  fez,  fismios,  fizestes,  fizeram. 

Imperfeito  Conj.  Fizesse,  etc. 
Mais-que-perf.  Ind.  Fizera,  etc. 

Futtiro  Ind.  Farei,  fards,  fard,  etc. 

Futuro  Conj.  Fizer,  fizeres,  fizer,  etc. 

Condicional.  Faria. 

Imperativo.  Faze  (tu),fazei  (vds),faga(  V^),fagdmos(nds). 

Farticipio.  Feito. 

Gerimdio.  Fazendo. 

§  194.     Compound  verhs: 

(a)  contrafazer  to  counterfeit;  to  imitate;  to  disguise. 

P.  p.  contrafeito,  also  adj.,  false,  forced, 

(b)  desfa^er  to  undo,    to  destroy,    to    abolish,    to 
annul; 

(c)  perfumer  to  complete,  to  perfect,  to  constitute; 

(d)  refazer  to  do  or  make  again; 

(e)  satisfazer  to  satisfy,  to  pay. 

,  Remark. — To  let  is  rendered  by  fazer  whenever  you  wish 
to  express  an  active  interference:  fazer  saber  to  let  know,  to 
send  word  to,  to  acquaint  with.  Faga  entrar !  Let  him  come 
in.  It  is  translated  by  deixar  whenever  you  mean  to  express 
admission :  deixo-o  falar  I  let  him  speak.  {Fago-o  falar  would 
be:  I  (shall)  cause  him  to  speak.) 


190  Lesson  28. 

§  195.  Idioms  with  fazer^ 

Fazer  caso  de  to  esteem;  to  care  for;  to  attend  to 

ndo  fazer  caso  to  despise 

fazer  annos  to  have   one's  birthday,   to  complete  .  .   . 

years  of  age  (see  §  97,  8) 
faz  color,  faz  frio,   faz  vento,   calma   it  is   hot,    cold, 

windy,  calm 
faz  bom  (man)  tempo  it  is  fine  (bad)  weather 
faga  o  favor  de,  faz  favor  de  (if  you)  please  to 
fazer  (com)  que  to  cause,  to  oblige 
Fiz  (com)  que  elle  fizesse  isso  I  made  him  do  that 
ter    (muito)    que   fazer   to    be    (very)    busy,    to    have 

(much)  to  do 
fazer  em  peda^,os  to  break  or  cut  to  pieces 
fazer  (or  mandar)  fazer  alg.  c.  to  have  something  done 
fazer  construir  (uma  casa)  to  have  (a  house)  built 
fazer  tengdo  to  intend 
fazer  a  harba  to  shave,  to  get  shaved 
fazer  as  unhas  to  clean  or  cut  one's  nails 
fazer  leildo  to  hold  an  auction 
fazer  as  contas  tq^  count,  to  calculate 
fazer  conta  or  de  conta  to  suppose 
fazer  contas  com  alg.  to  make  up   (to  settle)   accounts 

with  a  person;  to  argue  it  out 
fazer  justiga  a  alg.  to  do  justice  to  a  person 
fazer  gala  de  alg.  c.  to  boast  of  something 
fazer  compras  to  purchase,  to  go  shopping 
fazer  as  pazes  to  reconcile  (oneself) 
fazer  urn  discurso  to  make  (or  deliver)  a  speech 
fazer  forgoes)  to  use  violence 
fazer  falta  to  be  absent,  to  miss,  to  die 
faz-me  muita  falta  I  miss  it  very  badly 
fazer  de  bobo  to  make  a  fool  of  oneself 
fazer  de  capitdo  to  supply  the  captain 
0  navio  faz  dgua  the  ship  is  leaky 
fazer  cara  a  to  defy,  to  face 
fazer  fogo  to  shoot,  to  fire 
fazer  honra(s)  to  bestow  honours,  to  do  honour 
fazer  horas  to   wait  for   a   certain    hour,   spend  time 

waiting 
fazer  o  papel  de  to  perform  the  figure  of 
estd  a  fazer  it  is  being  done 
estd  por  fazer  it  is  not  yet  done 
dd  que  fazer  it  is  hard  work 
1880  nSo  faz  ao  caso  that  is  of  no  concern 
fazer-ae  to  become,  to  turn,  to  grow;  to  occur 


The  Irrep:ular  Verbs.  191 

f'azer-se  vel/to  to  become  old 

fazerse  vermelho  to  blush 

fazer-se  pdllido,  tDnarello  to  grow  pale,  yellow 

fazerse  d  vela  to  put  to  sea 

fazer-se  ao  mar,  ao  alto  to   gain   the  open  sea,    to  get 

the  offing 
fazer-se  d  terra  to  steer  towards  (to  head  for)  the  land 
fazer-se  de  novas  to  plead  ignorance 
muitas  vezes  se  faz  isso  that  occurs  often. 

§  196.     JDizer  to  say,  tell,  speak,  talk,  relate. 

Pres.  Ind.  Digo,  dizes,  diz,  dizemos,  dizeiSf  dizem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Diga,  digas,  diga^  digWrnos,  digaes,  digam. 

Pret.  imperf.  Ind.  Dizia,  dizias,  dizia,  diziamos,  dizieis,  diziam. 

Pret.  perf.  Ind.  Disse,    disseste,     disse,    diss^mos,    disseHes, 

disseram. 

Imperf,  Conj.  Dissesse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf,  Ind.  DissSra,  etc. 

Future  Ind.  Direi,  dirds,  etc. 

Future  Conj.  Disser,  disseres,  disser,  etc. 

Condicional.  Diria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Dize  (tu),  dizel  (vds),  diga  (V^),  digdmos  (nds). 

Pa?'ticipio.  Dito. 

Gerundio.  Dizendo. 

§  197.     Compound  verbs: 

condizer  (com)  to  agree,  suit,  match,  contradizer  to 
contradict;  desdizer  to  deny;  desdizer-se  to  unsay;  inter dizer 
to  interdict;  maldizer  to  slander,  curse;  predizer  to  predict, 
foretell. 

§  198.     Foder  can,  may,  to  be  able. 

Pres.  Ind.  Posso,  podes,  pdde,  podimos,  podeis,  podem.. 

Pres.  Conj.  Possa,possas,possa,possdmos,possaes,possam. 

Pret.  Imperf.  Ind.  Podia,podias,podia,podiamosjpod{eis,podiam. 
Pret.  perf .  Ind.        Pude,    pudeste,    pode,    pudhnos,    pudestes, 

puderam. 
Imperf.  Conj.  Pudesse,  etc. 

Mais-quePetf.lnd. Pudera,  etc. 
Future  Ind.  Pederei,  poderds,  etc. 

Futuro  Conj.  Puder,  puderes,  puder,  etc. 

Condicional.  Pederia,  etc. 

Participio.  Podido.  , 

Gerundio.  Podendo. 

Poder-se  to  be  possible. 


192 


Lesson  28. 


§  199.  Saber  to  know,  to  learn,  to  be  able,  can. 
Pres.  Ind.  Sei,  sabes,  sabe,  sabemos,  sabeis,  sabem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Saiba,  saibas,  saiba,  saibdmos,  saibaes,  saibam. 

Fret,  imperf.  Ind.    Sabia,  sabias^  sabia,  sabiamos,  sabieis,  sdbiam. 
Fret.  perf.  Ind.       Soube,   soubeste,   soube^    soubemos,    sotihestes^ 

souberam. 
Imperf.  Conj.  Sonbesse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf.lnd.  Soubera,  etc. 
Futuro  Ind.  Saberei,  sabei'ds,  etc. 

Futuro  Conj.  Souber,  souberes,  etc. 

Condicional.  Saberia,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Sabe,  saiba,  sabei. 

Participio.  SaUfdo. 

Gerundio.  Sabendo. 

Remark. —  Can,  to  be  able  must  be  rendered  by  podei- 
whenever  it  means  a  physical  power  or  disposition;  it  must 
be  rendered  by  saber  if  signifying  an  intellectual  capacity— 
e.g.,  Meu  irmao  sabe  ler,  mas  hoje  nao  pdde  porque  estd  rouco 
my  brother  can  read,  but  to-day  he  is  not  able  to  do  so, 
because  he  is  hoarse. 

§  200.     Caber  to  be  contained  in,  to  fall  to,    to 
belong  to,  to  come  or  happen  opportunely,   forms  like 
saber,  but  for  the  1^^  pers.  pr.  ind. 
Pres.  Ind.     CaibOj  cabes,  cabe,  cabemos,  cabeis,  cabem. 


Palavras. 

0  mel  [tneij 

the  honey 

a  casinha  do 

the  honey-cell 

a  ahelha 

the  bee 

favo 

[v'tvfiv] 

0  alvdolo 

the  cell,  alveole 

a  cSllula 

the  cell 

[al'vevlu] 

['seluhj 

0  cabrito 

the  kid 

0  tiimulo 

the  tomb 

[kv'britu] 

f'tumuluj 

tornar 

to  give  back 

0  cortigo 

pegar  [pd'gar] 

to  seize 

[kur'tisu] 
a  colmeia 

the  bee-hive 

1 

em 
entrar  a  fazer 

to  begin  doing 

[Tcol'mviv] 

alg.  c. 

something 

0  sobreiro 

the  cork-oak 

a  flauta  ['fiaiUvJ  the  flute 

[su'brviru] 

largar  a  fugir 

to  put  oneself 

chupar 

to  flight 

[fu'par] 

to  suck 

0  magarefe 

the  blockhead 

sugar  [su  Qnr] 

[mvgv  'refd] 

adocicar 

to  sweeten 

0  flautista 

the  flautist 

[vffusikar], 

[flau'tiftv] 

adoQar 

a  palavra 

the  word  of 

fv&usarj 

(d'honra) 

honour 

depositar 

to  deposit 

outre  dia 

the  other  day 

The  Irregolar  Verbs. 


193 


0  saxjateiro 

the  shoemaker 

a  vacancia 

[vv  "kvs}is] 
a  vagatura        1 

0  recibo 
[rrd  'situ] 

the  receipt 

the  vacancy 

inteiramente 

entirely 

[twgv'turis]  1 

urn  pagamento 

an  instalment 

seguir  [sd'gir] 

to  continue 

a  conta 

(the  way) 

o  emprego 

the  employ- 

por signal 

by  way  of 

[ini'preguj 

ment 

[si'naij 

example 

vago  fvaguj 

free,  vacant 

0  monolitho 

the  monolith 

conferir 

to  confer 

[monu'lituj 

[hofd'rir] 

lavrar 

to  work,  to 

fazer  todas  as 

to  take  all 

chisel 

diligencias 

pains 

a  columna 

the  column 

fd9li'ses}vfj 

[Tco'lunv] 

exercer 

to  exercise 

a  licenQa 

the  license,  per- 

[}zdr 'serj 

fli'sesv] 

mission 

fazer-se  illusoes 

to  illude  oneself 

especial 

especial,  par- 

[ilu'zdif] 

[}fp98i'ai] 

ticular 

desanimar(-se). 

to  despair,  to 

a  informagao 

the  information 

desalentar(-se)     despond 

nao  ha  de  que! 

don't  mention! 

torcer  ftur'serj 

to  twist 

passe  muitobem. 

'  good- bye  1 

77.  Ex 

ercicio. 

0  mel  e  fabricado  (or  feito)  pelas  abelhas.  Estas  fazem 
o  mel  dentro  dos  corti90s  on  colmeias.  Os  corti^os  sac  feitos 
da  casca  do  sobreiro.  Para  fazerem  o  mel,  as  abelhas  chupam 
de  certas  fldres  o  succo  adocicado  d'estas,  o  qual  succo  se 
chama  nectar.  Com  o  nectar  sugado,  as  abelhas  fazem  o  mel 
que  levam  para  os  corti^os,  depositando-o  nas  c^Uulas  ou 
casinhas  dos  favos,  chamadas  tambem  alveolos.  —  Dize  neste 
mundo  o  que  tens  para  dizer:  o  tumulo  6  mudo.  Dou-me 
muito  bem  com  os  ares  d'esta  regiao,  melhor  do  que  me  dei 
na  Suissa.  Ali  se  dava  ds  vezes  que  nao  podia  aturar  os 
ventos  asperos  que  me  faziam  mal.  Mas  nao  sabia  que  fazer, 
ate  que  me  disseram  da  Riviera  portugu6sa  e  que  soube  que 
at6  no  inverno  os  ares  aqui  sao  benefices. 

78.  Leitura. 
0  cabrito  e  o  Idbo. 

Era  uma  vez  um  cabrito  que  se  tinlia  perdido  num 
monte.  Nao  sei  aonde,  salta-lhe  um  lobo  para  o  devorar,  e 
elle  volta-se  para  o  lobo  e  diz-lhe  assim: 

—  Senhor  lobo!  ja  sei  que  me  vae  (see  ir,  §  214)  comer! 
Mas  se  faz  favor,  eu  gostava  muito  de  uma  morte  alegrel 

Diz-lhe  0  lobo:  —  Qual? 

Torna  o  cabrito:  —  Gostava  muito  de  morrer  a  dan^ar! 

0  lobo  por  Ihe  fazer  a  vontade,  pega  numa  flauta  e  poe- 
se  (see  por^  §  212)  a  tocar,  e  o  cabrito  entra  logo  a  bai- 
Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  13 


194  Lesson  28. 

lar ;  —  mas  iins  cSes  que  andavam  perto,  ouviram  a  flauta  e 
vieram  (see  vir^  §  218)  a  correr,  e  o  lobo  largou  logo  a  fiigir 
•com  medo  dos  caes.    . 

—  Bem  feito!  dizia  elle  entao.  —  Nao  passo  de  magarefe, 
para  que  me  metti  eu  a  ser  flautista. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  OP  Livro  de  Leitura). 

79.  Thema. 

I  give  you  my  word  of  honour  that  I  gave  those  25 
pounds  which  my  father  had  given  me  the  other  day,  to  my 
tailor,  in  order  to  pay  his  bill. — Did  you  (tr.  thou)  also  pay 
the  shoemaker,  and  did  he  give  you  a  receipt? — I  could  not 
yet  entirely  pay  the  shoemaker;  I  made  him  an  instalment 
and  told  him  that  I  should  give  him  the  rest  as  soon  as  I 
should  be  nominated  to  the  vacant  appointment  that  is  to  be 
conferred. — How  can  you  know  whether  you  will  be  nominated 
for  it? — I  don't  know,  but  I  flatter  myself,  that  it  will  be 
given  to  me,  as  I  take  all  pains,  and  because  there  is  perhaps 
nobody  else  who  is  able  to  do  the  service  as  well. — And  I 
tell  you  what  I  have  always  told  you:  I  fear  that  somebody 
else  will  be  appointed,  as  you,  however  well  knowing  the  (tr.  do) 
service,  cannot  exercise  it  on  account  of  your  health.  Don't 
give  yourself  up  to  illusions,  but  also  don't  despair  if  (by  chance) 
you  know  that  another  has  been  selected  for  the  vacancy. 

OonversaQao. 

A.  Sabe-me  o  senhor  dizer,  por  onde  eu  posso  (or  puder) 
chegar  ao  Paldcio  do  Municlpio? 

P.  Sei,  sim,  senhor.  Faqtu  favor  de  se  dirigir  por  esta 
rua,  que  6  a  Rua  do  Ouro,  abaixo  at6  ao  Terreiro 
do  Pa90  que  da  para  o  Tejo.  Depois  pode  seguir  a 
direita  pela  Rua  do  Arsenal  at6  ao  Largo  do  Pelou- 
linho,  onde  6  a  Camara  Municipal. 

A.  Ora  diga-me,  porque  se  nomeia  aquelle  largo  «do 
Pelourinho». 

B.  Deu-lhe  eate  nome  um  monumento,  por  signal  muito 
antigo,  que  estd  no  meio  do  largo  e  defronte  do 
Municipio,  e  que  6  formado  por  um  monolitho  lavrado 
(or  aberto)  em  trfis  columnas  torcidas  uma  em  volta 
da  (round  the)  ontra. 

A.  P6de-se  entrar  no  Palacio? 

B.  Pode.  At6  as  4  horas  esta  aberto.  Depois  e  so  com 
licen^a  especial. 

A.  Muito  obrigado  pelas '  InformaQoes  que  me  deu.  Boa 
tarde ! 

B.  Nao  ha  de  qu6.     Passe  muito  bem! 


The  Irregular  Verbs.  195 

Twenty-ninth  Lesson,    Li^ao  vigesima 
nona. 

The  Irregular  Verbs.     (Continued.) 
Second  Conjugation.    Terbs  in  -er. 
§  201.     Querer  to  be  williDg,  to  wish,  to  intend, 
to  feel  disposed,  to  like. 

Pres.  Ind.  Quero,  qiieres,  quenfquer^moSy  quereis,  querent. 

Pres,  Conj.  Qiieira,  queiras,  queira,  queirdmos,  queiraes, 

queiram. 

Prei.  imperf.  Ind.  Queria,  querias,  qiieria^  queriamos,  querieis, 
queriam. 

Pret.  perf.  Ind.  Quiz,  quizeste,  quiz^  quizeinos,  quizesteSj 
quizSram. 

Imperf.  Conj.  Quizesse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf.  Ind .  Quizera,  etc. 

Futuro  Ind.  Quererei,  quererds.  etc. 

Futuro  Conj.  Quizer,  quizeres,  etc. 

Condicional.  Qiiereria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Queira,  queiram  (only  used  in  the  3^^  pers. 

followed  by  an  infinitive — e.g.:  queira, 
dizer-me  in  the  meaning  "kindly  tell  me". 

Participio.  Querido.     (As  an  adjective  it  means:   be- 

loved, dear). 

Gerundio.  Querendo. 

§  202.    Jtequerer  to  solicit  is  regular  but  for  the 
1^*  pers.  pr.  ind.  and  derived;  it  forms: 

Pres.  Ind.  Requeiro,  requeres,  requere. 

Pret .  perf.  Requeri,  requereste,  requereu,  requeremos ,  etc. 

§  203      Trazer  to  bring,    to  carry,  to  wear,  to 
bear. 

Pres.  Ind.  Trago,  trazes,  traz,  trazSmos,  trazeis,  trazem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Traga,    tragas,    traga,    tragdmos,    tragaes, 

tragam. 
Pret.  imperf.  Ind.    Trazia,  trazias,  irazia,  traziamos,   trazteis, 

traziam. 
Prei.  perf.  Ind.       Trouxe  f'trosoj,  trouxeste,  trouxe,  trouxhnos, 

trouxestes,  trouxeram. 
Imperf.  Conj.  Trouxesse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf .  Ind.  TrouxSra,  etc. 
Futuro  Ind.  Trarei,  trards,  etc. 

Futuro  Conj.  Trouxer,  trouxeres,  trouxei',  etc. 

IS* 


196  Lesson  29. 

Condidonal.  Traria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Traze  (tu),  traga  (V^),  trazei  (v6s). 

Participio.  Trazido. 

Gerundio.  Trazendo. 

§  204.     VaZer   to   be   worth,    to  be  of  value,  to 
help,  to  assist. 

Pees.  Ind.  Valho,   vales,    vale   or    val,  valemos,  valeis, 

valem. 
Pres.  Conj.  Valha,    valhas,     valha,    valhdmos,    valhaes, 

valham. 
Imperativo.  Used  only  in  the  di^^  pers. — e.g.,   Valha-me 

Deusf  God  help    mel     Valha   a  verdade 

to  tell  the  truth! 

All  the  rest  is  regular. 

§  205.     I^erder  to  lose. 
Pres.  Ind.       \    {■  Perco,J  perdes,   perde,    perdemos,    perdeis, 


Pres.  Conj.  Perca,   percas,   perca,   percdmos,   percaeSy 

percam. 

The  rest  is  regular. 

To  this  group  of  irregular  verbs  belong  also  ser, 
ter  and  haver,  already  dealt  with  among  the  auxihar}' 
verbs. 

§  206.    LerjQ  read. 
Pres.  Ind.  \  (LeJQ^  Us,  le,  Umos,  ledes,  leem. 

Pres.  Conj.  4^'«^  leias,  leia,  le(i)dmos,  le(i)aes,  leiam. 

Imperf.  Ind.  Lia,  Uas,  lia,  llamos,  lieis,  Ham. 

Pret.  perf.  Ind.        Li,  leste,  leu,  lemos,  lestes,  leram. 
Imp&rf.  Conj.  Lesse,  lesses,  Usse,  lessemos,  Usseis,  ISssem, 

Mais-que-perf.  Ind.  LSra,  leras,  lera,  etc. 
Imperativt.  Le  (tu),  leia,  le(i)dmos,  lede  (v6s). 

Participio.  Lido. 

Gerundio.  Lendo. 

§  207.  CrSr  to  believe,  to  think,  to  trust,  and 
descrer  to  disbelieve,  are  conjugated  like  ler.  Modem 
writers  use  the  forms  creiamos,  creiaes  instead  of  the 
more  correct  creamos,  creaes  (cf.  ler). 

§  208.     VSr  to  see,  behold,  consider,  view. 
Pres.  Ind.  Vejo,  vSs,  vS,  vSmos,  vedes,  viem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Veja,  vejas,  veja,  vejdmos,  vejaes,  vejam. 

Imperf.  Ind.  Via,  vias,  via,  viamos,  vieis,  viam. 

Pret.  perf.  Ind.        Vi,  viste,  viu,  vimos,  vistes,  viram. 


The  Irregular  Verbs.  197 

Imperf.  Conj.  Visse,  visses,  visse,  etc. 
Mais-que-perf.  Ind.  Vira,  viras,  vtra,  etc. 

Futuro  Ind.  Verei,  verds,  verd,  etc. 

Futuro  Conj.  Vir,  vires,  vir,  etc. 

Condicional.  Veria,  verias,  veria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Ve  (tu),  veja,  vejdmos,  vede  (vos). 

Participio.  Visto. 

Gerundio.  Vendo. 

§  209.  Componnd  Verbs: 

antever,  prever  to  foresee 

entrever  to  have  a  glimpse  of,  to  discover 

rever  to  review,  to  see  again 

p7'ovir  to  provide 

desprovir  to  deprive,  to  strip  (of). 

N.B. — Prover  and  desprover  are  regular  in  the  Pret. 
perf.  Ind.  (provi,  proveste,  proveuj  etc.)  and  in  the  forms 
derived  from  it  (provesse,  prover  a,  prover),  as  also  in 
the  Past  Participle  (provido). 

§  210.  Jazer  to  lie,  to  be  buried,  a  defective 
verb  of  rare  use,  has  become  regular — i.e.:  it  has  no 
longer  the  forms  jaqo,  nor  jouve  (pret.  perf.),  nor  an 
open  e  [e]  in  the  2°^  pers.  pret.  pref.  and  derived  forms: 

Pres.  Ind.  Jazo,  jazes,  jaz,  jazemos,  jazeis,  jazem. 

Imperf.  Ind.  Jazia. 

Pret.  Perf.  Jazi,  jazeste,  jazeu,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf.  Jazira,  etc. 

Aqui  jaz  (jasem)  here  lies  (he). 
From  the  1^^  Participle  the  verbal  adjective  jazente 
or  better  jacente  is  formed. 

«-Essas  pobres  geragoes  que  de  ha  muifo  jazem  sem  vida.» 
Terras  jacentes  ao  poente  grounds  lying  towards  the  west. 
Heranga  jacente  heritage  not  yet  distributed. 
• 

§  211.  Those  verbs  ending  in  -cer,  -ger  and  -guer 
undergo  analogous  modifications  as  those  ending  in 
-car,  -gar  and  gar,  in  order  to  conserve  the  original  sound 
of  the  c  and  g  (cf.  §  136  N.B.  and  §  143). 

§  212.     P6r  to  put,  place,  lay,  set,  suppose. 

This  verb  apparently  not  belonging  to  any  of  the 
three  conjugations,  is  to  be  considered  as  one  of  the 
2^*^,  having  lost  the  e  of  the  termination  (po-er). 


198 


Lesion  29. 


Pres.  Ind.  Ponho,  pdes,  pde,  pomos,  pondes,  pdem. 

Pres.  Conj.  •  Ponha,  ponhas,  ponha,  ponhdmos,  ponhaes, 

ponham. 
Imperf.  Ind.  Punha,  punhas,  p^nha,  punhamos,  punheis^ 

punham. 
Pret  Ind.  Puz^  puziste,  pbzj  puzemos,  puzisteSy  puzSram. 

Imperf.  Conj.  Puzesse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf.         Fuzera,  puzeras,  puzSra,  etc. 
Futuro  Ind.  Porei,  pords,  pord^  poremos,  poreis,  porao, 

Futuro  Conj.  Puzer,  puzeres,  puzer,  puzermoSj  puzerdeSj 

puzerem: 
Condicional.  Porta,  porias,  poria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Pde    (tu),    ponha     (Ve),    ponhdmos    (nds), 

ponde  (vos). 
Participio.  Posto. 

Gerundio.  Pondo. 

Por-se  mn  pe  to  get  up.     • 


§  213.  Compound  verbs: 

antepor  to  set  before,  prefer        indispdr  to  indispose,  to  unfit 


compdr  to  compose 

interp&r  to  pat  between,  in- 

eontrapd?' to  < 

appose,  to  com- 

terpose 

pare 

oppdr  to  oppose 

depdr  to  state 

;  to  depose;  to 

propor  to  propose 

deposit;  to 

lay  down 

propdr-se  to  intend,  to  design 

dispor  to  dispose 

suppdr  to  suppose 

exp^  to  expose,  exhibit 

transpdr  to  transport,  etc. 

impor  to  impose 

Palarras. 

0  varao 

the  man,  male 

a  pedra  tumular  the  tombstone 

[w  'rvuj 

0  punhado           the  handful 

0  ingenho 

the  skiU,  talent, 

[pupaiTuJ 

[I's^rru] 

art,  wit 

a  campa               the  burying- 

0  brazao 

the  escutcheon 

['kvmpvj             place 

[brv  'zsuj 

sauddso                melancholy 

herdar  [ir  darj  to  inherit 

[sau'&ozu] 

0  padre 

0  annundo           the  advertise- 

['pa&r9] 

the  father 

/» 'nus^uj,             ment 

falar  em  bom 

to  speak  aloud 

a  prompto            on  cash  (pay- 

som 

(supply  paga-      ment) 

0  vote  [votuj 

the  vote 

mento) 

a  amizade 

the    friendship 

a  prestagdes         on  payment  by 

[vmi'zadd] 

[vpriftv  'soifj       instalments 

a  infdncia 

the  childhood 

0  escriptdrio        the  office 

[i'fVB%v] 

[ffkri'tortuj 

0  tumulo 

the  tomb 

a  pddaria           the  bakery 

[tumtduj 

[pad)!  'rivj 

The  Irregular  Verbs. 


199 


tres2)assar 

to  alienate 

quehrar 

to  break 

[trtfpn'sarj 

[kd'brar] 

0  lucro  f'lukruj 

the  gain,  profit 

tnlhar  [tv'fiar] 

to  cut 

tratar 

to  negotiate, 

a  alvenaria 

the  masonry 

treat,  deal 

[aivdnv  'riv] 

as  alvigaras 

the  finder's 

a  argamassa 

the  mortar 

[ai'visvrvf] 

reward 

[vrgy'masv] 

moivho 

the  mill 

0  betao  [hd  'tvu]  the  beton,  con- 

[mu  'ipuj 
0  eolar  fku'larj 

the  collar 

0  cimento 

Crete 
the  cement 

a  medalha 

the  medal 

[gi  'mentuj 

{md&afils] 

a  ligagdo 

the  binding 

0  capitalista 

the  capitalist 

[ligv  'svuj 

cement 

0  sdcio  f'sostuj 

the  sleeping 

0  instrumento 

instrument 

commanditdric 

partner 

0  officio 

the  profession 

a  indilstria 

the  industry 

[u'fisiu] 

• 

[in  'duftr'iv] 

a  colher 

the  trowel 

0  prdprio 

the  same  (ad- 

fku'fierj 

(supply:  an- 

vertiser) 

a  picadeira 

the  pickaxe 

nunciador) 

[pikv  '&virv] 

0  ahaixo  assi- 

the  signatory 

addgagar 

to  thin 

gnado 

[is&eigv  'sarj 

[vsi'na&u] 

picar 

to  hoe 

a  agenda 

the  agency 

0  estuque 

the  stucco 

[e'sesn] 

[yf'tukal 

0  penhor 

the   pawn, 

0  camartello 

the  cutting- 

[pt'ijor] 

pledge 

[kvmvr'tdu] 

hammer 

sufficiente 

sufficient 

deshastar 

to  rough-hew 

[sufisfi'entd] 

[disM'i^r] 

a  casa  de 

the  pawnshop 

calcar  fkalkarj 

to  fix  by  beat- 

2yenhores 

ing 

montar 

to  establish 

0  prumo 

the  plummet 

afreguezado 

well  accustom- 

aprumar 

to  plumbline 

[vfrggt'za&uj 
0  local  [lu'kaij 

ed 

0  nivel  ['niveij 

the  level 

the  locality 

nivelar 

to  level 

0  esclarecimento  the  information 

horizontal 

horizontal 

[tfklm'3si- 

[orizon'taij 

'mentuj 

a  cantaria 

the  masonry; 

a  construcQao 

the   construc- 

[kvntv 'rivj 

the  cut- stone, 

[ko/tru'siuj 

tion 

blocking 

0  pedreiro 

a  enxada 

the  spade 

[pd'&rvtru] 

4". Via    mflenn 

[l'fa&^] 

0  trolha 

ulic    XUcIbUXI 

amassar 

to  wet,  to  stir 

['trofiv]         1 

0  coche  [kofi] 

the  hod. 

a  trolha 

the  handle-  or 

['tronv] 

mortar-board 

80.  Ex 

ercicio. 

Rebello  da  S.ilva  disss  que  valia  mais  o  varao  que  se  fazia 
grande  e  famoso  pelo  ingenho  e  pelos  actos,  do  que  o  homem 
que  ja  nascera  entre  brazoes  herdados.     Dizia  o  padre  Antonio 


200  Lesson  29. 

Vieira  que  se  descompunha  a  si  mesmo,  quern  aos  mais  descom- 
punha.  Nao  leias  em  meia  voz,  l6  alto  e  em  bom  somi  Dou-lhe 
OS  parabens ;  nao  caibo  em  mim  de  contente  pelas  boas  novas  de 
que  me  deu  parte.  Vejo  que  Ihe  trouxe  fortuna  o  conselho  que 
algum  dia  Ihe  d^ra.  Deus  queira  que  Ihe  valham  sempre  os  meus 
votoa  de  boa  amizade  e  o  muito  que  Ihe  quero.  Quern  me  d^ra 
que  pudesse  ir  v6-loI  Prop6r-lhe-ia  que  fossemos  (see  §  214) 
revfir  os  logares  da  nossa  infancia  e  os  tiimulos  onde  jazem 
aquelles  a  quern  mais  quizemos  quando  vivos.  Que  satisfao^ao 
d*abna  se,  lendo  nas  pedras  tumulares  aquelles  nomes  queridos, 
depuzessemos  um  punhado  de  fidres  na  campa  dos  que  nos 
deram  a  vida.  Mas  ja  perdi  toda  a  confian^a,  descreio  em  que 
jamais  OS  reveja  ou  que  torne  a  v6r  esses  saudosos  sitios  os 
quaes  —  valha  a  verdade !  —  valem  para  mim  o  mais  bonito 
jardim.    • 

81.  Leitnra. 

Annuncios, 

1.  Piano  alemao,  novo,  magnificas  vozes,  vende-se  barato, 
a  prompto  ou  a  pre8ta96es,  Na  Rua  da  Palma  61,  escripto- 
rio,  se  diz. 

2.  Pddaria,  trespasse-se  uma  em  boas  condi9oes  e  muito 
barata.  Da  100  000  reis  de  lucro  por  m6s.  Trata-se  com 
0  abaixo  assignado  na  Padaria  Bijou  a  rua  Escola  Poly- 
technica  247. 

3.  Alt^icaras  dao-se  a  quern  entregar  na  Cal^ada  do  Moinho 
de  Vento  32  um  colar  d'ouro  com  medalha  que  se  perdeu 
desde  a  dita  rua  ate  ao  Chiado. 

4.  Capitalista.  Precisa^se  de  socio  capitalista  ou  commandi- 
tario  para  desenvolver  uma  industria.  Capital  garantido, 
lucros  certos  lO^/o  (por  cento).  Trata-se  com  o  proprio. 
Carta  a  agencia  NN.  Rua  dos  Retrozeiros. 

5.  Capitalista  precisa-se  que  entre  com  o  capital  sufficiente 
para  mais  desenvolvimento  de  uma  casa  de  penhores,  ja 
montada  e  afreguezada  n'um  dos  melhores  locaes  da  capital. 
Esclarecimentos,  rua  Capellistas  No.  71. 

82,  Thema. 
Building  in  Portugal. 

Do  you  see  that  house  in  construction?  The  mason 
makes  the  walls  and  all  masonry  with  broken,  uncut 
stones  or  with  bricks,  joining  the  materials  with  clay,  mortar, 
beton,  cement  or  another  binding.  Do  you  know  of  which 
tools  the  mason  makes  use  in  his  profession?  I  (shall) 
tell  you;  they  are  these:  the  trowel,  with  which  he  places 
the  clay  and  mortar;   the  pickaxe,   with  which  he  thins  the 


The  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjngation.  201 

sides  of  the  bricks,  cuts  the  .walls  and  demolishes  the  stucco ; 
the  cutting-hammer,  with  which  he  cuts  the  stone  and  fixes 
the  materials  out  of  which  he  builds  the  walls;  the  plumb, 
which  helps  (valer  em)  him  to  plumbline  the  walls;  the  level, 
with  which  he  levels  the  blockings;  the  handle-board  where 
he  puts  the  chalk;  the  spade  he  stirs  the  chalk  with;  the 
hod,  which  serves  in  transporting  the  chalk,  etc. 

Conversai^ao. 

Que  tempo  faz,  {or  esta)?  Por  emquanto  tern    feito    (or 

estado)    bom    tempo,    mas 
creio  que  vae  mudar. 
Porque  cr§  isso?  Porque    se    levantou    muito 

vento,  e  receio  que  nos  traga 

chuva. 

Valha-nos  Deus !  Antes  queria      Pois  nao  v6  aquellas  nuvens 

que  continuasse  enxuto,  por-  que  se  juntam  no  horisonte? 

que  com   a  chuva  perco  a  Vera  que   kmanha  teremos 

occasiao  de  dar  passeios.  chuva,  a  nao  sfir  que  o  vento 

acalme. 
Oravejaojornalquetrouxeram      Se  quizer  fazer  esse  favor... 
e  que  ja  prediz  mudan^a  de  como  eu  nao  sei  Ifir . . .  Corn- 

tempo.    Quer  que  Ih'o  leia?  tudo  ja  prevejo  o  que  diz. 

Pois  ja  ficamos  sabendo  que,      Pois  seja  o  que  Deus  quizer! 
se  0  tempo  se  puzer  a  mal,  Visto  a  gente  nao  pudef  mos 

sera  por  muitos  dias.  fazer  nada  .  .  . 


Thirtieth  Lesson.    Li^ao  trigesima. 

The  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation, 

§  214.     Ir  io  go  (as  for  the  compound  tenses  of 
this  verb  see  §  118). 

Pres.  hid.  Vou,  vaes  (vais),   vae   (vai),   vamos  (imos), 

ideSy  vdo. 

Pres.  Conj.  Vd^  vds,  vd,  vamos,  vades,  vdo. 

Pret.  imperf.  Ind.  la,  ias,  ia^  iamos,  ieis^  iam. 

Pret.  perf.  Fui,  foste,  foi,  fomos,  fostes,  fordo. 

Imperf.  Conj.  Fosse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf.  For  a,  for  as,  fdra,  formos,  foreis,  fdram. 

Flit.  Ind.  Irei,  irds,  ird,  iremos,  ireis,  irdo. 

Ftit.  Conj.  For,  fores,  fdr,  fdrmos,  fardes,  forem. 

Conditional.  Iria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Vae  (tu),  vd,  vamos  (nos),  ide  (vos). 


202  Lesson  80. 

PaHicipio.  Mo.    (In  the  adjective  meaning  "past"  there 

Gerundio.  Indo.  is   also   the   fern,  form   "ida'' 

and    the  plural    forms    **idoSf 

idasr) 

§  215.  Ir  followed  by  an  infinitive  expresses  an 
intention,  that  which  the  English  expresses  by  "to  be 
going  to" — e.g.:  vou  fazer  o  men  thema  I  am  going  to  do 
my  task;  iamos  dar  urn  passeio  we  were  just  about  to 
take  a  walk. 

§  216.  Idioms  with  ir. 

Ir  a  pS  to  go  on  foot 

ir  de  (or  em)  carruagem    to  go  in  a  carriage,  to  drive 

ir  a  cavallo  to  go  on  horseback,  to  ride 

ir  a  melhor  to  grow  or  become  better 

ir-ter  com  alguetn  to  call  upon  somebody 

vae  melhor  he  (she, 'it)  is  better,  it  is  going  better 

Como  vae?  how  do  you  do?  how  is  it  going  on? 

Que  vae  nisso?  what  does  it  matter? 

por  mal  que  vd  if  the  worst  come  to  the  worst 

Quanto  vae  d^aqui  a  .  .  .?  How  far  is  it  from  here  to  ...  ? 

Esta  rua  vae  ter  d  ponte  this  street  leads  to  the  bridge 

Vae  em  tres  annos  about  three  years  ago 

Vae-lhe  hem  it  suits  you  well 

Isso  jd  la  vae  that's  a  thing  past  and  done. 

§  217.  Iv'se  to  go  away,  be  off,  to  set  out. 
disappear,  die. 

Vou-m£  I  go  away,  I  am  going  away. 

Foi-se  he  is  gone 

Vd-se  emborcC!  get  you  gone!  be  off! 

Vamo-nos!  let  us  go  away 

{Vae-se  fazendo  tarde  (escuro)  it  is  growing  late  (dark).) 

Remark  I. — While  ir  expresses  a  mx)vement  towards  a 
place,  ir-se  expresses  one  away  from  it.  The  former  answers 
to  the  question  "where  to?",  the  latter  to  "whence?" 

Remark  II. — In  the  last  example  se  is  not  part  of  the 
verb  ir,  but  of  fazer,  being  joined  to  the  former  only  for 
the  sake  of  harmony. 

§  218.  .   Vir 

Pres.  Ind.  Venho,  vens,  vem,  m'mos,  vindes,  veetn. 

Pres.  Conj.  Venha,    venhas,   venha,  •  venhdmos,   venhaeSy 

venham. 


The  Irregnlar  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjugation.  808 

Imperf.  Ind.  Vinha,     vinhas,    vinha,    vinhamos,    vihheis, 

vinham. 
Fret.  perf.  Vim,  vUste,  veio,  viimos,  vihtes,  vieram, 

Imperf.  Conj,  Viesse,  viesses,  viesse,  etc. 

Mais-que-perf,         Viira,  vUras,  etc. 
Fut.  Ind.  Vtrei,  virds,  vird,  viremos,  vireis,  virao. 

Fut.  Conj:  Vier,  vieres,  vier,  viet^fnos,  vierdes,  vierem. 

Condicional.  Viria,  etc. 

Imperativo.  Vem  (tu),  venha,  venhdmos,  vinde  (vds), 

PaHicipio.  Vindo. 

Gertmdio.  Vindo. 

Remark. — The  singular  of  the  imperative  terminates  by 
m:  vem.  The  same  ending  has  the  2°<*  pers.  sing.  pres.  ind., 
when  followed  by  an  objective  pronoun  (-o,  -a,  -os,  -as) — 
e.g.,  vem-lo  tu  dizer?  do  you  come  to  tell  it?  (About  lo 
cf.  §  164  (b).) 

Idioms:—  Vir  ds  boas  to  reconcile  oneself.  Vir-se  edesejar- 
se  com  ...  to  be  in  difficulties  with  .  .  . 

§  219.  Compound  Terbs: 

advir  to  intervene,   to  arrive  desavir  to  disunite 

contravir   to    contravene,    in-  intervir  to  intervene 

fringe  provir  to  come  from 

convir  to  agfee,   to   be  fit  or  sohrevir  to  supervene. 

convenient 

§  220.     Bir  to  laugh. 
Pres.  Ind.  Rio,  ris,  ri,  rimos,  rides,  riem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Ria,  ria^,  ria,  rldmos,  ries,  riam. 

Compound  verbs:  sorrir  to  smile  and  rir-se  (de) 
to  laugh  (at). 

§  221.  The  verbs  medir,  pedir  and  ouvir  to  hear, 
are  regular  but  for  the  1^*  pers.  pres.  ind.  and  derived 
forms. 

Medir  (cf.  152)  to  measure,  appreciate. 
Pres.  Ind.  Mego,  medes,  mede,  medimos,  medis,  medetn, 

Pres.  Conj.  Mega,  megas,  mega,  megdmos,  fnegaes^  megam. 

Imperativo.  Mede,  mega,  megdmos,  medi. 

J^edir  to  ask,  to  beg. 
Pres.  Ind.  Pego,  pedes,  pede,  pedimos,  pedis,  pedem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Pega,  pegas,  pega,  pegdmos,  pegaes,  pegam. 

Imperativo.  .Pede,  pega,  pegdmqs,  pedi. 

Compound  verbs:  despedir  to  dismiss  and  expedir 
to  dispatch. 


204  Lesson  30. 

Ouvir  to  hear. 

Pres.  Ind.  Ougo    (oigo),    ouves,    ouve,    ouvimos,    ouvis, 

ouvem. 
Pres.  Conj.  Ouga   (oiga),  ougds,  ouga,  ougamos,   ougaes^ 

ougam. 

N.B. — The  u  before  g  may  be  suppHed  by  i. 
§  222.     normir  to  sleep  (see  §  154). 

Pres.  Ind.  Durmo,  dortnes,   dorme,  dormimos^  dormis^ 

dormem. 
Pres.  Conj.  Durma,  durmas,  durma,  durmdmos^  durmaes, 

dunnam. 

§  223.     Concerning  the  verbs  in  a(h)ir  see  §  158. 
Cair  (sometimes,  but  incorrectly:  cahir)  to  fall. 

Pres.  Ind.  Cdio,  caes,  cae^  caimos,  cais,  cdem. 

Pres.  CofiJ.  Cdia,  cdias,  cdia,  caidmos,  caiaes,  cdiam. 

Sahir  or  sair  to  go  out,  to  go  forth. 

Pres.  Ind.  Sdio,  saes,  sue,  sahimos  (saimos),  sahis  (sais), 

sdem. 
Pres.  Conj.  Sdia,  sdias,  sdia,  saidmos,  saiaes,  saiam. 

All  the  rest  is  regular. 

§  224.  Concerning  the  verbs  adherir,  advertir,  ferir, 
mentir^  repetir,  seguir,  sentir,  servir  and  compound  ones 
cf.  §§  152,  153,  156. 

The  following  is  a  model  conjugation  of  these 
verbs: 

Pres.  Ind.  Visto,  vestes,  veste,  vestimos,  vestis,  vestem. 

Pres.  Conj.  Vista,  vistas,  vista,  vistdmos,  vistaes,  vistam. 

Imp.  Ind.  Vestia,   vestias,    vestia,     vestiamos,    vestleis, 

vestiam. 
Pret.  perf.  ind.         Vesti,     vestiste,     vestiu,     vestimos,    vestistes, 

vestiram. 
Imp.  Conj.  Vestisse,     vestisses,      vestisse,      vestlssemos, 

vestisseis,  vestissem. 
Mais-que-perf.  Vestlra,  vestiram,  vestira,  vestiramos,  vestireis, 

vestiram. 
Fut.  Ind.  Vestirei,  vestiras,  vestird,  etc. 

Fut.  Conj.  Vestir,   vestires,  vestir,   vestirmos,  vestirdeSf 

vestirem. 
Condicional.  Vestiria,  vestirias,  etc. 


The  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  CoDJugation.  206 

Imperativo.  Veste  (tu),  vista  (V^),  vistdmos,  vesti  (vds). 

Participio.  Vestido. 

Gerundio.  Vestindo. 

Thus  are  conjugated: 

Pres,  Ind.      ^^f'^^^J- 
and  Imper. 

(a)  Adherir  to  adhere,  to  stick  to    .  adhiro  adhira 

(b)  advertir  to  advise advirto  advirta 

(c)  ferir  to  bless firo  fir  a 

(d)  mentir^  to  lie,  to  deceive  .     .     .  minto  minta 

(e)  repetir  to  repeat repito  repita 

(f)  seguir^  to  follow    .     .     .     .     .     .  sigo  siga 

(g)  sentir  to  feel sinto  sinta 

(h)  sertnr  to  serve;  to  be  of  use;  to 

lay  (the  table) sirvo  sirva 

(i)   vestir  to  dress visto  vista 

(j)  despir'  to  undress dispo  dispa 

§  225.  The  verb's  aggredit*,  denegrir,  pro- 
grediVf  remir,  transgredir^  prevenir  change 
equally  the  radical  e  into  i,  yet  not  only  in  the  1^^  pers. 
pr.  ind.,  but  in  all  accented  forms  of  this  tense,  as 
also  through  the  whole  pres.  subj.  (cf.  152,  2,  Remark). 

Aggredir  to  assault. 

I^'es.  Ind.  Aggrido,     aggrides,     aggride,     aggredimos, 

aggredis,  aggridem. 
Pres.  Conj.  Aggrida,    aggridas,     aggrida,     aggriddmos, 

aggridaes,  aggridam. 

^Preven/ir  to  advise,  to  warn,  to  prepare,  to  prevent. 
Pres.  Ind.  Previno,  prevines,  previne,  prevenimoSf  preve- 

nis,  previnem. 
Pres.  Conj.  Precina,  previnas,  previna,  previndmos,  pre- 

vinaes,  previnam. 

§  226,  Those  verbs  of  the  3"*  conj.  whose  radical 
vowel  is  u  modify  this  u  into  open  o  [o]  in  the  2°^  and 
3^  pers.  sing,  and  in  the  3"^  pers.  pi.  of  the  pres.  ind., 
as  also  in  the  sing,  imper.  (cf.  §  155) — e.g.: 

^  Instead  of  mentir  you  will  better  employ  faltar  d  verdade. 
^  For  the  orthography  seguir  and  sigo,  cf.  §  157. 
^  This  verb  conserves  in  the  first  and  second  persons  pi.  pres. 
oonj\  its  radical  e:  dispa,  dispas,  dispa,  despdmoSj  despaes,  dispam. 


206 


X^esson  80. 


Fugir  to  flee,  fly. 
Pres.  Ind.  Fujo,  foges,  foge,  fugimos,  fugis,  fogetn. 

Pres.  Gonj.  .^uja,  fujas,  fuja,  fujdmos,  fujaes,  fujam. 

Imperativo.  ^oge,  fuja,  fujdmos,  fugi,  fujam. 

All  the  rest  is  regular. 

N.B. — Concerning  the  g  changing  into  \;  see  §  157. 
§  227.     After  this  model  are  conjugated: 
Acudir  to  run,  to  help,  to  aid      engulir  to  swallow 


hdir  to  touch,  to  stir 
consumir  to  consume 
cohrir  (cubrir)  to  cover 
descdbrir  to  un-  or  discover 
cuspir  to  spit 
destruir  to  destroy 


sacudir  to  shake 

subir  to  ascend,  to  mount 

tussir  to  cough 

sumir  to  hide 

sumir-se  to  disappear 

surgir  to  appear,  to  rise. 

Remark, — Construir  and  reconstruir  to  build  and  re- 
build are  also  often  conjugated  like  this,  yet  they  better  keep 
their  u:  construes,  construe,  constmem  instead  of  constroes, 
constroe,  constroem. 

§  228.  Affligir  to  aflict;  affligir-se  to  care,  to 
be  in  sorrow,  to  grieve;  corrigir  to  correct;  fingir  to  feign; 
dirigir  to  direct,  change  the  g  before  a  and  o  into  j — 
e.g.,  que  elle  corrija  that  he  may  correct  (cf.  §  157). 

§  229.  Frigir  to  fry,  modifies  moreover  the  i 
into  e  in  the  2^^  and  3^^  pers.  sing,  and  the  S'^  pers.  pi. 
Pres.  Ind.v  •  Frijo,  freges,  frege,  frigimos,  frigis,  fregem. 

Participio.  frito  besides  frigido. 

Bemark.—The  verbs  in  uzir,  as:  conduzir,  produzir, 
induzir,  reduzir,  (re)luzir,  etc.,  are  regular,  but  they  lose 
the  e  of  the  S^^  pers.  sing,  of  the  pres.  ind.— e.g.,  produz; 
the  imperative,  however,  conserves  the  e:  produze! 


Palavras. 


Parar  to  stop,  to  stay 

0  cavcUheiro         the   gentleman 

[knvv  'fiviru] 
0  cavalleiro         the  rider 

fkvvv  IviruJ 
a  estrada  real     the  high-road 
{jftra&vrn'ai] 
o  grito  f'grituj     the  scream 
d  desfilada  in  full  speed 

[adiffi'U&v] 


a  presen^a  de 

espirito 
andar  doente, 

triste  etc. 
0  desastr^ 

[dd'z&ftra] 
a  (primeira) 

ligadura 

flige  '&urv] 
sentir  d  falta  de 


the  presence  of 

mind 
to  be  ill,  sad 

the  disaster 

the  temporary 
dressing  (of  a 
wound) 

to  miss 


The  Irregular  Verbs  of  the  Third  Conjagation. 


207 


0  apparelho 

the  apparatus 

0  tribunal 

criminal  court 

[vpv'rvfiu] 

criminal 

OS  sentidos 

the  senses, 

a  instrucgao 

primary  in- 

conscience 

primdria 

struction 

effectivamente 

indeed 

a  direcgdo  geral  central  school- 

a  complicagao 

the  complica- 

de instrucgao 

board 

[kompliJce- 

tion 

0  documento 

the  document 

svuj 

[doku'mentu] 

de  passagem 

by  the  bye 

constar 

to  be  said  or 

de  dia  a  dia 

from  day  to  day 

[konf'tar] 

reported 

0  medico 

the  assistant 

dcerca  [a  'serknj 

with  regard  to 

assistente 

surgeon 

de 

fracturar 

to  break 

a  frequezia 

the  parish 

[fratu'rarj 

[fr9gd'ziv] 

0  requerimento 

the  petition 

collocar 

to  place 

[rrdkri- 

[kulu'kar] 

'meniuj 

referido 

mentioned 

0  ministerio  da 

the  ministry  of 

0  levantamento 

the  raising 

justiga 

justice 

a  suspensdo 

the   suspension 

depots  d'dmanha  the  day  after 

fsufpe'svuj 

to-morrow 

0  ^despacho 

the  despatch 

a  urgencia 

the  urgency 

[difpafu] 

[ur^esfiv] 

0  deputado 

the  deputy 

a  sentenga 

the  sentence 

[d9puta&uj 

[sentesv] 

d'aqui  em  diante  henceforth 

oficial  [ofist'aij 

official 

assim  que 

as  well  as,  also 

absolvitorio 

absolving 

contar  com 

reckon  upon 

[vbsoivi- 

algu£m 

someone 

'toriu] 

auxiliar 

to  help. 

a  nota  fnotv] 

the  note,  list 

[ausilf'arj 

83.  £x< 

srcicio. 

Meu  bom  Amigo! 

Ha  muito  que  nada  ouqo  de  ti.  Nam  eu  sei  ja  onde 
paras  e  como  vaes.  Disseste-me  que  virias  v§r-me  um  dia 
qualquer  de'  que  havias  de  prevenir-me.  Mas  nao  vieste,  nam 
me  prevenista.  Sinto  muito  que  nao  tenhas  vindo  na  semana 
passada,  quando  demos  um  passeio  a  Cintra,  sitio  de  que  de 
certo  ja  oniviste  falar.  Fui  eu  com  mens  paes  a  irmaos  e 
fomos  de  carruagem  e  nao  em  caminho  de  ferro.  Alguns 
cavalheiros,  indo  a  cavallo  e  em  bycicleta,  saguiam  a  nossa 
carruagem  pela  estrada  real.  De  repente  ouva-s6  um  grito  — 
olho  para  tras  a  vajo  que  um  dos  cavalleiros  caido  abaixo,  jaz 
no  chao,  emquanto  o  cavallo  foge  a  desfilada.  Oh,  sa  visses 
aquillo !  Mas  nao  perco  a  minha  natural  presen^a  da  espirito, 
e,  querendo  valer  ao  homem  jacente,  qua  cria  ferido,  ponho- 
me  em  pe  e  faQo  parar  a  carruagem.  Saio  d'alla  pracipitada- 
mente  e  os  outros  acodem.  Tu  sabes  que  geralmente  ando 
prevenido,  como  que  presentindo  sempre  algum  dasastre.  Trago 


208  Lesson  30. 

comigo,  para  fazer  umas  primeiras  ligaduras,  um  apparelho, 
que  n'aquella  occasiao  tambem  trazia  comigo.  E  se  o  nSo 
trouxesse  (or:  trago),  ter-nos-ia  (or:  tinha-nos)  feito  muita 
falta.  Pois  o  homem  perdera  os  sentidos.  Proponho  que  se 
puzesse  na  carruagem,  onde  effectivamente  foi  posto,  dispondo- 
se  de  maneira  que  nos  outros  viemos  a  p^,  at^  que  nos  adveio 
outra  carrudgem  de  que  fizemos  uso.  Consome-me  ainda  o 
receio  que  sobrevenha  alguma  complica9ao  no  estado  do  ferido 
que  —  diga-se  de  passagem  —  sente  melhoras  e  vae  a  melhor 
de  dia  a  dia.  Sirvo-lhe  de  medico  assistente,  visto-o  e  dispo-o, 
pois  fracturou  um  bra90.  EUe  agora  dorme  e  6  bom  que  durma, 
para  que  se  ponha  bem  de  todo.  Se  nao  sobrevier  febre, 
espero  que  elle  se  possa  levantar  depois  d'^manha.  Na 
esperan9a  de  te  v6r  brevemente,  pe^o  me  creias 

sempre  teu  muito  amigo 
Jose. 

84.  Leitnra. 

Bequerimentos, 

Requeiro  que  pelo  ministerio  da  justi^a  me  seja  enviada  com 
urgencia  copia  da  senten9a  absolvitoria  de  26  de  julho  de  1907, 
do  tribunal  criminal  do  Porto,  dada  no  processo  em  que  res- 
pondeu  o  professor  official  da  escola  de  C.  senhor  Paulo  Fer- 
reira  de  Azevedo. 

Requeiro  que  pela  diree9ao  geral  de  instruc9ao  primaria 
me  sejam  enviados  com  urgencia  os  seguintes  documentos: 
1.  Nota  de  tudo  quanto  se  souber  e  constar  kcfirca  do  ex- 
professor  primdrio  da  freguezia  de  Paranhos,  do  Porto,  sr.  P.  F. 
de  A.,  actualmente  collocado  na  escola  official  de  C. ;  2.  Copia 
do  requerimento  do  referido  professor  d  direc9ao  geral  de  ins- 
truc9ao  primaria,  pedindo  o  levantamento  da  suspensao  que 
Ihe  foi  imposta,  com  o  despacho  dado  pela  mesma  direc9ao  geral. 

Lisboa,  3  de  junho  de  1908. 

0  deputado 
Affonso  Costa. 

85.  Thema. 

My  dear  friend! 
I  congratulate  you  that  you  so  quickly  have  (conj.)  run 
to  help  that  gentleman  fallen  from  his  horse,  and  that  you 
could  provide  his  injuries  with  temporary  dressing.  I  appreciate 
all  the  interest  and  satisfaction  with  which  you  follow  the  pro- 
gress in  the  recovery  of  the  wounded  man.  I  beg  that  you  will 
continue  to  let  me  know  how  he  is  going  on  and  whether  he  is 
growing  better.  Also  that  you  will  tell  me  whether  I  can  help 
you  (cf.  §  204)  or  be  of  any  use  to  you  (see  §  224  h).  You 
well   know  that   you   may   reckon   upon   me  and  that  I  am 


Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs.  209 

good  for  something.  Communicate  to  me,  whatever  I  may  be 
able  to  do  for  you  or  your  patient.  I  repeat  that  I  will 
come  (=  ir)  at  once  as  soon  as  you  write  me  "Come!" 
I  suppose  that  you  are  (conj.)  without  a  soul  to  help 
you  (=  a  soul  that  [may]  help  you)  and  grieve  about 
it.  Should  it  be  convenient,  advise  me,  and  I  will  run  to 
(your)  help. 

Yours  most  heartily  (=  teu  do  cora^ao) 
James  (Jayme). 

86.  Exercise  (oral). 

Instead  of  a  conversation  the  student  is  recommended 
to  transfer  the  address  "<m"  in  78  and  80  into  the  more 
ceremonious  form,  remembering  that  it  may  be  given  either 
by  the  mere  verb  {^^^  pars.)  or  by  o  SenJior,  o  Amigo,  Y^  Ex<^, 
etc.  (see  §  32). 


Thirty-first  Lesson.    Li^ao  trigesima 
primeira. 

Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs. 

03  verbos  unijpessoaes  e  os  defectivos. 

§  230.  Impersonal  are  >  those  verbs  the  activity  of 
which  is  not  exercised  by  persons  or  even  by  any 
distinct  subject,  and  which  are  only  used  with  the 
3^*^  pers.  sing,  and  the  indefinite  subject  it.  We  di- 
stinguish three  groups: 

1.  Such  verbs  as  are  always  and  merely  used  in 
the  3'"<*  person,  the  essentially  impersonal  ones.  To  these 
,  belong  those  expressing  natural  phenomena.  Some 
of  them  are  employed  with  the  subject  o  tempo;  ama- 
nhecer,  to  dawn,  is  sometimes  accompanied  by  the 
pleonastical  subject  o  dia;  acontecer  may  have  a  noun 
for  its  subject. 

Consta  it   (he,  she,  etc.)   is  chomsca  it  drizzles 

said  to  .  .  .  graniza  it  hails 

acontece  it  happens  neva  it  snows 

(o  dia)  amanhece  it  dawns  gela  it  freezes 

anoitece  it  grows  night,   dar-  degela  it  thaws 

kens  relampeja  it  lightens 

chove  it  rains  venta  it  blows 

troveja  it  thunders  escurece  it  darkens 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  14 


210 


Lesson  31. 


0  tempo  estia  it  (the  weather)      resulta  it  results 
settles  pesa-me  I  am  sorry  ^ 

0  tempo  aclara  it  (the  weather)      apraz-me  I  am  pleased.- 
clears  up 

2.  Such  verbs  as  may  -also  be  employed    with  a 

personal  subject  and   in    all  persons:   the   accidentally 

impersonal  ones — e.g.: 


parece  it  appears 
entende-se  it  is  understood 
tarda  muito,  leva  muito  tempo 

it  tarries 
nao     admette     duvida     it    is 

doubtless 


nao  admira  it  is  not  astonish- 
ing, I  don't  wonder 

recommenda-se  it  is  to  be  re- 
commended 

convem  it  is  convenient 

verificou-se  it  was  verified. 


3.  Compositions  of  the  3^^  pers.  of  the  verbs  sery 
estar,  faser^  haver ^  ir,  etc.  with  an  adjective  or  substan- 
tive—e.g.: 


E  or  estd  claro  it  is  clear 
e  evidente  it  is  evident 
i  (im)possiv€l  it  is  (im)possible 
e  preciso  it  is  necessary 
i    indispensavel    it    is    indis- 
pensable 
e  justo  it  is  just 
S  verdade  it  is  true,  indeed 
e  provavel,  certo  it  is  probable, 

sure 
e  lastima  it  is  to  be  deplored 
e  pSna  it  is  a  pity 
^  (uma)  vergonha  it  is  a  shame 
faz  arranjo  it  is  convenient, 

fit     or     opportune     (also   em- 
ployed personally) 
estd  (or  faz)  calar  it  is  hot 
estd  (or  faz)  frio  it  is  cold 


estd  (or  faz)  lu^r  it  is  moon- 
light 
estd  (or  faz)  sol  it  is  sunshine 
estd  (or  faz)  nevoa  it  is  foggy 
ha  duvida  there  is  some  doubt 
nao  ha  duvida  it  is  doubtless ; 

it  does  not  matter 
nao  ha  novidade  it  is  all  right 
ha  gente  there  are  some  people 
ha  que  fazer  it  is  much  to  do 
ha  utn  anno  a  year  ago 
ha  muito  (tempo)  long  ago 
vae    melhor    it    (he,    she)    is 

growing  better 
vae  em  tres  annas  about  three 

years  ago. 
vae   fazer   um  mes    nearly    a 


month  ago. 

§    231.      Rule. —  Impersonal   verbs    and   locutions 
which   express   uncertainty,   necessity,   feeling  or  wish, 
are  followed  by  the  subjunctive  in  the  dependent  clause, 
if  introduced  by  que;  otherwise  by  the  infinitive. 
Examples. 
E  indispensavel  que  va  levar  esta  carta  ao  correio. 
E  lastima  que  nao  tenha  vindo  mais  cedo  (or:  e  lastima 
nao  ter  vindo  .  .  .). 


*  See  pesar  §  137  (c). 
^  See  praeer  §  234. 


Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs.  211 

E  jiisto  que  o  operario  ven^a  um  ordenado  correspondente 

ao  seu  trabalho  (or:  e  justo  o  operario  veneer  .  .). 
E  (uma)  vergonha  que    um   rapaz  tao  intelligente    nao 
se  applique  mais  {or:   e  vergonha  um  rapaz  .  .  .  nao 
se  applicar  mais). 
Pesa-me  que  Ihe  tenha  feito  essa  injusti^a  (or :  p6sa-me 

ter  Ihe  feito  .  .  .)• 
Nao  admira  que  nao  se  sinta   bem  depois  d'uma   noite 

d'insomnia. 
Tardava  muito  que  chegassem  noticias  d'elle. 
Nao  admittia  diivida  que  o  r^u  fosse  culpado  (or:  de  o 

reu  s6r  culpado). 
Foi  preciso  que  se  Ihe  fizesse  uma  ligadura  (or :  foi  pre- 

ciso  fazer-lhe  .  .  .). 
However,:  E  verdade  que  nao  veio  a  tempo. 
E  claro  or  certo  que  fe'i  o  seu  dever. 
Parece  que  nao  deseja  ser  visto,  etc. 
§  232.     Defective  are  such  verbs  as  are  lacking  in 
some  forms.  Their  number  is  very  Hmited.  The  following 
are  used  only  in  those  forms  where  the  final  consonant 
of  the  radical  is  followed   by  i  (i.e.,  in  the  Inf.  pers. 
and  impers.,  in  the  P*  and  2°*^  pers.  pi.  pr.  ind.,  in  the 
pret.  imp.  and  perf.,  the  future   and    cond.,   the  parti- 
ciples): 
Adir  C^ma  heranga)  to  accept      emollir  to  soften,  mollify 

(aYi  inheritance)  empedernir  to  petrify,  harden 

hanir  to  banish  extorguir  to  extort 

brandir  to  brandish  /"oZ/eV  to  fail,  to  become  bankrupt 

carpii-  to  moan,  lament  ftorir  to  flourish 

colorir  to  colour  munir  to  furnish 

demolir  to  demolish  renhir  to  combat 

discemir  to  discern  retorqidr  to  retort 

(/escomec?ir-se  to  be  immoderate;      stibmergir  to    submerge,    and 
to  fall  into  a  passion  other  rare  verbs. 

The  missing  forms  of  these  verbs  are  periphrasti- 
cally  formed  (see  P.  II.,  L.  20)  — for  instance:  estou  de- 
molindo  I  demolish.  Espero  que  faga  par  hanir  esse 
pensamento  I  hope  you  will  banish  this  idea  from  your 
mind. 

§  233.  Precaver.  to  warn,  caution,  precaver-se  (de) 
to  beware  of,  fremir  to  tremble,  are  employed  only  in 
the  forms  where  the  final  consonant  of  the  radical  is 
followed  by  i  or  e:  precavia,  precavendo;  fremia, 
freme.,  frenieniy  etc. 

14* 


212  Lesson  31. 

§  234.  The  impersonal  verb  prazer  (and  aprascr) 
to  please,  to  be  pleased,  wants  the  dative  complement 
and  is  employed  only  in  the  following  forms: 


Pres.  Ind. 

Praz. 

Pres.  Conj. 

Praza. 

Imperf.  Ind. 

Prazia. 

Fret.  perf. 

Prouve, 

Imperf.  SubJ. 

Protwesse. 

Mais-que-perf.  Ind. 

,  Prouvera. 

Fut.  Ind. 

Prazer  a. 

Int.  Subj. 

Prouver. 

Participio. 

Prazido. 

Gerundio. 

Prazendo. 

Examples. 

0  rei  disse:  Praz(or  apraz)-me  conservar  o  meu  govern o. 
Aprazia-lhe  (or  aprouve-lhe)  tomar  essa  resolucdo.  Prazerd 
a  Deus  .  .  .  Prazendo  a  Deus  .  .  .  Se  a  Deus  pfrouver  .  .  . 
Prouve  a  el-rei  .  .  , 

This  verb,  wanting  a  complement  (Infinitive  or 
objective  clause  with  que  and  the  subjunctive)  is  not 
to  be  exchanged  for  agradar  or  gostar.  For  instance: 
0  espectdculo  agradoti  the  spectacle  pleased;  gostei  do 
quadro  I  was  pleased  with  the  picture.  Prouve  ao  des- 
tino  condud'lo  cd  (ot  que  o  condumsse  cd)  Destiny  was 
pleased  to  lead  him  here. 

§  235.  Grassar  to  rage,  prevail,  only  employed 
in  the  3^*^  persons-  grassa  a  fehre  amarella;  grassaram 
as  bexigas  (small-pox). 

§  236.     Jazer—see  §  210. 

§  237.  Pesar  to  afflict,  to  grieve,  is  also  used  only 
in  the  3^*^  persons  and  completed  by  the  dative  com- 
plement: Pesame  I  grieve,  I  am  sorry.  Pesou  a  famUia 
erdutada  ndo  ter  assistido  aos  ultimos  momentos  do  faUe- 
cido.  The  survivors  were  sorry  for  not  having  assisted 
at  the  last  moments  of  the  deceased. 

§  238.     Rehaver  to  get  back  is  used  only  in  the  ] 
forms    which    have    a    v:   rehavemos^   rehavia,    rehouve, 
rehavendo,  etc. 

Palarras. 
Sambrio  gloomy,  dark      I   a  tempestade        the  tempest 

carregado  loaded  |       [timp}f'Ui&9j 


Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs. 


218 


mUil  [sub'tii] 

subtil 

0  guarda-Uvros 

book-keeper 

0  retnoinho 

the  whirl(wiiid) 

[givardv- 

[rrdmu'ifpi] 

'  livrufj 

a  ramageni 

the  branches 

a  cobrmiga 

the  receiving 

[rry'mas^ij 

[ku'brvsuj 

a  Mtega 

sudden   shower 

0  pagamento 

the  payment 

['hatogy] 

[pvgTB  'mentuj 

(de  dgua) 

0  registo 

the  register, 

assmtador 

frightful 

[rrd'siftu] 

list 

[usuftv  'dor] 

as  entradas  de 

entrance-money 

emmudecer 

to  grow  dumb 

fundos 

[imu&d'ser] 

as  saidas  de 

the  sale 

eseonder 

to  hide 

fundos 

ftfkdn'derj 

de  uma  (hora) 

from  one 

Touco  ['rrokuj 

hoarse,   hollow 

em  diante 

0  clock 

deleitar 

to  delight 

immediatamente 

immediately 

[dalvi'tar] 

0  correio  geral 

the  central 

incendiar 

to  set  on  fire 

[ku'rryiux9- 

post-office 

[isendVar] 

WaiJ 

0  rebombo 

the  re-echoing, 

regist(r)ar 

to  register 

frr^'bombiij 

cracking 

^registfrjado* 

reg^istered 

tnfraquecer 

to  slacken 

mediante 

by  means  of; 

[ifrvkd' f^cr] 

\ 

on  payment 

crepitar 

to  crepitate 

of 

[krdpi'tar] 

a  taxa  [tafv] 

the  tax- 

0  raio  [rraiu] 

the  flash  of 

0  registo 

the  registration; 

lightning,  the 

frrd'siM 

register-office 

thunder-clap 

a  franquia 

the  postage 

0  continuo 

official  of  a 

[frv'kiv] 

f'kdn'tinwuj 

government 

a  carta-postal 

the   letter-card 

office 

0  sello  [seloj 

the  seal, 

0  ordenado 

the  salary 

postage-stamp 

ford9'naduJ 

tanto  .  . .  coma 

as    well  ...  as 

mensal 

monthly 

a  cinta  f'smtej 

the  wrapper 

[me'sai] 

0  impresso 

the  printing 

desembaragado 

agile 

[im'prssu] 

fdyztmbvrv- 

a  remessa  de 

the  remittance 

sa&uj 

amostras 

of  samples 

a  abonagdo 

security 

0  arranjo 

the  arrange- 

[Bbunv'svu] 

ment 

IJrocurar 

to  procure 

0  enderego 

the  address, 

[prukuWar] 

[tnd9  'resuj 

direction 

a  referenda 

reference 

0  destinatdrio 

the  receiver - 

[rrafd'resfiv] 

fdiftjnn- 

a  nogao 

the  notion 

'tartuj 

fnu'svuj 

0  consumo 

the  consump- 

a coUocagao 

collocation, 

[ko'sumuj 

tion 

[kuluka'svu] 
ocaixaf'kaifnj 

place 

0  bilhete 

the  picture 

cashier;  cash- 

iUustrado 

post-card 

book 

a  receita 

the  receipt, 

0  cargo  f'karguj  charge,  em- 

[rrd'sieitv] 

income 

ployment 

a  resveito  de 

with  respect  to 

214 


Lesson  31. 


pretender 
0  competidor 

fkdmp9ti'd'orJ 
identico 

[i  'dentikv] 
preencher 

[priinferj 
pleno  [plenu] 
0  superior 

fsupri  'or] 
deixar-se  ficar 
veneer  [ve'serj 
aproceitar  > 


to  pretend 
competitor 

identical 

to  accomplish 

full 

the  superior 

to  remain 
to  earn 
to  profit 


0  vencimento 


the  earnings, 

salary 
the  instruction 


a  itutrucQoo 

[iftru'svu] 
polyteclmico         polytechnical 

[poli'tekniku] 
mediocre  mediocre 

[md  '&iukrd] 


a  mecamca 
[mo'kvnihv] 

0  acordo 
[v  'kor&uj 


mechanica 
the  agreement. 


87,  Exercicio. 

Mau  tempo. 

0  dia  amanhece  sombrio.  Parece  que  o  tempo  se  poe  de 
chuva.  Ja  chovisca,  e  nao  admirava  que  nevasse,  pois  esta 
muito  frio.  Seria  lastima  que  caisse  neve  ou  que  granizasse, 
por  que  faria  muito  estrago  nas  arvores  fructiferas  que  estao 
em  flor  e  que  perdem  muito  quando  gela  ou  venta.  Sopra  um_ 
vento  gelido.  Nuvens  carregadas  escurecem  os  ares.  E  evi* 
dente  que  teremos  tempestade.  E  preciso  que  fechfimos  as' 
janellas,  para  que  a  chuva  nao  possa  entrar.  Veja,  come  o. 
p6  subtil  sobe  em  remoinhos  e  como  o  vento  sacod6  a  ramdgem. 
Jd  caem  grandes  bategas  de  dgua.  Graniza  ate.  Os  passaros, 
precavidos  pela  escuridao  assustadora,  emmudeceram  e  escon- 
deram-se  fremindo  debaixo  das  folhas  que  fremem  como  elles. 
Elles  que  a  esta  hora  costamam  voar  e  cantar  alegremente, 
nao  Ihes  apraz  deleitar-nos  com  o  seu  canto.  Relampeja.  Acs 
raios  segue-se-lhes  o  rouco  travao.  Praza  a  Deus  que  nao  nos 
incendeiem  a  casa.  Agora  os  terriveis  rebombos  enfraquecem. 
Extinguem-se  os  raios  crepitantes  e  ja  nao  troveja.  0  astro 
de  dia  reapparece  e  sorri  de  novo.  Faz  sol  e  o  tempo  aclara. 
Vejamos  se  ha  novidade.  Ha  muito  que  nSo  houve  tempo  tao 
mau,  e  haverd  que  fazer.  E  possivel  que  a  graniza  tenha  cau- 
sado  algum  estrago.     Deus  queira  que  nao  seja  assim! 

88.  Leitura. 
Annundos. 

1.  Empregado  precisa-se  para  continuo ;  ordenado  reis 
10000  mensaes  e  casa.  Prefere-se  homem  novo  e  desembara- 
9ado  que  d6  abona^oes.  Carta  escripta  pelo  proprio  a  agencia. 
dando  todas  as  informa^oes  e  onde  se  p5de  procurar. 

2.  Empregado  offerece-se  com  boa  calligraphia  e  perfeito 
conhecimento  de  correspondfincia  em  portuguGs  e  allemao.  Da 


Impersonal  and  Defective  Verbs.  215 

referSncias  de  1*  ordem.     Qaem  pretender  dirija-se  ao  caixeiro 
da  casa  X. 

3.  Commerciante  estrangeiro,  novo,  offerece-se  para  casa 
commercial  de  exporta^ao.  Escreve  e.  fala  as  linguas  allema, 
francesa  e  inglesa  e  tern  boas  noQoes  das  linguas  portuguesa 
e  italiana.  Prefere  colloca9ao  como  caixa  ou  guarda-livros, 
tendo  na  sua  posi9ao  actual  a  seu  cargo  cobran^as  e  pagamen- 
tos,  assim  como  o  registo  das  entradas  e  saidas  de  fundos.  Para 
tratar,  das  6  em  diante,  Rua  NN. 

89.  Thema. 

Correio. 

Francis,  .you  must  at  once  take  this  letter  to  the  post. 
Read  here:  "Registered I"  You  will  have  it  registered  on  pay- 
ment of  twopence.  Here  are  5  shillings :  pay  the  registration 
and  the  postage  and  bring  me  ten  stamps  at  (a)  a  penny 
and  as  many  at  a  halfpenny  and  twopence.  For  the  rest  bring 
letter-cards.  It  is  most  convenient  to  employ  these  latter  for 
short  communications,  and  it  is  well  to  be  provided  with 
them. 

Actually  I  am  altogether  out  of  postage-stamps.  And 
yet  I  need  them  every  day  for  letters  for  the  inland  post  as 
Well  as  for  foreign  countries  (o  estrangeiro),  for  wrappers  for 
book-post,  for  remittances  of  samples,  etc.  Also  the  post-card 
is  most  convenient,  especially  since  this  new  arrangement 
has  been  made  that  the  consigner  may  use  half  of  the 
front  side  for  written  communications.  But  it  is  indispensable 
that  you  leave  free  the  room  destined  to  the  address  of  the 
receiver.  With  this  innovation  the  consumption  of  the  picture 
post-card  will  be  further  increased,  as  well  as  the  receipts  of 
the  Post  Office. 

Conversa^ao. 

Solicitagao  de  emprego. 

A.  Venho  a  respeito  d'um  emprSgo  vago  que  me  consta 
haver  n'esta  casa  commercial  e  de  que  se  deu  parte 
por  annuncios. 

B.  E  0  Senhor  quem  pretende  ser  competidor  de  F.? 

A.  Sou,  sim,  senbor.  Vim  apresentar-me  e  pedir  o 
interesse  de  V^  Ex  a. 

B.  Como  se  chama  o  senhor? 

A.  Chamo-me  Ricardo  de  Sousa  Almeida,  criado  de 
V^  Ex^  (your  humble  servant).^ 

^  This  or  something  identical  (seu  criado,  nm  seu  criado)  is 
generally  added  to  a  self-introduction. 


216  Lesson  32. 

B.  Fa^a  favor  de  se  assentar,  sr.  Almeida!  E  natural 
que  ja  tenha  tido  cdlloca^ao  identica  on  parecida,  nao 
e  verdadeV 

A.  Ja,  sim,  senhor;  vae  em  oito  annos  que  estou  em- 
pregado  na  casa  d'exporta^ao  de  Fulano'  onde  tenho 
tido  a  meu  cargo  as  cobran9as  e  os  pagamentos,  e 
posso  dizer  que  tenho  preenchido  o  meu  logar  com 
plena  satisfac^ao  dos  meus  superiores. 

B.  E  porque  nao  se  deixa  la  ficar?  Que  e  que  o 
determina  a  mudar? 

A.  Tenho  pouco  ordenado.  E  indispensavel  que  vencja 
mais. 

B.  E  quaes  sao  os  tltulos  que  Ihe  dao  direito  a  um 
vencimento  mais  elevado? 

A.  Falo  e  escrevo  correctamente  tres  linguas,  conheci- 
mentos  esses  que  nao  me  aproveitam  na  minha 
posi^ao  actual,  tao  pouco  com©  uma  instruc(;ao  poly- 
technica  e  um  talento,  mais  que  mediocre,  para  a 
mecanica. 

B.  Muito  bem!  Nao  havera  duvida  que  chegu^mos  a 
um  accordo. 


Thirty-second  Lesson.    Licao  trigesima 
segunda, 

Verbs  with  a  Double  Participle. 

^  §  239.  There  are  a  certain  number  of  verbs  which, 
besides  their  regular  participle,  form  an  irregular  one. 
The  former  is  used  for  the  active  voice,  so  it  has  the 
function  of  a  verb;  while  the  latter  is  employed  in  the 
passive  voice  and  as  an  adjective.  In  some  of  these 
verbs  one  and  the  other  participle  are  employed  in- 
differently for  the  active  and  passive  voices. 

N.B. — We  place  before  the  forms  an  a  (=  aciioo) 
or  Si  p  (=  passivo),  adding  to  the  2°^^  form— wherever 
this  includes  an  adjective  meaning  different  from  that 
of  the  participle— the  EngUsh  adjective.  Those  forms 
marked  *  occur  only  as  adjectives;  those  marked  f  are 
unusual  or  incorrect,  consequently  to  be  avoided. 

*  Fulano  (and  in  2nd  place  Sicrano)  is  employed  for  some 
name  not  expressed  (our  "What's  his  name?")- 


Verbs  \vith  a  Double  Participle. 

The  most  important  of  these  verbs  are 
(1)  Of  the  First  Conjugation. 


217 


Ac(c)eitar  to  accept     (ci,p)  ac(c)eitado 
^sse«i5ar  to  place;  to    (a./p^.)  assentado 
register 


Descalga?'  to  pull  off 

(shoes,  etc.) 
Despertar  to  awake 


(p.)  ac(c)eito 
(p.)  assente   sitt- 
ing;  firm, 
solid 
(p.)  descalgado     (ot.^p.)  descalgo 

barefooted 


(p.)  despet'tado 


Dispersar      to      dis-    (a., p.)  dispersado 

perse,  scatter 
Entregar  to  deliver,    (a.^p.)  entregado 

hand 
JEJnxugar  to  dry  (<^'yP)  enxugado 

Escusar    to    excuse,     (a.,  p.)  escusado 

to  justify;    to 

exempt  (see  escon- 

der) 
Expressar  to  express     (a., p.)  expressado 

(see  also  exprimir) 


Expulsar  to  expel  (see 

also  expellir) 
Fartar  to  satiate 


Findar  to  finish 


(a.)  expulsado 
(a.)  fartado 

(a., p.)  -findado 

Fixar  to  fix  (d-^P-)  fixado 

Ganhar  to  earn,  gain  (a.,  p.)  ganhado 
Gastar  to  expense,  (a.)  gastado 

use,  consume 

Ignorar  to  ignore  (c^-ypO  ignorado 


Inquietar  to  disquiet,     (a., p.)  inquietado 

trouble 
Isentar  to  exempt,  to         (a,)  isentado 

free 


Juntar  to  join 


(a.,  p.)  juntado 


(p.)  desperto 

sprightly; 
intelligent 

(p.)  disperso 

(p.)  entregue 

(p.)  enxuto  dry 
(p.)  escwso secret; 
unnecessa- 
ry 

(p.)  expresso 
express; 
explicit 

(p.)  expidso 

(p.)  farto 

abundant ; 
satisfied ; 
weary 
(p.)  findo  last, 

past 
(p.)  fixo 
(a., p.)  ganho 
(a.,  p.)  gasto 

(p.)  ignoto 

unknown, 
obscure 
(*)  iyiquieto 
uneasy 

(p)  ts^^o exempt 
or  free  (by 
privilege) 
(a., p.)  junto 

together 


218 


Lesson  32. 


Limpar  to  clean 
Manifestar  to  mani- 
fest 

Matar  to  kill 

(see  also  morrer) 
Misturar  to  mix 

Occultar  to  hide 

Pagar  to  pay 

Quietar^  to  quiet, 
calm 

Salvar  to  save 

Sepultar  to  bury 

Soltar  to  untie,  re- 
lease 

Sujeitar  to  subject, 
subdue 

Suspeitar  to  suspect 

Vagar  to  be  vacant  or 
void;  to  stroll  about 


(a.)  limpado 
(a.,  p.)  manifestado 


(a.)  matado 

(a.fp.)  misturado 

(a.)  occultado 
(a.)  pagado 
(a.)  quietado 

(a., p.)  salvado 
(a., p.)  sepultado 
(a.)  soltado 

(a., p.)  sujeitado 

(a., p.)  suspeitado 

(a.)  vagado 


(a., p.)  limpo  clean 
O  manifesto 
manifest, 
apparent 

(a., p.)  morto  dead 

(*)  misto  or 
mixto 
(p.)  occulto 
(a.,p.)  pago 

(*)  quieto  quiet, 
calm 
(a., p.)  salvo  safe, 
(p.)       unhurt 
(p.)  solto  loose; 

free 
(p.)  sujeito 

(p.)  suspeito 

suspicious 

(*)  vago  vacant, 

void;  vague. 


(2)  Of  the  Second  Conjugation. 

Absolver  to  absolve       (a-jP')  ahsolvido  (p.)  ahsolto 

(a.,  p.)  dbsorvido 

(a., p.)  accendido 

(a.)  corrompido 

(a.)  elegido 


Ahsoroer  to  absorb 
Accender  to  light 
Corromper  to  corrupt 
Eleger  to  elect 


Esconder  to  hidt 

(see  also  escusar) 
Escrever  to  write 
Este?ider  to  extend 


(a.)  escondido 

(a.)  escrevidof 
(a., p.)  estendido 


(p.)  absorto 
(p.)  acceso 
(p.)  corrupto 
(a., p.)  eleito  elect, 
chosen 
(p.)  escuso 


Incorrer  to  incur  (a.)  incorrido 

Involver  to  involve  (a.)  involvido 

Morrer  to  die  (a.)  morrido 

(see  also  matar) 
Prender  to  seize,    to         (a.)  prendido 

catch,  to  arrest 

Pretender  to  pretend  (a.,p.)  pretendido 

Resolver  to  resolve  (a^-yp.)  resolvido 


(a.fP.)  escripto 
(*)  extenso  ex- 
tensive 
(p.)  incurso 
(p.)  involto 
(a., p.)  morto  dead 

(p.)  preso   fast, 
imprisoned 

(p.)  pretenso 

(p.)  resoluto 

resolute 


*  More  usually:  aquietar,  which  has  the  only  participle 
aquietado.  In  quietar  as  well  as  in  vagar  only  the  irregular  par- 
ticiple is  used  and  in  its  adjective  meaning. 


Verbs  with  a  Double  Participle. 


21^ 


Romper  to  break,  tear 
Suiyre(h)ender  to  sur 

prise 
Suspender  to  suspend 


(a.)  rompido 
(a., p.)  surpre(h)en- 
dido 
(a.)  suspendido 


(p.)  roto  ragged 
surpreso 


(p.)  suspenso 

suspense 
Torcer  to  twist  (<^-^P')  torcido  (p.)  ^or^o  crooked, 

tortuous. 
(3)  Of  the  Third  Coujugation. 


Ahrir  to  open 
Affiigir     to     afflict, 

grieve 
Gobrir  to  cover 
Concluir  to  conclude 
Contrahir  to  contract 
Distinguir     to     dis- 
tinguish 
Erigir  to  erect 
Espargir  to  spread 
Expellir  to  expel 

(see  also  expulsar) 
Exprimir  to  express 
(see  also  expressar) 


(a.)  abridof 
(a.)  affiigido 

(a.)  cobridof 
(a., p.)  concluido 
(a., p.)  contrahido 

(a.)  distingtiido 

(a., p.)  erigido 
(a.)  espargido 
(a.)  expellido 

(a)  exprimido 


Lxtlriguir     to 

tinguish 
Extrahir  to  extract 
Frigir  to  fry 
Imprimir  to  print 
Incluir  to  include 
Inserir  to  insert 
Opprimir  to  oppress 

afflict  • 
Instruir  to  instruct 
Possuir  to  possess 
Beprimir  to  repress 
Surgir  to  anchor 
Tingir  to  dye 


ex-        ((i-,P')  extinguido 


(a. /p.)  extrahido 
(a.)  frigido 

\a.,p.)  imprimidOy 

(a., p.)  incluido 
(a.)  inserido 

(a.,  p.)  opprimido 

(a., p.)  instruido 

(a., p.)  possuido 

(a.yp.)  reprimido 

(a.)  surgido 

(a.)  tingido 

Palavras. 


(a.  J  p.)  dberto  open 
(p.)  afflict 0  sorry 

(a., p.)  cdberto 
(p  )  concluso 
(p.)  contracto 
(p.)  distincto 

distinct 
(p.)  erecto  erect 
(p.)  esparso 
(p.)  expulso 

(p.)  expresso 
express, 
explicit 
(p.)  extincto 

extinct 
(p.)  extracto 
(a.,p')  frito 
(a.,  p.)  impresso 

(p.)  incluso 
(a.^p.)  inserto 
(p.)  oppresso 

(p.)  instructof 
O  possesso 
(p.)  represso 
(p.)  surto 
(p.)  Unto. 


Aviuvafvt'uvvJ  the  widow  \    o  chefe  [fefd]      the  chief; head; 

principal 
0  jurado  the  juryman 

por  conseguinte   consequently 
0  recem-chegado  the  newcomer 

[rrdsvtfi  'ga&uj 
a  apparencia       the  appearance 
0  ingrediente        the  ingredient 
[%grd&!'  'entd] 


OS  pesames 

['peznmf/J 
o  assento 
0  prazo 

0  conciirso 

a  roupa  f'rropvj  the  linen, 
clothes 


the  condolence 

the  s^at 
the  term,  ap- 
pointed day 
the  competition 


220 

Lesson  32. 

a  droga  ['droiju] 

the  drug 

a  circular 

the  circular 

a  cocgao 

the  coction 

por-se 

to  set 

fkok'svu] 

a  dnimo 

the  mind 

0  deputado 

the  deputy 

f'vnimuj 

0  liberal 

the  liberal 

a  oppressao 

the  oppression 

[im'raij 

emquanto 

while 

a  offerta 

the  offer 

continuar 

to  continue 

apresentar 

to  present 

0  par  do  sol 

the  setting    of 

cor  de  laranja 

orange- 
coloured 

the)  sun. 

90.  Exercicio. 

A  viuva  do  sr.  N.  tern  ac(c)eitado  todas  as  pessoas  que 
foram  dar-lhe  os  pfizames  pelo  fallecimento  do  marido;  foram 
todas  ac(c)eitas.  Ea  tinha-me  assentado  num  assento  baixo  e  la 
fiquei  assentada.  Este  mure  estd  bem  assente.  Na  semana  finda 
tem-se  findado  (better:  findou-se)  o  prazo  fixo  para  o  concurso 
do  empregovago.  Assim  que  tiver  entregado  a  carta,  ella  estara 
entregue.  0  sol  tern  enxugado  bem  a  roupa;  agora  ella  ja  estd 
enxuta.  0  chefe  tinha  expressado  aos  empregados  a  sua  vontade 
expressa.  Tambem  tinha  fixado  o  ordenado  de  todos  e  deter- 
minado  os  dias  fixos  em  que  seria  pago.  0  reu  que  foi  suspeito  e 
preao,  como  inv6lto  no  crime,  ficou  absolvido;  absolveram-no  os 
jurados;  ja  esta  solto  e  salvo.  A  mae  d'elle,  a  quern  a  desgraQa  do 
filho  tinha  affligido  muito,  ja  nSo  esta  afflicta,  mas  quieta. 
0  governo  tinha  suspendido  as  garantias  que  por  conseguinte 
estavam  suspensas.  E  de  admirar  que  nao  tivessem  distin- 
guido  OS  reoem-ehegados,  pois  teem  apparencia  muito  distincta. 
0  rapaz,  com  medo  manifesto,  tinha-se  escondido  n'um  logar 
muito  escuso.  Para  fazer  esta  droga  tinhamos  misturado  varios 
ingredientes  bem  limpos  que,  depois  de  bem  mistos,  foram 
sujeitQS  a  uma  cocgao  cuidadosa.  Viemos  num  comb<5io  misto. 
Os  olhos  ja  muito    abertos,   tinham-se-lhe  abrida  mais   ainda. 


91.  Thema. 

Who  has  been  elected  deputy?  A  Liberal  has  been 
chosen.  Had  you  already  resolved  to  insert  an  advertisement 
on  account  of  the  vacant  place?  Yes,  it  has  been  already 
inserted,  and  I  am  resolved  to  accept  the  place  if  it  is  offered 
to  me,  for  it  is  exempt  from  taxes.  Enclosed  I  present  you  an 
open  letter  of  Mr.  N.  N.,  which  I  opened  at  his  express  desire. 
In  a  printed  circular  he  communicates  that,  his  partner 
having  died  last  month,  the  old  firm  is  extinct,  but  that  he 
has  resolved  to  continue  the  old  business  under  a  new  name. 
See  how  beautifully  the  sun  has  dyed  the  clouds!  Some 
are  rose,  others  are  yellow,  those  others  orange- coloured 
or  fire-coloured.     The  whole  sky  on  (por)  which  they  are  dis- 


i 


The  Adverbs.  221 

persed  is  covered  by  them.  Also  the  masts  of  the  ships 
anchored  in  the  harbour  are  gilded  by  the  setting  sun.  Calm 
your  minds!  Those  who  were  oppressed  are  safe  and  free 
from  oppression,  while  the  oppressors  have  been  expelled. 


Thirty-third  Lesson.    Licjao  trigesima 
terceira. 

The  Adverbs.     Ad/verhios  fa&'verbmfj. 

§  240.  The  adverbs  express  the  circumstances  in 
which  an  action,  a  quality,  or  a  state  has  occurred,  and 
so  determine  either  a  verb,  an  adjective,  or  another 
adverb.  We  distinguish:  1.  original  adverbs;  2.  derived 
adverbs ;  3.  those  which  in  their  form  are  equal  to  the 
adjective;  4.  adverbial  expressions. 

§  241.     The  original  adverbs  are  divided  into: 

1.  Interrogative  and  Relative 

(interrogativos  e  relativos). 

These  generally  are  the  same  when  relating  to  place 

or  time:  onde  (d'onde,  aonde)^  quando.   Onde  estd?  Aonde 

vae?     jyonde  vem?     No  jar  dim,  onde  estive,  aonde  fui, 

d^onde  vim  .  .  .     Quando  veto?     No  dia  quando  veto  .  .  . 

2.  Adverbs  of  Place  (de  logar). 

These   answer  to  the-  questions    "where,   whither, 
whence?"  onde?  d'onde?  aonde?  por  onde?: 
aqui,  cd  here  ahaixo,  debaixo  down,  below 

aJii,  cdi,  Id,  acold  there  aquem  on  this  side 

atrds,  detrds  behind  alem  on  the  other  side 

adiante,  deante  before_,  in  front ;      algures  anywhere 
to  the  front  nenhures  nowhere 

dentro  within;  inside  perto  \ 

fdra  outside  cerca  ]  ^^^ 

acima  \  above  longe  far 

arrtba  )     ^'  emhora  away. 

3.  Adverbs  of  Time  (de  tempo). 

These  answer  to  the  question  "when?"  quando? 
Hoje  to-day  antehontein    the     day    before 

hontem  yesterday  yesterday 


222 

Lesson  33. 

dmanha  to-morrow 

tarde  late 

sempre  always,  ever 

entdo  then 

wmca,  jamais  never 
dttpois  afterwards 
outr^ora  formerly 
primeiro  before,  first 
antes  sooner,  before 

agdra,  6ra  now 

logo  presently,  directly 

jd  already,  now,  immediately 

ainda  still 

amiudo,  amiude  often. 

cedo  soon 

4.  Adverbs  of  Manner  (de  maneira). 

These  answer  to  the  question  "how?"  como? 

Bern  well 

antes  rather 

mal  badly 
melhor  better 

sequer  at  least 
assim  so,  thus 

peor  worse 

assim  assim  so  so. 

aparte  separately 

6.  Adverbs  of 

Quantity  (de  quantidade). 

These  answer  to  the  question  "how  much?"  quarvto? 

qttdo? 

Too,  tanto  so,  so  (or  as)  much 

muito  much,  very 

(o)  mats  more,  most 

pouco  little 

(o)  menos  less,  least 

demais,  detnasiado  too  (much) 

hastante  \  i 

/  enough 
assaz       ]  ° 


quasi  almost,  nearly 

um  hocado  de  a  little,  some- 
what 

apenas  hardly,  scarcely 

quanto  mats  .  .  .  tanto  niais 
the  more  .  .  .  the  more 

so,  sdmente  only 

nada  nothing. 


6.  Adverbs  of  Affirmation  (affirmattvos),  of  Negation 

(negativosX  and  of  Doubt  (de  duvida). 


Sim  yes 

certamente  certainly,  to  be  sure 

ati  even 

ainda  moreover 

alias  else,  moreover 

realmente  really,  indeed 

7ido  no,  not,  neither 

nem  not  even;  nor;  neither 


no  more 


nada  not  at  all 

jd  ndo 

ndo 

nunca  never,  ever 

acaso  perhaps 


i  ndo  \ 
do  .  .  .  jd  ) 
\unca  never 
caso  perhaj 


§  242.  Derived  Adverbs. 

These  adverbs  are  formed  by  adding  the  S3'llable 
'tnente  to  the  feminine  form  of  the  attributive  adjective 
(in  the  positive  degree  as  well  as  in  that  of  the  absolute 
superlative)  or  to  that  of  the  past  participle  of  the  pas- 


The  Adverbs.  223 

sive  voice,  employed  as  an  adjective :  justamente  justly, 
exactly,  at  that  very  moment;  devidamente  duly;  assi- 
gnaladamente  remarkably;  riquissimamente  most  richly, 
etc.  In  some  adjectives  ending  in  -es  (formerly  having 
been  uniform),  the  adverb  is  composed  with  the  mascu- 
line form:  portuguesmente  in  a  Portuguese  manner. 

N.B.— It  is  understood  that  uniform  adjectives  add  the 
ending  -mente  to  their  form  common  to  both  genders:  feliz- 
mente  happily. 

§  243.  Of  two  or  more  adverbs  following  one 
another,  only  the  last  adds  the  ending  -mente,  while 
the  preceding  take  only  the  feminine  forn? :  darei  franca^ 
sincera  e  lealmente  o  men  voto.  I  shall  give  my  vote 
frankly,  sincerely,  and  truly. 

§  244.  The  derived  adverb  is  as  subject  to  com- 
parison as  the  adjective,  being  governed  by  the  same 
rules^  Fiquei  ainda  mais  agradavelmente  surpre(h)endido. 
I  was  still  more  agreably  surprised. 

§  245.  As  already  stated,  the  Portuguese  prefer, 
wherever  possible,  the  simple  form  to  the  complicated. 
They  like  to  employ  the  adjective  instead  of  the  derived 
adverb  or  the  adverbial  locution.  The  adjective  so 
employed  is  put  with  or  without  a  preposition  imme- 
diately behind  the  verb  and  is  called: 

Idjectivo  apposto  ou  circumstancial. 
Examples. 

0  tempo  passa  rdpido   (instead   of  'com   rapidez   or  ra- 

pidamente). 
0  povo  escuta  dvido  (instead  of  com  avidez  or  avidamente). 
•  0  pulso   hatia   desordenado   (instead  of  em  desordem  or 

desordenadamente) . 
Saltou  de  contente  (instead  of  de  contentamento). 
Quando  se  respira  fundo,  o   ar  enche   completamente  os 

pulmdes. 
When  you  breathe  deeply,  the  air  completely  fills   the 

lungs. 

In  some  locutions  the  use  of  the  adjective  instead 
of  the  adverb  is  obligatory;— e.g.: 

Falar  alto,,  haixo  to  speak  loud,  low 
voar  alto  (baixo)  to  fly  high,  deep 


224  Lesson  33. 

andar  direito   to    go   upright    or    straight    on;    to    act 

honestly 
ir  direito  a  to  go  straight  on 
ir  seguro  to  go  or  be  safe 
ir  or  andar  ligeiro  to  go  quickly 
vender  caro  to  sell  dear 
comprar  barato  to  buy  cheap 
levar  caro  to  charge  (too)  much 
custar  caro  to  be  expensive. 

§  246.     BemarJcs  to  §  241. 

1.  The  comparative  of  hem  is  mdhor  or  mais  hem; 
the  one  of  mat  is  peor  or  mais  mdl.  The  latter  form 
is  used  before  a  participle:  mais  hem  feito;  men^s  mal 
peitsado. 

2.  After  ai^tes  (=  rather)  "than"  can  be  ren- 
dered by  que  or  do  que:  Antes  quero  isto  (do)  que 
aquillo. 

3.  Certain  adverbs  correspond,  with  respect  to  their 
origin  or  meaning,  to  certain  pronouns — e.g.: 

aqui,  cd        corresponding  to  the  demonstrative  este 
ahi  »  »     »  •»  esse 

alli,ld,  acold  »  »     »  »  aquelle. 

Such  adverbs  are  therefore  denominated  adverhios 
pronominaes  and  divided  into: 

(a)  demonstrativos :  aqui^  ahi,  ally  acold,  entdo,  t&o, 
tanto; 

(b)  relativos:  onde,  d'onde; 

(c)  interrogativos:  onde?  quando?  com>o?  quao? 
quanto? 

(d)  indefinidos:  algures,  nenhures. 

4.  Too  and  qu^o  correspond  to  tanto  and  quanto 
(see  Pronouns),  with  the  difference  that  the  former 
determine  adjectives  and  other  adverbs,  while  the  latter 
only  modify  verbs. 

N.B. — Instead  of  quao  you  may  in  most  cases 
put  que. 

Falmi  tdo  alto  que  .  .  .  Falou  tanto  que  .  .  .  Era  tdo  rico 

que  .  .  . 
Era  tdo  amante  da  verdade  que  nem  zombafido  (not  even 
in  joke)  mentia. 


The  Adverbs. 


225 


Nao  faz  ideia  qiiao  (or  que)  hella  e  a  vista  e  quao  (or  qtie) 
sagazmente  aproveitada!  (and  how  cleverly  taken  ad- 
vantage of). 
Elle  hem  sabia  quanto  eu  o  estimava. 
Beside   the  true  adverbs,  there  are   a  great   many 
adverbial  locutions  (locugoes  adverbiaes),  formed   out  of 
several  words  one  of  which  generally  is  a  preposition — e.g. : 


otherwise 


A  custo  hardly,  with  diffi- 
culty 

de  cofitinuo  continually 

po7'  Ventura  happily,  by  chance 

d  moo  (de)  at  hand 

por  dentro  inwardly 

jpor  fora  inwardly 

do  mesmo  mddo  in  the  same 
way 

de  outro  mddo 

de  outra  fdrma 

de  certo,  por  certo  certainly 

de  mddo  algum  by  no  means 

ao  cei'to  exactly 

d  uma  altogether 

n'um  pronto  in  an  instant 

por  alto  superficially 

de  alto  a  haixo  from  top  to 
toe 

Jonge  d'isso  by  far 

de  contente  \      .,.    . 

deaUgvia    }  ^'t'' W 


vainly 


0  pessego  the  peach 

ipes9guj 

0  lavrador  the  country- 

[Ivvrv'&or]  man 

extasiar-se  to  be  enchanted 

ftftJi  'ziarsd]  with 

partir-se  to  part  with 

guardar  to  guard 

[givsr'darj 

o  carogo  the  stone 

[kv  'rosuj 

tocar  (dig.  c.)  a  to  fall  to  one's 

dlguem  share 

acudir  to  interrupt 

guloso  [gu'lozu]  greedy 

apanhar  to  snatch  up 

[vps'parj 
Portuguese  Couversation-Grammar 


de  fdme  with  hunger 

de  cor  by  heart 

de  halde  \ 

em  vao     f 

de  vagar  slowly 

por  acaso  by  chance 

de  propdsito  intentionally,  on 

purpose 
a  propdsito  de  with  regard  to 
a  saber  namely 
as  avessas  oppositely 
de  bom  grado  willingly 
de  mdo  grado  unwillingly 
mdo  grado    meic    against   my 

wish 
d  tda  at  random 
por  acaso  by  chance 
alem  d'isso  moreover 
ao  de  leve  slightly 
a  pressa,    de    fugida  hastily, 

hurridly 
em  mSdia  on  an  average. 
Palavras. 

menear  a  cahega  to  shake   one's 

head 
engenkoso  ingenious 

[%$i'f)0zu] 
0  cdlculo  the  calculation 

f'kaikuluj 
enleiado  bashful 

[llv}  'a&uj 
entemecido  touched 

[ttdrn9'si&u] 
ethereo  [i'tertuj  ethereal 
subsistir  to  subsist 

[subsdf'tir] 
0  assento 

[v  'sentuj 
merecer 

[mdr^  'ser] 


t^e  seat 

to  merit, 
worth 

15 


be 


226. 


Lesson  33. 


0  mano  f'mynuj 
o  remedio 

[rrymeMuJ 
a  memoria 

[md'moriB] 
a  magna 

encurtar 

[ikur'tar] 
a  chaga  ['JaQv] 
a  desfeita 

[dlffvitv] 
0  osculo 

f'ofkuluj 
traidor 

[trai'dor] 


brother 
the  remedy 

the  memory 

the  grief,  pang 

to  shorten 

the  wound 
the  offence 

the  kiss 

treacherous 


0  atlas  [' atlej] 
provar 

fpru'varj 
talhar  [tn  fiar] 
escuro 
desbotar 

fdi^bu'tarj 
embasbacar 

fibv^bv  'karj. 
0  solsticio 

[soif'tisyu] 
revezar-ae         ] 

[rrdV9'zar8d]\ 
alternar-se 

[oHsr'narsd] 


the  atlas 

to  taste;  to  try 

on 
to  cut 
dark 
to  discolour, 

fade 
to  be  quite 

taken   aback 
the  solstice 

to  relieve  one 
another,    to 
do  ...  by 
turns. 


87.  Exercicio. 


Os  Pessegos. 
Um  lavrador  que  tinha  quatro  filhos  trouxe-lhes  um  dia 
cinco  pessegos  magnificos.  Os  pequenos,  que  nunca  tinham  visto 
semelhantes  fructos,  extasiaram-se  bastante  deante  das  suas  c6res 
e  da  fina  pennugem  que  os  cobria.  A^  noite  o  pae  perguntoa- 
Ihes:  —  Entdo  comestes  os  pfissegos? 

—  Eu  comi,  Sim,  senhor  —  disse  o  mats  velho.  —  Qtie 
bom  que  era!  Gaardei  cd  o  card^o.  e  hei-de  planta-lo  logo, 
para  depots  nascer  uma  arvore. 

—  Fizeste  bem!  —  respondeu  o  pae  satisfeito. 

—  Eu  —  disse  o  mais  novo,  saltando  de  corUente  —  o 
meu  p^ssego  comi-o  logo;  e  a  mae  ainda  me  deu  metade  do 
que  Ihe  tocou  a  ella.     Era  doce  como  mel! 

—  Ah!  —  acudin  o  pae,  censurando-o  brandamente  — 
foste  um  bocadinho  guloso,  mas  na  tua  edada  ndo  admira. 
Espero  sinceramente  que,  quando  f6res  homem,  te  has-de  corrigii*. 

—  Pois  eu  cd  —  disse  o  terceiro  —  apanhei  jprow^awen^e 
o  earo^o  que  o  meu  irmSo  deitou  fora,  quebrei-o  a  custo  e 
comi  o  que  estava  dentro,  que  era  como  uma  noz.  Vendi  o 
meu  pfissego,  e  com  o  dinheiro  hei  de  comprar  coisas  mais  tarde 
quando  for  a  cidade.     0  pae  nieneou  a  cabe9a,  descontente: 

—  Pensaste  engenhosamente,  mas  eu  preferia  menos  cal- 
culo  e  que  tivesses  obrado  de  outro  modo.  Dize-me  cd  tu, 
Eduardo,  acaso  provaste  o  teu  p6ssego? 

—  Eu,  meu  pae,  —  respondeu  enleiado  o  pequeno,  - 
levei-o  a  casa  do  visinho  onde  o  Jorge,  coitado,  esta  com  a 
febre.  Deixei-lh'o  ein  cima  da  cama  e  vim-me  embdra  imme- 
diatamente. 


*  State  to  which  class  of  adverbs 
italics  in  the  Exercicio  87. 


belong   those  printed   in 


The  AdverbB.  227 

—  Ora  hem  —  perguntou  o  pae  —  qual  de  v<5s  ^  que 
empregou  mdhor  o  pessfigo? 

—  Foi  o  mano  EJduardo!  disseram  os  tres  pequenos  d 
uma  e  num  pronto.  Esse,  entretanto,  ndo  dizia  palavra,  e  a 
mae  abraQou-o  enternecida.  (After  Guerra  Junqueiro.) 

88.  Leitura. 
Soneto, 
Alma  minha  gentil,  que  te  partiste 
Tao  cedo  d'esta  vida  descontente, 
Eepousa  la  no  ceo  etemamente, 
E  viva  eu  ca  na  terra  sempre  triste. 

Se  la  no  assento  etbereo,  onde  subsiste, 
Memoria  d'esta  vida  se  consente, 
Nao  te  esq«e(?as  d'aquelle  amor  ardente, 
Que  ja  nos  olhos  mens  tSo  puro  yiste. 

E  se  vires  que  pode  merecer-te 
Alguma  coisa  a  d6r  que  me  ficou 
Da  magua,  sem  remedio,  de  perder-te, 

Roga  a  Deng  que  teijs  annos  encurtou, 

Que  tao  cedo  de  ca  me  leve  a  vfir-te, 

Quao  cedo  de  meus  olhos  te  levou.  (Camoes.) 

Antes  a  pobreza  honrada 
Do  que  a  riqueza  roubada. 

Antes  a  chaga  feita  Que  a  desfeita 

Por  amor,  De  um  osculo  traidor. 

(Joao  de  Deus.) 
8f>.  Thema. 

Where  can  my  atlas  be?  Have  you  perhaps  seen  it? 
No,  I  have  not;  if  you  had  duly  laid  it  on  its  place,  you 
would  find  it  there.  But  look,  there  it  is!  Not  there  where  you 
look  for  it,  but  there,  near  the  window.  —  When  did  the 
tailor  bring  my  coat?  Yesterday  afternoon  about  four  o'clock. 
He  went  hurriedly  away,  saying  that  he  would  come  here  to-day 
or  to-morrow,  to  try  it  on  you.  The  coat  seems  to  be  some- 
what wide.  Not  only  somewhat  but  very  wide,  nearly  too 
wide;  but  it  is  most  carefully  sewn  and  well  cut.  How  do 
you  like  the  colour?  So  so;  perhaps  it  might  have  been  a 
little  darker.  I  do  not  like  dark  colours  much ;  and,  moreover, 
this  colour  does  not  fade  so  much  as  another  darker.  Was 
the  cloth  very  expensive  ?  Good  cloth  is  never  bought  cheap. 
The  better  it  is,  the  dearer  it  is  sold.  And  also  the  tailor 
asks  rather  a  bigh  price.  By  (tr. :  com)  his  bills  I  have  l^een 
sometimes  quite  taken  aback. 

15* 


228  Lesson  34. 

CoiiYersa<^o. 

Onde  nasce  o  sol  e  onde  se  poe? 

A  que  horas  se  levanta  o  sol  nos  dias  de  solsticio? 

Quando    temos    o    dia  mais   cumprido    e  a   noite    mais 

curta? 
Donde  vem  que  ha  varias  esta^oes  ? 
Porque  e  que  se  revezam  o  dia  e  a  noite? 
Como  se  move  uma  locomotiva?  um  navio  de  vela?  iim 

autoraovel  etc.  ? 
Onde  desemboca  o  rio  Tejo  ?  o  rio  Douro  ?    o  rio  Mon- 

dego?  0  Guadiana? 
Acaso  me  sabe  dizer  onde  e  a   estaQao   do   caminho   de 

ferro  ? 
Quanto. tempo  leva  ate  la? 


Thirty-fourth  Lesson,    Li^ao  trigesima 
qnarta. 

The  Conjunctions.     As  Conjuncgoes  [Jcdsti'sdtfJ, 

§  247.  The  conjunction  joins  sentences  or  por- 
tions of  sentences,  and  is  invariable— e.g.:  Desejo,  mas 
temo  I  desire,  but  fear.  Here  mas  is  a  conjunction 
which  joins  the  two  predicates  desejo  and  teino,  opposing 
one  to  the  other.  If  we  say :  0  desejo  e  o  temor  inquie- 
tam-me,  the  conjunction  e  joins  desejo  and  temor,  subjects 
of  the  same  predicate. 

§  248.  A  conjunction  not  only  jams  sentences 
or  parts  of  them,  but  it  brings  them  into  a  certain 
relation,  making  the  one  dependent  on  the  other  ac- 
cording to  their  tenor.     Therefore  we  distinguish: 

1.  According  to  their  signification  two  great  classes 
of  conjunctions:  the  co-ordinates  (coordinativas)  and  the 
subordinates  (suhordinativas). 

2.  According  to  their  form  we  distinguish  simple 
(simples)  and  compoimd  conjunctions  (locugdcs  conjunc- 
tivas). 

§  249.  The  co-ordinate  conjunctions  only  join  sen- 
tences, etc.     There  are: 

(a)  copulative  (coptdativas  e  corUiniiativas) ; 

(b)  explicative  (explicativas) ; 


The  Conjunctions.  229 

(c)  disjunctive  (disjunctivas) ; 
m  (d)  adversative  (adverscUivas) ; 
'p-       (e)  conclusive  (conclusivas) ; 

(f)  comparative  (comparativafi); 

(g)  correlative  (correlativas). 

f  §  250.  The  suhordinate  conjunctions  join  sen- 
tences, etc.,  making  them  dependent  on  one  another. 
There  are: 

(a)  conditional  (condicionaes) ; 

(b)  causative  (cnusaes): 

(c)  final  (finaes); 

(d)  concessive  (roncessivas): 

(e)  temporal  (fireunistanekic's  do  tempo); 

(f)  integral    and    dubitative    (infegrantes    c   dnhita- 
thas). 

§  251.     Siinimar.y  of  tlie  Coujiinctions. 

Remark. — Those  marked  witli  *  require  the  verb  of  the  clause 
in  the  subjunctive  mood;  those  marked  with  (*)  may  be  followed 
by  the  subjunctive  or  indicative,  according  to  the  certainty  or  un- 
certainty expressed  by  the  sentence.  Those  compounded  with  de 
are  followed  by  the  infinitivo. 

A.  Coordenativas. 

(a)  Copiilativas. 

ConjiincQoes  simphs.  Locu^oes  eq^iiivalentes. 

K  and  hem  assim  yet 

tanibem  also  71  no  s6(mente)  .  .  .  mas  tanlbem 

nem  nor  ^  »  not  only  .  .  .  but  also 

nem  sequer  not  even 
tamponco  no  more,  as  little 
nao  .  .  .  mas  slm   not  .  .  .  but 

on  the  contrary 
tatifo  .  .  .  como  as  well  as:  both 

.  .  .  and 
ass'iw  como  as  also 
alem  de  besides 

jo    (que)    .  .  .  jd    (que)    since : 
as  soon  as;  now  .  .  .  now. 

Pois  well,  why  em  or  na  verdade  indeed 

ora  now,  yet;  why  com  effeito  indeed;  really 

owrrosm  also,  likewise,  moreover.       almi  d'isso  besides,  moreover 

alem  de  que  or  do  qiie  except  or 
save  that 

de  mais,  de  mais  n  mais  moreover. 


230  Lesson  34. 


(b)  ExplicatiTas. 

Como  as.  usstm  como  \  ,, 

bem  cqmo     ]  *®  ^®^^  *^ 
*como  se  as  if 

(*)de  (tal)  sorte  que  \  in  a  way 
{*)de  maneira  que      [      that; 
l*)de  mode  (or  geito)  I       so  as 

que  )      to 

*como  quer  que  however 
{*)scgundo  (qu^)     \  according  to. 
Cjconforme  (que)  I  * 

(c)  Disjunctivas. 

Om  or.  Oou  ...  OM  or  ...  or 

wc»i  .  .  .  nem  neither  .  .  .  nor 
ora  .  .  .  ora  now  .  .  .  now 
*quer  .  .  .  quer  whether  ...  or. 

(d)  AdTersativas. 

Mas  but  xipesar  de  in  spite  of 

porem  yet  comtudo  yet,  however 

todavia  however.  nao  obstante  notwithstanding 

,em  embargo  de  \  j^e^e^thelesa 

amda  asstm        |  ^^^^^^ 

{*)antes  rather 

nd  entanto  however 

senao  otherwise;  but 

quanto  a  with  regard  to. 

(e>  Concliisivas. 

Logo  j  80,  therefore,  con-  por  conseguinte    }  consequently 

2H>ts     \      sequently.  2^(^^  consequencta  I  ^         '' 

por  isso,  jjor  tanto  accordingly 
per  onde,  pelo  que  wherefore 
r«m  que  j   ^^  ^^^ 

(r)de  maneira  que  \ 
(^)com  que  wherewith. 

(f)  CQmpai:ativas. 

Mais  (do)  que  more  than  *ante8  que  \  ij^f^j.^ 

mcnos  Xdo)  que  less  than  *primeiro  (que)    I 

como  as 

(g)  Correlativas. 

asaim  .  .  .  como  such  as  assim  como  .  .  .  assim  (tamhem) 

tao  .  .  .  qu^  so  that  such  as  ...  so  also 

quanto  .  .  .  tanto  the  (more) .  .  . 
the  (more) 

qual  .  .  .  tal  like  .  .  .  like 

eomo  se  as  if 

{*)tal  .  .  .  que  so  that,  etc. 


The  Conjunctions.  231 

B.  Subordinativas. 


(a)  Condicioiiaes. 

i*)Se  if,  wliether. 

*caso  or  caso  que  1  if,  in  case 

*dado  caso  que       |       of 

{*)quando                i 

*sem  que  without,  except 

*a  nao  ser  que  | 

a  menos  de         1  if  not,  unless 

*a  menos  que      |     saving 
salvo  se              1 
Cyuma  vez  que  if  ever. 

(h)  and  (c)  Cansaes  e  fliiaes. 
Porque,  que  because  Jd  que 

{*)como  as  ]7oi8  que 

pais  because,  as.  par-  quanta  que  j  as.  considering 

visto  coma 

{*)visto  que 

sendo  que 

*TTM  that,  in  order  to 
a  fim  ae     ) 

para  que  nao  lest 

por  isso   que   by   reason   of,   on 

account  of 

pelo  muito  que  for  (the  sake  of). 

(d)  ConcessiYRS. 

*jEmboy'a  though  {*)ainda  que  even  if,  though, 

although 
*comquanto  que     | 
*se  hem  que  J  though 

*poi8  (que)  \ 

Oposio  que  ]  supposed 

*suppo8to  que  \  or  provided 

*dado  or  caso  qu£  )      that 
por  mais  (or  muito)  que  however 

much 
como   quer   que   (seja)    however 

(it  be). 

(e)  Circumstanciaes  de  tempo, 

Como      \       -.  {*)tanto  que  inasmuch  as,  so  far 

«»'"««»   I  'Q^oso.  «»«     )  as  soon  as 

'*)asstm  que  j 

{pantes  que        j  ^  ^^^^ 

[*)prtmeiro  que  ] 

desde  que  since 

{*)de2)ois  que  after 

ao  passo  que  ]    ^^^-j^ 

{*)emqua7ito  (que)     \ 


232  Lesson  34. 

{*)aU  que  until 

em  (witli  the  Gerund.)  in,  while 
i*)sempre  que  whenever 
l*)todas   as  vezes  que   any  time 
when 

'""^        !  scarcely. 

(f)  Integrautes  e  dubitativas. 

OQue  that,  if  *se  porventuar  \  ..  ..erhaDs 

se  if,  whether  *se  dcaso  ]  ^*  P^^^^^P^- 

•»c  if 
*quando  when 

§  252.     BemarJcs: 

(a)  A  great  many  of  the  conjunctions  are  simply 
adverbs,  nouns,  or  adjectives  with  prepositions: 

(b)  By  the  preposition  a  and  the  infinitive  you 
may  supply  conditional  conjunctions. 

A  ndo  haver  que  fazer—i.e.,  se  ndo  houver  or  caso  ndo 
haja  que  fazer. 

(c)  Se,  introducing  a  condition  or  supposition,  is 
generally  followed  b}^  the  subjunctive  (future);  employed 
in  an  indirect  question,  by  the  indicative;  if  in  any 
other  indirect  speech,  it  may  be  followed  by  the  sub- 
junctive or  the  indicative,  according  to  the  certainty  or 
uncertainty  it  expresses — e.g. : 

Se  fizer  horn  tempo  if  it  be  good  weather. 

Perguntel  se  fazia  horn  tempo. 

I  asked  if  the  weather  was  good. 

Va  ver  (or  diz-nie),  se  faz  horn  tempo. 

See  (or  tell  me)  if  the  weather  is  good. 

Ndo  sei  se  faz  (or  faga)  bom  tempo. 

I  don't  know  whether  the  weather  is  (or  be)  good. 

(d)  The  conjunction  que  most  commonly  introduces 
a  dependent  substantive  clause  (which  may  be  also 
elliptical),  as: 

Creio  que  tern  razdo  I  believe  you  are  right. 
Creio  que  ndo  1  think  not. 
Creio  que  sim  I  think  so. 

In  English  the  conjunction  "that"  is  frequently 
understood,  whereas  que  is  not  only  always  expressed 


The  Conjunctions. 


233 


in  Portuguese,   but  repeated  before  each  clause  of  the 
sentence,  as: 

Creio  que  iem  razao  e  que  sera  hetn  succedido. 

I  think  you  are  right  and  (that  you)  will  succeed. 

(e)  When  a  conjunction  governs  several  verbs,  it 
is  placed  before  the  first  verb  only,  and  que  may  be 
used  instead  before  the  other  verbs.  This  is  especially 
the  case  with  the  conjunctions  compounded  with  que.  Ex. : 

Se  for  (or  caso  seja)  applicado  e  (que)  tenha  intelligeneia. 
If  he  is  (or  be)  diligent  and  has  intelligence. 


Palavras. 

Esfalfado 

exhausted 

0  comego 

the  beginning 

[iffaVfacfu] 

fJcu  'mesnj 

mudavel 

changeable 

a  doQura 

the  softness 

[mu'd'avcij 

[du'surv] 

prescindir 

to  prescind, 

meigo  f'mviguj 

soft,  tender 

[prifsln'dir] 

to  extract 

presentir 

to  feel,  anti- 

0 carvdio  de 

the  coal 

[pr9sen'tir] 

cipate 

pedra 

0  ninho  [niyu] 
chocar  [fu"kar] 

the  nest 

0  combustivel 

full 

to  breed 

[komhuf  'tivsij 

educnr  [i&u  'karj 

'  to  bring  up 

0  gaz  [gaf] 

the  gas 

0  macho 

the  male 

potavel 

potable, 

['mafu] 

[pu'tavd] 

drinkable 

afemeaf'fenmj 

the  female 

desprezar 

to  despise 

eoctremoso          1 

[dtfprd  'zar] 

[iftrB'mozu]  1 

loving,  fond, 

superior 

superior 

amordso 

tender 

a  nova  [now] 

the  news 

[vmu  'rozuj 

0  (navio) 

the  packet  boat 

animar 

to  animate 

paquete 

[isni'inai-] 

0  acaso 

the  accident, 

0  sentido 

the  sentiment 

chance 

[sen  'ti&u] 

conformar-se 

to  comply  with 

rasteiro 

low 

com  alg.  c. 

frrvf'tup'uj 

custa-me 

I  find   difficult 

0  jnso  fpizuj 

the  ground 

or  hard 

estar  irado 

to  be  angry 

0  nadudor 

the  swimmer 

contre  alg. 

with  someone 

[wsdv  '&or] 

sonhar  fsu'par] 

to  dream 

0  mentiroso 

the  liar 

mag  oar 

to  hurt 

[menti'rozu] 

[mvgu'ar] 

if  a  pique  [piJcJ 

to  sink 

0  candrio 

the  canary- 

a  cmdorinJia 

the  swallow 

[kv'nartuj 

bird 

[Qndu'riijv] 

0  melrof'meinij 

the  blackbird 

domestico 

tame,  domestic 

passar  por 

to  be  considered 

[du'meftihu] 

_ 

esperto 

clever,  sly 

concluir 

to  conclude 

[ifpcrtu] 

afoito  fff'foHuJ  hardy 

0  grito 

the  warbling 

234 


Lesson  34. 


o  chamariz  the  bird-call 

ffvmv  'rifj 
a  delicia  the  delight 

[d9'li8iv] 
selvagem  savage,  wild 

[set  'va^§tj 
o  cantador  the  singer 

[Tcvntv'ffor] 
pobre  ['po!>r/j     poor 


0  fregues 

ffre'ge/J 
0  moQO  fmosuj 
fluminense 

[flumi'nensd] 
a  revista 

[rr9'vijtv] 
0  troco  f'trokuj 


the  customer 

the  waiter 
of  Rio  de 
Janeiro 
the  review 

the  change,  ex- 
change. 


90.  Exercicio. 
0  cavallo  correu  tan  to  que  ficou  esfalfado.  A  belleza  e 
a  riqueza  sao  mudaveis.  0  homem  nao  pode  prescindir  nem 
do  alimento  nem  da  roupa.  Nao  so  esta,  mas  tambem  aquelle 
sao-lhe  precisos.  0  carvao  de  pedra  emprega-se  como  com- 
bustivel,  com  elle  tambem  se  prepara  o  gaz.  A  agua  do  mar 
nao  &  potavel ;  nem  ella  pode  empregar-se  na  cozinha.  0  ho- 
mem nao  deve  ter  demasiado  cuidado  no  seu  exterior;  tam- 
pouco  elle  deve  despreza-lo.  Londres  e  maior  do  que  Li'sboa ; 
comtudo  esta  cidade  esta  numa  posi9ao  superior.  Assim  (que) 
eu  me  veja  em  porto  seguro,  podes  estar  certo  que  hei  de  dar- 
te  novas  minhas;  emquanto  porem  estiver  em  viagem,  nao 
havera  occasiao,  a  nao  ser  que  se  encontre  um  navio  (paqu^te). 
Como  nao  se  pode  contar  com  este  acaso,  melhor  e  que  nao 
contes  com  noticias,  por  mais  que  eu  desejasse  mandar-t'as  para 
que  te  nao  afflijas.  Pcqo  que  te  conformes  com  isso,  posto  que  te 
custe.  0  nadador  e  o  mentiroso,  se  abrirem  muitas  vezes  a  b6ca, 
ir-se-hao  a  pique. 

91.  Leitura. 

A  andorinha. 
A  andorinha  e  essencialmente  dom^stica:  nao  viv«  senao 
(or  a  nao  ser)  ao  pe  do  homem.  Onde  virmos  uma  andorinha, 
podemos  concluir,  sem  que  haja  receio  de  errarmos,  que  nas 
visinhauQas  ha  habita^oes.  E  ella  a  toda  a  hora  entra  afoita- 
mente  nas  habita96es,  como  se  ella  propria  f6sse  da  familia. 
Todavia,  a  andorinha  passa  metade  do  anno  longe  de  nos,  — 
na  Africa  d'onde  vem  no  com^^o  da  primavera,  procurando  a 
meiga  doQura  do  nosso  clima,  e  para  onde  se  retira  no  comedo 
do  outonO;  logo  que  presente  os  primeiros  frios.  A  mesma 
andorinha  volta  ordinariamente  aos  mesmos  logares,  e  ate  ao 
mesmo  ninho ;  mas  se  o  local  Ih'o  consente,  faz  um  ninho  novo 
ao  p^  3  por  cima  do  anterior,  e  ahi  vive  com  o  seu  compa- 
nheiro  pacifica  e  amorosamente :  ella,  a  chocar  os  ovos,  em- 
quanto elle  occupa  e  protege  a  entrada  do  ninho.  Macho  e 
feraea  sao  extremosissimos  pelos  filhos  e  educam-nos  maravilho- 
samente:  emquanto  pequeninos  nao  cessam  de  Ihes  trazer  de 
comer.     Depois  dao-lhes  as  suas  li^oes  de  voo;  e  nao  somente 


The  Conjunctions.  235 

OS  ensinam  a  voar,  mas  ainda  os  animam  n 'esses  exercicios 
—  quer  com  tao  expressivos  gorgeios  que  o  sentido  d'estes  quasi 
se  adivinha;  quer  voando  elles  proprios  (ou)  adeante  dos  filhos 
ou  ao  lado,  para  que  Ihes  possam  acudir  quando  fOr  preciso.  — 
As  andorinhas  vivem  dos  insectos;  e  como  estes  ora  voam  mais 
alto,  ora  mais  baixo,  segundo  faz  mais  ou  menos  calor,  acon- 
tece  que  a  andorinha  os  persegue  em  vOos  rasteiros,  sobre  as 
folhas,  sobre  as  hervas,  e  at6  no  piso  das  ruas. 

(After  TrindeCoelho:  2<*  Livro  de  Leitura). 

02.  Thema. 

I  forbid  it  him,  nevertheless  he  went.  Though  he  said 
nothing,  I  well  felt  that  he  was  angry  with  me,  since  I 
had  blamed  him.  I  shall  go,  whether  it  rain  or  be  good 
weather.  You  do  not  know,  you  don't  even  dream  how  you 
are  hurting  me.  A  canary-bird  if  treated  as  it  ought  to  be,  can 
l^ve  for  twenty  years.  The  blackbird  is  generally  considered 
very  clever,  but  it  is  not  so  much  (or:  less)  so  as  it  seems. 
Moreover,  it  makes  its  nest  very  often  near  to  man  and 
is  lured  (atrair)  by  the  bird-call,  though  this  be  only  a  poor 
instrument.  As  all  of  us  know  already  the  warbling  of  the 
blackbird,  we  can  declare  that  it  is  a  delight.  Yet  it  is  not 
on  account  of  its  wild  song  that  the  blackbird  merits  the 
reputation  which  it  has  as  a  singer ;  but  rather  on  account  of 
that  which  it  learns  after  being  taken,  be  it  by  learning  by 
heart  what  it  is  taught  or  what  it  hears  of  the  elder  birds, 
or  by  imitating  all  it  hears,  consequently  also  the  sounds 
of  instruments  and  the  voice  of  persons. 

ConTersaqao. 

iSTww  cafe. 

Fregu^s:  6  sr.  Manuel,  faz  o   favor   d'uma    chavena 

de  cafe  e  os  jornaes  d'hoje? 
M690:         Pronto,  senhorl    Eis  0  «Commercio  do  Porto», 

0    «Fluminense»  ^,   o   «Diario   Illustrado* ; 

tambem  deseja  alguma  revista? 
FregtiSs:  Queria.     Ha  a  clUustra^ao  pOrtugu6sa»  e  a 

«Revista  de  Bem»? 
M690:         Ha,  sim,  senhor.     Tambem  «0s  Ser6es»^   o 

«Branco  e  Preto*  e  outras. 

^  Fluminense  is  the  adjective  formed  of  Rio  de  Janeiro, 
0  Fluminense  is  a  newspaper  published  there. 

^  (s^SeroesTt,  pi.  of  serdo  =  evening-party.  Oa  Serves^  Branco 
e  Preto  and  IlltistraQoo  portuguesa  are  illustrated  reviews. 


236  Lesson  35. 

Fregues:  Bern,  traga-m'as.  E  olhe  que  hei  de  querer 
mais  assucar! 

M690:  Quanto  V*  Ex^  quizer,  sr.  doutor.  Manda 
mais  alguma  coisa? 

Fregues:  Sim.  Depois  de  ter  percorrido  estes  jornaes, 
queria  escrever  alguns  bilhetes  postaes. 
Tem-nos  illustrados? 

M6qo:         Tenho.     Eil-os.     Queira  V^  Ex^   escolher. 

Fregues:  Esta  bem,  E  estampilhas ?  Como  teem  des- 
tine para  0  estrangeiro,  cada  um  precisa 
d'uma  a  vint^m  ou  de  duas  a  dez  reis. 
Aqui  tem  dois  tostoes. 

M690:         Nao  tenho  troco ;  voa  trocal-6s  la  dentrc. 

FreguSs:  Deixe  estar,  que  estao  em  boas  maos. 

M690:         Muito  obrigado  a  V*  Ex*. 


Thirty-fiftli  Lesson.    Li^ao  trigesima 
qninta. 

Interjections.     Inter jeigoes  fintgr^e'sotfj. 

§  253.  Interjections  are  cries  or  exclamations 
which  express  sudden  emotions.  They  are  invariable 
and  mostly  short.     The  most  common  are: 

Ah f. Ah. \  bravo!  bravo!  very  well! 

oh!  oh!  oh!  bless  me!  his!  once  more! 

hiti!  ai^!  oh,  dear!  alas!  cdspit^!  the  deuce 

ih!  lo!  catrapuz!     bounce!      dash! 

fdra!     begone!     hence!  off!          plump! 

come  out!  (for  actors)  6!  oh!  (used  as  a  vocative) 

irra!  zounds!   for  shame!  It's      coitado!  coitadinho!  poor  man 

too  much!  (dear  darling)! 

oxalci!  would  to  God!  silencio!  silence! 

old,  hold!  holla!  halloo!  psch!  schiu!  hush! 

oU,  oU!  zounds!  didbo!    \  the  deuce! 

zas!  slap!  crack!  '  diacho!  \  zounds! 

hasta!    enough!     stop!  that      apre!  hang  it!  confound  it! 


will  do!  arre!  gee-ho!  ho! 

eia!  sus!  dnimo!  cheer  up!  xo!  shue! 

viva!  Long  live!  hurrah!  hail! 


*  Ai  de   mim  poor  me!  at  de  v6s  (belles)!  woe  unto  you 

(them)! 


Interjections. 


237 


§  254.  Besides  these  there  are  several  interjections 
which  (as  already  the  two  last  do)  express  a  call  for 
animals — e.g.:  Us-Uz!^  pussy,  pussy!  to  call  cats;  jf! 
to  incite  cats;  hs!  to  incite  dogs. — There  are  also  a 
series  of  imitation-sounds,  as:  trus!  triis!  tap!  knock! 
rap!  rat-tat- tat ! ;  toe!  toe!  tramp!  tramp!;  tlmi-Um;  tUm- 
tlom!  ting!  ting-tang!  ding-dong!  clatter!;  tique-taque 
tick-tack. 

§  255.  Finally,  other  particles,  especially  verbs  in 
the  imperative  mood,  are  used  as  interjections. 


Andal  go  on! 

anda  cd!  come  here! 

dd  cd!  give  hither! 

tdma  Id!  take  this! 

escuta!  bark! 

ouve  cd!  listen  to  me! 

some-te!  vae-te!  begone!  away! 

aviu-te!  be  quick! 

Vamos!    let    us    go    on     (or 

(away) ! 
(jfira!  go  on!  move! 
pd7'a  ahi!  stop! 
jmdSra!   to   be    sure!    I  say! 

wouldn't  it  suit  (him)! 
2}0is  ndo!  certainly!  why  not? 

isn't  it? 
pais  entdo!  you  see! 
qiietn  (me)  dera!  that  would 

suit  me  to  ^ a  marvel! 
ai  Jesus!     0  Senhor!    Jesus 

Senhor!  mercy  on  us!  Good 

Heavens ! 
adeus !    farewell !      good-bye ! 


Examples. 

pois!  what  next? 


cautela!  agua  vae^I  take  care 

or  heed! 
aqui  d'el-rei ' 


Acudam  !  \ 


6  da  guarda!  ]    ®  P' 

par  quern  e!  I  pray! 

par  amor  de  Deus!  for  God's 

sake! 
Deus    me   livre!    God   forbid! 

Oh,  no! 
valha-me  Deus !  Oh  Lord !  bless 

me! 
Amen,  Jesus  *  !  Amen  ! 

Deuslouvado!  \r\  <•   ', 

par  Deus!  egad!  by  Jove  I 
se  Deus  quizer!  (if  it)    please 

God!  Deo  volente! 
seja    0   que  Deus    quizet'!    as 

God  will 
Deu^    guarde    a     V<^    Ex^  ^f 

God  be  with  you! 
sahe  Deus!  God  knows! 


good  morning  (or  day)! 

Remark. — Every  interjection  expresses  a  whole  sentence 
or  even  several  sentences.    Thus  ai!  means  "how  painful  it  is!'* 

^  Biz  biz,  a  quickly  repeated  "bicho,  bicho!" 

'^  Agua  vae!,  literally  "water  is  going,"  a  traditional  warn- 
ing for  passers-by,  survived  from  former  times,  when  things  were 
flung  out  of  the  windows. 

^  Aqui  d'd-rei,  elliptic  al  for  ^'acuda  aqui  a  gente  d'el-reif 

^  Amen,  Jesus,  popular  for  Amen. 

^  Final  form  in  official  letters  or  documents. 


238 


Lesson  35. 


or  "how  unfortunate  I  am!"  So  the  interjection  differs  by 
its  nature,  which  is  synthetic,  from  all  other  particles,  these 
being  essentially  analytic. 


Palayras, 

0  theatro  lyrico 

the  opera 

atar 

to  tie 

(-house) 

0  palco  f'paiku] 
rugir  [rru'^irj 

the  stage 

a  enchente 

the  fulness 

to  roar 

[l'Jent9] 

a  procella 

the  storm, 

desmaiar 

to  faint,  swoon 

[pru'selvj 

hurricane 

[dijmnt  ar] 

0  sino  I'sinuJ 

the  bell 

0  scenario 

the  scenery 

OS  sinos  a  defun- 

the  tollint?- 

[s9'nanu] 

tos[d9'funtufJ 

bells 

aprimeira  dama  the  prima 

bemdito 

deceased 

donna 

[bn'dkuj 

hisar 

to  repeat 

guiar  [gi'ar] 

to  lead,  guide 

sisudo  [si*zu&u]  judicious 

0  jumento 

the  ass 

impor 

to  impose 

[gu'mentuj 

0  baritono 

the  baritone- 

a  reboque 

in  tow 

[bv  'ritunuj 

singer 

[rryt>okJ 

0  baiodo 

the  bass-singer 

0  cocheiro 

the    coachman 

as  palmas 

the  applause 

[Icu'fviru] 

hear  palmas 

to  be  applaud- 

obedecer 

to  obey    * 

ed 

doer 

to  ache,  hurt 

um  sem  numero 

innumerable 

tocar  as 

to  chime  the 

de  (vezes) 

(times) 

trindades 

Angelus 

a  coroa 

the  garland 

[trln'da&if] 

a  festa  ariistica  the  benefit 

0  toqm  [tdk]  das 

the  chimes  of 

a  pomba 

the  pigeon, 
dove 

trindades 

the  Angelus. 

93.  Ex 

ercicio. 

keatro. 

Hontem  no  theatro  lyrico  foi  tal  a  enchente  que  algumas 
senhoras,  coitadas,  desmaiavam.  Mas  oh,  se*  visse  aquillo! 
Ai,  que  Undo  scenario!  E  os  artistas?  A  esses  levantavam-se 
muitos  «vivas»,  e  os  espectadores  gritavam  «bravo!»  e  «bis!»  a 
nao  poderem  mais  (till  they  could  not  any  more).  A  primeira 
dama  teve  de  bisar  uma  aria  —  ol6,  ole!  —  e  depois  tornaram  a 
romper  os  « vivas*  e  os  «bis»,  para  obriga-la  a  repetir  segunda 
vez.  Mas  entao  o  publico  mais  sisudo  fez  «psch!»  e  «schiu!», 
para  imp6r  silencio.  Tambem  o  baritono  e  o  baixo  levaram 
muitas  palmas  e  foram  pedidos  «f6ra»  um  sem  numero  de 
vezes,  at^  alguns  gritaram  «basta!»  Mas,  caspitd,  que  bell  as 
vozes!  Atiraram-lies  rauitas  flores  e  cor6as,  visto  que  tiveranr 
a  sua  festa  artistica,  e  ate  soltaram  pombas,  as  quaes,  atadas 
a  duas  e   luas  —  zas!  —  foram  cair  no  palco. 


Interjections.  239 


94,  Leitnra. 


E  em  Novembro,  rugem  procellas  .  .  . 
Dens  nos  acuda,  nos  livre  d'ellas! 

Ai,  que  ditosos  os  lavradores! 

Sinos  a  defuntos!  ai,  quern  morreria! 

Viverao  sempre  na  eterna  luz, 
Pobres  bemditos,  amen,  Jesus!  .... 

Pela  estrada  plana,  toc^  toe,  toe, 
Guia  0  jumentinho  uma  velhinha  errante, 
Como  vao  ligeiros,  ambos  a  reboque, 
Antes  que  anoitece,  toe,  toe,  toe, 
A  velhinha  atras,  o  jumentito  adiante !  .  .  . 
Toe,  toe,  toe,  Undo  burriquito, 
Para  as  minhas  filhas  quern  m'o  dera  a  mim! 
(Guerra  Junqueiro.) 
05.  Thema. 
Xa  rua. 

Take  care!  Come  here!  Be  quick!  Don't  you  see  that 
a  carriage  is  coming  along?  Lord,  bless  me!  Take  heed  not 
to  fall  (Olhay  se  cues  I)  Oh,  coachman,  stop !  The  coachman 
calls  to  the  horses:  ''Gee-ho!  ho!"  and  then  "Shue!"  But  they 
do  not  obey  him.  Help!  help!  There  they  (tr.:  eil-os  que) 
stand,  thank  God !  But  you  have  fallen  (pret.),  poor  darlingi 
Are  you  hurt?  No,  thank  Heaven!  Give  hither  your  little 
hand!  Let  us  go  on!  Cheer  up!  Zounds,  v^hat  a  fright! 
Nothing  hurts  you,  does  it?  Hark!  Do  you  hear  the  bells? 
Ding-dong!  They  chime  the  Angelus  (or:  it  is  the  chimes  of 
the  Angelus).  Listen!  Come,  say  an  Ave-Maria!  Well!  Amen! 


240 


Second  Part. 


First  Division:  Flection, 


First  Lesson. 

The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns. 

(Cf.  2na  Lesson  of  Part.  I.) 
§  1.  The  gender  of  the  noun  may  be  recognised 
by  its  meaning  or  by  its  ending  or  by   both.     By 
their  meaning  are 

(a)  Masculine.  —  1 .  The  denominations  of  male 
persons  and  their  professions:  Jose,  o  rapaz^  o  jar- 
dineiro,  o  doutor,  o  monarcha,  o  patriarcha,  etc. 

2.  The  cardinal  points,  the  winds,  the  seasons, 
the  months  and  those  days  as  are  not  indicated  by 
^^feira":  o  Teste  or  este  (also:  nascente^  oriente^  levante% 
0  oeste  (also:  poente  or  occidente),  o  norte  (also:  se(p)- 
tentriao,  o  sul;  o  verao  or  estiOy  o  onto(m)no,  o  inverno: 
0  Janeiro,  o  fevereiro,  etc.;  o  sabbado,  o  domingo  (but  a 
segunda  feira,  etc.). 

Exc:  a  primavera  Spring. 

3.  Mountains,  capes,  rivers  and  seas:  o  EtnUy 
0  Gerejs,  o  Caho  da  Boca;  o  Mondego,  o  Lima,  o  Gua- 
diana,  o  (oceano)  Atldntico^  o  (mar)  BdUico. 

*  The  names  of  the  cardinal  points  (with  the  exceptions  of 
those  in  parenthesis)  indicate  also  the  .winds  blowing  from  there 
— e.g. :  0  norte  or  septentriao  (poetical  name)  is  employed  for  north 
and  north-wind.  Another  denomination  for  north-wind  (rarely 
for  north)  is  a  tramontane!.  Feminine  are  also  a  Msa  the  breeze, 
a  aragem,  a  veragao  gentle  breeze. 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns.  241 

N.B. — If  the  name  of  mountains  is  preceded  bv  serra, 
the  article,  etc.,  concords  with  this  noun :  a  serra  da  EstreUa^ 
a  serra  do  Gerez. 

4.  Metals:   o  oiiro,   o  ferro,   o  cohre,   o  zinco,   etc. 
Exc. :  a  prata,  a  platina,  a  lata  or  folha  de  Flandres 

sheet-iron. 

5.  Characters  and  notes:  o  A,  o  B,  o  L,  dois  cc; 
0  do,  0  re. 

6.  Man}^  names  of  trees  and  shrubs:  o  carvcdho, 
0  freixo,  o  salgtieiro,  o  sohreiro,  o  tremoceiro.  N.B.  Fruit- 
trees  are  generally  feminine:  a  pereira  (pear-tree). 

7.  Those  words  (adjectives,  infinitives,  participles) 
converted  into  a  substantive:  o  hello,  o  falar,  o  sim. 

N.B. — If  by  an  adjective  so  employed  a  female  person 
is  indicated,  it  is  naturally  preceded  by  the  feminine  article: 
a  bella,  a  vellia. 

(b)  Feminine.— 1.  The  denominations  of  female 
persons  and  their  professions:  Maria,  a  mae;  a  leiteira, 
a  autora. 

Exc:  0  mulherao  the  strong  and  stout  woman. 

2.  Continents,  and  generally  towns,  countries, 
provinces  and  isles,  especially  those  ending  in  a: 
a  Africa,  Lishoa,  Londres,  a  Dinamarca;  a  Beira, 
a  Guine;  a  Isldndia;  however:  o  Brasil,  Portugal  (mas- 
cuHne,  but  without  article),  o  Trds-os-Monfes ,  o  Sao 
Thome,  o  Porto,  o  Funchal,  o  Rio  de  Janeiro,  Paris  m. 

3.  Arts,  sciences,  professions,  moral  qualities  and 
abstract  nouns:  a  music'a,  a  historia,  a  olaria  (pottery), 
a  esperan^a,  a  fe,  a  moralidade,  a  discregdo. 

Exc:  0  amor  Love,  o  vicio  Vice. 

§  2.  To  indicate  the  natural  sex  in  persons  and 
animals,  the  Portuguese  language  has  either  a  different 
expression  or  a  different  ending  (cf.  §  3  of  this  Lesson 
and  L.  2  of  the  1^^  Part.). 

Masculine.  Feminine. 

0  rapaz  the  boy  A  rapariga  the  girl,  maid 

6  Iwmem  the  man  a  mulher  the  woman 

0  pae  the  father  a  mde  the  mother 

0  padrasto  the  stepfather  a  madraste  the  stepmother 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  16 


242  Lesson  1. 

0  rei  the  king  a  rainha  the  queen 

0  dom  =  a  title  of  nobility,  a  dona  =  title  bestowed  upon 
employed  before  the  Christ-  any  lady  and  followed  by 

ian  name  the  Christian  name. 

0  genro  the  son-in-law  a  nora  the  daughter-in-law 

0  frade  the  monk  a  freira  the  nun 

0  didcono  the  deacon  a  diaconisa  the  deaconess 

0  avo  the  grandfather  a  av6  the  grandmother 

0  tsar  or  cear  the  czar  a  tsarina  the  czarina 

0  gallo  the  cock  a  gaUinha  the  hen 

0  cavallo  the  horse  a  egim  the  mare 

0  carneiro  the  ram,  mutton  a  ovelha  the  sheep 

0  bode  the  buck- goat  a  cahra  the  goat 

0  awoo  the  dwarf  a  and  the  female  dwarf. 

§  3.  By  their  ending  are: 

(a)  Masculine. — 1.  Those  nouns  ending  in  un- 
accented -0  or  in  any  accented  vowel — e.g.  tio,  dedo, 
alvard  (charta),  cafe,  aleli  (gillyflower),  javali  (wild 
boar),  do  (pain),  no  (knot),  avo. 

Exc. :  a  pa  (shovel),  a  chamine,  a  fe,  a  gale  (galley), 
a  Hire,  a  mare  (tide),  a  pole  (pulley),  a  rale,  a  re  (the 
female  prisoner  or  defendant,  but  o  re  the  D  [musical 
note]),   a  se;  a  avo,  a  enxo  (adz[e]). 

2.  Those  nouns  ending  in  -en,  -em  (exc.  those  in 
-gem)y  -im,  -om,  -wm,  -do  (cf.  b,  3):  o  germen,  o  hem,  o 
armaeem,  o  setim,  o  som,  a  atum,  o  orgdo. 

Exc:  a  ordem  the  order. 

3.  Those  nouns  ending  in  -ae  (-at),  -ao  (au),  -e'o 
(-eu),  €0  (eu),  -oe,  -oi — e.g.:  pae  (pai),  pdo  (pau),  ceo 
(ceu),  breo  (breu),  heroe  (heroi),  boi. 

Exc:  a  ndo  (ndu)  the  ship. 

4.  Those  in  -oZ,  -eZ,  -il,  -ol^  -id:  o  areal,  o  amiely 
0  funil,  0  paiolj  o  paul  (swamp),  o  consul. 

Exc:  a  cat  the  chalk,  a  vogal  the  vowel,  as  well 
as  cathedral  and  credencial,  which  properly  are  ad- 
jectives, to  be  supplied  by  se  and  carta. 

5.  Those  in  -ar,  -er  (-er),  -ir,  -or^  -ur:  o  altar,  o 
talher,  o  prazer,  o  elixir,  o  senhor,  o  andor  (beer  for 
saints),  catur  (Uttle  Indian  man-of-war). 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns.  243 

Exc:  a  heira-mar  (properly:  a  heira  do  mar  the 
seashore),  a  collier  (spoon),  a  cor^  a  dor^  a  flor. 

6.  Those  in  -az,  -oz,  -oz^  -us,  -uz:  o  cabaz  (basket 
of  twigs),  0  algoz  (hangman),  o  arroz^  o-jus  (jus,  law), 
0  capuz  (hood),  o  dbestruz  (ostrich). 

Exc.  :  a  pa,z  (peace),  a  tenaz  (tongs),  a  foz  (mouth 
of  a  river),  a  noz  (nut),  a  voz  (voice),  a  cruz  (cross),  a 
luz  (light). 

Remark  X— Are  masculine  also  those  norms  in  -05,  em- 
ployed only  in  the  plural:  as  hredos  (notch-weed,  spinage) ; 
OS  brocolos  (broccoli). 

(b)  Feminine. —  1.  Those  nouns  in  -a  or  -a^:  tia, 
alma,  la,  maga. 

Exc:  0  dia^  o  helga^  o  persa,  o  planMa,  o  cometa, 
0  enigma  (riddle),  o  capitalista,  o  cambisia  (money-changer) 
and  all  those,  mostly  taken  from  the  Greek  and  indi- 
cating a  male  person,  as  poeta,  monarcha,  democraia, 
atheista^  etc. 

2.  Those  in  -e,  and  -ei:  a  merce  (mercy),  a  lei  (law). 

S.  Those  in  -ade,  -gdo,  (-c)q&o,  -sao,  -ddo  (cf.  a,  2): 
adoragOOy  direcgao,  extensdo,  confusOo,  aptiddo  (aptness), 
multiddo  (multitude). 

Exc:  0  coragdo  (heart). 

4.  Those  in  -gem:  a  imagerft,  a  irnpigem  (tetter),  a 
ferrugem  (rust). 

Exc:  0  pagem  (page,  cabin-boy),  o  almargem 
(meadow).^ 

Remark  //.—Are  also -feminine  those  nouns  ending  in 
•as  and  employed  only  in  the  plural,  and  also  the  proper 
names  ending  in  -as;  e.g. — as  exiquias  (exequies),  as  nu- 
pcias  (wedding),  as  hodas  (de  prata,  de  oiro  the  silver  or 
golden  wedding);  as  calcas  (trousers),  as  vitualhas  (yictMsls); 
Bruxellas  (Brussels),  Athenas  (Athens). 

*  The  ending  -a  may  be  also  written  -an:  larij  tnagan.  But 
this  latter  is  feminine  only  when  identical  with  -a,  otherwise  it 
is  masculine:  o  afan  (toil),  o  ademan  (generally  employed  in  the 
plural  ademanes  gesture). 

^  Personagem  is  employed  now  and  then  as  a  masculine, 
but  the  correct  form  is  feminine. 

16* 


244  Lesson  1. 

§  4.  As  for  the  denomination  of  animals  and  plants, 
their  species  is  partly  indicated  by  the  masculine, 
partly  by  the  feminine  gender — e.g.,  o  corvo  (raven),  o 
rouxinol  (nightingale),  o  cordeiro  (lamb),  a  dguia  (eagle), 
a  ovelha  (sheep),  a  lehre  (hare),  a  raposa  (fox),  o  myrto 
(myrtle),  o  castanheiro  (chestnut).  To  indicate  the 
natural  sex,  you  have  to  supply  the  name  of  the 
species  by  macho  (male)  or  femea  (female)— e.g.,  a  femea 
do  rouxinol^  o  corvo  femea,  a  dguia  macho,  etc. 

^.B.— The  words  of  the  reading  and  translating  tasks 
should  now  be  looked  up  in  the  vocabulary  at  the  end  of 
this  book,  or  —  as  this,  being  chiefly  intended  to  furnish 
typical  examples  of  a  correct  pronunciation,  does  not  pretend 
to  be  complete  —  from  a  dictionary.  In  the  Pocket  Dictio- 
nary of  the  Portttguese  and  English  Languages  hy  H.  Michaelis, 
an  abridgement  of  the  larger  Dictionary  of  the  same  author, 
published  by  BrocTihaus;  Leip/sig,  and  the  best  of  its  kind 
we  know  of,  the  reader  will  find  everything  that  is  required. 

1.  Beading  Lesson. 

I. 

A  le'bre  corre.  0  peixe  nada.  A  andorinha  voa,  0  cabrito 
pula.  0  ca^ador  ca^a.  0  juiz  julga.  0  homem  pensa.  0  boi 
rumina.  0  6rgao  soa.  A  luz  alumia.  0  general  commanda.  A 
torre  6  alta.  0  sdvel  6  um  peixe  A  aguia  e  uma  ave  de 
rapina.  0  cysne  6  uma  ave  aquatica.  A  plaina  6  um  instru- 
mento.  0  cravo  6  uma  fldr.  Diz-se  vulgarmente  que  o  sol  e 
a  Ina  estao  no  c^u.  0  altar  esta  na  igreja.  A  nuvem  esta  no 
ar.  0  vento  (o  norte,  a  tramontana)  sopra.  0  trovao  brame 
ou  estrondeia.  0  leSo  ruge.  0  mar  brame.  A  ovelha  bala. 
0  cavallo  rincha  ou  relincha.  0  cao.ladra,  uiva  ou  geme  (gftne). 
0  rouxinol  e  o  melro  cantam.  A  rS  grasna.  0  burro  zurra. 
A  serpente  silva.  0  porco  grunhe.  0  lobo  uiva.  0  pardal 
chia.  A  raposa  regouga.  0  touro  berra.  0  gato  mia.  0  mos- 
quito ^umbe.  A  r6la  geme.  0  pato  e  o  ganso  grasnam.  0 
gallo  cucurita  e  canta.     A  gallinba  cacareja. 

II.. 
Caule,  tronco  ou  haste  (piy  pedunculo). 
0  caule  6  o  que  n6s  vulgarmente  chamamos  tronco  ou 
haste.  Um  carvalho  tern  tronco;  a  papoula  e  o  trigo  teem 
haste.  *  0  caule  d'uma  fl6r  tambem  se  chama  pe  (ou  pediinculu). 
0  caule  (ou  tronco)  de  algumas  arvores  chega  a  ter  400  metros 
de  altura:  o  dos  musgos  tern  apenas  alguns  millimetros.  0  caule 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns:  245 

e  pois  a  parte  da  planta  que  se  eleva  no  ar.  Eleva-se  ver- 
ticalmente,  ou  mais  ou  menos  inclinado,  E  do  caule  que  nas- 
cem  as  folhas,  as  flores  e  os  fructos.  0  caule  das  arvores 
compoe-se  de  cinco  partes:  por  fora  a  casca;  por  baixo  da 
casca  0  liber,  que  6  uma  camada  branca  e  tenra;  por  baixo 
do  liber  outra  camada  que  se  chama  alburno;  ainda  outra^ 
a  mais  interior,  chamada  cerne;  e  ao  centro  a  medulla.  Para 
aguentar  o  caule,  algumas  plantas  teem  gavinhas,  tambem 
chamadas  elos  ou  abra90s.  Veem-se  na  videira,  no  melao,  na 
ervilhaca  etc.  Algumas  gavinhas  teem  na  ponta  uns  pequeni- 
nos  discos.  Estes  discos  introduzem-se  as  vezes  nas  fend  as 
das  paredes,  e  incham  dentro  das  fendas.  Inchando,  os  discos 
nao  saem,  e  as  gavinhas  aguentam  melhor  o  caule.  Essas 
gavinhas  que  teem  disco,  chamam-se  adhesivas  (air  roots). 
(Trindade  Coelho:  Terceiro  Livro  de  Leitura.) 

2.  Thema. 

Indicate  the  gender  of  the  following  nouns,  by  placing 
in  front  the  definite  or  the  indefinite  article: 

The  horse,  —  cavallo.     The  pear,  —  pera.     The  metal, 

—  metal.  A  winter,  —  inverno.  The  spring,  —  primavera. 
The  chestnut,  —  castanheiro.  The  apple-tree,  —  macieira. 
The  gold,  —  euro.     The  platinum,   —  platina.     The  vapour, 

—  vapor.  The  working,  —  trabalhar.  The  author,  —  autora. 
The  ship,  —  navio,  —  nau.  The  prophet,  —  propheta.  The 
sun,  —  sol.  The  moon,  —  lua.  The  image,  —  imagem. 
The  sparrow,    —  pardal.     The   fox,    —  raposa.     The  he-fox, 

—  raposa  macho.  A  lion,  —  liao.  A  region,  —  regiao.  The 
heart,  —  cora9ao.  The  modesty,  —  modestia.  The  faith,  — 
f^.    The  foot,  —  p^.    The  chimney,  —  chamin^.    The  vowel, 

—  vogal.    The  pair,  —  par.    The  peace,  —  paz.    The  piece, 

—  peda90.  The  Belgian,  —  belga.  The  mercy,  —  mere 
The  hare,  —  lebre.  The  wool,  —  la.  The  sound,  —  soir!. 
A  frog,  —  ra.  A  swamp,  —  paiil.  The  chalk,  —  caL.  The 
salt,  —  sal.  The  sky,  —  c^u.  The  eagle,  —  aguia.  The 
bird,  —  ave,  —  passaro.  The  trousers,  —  cal^as.  The 
wedding,  —  mipcias.  Asia,  —  Asia.  Italy,  —  Italia.  Nor- 
mandy, —  Normandia.  Portugal,  —  Portugal.  Brazil,  — 
Brasil.     The  Thames,  —  Tamisa.     The  Tejo,  —  Tejo. 

3.  Thema. 

Write  down  the  translation  and  the  feminine  of  the 
following  nouns.  .  The  neighbour;  the  prisoner;  the  dwarf; 
the  grandfather;  the  monk;  the  doctor;  the  author;  the 
gardener;   the  lion;    the   hare;    the    nightingale;   the  bode; 


245  Lesson  2. 

the  cousin;  the  stepfather;  the  son-in-law ;  the  cock;  the 
bull;  the  Jew;  the  prince;  the  master;  the  Portuguese;  the 
German;  the  boy;  the  dof^;  the  orphan;  the  wolf;  the  hus- 
band; the  son;  the  godfather;  the  horse. 

ConTersa<jao. 

Quaes  sao  os  principaes  quadnipedes  dom^sticos? 
Quaes  sao  os  principaes  quadnipedes  bravos  ou  as  priu- 

cipaes  feras? 
Qual  e  0  movimento  da  lebre?,    do  peixe?,   da  dgnia?, 

do  homem? 
Qual  e   a   voz    da   ovelha?,   do   cavallo?,   do  cSo?,  do 

porco?,  etc. 
Quaes  sao  as  principaes  aves  dom6sticas?,  as  aquaticas?, 

as  de  rapina? 
Quaes  sao  as  vozes  das  aves? 
Que  se  entende  per  "caule"? 
Como  se  chama  tambem  o   caule   d'uma    flor?,    d'uma 

drvore?,  d'uma  espiga? 
De  quantas  partes  se  compoe   o  caule   d'uma  drvore   e 

quaes  sao? 
Que  6  que  nasce  do  caule? 

Que  teem  algumas  plantas  para  aguentar  o  caule? 
Diga(m)  alguns  exemplos! 


,  Second  Lesson. 

The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns 

(continued). 

§  2.  Nouns  with  a  Double  Gender. 

(a)  With  special  ending  for  the  feminine  (cf.  P.  I, 
§  21): 

(a)  The   ending  o  changes  into   a:  pombo^  pomba. 

Exc:  didcono^  diaconiza. 
(p)  The  ending  ao  changes  into  6a :  patrao  principal, 
patroa. 

Ex.:  bardOi  baroneza;  cidaddo,  cidadd;  irnulOy 
irmd,  etc.  (see  §  21). 
(t)  The  ending  or  (or)  adds  a:  leitor.  Iritora. 
Ex.:  actor,  actriz,  etc.  (see  §  21). 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns. 


247 


(b)  The  ending  es  (ez)  adds  a:  portugues,  portuguisa, 
Exc:  (only  for  adjectives)  cortes,  which  is 
the  same  for  both  genders, 
(e)  Nouns  with  any  other  ending  do  not  follow  de- 
terminate rules. 


Abbade  abbot 

abbadessa 

alcaide  alcalde,  mayor 

alcaidissa 

archiduque  archduke 

archiduqueza 

avo  grandfather 

av6 

cgar  czar 

czarina 

c<mde  count 

condessa 

dem  god 

deusa 

diique  duke 

dugue^za 

herde  hero 

heroina 

hdspede  host;  landlord,   guest 

hdspeda 

infante  infant;  foot-soldier 

infanta 

mestre  master,  teacher 

mestra 

parente  parent 

parenia 

inarques  marquis 

marquesa 

monge  monk 

monja 

peru  turkey-cock 

perua 

poeta  poet 

poetisa 

principe  prince 

princesa 

propheta  prophet 

prophetisa 

reo  criminal,  delinquent 

ri 

aacerdote  priest 

sacerdotisa 

visconde  viscount 

viscondessa. 

(b)  Without  changing  their  ending  or  meaning  the 
following  words  are  (Bstinguished  only  by  the  article 
(o  for  the  masculine,  a  for  the  feminine).  As  they  are 
common  to  both  genders,  they  are  called  "communs  de 
dois." 


Artista  artist 
regente        \  , 

governante  f     * 
gerenie  manager 
suicida  suicide 
regidda  regicide 
conjttgicida  conjugicide 
consorte  consort 
mdrtir  martyr 
espia  spy 

compatriota     country-man, 
country-woman 


persa  Persian 
belga  Belgian 
commensal  \  table  fellow, 
conviva       /    commensal 
cumplice  accomplice 
convalescente  convalescent 
pateta  blockhead 
parasita  parasite 
indigena  indigenous 
herege  heretic 
guia  guide 
Jdven  youth,  young  girl. 


248 


Lesson  2. 


(c)  Besides  these  ''communs  de  dots''  which  still  are 
distinguished  by  the  different  gender  of  the  article, 
there  are  others  which  are  indiscriminately  employed  for 
both  genders,  ones  with  the  masculine,  others  with  the 
feminine  article.  They  are  called  in  Portuguese  ''sohre- 
communs."  Please  to  note  the  following: 
0  conjuge  the  married    man      a  testemunha  the  witness 


or  wife 
0  gemeo^  the  twin  boy  or  girl 
0  interprete  the  interpreter 
a  crianga  the  child 

(d)  Without  changing 
different  meaning: 

0    guarda    the     watchman, 
keeper,  guard 

0  cdbega  the  chief,  leader 

0  planeta  the  planet 

0  trombeta  the  trumpeter 

0  corneta  the  horn -blower 

0  vogal  the  voter 

0  crescenfe  the  crescent,  half- 
moon 

0  atalaia  the  sentinel 

0  vigia  the  guard 

0  capital  the  capital,  principal 

0  lingua  the  interpreter 

0  cura  the  parson 


a  sentinella  the  sentinel 

a  criatura  the  creature— e.g., 

«o  grande  estilista  e  infelie 

criahira  .  . .». 

of  the  ending,  but  with  a 

a  guarda  the  guard,   defence 

a  cahega  the  head 

a  planeta  sort  of  chasuble 

a  trombeta  the  trumpet 

a  corneta  the  horn 

a  vogal  the  vowel 

a  crescente  the  flood 

a  atalaia  the  watch-tower 
a  vigia  the  watching 
a  capital  the  capital 
a  lingua  the  tongue 
a  cura  the  cure,  healing.^ 


(e)  With  changing  of  the  ending  or  meaning,  gene- 
rally indicating  in  the  masculine  a  greater  idea  of  size. 
(N.B.  — Sometimes  the  contrary;  we  mark  these  by  *.) 
0  banco  the  bench ;  shop-board 

B —  Exchange,  bank 
0  barco*  the  bark,  boat 


0  cesto*  the  basket 
0  fosso  the  ditch,  trench 
0  carvalho  the  oak 
0  caleiro  the  gutter 
0  horto*  kitchen -garden 
0  caldeiro*  the  kettle 
0  madeiro  the  block 
0  mosco*  the  mosquito 


a    banca    the    writing-table; 

bar;  basset 
a  barca  the  bark,  ferry-boat, 

lighter 
a  cesta  the  basket,  maund 
a  fossa  the  pit,  hole 
a  carvalha  the  little  oak 
a  caleira  the  gutter 
a  horta  the  kitchen-garden 
a  caldeira  the  kettle 
a  madeira  the  wood 
a  mosca  the  fly 


^  Employed  also  as  an  adjective:  irmaos  gemeos. 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns. 


249 


0  pio  the  basin,  winepress 
0  poQO  the  well 
0  riso*  the  laughter,  smile 
0  sacco'^  the  bag 


a  pia  the  basin 

a  poga  (poga)  the  pool 

a  risa  the  shout  of  laughter 

a  sacca  the  bag. 


§  6.  Please  to  pay  attention  to  the  gender  and 
meaning  of  the  following  nouns,  different  in  their  ter- 
mination and  consequently  in  their  gender: 


Masculine. 

0  aro  the  hoop 

0  arco  the  bow;  arch 

0  barbo  the  barbel 

0  barro  the  clay 

0  bico  the  beak;  bill;  thorn 

0  bolo  the  cake 

0  bolso  the  pocket 

0  boneco  the  doll;  fig.  puppet 

0  bordo  the  board 

0  cabego  the  top  of  a  moun- 
tain; chief 

0  cabide  the  rack 

0  cabido  the  chapter  of  a  ca- 
thedral 

0  campo  the  field 

0  cargo  the  office,  employment 

0  carogo  the  stone  of  a  fruit 

0  carpo  the  wrist 

0  carrasco  the  hangman 

0  carreiro  the   narrow   path; 

carter 
0     carreto     the     waggonage; 

freight 
0  carreteiro  the  cart- man,  carter 
0  carteiro  the  postman 
0  casco  the  skull;  cask;   hull 
0  caso  the  case 
0  castello  the  castle,  tower 
0  caudal  the  rapid 
0  cavallo  the  horse 
0  cepo  the  stump,  block 
0  cerco  the  circle,  circuit ;  siege 
0  cevo  the  bait;  decoy,  lure 
0  choco    the  brooding 


Feminine. 
A  ara  the  altar(- stone) 
a  area  the  chest,  coffer 
a  barba  the  chin;  beard 
u  barra  the  bar;  spar 
a  bica  the  water-pipe 
a  bola  the  ball 
a  bolsa  the  purse ;  5— Exchange 
a  boneca  the  doll,  baby 
a  borda  the  border,  edge 
a  cabega  the  head 


a  campa  the  grave 

a   carga    the    load,    burden, 

freight 
a  carroga  the  coach 
a  carpa  the  carp 
a  carrasca  red-oak 
a  carreira  the  run,  race,  road ; 

career 
a  carreta  the  cart 
a  carets  the  grimace,  mask 
a  carreteira  the  lighter 
a  carteira  the  pocket-book 
a  casca  the  bark,  rind 
a  casa  the  house 
a  Castella  Castilian 
a  Cauda  the  tail,  train 
a  cavalla  the  mackerel 
a  cepa  the  vine -stock,  vine 
a  cerca  the   enclosure,   hedge 
a  ceva  the  masting;  food;  lure 
a  choca  the  bowl;  cattle-bell; 

brood-hen 


250 


LesBon  2. 


c  cigarro  the  cigar 

0  dmo  the  top;  summit 

o  cohertor  the  blanket;    quilt 

0  colchdo  the  mattress 

0  colchite  the  clasp 

0  collo  the  neck,  lap 

0  conto  the  tale,  story 

0  cdrte  the  edge ;  cut ;  incision 

o  cunho  the  ^tamp,  coin 

0  custo  the  cost,  expense 

0  espinho  the  thorn 

0  esquadro  the  square 

0  estado  the  state 

0  /oeld  the  fate ;  popular  song 

0  fordo  the  burden,  pack 

0  fecho  the  bolt,  bar 

0  ferro  the  iron 

0  folho  the  flounce,  frill 

o  fdlio  the  folio;  page 


0  poiro  the  gillyflower 

0  pd^  the  draught 
0  gorgUe  the  half-shirt 
0  ^a<fo  the  will,  accord 
0  j^rro  the  jet,  shoot  of  water 
0  lance  the  throw,  cast;  trait, 

lucky  chance 
0  Zawfo  the  throw;  suit;  space; 

turn 
o  Imho  the  flax,  linen 
0  lixo  the  filth,  dirt 
0  lomho  the  loins,  reins 
0  ItUo  the  mourning 
0  mago  the  mallet 
0    malho    the    mall,     mallet; 

sledge 
0  mango  the  handle  of  a  flail 
0  meado  the  middle,  half 
0  medo  the  fear 

0  meio  the  half,  middle ;  means 
o  modo  the  mode,  manner 


a   cigarra    the    balm-cricket, 

grasshopper 
a  cima  the  top 
a  coberta  the  co  ver(ing) ;  shelter 
a  colcha  the  counterpane,  quilt 
a  colcMta  the  eye(let) 
a  colla  the  glue 
a  conta  the  bill,  account 
a  cdrte  the  court;  as  Cdrtes 

the  Parliament 
a  cunha  the  wedge,  quoin 
a  custa  the  cost,  charge 
a  espinha  the  fish-bone;  spine 
a  esquadra  the  squadron 
a  estada  the  abode 
a  fada  the  fairy,  fay 
a  farda  the  uniform 
a  fecha  the  conclusion 
a  ferra  the*  fire-shovel 
a  folha  the  leaf,  sheet 

a  fdrma  the  form,  shape 
a  forma  the  matrice,  model 
a   goiva    the   gouge,    hollow 

chisel 
a  gola  the  throat,  gullet 
a  gorgUa  gratuity,  tip 
a  grade  the  harrow,  grate 
a  jorra  the  tar 
a  langa  the  lance,  spear 


a  linha  the  line;  row 

a  lixa  the  sea-calf;  seal(-skin) 

a  lomba  the  hill,  eminence 

a  luta  the  wrestling,   combat 

a  maga  the  mace,  club 

a   malha   the    mash;    stitch; 

speck 
a  manga  the  sleeve 
a  meada  the  hank,  skein 
a  meda  the  stack  of  straw  or 

corn 
a  meia  the  stocking 
a  moda  the  fashion 


The  Gender  of  this  Portugueee  Nouns. 


251 


0  mdfo  the  mould 
0  monte  the  mountain 

0  mdrto  the  dead  man^  corpse 
0  mote  the  motto,  device 

0  moto  the  motion,  impulse 
0  novel(l)o  the  clew;  ball 
0  pago  the  reward 
0  paVmo  the  span 

0  papo  the  maw,  crop 

0  papa  the  pope 

o  partido  the  party,  faction ; 

resolution 
0  passo  the  step 
0  pasto  the  pasture,  feed 
0  pato  the  duck 

0  pego  the  whirlpool,  pit 

0  pd(l)o  the  hair,  down 

0  pinheiro  \  the  fir-tree,  pine 
0  pinho       I       tree 
0  pinto  the  chicken 
0  pito  =  pinto ;  pipe 

0  ponto  the  point,  stitch 

0  porte  the  freight,  postage ; 

deportment 
0  porto  the  port,  harbour 
0  poste  the  stake,  pillar 
0  posto  the  place;  post 
0  prdtico  the  pilot 

o  2>reso  the  prisoner 

0  quarto   the  room,    quarter; 

watch 
o  queixo  the  jaw(-bone) 

0  raio  the  beam,   ray;   flash; 

spoke 
0  rato  the  rat 
0  risco  the  danger;  stroke  of 

a  pen 


a  mofa  the  mockery 

a  monta  the  amount,  quan- 
tity 

a  morte  the  death 

a  mota  the  terrace;  dam, 
rampart 

a  novella  the  novel 
a  paga  the  pay 
a  palma  the  palm-leaf,  palm- 
tree 
a(s)  papa(s)  the  pap 
0  papd  the  pa(pa),  daddie 
a  partida  the  part,  lot ;  match 

a  passa  the  raisin 

a  pasta  the  portfolio;  paste 

a  pata  the  female  duck;  paw, 

claw 
a  pega  the  handle,  ear,  tedder 
a  pega  the  magpie 
a  pella  the  ball,  tennis-ball 
a  pelle  the  skin 
a  pinha  the  pine-cone 

a  pinta  the  spot,  mark 
a  pita  the  fibre  of  the  aloe 
a  piteira  the  aloe 
a  ponia  the  point;  top,  tip 
a  porte  the  bridge 

a  porta  the  door 

a  posta  the  slice,  cut;  post- 
Cage);  courier 

a  prdtica  the  practice,  ex- 
perience 

a  presa  the  prey,  booty 

a  quarta  the  fourth  part  or 
class 

a  queixa  the  complaint;  pro- 
cess, action 

a  raia  the  stroke,  dash;  bor- 
der; ray 

a  rata  the  she -rat;  share 

a  risca  the  dash;  parting  (of 
the  hair) 


252 


Lesson  2. 


0  rodo  long  stick  to  heap  up 

corn 
0  rolo  the  roll(er),  ball;  taper 
0  roUte  the  small  roll 
0  seguro  the  insurance 
0  sello  the  stamp,  seal 
0  sino  the  bell 
0  siso  the  good  sense 
o  solo  the  soil,  ground 
0  telho  the  earthen  cover 
0  tenia  the  counter ;  maulstick; 

care 
0  <es^o  the  cover,  lid 
0  tiro  the  shot 
0  toldo  the  covering;  awning 

0  forwo  the  turn(bench) 

0  ^nwco  the  latch. 

0  troco  the  change,  small  coins 
0  t'aso  the  vase,  vessel ;  urn ; 

pot 
0  villo  the  fleece 
0  vento  the  wind 
0  verbo  the  verb,  word 


a  roda    the    wheel;     circle; 

round  slice 

a  rdla  the  turtle-dove 

a  roUta  the  roulette 

a  segura  the  hoop -knife 

a  sella  the  saddle 

a  sina  the  flag;  fate 

a  sisa  the  excise 

a  sola  the  leather;  sole 

a  telha  the  tile,  brick 

a  tenia  the  probe 

a  /esfa  the  forehead 

a  tira  a  strip 

a  tolda  the  quarterdeck ;  awn- 
ing 

a  torna  the  return;  compen- 
sation 

a  trinca  a  series  of  three  ana- 
logous things 

a  troca  the  truck, '  exchange 

a  vasa  the  slime,  mud 

a  veldja  the  candle;  sail 

a  venta  the  nostril 

a  verba  the  clause,  article 


§  7.  There  are  a  few  nouns  which  by  the  mas- 
culine gander  indicate  the  individual  and  by  the  femi- 
nine the  collective  sense— e.g. : 

0  fructo  the  fruit  a  frticia  the  fruitage,  fruit 

0  grito  the  scream  a  grita  the  crying,  clamour 

0  marujo  the  mariner  a  martija  the  crew 

0  ramo  the  bough,  twig  a  rama  the  foliage,  branches. 

§  8.  There  is  some  affinity  between  these  nouns 
(§  7  and  §  5  (e))  and 

(a)  the  so-called  augmentativos,  formed  by  the  trans- 
formation of  the  final  syllable  of  certain  nouns  into 
-^Oy  which  adds  to  the  noun  an  idea  of  bigness  and 
sometimes  that  of  deformity  and  ugliness;  and 

(b)  the  so-called  dimunitivos,  which  attribute  to  the 
noun  an  idea  of  smallness,  of  somebody  or  something 
needing  protection,  and  therefore  that  of  a  certain 
tenderness  (cf.  P.  I,  L.  16). 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns.  253 

4.  Thema. 

This  boy  tears  his  stockings  so  that  there  is  no  possibility 
of  darning  them.  In  the  Botanical  Garden  of  Lisbon  are  palm- 
trees  of  more  than  sixty  spans  height.  As  this  needle  has 
no  point,  not  a  stitch  can  be  done  \7ith  it.  The  duck  filled 
its  maw  with  pap.  Please  to  give  me  some  small  coins,  I 
want  to  buy  a  few  stamps.  Of  the  whole  crew  only  one 
mariner  was  saved.  Waiter,  there  are  some  guests  who  have 
not  yet  had  a  slice  of  fish;  you  ought  to  be  more  attentive. 
In  the  action  brought  (movida)  against  that  spy,  several 
witnesses  were  summoned;  amongst  them  as  [an]  interpreter 
a  native  of  Africa.  Our  globe,  the  moon,  and  other  stars 
are  planets;  the  sun  is  a  fixed  star.  When  the  moon  is  vi- 
sible in  the  sky,  we  have  moonshine.  She  renews  her  light 
in  the  phases  of  each  revolution  and  is  a  satellite  of  the  earth. 
Her  four  phases  are;  new  moon,  half  moon,  full  moon,  and 
waning  moon.  The  ebbtide  and  flood  are  phenomena  in 
connection  with  the  crescent  and  the  wane.  Where  there  is 
the  most  capital  and  paper  currency  (papel  moeda)  is  in 
the  banks  of  the  capital  of  England.  As  you  so  warmly  take 
the  part  of  the  Portuguese  republicans,  are  you  a  republican 
yourself?  I  do  not  belong  to  any  political  faction,  but  I  sym- 
pathise with  the  republican  party  and  its  leaders.  An  English 
squadron  performs  its  maritime  manoeuvres  in  the  bay  of 
Lagos  on  the  Portuguese  seashore.  A  square  is  used  at 
drawing.  The  crickets  chirp  during  the  hot  season  (a  calma) 
in  the  months  of  June,  July,  and  August.  Flies  and  mosqui- 
tos  may  be  driven  away  by  the  smoke  of  a  cigar  or  a  ciga- 
rette. Consorts  are  often  martyrs  of  society,  and  the  children 
of  the  married  couple  sometimes  are  unconsciously  the  cause 
of  domestic  strife. 

5.  Leitura  e  Versao. 

Nao  6  saudavel  para  gente  sadia,  quanto  m6nos  para  gente 
doente,  a  estada  n'uma  casa  d'um  estado  mdnos  salubre.  A 
prisao  nas  cidades  portugufisas  encontra-se  muitas  vezes  na 
melhor  e  maior  pra^a:  Chama-se  terracjo  ou  eirado  0  telhado 
piano  d'uma  casa  ou  seja  0  espa^o  descoberto  sobre  uma  casa 
ou  ao  nivel  d'um  andar  d'ella.  Chama-se  chifres,  chavfilhos  ou 
pontas  as  excrescencias  comiformes  ou  arma9ao  do  gado  corni- 
fero  {or  comuto).  Na  partida  do  deputado  do  partido  pro- 
gressista  estiveram  na  gare  os  correligionarios  e  amigos  pessoaes 
d'elle.  Neste  anno  ha  pouca  fructa :  nao  vingaram  os  fructos 
das  madeiras  e  pereiras.  Em  compensacjao  d^ram  boa  colheita 
os  castanheiroS/  Por  isso  se  veem  agora  muitas  castanheiras 
na  rua  a  venderem  castanhas  assadas. 


254  Lesson  2. 

6.  Para  decorar  (to  be  learnt  by  heart). 
Voees  d^animaes. 
Palram  p§ga  e  papagaio  Opardal,damninhoaoscampos, 

£  cacar^a  a  gallinha,  Kao  aprendeu  a  cantar; 

Os  temos  pombos  arrulanif         Como  os  rates  e  as  doninhas, 
Oeme  a  r6la  innocentinha.  Apenas  sabe  chiar, 

Mtige  a  vacca,  herra  o  touro;  0  negro  corvo  crocUa\ 

Grasna  a  rS,  ruge  o  le&o;  Zune  o  mosquito  enfadonho; 

0  gato  mia,  uiva  o  lobo;  A  serpente,  no  deserto, 

Tambem  uiva  e  ladra  o  cao.  Solta  assohio  medonho. 

Belincha  o  nobre  cavallo;  Chia  a  lebre,  grdsna  o  pato; 

Os  elephantes  dSo  urros;  Oavem-se  os  porcos  grunhir; 

A  timida  ovelha  Mia;  Libando  o  succo  das  flores, 

Zurrar  6  prdprio  dos  bnrros.  Costuma  a  abelha  zumbir. 

Beg(yuga  a  sagaz  raposa  Bramam  os  tigres,  as  on9ag; 

(Brutinho  muito  matreiro):  Pia,  pia  o  pintainho; 

Nos  ramos  cantam  as  aves;  Oucurita  e  canta  o  gallo; 

Mas  pia  o  mocho  agoureiro.  Ldte  e  gdne  o  cachorrinho. 

Sabem  as  aves  ligeiras  A  vitellinha  da  herros; 

0  canto  seu  variar;  0  cordeirinho  bdlidos; 

Fazem  gorgeios  ds  vezes,  0  macaquinlio  dd  guinchos; 

Ab  vezes  poem-se  a  chUrar,  A  creancinha  vagidos, 

A  faUa  foi  dada  ao  homem 
Bet  dos  otUros  animaes, 
Nos  versos  Udos  acima, 
Be  eneontranif  em  pobre  rimay 
As  voees  dos  principaes. 

(Pedro  Diniz.) 

Conversa^So; 

Qne  se  entende  per  sabstantivos  <commims  de  dois»? 
Quaes  (sSo)  os  snbstantivos  que  teem  a  mesma  fdrma 

para  ambos  os  sexos? 
Qae  desinfincia  da  f6rma  feminina  teem  os  substantivos 

commons :  irmSo,  barfio,  lefto,  ladrfto,  propheta,  monge, 

rapaz,  imperador,  mestre  . .  .? 
Qaal  a  diflferen^a  entre  nm   c6sto  e  uma  cesta?   nm 

hdrto  e  uma  horta?  o  tromb^ta  e  a  trombeta?  am 

vogal  e  uma  vogal? 
Quaes  sfio  os   substantivos  que,  designando  indivfduos, 

sSo   masculines,   e   femininos  quando    exprimen  um 

sentido  de  collectividade? 


The  Gender  of  the  Portagueee  Nouns.  255 


Come  se  formam  os  augmentativos?  os  diminutives? 
Qual  0  sentido  accrescentado  ao  substantive  pela  syllaba 
augmentativa  ?  e  pela  syllaba  diminutiva? 


Third  Lesson. 

The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns 

(continued). 

Compound  Nouns. 

§  9.  The  Portuguese  language  does  not  contain  so 
many  compound  words  as  the  English.  It  substitutes 
them  in  different  ways: 

1.  By  adding  a  determinative  noun,  preceded  by 
-de  to  the  appelative — e.g.,  oculo  de  m-ao  eyeglass;  amo- 
lador  de  tesouras  (e  ^mvalhas)  knife-grinder;  escuma  de 
mar  meerschaum;  caixa  de  correio  letter-box;  chapeu  de 
palha  straw-hat;  criada  de  quarto  house-maid;  homba  de 
fogo  fire-eugine. 

2.  By  joining  an  adjective  to  the  noun — e.g.  bilhete 
postal  post-card;  ministerio  publico  Attorney-General; 
cal^o  caseiro  house-shoe;  mina  hulhifera  coal-mine; 
pinheiro  tnanso  nut-pine;  empregado  subalterno  subaltern 
functionary. 

Note. — Sometimes  the  noun  drops  altogether  (as  also  in 
English),  taking  the  adjective  in  its  form  and  meaning;— e.g., 
0  postal;  0  subalterno. 

3.  By  a  genitive:  casa  da  fructa  fruit-cellar;  costa 
do  mar  sea-coast;  empregado  do  correio  post-official; 
assento  do  cocheiro  coach-box;  porta  da  cidade  town-gate. 

4.  By  two  nouns  joined  by  another  preposition  than 
de:  compartimento  para  fumistas  smoking-compartment; 
banho  aos  pes  foot-bath;  papel  para  cartas  letter-paper; 
correspondencia  por  cartas  epistolary  intercourse;  colher 
para  paixe  fisht-rowel;  medo  a  morte  ieai  of  Death. 

5.  By  the  junction  of  any  other  particles— e.g. 
OS  afazeres  (=  a  fazer)  the  business;  os  parabens 
(=  para  bem)  the  congratulation ;  a  sempre-verde  the 
evergreen. 


256  Lesson  8. 

§  10.  Yet  there  is  a  certain  number  of  compound 
nouns,  formed  by  various  particles.  Their  gender  cor- 
responds, for  living  beings,  to  the  natural  sex  or  to 
the  conventional  one.  For  inanimate  things  the 
gender  corresponds  to  that  of  the  noun  in  such 
compound  words  as  are  formed  by  a  noun  and  another 
particle  (cf.  however  hate-folha,  saca-rdlha,  quebra-noz, 
etc.).  In  substantives  compounded  of  two  nouns,  the 
gender  mostly  corresponds  io  that  of  the  last  or  the 
one  which  logically  is  of  the  greater  importance. 

BemarJc. — As  there  are  a  great  many  exceptions  the 
only  means  of  attaining  proficiency  is  by  learning  the  article. 
If  you  are  in  doubt,  please  to  consult  a  dictionary. 

§  11.    Examples  of  Compound  Nonns  formed: 

(a)  by  two  Substantives: 

0  mestre-escola  the  schoolmaster 

0  mestre-sala  the  master  of  ceremonies 

0  mestre  sapateiro  the  master  shoemaker 

0  goma-gut(t)a  the  gamboge 

a  goma-lacre  the  gumlack 

0  guarda-portdo  the  door-keeper 

0  guarda-iouga  the  cupboard 

0  (or  a)  guarda-roupa  the  (keeper  of  the)  wardrobe 

0  guarda-livros  the  bookkeeper 

a  porta-cocheira  the  gateway 

0  tenente -general  the  lieutenant-general 

0  consul  geral  the  consul-general 

0  tenente-coronel  the  lieutenant-colonel 

0  logar-tenente  the  lieutenant 

a  mao'tenente  the  small  distance 

0  paquete  the  packet-boat,  — ship 

0  pontape  the  kick,  spurn 

a  pedm-iman  the  magnet 

0  usufmcto  the  ijsufruct 

0  varapau  the  (shepherd's)  staff 

a  heir  a- mar  the  sea -shore 

a  couve-fldr  the  cauly-flower; 
also    a   great   number  of  nouns  compound  with  jxin 
(pdurbalsamo,  pdu-barro,  pdu-canela  etc.),  designating  trees 
and  shrubs  and.  being  all  of  masculine  gender. 

(b)  by  Substantive  and  Adjectives: 

a  dguardente  (dgua  ardente)  the  brandy 
a  dguaforte  the  aquafortis 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns.  257 

0  amor-perfeito  the  pansy 

0  cantochdo  the  church  choir 

0  cavallo-marinko  the  hippopotamus 

0  porco-marinho  the  dolphin 

a  quinta-feira  santa'  the  Maundy  Thursday 

0  terrapleno  the  terrace 

a  idade-media  the  middle  age 

amaomorta  I  the  mortmain 

hens  de  mao  morta  f  i^iuaiu. 

uma  mdo-cheia  a  handful 

0  morddmo-mdr  the  Lord  Steward  of  the  Household 

0  porto-franco  the  free  port 

a  pedra-infernal  the  nitrate  of  silver 

0  terra-nova  Newfoundland  (dog). 

(c)  by  Adjective  and  Substantive: 

a  centopeia  the  centipede 

0  gentilhomem  the  gentleman 

a  machorfemea  the  (door-)hinge  (and  hasp) 

0  meia-dia  the  midday 

a  meio-noite  the  midnight 

a  meio-corpo  the  bust,  half  body 

a  meia-lua  the  half  moon,  crescent 

a  menoridade  (minoridade)  the  minority 

0  salvo-conducto  the  safe  conduct 

0  porto  franco  the  free  port. 

(d)  by  Verb  and  Substantive: 

0  guarda-pd  the  dust-cloak 

0  guarda-chuva  the  umbrella 

0  guarda-fato  the  wardrobe,  clothes-press 

a  lesa-majestade  the  I6se-majest6 

a  lesa-poesia  the  offence  against  poetry 

a  lesa-bom-gosto  the  offence  against  taste,,  tactlessness 

0  poHalandeifa  the  standard-bearer 

0  porta-cocheira  the  coach -gate 

0  porta-chaphis  the  hat-box 

0  porta-lapis  the  port-crayon 

0  porta-reldgio  the  watch-stand 

0  porta-voz  the  speaking-trumpet 

o  lavapes  the  maundy,  nipter 

o  lavapratos  the  dish-washer 

o  catavento  the  weathercock 

0  chupa-fldr,  obeija-flor  the  humming-bird 

o  hatefolha  the  gold-beater 

0  chupamel  the  honeysuckle;  humming-bird 

Portuguese  CJonversation-Grammar.  17 


258  Lesson  3. 

0  girasol  the  sunflower 

0  para-raios  the  lightning-conductor 

0  passafempo  the  pastime 

0  passaporte  the  passport 

0  quebramar  the  breakwater,  pier 

0  quebra-lus  the  light-screen 

0  saca-rolha(s)  the  corkscrew 

0  salva-vidas  the  safety-buoy;  life-preserver,  life-boat 

um  papa-Uguas  a  stout  walker 

0  pesa-cartas  the  letter-balance 

0  pesa-dgua  the  watergauge 

0  or  a  papamoscas  the  gaper 

0  or  a  papa-jantares  the  sponger,  parasite 

0  or  a  papa-nostias  \ 

0  or  a  papa-missas    \  the  devotee;  hypocrite. 

0  or  a  papa-santos   J 

(e)  by  two  Verbs: 

0  bule-hule  (or  bole-bole)  the  quaking-grass 

0  ganhaperde  sort  of  play  at  cards  in  which  the  winner 

loses. 
0  vae-vem  the  to  and  fro;  up  and  down 
0  passe-passe  the  jaggling(- trick). 

(f)  by  Preposition  and  Substantive: 

a  antecdmara  \  ,■,         ,    ,       ,  , 

a  antesala       (  ^^^  antechamber,  anteroom 

a  untemurulha  \  ^ 

0  antemuro        \ 

a  ante-data  the  antedate 

0  antepasto  the  first  dish 

a  anteporta  the  double  door,  screeu 

a  antepopa  the  forepart  of  the  stern 

a  antivespera  the  day  before  the  eve 

0  antipapa  the  antipope 

0  antidoto  the  antidote 

a.  antithese  the  antithesis 

a  contrabanda  the  contraband 

a  contra-escritura  the  counterbond 

a  contra- or dem  the  countermand 

a  contrasenha  the  watchword,  counter-ticket 

0  contratempo  the  annoyance ;  vexation ;   inconvenience 

a  entrefolha  the  inter-leaf 

a  entrelinha  the  interlineation 

0  entremeio  the  insertion 

OS  pardbene  the  congratulation 


The  Gender  of  the  Portuguese  Nouns.  259 

a  semrazao  the  groundlessness 

0  semsahor  the  insipidity,  disgust 

0  sobresalto  the  (sudden)  emotion,  fright 

a  sub-ordem  the  subdivision 

0  posf-escrito  the  postscript 

0  concidaddo  the  fellow -citizen 

0  consoeio  the  companion,  associate. 

(g)  by  Adverb  and  Substantive: 

0  bemfeitor  the  benefactor 

a  malquerenga  the  malevolence 

0  malgrado  the  displeasure 

0  malnascido  the  one  who  is  born   under  an  evil  star, 

unlucky  fellow 
0  acima-mencionado  the  aforesaid 
0  abaixo-assignado  the  undersigned. 

(h)  by  three  words: 

o  mal-me-quer  (malmequer)    \    ■,  . 
0  bem-me-quer  (bemmequer)  f      ^  ^ 
0  ndo-me-deixes  the  forget-me-not 
0  pe-de-gallo  the  hop(s) 
0  pe-de-lido  the  lion's-foot 
0  pdu-de-lacre  the  gumlac-tree 
0  pdu'de-cabelleiro  the  milliner's  block 
0  rabo-de-gallo  the  thunder- cloud 
0  valete  de  pdu  the  knave  of  clubs 
uma  tuta-e-meia  an  insignificance. 

7.  Thema. 

Hamburg  is  a  free  port  since  1888.  The  countermand 
of  the  lieutenant  colonel  concerned  only  the  subdivision 
of  the  pioneers  who  were  about  to  open  a  ditch  near  the  bul- 
wark. The  congratulation  of  his  book-keeper  gave  pleasure  to 
my  partner;  but  the  postscriptum  of  his  letter  containing, 
the  news  of  the  bankruptcy  of  a  bank,  caused  him  a  sudden 
emotion  and  was  a  great  annoyance  to  him.  It  is  indeed  an  act 
of  tactlessness  giving  such  news  in  a  letter  of  congratulation. 
In  the  great  kitchen-garden  is  still  much  cauliflower  and  other 
vegetables;  but  in  the  small  kitchen- garden  there  is  only  to 
be  found  quaking-grass,  daisies,  forget-me-nots,  and  pansies. 
The  Newfoundland  dogs  are  dogs  belonging  to  a  race  which 
is  said  to  originate  (que  dizem  procedente)  of  Newfoundland. 
The  gum-bearing  croton  (arvore  gummifera)  and  the  gam- 
boge-tree (guteira)  are  trees  of  the  tropics  from  which  the 
gumlac  and  the  gamboge  are  extracted. 

17* 


260  Lesson  3. 

8.  TersSo. 

Quando  estavamos  na  beira-mar,  vimos  muitas  vezes  os 
porcos-marinhos,  como  vulgarmente  se  chamam  os  delfins  ou 
golfinhos,  a  saltar  fora  das  ondas  da  resaca.  Um  catavento  6 
urn  aparfilho  que  indica  a  direc^ao  dos  ventos;  tern  a  forma 
d'uma  bandeirinha,  geralmente  de  ferro  ou  lata,  enfiada  n'uma 
haste,  6  coUocada  no  alto  dos  edificios.  0  para-raios  e  iim 
apar6lho,  formado  principalmente  de  uma  haste  metallica  e 
destinado  a  attrahir  as  descargas  electricas  da  atmosphera,  li- 
vrando  d'ellas  os  logares  ou  edificios  proximos.  Na  quinta-feira 
santa  ha  lavap^s  em  muitS,s  igrejas  catholicas,  executado  pelos 
prelados  ou  outros  altos  saoerdotes.  No  Porto  vi  o  cardeal, 
em  LisbOa  o  patriarcha  a  celebra-lo.  Os  muitos  afazfires  pro- 
prios  do  acima-mencionado,  assim  como  do  abaixo-assignado 
nSo  Ihes  permittem  occuparem-se  dos  afazfires  alheios. 

9,  Leitura. 

A  Lusitdnia. 

Antes  de  haver  aqui  hespanhoes  e  mouros,  n'um  peda^o 
do  que  e  hoje  Portugal,  havia  os  lusitanos.  Esses  lusitanos 
eram  os  naturaes  de  uma  regiao  chamada  Lusitania,  regiao 
que  occupava  especialmente,  a  principio,  os  territorios  entre  o 
Douro  e  o  Tejo,  e  depois  chegou  a  alastrar-se  pelos  que  formam 
hoje  as  provincias  todas  de  Portugal,  menos  o  Minho,  Tras- 
os-Montes  e  parte  do  Douro.  Estes  lusitanos  viviam  muito 
descan^ados  ca  em  sua  casa;  mas  com  o  rodar  dos  tempos, 
OS  carthaginfises,  que  eram  uns  povos  oriundos  da  cidade 
de  Carthago,  ao  norte  da  Africa,  chegaram  a  domina-los,  at6 
que  esses  mesmos  carthagin6ses  foram  tambem  vencidos 
pelos  r  Oman  OS  que  passaram  depois  a  dominar  elles  s6s. 
Esses  romanos  viram-se  e  desejaram-se  com  os  lusitanos,  princi- 
palmente com  um  tal  Viriato  que  a  frente  da  rapaziada 
lusitana  Ihes  deu  que  fazer,  e  os  venceu  em  muitos  combates 
at^  que  o  mataram  a  trai^ao  quando  dormia.  Dizem  que 
Viriato  era  um  pastor  da  Serra  da  £]strella  e  ainda  hoje  ha 
em  Vizeu  um  sitio  a^  que  chamam  «Cava  de  Viriato»,  por 
ser  fama  que  morou  ali  esse  valente  capitao,  que  e  o  mais 
antigo  dos  heroes  portugufises. 

(Trindade  Goelho:  3^.  Livro  de  Leitura.) 

Conyersac^fio. 

The  answers  to  be  given  with  the  wording  of  No.  9. 
Quaes  foram  os  habitantes  de  Portugal  antes  dos  Por- 
tugueses ? 

1  See  P.  II,  L.  11,  §48  (a)  (P). 


Formation  of  the  Plural  of  Nouns.  261 

Quando  ainda   nao   havia   hespanhoes   e  mouros,   quern 

habitava  o  pais? 
Donde  eram  naturaes  os  lusitanos? 
Qual  era  a  regiao  comprehendida,  a  principio,  pela  Lu- 

sitania  ? 
E  quaes  eram  os  temtorios  que  occupava  depois? 
Como  viviam  os  lusitanos? 
Quern  chegou  a  domina-los? 
Quern  eram  os  carthaginSses  ? 
Que  tempo  durou  o  dominio  dos  carthagineses  ? 
Com  quem  se  viram  e  desejaram  os  romanos,  principal- 

mente  ? 
Como  morreu  Viriato? 
Onde  ha  a  chamada  «Cava  de  Viriato »  ? 
Porque  se  chama  assim  esse  sitio? 
Que  dizem  que  Viriato  era? 
E  como  e  considerado? 


Fourth  Lesson. 

Formation  of  the  Plural  of  the  Nouns. 

The  general  rules  for  forming  the  plural  of  the  nouns 
have  been  given  already  in  the  2°^  Lesson  of  the  First 
Part.  They  will  here  be  repeated  in  coherence  and  duly 
completed. 

N.B. — The  same  rules  apply  to  the  adjective. 

§  12.  (a)  By  adding  an  -s  is  formed  the  plural 
of  all  those  substantives  (and  adjectives)  which  end  in 
a  vowel,  an  w,  or  a  diphthong — e.g.,  rede(s),  Xiae(s)^  ir- 
md(s),  germen(s),  pau(s),  grdo(s).  Exc:  o  canon  the 
church  law,  canon,  catalogus,  forms  the  plural  cdnones; 
0  ademan  the  gesture,  ademanes. 

Remark. — Of  those  words  ending  in  accented  -do  only 
a  few  take  an  -s  without  changing  the  form  of  the  singular; 
— e.g.,  irmdo(s),  christdo(s)f  cidaddo(s),  mdo(s),  bengdo(s)  (this 
only  if  accented  on  the  first  syllable,  else  iengdes.  Those 
ending  in  unaccented  -do  (allowed  to  be  written  also  -am) 
follow  the  general  rule:  o  orfdo,  orfdos  (orphans). 

(b)  Some  words  in  accented  -ao  change  their  ter- 
mination into  -des—e.g.:  pdo,  pdes;  alemao,  alemdes]  es- 
C7'ivd0f  escrivAes]  cdo^  caes. 


262  Lesson  4. 

(c)  Most  words  in  accented  -do  change  this  termi- 
nation into  -oes:  condao  gift,  magic  wand  condoes;  coragdo, 
coragoes;  lido  (le&o),  lioes;  alde&o^  aldedes;  cangdo,  cangoes; 
mddo,  meloes  etc. 

(d)  The  nasal  endings  -em,  -im,  -om,  -urn  change  -m 
into -?^  before  adding -5,  thus:  -ens,  -ins,  -ons,  -uns]  ar- 
maeem,  armasens',  hem,  hens;  fim^  fins;  som,  sons;  atumy 
atuns. 

(e)  Nouns  ending  in  -r,  -5  or  -z  add  -es — e.g. :  doutor 
doutores;  mulher,  mulheres;  portugues,  Portugueses,  pass, 
pazes. 

'^.B.^Cardcter  modifies  its  accent  in  the  plural:  ca- 
racUres. 

(f)  Remain  unaltered  those  nouns  ending  in  -s  pre- 
ceded by  an  unaccented  vowel  or  falling  diphthong — 
e.g.:  o(s)  alferes  the  ensign(s);  o(s)  simples  the  simple- 
ton(s),  (ihQ  ^ImxbX  simplices  being  antiquated);  o(s)  lapis 
the  pencil(s) ;  o(s)  caesihe  quay(s);  o(s)  arrais  the  master(s) 
of  a  boat. 

Exc. :  calis  (or  calix)  forms  calis  or  ccdices;  dem 
forms  deuses. 

Those  few  nouns  in  -x  with  preceding  unaccented 
vowel  change  -x  into  -ces:  0  appendix  (or  appendice);  0 
index  (or  indice),  indices.     See  also  calix. 

(g)  Nouns  ending  in  -aZ,  -ol,  -ul  drop  the  -I  and 
add  -es:  animal,  animaesi  sol,  soes;  paHl,  paues. 

Exc:  Consul  (vice-consul,  proconsul)  and  mdl  keep 
the  'I  in  the  plural:   consules^  males;  0  real  forms  reis, 

(h)  Those  words  ending  in  -el  loose  the  -I,  adding 
-is:  annel,  anneis;  fiel,  fieis, 

(i)  Those  in  accented  -il  drop  the  -Z,  adding  -s: 
funil,  funis,  civile  civis. 

(j)  Those  in  unaccented  -il  change  -il  into  -eis: 
projectU,  projecteis;  fdcil,  fdceis. 

§  13.  Proper  names  and  foreign  words  form  their 
plural  regularly  by  adding  -5  or  changing  the  ending 
after  the  rule:    Os  Bragangas,   os  Gamas,  as  tndias,  os 


Formastion  of  the  Plural  of  Nouns. 


Algarves,  cts  Americas;  os  deficits^  as  erratas^,  as  quotas, 
OS  quocientes^  etc. 

N.B.— Names  of  towns  ending  by  -s  are  singular:  a  rica 
Londres;  a  sdbia  Athenas;  Bruxellas  foi  ftmdada  no  sectdoVII 
(cf.  §  3,  Eemark  II). 

§  14.  Some  nouns  are  used  only  in  the  Plural 
at  least  in  their  meaning  here  given: 


as  dncias  sickness 

as  andas  stilts 

as  andadeiras  leading-strings 

OS  ambages  subterfuge,  excuse 

OS  amoricos  flirtation 

OS  annaes  annals 

as  bddas      \        -,,. 

as  nupcias  /  ^^     ^^^ 

OS  brSdos  notch-weed,  spinage 

OS  hrdccolos  broccoli 

OS  cdnones  church-law 

es  cereaes  cereals 

OS  c^^tus  cirrus 

OS  cmmes  \  .    ■, 

OS  Gumidus   (or   cumuios^   cu- 
mulus 


as  entradas  the  beginning  and 
as  sahidas  the*  end  in  the 
connection  of:  desejar  boas 
sahidas  do  anno  velho  e  boas 
entradas  do  anno  novo  wish- 
ing a  happy  new  year 

OS  espinafres  spinage 

as  exequias   exequies,    funeral 

OS  imponderdveis  imponderable 
matters 

OS  midlos  brains 

OS  nimbus  (or  7iimbns)  nimbus 

OS  dculos  spectacles 

OS  parabens  felicitation 

as  sei4cias  ill  treatment,  cruelty 

OS  stratus  stratus 

OS  trdpicos  tropics. 


N.B.  — There  may  also  be  read  funeraes  instead  of  funeral; 
bnt  the  plural,  being  a  gallicism,  is  to  be  avoided  as  in- 
correct. 

§  15.  Only  in  the  Singular  are  employed  the 
names  of  sciences,  arts,  qualities  and  other  abstract 
nouns,  of  metals,  elements  and  materials,  as  also  the 
infinitives  applied  as  nouns  and  in  their  proper  meaning. 
Being  used  in  the  plural  form,  they  have  another, 
though  cognate,  meaning.     Ex.: 


0  direito  the  right,  law,  juris- 
prudence 

0  desenho  the  (art  of)  drawing 

a  pintura  the  (art  of)  painting, 
picture 

a  bondade  the  kind(li)ness 


Plural:  duties 

*  drawings 

»  pictures 

»  kindnesses 


^  So  according  to  modern  grammarians.  Others  indicate 
errata  as  mbst-  f,  pi.  and  employ  the  singular  o  errata  after  the 
mod«ii  0  problema,  o  dilemma,  o  x>rogrammay  etc.  Errata  is  also 
enipl%'ed  as  subst.  f.  s.  in  the  meaning  of  English  errata. 


264  Lesson  4. 

0  amdr  the  love  Plural:  beloved  ones ;  flirtation 

a  saude  the  health  »        toasts 

0  cohre  the  copper  »        coins    or    objects     of 

copper 

0  fogo  the  fire  »        fireplaces 

a  sida  the  silk  »        silks;  bristles 

0  mdro  the  glass  »        window-panes 

0  trigo  the  corn,  wheat  »        cereals;  bread 

0    panno    the    cloth ;    shawl ;  »        shawls 

sails 

0  ferro  the  iron  ->        chains 

a  tinta  the  ink  »        colouring,  colours 

0  ar  the  air  >        prevailing  winds ;  cli- 
mate 

a  dgua  the  water  >        medicinal  waters ;  wa- 
tering 

0  gesso  the  gypsum  ■>        figures  in  plaster 

0    dever    the    being    obliged;  »        duty,  obligation 

duty 

0  andar  the  striding  »        stories,  floors. 

10.  Oral  £xercise.     Exercioio  oral. 

Please  to  put  the  sentences  of  the  Reading  Lesson  I.  in 
the  first  Lesson  into  the  Plural. 

11.  Thema. 

Those  gentlemen  are  German  teachers  and  well  instructed 
authors.  Some  courteous  Englishmen  have  been  our  amiable 
guests  these  last  months.  On  those  fertile  fields  where  a  few 
weeks  ago  still  grew  green  seeds,  are  now  only  faded  grasses 
and  flowers  to  be  found.  Among  the  quadrupeds  there  are 
wild  beasts  and  domestic  animals.  (Os)  Dogs^  cats,  cows, 
sheep,  horses  belong  to  the  domestic  animals;  (the)  lions, 
will  cats,  panthers,  lynxes  are  beasts  of  prey;  (the)  hares, 
foi:es,  stags,  roes  and  other  horned  animals  are  game.  The 
magic  wands  are  said  to  have  the  gift  of  finding  the  springs 
oat  in  the  ground.  There  are  many  villages  in  the  Alemtejo 
T/ith  less  than  a  hundred  fires.  Of  glass  are  made  drinking- 
^lasses,  panes,  spectacles,  eyeglasses  and  telescopes,  as  well 
as  many  other  things.  The  funeral  of  the  infant  followed 
very  fast  (=  de  perto)  her  wedding.  The  climate  of  the  Isle 
of  Madeira  is  most  beneficent  for  consumptive  people.  Also 
the  climate  and  the  medicinal  waters  of  the  Gerez  in  northern 
Portugal  are  most  famous.  The  State  has  the  right  to  collect 
new  duties.  The  community  sang  a  church-choir,  while  a 
group  of  young  men,  boys  and  girls  entuned  in  a  loud  voice 
(pi.)  Christian  songs  and  hymns. 


Formation  of  the  Plural  of  Nouns.  265 

12.  Yersao. 

0  tigre  e  o  lobo  sac  animaes  ferozes.  0  chumbo  e  o 
ferro  sac  metaes  pesados.  A  aguia  e  o  abutre  sao  valentes 
aves  de  rapina.  0  ferro  e  a  pedra  sao  duros.  A  torre  e  a 
casa  sao  altas.  A  legoa  e  o  kilometro  sSo  dist^ncias  com> 
pridas.  0  cao  e  o  gato  sao  animaes  dom^sticos  liteis.  0 
diamante  e  a  esmeralda  sao  pedras  preeiosas.  0  sal  e  a  pi- 
menta  sao  temperos  necessarios.  As  floras  naturaes  e  as 
(flores)  artificiaes  sao  bonitas.  A  marinha  inglfisa  e  a  (ma- 
rinha)  francesa  sao  fortes.  As  balei^s  e  os  tubaroes  sao 
grandes.  0  vinho  e  a  cerveja  sao  bo£^8  bebidas.  Os  proj^cteis 
tinham-lhe  penetrado  os  pulmoes. 


13.  Leitnra. 

Nuvens. 

Da  terra  e  do  mar  elevam-se  vapores  que  se  espalham  pela 
atmosphera.  Nas  regioes  elevadas  daiatmosphera  eases  vapores 
encontram  um  ar  frio;  e  ao  contacto  d'esse  ar,  os  vapores 
resfriam:  resfriando,  formam  as  nuvens.  Da  mesma  maneira, 
quando  no  espaQO  se  encontram  duas  massas  de  ar,  nma  mais 
quente  e  hiimida  do  que  a  outra,  a  mistura  d'essas  duas 
massas  de  ar  tambem  da  origem  a  nuvens.  Estas  sao  pois 
pequenas  gdttas  d'agua  suspensas  na  atmosphera  e  provenientes 
do  resfriamento  do  vapor.  Apertando  o  frio  com  ellas,  essas 
gOttas,  reunindo  se,  caem  em  chuva ;  ou  esfriando  mais,  tomam- 
se  solidos,  caindo  em  forma  de  neve  ou  geada. 

As  nuvens  teem  vdrias  formas:  —  quando  semelham  mon- 
tanhas  d'algodoes,  arredondadas,  umas  encastelladas  per  cima 
das  outras,  chamam-se  aimulus.  Quando  lembram  pequenos 
filamentos  desligados  de  la  cardada,  denominam-se  cirrus. 
Quando  formam  camadas  delgadas  e  continuas,  mais  ou  menos 
extensas,  limitadas  por  linhas  horizontaes,  teem  o  nome  de 
stratus.  E  quando  lembram  um  panno  cinzento-escuro,  fran- 
jado  ou  esfarrapado  nos  bordos,  chamam-se  nimbus. 

Os  cumulus  denominam-se  tambem  algoddes,  e  sao  mais 
frequentes  no  verao  do  que  no  inverno.  Formados  de  manha, 
desapparecem  geralmente  de  tarde,  quando  se  nao  misturam 
uns  com  os  outros  e  dao  chuva.  Os  cirrus,  chamados  tambem 
rabos-de-gallo,  sao  as  nuvens  mais  elevadas.  Annunciam  mu- 
dan^a  de  tempo:  chuva  no  verao,  e  frio  ou  g6lo  no  inverno. 

Os  stratus  veem-se  em  geral  ao  p6r-do-sol,  perto  do  hori- 
zonte.  Os  nimbus  chamam-se  vulgarmente  nuvens  de  chuva, 
e  sao  conhecidos  ainda  pOr  aguaceiros. 

(Trindade  Coelho:  Terceiro  Livro  de  Leitura.) 


266  Lesson  5. 

ConTersa<^ao. 

Como  se  chama  a  mulher  de  um  abegao?  de  urn  archi- 
duque?  de  um  barao?  de  um  camponfis?  de  um 
cidadao  ?  de  um  conde  ?  de  um  czar  ?  de  um  duque  ? 
de  um  embaixador?'  de  um  imperador?  de  um 
marques  ?  de  um  principe  ?  de  um  rei  ?  de  um  sultSo  ? 
de  um  visconde? 

Qual  6  a  forma  feminina  de  doutor,  auctor,  artista,  in- 

t^rprete,  hospede,  mestre,  deus^  martyr,  conviva,  in- 

digena  ? 
Como  se  chama  a  fSmea  do  bode?  do  boi?  do  cao?  do 

carneiro?  do  cavallo?   do  gallo?   do  pato?   do  leao? 

do  pavao?  do  peni?  do  veado?  do  l6bo? 


Fifth  Lesson. 

Formation  of  the  Plural  of  the  Nouns 

(continued). 

§  16.  Difference  of  meaning  between  the  singular 
and  plural  forms. 

(a)  Besides  those  nouns  mentioned  in  §  15  and 
other  analogous  words,  there  are  such  the  Plural  of 
which  has  a  second  meaniug  besides  that  of  the  Sin- 
gular.    Please  to  notice: 

a  artna  the  weapon,  arm  as  armas  arms,  weapons 

a  hexiga  the  bladder  as  bexigas  small-pox 

a  cdrte  the  court  as  Cdrtes  House  of  Commons 

a  entranha  the  bowels  as  entranhas  heart,  character 
ft  f^i-ia  the   pay^   salary^   list      as  fh'ias  holidays 

of  appointments 

0  folle  the  pair  of  bellows  os  folles  bagpipe 

a  fonte  the  spring  as  forties  temples 

0  ghiero  the  gender  os  gSneros  victuals 

a  letra  the  letter,  character  as  letras  literature 

o  midlo  the  crumb,  brain  os  midlos  brains  • 

0  dculo  the  telescope  os  dculos  spectacles 

0  zelo  the  zeal  os  zelos  jealousy 

a  venta  the  nostril  as  ventas  nose 

a  vispera  the  eve  as  vhperas  vespers. 


Formation  of  the  Plural  of  Nouns.  267 

(b)  Some  substantives  indicate  in  the  singular  form 
the  male  individual  and  in  the  plural  the  totality  of 
the  respective  male  and  female  persons: 

0  pat  the  father  os  pais  the  parents 

o  filho  the  son  os  filhos  the  children 

0  irmdo  the  brother  os   irmaos   the  brothers    and 

sisters 
0  criado  the  man-servant  os  criados  the  men-  and  maid- 

servants 
o  avo  the  grandfather  os  avds  the  grandfather  and 

grandmother 
0  Ho  the  uncle  os  tios  the  uncle  and  aunt 

0  conde  the  count  os  condes  count  and  countess 

0  hdmem  the  man  os  hdmens  mankind. 

§  17.  For  the  Plural  of  the  Compound  Words 
sure  and  satisfying  rules  cannot  be  given.  However,  it 
may  be  noticed  that: 

(a)  those  words  compound  by  an  unalterable  par- 
ticle and  a  noun,  add  an  -5  to  the  latter:  antedataSy 
sohrenomes,  ahaixo-assignados; 

(b)  those  compound  by  a  verb  and  a  noun,  add 
the  -s  of  the  plural  only  to  the  noun:  passa-tempos, 
porta-handeiras^  guarda-chuvas,  girasoes^  quebramares ; 

(c)  words  compound  of  two  nouns  add  the  -s  only 
to  the  last:  guarda-portoes^  beiramares,  coiive-flores, 
mestre-salas.  On  the  contrary :  a  porta-cocheira  (=  2^orta 
de  cocheira),  portas-cocheiras;  tenentes-generaes;  tenentes- 
coroneis;  capitdes-tenentes. 

(d)  Those  formed  of  a  substantive  and  an  adjective 
take  the  -s  of  the  plural  partly  only  at  the  end,  partly 
for  both  elements — e.g.:  as  aguardentes,  os  cantochdlos, 
as  mdo-cheiaSy  os  meio-dias^  as  meia-noites,  os  salvo-con- 
du^tos.     But:  os  amores-perfeitos;  os  cavallos-marinhos. 

(e)  Those  formed  of  two  verbs  take  the  -s  at  the 
end:  os  bule-bules,  os  vae-vens. 

(f)  Of  nouns  compound  of  three  words,  those  joined 
by  de  generally  take  the  plural  form  for  the  first  word, 
this  being  a  substantive;  the  others  add  the  -s  on  their 
end:  os  paus  de  cabelleiro]  os  paus  de  lacre;  but  mal- 
me-queres. 


268  Lesson  5. 

§  18.     Observations  on  the  Pronunciation  of  the 
Plural  of  Certain  Nouns. 

A  certain  mimber  of  substantives  ending  in  -o, 
whose  accented  vowel  of  the  penultima  is  a  close  6  /o/, 
change  this  6  in  the  plural  into  open  6  [dJ — e.g. :  o  6vo 
fovt^  the  egg,  ovos  fovuf]  (cf.  Part.  I,  §  74). 

These  substantives  to  which  belongs  also  avo  are: 
abrolho  cliff,  rock,  avo  grandfather,  cachopo  boy;  cardgo 
kernel,  atone;  choco  cuttle-fish,  brooding,  adj.:  hatched; 
0  choro  weeping,  composto  mixture,  corcovo  jump,  ca- 
priole, corno  horn,  coro  choir,  chorus,  corpo  body,  corvo 
raven,  despojo  cover,  destrogo  ruins,  escolho  reef,  esforgo 
effort,  esposo  husband  (pi.  also  esposos  besides  espdsos)^ 
estdrvo  hindrance,  fogo  to  fire,  fdl(e)go  breath,  rest,  fdrno 
oven,  foro  jurisdiction,  forro  lining,  fosso  ditch,  imposta 
duties,  jogo  play,  miolo  brains,  olho  eye,  osso  bone,  dvo 
egg^  pescogo  neck,  pogo  well,  porco  pore,  porto  harbour, 
posto  post,  pdvo  i^eoiple,  preposto  or  proposto  substitute, 
reforgo  supply,  renovo  shoot,  spring,  rogo  demand,  soro 
whey,  serum,  soccorro  succour,  supposto  supposition, 
iijolo  brick,  tdjo  gorse,  tordo  throstle,  torno  lathe, 
tremdco  grain  of  lapine,  troco  small  coin,  trogo  stump, 
fragment,  body  of  soldiers,  etc. 

Thus:  ahrolhos^  avos,  cachopos,  carogos  etc. 

This  modification  does  not  take  place  in  the  words 
adorno  ornament,  a  tire,  amor  love,  holsa  purse,  holso 
pocket,  estojo  case,  box,  folha  leaf,  folho  flounce,  frill, 
globo  globe,  gosdo  grease,  fat,  go^m  cap,  gorro  hood, 
cape,  goso  joy,  enjoyment;  gorto  taste;  gota  drop;  molho 
sauce,  tronco  trunk,  stump;  thus:  adornos,  holsos,  esto^ 
jos,  etc. 

14.  Thema. 

Among  the  persons  who  assisted  at  the  funeral  (exequies) 
cf  the  brother  and  sister,  there  were  bopides  their  parents, 
their  grandparents  and  the  servants,  more  than  a  hundred 
men,  but  only  a  few  women.  All  men  are  mortal.  Of  what 
died  the  children  of  the  count  and  countess?  They  are  said 
to  have  succumbed  to  the  measles  or  small-pox.  The  arms 
over  the  chief  entry  has  been  covered  with  crape  in  sign 
of  mourning.  —  To  make  these  tasks  correct,  every  care  is  to 


Formation  of  the  Plural  of  Noons.  269 

be  employed  and  particular  attention  to  be  bestowed  upon  gender 
and  number  of  the  nouns.  The  shopkeeper  of  the  next  corner 
sells  victuals  and  other  goods  of  all  kind?  .  I  bought  there 
5  pounds  of  sugar,  2  kilos  of  coffee,  3  litres  of  wine,  and 
6^3  meters  of  ribljon,  as  also  half  a  dozen  pairs  of  gloves 
and  three  dozens  and  a  half  of  handkerchiefs.  —  In  Lisbon 
there  are  in  the  halls  (=  portal  or  vestihulo)  of  the  better 
houses  doorkeepers  sitting  behind  ornamental  tables,  to  give 
information  to  the  visitors  and  to  receive  and  hand  over  to 
the  residents  visiting-cards  or  any  kind  of  commissions.  The 
Portuguese  peasants  like  to  eat  boiled  grains  of  lupine.  (The) 
tastes  differ:  while  some  like  pork,  others  prefer  eggs, 
and  others  still  like  sauces  best.  The  Portuguese  woods  are 
full  of  gorse,  a  prickly  plant  of  which  there  are  various  kinds. 
These  gorses  generally  grow  on  dry  ground  and  bear  (==  dar) 
yellow  blossoms. 

15.  Versao. 

Todas  as  segundas  e  quintas-feiras  os  guarda-livros  d^aquel- 
las  casas  d'exporta^ao  teem  mais  que  fazer  do  que  rios  outros 
dias  da  semana,  por  serem  v^speras  da  partida  dos  paqufites. 
As  vezes  nao  bastam  os  esfor^os  d'esses  empregados  para 
senhorear  todos  os  trabalhos,  mas  6  preciso  pedir  ref6r(jo  aos 
prepCstos  e  mais  empregados.  Destes  troQos  d'arvore  reben- 
taram  alguns  renovos,  e  por  entre  estes  destro^os  de  tijolos  e 
esses  abrolhos  ha  muitas  gavinhas  de  hera  agarradas  as  fendas 
pelas  adhesivas.  Os  zfilos  muitas  vezes  sao  signal,  ou  de  poucos 
miolos  ou  de  poucas  entranhas.  Chama-se  Cortes  ao  parla- 
mento  portuguSs,  assim  como  ao  edificio,  onde  estd  o  parla- 
mento;  de  ordinario  sao  abertas  no  dia  dois  de  Janeiro,  Em 
Lisboa  ha  guarda-portoes  em  todas  as  melhores  casas  particu- 
lares.  Nos  mercados  compram-se  muito  baratas  todas  as  hor- 
tali^as,  taes  como  as  couve-flores,  os  brdccolos,  os  espinafres, 
as  az6das,  os  brfidos  e  outras  hervas;  e  os  mal-me-queres  e 
amores-perfeitos  as  mao-cheias. 

10.  Leitura. 

Tomada  de  Santarem^  (1147). 

Na  noite  do  sabbado,  destinada  para  o  assalto,  tornava-se 
probabilissimo  que  os  atalaias.e  roldas^  estiv.essem  descuidados. 
Se,  como  parece,  o  calculo   foi   este,   cdlculo  na  verdade  nao 

^  Santarem,  a  town  upon  the  Tagus  in  the  province  of 
Estremadura,  the  ancient  Scalabis  of  the  Eomans  and  once  one 
of  the  strongest  bulwarks  of  the  Saracens. 

'  Molda,  antiquated,  modernly  ronda  =  patrol. 


270  Lesson  5. 

exempto  de  perfidia^  as  esperaiKjas  dos  christaos  falharam  em 
parte.  No  logar  onde  habitualmente  nao  havia  sentinellas, 
descobriam-se  agora  duas,  que  mutuamente  se  espertavam 
a  vozes. 

A  pequena  hoste,  cuja  rectaguarda  o  principe  ^  fechava, 
parou  entao  no  meio  de  uma  seara,  esperando  que  os  vigias 
adormecessem  com  a  modorra  do  quarto  d'alva.  Largas  horas 
Ihes  deviam  parecer  estas  em  que  esperavam;  mas  os  dois 
musulmanos  cederam  por  fim  ao  somno.  Pelo  tecto  da  casa 
de  um  olleiro  contigua  ao  muro,  Mem  Ramires  coseu-se  com 
este  e  procurou  com  a  ponta  da  lan^a  segurar  uma  escada  ^s 
ameias;  mas,  falhando-lhe  o  tiro,  a  edcada  caiu  com  grande 
ruido.  Nao  titubeoa  elle  entre  a  vida  e  a  morte  e,  curvando-se, 
ergueu  sobre  os  hombros  um  soldado,  que  lan^ou  as  maos  a, 
aresta  da  muralha,  e,  pulando  acima,  p6de  amarrar  a  escada 
a  uma  das  ameias.  N'um  relance  o  alferes  subiu  com  o  pendao 
real  e  hasteou-o.  Quasi  a  um  temgo  Mem  Ramires  se  achou 
ao  pe  d'elle.  Tudo  isto  foi  obra  de  um  instante;  mas  o  ruido 
despertara,  de  feito,  as  sentinellas.  Olharam :  o  pavoroso  estan- 
darte  do  tyranno  Ibu  Errik  estava  la  como  o  espectro  da  morte. 
Estupefactos,  perguntaram  ambos  com  voz  tomada:  —  Quern 
sois?  —  Fora  impossivel  enganal-os.  Tr6s  vozes  clamaram  em 
brados  confusos:  Nazarenos!  TrSs  eram  tambem  os  christaos 
que  se  achavam  no  adarve.  Mem  Rodrigues  respondeu  com 
o  grito  de  guerra:  —  Santiago  e  rei  Aflfonso!     (Continua.) 

ConyersaQao. 

Que  ^  Santarem?     Como  se  chamava  antigamente? 
Que   importancia   tinha  sob   o   dominio    dos    saracenoa 

(mouros)  ? 
Por  quem  foi  tomada?     E  em  que  anno? 
Quem  6ra  Afifonso  Henriques?     E  quando  reinava? 
Qual  era  o  calculo  dos  assaltadores  ? 
Quem  deu  o  primeiro  assalto?  e  como? 
Qual  foi  o  resultado  d'essa  tentativa? 
Como  reparou  Mem  Ramires  o  mallogro? 
Como  se  descreve  o  encontro  dos   portugufisens  com   os 

saracenos  ? 

»  Aflfonso  Henriques,  first  king  of  Portugal,  1128—1185. 


Use  of  the  Article.  271 

Sixth  Lesson. 

Use  of  the  Article. 

§  19.  The  definite  Article  (artigo  definido)  is  not 
only  employed  before  nouns  (nomes  communs]  but  also 
in  the  following  cases: 

(a)  It  substantivates  any  other  particle,  any  letter 
or  even  a  whole  sentence  employed  as  a  subject,  attri- 
bute, or  object,  nameh^: 

(a)  attributive  adjectives:  o  hello,  o  licito,  o 
sublime; 

(P)  infinitives:  A  naturesa  fez  o  comer  para  o 
viver.  0  gahares-te  de  sdhio  mostra  seres  igno- 
rante; 

(t)  prepositions:  adverbs,  conjunctions,  letters— 
e.g.:  Defender  o  contra  d^uma  questdo.  0 
coma,  0  qua/ndo,  o  porque^  o  A(hc) ; 

(b)  phrases:  0  nao  posso  dos  negligentes  e  o  nuo 
quero  dos  contumazes,  valem  quasi  o  mesmo. 

(b)  It  changes  appellatives  into  proper  names;  for 
instance  o  Forto  (=  harbour);  a  Extremadura  (=  the 
extreme  border);  a  Beira  (=  brink,  bank);  o  Funchal 
(=  a  field  set  with  fennel) ;  a  Bahia  (==  bay) ;  o  Bio  de 
Janeiro ;  a  Granja  {=  farm,  grange),  o  EspinJio  (=  spine) 
Portuguese  bathing-places;  a  Terceira  (=  the  third), 
island  of  the  Azores. 

(c)  On  the  other  hand,  it  changes  proper  names  into 
appellatives :  os  Alhaq;uerques,  os  Castros,  os  Camdes — i.e. 
prominent  naval  leaders  such  as  Affonso  d' Albuquer- 
que and  D.  Joao  de  Castro,  or  famous  poets  like  Camoes; 
for  instance :  Gil  Vicente  foi  chamado  o  Plauto  portugues 
Gil  Vicente  was  called  the  Portuguese  Plautus. 

N.B.— Also  family  names  indicating  totality  may  be  em- 
ployed in  the  plural. 

(d)  The  definite  Article  is  also  employed  with  proper 
names  preceded  by  an  adjective  (young,  old,  little,  poor 
included)  or  followed  by  an  apposition — e.g. :  o  eloquente 
Cicero ;  Guilherme  o  Conquistador,  young  Henry  o  joven 
Henrique. 


272  Lesson  6. 

Are  excepted  from  this  rule  santo  (Santo)  and  sdo 
(Sao)  Saint,  as  also  the  ordinary  numbers  employed 
with  names  of  regents,  and  several  other  appositions: 
Santo  Antonio  e  o  padroeiro  de  Lisboa.  A  hihlia,  tradu- 
Ma  por  Sdo  Jeronymo,  e  conhecida  pclo  nome  de,  «  Vid- 
gata^.  Luis  Quatorze,  Carlos-Quinto^  Alexandre  Magno\ 
Deus  Poderoso. 

(e)  The  definite  article  is  employed  with  the  names 
of  the  seasons :  a  primavera  Spring,  no  verdo  in  Summer, 
durante  o  inverno  during  winter. 

(f)  Sometimes  the  definite  article  is  found  without 
a  substantive,  which  is  to  be  substituted.  It  then  often 
corresponds  to  our  that^  tJwse.  Ex. :  As  merces  que  receM 
sao  manifestos  a  todos;  aos  de  fora  com  esponto  da  sua 
grandesay  aos  de  casa  com  inveja  de  minJia  fortuna. 

(g)  Contrary  to  the  English,  the  definite  article  is 
generally  employed  before  a  possessive  adjective,  not 
indicating  parentship :  o  meu  jardim,  a  vossa  casa  etc. ; 
but  minha  prima,  seu  marido  etc. 

N.J3.— This  rule  is  not  alway  strictly  observed. 

The  word  indicating  possession  being  a  pronoun, 
it  has  no  article :  Este  livro  e  meu  [this  hook  is  mine) ; 
esse  e  teu^  aqiielle  n&o  e  nosso. 

(h)  The  definite  article  is  employed  with  parts  of 
the  body  or  its  clothing,  bodily  qualities  or  states, 
and  also  wherever  the  relation  between  possessor  and 
possession  is  evident  (in  English  there  is  employed  the 
indefinite  article  or  the  possessive  adjective  instead).. 

Mia  tern  as  cabellofi  lour  as  e  as  olhos  pretos. 

She  has  fair  hair  and  black  eyes. 

Falava  corn  a-  cabega  erguida  e  o  brago  estendido. 

He  spoke  with  his  head  raised  and  his  arm  extended. 

Maria  i  muito  parecida  com  a  mde. 

Mary  is  much  resembling  her  jnother. 

Tiraram  as  chapeus. 

They  took  their  hats  off. 

Calgdmos  as  lavas  we  put  our  gloves  on. 

Ella  tern  a  garganta  inflammada. 

She  has  her  throat  inflamed. 


Use  of  the  Article,  273 

Elle  tern  a  bocca  rasgada,  as  pernas  compridas,  a  cinta 

delgada. 
He  has  a  large  mouth,  long  legs,  a  fine  waist. 
Ter  uma  dor  de  denies,  uma  ddr  de  cabSga. 
To  have  a  tooth-ache,  a  head-ache,  as  in  English,  but  in 

the  plural  form:  ter  ddres  de  denies,  de  cabega, 

§  20.     The  definite  Article  is  omitted: 

(a)  before  proper  names  (cf.  however  §  19,  (b),  (c) 
and  (d). 

N.B. — In  familiar  speech  the  article  is  often  employed 
before  names  of  persons :  0  Carlos  fox  levar  a  carta.  0  Ber- 
nardino Machado  ^  republicano.  Also  the  article  may  be  put 
before  the  names  of  well-known  artists— e.g.,  As  Bddas  de 
Cana,  pintadas  pelo   Veronese,   e    a  Kermesse  do  Rubens  .  .  . 

Exc. :  Are  excepted  from  this  rule  the  names  of  the 
seas,  rivers,  mountains  and  continents,  as  well  as  certain 
countries  and  provinces  which  are  always  employed 
with  the  article  (o  Atldntico,  o  Mcmdego,  o  CaramulOy 
a  Europa^  a  Alemanlia^  a  Japdo,  a  Extremadura  etc.; 
but  without  the  article:  Portugal^  Trds-os-Montes).  Also 
the  article  is  found  always  before  a  plural  name  of 
countries:  as  tndias;  os  (dois)  Algarves;  os  Est  ados 
Unidos  (do  Brasil)  etc. 

(b)  before  houns,  especially  abstract  ones,  which  (a) 
are  quite  generally  employed,  or  (p)  as  an  attribute — 
e.g. :  Pobrejsa  nao  e  vileza  poverty  is  no  crime.  Fadecer 
por  fbrga  e  fraqueza;  n&o  desanimar  nos  trahalhos^  neces- 
sidade.  Yet  you  may  also  read  and  say:  Inveja  e  urn 
vicio  envy  is  a  vice. 

(c)  in  vocatives — i.e.,  addressing  persons  or  personi- 
fied beings :  Filhos  (my  sons)  jd  sei  que  ndo  posso  4u^ar 
muUo.  Hervas  do  prado^  vossa  vida  e  morte  e  innocente 
Ye  herbs  of  the  meadow,  your  life  and  death  are  in- 
nocent. 

(d)  with  the  names  of  the  months:  Estamos  em 
novevifiber,  Foi  em  margo  do  anno  passado  que  .  .  , 
However :  Todo  o  (mez  de)  Janeiro  esteve  frigidissimo. 

(e)  with  the  names  of  diseases,  generally  employed 
in  English  with  the  article:  Elle  tern  hexigas  (the  small- 
pox), tinha  saranipo  (the  measles) :  tem  typho  he  has  the 
typhus. 

Portuguese  Conyersatlon-Gramiuar.  18 


274  Lesson  6. 

§  21.  The  article,  though  generally  omitted  before 
names  of  islands  and  towns,  is  employed: 

(a)  when  they  are  accompanied  by  an  adjective  or 
some  other  attributive  determination — e.g. :  0  terremoto 
de  1755  destruiu  quasi  completamente  a  velha  Lishda;  da 
qual  a  Lishda  d'Jioje  e  muito  differente., 

(b)  with  those  proper  names  formed  by  an  appel- 
lative (cf.  §  19,  (b):  a  Madeira,  a  Guarda  (town  of 
Portugal);  0  Cairo  (formed  after  the  Arabian). 

§  22.  Contrary  to  the  EngHsh,  the  definite  article 
is  generally  employed: 

(a)  before  material  and  abstract  nouns  in  the  nomi- 
native (as  a  subject,  sometimes  also  as  a  predicate).  0 
ar  e  mais  leve  do  que  a  dgua  air  is  lighter  than  water; 
Cf.:  0  vinJio  e  feito  de  uvas  .  .  .  esse  liquido  e  (o)  vinho 
...  0  vinagre  e  vinho  azedo  .  .  .  o  vinagre  e  feito  de 
vinho  .  .  .  Tambem  se  fas  vinagre  de  cerveja  .  .  .  da  beter- 
raha  se  faz  assucar.  0  chumbo  e  mais  pesado  que  o  ouro. 
0  medo  6  mau  conselheiro; 

(b)  before  nouns  which,  in  contrast  to  §  20,  (b), 
are  employed  in  a  restrictive  meaning — e.g.: 

A  pobreza  de  bens  materiaes  nao   e  villeza,   mas   sim  a 

pobriza  de  dignidade. 
Poverty  of  material  goods  is   no  disgrace,   but  poverty 

of  dignity  is. 

Antes  a  pobreza  honrada, 

Do  que  a  riqueza  roubada. 

Rather  honourable  poverty  than  robbed  riches. 

A  rega  ou  a  chuva  excessivas  prejiddicam  as  plantas. 

Excessive  watering  or  rains  damage  the  plants. 

(c)  before  the  cardinal  points  North  and  South  and 
before  the  names  of  the  feasts— e.g.:  para  o  sul,  para 
0  norte,  ao  sul,  ao  norte ;  e.g. :  da  norte  para  o  sul  from 
North  to  South;  but:  de  teste  or  d'este^  a  (or  ao)  deste 
from  East  to  West;  pela  Pdsc(h)oa  about  Easter,  ao 
Natal  at  Christmas; 

(d)  with  collective  names  of  corporations,  govern- 
ments, the  names  of  sciences,  rehgious  creeds,  seasons^ 
metals,  etc.,  as: 

nobility  a  nobrSza  monarchy  o  monarchia 

government  o  govSrno  .  history  a  histdria 


Use  of  the  Article.  275 

geography  a  geographia  Judaism  o  judaismo 

philosophy  a  philosophia  winter  o  inverno 

posterity  a  posteridade  spring  a  primavet^a 

mankind  a  humanidade  gold,  silver  o  ouro,  a  prata 

Christianity  o  christianismo  iron,  steel  o  ferro,  o  uqo, 

(e)  With  nouns  denoting  a  whole  class,  genus,  or 
species,  as: 

Man  is  mortal  o  homem  e  mortal. 
The  voices  of  animals  are  very  different. 
As  vozes  dos  animaes  sao  muito  differentes. 
The  rich  (men)  are  not  always  happy. 
Os  ricos  ndo  sao  sempre  felizes. 

(f)  before  the  following  and  other  nouns  taken  in 
a  general  sense: 

Man  0  homem  hell  o  inferno 

men  os  homens  tea  o  did 

Nature  a  natureza  dinner  o  jantar 

heaven  o  ceu  breakfast  o  almogo 

earth  a  terra  supper  a  ceia. 

(g)  also  in  compositions  of  adjectives  and  abstract 
nouns,  which  in  English  are  used  without  the  article, 
it  cannot  be  omitted  (cf,  (b)  examples) — e.g.: 

human  understanding  o  intendimento  humano 

human  power  a  fdrga  humuna  , 

human  nature  a  natureza  humana 

human  life  a  vida  do  homem 

high  life  a  alta  roda  or  sociedade 

ancient  history  a  historia  antiga 

modern  history  a  histdria  moderna 

universal  history  a  histdria  universal 

high  treason  a  alta  traigdo 

royal  favour  a  real  graga 

divine  religion  a  divina  (or  santa)  religiao 

English  history  a  histdria  inglesa 

English  poetry  a  poesia  inglesa 

kingly  power  o  poder  real. 

(h)  "Town"  in  the  terms  "to  go  to  town,  to  live 
in  town,"  etc.,  is  ir  a  (viver  na)  cidade.  Also  the  names 
of  streets,  squares  and  public  buildings  are  employed 
with  the  article.  A  rua  de  Garrett,  do  Ouro,  Garrett 
Street,  Gold  Street;  a  Praga  de  Dom  Pedro  Quarto,  o 
Rocio  Rocio  Square;  Largo  de  Camoes  Camoes  Place. 

18* 


276  Lesson  6. 

(i)  Geographical  names  are,  contrary  lo  the  English, 
generally  employed  with  the  article  (cf.  §  1,  (a),  3;  (b),  2 
§  20  (a)  Exc.  and  §  21):  a  Inglaterra  England,  o  Vesuvio 
Vesuvius,  a  Alsdcia  Alsace,  a  Britanha  Brittany,  etc. 
The  terms  Western,  Southern,  etc.,  which  form  one  idea 
with  the  following  names,  are  rendered  in  Portuguese 
by  do  oeste,  do  sid,  etc.  or  occidental,  oriental,  septentrional, 
meridional — e.g.:  Eastern  Africa  a  Africa  de  leste  or 
oriental.  Southern  Portugal  o  Portugal  meridional  or 
de  sul. 

(k)  as  in  English  the  names  of  the  months  are 
employed  without  article,  if  not  meant  in  a  restrictive 
sense:  Janeiro,  geralmente  e  frio:  o  Janeiro  d'este  anno 
esteve  excessivamente  frio. 

(1)  with  the  article  are  employed  todo  all,  the  whole, 
every,  ambos,  ambas  both,  and  qual  which,  when  rela- 
tive. Todo  0  pais  the  whole  country;  todo  o  liomem 
every  man,  o  mesmo  autor  o  qual  jd  citei  the  same 
author  whom  I  cited  already.  Todos  os  mares  os  quaes 
percorri  All  the  seas  I  ran  through.  Ambos  os  irmdos, 
ambos  as  minhas  mdos  both  the  brothers,  both  my  hands, 
(m)  The  article  is  employed  in  certain  idiomatic 
expressions,  as: 

dar  08  bans  dias  to  say  good  morning 
*  dar  as  boas  festas  (os  parabens)  to  send  the  compliments 

of  the  season,  to  felicitate 

dar  OS  pSsames  a  alguem  to  condole  with  a  person 

fazer  as  suas  despedidas  to  bid  good-bye 

pela  manhd,  pela  tarde  in  the  morning,   in    the  after- 
noon 

ds  sete  haras  at  7  o'clock 

ao  meio-dia  at  midday 

saber  o  portugues  to   know  Portuguese   (cf. :  falar  par" 
tuguis). 

a  maioria,  os  mats  dos  homens  most  men 

as  mais  das  vizes  mostly 

viver  da  muo  d  bdca  to  live  from  hand  to  mouth. 

ds  armas!  to  arms  I 

17.  Tema. 

The  ostrich  has  long  legs,  a  long  neck,  and  very  short 
wings.  The  fox  has  a  more  slender  form  than  the  wolf.  My 
children  have  fair  hair  and  blue  eyes.  Do  you  know  that 
girl  with  the  brown  eyes?    Yes,  I  know   her;   she   is   the 


Use  of  the  Article.  277 

daughter  of  a  German  in  Alsace.  In  Germany  people  have 
mostly  light  eyes;  the  more  towards  south,  the  more  dark 
eyes  are  met  with.  In  Northern  Europe  most  persons  have 
flaxen  hair.  America  is  bathed  in  the  east  by  the  Atlantic 
Sea,  and  in  the  west  by  the  Pacific.  Do  you  learn  French? 
Not  yet;  I  shall  learn  it  as  soon  as  I  know  Portuguese.  I 
thought  I  had  already  heard  you  speaking  Portuguese.  In- 
deed, but  I  do  not  yet  know  it  well.  Folar,  from  the  French 
poularde  (=  fattened  poultry),  is  a  present  given  in  Portugal 
at  Easter,  in  some  places  also  at  Christmas.  At  Christmas  time 
you  may  send  the  compliments  of  the  season  from  Christmas 
Eve  until  Epiphany  (dia  dos  [tres]  reis  [magos]).  I  wish  you 
a  happy  New  Year  with  all  my  heart  (see  §  14).  My  sister 
has  her  throat  inflamed  and  my  friend  has  a  head-ache. 
January  was  very  cold.  Japan  is  now  a  great  Power.  The 
Emperor  of  China  died  young. 

18.  Versao. 

Portugal  continental  e  insular. 

Portugal,  a  Lusitania  dos  antigos,  e  um  dos  estados  da 
Europa  occidental.  Elle  occupa  quasi  toda  a  parte  d'oeste  da 
peninsula  iberica,  tendo  por  limites  ao  norte  (N.)  e  a  leste 
(E.)  0  reino  de  (a)  Espanha,  ao  sul  (S.)  e  a  oeste  (0.  or  W.)  o 
oceano.  0  sen  maior  comprimento,  desde  Chaves  junto  a 
Melga90  ate  ao  cabo  de  Santa  Maria  no  Algarve,  6  de  103 
leguas,  a  sua  maior  largura  de  nascente  a  poente  desde  Campo 
Maior  at^  ao  cabo  da  Roca,  e  de  44  leguas.  A  superficie  6 
de  3150  16guas  quadradas.  A  popula9ao  no  continente  6 
pouco  mais  de  5  milhoes.  A  capital  6  a  cidade  de  Lisbda 
sobre  o  Tejo.  Outras  cidades  importantes  sao:  o  Porto, 
Coimbra,  Vizeu,  Braga,  Setiibal.  Comprehende  este  reino, 
al^m  do  continente,  as  ilhas  chamadas  adjacentes,  que  sSo  as 
dos  Azores,  da  Madeira  (vulgarmente  denominada  «a  Ilha>)  e 
Porto  Santo.  Outras  ilhas  sSo  o  archipelago  de  Cabo  Verde, 
as  ilhas  de  Sao  Thom6  e  Principe.  0  archipelago  de  Cabo 
Verde  forma  dois  grupos,  a  saber:  o  de  Barlavento  ao  norte 
que  se  compoe  das  ilhas  de  Santo  Antao,  Santa  Luzia,  Sao 
Vicente;  Sao  Nicolau,  Sal,  Boa  Vista;  e  o  de  Sotavento  ao 
sul,  0  qual  consta  das  ilhas  de  Sao  Thiago,  Maio,  Fogo  e 
Brava.     Na  Ocea,nia  ha  a  ilha  de  Timor,  que  serve  de  degrSdo. 

Conyersat^ao. 

Onde  esta  (ou  flea)  situado  Portugal? 
De  que  peninsula  faz  parte? 
Quaes  sao  os  sens  limites? 
Qual  6  0  sen  maior  comprimento? 


278  Lesson  7. 

E  qual  e  a  sua  maior  largura? 

Qual  6  a  sua  snperficie? 

De  que  mimero  6  a  popula^ao? 

Quaes  sao  as  cidades  mais  importantes  ? 

Quaes  sao  as  chamadas  ilhas  adjacentes? 

De   quantos    grupo§  se   compoe   o   archipelago   de  Cabo 

Verde? 
E  quaes  sao? 


Seventh  Lesson. 

Use  of  th6  Article  (continued). 
§  23.    The  Definite  Article  before  the  Attribute. 

(a)  The  nouns  nome,  titulo,  mes,  falta  are  joined  to 
the  following  noun  or  proper  name  (if  this  be  not  a  geni- 
tive) by  de  without  article,  o  nome  de  Defensor^  titulo 
de  rei^  mes  de  ahril,  a  falta  d'dgua.  (Cf. :  0  titulo  do  rei 
de  Portugal  era  ''FideUssimo" ;  Mingua  e  a  falta  do  ne- 
cessdrio), 

(b)  The  appellatives  ^7/^a,  cidade,  villa,  reino,  estado, 
provincia,  porto,  rua,  imperio,  regido,  serrjx,  caho,  etc.,  are 
joined  to  the  following  proper  name  by  de  with  or 
without  the  article  (see  Task  18). 

N.B.— In  a  mere  enumeration  of  names  the  appellative 
with  de  and  article  is  omitted  (id.). 

The  employment  of  the  article  and  its  form  after 
these  appellatives  depends  on  the  following  proper  name 
being  used,  w^hen  alone,  with  or  without  the  article, 
and  whether  this  be  in  the  masculine  or  feminine,  sin- 
gular or  plural  form — e.g.: 

A  ilha  de  Timor,  do  Fogo,  do  Haiti,  da  Madeira^ 
da  Trindade,  as  ilhas  de  Hyercs,  dos  Agores,  das  Ca- 
ndrias.  Yet  withoi-it  article:  a  ilha  Terceira  (i.e.,  the 
third); 

A  ddade  de  Setubal,  do  Forto,  do  Funchal,  da 
Guarda,  da  Figueira  da  F02,  de  Sao  Cosme,  das  Fedras 
Salgadas,  das  Torres  Vedras,  etc. 

The  same  with  villa,  porto,  if  these  appellatives 
are  not  a  part  of  the  proper  name — as,  for  instance,  in 
the  following: 


Use  of  the  Article.  279 

Villa  Franca,  Villa  Franca  de  Xira,  Villa  Franca 
do  Campo,  Villa  Fria,  Villa  Vigosa,  Porto- Alegre,  Porto 
Cdbreiro,  Porto  de  Mos,  Porto  da  Guarda,  etc. 

0  Cdbo^  de  Sdo  Vicente,  da  Roca,  Caho  Ddgado, 
Caho  Negro,  do  Norte,  da  Praia,  da  Boa  Esperanga,  das 
Formentas. 

A  rua  (travessa,  escada,  calgada,  praga,  o  heco,  ca- 
minho,  largo,  caes,  passadigo)  de  El-Bei,  de  Joao  de  Beus, 
de  D.  Fernando,  do  Forno  do  Tijolo,  da  Fdbrica  das 
Sedas,  das  Cavallarigas  do  Infante,  dos  Cardeaes  de  Jesus, 
do  Sodre,  do  Terreiro  Publico. 

0  itnperio  de  Allemanha,  do  Japao;  o  reino  de 
Portugal,  os  Estados  Unidos  do  Brasil,  o  iniperio  da 
India. 

As  provincias  da  Beira,  da  Estramadura,  do  Alem- 
tejo,  de  Trds-oS'Montes. 

(c)  Rio  is  always  employed  without  de  if  indi- 
cating a  river — e.g.:  o  rio  Dour 6,  o  rio  Tejo,  o  rio  Lima; 
but  0  Bio  de  Janeiro. 

§  24.     The  Definite  Article  and  the  Apposition. 

1.  A  noun  in  apposition  is  generally  employed  wit- 
hout the  article,  when  following  the  name:  A  rainha 
D.  Leonor,  regente  do  reino,  confidra  o  governo  do  Alem- 
tejo  a  D.  Jodo,  Mestre  d'Aviz.  Estivemos  no  Porto, 
cidade  episcopal,  a  segunda  da  monarchia  em  populagao. 

2.  The  apposition  is  employed  tvith  the  article  in 
the  following  cases: 

(a)  When  the  proper  name  is  preceded  by  a  title 
(not  being  Bom,  Dona,  Frei,  Sor,  etc.):  0  doutor  Nogu- 
eira;  a  menina  Maria;  o  padre  Jose.  (But  Dom  Carlos 
Berquo,  Dona  Carolina  Michaelis;  Frei  Luis  de  Sousa; 
Sor  Marianna.)  N.B. — If  these  titles  are  preceded  by 
senhor,  senliora,  ret,  rainha,  they  too  are  employed  with 
the  article: 

a  ex-rainha  Dona  Amelia,   a   ex-rei  (El-rei)  Dom  Ma- 
nuel, etc. 
A  senhor  a  Dona  Beatriz  Angela  foi  a  primeira  fnulher  em 
Portugal  que  em  1911  votou  nas  eleigdes  parlaynentares. 

^  Caho,  making  part  of  the  name,  is  written  with  a  capital 
letter,  as  also  Villa,  Porto,  Bio  in  the  same  case. 


280  Lesson  7. 

(b)  When  it  is  an  historical  addition  after  a  personal 
name,  without  being  an  ordinal  number — e.g.: 

Dom  Jodo  II  (Segundo),  o  Principe  perfeito,  iniciou  n, 
epoca  dos  grandee  descobertas  dos  Portugueses. 

(c)  As  a  superlative  (which,  not  being  one  ending 
in  -or,  may  also  follow  the  noun): 

Trindade  Coelho,  o  melhor  contista  moderno  e  um  dos 
caracteres  mais  nohres  que  Portugal  teve,  morreu  em 
9  de  agosto  1908, 

<tOs  LusiadasT>  S  o  titulo  do  poema  de  Camoes,  poita 
portugues  o  mais  cUehre  do  seu  tempo. 

(d)  When  indicating  something  notorious  or  famous. 
Foi  Vasco  de  Gama,  o  gra^ide  navegador,  que  descobriu 

0  caminho  maritimo  das  Indias. 

§  25.    The  Indefinite  Article  and  the  Predicatire 

Noun. 

1.  The  predicative  noun  is  employed  without 
article  and  preposition,  when  indicating  in  a  general 
way  a  state,  profession,  title,  parentship,  office  or  em- 
ployment, dignity,  character,  nationality,  etc.,  with  the 
verbs : 

(a)  ser,  ficar.,  fazer-se,  tomar-se,  dizer-se^  nascevy 
morrer,  parecer,  padecer  etc.     Ex.: 

Dizia-se    correligiondrio    dos    monarchistas,    para  ficar 

deputado. 
He  passed  himself  off  as  a  partisan  of  the  monarchists, 

in  order  to  remain  a  deputy. 
Meu  amigo  S  portugues  e  auctor;  tomou-se  saoio. 
My  friend  is  a  Portuguese  and  an   author;  he  became 

a  learned  man. 
Bern  que  tivesse  nascido  filho  do  povo,  morreu  presidente. 
Though  he  was  born  a  child  of  this  vulgar,   he  died  a 

president. 

(b)  nomear  to  nominate,  appoint,  acclamar^  pro- 
clamar  to  proclaim,  eleger  to  elect,  crer^  consider ar,  jul- 
gar  to  think,  armar  cavdlleiro  to  create  a  knight. 

Dom  Jodo  I.  foi  eleito  Mestre  da  ordem  de  Aviz  e  armado 
cavalleiro  por  seu  pae,  (o  rei)  Dom  Pedro  I.  Em 
1385  foi  acclamado  rei  de  Portugal. 


Use  of  the  Article.  281 

2.  The  predicative  noun  is  employed  without  ar- 
ticle, but  with  preposition  after  the  verbs  escolher  (se) 
parq,  io  chose  (to  be  chosen);  passar  por,  ser  tido  por 
to  pass  for,  to  be  taken  for ;  tomar  or  ter  por  to  think, 
consider. 

Escolheram-se  os  homens  mais  resolutos  para  comhatefites ; 

escolheu-se  para  general  um  capitao  experimentado, 
Passava  por  homem  capaz  e  recto,  sempre  o  tinha  tornado 

(or  tido)  por  tal. 

3.  The  indefinite  article  is  omitted  with  a  noun  in 
apposition,  as: 

A  Ceia  dos  Cardeaes,  comedia  por  Julio  Dantas. 
The  Cardinah'  Supper,  a  comedy  by  Julio  Dantas. 

4.  Omitted  also  on  the  title-page  of  a  book: 
Qrammdtica  portuguesa  a  Portuguese  Grammar. 
Histdria  da  Inglaterra  a  History  of  England. 

5.  Af  an  when  used  in  the  sense  of  "per"  is  ren- 
dered by  por  or  the  definite  article: 

Five  pounds  a  month  cinco  Uhras  por  (or  o)  mSs. 

So  much  a  lesson  tanto  por  (or  a)  ligao. 

To  give  so  much  a  head  dar  tanto  por  (or  a)  cabe^a. 

§  26.    Repetition  of  the  Article. 

(a)  The  article,  as  also  its  substitutes— e.g.,  the 
possessive  or  demonstrative  adjectives,  is  repeated  before 
several  nouns  or  adjectives — expressing  diversity  of 
meaning:  Vird  a  julgar  os  vivos  e  os  mortos.  Os  soldados 
moQOs  e  OS  vellios. 

(b)  The  article  is  not  repeated  when  those  words 
do  not  express  diversity,  but  similarity,  even  though 
their  gender  be  different — e.g.:  ""Entre  as  ruinas  e  mo- 
numentos  antiguissimos  que  se  encontram  ainda  pelo 
pais  . . ." 

(Concerning  the  adjective  in  the  plural  see  Lesson  9.) 

19.  Thema. 

Harbours,  bays,  capes,  provinces  and  totvns  of  Portugal, 
(See  the  map  in  the  innerside  of  the  front  cover  of  this  book.) 

Portugal  being  a  shore-land  (pais  d  beira-mar),  it  has  on 
its  coast  some  important  harbours,  where  ships  may  sail  into 


282  Lesson  7. 

and  cast  anchor  in  order  to  embark  and  disembark  passengers 
and  goods.  The  principal  harbours  of  Portugal  are:  that  of 
Lisbon,  the  best  of  all  and  one  of  the  largest  and  most  beau- 
tiful in  the  world.  There  may  enter  it  at  any  hour  of  the 
day  or  night  ships  of  any  size,  and  there  would  be  room 
for  (=  cab^r)  all  the  ships  in  the  world.  Following  the 
coast  from  north  to  south,  we  meet  with  the  following 
harbours:  that  of^  Caminha,  Vianna,  Espozende,  Pdvoa  de 
Varsim,  Leixoes,  an  artificial  hr^bour  near  the  fishing- 
villages  of  Lega  and  Mattosinhos ;  Sao  Jodo.  da  Foz  near 
Oporto;  Aveiro,  Figueira  da  Fos^  Vielray  S.  Martinho;  those 
of  (da)  Ericeira,  of  Cascaes,  a  beautiful  bay  called  "the  Por- 
tuguese Riviera";  o^  Settibal,  a  very  ancient  commercial  town 
situated  on  the  Ria^  do  Sado;  of  Sines,  Villa  Nova  de  Mil- 
fontes,  SagreSy  a  harbour  made  famous  by  the  Infarct  Dom  Hen- 
rique with  the  surname  "the  Navigator";  Lagos,  a  bay  where 
the  English  fleet  used  to  have  its  manoeuvres;  Villa  Nova  de 
Portimdo,  Faro,  Tavira,  Villa  Jieal  de  Santo  Antonio. 

As  Portugal  is  a  littoral,  the  land  stretches  now  and  then 
into  the  ocean  (tr.:  pelo  mar  dentro),  forming  greater  and 
smaller  capes  or  points.  The  principal  capes  of  Portugal  are 
the  following:  The  cape  of  Mondego,  of  Carvoeiro,  da  Boca, 
the  most  occidental  cape  of  Europe;  the  cape  of  Fspichelf 
of  Sines,  of  Saint  Vincent,  of  Santa  Maria. 

Portugal  has  eight  provinces,  each  of  which  has  its  capital: 
that  of  the  Minho,  the  most  northern  province,  is  called 
Braga;  that  of  Trds-os-Montes :  Braganga;  that  of  the  province 
of  Douro:  Oporto;  that  of  the  Beira-Alta:  Vizeu;  of  the  Beira- 
Baixa:  Guar  da;  of  Fstremadura:  Lisbon,  at  the  same  time 
capital  of  the  country;  of  Alemtejo:  £oora;  and  that  of  Al- 
garve:  Faro. 

20.  Tersao. 
Portugal  ultramaHno. 

(Vide  0  mappa  na  parte  antero-interior  da  capa  d'este  livro.) 

As  provincias  ultramarinas,  vastos  territorios  situados  na 
Africa,  Asia  e  Oceania  ^  e  sujeitos  a  um  regimen  adminastra- 
tivo  especial,  comprebendem :  na  Africa:  al^m  das  provincias 
insulares  de  Cabo- Verde  (see  Less.  18),  S.  Thome  e  Principe,  as 
continentaes   de    Guine,    Angola  e  Mozambique;  na  JLSia:    o 

*  Substitute  always  "that  of." 

2  Ria  is  the  mouth  of  a  river  enlarged  to  a  sea.  (Cf.  on 
the  map :  Sado,  Tejo;  Bia  de   Vigo  (in  Spain). 

^  Oceania  or  Oceania.  The  former  accentuation  is  scientific, 
the  latter  popular. 


Use  of  the  Article.  283 

estado  da  India  e  a  provincia  de  Macau;  na  Oceania:  o  dis- 
tricto  autonomo  de  Timor. 

A  provincia  da  Guin6  compoe-se  de  territories  na  costa 
occidental  da  Africa,  e  de  muitas  ilhas.  D'essas  ilhas,  as  mais 
importantes  sao:  Bissau,  Bolama,  Jatte,  todas  perto  da  costa; 
e  mais  ao  largo  as  12  ilhas  do  archipelago  de  Bijagos.  —  A 
provincia  de  Angola  esta  quasi  toda  no  continente  da  A.- 
frica,  pois  defronte  da  costa  apenas  tem  uma  ilha  de  areia. 
0  seu  territorio  6  enorme,  e  alguns  o  avaliam  em  urn  milhao 
e  300  mil  kilometros  quadrados.  A  capital  de  Angola  ^  a 
cidade  de  Loanda;  e  as  suas  prineipaes  povoa^oes,  alem  de 
Loanda,  sao  as  segaintes :  Cabinda,  Ambaca,  Malange,  Benguella 
e  Mossamedes.  —  Mo9ambique,  provincia  ultramarina  na  costa 
oriental  da  Africa,  e  formada  por  extensos  territories  litoraes 
e  ainda  por  muitas  ilhas  fronteiras,  proximo  e  ao  longo  da 
costa.  A  provincia  comprehende  os  districtos  de  Mo9ambique, 
Zambezia,  Inhambane  e  LourenQO  Marques  etc.  A  capital 
e  a  cidade  de  Mozambique,  situada  na  ilha  do  mesmo  nome. 
As  suas  prineipaes  povoa^oes,  alem  da  capital,  sao:  Quelimane, 
Inhambane,  Louren^o  Marques,  Sofala.  —  0  Estado  da  India 
comprehende  os  territories  de  Goa  (capital:  Nova  Goa  oa 
Pangim),  de  Damao  e  de  Dia.  A  provincia  de  Macau  d  for- 
mada de  parte  de  uma  peninsula  a  entrada  do  rio  de  Gantao,  e 
de  duas  ilhas  muito  proximas  d'aquella:  Taipa  e  Colovane.  A 
cidade  de  Macau,  capital  d'esta  provincia,  occupa  quasi  toda 
a  parte  pertugu^sa  da  peninsula  a  entrada  de  rio  de  Cantao. 
0  districte  de  Tim6r  consta  de  parte  da  ilha  de  Tim6r  e  de 
uma  pequena  ilha,  chamada  de  Pulo-Cambing.  A  ilha  de  TimOr 
^  uma  das  ilhas  do  archipelago  de  Sonda,  archipelago  que 
alguns  geographos  modernos  entendem  pertencer  a  Asia  e  nae 
a  Oceania.  Dilly,  capital  do  districte  portugu6s  de  TimOr  fica 
na  costa  septentrional  da  ilha. 

Foi  durante  o  reinade  de  D.  Joao  I  e  sub  a  direcgao  de 
D.  Henrique  o  NavegEfdor,  seu  filho,  que  se  descebriram  mais 
de  360  l^guas  da  costa  africana,  desde  o  cabo  Bejador  at4  a  Serra 
Leoa,  e  as  formosas  ilhas  do  Atl^ntico,  de  que  foram  ventu- 
rosas  primicias  as  ilhas  de  S.  Miguel,  S*^-  Maria,  Terceira, 
Azores,  Porto  Santo  e  Madeira. 

C.onversaQao. 

Quaes  sao  os  portos  prineipaes  de  Portugal? 

Quaes  sao  os  sens  prineipaes  cabos,   seguindo   do   norte 

para  o  sul? 
Quantas  provincias  tem  esse  reino? 
Quaes  sao  os  nomes  d'ellas  e  das  suas  capitaes? 
Que  se  entende  por  Portugal  ultramarine? 


284  Lesson  8. 

Quaes  sSo  as  suas  colonias  africanas? 

Como   se   chamam   as   principaes  povoa^oes  de  Angola? 

de  MoQambique  ? 
De  que  territdrios  se  compoe  o  Estado  da  India? 
De  que  e  formada  a  provincia  de  Macau? 
De  que  consta  o  districto  de  Timor? 


Eighth  Lesson. 

Omission  of  the  Article. 

(Cf.  §§  20,  21,  24  (1)  a,  25,  1  and  2). 
§  27.     The  article  (or  its  substitute)  is  omitted: 

(a)  in  mere  numerations  (cf.  §  23  (b)  N.B.) — e.g.: 
Roubou'lhe  reldgio,  corrente,  anneis,  tudo. 

(b)  often  with  nem . . .  nem  neither . . .  nor  (also  oft^n 
omitted  in  English): 

N'isto  nao  ha  nem  honra  nem  proveito.     Eu  vi  nem  casa 
nem  jardim. 

(c)  after  jamais  and  nunca'  before  the  subject,  if 
not  determinate: 

Nunca  honra  maior  foi  offer ecida  a  ninguem. 
Never  a  greater  honour  was  offered  to  anybody. 
Jdmais  haverd  amigo  mais  leal. 

(d)  in  sentences  denoting  doubt,  negation  as  well 
as  in  questions  expressing  uncertainty,  supposition,  or 
negation : 

Duoido  que  hajcC  qualidade  melhor. 

I  doubt  whether  there  be  a  better  quality. 

Ndo  havia  coragdo  mais  nohre  do  que  o  d'elle. 

There  was  no  heart  more  generous  than  his. 

Tens  amigo  dedicado,  em  que  possas  fiar-te? 

Have  you  a  devoted  friend  that  you  may  depend  upon? 

<t.Cab€Qa  de  rapaz  sabre   a  qual  esses  olhos  admiraveis 

potcsassem  um  instante,  era  cahega  perdida.* 
Any  young  man's  head  those  admirable  eyes  rested  upon 

for  a  moment,  was  lost. 
Jd  se  viu  pessoa  mais  ingrata? 
Was  there  ever  seen  a  more  ungrateful  person? 


Omission  of  the  Article.  285 

(e)  before  a  noun  or  substantivated  participle 
employed  in  a  general  meaning — e.g.: 

0  estado  S  de  gueri'a. 
The  situation  is  that  of  war. 
0  pais  nao  se  resigna  jd  d  situaqdo  de  vencido. 
The    country    resigns  itself  no  longer   to  the  situation 
of  a  vanquished  (nation). 

(f)  before  the  adjectives  too,  outro^  tal,  qual^  tal 
qudly  qual  outro,  semelhante,  igual,  meio,  certo,  tamanho 
(also  subst.),  and  the  substantives  numero,  parte,  porgdo, 
quantidadey  quantia^  somma,  gente,  pessoa,  coisa. 

(N.B. — Before  the  nouns  and  certo  the  article  may  be 
employed.) 

Em  certa  occasido  a  indignagdo  foi  tamanha  que  .  .  . 
On  a  certain  occasion  indignation  was  so  strong  that  .  .  . 
Ndo,  querendo    dar-lhe   amdtada   quantiay    deu-lhe  rneia 

promessa. 
Not  feeling  inclined  to  give  him  a  big  sum,   he   gave 

him  a  half  promise. 
Houve  grande   quantidade  de  genie   e   muita  somma  de 

intelligencia. 
There   was    a    great  number   of  people    and    a   large 

amount  of  intelligence. 
Grande  parte  dos  pedintes  recebeu  porgao  igual  d   dos 

asylados. 
A  great  part  of  the  poor   got  a  portion   equal  to   that 

of  the  inmates  of  a  charitable  institution. 
DS-me  outro  cdpo  d^agua. 
Give  me  another  cup  of  water. 
0  caracter  deste  sujeito  i  qual  eu  desejo. 
The  character  of  this  man  is  such  as  I  desire. 
Tal  mulher  me  fosse  ella,  qual  marido  eu  The  sou. 
Were  she  such  a  wife  to  me  as  I  am  a  husband  to  her. 
Elle  abriu  caminho  qual  outro  Amaldo  de   Winkelried, 
He  made  a  way  like  a  second  At  W. 

(g)  before  coisa  in  connection  with  alguma  or  nen- 
hwma. 

Viu  alguma  coisa?    Nao  vi  coisa  alguma  (or  nenhuma). 

(h)  often  in  titles  and  headings;  Tomo  segundo; 
CapUtdo  primeiro;  Descoberta  da  tndia; 


286  Lesson  8. 

(i)  before  nouns  employed  predicatively :  0  sr.  Jose 
e  primo  do  Carlos.  Carlos  e  amigo  do  primo.  Francisco 
d' Almeida  foi  vice-rei  da  India; 

(k)  with  parts  of  the  body  spoken  of  in  a  general 
meaning:  (cf.§  19(h)):  0  corpo  humano  tern  dots  bragos, 
duas  pernas,  cabega  e  tronco.  Temos  niao  direita  e  mdo 
esquerda,  pe  direito  e  pe  esquerdo; 

(1)  in  dates :  LisMa^  (em)  18  de  junho,  Lisbon,  June 
the  18^^.     An  exception   to   this  is  the  official  dating; 
Lisboa,  aos  dezoito  dias  de  junho  de  1861 
(m)  in  phrases  like  these: 

prestar  juramento  to  take  an  oath 

pre&tar  servigo  to  do  a  service 

por  termo  or  metier  caho  a  to  put  an  end  to 

foliar  (a)  verdade  to  tell  the  truth 

fazer  de  hoho  to  make  a  fool  of  oneself 

fazer  boa  (md)  figura  to  make  a  good  (bad)  figure 

fazer  numero  to  elevate  or  complete  |^  number 

dar  bom  resultado  to  give  a  good  result 

tirar  bom  lucro  to  get  a  good  profit 

exhalar  man  cheiro  to  exhale  a  bad  smell 

dbrir  banca  to  establish  an  office 

ter  (par)  costume  to  be  in  th6  habit 

convocar  cortes  to  convoke  the  House  of  Commonp 

dbrir  caminho  to  make  a  way 

estar  a  ponto  c?e  .  .  .  to  be  on  the  point  of 

e  costume  it  is  the  custom 

fazer  aposta  to  lay  a  wager 

a  pretexto  de  under  a  pretence 

morrer  de  febre  to  die  of  the  fever 

morreu  victimu  da  revolugdo  he  fell  a  victim  to  the  re- 
volution 

ir  a  acto  to  go  in  for  an  examination. 

fazer  examen  to  pass  an  examination 

viver  em  casa  de  .  .  .  to  live  in  the  house  of 

ndo  dizer  palavra  to  say  not  a  word 

ter  costume  to  be  in  the  habit 

correr  risco  to  run  a  risk. 

J^  (uma)  pena  it  is  a  pity 
ter  appetite  to  have  an  appetite 
estar  com  pressa  to  be  in  a  hurry 
estar  com  raiva  to  be  in  a  fury 
iicar  com  raiva  to  fly  into  a  passion 


Omission  of  the  Article.  287 

ter  fim  to  have  an  end 

fazer  harulho  to  make  a  noise 

ter  vontade  to  have  a  mind 

ter  como  regra  to  make  it  a  rule 

(em)  termo  medio  on  an  average 

com  vista  with  a  view 

fazer  signal  to  make  a  sign 

fazer  presente  (de)  to  make  a  present  (of) 

dar  batalha  to  fight  a  battle 

tomar  exemplo  to  take  an  example 

falar  em  voz  haixa  (alia)  to  speak  in  a  low  (loud)  voice 

ndo  ha  meio  de  there  is  no  means  of. 

e  moda  it  is  the  fashion 

e  fdra  de  questdo  it  is  out  of  the  question. 

Note  that  the  indefinite  article  is  not  used  with  que: 

What  a  noise  you  makel     Que  harulho  estd  a  fazer! 
What  a  misfortune!     Que  desgraga! 

§  28.     The  article  may  be  omitted: 

(1)  In  enumerating  several  substantives  which  are 
joined  by  e,  ow,  etc.,  or  separated  by  a  comma,  and 
not  denote  a  contrast  (cf.  §26)  however  being  of  diffe- 
rent gender— e.g.: 

Os  hdbitantes  dos  vdrios  hairros,  aldeias  e  arrdbaldes. 

It  is  the  same  for  several  adjectives  which  acom- 
pany  the  noun: 

A  prim£ira,  segunda  e  terceira  classe  or :  as  classes  pri' 
meira,  segunda  e  terceira. 

N.B. — If  such  a  noun  precedes,  it  is  used  in  the  plural. 
So  with  such  adjectives  as,  by  their  nature,  follow  the  noun : 

As  linguas  portuguesa  e  inglesa. 

The  Portuguese  and  English  languages. 
The  noun  not  being  employed  in  the  plural,  the  article  must 
be  repeated: 

A  lingua  porttigtcSsa  e  a  inglSsa. 
Equally  repeated  is  the  article,  if  living  beings  of  different 
sex  are  spoken  of: 

Os  bois  e  as  vaccas.     Os  burros  ou  as  jumentas. 

§  29.  The  partitive  article  is  omitted  after  the 
prepositions  com,  sem,  por,  in  certain  idiomatic  ex- 
pressions; also  after  de  denoting  the  instrument  or 
cause.     Ex. : 


Lesson  8. 


com  prazer  with  pleasure 
com  paciencia  with  patience 
com  cuidado  with  care 
com  elegancia  elegantly 
sem  dinheiro   without   money 
sem  ceremdnia  without    cere- 
mony 
sem  mats  nada  with  no  more 

ado 
por  dia  daily,  a  day 
por  anno  yearly,  a  year 
por  mis  monthly,  a  month 
por  mar  by  water,  by  sea 
pw  terra  by  land 


por  tal  forma  in  such  a  manner 
por  6ra  for  the  moment 
por  causa  de  for   the  sake  of 
por  Ventura  by  chance 
sob  pena  de  morte  on  pain  of 

death 
encher   de   heneficios    to    load 

with  benefits 
viver    de   pdo    to    live    upon 

bread 
tnorrer  de  fome  to  be  starved 

to  death 
saltar  de  alegria  to  jump  with 

joy. 

§  30.  No  article  is  used  (a)  before  a  substantive 
which  is  repeated  with  a  preposition,  as: 

gdta  a  gdta  by  drops 

fdlha  a  folha  leaf  upon  leaf 

dia  a  dia  day  after  day 

de  dia  para  dia  from  one  day  to  another 

promessas  sdbre  promessas  promises  upon  promises 

de  tempo(s)  a  tempofs)  from  time  to  time 

de  sSculo  em  sSculo  from  age  to  age. 

(b)  In  the  following  expressions,  where  the  noun 
forms  an  indivisible  unity  with  the  verb,  the  article  is 
omitted  in  both  languages: 


ter  razdo  to  be  right 
nao  ter  razdo  to  be  wrong 
ter  vontade  to  have  a  mind 
ter  precisdo  to  want 
langar  dncora  to  cast  anchor 
levantar     dncora    tq     weigh 
anchor. 


ter  cuidade  to  take  care 
ter  fome  to  be  hungry 
ter  side  to  be  thirsty 
ter  sdmno  to  be  sleepy 
ter  boa  cara  to  look  well 
ter  piedade  to  have  pity 
ter  vergdnha  to  be  ashamed 
ter  m^o  to  be  afraid 

(c)  In  certain  expressions  formed  with  de,  em,  o, 
sohre,  as: 

estar  em  risco  to  be  at  stake 

estar  sobre  dncora  to  be  at  anchor 

pegar  em  armas  to  take  up  arms 

ser  de  opinido  to  be  of  opinion 

pdr  em  fugida  to  put  to  flight 

perder  de  vista  \^  lose  sight  of 

comprar  em  segunda  moo  to  buy  second  hand 


Omission  of  the  Article.  289 

ir  a  cavallo  to  go  on  horseback 

ir  de  camidgtm  to  go  in  a  carriage 

estar  em  casa  to  be  at  home 

ir  a  casa  to  go  home 

estar  de  (or  em)  pe  to  be  standing 

estar  a  pS  to  be  up 

tomar  parte  em  to  join  in 

tomar  cuidado  to  be  upon  one's  guard 

tomar  assento  to  take  a  seat 

tomar  sentido  to  be  aware 

tomar  fogo  to  catch  fire 

tomar  folego  to  breathe 

dar  gragas  to  say  grace 

dar  (or  fazer)  aitengdo  to  pay  attention 

fazer  caso  de  to  value 

fazer  mengdo  de  to  mention 

fazer  fortuna  to  make  one's  fortune 

pedir  licenga  to  ask  leave 

pedir  perddo  to  beg  pardon 

dar  credito  a  to  give  credence 

por-se  em  pe  to  rise 

vir  a  pe  to  come  on  foot 

estar  em  paz  to  be  at  peace. 

§  31.  In  some  expressions  the  indefinite  article  is 
employed,  as  in  English,  in  the  sense  of  one — e.g.: 

d'um  fdlego  in  a  breath 
n'uma  palavra  in  a  word 
d'uma  assentada  i    „ 
d  uma  vez  ) 

d'um  trago  at  a  draught. 

§  32.  Employed  in  the  plural,  the  indefinite  article 
has  the  meaning  of  some  or  about: 

Uns  dias  depots;  durante  umas  haras ; 
Serdo  preciso  uns  sets  metros  de  fazerAa. 

21.  Thema. 

Virtue  is  the  highest  good.  Men  are  mortal.  Modesty 
adorns  youth.  Human  life  is  short.  Man  is  liable  to  a  variety 
of  changes.  Gold  and  silver  cannot  render  man  happy.'  Beer 
is  sold  at  fivepence  a  pot.  This  coffee  costs  two  shillings  a  pound. 
The  love  of  glory  and  the  fear  of  shame  are  often  the  cause 
of  great  valour.  Summer  is  warm,  but  winter  is  cold.  Geo- 
graphy is  a  very  useful  science.  Good  and  bad  seem  to  be 
blended  together  through  the  whole  of  nature.   Do  you  know 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  19 


290  Lesson  8. 

General  Knox?  Yes,  T  know  him.  The  knife  and  fork  are 
broken.  Let  us  go  to  church.  The  boys  were  at  school  this 
morning,  but  now  they  are  at  home.  When  did  they  come 
home?     After  two  o'clock. 

What  books  have  you  got  there  ?  Langenscheidt,  a  Por- 
tuguese pocket- dictionary  and  Ey,  a  Portuguese  conversation- 
grammar.  What  cold  weather  to-day!  Did  you  find  some 
means  of  saltisfying  him?  I  do  not  know,  he  said  not  a 
word.  His  mother  made  us  a  sign  to  leave  the  room.  The 
poor  woman  was  dying  from  hunger  and  cold.  You  are 
always  right;  Lhave  been  wrong.  Have  pity  on  my  weakness. 
I  must  ask  your  leave.  Many  poor  people  live  on  bread  and 
potatoes  only.  The  rent  of  this  house  is  twenty  pounds  a 
year.  We  expected  our  friend  every  day  (say:  from  day  to 
day),  but  day  after  day  elapsed  without  bringing  him.  Cha- 
rity begins  at  home  (by  itself).  Necessity  knows  no  law.  Games, 
conversation,  theatre,  nothing  entertains  him. 

Mr.  Teixeira  Lopes  is  a  Portuguese  and  a  sculptor.  He 
lives  at  Villa  Nova  de  Gaya,  in  front  of  Oporto,  on  the  left 
side  of  the  Rio  Bouro,  Bua  Direita.  He  is  a  most  famous 
artist.  Some  of  his  most  important  works  are  in  Lisbon  —  for 
instance,  the  monument  to  Ega  de  Queiros,  one  of  the  most 
eminent  novelists,  the  so-called  Portuguese  Zola;  it  is  erected 
on  the  Largo  do  Quintella.  In  Catholic  countries  it  is  the 
custom  to  hear  the  Mass  every  day. 

22.  Versao. 
Jdo  I  (primeiro). 
Dom  Joao  I,  rei  de  Portugal,  cognominado  o  de  Boa 
Memdria,  mas  mais  conhecido  pelo  seu  titulo  de  Mesire  d'AviZj 
foi  filho  de  el-rei  D.  Pedro  I  e  de  D.  Thereza  Louren^o.  Nasceu 
em  Lisboa  a  15  de  abril  de  1358,  e  na  idade  de  11  annos  foi 
eleito  mestre  da  ordem  de  Aviz  e  armado  cavalleiro  por  seu 
pae.  A  prudencia  e  valor  deste  monarcha  deveu  Portugal  a 
conserva(jao  da  sua  independencia,  que  esteve  a  ponto  de  perder 
com  a  morte  de  D.  Fernando  1.  0  Mestre  de  Aviz,  a  quern 
a  rainha  D.  Leonor,  regente  do  reino^  confiara  o  governo  do 
Alemteyo,  para  o  afastar  de  Lisboa,  aonde  era  benquisto  do 
povo,  foi  ao  pa<jo  a  pretexto  de  conferenciar  com  ella.  Em- 
quanto  fazia  espalhar  a  noticia  de  que  ali  o  retinham  prisio- 
neiro,  apunhalou  o  conde  de  Ourem,  valido  da  rainha,  vingMido 
assim  a  affVonta  de  que  este  f6ra  crimin6so  autor.  N'um  ins- 
tante  appareceu  armada  a  popula^ao  dd  Lisb6a.  D.  JoSo 
publicou  a  morte  do  conde,  e  foi  logo  acclamado  regente  e 
defensor  do  reino,  que  jurou  defender  contra  Castella. 
D.  Leonor  retirou-se  para  Alemquer,  villa  da  provinda  de 
Exiremadura,   e  o  monarcha  castelhano  entrou  em  Portugal, 


Congruence.  291 

empenhando  todo  o  sen  poderio,  para  tomar  Lisbda.  •  Por6m 
as  bem  acertadas  medidas  e  o  valor  de  D.  Joao  e  do  grande 
condestavel  D.  Muno  Alvares  Pereira,  inseparavel  companheiro 
das  suas  glorias  militeres,  fizeram  com  que  os  portuguSses 
sustentassem  o  sitio,  ate  que  o  grande  ex^rcito  sitiador  se  viu 
obrigado  a  retirar-se.  (Continua.) 

Conyersa^ao. 

CoDio  foi  cognominado  D.  Joao  I? 

Qual  o  titulo  pelo  que  era  ainda  mais  conhecido? 

Quando  nasceu? 

Que  e  que  Ihe  deve  Portugal? 

Quern  foi  D.  Leonor? 

Qual  foi  0  acto  com  que  o  Mestre  d'Aviz  vingou  a   af- 

fronta  feita  ao  povo  e  a  memoria  do  rei  pela  rainha 

viuva  e  o  sen  favorito  castellao? 
Que  succedeu  depois  d'este  acto? 
Quern  foi  o  companheiro  d'armas  de  D.  Joao  I? 
Qual  foi  0  resultado  das  medidas  e  do  valor  de  ambos  ? 


Second  Division:  Syntax. 
Ninth  Lesson. 

Congruence. 

§  33.    The    adjective,    the    article    and    the    past 
participle  conjugated  with  ser  or  estar  agree  in  gender 
and  number  with  their  noun  or  pronoun — e.g.: 
0  amigo  certo  conhece-se  na  occasiao  incerta. 

Exceptions. — 1.  The  subject  being  the  pronoun  v6s  (or 
qiie  referring  to  v6s),  and  indicating  only  one  person,  those 
words  are  in  the  singular:  Vos  sereis  feliz.  V6s  sois  amado 
or  amada. 

2.  The  subject  being  quern  followed  by  the  verb  ser  and 
a  substantive  in  the  plural  as  a  predicative  noun,  the  verb 
agrees  with  the  latter  (as  in  English):  Quern  foram  os  pro- 
genitores  de  D.  Jffonso  I.  ? 

3.  See  L.  16,  §  72,  N.B. 

Contrary  to  the  English,  the  verb  ser,  when  used  im- 
personally, agrees  with  the  following  predicative  noun:  Sao 
quatro  haras  it  is  4  o'clock.     Sao  dezoito  do  mis   it  is   the 

19* 


292  Lesson  9. 

eighteenth    of  the   month.     Quern    e?    Sou    eu.     Who  is   it? 
It  is  I. 

§  34.  (a)  Several  nouns  in  the  singular  being 
accompanied  by  the  same  adjective  or  past  participle, 
the  latter  takes  the  form  of  the  plural:  a  lingua,  (a) 
grammdtica  e  (a)  literatura  portuguesas.  Sao  necessdrias 
a  circumspecgao  e  a  prudencia.  A  senhora  e  a  crianga 
estavam  cangados.  Com  as  suas  tdo  apregoadas  probidade 
e  distingao  teem  tecido  toda  esta  trama. 

(b)  The  nouns  being  of  different  gender,  without 
diversity  in  their  meaning,  the  adjective  or  participle, 
when  employed  in  the  singular,  agrees  with  the  next 
to  it:  0  am^r  e  amizade  verdadeira  or:  a  amizade  e 
amor  verdadeiro.  Com  verdadeiro  amor  e  amizade.  J^ 
necessario  o  esforgo  e  a  vigilancia.  E  necessaria  a  vigi- 
lancia  e  o  esforgo. 

(c)  Those  nouns  being  of  different  gender  and 
meaning,  or  the  adjective  (or  participle)  being  in  the 
plural,  it  agrees  with  the  mascuUne  noun:  Um  diu  e 
uma  noite  eram  passados.  Nem  o  sangue,  nem  a^  lagrimas 
estavam  enxutos.  A  cortiga  e  os  couros  foram  declarados 
de  comm£rcio  livre. 

(d)  The  same  adjective  or  participle  referring  to 
several  nouns  in  the  plural  and  of  different  gender,  it 
agrees  with  the  next  to  it:  Seus  temores  e  esperangas 
eram  vds,  or:  eram  v&os  seus  temores  e  esperangas* 

(e)  The  same  adjective  referring  to  a  noun  in  the 
plural  and  another  in  the  singular,  it  generally  agrees 
with  that  of  the  plural:  As  f agendas  e  o  dinheiro  eram 
muitas.^ 

§  35.  (a)  The  verb  agrees  with  its  subject  in 
person  and  number: 

0  tempo  foge;  eu  escrevo;  nds  vamos. 

*  Cf.  <^No  dia  6  horas  indicados,  as  imias  dirigiram-se  ao 
Vaticano».  (Manual  Politico  by  Trindade  Coelho).  For  these  rules 
given  in  §  34,  there  are  many  contrary  examples  met  with  even 
in  the  classics,  as,  e.g.:  Rosto  e  cabega  descoberta.  ''Porque  essas 
honras  vds,  ess^,  ouro  puro,  melhor  ^  tnei'ecel-os  sem  os  ter  que 
possuU-os  aem  os  merecer." 


Congruence.  298 

(b)  Several  subjects  belongiDg  to  one  verb,  this  is 
used  in  the  plural.  If  these  subjects  belong  to  different 
grammatical  persons,  the  first  is  preferred  to  the  second, 
the  second  to  the  third  — e.g.:  Eu  e  tu  (tu  e  eu)  terms 
saude.     Tu  e  Maria  estaes  tons. 

(c)  If  there  be  several  subjects  of  the  third  person, 
the  verb  is  also 

(a)  in  the  third  person  and  plural  when  the  sub- 
jects are  in  the  plural: 

Andam  sempre  de  companhia  os  erros  e  as  desculpas, 

(p)  in  the  third  person  plural  when  the  subjects  are 
in  the  singular  and  precede  the  verb: 

A  comida,  a  bebida,   a  vigilia  e  o  somno  sem  certa   me- 
dida  ndo  aproveitam. 

(y)  in  the  third  person  singular  when  the  subjects 
follow  the  verb: 

Sent  certa  medida  ndo  aproveita  a  comida,  a  bebida,  etc. 
(see  Note  I). 

(b)  in  the  first  person  plural   if    the  person  who 
speaks  belongs  to  the  subjects: 

(0  mestre  e)  todos  os  ofjficiaes  somos  teus  amigos   (cf. : 
0  mestre  e  todos  o  officiaes  sois  mens  amigos. 

Note  I.— With  following  subjects  the  verb  is  also  met 
with  in  the  plural: 

Fallecem-nos  (or  fallece-nos)  o  pdo  e  a  agua. 

Note  II. — If  two  or  more  subjects  indicate  only  one  and 
the  same  person  or  thing,  the  verb  agrees  with  that  next 
to  it: 

Este  soldado  valente,  este  poeta  sublime,  esta  gloria  national 
(Camoes)  foi  desamparada  no  leito  da  dor. 

(d)  The  impersonal  verbs,  except  haver,  which  is 
always  employed  in  the  singular,  agree  with  the  logical 
subject — v.g. : 

Chegaram  muitos  viajantes  there  arrived  a  great  many 
travellers.  (French :  il  arriva  beaucoup  de  voyageurs.) 
Ha  muitos  homens  que  . . .  there  are  many  people  who  . .  . 
Houve  muitas  pessoas  there  were  many  persons. 


294  Lesson  9. 

§  36.  (a)  If  the  subject  be  a  partitive  collective 
in  the  singular  with  following  genitive  in  the  plural, 
the  verb  and  attribute  are  generally  in  the  plural. 
[N.B. — The  genitive  may  not  be  expressed) — e.g.: 

Parte  (dos  soldados  or  dos  quaes),  para  fugir  ao  ferro 
dos  nossos,  se  langarem  a  uma  lagoa  a  nado. 

(b)  If  the  subject  be  a  general  collective — i.e.,  one 
only  to  be  considered  as  a  totahty— the  verb  is  employed 
in  the  singular,  even  if  a  genitive  plural  accompanies 
the  subject: 

0  exercito  dos  inimigos  foi  derrotado. 

§  37.  (a)  In  relative  clauses  the  verb  agrees  in 
its  person  not  with  the  relative  pronoun,  but  with  its 
antecedent: 

Tu  que  nunca  estiveste  no  estrangeiro  .  .  . 

Eu  sou  aqueile  mesmo  (aquella  mesma)  que  sempre  te  amei, 

(b)  It  is  the  same  for  the  relative  que  which,  joined 
to  the  verb  ser,  is  employed  as  Particula  de  realce  after 
a  personal  pronoun  (cf.  L.  16,  §  64  (c)): 

Fdste  tu  (o)  que  disseste  .  .  .  fomos  nds  quern  dissSmos, 

(c)  However,  if  a  relative  clause  is  introduced  by 
quern,  in  order  to  render  a  personal  pronoun  prominent, 
the  verb  agrees  with  quern. 

Fiu  eu  quern  disse;   es  tu  qtiein   ouve;  fdmos  nds  quern 
disse. 

23.  Thema. 

I  play  the  piano,  you  write  letters.  You  are  satisfied,  my 
son,  but  your  sister  is  not  satisfied.  During  the  fine  season 
concerts  are  often  given  here.  Most  of  the  Portuguese  content 
themselves  with  two  daily  refections.  I  and  my  children  will 
pass  the  summer  in  the  country  and  the  autumn  at  the  sea- 
side. You  (V6s)  wanted  to  deceive  me,  but  perhaps  it  is 
you  who  will  have  been  deceived.  His  cold  blood  and  intre- 
pidity amaze  the  bravest  men.  The  earth,  the  stones,  the 
animals,  the  plants,  all  are  the  work  of  God.  Incredible  things 
succeed  every  day.  The  refined  fashion  and  taste  of  the  last 
season  created  quite  a  new  branch  of  industry.  His  brother 
and  1  made  this  discovery.  Was  it  you  who  helped  that  pooy 
family?  It  was  I  who  made  *he  suggestion,  but  it  was  you 
who  have  given  the  necessary  money.  It  was  the  women  who 
made  the  great  revolutions. 


Congruence.  295 

24.  Versao. 

Joao  I  (continna(do). 
Ja  antes  d'isto  tinha  D.  Nuno  desbaratado  os  hespanhoes 
na  batalha  dos  Atoleiros,  junto  a  Fronteira.  ^  Convocadas 
c6rtes  em  Coimbra,  n'ellas  discutiu  com  agudeza  e  resolveu 
com  liberdade  o  c^lebre  jurisconsulto  Joao  das  Eegras,  que  a 
coroa  portugu6sa  estava  vaga,  que  podia  o  povo  eleger  prin- 
cipe  que  o  governasse,  e  que  nenhum  Ihe  convinha  mais  do 
que  D.  Joao^  Mestre  de  Aviz.  A  6  de  abril  de  1385,  nSo 
tendo  ainda  completes  27  annos,  foi  D.  Joao  acclamado  rei 
de  Portugal.  Elevado  ao  throno  mostrou-se  logo  digno  d'elle, 
nao  so  pela  esc6lha  que  fazia  das  pessoas  para  os  diversos 
cargos,  como  pelo  valor  com  que  defendeu  o  reino.  A  vict6ria 
de  Trancoso  e  outras,  seguiu-se  a  de  Aljubarrota,  dada  a  15  de 
agosto  de  1385,  e  na  qual  com  6500  homens  derrotou  o  exer- 
cito  castelhano  que  se  compunha  de  30  000  homens.  N'este 
niimero  se  contava  a  fl6r  da  nobreza  castelhana  e  o  proprio 
monarcha,  que  so  deveu  a  vida  a  velocidade  do  seu  cavallo. 
Em  commemoraQao  d'esta  batalha,  e  no  proprio  sitio  d'ella 
edificou  0  novo  rei,  para  cumprir  o  vOto  que  fizera,  o  sump- 
tuoso  templo  de  Santa  Maria  da  Victdria,  vulgo  da  Batalha. 
Nao  contente  com  as  victorias  terrestres,  D.  Joao  I  meditou 
fazer  o  seu  nome  immortal  com  as  navaes,  e  preparando  uma 
armada  de  200  velas,  n'ella  embarcou  com  sens  filhos  D.  Duarte, 
D.  Pedro  e  D.  Henrique,  e  tomou  em  1415  a  pra(?a  de  Ceuta. 
Quatro  annos  depois  (1419)  os  descobrimentos  das  ilhas  de 
Porto  Santo  e  da  Madeira  vieram  abrir  a  Portugal  as  portas 
das  suas  vastas  conquistas.  (Lacerda.) 

Conyersaijao. 

Qual  e  a  regra  fundamental  de  concordancia  com  relaQao 

ao  adjectivo,  o  artigo  e  o  participio? 
Para   que   niimero   vae   o   adjectivo   ou  participio,    ha- 

vendo  2  ou  mais  substantives  no  singular? 
Quando  concorda  o   adjectivo  com   o   substantive   mais 

proximo? 
Quando  concorda  com  o  substantive  do  genero  masculine  ? 
Quando  concorda  elle  apenas  com  o  ultimo? 
Qual  a  regra  da  concordancia  do  verbo  ? 
Havendo  varies   sujeites  de  differentes   pessdas,   qual   a 

pessoa  com  que  concorda? 
Qual  o  niimero  de  verbo,   havendo  varies  sujeites  da 

3.  pessoa  do  singular? 

— ,_, — _ ■■ 

*  Villa  e  freguezia  no  Alemtejo,  districto  de  Portalegre, 


296  Leeson  10. 

Em  que  mimero  esta  o  verbo,   sendo  o  sujeito  um  col- 
lective ? 
Com  que  palavra  concorda  o  verbo  em  phrases  relativas? 


Tenth  Lesson. 

Intransitive  and  Transitive  Verbs. 
I.  Intransitive  Verbs. 

§  38.  The  intransitive  verbs  generally  form  their 
compound  tenses,  as  in  the  English  language,  with  the 
auxiliary  ter  or  haver: 

Tenho  andado  uma  legoa  todos  os  dias. 

I  have  walked  a  mile  every  day. 

Mle  sempre  tern  ido  (vindo)  chegado,  voltado)   a  tempo. 

He  has  always  gone  (come,  arrived)  to  time. 

§  39.  Yet  some  take  also  the  auxiliaries  ser  or 
estar  or  ficar^  but  only  when  a  condition  or  the  result 
of  an  action  is  to  be  indicated.  The  participle  with 
ser,  estar  or  ficar  has  the  value  of  an  adjective.  If, 
however,  you  want  to  indicate,  not  a  condition,  but  an 
action  continually  going  on,  you  must  employ  ter  or 
haver. 

As  in  English,  a  great  many  verbs  are  employed 
transitively  and  intransitively. 

Examine  the  following  examples,  distinguishing  the 
transitive  from  the  intransitive  meaning  of  the  same  verb. 
Sdbe  que  elle  estd  de  voUa? 
Do  you  know  he  is  returned? 
As  actrizes  esiavam  voltadas  para  os  espectadores. 
The   actresses   stood    (with    their   faces)  turned   to  the 

spectators. 
A  caneca  estd  or  ficou  partida. 
The  jug  is  gone  or  went  asunder. 

He  has  departed,  is  gone  can  only  be  rendered  by: 
elle  partiu  or  foi('Se) ;  elle  tern  partido  would  be :  he  has 
broken  or  he  belongs  to  a  faction;  elle  e  partido  he  is 
party. 

Estao  idos  aquelles  tempos  those  times  are  gone. 

Ella  tinha  adormecido. 

She  had  lulled  (somebody)  to  sleep;  she  had  fallen  asleep. 


The  Complements  and  their  Cases.  297 

Ella  estava  adormecida  she  was  asleep. 

Nos  temos  corrida  muito  we  have  run  fast. 

N6s  temos  carrido  mundo  we  have  travelled  about. 

N6s  estamos  (or  ficdmos)  corridos. 

We  are  (or  became)  vexed. 

Tern  caido  hastante  chuva  there  has  fallen  much  rain. 

Estd  caido  he  is  dejected. 

A  sua  fortuna  tern  augmentado  consider avelmente. 

His  fortune  has  been  increasing  considerably. 

A  sua  fortuna  estd  consideravelmente  augmentada. 

His  fortune  has  been  considerably  increased. 

II.  Transitive  Verbs  and  their  Complements. 

§  40.  Every  transitive  verb  requires  a  complement 
—i.e.,  an  object  on  which  the  activity  of  the  subject 
passes  over  directly  or  indirectly; — e.g.: 

If  directly,  the  complement  is  the  accusative 
(complemento  directo  or  ohjedivo  propriamente  dito),  and 
generally  employed  without  preposition;  if  indirectly,  it 
is  the  dative  (complemento  indirecto),  generally  employed 
with  the  preposition  a  (to).  N.B. — Personal  pronouns 
have  special  forms  for  the  complements  (cf.  P.I,  L.23). 

Dam  Affonso  Henriques  conquistou  Santarem  aos 
Portugueses. 

The  Complements  and  their  Cases. 
A.  The  Complement  of  the  Accusative. 

(Complemento  directo.) 

§  41.  As  a  rule,  this  complement,  as  in  English, 
has  no  preposition: 

Eu  comprei  um  livro  I  bought  a  book. 

§  42."  With  a  certain  group  of  verbs,  however,  it 
may  be  joined  by  a  preposition,  especially  if  referring 
to  persons; — e.g.: 

Vejo  a  elle  I  see  him. 

Amae  aos  vossos  prdximos  love  your  fellow-creatures. 
As  coisas  que  possam  interessar  aos  mens  designios. 
The  things  which  may  influence  my  intentions. 
Ninguem' pdde  servir  ao  mesmo  tempo  a  dois  senhores. 
Nobody  can  serve  two  masters  at  the  same  time. 


298  Lesson  10. 

This  a  is  always  employed  in  Amar  a  Beus  (cf. 
L.  11,  §48  (a)p)  and  in  the  locution  urn  a  outro  one 
another :  defendem-se  um  ao  outro  they  defend  one  another. 
With  the  verb  chamar,  when  this  has  two  comple- 
ments. The  complement  of  the  person  or  the  per- 
sonified object  is  generally  employed  with  the  prepo- 
sition a  (or  the  pronoun  in  the  dative). 

EUe  chamava  amigo  a  quern  ndo  o  era. 

He  called  friend  a  one  who  was  not. 

Chamaram  ^^Principe  Perfeito'^  ao  rei  Dom  Joao  11. 

0  que  ganhei  com  o  meu  trahalho,  chamo-lhe  meu. 

What  I  earned  by  my  work,  I  call  my  own. 

The  preposition  a  with  the  accusative  is  found  also 
with  the  verbs  ouvir  {dieer),  ver,  saber,  cheirar,  and  otiiers: 
Ouvimos  dizer  ao  sr.  Fulano. 
^^Paris  a  Helena  rouhou"  (Camdes). 
^'Querendo  vSr  a.  DianttfActeon  perdeu  a  vida"  (id.). 
Este  pao  sabe  (cheira)  a  mofo  this  bread  tastes  (smells) 
of  mould. 
Note  I.— The  complemento  directo  is  the  one  which,  the 
active  voice  being  changed  into  the  passive,  becomes  the  sub- 
ject:  0  livro  foi  comprado  por  mim  the  book  was  bought  by  me. 
Note  II. — There  are  verbs  that  have  two  constructions; 
80  you  may  say :  misinar  alguma  coisa  a  alguem  (algunia  coisa 
is  the  complemento  directo),  and   ensinar  alguem  a  fazer  uma 
coisa  (alguem  is  the  complemento  directo). 

B.  Other  Complements  without  Preposition. 

§  43.  There  are  transitive  verbs  which,  besides  the 
complemento  directo,  require  the  addition  of  an  adjective 
(or  some  word  thus  applied)  or  substantive  referring, 
as  a  qualification,  to  the  complemento  directo  and  serving 
to  complete  the  signification  of  the  verb ; — e.g. : 

Nomear  alguem  ministro,  fazer  alguem  felie.    A  cdrte 

suppunha  o  duque  de  Bragan^a,   D.  Joao,  incapag 

de  qualquer  pensamento  ousado. 

This  qualifying  word  is  called  nome  predicativo  do 

complemento  directo,  predicative  noun  of  the  accusative. 

The  active  voice  being  changed  into  the  passive, 

the  predicative  noun  of  the  complement  becomes  the 

predicative  noun  of  tbe  subject; — e.g.: 

0  duque  de  Braganga,  D.  Joao,  era  pela  c6rte  supposto 
incapaz  de  qualquer  pensamento  ousado. 


The  Complements  and  their  Cases.  299 

§  44.     The  chief  verbs  thus  constructed,  are: 

fazer  to  make  appelidar       \  ,       .  , 

tornar  to  turn,  become  cognominar   /    ^  ^^^  name 

eleger  to  elect  achar  to  find,  judge 

nomear  to  name  considerar  to  consider 

jurar  to  swear  crer  to  believe,  think 

declarar  to  declare  julgar  to  judge 

constituir  to  constitute  reputar  to  repute 

institiiir  to  institute  suppor  to  suppose 

sagrar  to  consecrate  descrever  to  describe 

MW^tr  to  anoint  pintar  to  paint 

coroar  to  crown  representar  to  represent. 
cJiamar  to  call 

Remark  1. — With  some  of  these  verbs  the  predicative 
noun  may  be  joined  to  the  verb  by  the  particle  cowo— e.g. : 
considerar  justa  uma  coisa  or  considerar  uma  coisa  como  Justa. 

With  some  verbs  the  qualification  of  the  complemento 
directo,  instead  of  being  a  simple  predicative  noun,  may  be 
ruled  by  the  preposition  por,  and  also  para  (expressing  an 
aim) — e.g.:  instituir  alguem  por  herdeiro.  The  employment 
of  por  (or  como)  is  obligatory  with  the  verbs  ter  and  haver 
in  their  meaning  to  judge,  think,  suppose,  and  with  the  verbs 
dar  &ndtomar  and  their  synonyms— e.g.:  ter  alguem  por  feliz. 

Remark  11. — Instead  of  the  predicative  noun,   an   equi- 
valent expression  may  form  the  complement  of  the  above  verbs: 
Os   historiadores  rejmtam   D.   Jodo  III  de   intelligencia 
apoucada. 

§  45.  As  an  adverbial  complement  the  accusative 
without  preposition  is  employed  to  indicate: 

(a)  the  price  or  value  with  the  verbs  custar  to  cost, 
valer  to  be  worth,  avaliar  (em)  to  value,  to  tax,  apreciar 
to  appreciate,  conceituar  to  value,  think,  etc. — e.g. : 

Entdo  a  vida  em  Lishoa  custava  os  olhos  da  cara, 

(b)  the  manner: 

Elle  passeava  o  chapeu  na  nu>ca  e  as  moos  nas  algiheiras. 
He  walked  about  with  his  hat  on  his  neck  (at  the  back 
of  his  head)  and  his  hands  in  his  pockets. 

§  46.  Elliptically  the  accusative  is  employed  in 
colloquial  language: 

Eil-o!  there  he  is! 

Desgragado  gxie  est     Unlucky  man! 

Boa  tarde,  minha  senhora!    Boas  festas! 


300  LesBon  10. 

25.  Exercise. 

Serve  your  fatherland  whenever  it  is  threatened  or  its 
dominions  are  invaded  by  enemies.  Do  not  contradict  those  who 
wish  you  well  and  advise  you.  They  will  help  you  (passive 
voice),  and  you  will  thank  them  for  your  rescue.  Do  not  be- 
lieve, however,  those  who  flatter  you.  Imitate  always  those 
who  precede  you  with  a  good  example.  Follow  them,  and 
all  true  friends  will  felicitate  you  (pass.  v.).  Here  it 
smells  of  fresh  hay.  This  cake  tastes  of  lemon.  The  poli- 
cemen summoned  the  crowd  to  disperse,  but  they  were  not 
obeyed.  They  menaced  the  public  with  their  arms,  but  the 
people  even  defied  the  gun-barrels.  Fool  that  you  are,  to  be- 
lieve that  you  will  be  considered  a  victim  of  the  intrigues  of 
your  adversaries.  Thou  shalt  love  God  above  all  things  and 
thy  fellow-creature  as  thyself. 

26.  Leitnra. 

Tomada  de  Santarem  (see  Less.  16). 

A  voz  do  rei,  sobrelevando  as  do  tropel  que  o  cercava, 
retumbou  entao  por  cima  de  estnipida.^  Bradava  por  Santiago 
e  pela  Virgem,  e  ao  mesmo  tempo  dizia  aos  que  estavam  no 
adarve:  —  Eis-me  aqui!  eis-me  aqui!  Mettei-os  a  espadal 
Nem  um  escape  do  ferro!  — 

Entretanto  tinham  arvorado  outra  escada,  e  25  homens 
d'armas  estavam  em  cima.  A  vozearia  dentro  e  f6ra  do  cas- 
tello  era  ja  confasa  e  medonha.  Affonso  dividiu  as  suas  pe- 
quenas  for^as  em  dois  corpos,  um  que  tentasse  escalar  o  muro 
pela  direita,  outro  que  tomasse  o  caminho  do  arrabalde  assen- 
tado  na  margem  do  rio,  para  que  os  sarracenos  nao  viessem 
por  aquella  parte  impidir-lhe  o  approximar-se  da  entrada.  Ao 
mesmo  tempo  os  25  esfor(jados  tentavam  quebrar  as  portas, 
arremessando  pedras  contra  ellas,  mas  debalde,  at^  que,  ati- 
rando  ao  de  fora  um  malho  de  ferro  por  cima  do  muro,  pu- 
deram  os  que  se  achavam  dentro,  partir  com  elle  os  ferrOlhos. 

Despeda9ado  o  dique,  a  torrente  precipitou-se  dentro  do 
castello.  Afifonso,  movido  pelo  impeto  do  enthusiasmo  religioso, 
ajoelhou  no  limiar  d'aquellas  portas  que  mal  cuidava  se  haviam 
tao  facilmente  de  abrir  para  o  receberem  vencedor. 

Segniu-se  uma  resistencia  inutil  e  uma  larga  carnificina. 
Os  raio3  do  sol,  que  nascfira  entretanto,  nao  encontraram  ji 
sobre  o  roqueiro  castello  o  estandarte  do  Islam  ,derribado  n'essa 
noite  (15  de  mar9o),  para  nunca  mais  se  erguer  sobre  as  torres 
da  opolenta  Santarem.  (Alexandre  Herculano). 

^  Estrupida  b.  estr^pito. 


The  Complements  and  their  Cases.  301 

CoiiTersa<^ao. 

Que  se  diz  da  voz  do  rei  Affonso? 

Por  quern  bradava  e  que  dizia? 

Que  tinham  feito  entretanto? 

Como  dividiu  Affonso  as  suas  for^as? 

Que  deviam  fazer  os  d^s  corpos? 

Que  tentavam  fazer  os  esforQados  ao  mesmo  tempo  e  com 

que  effeito? 
Que   fez   Affonso,   quando   a  torrente  dos  sitiadores  se 

precipitou  dentro  do  castello? 
Que  se  seguiu  a  entrada  for^ada  d'elles? 
Que  6  que  ja  nao  encontraram  os  raios  do  sol? 
Em  que  dia  e  anno  houve.logar  a  tomada  de  Santar^m? 


Eleventh  Lesson. 

The  Complements  and  their  Cases  (contmued). 

C.  Complements  with  a  Preposition. 

(Complemento  indirecto.) 

§  47.    The  Complement  preceded  by  the 

Preposition  de. 

The  preposition  de  is  employed: 
(a)  With  nouns: 

(a)  as  a  genitive  complement  of  the  subject:  o 
amor  de  Deus,  the  love  of  God  (God  loves); 

(P)  as  a  genitive  complement  of  the  object:  o 
temor  de  Deus,  the  fear  of  God  (God  is  feared) ; 

(y)  to  indicate  property:  o  xm^o  d'el-rei,  the  king's 
palace ; 

(5)  to  denote  time,  place,  material,  form,  price, 
character,  extension:  na  era  de  Christo;  o  com- 
mercio  do  Porto;  uma  perna  de  pdu;  luvas  de 
seda;  chapeu  de  tres  hicos  (three-cornered  hat); 
cadeira  de  hragos;  charuto  de  vintenf';  coisa  de 
valor;  esquadra  de  quince  velas;  cinco  metros  de 
altura  (or  de  alto)  por  tres  de  largura  (or  de  largo); 

(e)  in  a  partitive  condition  (cf.L.9  ofP.I):  wn  copo 
de  dgua;  um  pouco  de  assucar;  nada  de  bom; 
tudo  quanto  ha  de  mats  hello; 


302  Lesson  11. 

(I)  before  an  attribute  (cf.P.II,  §23):  o  rei  da  Ingla- 
terra;  o  imperio  daAlemanha;  homem  de  itUrigas; 

(r\)  to  express  a  destination:  a  sola  de  jantar;  uma 
penna  de  escrever;  papel  de  cartas;  quarto  de 
dormir;  estar  de  gugrda; 

(%)  to  indicate  a  characteristic:  o  homem  das  harhas 
negras  the  man  with  the  black  beard ;  uma  sa- 
lada  dliervas  finas  (de  alface)  a  salad  of  fine 
herbs  (lettuce); 

(b)  After  certain  adjectives  and  participles  which 
mostly  indicate  physical  or  moral  qualities: 

cego  de  ambos  os  olhos  blind  of  both  eyes 

surdo  do  ouvido  direito  deaf  of  the  right  ear 

alegre  de  semblante  with  a  merry  face 

sou  mais  velho  de  cinco  annos  I  am  older  by  5  years. 

Such  words  are: 

leve  de  (dinheiro)  short  of  (money) 
tranquillo  de  (alma)  quiet  of  (mind) 
provido  de  provided  with 
capag  de  capable  of,  etc. 

(c)  With  verbs  such  as:  ter  de,  haver  de  with  a 
following  noun  or  infinitive:  accusar  de,  arrepender-se 
de,  ser  de  to  belong  to,  to  come  from;  vingar-se  de, 
desforrar-se  de  to  revenge  oneself  on  and  others,  in 
English  mostly  employed  with  of. 

accusar  de  to  accuse  of  precisar  de  to   (be   in)   want 

arrepender-se  de  to  repent  of  (of) 

ser  de  to  belong  to,  to  come  abster-se  de  to  abstain  of 

from  desconfiar  de  to  distrust  of 

ter  de       \  to  have  to  queixar-sc  de  to  complain  of 

haver  de  f  to  be  obliged  to  soffrer  de  to  suffer  from 

aproveitar-se  de  to  profit  by  morrer  de  to  die  of 

acahar  de  fazer  to  finish  doing  tremer  de  to  tremble  with 

vingar-se  de  to  revenge  oneself  ncU)  passar   de    not   to   pass 

of  beyond 

desforrar-se  de    to  pay   back  passar-se  <^  to  do  without 

for  gostar  de  to  like 

felicitar  de  to  wish  joy  for  vestir  de  to  clothe  with  or  in 

gozar  de  to  rejoice  for  revestir  de  to  invest  with 

prevenir  de  to  inform  of  ornar  de   to  furnish   or   trim 

with. 


The  Complements  and  their  Cases.  808 

(e)  After  the  past  participle  of  the  passive  voice  of 
verbs  expressing  a  feehog,  de  may  be  employed  instead 
of  por:  ser  amado  de  to  be  loved  by. 

(f)  In  elliptical  phrases  like:  aqui  d'el  rei!  (a  cry 
for  help);  ai  de  mim  woe  unto  mel  pobre  de  mini  poor 
me!  felizes  de  nos!  infeliz  d'elle!  etc. 

(g)  As  an  expletive  in  familiar  language:  a  hoa  da 
midher  the  good  soul,  o  garoto  do  rapaz  the  naughty 
boy;  0  pobre  do  homem  the  poor  man;  o  malandro  do 
jardineiro  the  sluggard  of  a  gardener. 

(h)  In  comparatives  de  may  be  employed  before 
que:  Mle  sdbia  mais  do  que  outros. 

(i)  In  absolute  superlatives  as:  o  rei  dos  reis  the 
king  of  kings;  o  cdntico  dos  cdnticos  the  Song  of  Songs. 

Remark. — De  may  join  several  complements  to  one  noun 
without  being  repeated:  Berlim  tern  uma  academia  de  sciencias 
mechanicas  e  architectura ;  muitas  sociedades  de  sciencia  e  lite- 
ratura;  gahinete  de  histdria  natural  e  de  medalhas^  galeria  de 
quadras  e  estdtuas. 

(k)  In  adverbial  locutions,  such  as: 

de  or  por  certo  to  be  sure  estar  de  castas  or   de  barriga 

de  cima  from  above  para  o  ar  to  lie  on  one's 

de  dentro  from  within  back 

de  novo  anew  de  manha  in  the  morning 

de  fdra  from  without  de  tarde  in  the  afternoon  or 

de  todo  altogether  evening 

de  joelhos  kneeling  de  noite  at  night 

de  pressa  quickly  de  madrugada  at  dawn 

de  vagar  slowly  de  vez  em   guando   sometimes 

de  vivas  (deviras)  indeed  de  accordo  com  in  agreement 

de  propdsito  on  purpose  with 

de  facto  really  de  mans(inh)o  softly 

de  resto  besides  de  chapeu  na  mdo  with  one's 

de  modo  so  that  hat  in  one's  hand 
de  repente,  de  salto  suddenly      de  brago  dado  arm  in  arm 

de  justiga  right(ly)  de  bragos  abertos  with   open 

de  verao  in  summer  arms 

de  vez  at  once  de  moo  a   (or  em)  moo  firom 

estar  de  volta  to  be  back  hand  to  hand,  etc. 

§  48.     The  preposition  a  is  employed: 
(a)  Before  nouns,  thus  indicating: 


804  Lesson  11. 

(a)  the  dative  complement:  o  jardineiro  deu  uma 
magd  ao  filho; 

(p)  the  accusative  complement  of  the  person  after 
certain  verbs  which  need  two  complements,  one 
of  the  person  and  another  of  the  thing,  and 
always  in  the  phrase  amar  a  Deus. 

Examples:  Bevemos  amar  a  Deus  sohre  todas  as 
coisas  e  ao  prdximo  como  a  nos  mesmos.  '''A  partilha  do 
mundo"  chamou  B.  JoOo  II  ao  convenio  que  se  estava 
negociando.    A  nagdo  acclamou  rei  de  Portugal  a  B.Jodo, 

Also  if  a  misunderstanding  is  to  be  avoided :  Be  que 
soffre?  perguntou  o  medico  a  meu  amigo.  Pede  ao  que 
for  mais  leal  (cf.  §42). 

N.B. — After  como  we  employ  a  when  without  this  pre- 
position it  is  not  evident  whether  como  refers  to  the  subject 
or  to  the  object: 

Tratei-o  como  a  homem  de  hem. 

I  treated  him  as  a  man  of  honour. 

Tratei-o  como  homem  de  hem. 

I  treated  him  as  a  man  of  honour. 

(f)  space  and  direction:  a  cinco  Jcilometres  d'dqui; 
vou  a  casa  (home)  a  direita  (a  esquerda)  to  the 
right  (left); 

(b)  time:  a  que  horas?  as  seis  horas;  aos  vinte  an- 
nos;  ao  por  de  sol; 

(e)  instrument  or  means:  morto  a  hala;  impresso  a 
muitas  cores  \  aberto  ao  dnzel;  pintado  a  oleo,  a 
esfuminJio  (stump),  a  crayon; 

(I)   aim:    sais  a  ver;  partir  a  negocios  importantes; 

(r\)  manner:  a  pe,  a  cavaUo,  a  nado,  a  medo,  a  cos- 
tume, ao  parecer,  etc.; 

(%)  measure,  price,  tax:  comprar  or  medir  a  metros; 
pesar  as  arrohas;  comprar  or  vender  a  vintem; 
juro  or  cdmhio  a  cinco  por  cento; 

(i)  measure  of  time  or  space:  a  tiro  de  hala;  a  tres 
Uguas  de  distancia;  d*aqui  a  dez  annos;  a  tantos 
dias; 

(k)  a  near  future:  o  comhdio  estd  a  chegar; 

(X)  a  repetition  or  duration:  andar  a  saltar;  ensinar 
a  ler;  continuar  a  falar  (cf.  d  of  this  §). 


The  Complements  and  their  Gases. 


305 


(b)  After  adjectives,  such  as; 
acostumado  a  favoravel  a 


aff^igoado  a 
ajfeito  a 
agradavel  a 
anterior  a 
attento  a 
horn  a 
caro  a 
conforme  a 
contrdrio  a 
desagradavel  a 
disposto  a 
ensinado  a 
equivalente  a 


fiel  a 
hostil  a 
identico  a 
igual  a 
inclinado  a 
indifferente  a 
(in)docil  a 
inferior  a 
inexoravel  a 
insensivel  a 


necessdrio  a 
nocivo  a 


ohediente  a 
parallelo  a 
posterior  a 
preciso    a 
prejudicial  a 
prestes  a 
propenso  a. 
rebelde  a 
semelhante  a 
sdbranceiro  a 
superior  a 
surdo  a 
util  a 


(c)  After  verbs,  such  as:  agradar  a,  antorizar  a, 
comprar  a,  conquistar  a,  falar  a,  fazer  hem  a,  faltar  a 
(faltar  as  obrigagoes,  ao  dever,  a  sua  palavra  to  neglect 
one's  duties,  break  one's  word),  orar  a,  succeder  a,  pedir 
a,  pertencer  a,  ensinar  a,  ohrigar  a,  pintar  a  (oleo),  tra- 
bcdhar  a  (agulha)  etc. 

N.B.  I.— If  the  verbs  fazer,  deixar,  mandar,  ouvir,  vir, 
sentir  are  followed,  not  only  by  an  accusative  of  the  person, 
but  also  by  a  transitive  infinitive  with  an  accusative  of  things 
or  a  complementary  clause,  the  complement  of  the  person 
is  generally  put  into  the  dative:  Fiz-lhe  perceber  a  nao-razao- 
dos  seus  escrupulos;  mandei-lhe  copiar  a  carta;  but:  mandei-o 
eonduzir  a  casa;  fizeram-no  proclamar  regente. 

N.B.  II. — Cheirar  a  to  smell  of;  saber  a  to  taste  of 
(saber  a  meldo,  cheirar  a  vinho), 

(d)  Before  the  infinitives  of  the  verbs:  estar^  ser, 
andar,  ir,  passar,  ouvir  etc.:  estar  a  sair,  a  chegar,  a 
morrer;  andar  a  procurar,  a  estndar;  passar  (o  tempo) 
a  ler^  a  ndo  fazer  nada;  ouvir  passar os  a  cantar,  fontes 
a  correr;  ''Como  se  fosse  apenas  a  deitar-me  .  .  .  j  e  o  teu 
olhar  ainda  a  ensinar-me  j  a  morrer  com  amor  e  con- 
flanga". 

Cf.:  estar  a  espera  to  be  waiting;  estar  a  morte 
to  be  dying;  andar  a  procura  de  to  be  looking  for. 

(e)  Instead  of  a  relative  clause:  o  melhor  a  fazer 
the  best  to  be  done;  o  primeiro  a  entrar  the  first  enter- 

Portugueae  Conversation-Grammar.  •   20 


806  Lesson  11. 

ing;  "a  tua  vida  a  rir  na  minha  vida'  your  life  smiling 
into  my  own. 

(f)  In  adverbial  locutions,  such  as: 

a  tempo  in  due  time  a  s6s  alone  by  oneselves 

d  pressa  in  a  hurry  a  vontade  at  ease 

a  contento  with  satisfaction  a  mdo  at  hand 

(i/rawcesa  in  a  French  manner  a  pedagoSj    aos    hocados    in 

a  conselho  (de)  on  the  advice  pieces 

(of)  ao  certo  surely,  exactly 

pouco  a  potcco  little  by  little,  ds  vezes  sometimes 

by  degrees  ds  escuras  at  dark 

a  mats  e  mats  more  and  more  ds  claras  openly,  evidently 

dia  a  dia  day  by  day  d  espera  de  waiting  for 

folha  a  folha  leaf  by  leaf  a  ser  assim  in  this  case 

gotta  a  gotta  drop  by  drop  a  ndo  ser  assim  (or  isso)   in 
a  um,  a  uma  one  by  one  the  other  case 

dois  a  dots    \  ^       i^     .  a  dizer  a  verdade  to  tell  the 
duos  a  duos  i  '"^  ''y  *''°  truth 

a  par  de  beside,  in  comparison  isso  ndo  faz  ao  caso,  (ao  ne- 

with  gdcio,  d  questdo)  that  does 

salto   a    salto   by   leaps    and  not  matter 

bounds  d  vista  dHsso  thereupon 

a  tremer  trembling  a  menos  de  if  not,  unless 

a  suar  sweating  a  propdsito  by  the  bye. 

(g)  EUiptically  in  exclamations:  a  saude  de  V^ Ex'^ ! 
ds  armas!  to  armsl   a  memoria  dos  grandes  heroes! 

27.  Thema. 

Oxford  has  a  university  which  counted  among  its  professors 
Max  Miiller,  Mattew  Arnold,  and  Sir  Hubert  von  Herkomer  (cf. 
§42).  Will  you  have  the  kindness  to  give  me  the  €l>idrio  de  No- 
ticiasT>  and  the  «Pnm6iro  de  Janeiro^^  In  Portugal  newspapers 
are  bought  at  the  price  of  ten  reis  from  the  sellers  or  the  boys  (ga- 
rotos)  in  the  streets.  The  <Gommercio  dd  Porto*  is  sold  at  a 
vintem  a  copy.  In  summer  or  on  hot  days  you  may  sometimes  see 
gentlemen  with  their  hats  in  their  hands  walking  in  the  Ave- 
nida  da  Liberdade.  It  does  no  good  to  the  nerves  to  be 
too  sensible  to  impressions  of  any  kind.  If  you  want  to 
enjoy  good  health,  you  must  be  deaf  and  indifferent  to  im- 
pressions injurious  to  health.  If  we  walk  so  slowly,  we  shall 
not  arrive  home  before  evening.  Let  us  walk  quicker,  so  as  to 
be  back  sooner  than  our  sluggard  of  a  cousin,  who,  to  tell 
the  truth,  needs  a  reprimand.  The  least  we  can  do  is  to  profit 
by  the  experiences  of  others  and  to  be  attentive  to  all  things 


The  Complementa  and  their  Cases.  307 

that  may  be  favourable,  pernicious,  or  adverse  to  our  projects. 
By  the  bye:  On  the  5*^  of  March  of  next  year— that  is, 
in  three  months  from  to-day — you  have  to  pay  the  bill  of  ex- 
change of  ;£  50.  Abstain  from  any  superfluous  expenses  and 
content  yourself  with  what  you  have.  If,  however,  you  need 
money,  communicate  with  me  in  due  time.  Who  is  that  lady 
in  the  violet  dress?  That  one  with  the  fair  hair?  No,  that 
one  with  the  red  hair  and  the  lace-trimmed  dress  with  a  train. 

28.  Yersao. 

De,  preposi^ao  que  denota  o  logar  d'onde  vem  ou  sae 
alguma  pessoa  ou  cousa  (venho  de  Roma;  cartas,  noticias  de 
Londres);  a  origem  (lei  de  Deus);  a  rela(j5o  (parente,  amigo 
de)',  a  propriedade  (livro  de  Antonio);  a  materia  de  que  ^ 
feita  alguma  cousa  (annel  de  ouro,  copo  de  crystal)  o  estado, 
as  qualidades  de  alguma  pessoa  ou  cousa  (anno  de  fome,  dia 
de  calma,  homem  de  honra,  coberto  de  chagas);  o  modo  (andar 
de  pressa,  fazer  alg.  c.  de  caso  pensado);  a  causa,  o  motive 
(morrer  de  feme,  tremer  de  medo) ;  o  uso  ou  destino  (tribunal 
de  justi^a,  tempo  de  estudo);  o  tempo  em  que  se  faz,  ou 
succede  alg.  c.  {de  dia,  de  noute,  de  verSo,  de  inverno). 

De  serve  tambem  de  particula  extractiva  (peda90  de  pao) ; 
e  designativa  (prodigio  de  virtude,  exemplo  de  valor,  cidade 
de  Coimbra).  Faz  as  vezes  de  outras  preposi^oes,  como  desde 
{de  Madrid  a  Lisboa,  de  tempo  immemorial),  tocante,  sobre 
(falar  cfe  .  .  .),  por  (amado  de  todos).  Serve  para  ligar  dois 
verbos  (acabar  de  Ifir,  de  escrever;  gosta  de  estudar);  um  verbo 
e  um  substantivo  (ambi^ao  de  reinar) ;  um  verbo  e  um  adjec- 
tivo  (difficil  de  cr6r,  fdcil  de  entender).  Precede  os  infinitos  dos 
verbos  para  formar  o  fiituro  composto  (quem  ha  de  ganhar  honra, 
nao  se  ha  de  entregar  ao  descanso) ;  e  antepoe-se  aos  adverbios 
{de  perto,  de  longe,  de  baixo,  de  cima) ;  ou  a  outras  preposi^oes 
(de  sobre  a  porta).  Algumas  vezes,  por  eleg^ncia  e  propriedade 
da  lingua,  usa-se  esta  preposi^ao  entre  dois  substantives  (o 
ladrao  do  mo(jo,  a  embusteira  da  velha) ;  ou  entre  um  adjective 
ou  substantivo  e  um  substantivo  ou  pronome  (o  man  de  Thyo- 
neu,  0  pobre  do  homem;  triste  de  mim,  coitados  de  n6s).  Pela 
mesma  razao  tambem  se  poe  depois  de  alguns  verbos  e  antes 
da  dic9ao  em  que  elles  passam  a  exercer  o  sen  significado; 
mal  se  faz  de  cr6r  o  que  se  nao  cuida  nem  espera. 

(After  Lacerda:  Diccionario  encyclop^dico.) 


20* 


308  Lesson  12. 

Twelfth  Lesson. 

Eemarks  on  the  Prepositions. 

(Cf.  L.  11:  de  and  a.) 

§  49.  The  frequently  employed  prepositions  a,  de^ 
em,  por  are  generally  repeated:  Folio  a  elle  e  ao  irm&o 
d'elle;  pensei  nHsso  e  n'aquiUo;  fago-o  por  ti  e  por  elle. 

§  50.  Several  prepositions  may  be  joined  to  the 
same  noun  or  pronoun.  If  joined  to  a  pronoun,  all 
prepositions  precede;  if  to  a  noun,  one  precedes,  the 
other  follows,  the  noun  being  repeated  by  a  pronoun: 
with  or  without  him  com  ou  sem  elle;  coffee  with  or 
without  sugar  cafe  com  assucar  ou  sem  die;  before  and 
behind  the  house  deante  da  casa  e  atrds  d'ella. 

§  51.  Sometimes  several  prepositions  are  joined 
with  one  another  or  with  adverbs:  atrds  de,  atraves  de 
deante  de,  para  com,  por  debaixo  de,  de  ao  pe  de  (from 
the  neighbourhood  of). 

§  52.    Some  Portuguese  Prepositions  in  English 
Translation. 

(1.)  Mifiv  (no,  na,  velle,  neste  etc.)  in,  at,  on: 
Em  Londres;  na  Inglaterra,  em  Forttigal.  Em  casa  at  home. 
Na  casa  in  the  house;  em  casa  delle,  em  nossa  casa; 
num  dia,  em  um  instante  :  nesse  tempo;  numa  palavra; 
em  breve;  em  breves  lirihas;  ensinar  em  musica;  estar 
em  fdrias,  em  agosto ;  no  ar ;  em  geral;  em  particular , 
em  extreme  (to  the  atmost);  em  cumprimenio  ou  exe- 
cugdo  das  or  dens;  d  sombra  d'um  carvalho. 

fia  mesa;  na  praga,  no  chao,  no  mar  alto  (in  the 
offing,  on  the  high  seas,  at  the  main);  encostar-se  no 
cotovello,  na  esperanga;  metter-se  em  cavallarias  alias 
(to  mount  the  high  horse);  avaliado  em  cinco  mil  rHs. 
Estd'lhe  0  vestido  em  (her  dress  comes  to)  duas  libras; 
insistir  em. 

illustre  em  famxi;  rico  em  conhecimentos ;  pobre  em 
bens;  agarrar-se  em,  pensar  em;  em  si  (in  the  abstract, 
in  itself);  no  sdh(b)ado,  nesse  dia. 

em  castigo  de;  em  signal  de;  em  honra  de;  em  pro- 
veito  de,  em  damno  de;  passar  de  mao  em  mdo  (to  go 
from  hand  to  hand) ;  de  boca  em  Kdca;  numa  assentada 
at  one  pull. 


Remarks  on  the  Prepositions.  309 

vir  'etn  soc(c)6rro,  no  vapor;  em  todd  a  hora. 

em  (or  por)  ddio  da  pessoa ;  em  razao  de  amizade. 

Que  horas  sdo  no  seu  reldgio? 

Em  is  also  sometimes  employed  before  the  infinitive  or  the 
gerund  of  a  verb :  o  dominio  do  mundo  ndo  consiste  em 
0  poss^uiVy  con»iste  em  o  pisar.  Em  estudando  a  gram- 
mdtica  da  prdpria  Ungua,  fica  o  homem  apto  para  aprender 
com  facilidade  outro  qualquer  idioma. 

(2.)  I\ira  indicates  direction,  aim,  use  (after  estar) 
somethiiig  imminent;  it  answers  to  the  question:  where 
(to)?  whither?  what  for?  to  what  purpose?  when? 

Examples.— Par^iw  para  Inglaterra.  Esta  madeira  e 
boa  para  navios.  Os  portuguSses  sdo  hons  para  ma- 
rujos.  Para  a  semana  next  week;  para  o  mSs  que 
.  vem  next  month.  Para  o  sul,  o  norte;  para  a  direita. 
Estavamos  para  dar  a  vila.  Estou  prompto  para  fazer 
0  ajuste.  Das  plantas  umas  dirigem  os  ramos  para 
0  ar,  outras  para  a  terra.  Estuda  para  medico,  para 
letrado,  a  fim  de  ter  um  modo  de  vida  decenie.  Estas 
luvas  sdo  para  a  menina.  Vem  para  o  Natal.  Serd 
para  sempre.     Ha  sets  para  sete  annos. 

(3.)  Idioms  with  para: 

Ser  para ...  to  be  fit  for ;  este  sujetto  e  para  pouco  .  .  . 
Estar  para  to  be  disposed  or  appointed  for:  ndo 
estou  para  isso,  para  aturdl-o:  Essa  quinta  estd  para 
vender.  De  mim  para  mim,  de  si  para  si  unto  me, 
unto  him.  Pensei  de  mim  para  mim.  Para  vergonha 
nossa  for  our  shame. 

(4.)  Before  an  infinitive  para  corresponds  to  "in 
order  to": 

Fil'O  para  llie  ser  agradavel.  Ndo  e  para  admirar  it 
is  not  to  be  wondered  at.     Para  dizer  a  verdade. 

(5.)  Para  is  sometimes  joined  to  com  and  has  the 
meaning  of  towards. 

Ser  bom,  affavel,  justo  para  (com)  os  companheiros,  dis- 
cipulos  ou  para  com  todos. 

(6.)  Para  may  be  employed  for  por  (see  (7.)  of  this 
paragraph)  in  order  to  express  the  cause  of  an  action 
or  an  intended  effect: 

Procurou  cortar  a  conversagdo  para  (or  por)  ndo  expor-se 
a  dizer  mais  do  que  qtcizera. 


310  Lesson  12. 

There  is,  however,  a  difference  between  para  and 
por:  para  hints  to  the  effect  as  being  certain,  por  as 
being  uncertain: 

Movo  OS  pes  para  andar ;  ando  muito  por  vSr  se  posso 
dormir  melhor.  Saio  de  casa  para  ir  ao  campo,  onde 
darei  um  passeio  por  dissipar  a  melancolia. 

(7.)  IPor  has  a  manifold  employment  expressing, 
however,  in  spite  of  apparent  diversity,  its  original 
meaning— i.e.:  the  space  between  the  subject  and  its 
aim,  a  space  which  may  be  considered  as  such,  or  as 
a  way  or  means  for  its  design. 

Examples. — Ir  por  mar,  por  terra  (by  sea,  by  land), 
po^'  um  lado,  por  caminho  direito, '  por  todo  o  reino. 
Entrar  por  ttma  rua,  por  um  rio  ou  porto.  A  bala 
entrou  pelo  (==  por  o)  muro  (beat  through  the  wall). 
A  espada  entrou  por  elle  (pierced  him).  Ir  p&r  al- 
guem  to  call  for  or  go  to  meet  somebody;  ir  por 
dinheiro.  Pelos  annos  de  mil  nove  centos  about  1900. 
Por  outra  parte  somewhere  else,  on  the  other  side; 
por  outro  lado  on  the  other  side.  0  mez  por  vir 
next  month ;  o  (tempo)  por  vir  or  porvir  the  future. 
Vm  por  um  one  by  one.  Cada  am  por  sen  turno 
each  by  his  turn.  Deixar  por  morto  to  leave  for 
*  dead.  Comegar  por  to  begin  with.  Passar  por  aUe- 
moo  to  be  taken  for  a  German. 

Por  isso  therefore;  por  isso  mesmo  for  that  very  reason; 
nem  por  isso  nevertheless.  Pot  mim  as  for  me,  for 
my  part;  por  quern  e  I  say!  Por  qtiem  me  toma? 
Whom  or  what  do  you  take  me  for?  Por  falta  de 
for  want  of.  Por  medo  que  for  fear  of,  lest.  Feito 
por  mim,  por  elle  done  by  me,  by  him.  Isto  estd 
por  fazer  this  is  still  to  be  done.  Por  pouco  que 
ndo  alcangasse  o  combdio  he  had  nearly  lost  the  train. 
Por  rico  que  seja  however  rich  he  may  be. 

Por  essa  razdo,  por  falta  (de),  por  isso,  por  ordem,  por 
mandado,  por  culpa.  Foi  condemnado  por  wna  pe- 
qu^na  falta;  por  commodidade;  por  costume;  por  in- 
veja;  por  forga  ou  por  vontade  obliged  or  of  one's 
own  accord.  Por  hem  ou  por  mal.  Por  (ov  pelo) 
am^r  de  Deus,  por  amor  do  prdximo.  Por  ser  amigo 
d'elle  because  he  is  his  friend.  Por  carecer,  por  merecer, 
Mandar  por  embaixador  to  send  as  an  ambassador. 
A  obra  ficou  por  acabar . .  .  remained  unfinished;  as 


Remarks  on  the  Pre{>o8ition8.  309 

vir  'efn  soc(c)drro,  no  vapor;  em  toda  a  horq,. 

em  (or  por)  6dio  da  pessoa ;  em  razao  de  amizade. 

Que  horas  sdo  no  sen  reUgio? 

Em  is  also  sometimes  employed  before  the  infinitive  or  the 
gerund  of  a  verb :  o  dominio  do  mundo  ndo  consists  em 
0  pos»uir,  cansiste  em  o  pisar.  Em  estudando  a  gram- 
mdtica  da  pf-dpria  lingua^  fica  o  homem  apto  para  aprender 
com  facilidade  outro  qualquer  idioma. 

(2.)  JPara  indicates  direction,  aim,  use  (after  estar) 
somethiiig  imminent;  it  answers  to  the  question:  where 
(to)?  whither?  what  for?  to  what  purpose?  when? 

Examples.— Par^iw  para  Inglaterra.  Esta  madeira  e 
boa  para  navios.  Os  portuguSses  sdo  hons  para  ma- 
rujos.  Para  a  semana  next  week;  para  o  mis  que 
,  vem  next  month.  Para  o  sul,  o  norte;  para  a  direita. 
Estavamos  para  dar  a  vMa.  Estou  prompto  para  fazer 
0  ajuste.  Das  plantas  umas  dirigem  os  ramos  para 
0  ar,  outras  para  a  terra.  Estuda  para  medico,  para 
letrado,  a  fim  de  ter  um  modo  de  vida  decenie.  Estas 
luvas  sdo  para  a  menina.  Vem  para  o  Natal.  Serd 
para  sempre.     Ha  seis  para  sete  annos. 

(3.)  Idioms  with  para: 

Ser  para ...  to  be  fit  for ;  este  sujeito  e  para  pouco  .  .  . 
Estar  para  to  be  disposed  or  appointed  for:  ndo 
estou  para  isso,  para  aturdl-o:  Essa  quinta  estd  para 
vender.  De  mim  para  mim,  de  si  para  si  unto  me, 
unto  him.  Pensei  de  mim  para  mim.  Para  vergonha 
nossa  for  our  shame. 

(4.)  Before  an  infinitive  ^ara  corresponds  to  "in 
order  to": 

Fil-o  para  Ihe  ser  agradavel.  Ndo  e  para  admirar  it 
is  not  to  be  wondered  at.     Para  dizer  a  verdade. 

(5.)  Para  is  sometimes  joined  to  com  and  has  the 
meaning  of  towards. 

Ser  bom,  affavel,  justo  para  (com)  os  companheiros,  dis-^ 
cipulos  ou  para  com  todos. 

(6.)  Para  may  be  employed  for  por  (see  (7.)  of  this 
paragraph)  in  order  to  express  the  cause  of  an  action 
or  an  intended  eflfect: 

Procurou  cortar  a  conversagdo  para  (or  po?')  ndo  expdr-se 
a  dizer  mais  do  que  quizera. 


312  Lesson  12. 

30.  Leitura. 

A  emigragao  portnguesa  para  o  Brasil. 

Queixam  se  numerosos  proprietarios  territoriaes  da  escassfiz 
de  operarios  campestres,  apesar  do  angmento  de  salarios.  Era 
natural  que  ao  mesmo  tempo  se  pedisse  como  remedio  o  er- 
guer  obices  a  emigra^ao;  comtudo  nao  me  recordo  que  se 
levantassem  jamais  importantes  clamores  tao  desarrazoados  que 
c^gamente  a  combatessem.  Pedia-se  reforma  da  lei  do  recru- 
tamento  per  modo  que  a  lavoura  nao  soffresse  com  a  manu- 
ten^ao  da  for9a  militar.  Chegou-se  a  pedir  isen96es  para  o 
jornaleiro  campestre,  por  «e  entender  que  o  imposto  de  sangue 
era  uma  das  principaes  causas,  senao  a  maxima,  de  emigra- 
rem  para  o  Brasil  tantos  rapazes.  lam  clandestinamente  ou 
arratijavam  passaportes  por  maneiras  fraudulentas.  Esta  repug- 
n&ncia  ao  serYi90  militar,  innata  em  todo  o  Minho,  €  bem  expli- 
cdvel,  por  isso  que  o  filho,  ajudando  desde  crian^a  sens  paes  nos 
diversos  grangeios  agricolas,  e  d'elles  violentamente  arrancado, 
com  grave  prejuizo  do  casal  agricola.  Prefere,  pois,  tentar  em 
regioes  desconhecidas  a  sua  independencia  a  servir  a  patria  no 
exircito.  A  repugu9,ncia  pela  vida  militar  vfimol-a  confirmada 
na  emigragao  claudestina,  que  em  tao  grande  escala  se  effectaa 
n'esta  regiao,  constituida  em  grande  parte  por  mancebos  fu- 
gindo  ao  recrutamento.  Esta  repugnancia,  habilmente  explo- 
rada  pelos  engajadores,  que  enxameiam  na  regiao,  facilitando 
passaportes  para  os  critninosos  fugirem  a  justi^a  e  os  mancebos 
se  esquivarem  ao  servi^o  do  ex^rcito  pelo  modica  quantia  de 
nove  mil  reis,  6  em  extremo  auxiliado  pela  facilidade  de  trans- 
portes  e  extensa  raia  da  provfncia.  Supponha-se  modincada 
a  lei  do  recenseamento  militar  a  contento  dos  lavradores,  e 
extincto  portanto  a  principal  origem  da  clandestina  sahida  de 
moitos  Portugueses.  Bestava  saber  se  nao  augmentaria  ipso 
facto  (=  por  isso  mesmo)  a  sahida  legal.  Por  outras  palavras ; 
todos  OS  que  se  expatriam  clandestinamente,  baveriam  deixado 
de  tomar  o  caminho  do  estrangeiro,  desde  que  nao  ficassem 
Bujeitos  ao  servi^o  no  ex^rcito,  ou  elle  se  tomasse  compativel 
com  os  labores  campestres?  Cuido  que  muitos  dos  emigrantes 
dandestinos  iriam  ds  claras  para  o  Brasil,  e,  sendo  assim,  as 
modifica9ae8  na  lei  do  recrutamento  poderiam  ser  seguidas  por 
accr^scimo  da  emigra9ao  legal.  Na  corrente  exportadora  de 
portugufis'es  estd  um  caracteristico  signal  da  nossa  decadfincia 
economica,  (Rodrigues  de  Freitas). 

CoiTersa^ao. 

Em  que  circumstancia  se  yd  a  principal  causa  da  emi- 
gra9fto  portugu^sa? 


Prepositions  Continued.  313 

Qnal  6  a  consequ^ncia  immediata  d'essa  emigrapSo? 

Que  remMio  se  Ihe  pediu? 

Em  que  se  baseava  o  pedido  de  isen^ao? 

Qaal  a  maneira  de  emigrarem  os  rapazes? 

Come  se  explica  a  repugnancia  ao  servi90  militar? 

Que  e  que  os  mancebos  preferem? 

Per  quern  e  como  6  explorada  essa  repugnancia? 

Que  v6  0  economista  Rodrigues  de  Freitas  na  emigra^So 

para  o  Brasil? 
Que  cuida  elle,   suppondo-se  modificada  a  lei  do  recru- 

tamento  ? 


Thirteenth  Lesson. 

Prepositions  Continued. 

§  53.  How  to  express  Certain  English  Prepositions* 

(a)  About. 

About:  1.  in  the  sense  of  "round"  is  to'  be  rendered 
by  em  volta  de,  em  roda  de,  em  redor  de;  2.  in  the  sense 
of  "concerning"    by   com   respeito   a,  sghre,    acerca   de; 

3.  in  speaking  of  things  which  people  carry  about  them, 
it  is  translated  by  com  or  may  be  not  translated  at  all; 

4.  when  it  means  near  a  certain  number  or  quantity, 
by  pouco  mats  on  menoo,  cerca  de,  por  ahi;  5.  when  ex- 
pressing nearness  to  a  particular  time,  it  is  translated 
by  perto  de,  por. 

(1)  All  thronged  about  the  orator. 

Todos  acotovellavam-se  em  volta  do  orador. 
f     (2)  I  will  speak  to  him  about  this  aifair. 

Hei-de  Ihe  falar  com  i^espeito  a  este  negocio. 

He  could  not  give  me  any  information  about  what  had 

happened. 
Elle  ndo  poude  dar-me  Informacdo  atgicm,a  acerca  do  que 
se  tinha  passado. 

(3)  I  had  no  money  about  me. 
Eu  ndo  trazia  dinheiro  (commigo). 

(4)  We  are  about  300  people. 
Somos  pouco  mats  ou  menos  (or  por  ahi)  trezentas  pessoas. 
The  dinner  lasted  about  two  hours. 
0  jantar  levou  perto  de  (cerca  de)  duas  horas. 


314  LesBon  13. 

(5)  The  train  arrived  about  three  o'clock. 

0  comhdio  chegou  pelas  tres  horas. 

(b)  At. 

At:  1.  is  most  commonly  rendered  by  ti  or  em 
with  or  without  an  article;  sometimes  it  is  not  trans- 
lated at  all;  2.  after  nouns  or  verbs  denoting  derision, 
anger,  surprise,  sorrow,  etc.,  it  is  rendered  by  de  (or 
com);  3.  "at,"  meaning  "at  the  house"  is  em  casa  de; 
"at  the  shop"  is  na  loja  de  or  a  (or  de)  with  the  article. 

(1)  At  six  o'clock  we  were  at  home  and  at  dinner. 
As  sets  horas  estavamos  em  casa  e  a  jantar. 
Do  you  play  at  cards?    joga  as  cartas^ 

(2)  She  laughed  at  him  ella  riu-se  d'elle. 
To  tremble  at  tremer  de  or  com. 

1  am  surprised  (angry)  at  what  you  say. 
Est&u  sttrpreendida  (zangada)  do  que  diz. 

(3)  We  were  at  our  aunt's  estavamos  em  casa  da  tia. 
We  buy  our  coffee  at  the  grocer's. 
Compramos  o  nosso  caf4  ao  (or  do)  merceeiro. 

(c)  By. 

By:  1.  Denoting  the  agent  or  cause,  is  translated 
by  de  or  por: 

An  honest  man  is  respected  by  everybody. 
Um  hom£m  honrado  4  respeiiado  por  todas. 
We  are  beloved  by  our  parents. 
Som^s  amados  de  nossos  paes. 
I  took  the  child  by  its  hand. 
Tomei  a  crianga  pela  mdo. 

2.  After  verbs  denoting  to  sell,  to  buy,  to  work,  etc., 
and  preceding  a  noun  of  weight  or  measure,  day, 
week,  month  or  year,  "by"  is  rendered  into  Portuguese 
by  a  with  the  definite  article  or  by  por: 

How  much  do  you  sell  the  tea  by  the  pound? 
A  quanto  vende  o  chd  por  arratel? 
We  work  by  the  hour  or  by  the  day. 
Irabalhamos  d  hora  ou  as  dia. 

3.  When  preceding  a  numeral  immediately  followed 
by  an  adjective  of  dimension,  "by"  is  rendered  by  ''por': 


Prepositions  Continued.  316 

This  room  is  fifteen  feet  long  by  ten  wide. 

Esta  sola  tern  ^mize  pes  de  comprido  por  dez  de  largo, 

4.  "By"  following  verbs  denoting  to  kill,  to  wound 
etc.,  is  translated  by  diim  golpe  de,  com  or  de  um  ataque 
de-,  etc.,  to  express  the  use  of  the  instrument  by  which 
a  man  was  wounded  or  the  disease  he  was  killed  of: 

The  officer  was  wounded  by  the  sword  of  his  adversary. 
0  official  foi  ferldo  por  um  golpe  de  espada  do  seu  ad- 

'  versdrio. 
His  father  was  killed  by  an  inflammation  of  the  lungs. 
'Seu  pae  morreu  com  um  ataque  de  pneumonia. 

If  the  blows  have  been  repeated,  a  golpes  de  (a 
setadas,  apedradcis)  is  used,  in  which  case  it  is  most  com- 
monly rendered  in  English  by  ''with."     Ex.: 

They  knocked  him  down  with  a  stick. 

5.  "By"  is  employed  in  the  following  idiomatic  ex- 
pressions : 

By  day  de  dia;   day  by   day  by  the  way  |    , 

'dediae,ndL           '       ^  by  the  bye  }  "^^  ^«'^*" 

by  night  de  noite  hard  by  pegado,  proximo  (a) 

by  means  of  a  meio  de,  medi-  by  that  time  nisso,  entao 

ante  by    this     time     twelvemonth 

one  by  one  um  por  um  d'aqui  a  um  anno 

two  by  two  dots  a  dois  by  name  de  nome,  pelo  nome 

by  turns  por  turnos  by  myself  por  mim  mesmo,  sd 

by   the  bulk  em  grosso,  por  by  Jove  par  Deus! 

grosso  by    to-morrow    evening    pela 

by  heart  de  c6r  noite  de  dmanha 

by  letter  por  escrito  by  four  o'clock  pelas  quatro 

by  no  means    de  modo  algum  horas. 
by  and  by  logOj  ao  depois 

'  81.  Thema. 

1.  My  father  was  not  above  (mais  de)  twenty-two  years 
old  when  he  was  married.  My  uncle's  country-house  is  very 
handsome,  but  it  cost  him  above  eighty  thousand  francs.  It 
is  about  a  year  since  my  friend  set  off  for  America.  Rome 
was  buUt  by  Romulus.  The  pooK  man  has  been  driven  out 
of  his  house  by  his  creditors.  1  will  get  up  to-morrow  at 
six  o'clock.  Were  you  at  Mrs.  D.'s  ball  last  night?  Yes, 
I  was  there.     I  Will  pay  you  at  the  end  of  this  month. 


316  Lesson  18. 

2.  I  rejoice  greatly  at  yotir  good  luck.  She  always 
smiles  at  everything  that  is  said.  Where  was  your  sister  this 
morning?  She  was  at  her  aunt's.  My  box  is  one  foot  and 
a  half  deep  by  two  wide  and  four  long.  Harold  was  wound- 
ed by  a  sword.  William  the  Second  was  killed  by  an  arrow 
in  the  New  Forest.  He  is  so  strong  that  with  his  fist  he 
could  knock  down  an  ox.  They  killed  the  dog  with  stones. 
The  soldiers  kill  one  another  with  bayonets. 


(d)  From. 

1.  "From"  after  or  in  connection  with  the  verbs 
to  come,  to  send,  etc.,  is  generally  rendered  by  da 
parte  de,  de  ao  pe  de,  when  followed  by  a  noun  or  pro- 
noun denoting  a  person: 

Many  compliments  from  Dr.  0. 

Muitos  ciimprimentos  da  parte  do  senhor  doutor  0. 

I  come  from  him  or  her. 

Venho  da  parte  d-elle  or  d^ella.     Venho  de  ao  pe  d'eUe 

or  d'ella. 
Tell  him  from  me  diga4he  da  minha  paHe. 

2.  "From"  with  a  possessive  ==  ("from  someone's 
house,")  is  da  casa  de: 

I  come  from  my  uncle's,  aunt's,  etc. 

Eu  venho  da  casa  do  meu  tio,  da  minha  tia. 

3.  "From  .  .  to  .  .",  when  denoting  progress  from 
place  to  place  or  time  to  time,  is  rendered  by  de , ,  .a 
(para,  em,  ate): 

He  went  from  street  to  street,  from  town  to  town. 
yj,     n  .  \  de  rua  a  riia,  de  terra  a  terra. 

'      \  duma  rua  a  out?'a,  duma  terra  a  outra. 
From  day  to  day,  from  time  to  time. 
De  dia  a  (or  em)  dia,  de  tempos  a  tempos. 

4.  "From"  is  rendered  by  desde  (or  de),  and  "to" 
by  ate,  when  speaking  of  extent  or  time. 

From  Easter  to  Christmas. 

Desde  a  Pdscoa  ate  ao  (or  at4  o)  Natal. 

From  the  Rhine  to  the  Ocean. 

Desde  o  Rheno  at^  o  oceano. 

From  Lisbon  to  Porto. 

Desde  Lisboa  ati  ao  (or  atS  o)  Porto, 


Prepositions  Continued.  817 

(e)  On  or  upon. 

1.  "On"  or  "upon"  generally  =  em,  em  cima  de, 
para  cima  de,  sobre: 

Your  gloves  are  on  the  table. 

As  suas  luvas  estdo  em  cima  da  misa. 

I  am  sitting  on  a  chair. 

Eu  estou  (assentado)  numa  cadeira. 

A  cover  is  spread  on  the  bed. 

Uma  toberta  estd  estendida  sobre  a  cama. 

"On  to"  with  verbs  of  motion  =  para  dma  de. 
The  cat  sprang  on  to  the  table. 
0  gato  saltou  para  cima  da  mesa. 

2.  After  the  verb  "to  play,"  ow  or  upon  is  not 
translated;  after  "to  live,"  "to  depend,"  and  the  like, 
"on"  or  "upon"  is  rendered  by  de: 

You  play  on  the  violin,  and  I  play  on  the  flute. 
F*  Ex**  toca  rebecca  e  eu  toco  flauta. 

The  prisoner  lives  on  bread  and  water. 
0  preso  vive  de  pdo  e  dgua. 

A  good  end  often  depends  on  a  good  beginning. 

Um  bom  fim  muitas  vezes  depende  d'um  bom  principio. 

3.  "On"  before  the  days  of  the  week  is  rendered 
by  em  with  the  article;  in  letter-dates,  it  is  dropped  in 
Portuguese: 

Come  on  Sunday  or  Monday. 

Venha  no  domingo  ou  na  segunda  feira. 

On  the  19*^  of  April. 

No  dia  dezanove  de  Abril,  etn  19  de  .  .  . 

Lisbon,  on  the  7^  of  May  lAsboa,  7  de  Maio. 

People  go  to  church  on  Sundays. 
Vae-se  a  igreja  aos  domingos. 

4.  "On,"  followed  by  a  substantive  expressing 
action,  or  meaning  "when"  with  a  verb,  is  translated 
by  a  and  em: 

On  his  marriage  (when  he  married)  ao  seu  casamento. 
On  that  occasion  nessa  occasido. 


818  Lesson  13. 

(f)  Over. 

1.  "Over"  generally  is  translated  by  em  (or  a)  cima 
de,  sobre  when  it  signifies  a  stay;  by  por  cima  de,  when 
it  means  movement: 

The  looking-glass  hangs  over  the  chest  of  drawers. 
0  espelho  estd  em  cima  da  cdmmoda 
The  cat  passed  over  the  live  coal. 
0  goto  passou  por  cima  das  brasas. 

2.  When  it  is  equivalent  to  "more  than"  or  "longer 
than,"  it  is  rendered  by  tnais  de,  diem  de: 

The  fight  lasted  over  four  hours. 
A  luta  durou  mais  de  quatro  haras. 

Note. — Distinguish  carefully  from  this  the  use  of  "over" 
as  an  adverb: 

As  soon  as  the  rain  is  over. 

Logo  que  a  chuva  tiver  passado. 

Is  dinner  over?    Jd  acdbou  o  jantar? 

That's  over  and  gone  isso  passou,  isso  jd  Id  vae. 

(g)  With. 

1.  "With"  is  rendered  by  de  (or  com)  after  verbs 
denoting  to  die,  to  meddle,  to  do,  to  dispense,  to  load, 
to  cover,  to  fill,  and  after  adjectives  meaning  pleased, 
contented,  etc.     Ex.: 

He  is  dying  with  cold  elle  morre  de  frio. 
The  waggon  is  loaded  with  goods. 
0  carro  estd  carregado  de  mercadoria. 

2.  "With"  is  expressed  by  a  without  the  article 
before  nouns  denoting  the  means  by  which  a  thing  is 
done  or  made.     Ex.: 

To  draw  with  a  pencil  desenhar  a  lapiz. 

To  "fight  with"  (a  weapon)  is :  bater-se  a  {espada  etc.). 

3.  "With"  must  not  be  expressed  after  certain 
verbs,  such  as:  to  meet  with  encontrar  (with  direct  ob- 
ject; but:  encontrar-se  com);  to  trust  with  confiar  alg.  c. 
a  alg. ;  to  supply  with  fornecer  alg.  c.  a  alg. ,  to  reproach 
with  langar  em  rosto,  reprehender  dig.  c.  a.  alg.     Ex.: 

We  shall  supply  him  with  everything. 
Havemos  de  Ihe  fornecer'  tudo. 


Prepositions  Continued.  319 

I  reproached  him  with  his  ingratitude. 
Eu  reprehendi'lhe  a  sua  ingratiddo. 

4.  "With"  governing  a  noun  together  with  which 
it  forms  an  adjective  phrase  in  translated  by  de. 

A  bonnet  with  feathers  um  chapeu  de  plumas. 
The  boy  with  black  hair  o  rapaz  de  cabellos  pretos. 

5.  "With"  meaning  amongst,  in,  is  rendered  by 
com  and  em: 

With  us,  said  the  Frenchman  .  .  . 

Comnosco,  dizia  o  frauds. 

With  woman,  maternal  love  is  the  strongest  feeling. 

Na  tntdher  o  amor  maternal  e  o  sentimento  muis  forte. 

Remark. 

As  already  stated,  prepositions  must  always  come  before 
the  words  they  govern,  and  never  (as  often  in  English)  at 
the  end  of  a  sentence : 

Whom  are  you  speaking  to?     A  quern  fala? 
What's  that  for?     Para  qui  i  isso? 
The  man  whom  you  are  interested  in. 
0  homem  em  que  estd  interessado. 

32.  Thema. 

1.  Go  to  Mr.  Smith  and  tell  him  from  me  that  I  am 
expecting  him.  From  whom  do  you  come?  I  come  from 
Miss  B.  I  never  received  such  an  (=^  tamanho)  insult  from  a 
Frenchman.  Charles  was  wounded  in  his  arm,  and  not  in  his 
leg.  I  will  call  upon  you  in  the  afternoon,  and  in  the  evening 
(I  will)  go  to  the  play.  Upon  what  instrument  does  your 
sister  play?  She  plays  the  piano.  That  happened  on  the 
12^  of  March.  I  am  in  the  habit  of  taking  a  cup  of  coffee 
as  soon  as  dinner  is  over. 

2.  Do  not  meddle  with  my  affairs ;  attend  to  your  own. 
Is  that  house  covered  with  slates  or  tiles?  It  is  covered  with 
tiles.  This  picture  seems  to  be  done  with  pencil.  When  you 
meet  with  a  poor  man,  never  reproach  him  with  his  poverty. 
France  extends  from  the  Bhine  to  the  Atlantic  Ocean.  What 
does  he  complain  of?  We  have  travelled  from  Switzerland  to 
Italy.  You  spend  all  the  day  in  going  from  house  to  house, 
from  street  to  street,  from  place  to  place.  Those  labourers 
work  from  morning  to  night.  I  walk  every  day  from  twelve 
to  three. 


320  Leseon  18. 

33.  Leitura. 

0  aiUomdvel. 

0  automovel,  como  a  propria  palavra  o  esta  a  indicar,  e 
um  carro  que  se  move  por  si  mesmo,  ou  independente  de  qual- 
quer  f6r9a  exterior.  Para  comprehendermos  facilmente  o  me- 
cbanismo  do  automovel,  notemos,  antes  de  mais  nada,  certos 
factos  conhecidos  de  todos,  que  nos  levarao,  sem  o  menor  es- 
fOr^o,  a  comprehensao  d'aquelle  mechanismo.  Qaando  pomos 
em  movimento  a  roda  de  uma  bomba,  acontece  que  o  movi- 
mento  que  imprimimos  a  essa  roda  faz  com  que  o  fimbolo  da 
bomba  Buba  e  des^a ;  o  que  e  o  mesmo  que  dizer  que  o  movi- 
mento da  roda  se  transmittiu  ao  fimbolo;  —  e  suppondo  o 
caso  inverso,  isto  e,  que,  em  vez  de  fazermos  girar  a  roda  da 
bomba,  faziamos  subir  e  descer,  com  o  auxilio  das  maos,  o  seu 
6mbolo,  tambem  o  movimento  d'este  faria  com  que  a  roda  en- 
trasse  a  girar.  Por  outra:  o  movimento  do  fimbolo  transmittir- 
se-hia  igualmente  ao  volante  da  bomba. 

Quer  isto  dizer  que  se  uma  roda  pode  p6r  em  movimento 
um  fimbolo,  tambem  este  pode  p6r  em  movimento  uma  roda. 
Ora  no  automdvei  e  precisamente  o  movimento  de  um  Smbolo 
(movimento  rectiUneo  alternativo,  ou  de  vae-vem)  o  que  foz 
mover  as  rodas  d'este  vehiculo.  Se  n'um  apparelho  fizermos 
com  que  o  fimbolo  se  desloque  n'um  movimento  de  vae-vem, 
subindo  e  descendo  constantemente,  6  claro  que  a  roda,  que 
esta  ligada  a  esse  embolo  por  uma  haste,  entrara  a  girar,  e 
girard  emquanto  o  6mbolo  estiver  em  movimento. 

Conversai^So. 

Que  6  um  automdvel? 

D'onde  ja  deduzimos  que  se  m6ve  por  si  mesmo? 

Que  havemos  de  notar,  para  comprehendermos  o  seu 
mechanismo? 

Que  acontece  quando  p6mos  em  movimento  a  roda  d^uma 
bomba  ? 

E  que  se  daria,  suppondo-se  o  caso  inverse? 

Que  quer  dizer  isso? 

Qual  6  0  movimento  que  faz  mover  as  rodas  d'um  auto- 
movel? 

Como  entrarSo  as  rodas  a  girar? 

E  durante  que  tempo  continuarSo  a  girar? 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of  Speech.       321 

Fourteenth  Lesson. 

Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of 
Speech. 

Pronouns. 

A.  Possessive  Pronouns.     ^Pronomes  possessivos, 

§  54.  Like  the  article,  the  possessive  pronoun  is 
repeated  before  all  nouns  when  designating  persons  or 
things  of  different  kind;  equally  before  all  adjectives 
when  referring  to  beings  of  different  kind  and  preceding 
the  noun.     Ex.: 

Os  mens  desgostos  e  as  minims  cdegrias.   JPartilhet  comtigo 
OS  teus  bons  e  os  teus  mans  momentos. 

§  55.  If  there  be  no  contrast  of  kind,  or  if  the 
adjectives  do  not  refer  to  the  same  noun,  the  poss. 
pronoun  is  not  repeated: 

Todos  admiram  as  nossas  vastas  e  hellas  ftoresias. 

§  56.    The  gender  of  the  nouns  being  different, 
the  possessive  pronoun  agrees  witli  the  one  next  to  it: 
0  meu  poder  e  gldria;  a  minha  gldria  e  poder. 

§  57.  A  poss.  pronoun  which  belongs  to  several 
adjectives  is  not  repeated  if  one  or  all  of  them  follow 
the  noun: 

Partilhei  comiigo  os   teus  bons  momentos  e  os  matts  (os 
teus  momentos  bons  e  maus). 

§  58.     The  poss.  pronoun  may  be   strengthened: 

(a)  By  adding  ^roprio:  vi-o  com  os  meusproprios  olhos. 

(b)  By  adding  a  demonstrative  pronoun: 

Ouvi  por  estes  meus  ouvidos  dizer  aqueUe  seu  amigo, 

§  59.  Contrary  to  the  English,  the  Portuguese 
employs  instead  of  the  poss.  pronoun: 

(a)  The  definite  article  in  those  cases  where    the 
relation  between  owner  and  object  is  evident: 
Escreveu  d  av6  (to  his  grandmother). 
Vendeu  a  ca>sa  (his  house). 
Estendo  o  brago  (my  arm). 
Tapa  a  boca  (your  mouth). 
Cala  a  boca  hold  your  tongue. 
Portuguese  ConyersationGrammar.  21 


322  Lesson  14. 

N.B. — If  the  object  is  an  abstract  noun  in  the  plural, 
the  article  may  be  omitted: 

Jtecobrei  (os)  sentidos:  redobrdmos  (as)  diligencias. 

(b)  Be  or  another  preposition  after  certain  verbs: 
Miidar  de  fato  to  change  dress. 

Mudou  d' aviso  he  changed  his  mind. 

Cumpri  corn  a  (minha)  palavra  I  kept  my  word. 

Ella  caiu  de  joelhos  she  fell  on  her  knees. 

(c)  De  with  the  personal  pronoun  of  the  S'"^  per- 
son, whenever  the  poss.  pronoun  sen,  sua  might  cause 
a  misunderstanding: 

Vi  a  irma  d'elle,  d'ella  (his,  her  sister). 
Fomos  a  casa  d'elles  (to  their  house). 

§  60.  Before  the  same  noun  two  poss.  pronouns 
are  not  admissible: 

Os  sens  amigos  e  os  mens. 

Your  and  my  friends,  your  friends  and  mine. 

§  61.  If  to  a  noun  belong  a  poss.  pronoun  and 
a  possessive  genitive,  the  latter  must  be  preceded  by 
0,  a,  OS,  as,  esse,  aquelle  or  the  like: 

Li  as  tuas  cartas  e  as  (essas,  aquellos)  de  tua  irmd. 

I  read  your  and  your  sister's  letters. 

§  62.  If  the  noun  depending  on  the  poss.  pronoun 
expresses  a  quality,  the  definite  article  may  be  employed 
instead,  while  to  the  verb  will  be  added  the  respective 
personal  pronoun  in  the  dative: 

Estranhei-lhe  a  franqiiesa  I  wonderad  at  his  frankness. 
Adfniro-lhes  o  sangue-frio  I  admire  their  self-possession 

(or  coolness). 
Como  te  conhego  a  indole  ...  as  I  know  your  character* 
Reconheci-lhe  imia  boa  voz. 
I  noticed  him  to  have  a  good  voice. 
N.B.— This  construction  may  be  employed  with  persons 
and  must  be  employed  with  things: 

Avistdmos    a    cidade:   jd    se    Ihe    distinguiam    (jd    Ihe 

distinguimos)  as  torres. 
We  got  a  sight  of  the  town:  its  spires   could   already 

be  distinguished. 

§  63  While  the  adjective  and  participle  always 
agree  with  the  possessive  in  gender  and  number,  titles 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of  Speech.        323 

of  which  the  possessive  forms  an  essential  part,  are 
excepted  from  this  rule,  the  adjective  agreeing  with  the 
natural  sex  of  the  person: 

Vossa   AlUza    que    e    horn   e  justo   (respectively :    l)oa   e 

justa). 
Sua  Santidade  estci  hem  lenihrado. 

34.  Thema. 

He  sacrificed  his  and  his  sister's  fortune,  though  an  ac- 
quaintance of  mine  warned  him.  If  he  had  doubled  his  efforts, 
and  if  somebody  had  come  to  his  help,  he  might  have  succee- 
ded in  saving  his  family  from  ruin.  As  I  know  his  honesty,  I 
did  whatever  I  could  to  guide  his  steps.  But  alas !  my  friend, 
all  my  measures  were  in  vain.  His  own  father  gave  him  up. 
I  am  wet  through,  I  must  change  my  dress.  My  friend  changed 
his  mind,  he  will  remain  at  home  with  his  parents.  My  head 
aches.  I  wrote  a  long  letter  to  my  aunt,  who  had  asked  me 
to  give  her  soms  news  from  me.  May  1  also  give  her  your 
kind  regards?  The  woman  fell  on  her  knees.  I  have  a 
thorn  in  my  foot.  I  have  only  lived  a  fortnight  in  this  town; 
so  I  don't  yet  know  all  its  places  and  streets. 

35.  Leitura  e  yersao. 
Carta  ao  Sr.  G.  P.  sobre  Feminismo. 

Nao  imagina  V"^  Ex*  o  prazer  que  me  deu  a  sua  carta, 
sabido  como  ^  que  da  discussao  intelligente  e  sincera  t6m  sahido 
as  mais  claras  verdades;  conhecido  como  e  quanto  se  ganha 
em  fazer  interessar  pelas  nossas  opinioes,  ainda  os  adversaries 
que  mais  as  combatem.  E  nao  sendo  V*  Ex*  um  adversario, 
mas  um  confesso  adepto,  embora  moderado,  maior  prazer  o 
men  em  Ihe  vir  expor  serenamente  as  ideias  fenainistas,  taes 
como  as  comprehendo  e  preconiso.  Diz  V*  Ex*  que  e  femi- 
nista,  embora  moderado,  que  o  e,  como  todos  os  illustrados 
nao  poderao  deixar  de  o  ser,  segundo  a  sua  propria  phrase. 
Eis  o  nosso  primeiro  triumpho,  a  nossa  principal  batalha  ven- 
cida  . . .  Que  victoria  immensa  nao  representa  essa  sua  simples 
phrase!  E  se  pensarmos  que  esta  primeira,  mas  definitiva 
conquista  do  espirito  masculino.  representa  o  trabalho  de  quasi 
meio  s^culo,  temos  vontade  de  dizer  .  .  .  que  as  mulheres, 
apresentando  as  suas  ideias  e  luctando  pela  educa9ao  que  as 
superiorize,  lembram  a  paciencia  das  alluvioes  que  fazem  re- 
cuar  o  mar  e  mudam  o  aspecto  de  um  pais.  Entendo  que  o 
ser  humano  que  pertence  ao  sexo  femininO;  nao  deve  ser  coa- 
gido  (influenced)  pela  educa9ao,  nem  pelos  costumes,  nem  pelas 

21* 


824  Lesson  15*. 

conversas,  nem  pelos  paes  —  que  tfini'  a  mania  de  talhar  muito 
discrecionariamente  o  future  dos  filhos  —  a  vfir  no  casamento 
um  fim,  um  ideal  complete  e  unico,  quasi  uma  obrigaQao. 
Assim  como  o  homem  pdde  ser  professor,  jornalista,  8ai3io, 
artista,  empregado,  operario,  tudo  emfim,  sem  que  ninguem  Ihe 
pergante  pela  certidao  do  matrimonio,  sem  embargo  de  serem 
quasi  todos  chefes  de  familia,  nao  vejo  inconveniente  a  que 
a  mulher  procure  a  sua  colloca9ao,  tenha  o  seu  curso  scien- 
tifico,  estude,  trabalhe  para  si,  para  o  seu  future,  para  a  sua 
vida  autdnoma,  sem  se  Ihe  inquirir  do  seu  estado  .  .  . 
(Anna  de  Castro  Os6rio:  As  mulheres  portuguftsas.) 


Fifteenth  Lesson. 

Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of 
Speech  (continued). 

B.  Personal  Pronouns. 

§  64.  To  put  an  emphasis  upon  a  personal  (or 
demonstrative)  pronoun  (or  a  substantive),  the  Portu- 
guese employ: 

(a)  The  indefinite  pronoun  mesmo,  (-self): 

Escreveu  elle  mSsino  he  wrote  himself  (cf.:  escreveu  corn 
o  seu  prdprio  punJio  he  wrote  with  his  own  hand  or 
autographically). 

Vimo-la  a  ella  mismo  we  saw  her  herself. 

Vimo-la  nds  mesmos  we  saw  her  ourselves. 

(b)  The  verb  ser  with  the  pronoun  o  (a  os  as)  and 
a  relative  clause:  ser  o  que  (a  que,  etc.)  or  ser  quern: 

Tu  fdste  0  que  me  salvaste  (instead  of  "tu  me  salvaste'*) 
it  was  you  who  saved  me. 

N.B. — "0"  may  be  dropped  ijTw  4  que  me  salvaste. 

(c)  The  periphrase  e  (era,  foi,  etc.)  que: 

Tu  i  que  me  salvaste.     i  a  ti  que  devo  a  minha  salvagdo. 

Here  que  is  not  a  relative,  but  a  particle  of  emphasis 
C'Particula  de  realce").  In  both  periphrases  (b)  and  (c) 
the  dependent  verb  generally  agrees  with  the  personal 
pronoun:  tu  salvaste. 


It  was  not  we  who  said  that 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of  Speech.        325 

If,  however,  a  pronoun  so  emphasized  is  followed 
by  quem,  the  verb  agrees  with  this  latter — i.e.,  it  is  put 
into  the  S'*^  person  singular.     Ex.: 

(  JEu  fui  (o)  que  afp,rmei  isso 

It  was  I  who  affirmed  that         f '.  ^  que  uffirmeiisso 

Fut  eti  (o)  que  affiiinei  tsso 
Fui  eu  quern  affirmou  isso. 

Nos  e  que  o  ndo  dissenios 
Nds  ndo  fomos  (os)  que  o  dis- 

seram 
Ndo    fomos    nds    (os)    que    o 

disset'am 
Ndo  fomos  nos  quern  o    disse. 

(d)  The  particle  to  be  emphasized  may  be  also  put 
at  the  beginning  of  the  sentence,  being  generally 
repeated  by  a  personal  pronoun.     Ex.: 

A  tnini  reputo-me  um  pohre  filho  de  povo  que  por  acaso 
veto  ter  cd  cima. 

Essas  hervas  e  preciso  arrancd-Ui8 . 

AqueUes  individuos  que  desejarem  orientar-se  no  estudo 
dum  tal  prohlema  ndo  deixarei  de  Ihes  recommenda7' 
a  leitura  de  dots  hellos  livres,  (Jue  venho  de  comptdsar. 

§  65.  When  two  or  more  subjects  (noun  or  pro- 
noun) of  different  persons  belong  to  the  same  verb, 
this  agrees  with  the  plural  of  the  most  prominent  per- 
son (the  1^^  pers.  is  more  prominent  then,  the  2^^  and 
this  more  than  the  3"^): 

Eu,  tu  e  elle  partiremos  juntos.     Tu  e  elle  partireis  juntos. 
Eu  e  meti  irmdo  partimos  juntos. 

Note.— In  southern  Portugal  and  in  familiar  speech  the 
verb  is  employed  in  the  3*^  person  pi.  instead  of  the  2^^: 
Tu  e  ten  irmdo  partirao  juntos. 

§  ^Q.  The  absolute  reflective  pronoun  is  si,  which 
does  not  distinguish  number  or  gender.  It  is  employed 
with  the  prepositions  a,  de,  em,  por  (per),  para,  sohre. 
With  com  it  assimilates  to  comsigo.  Sometimes  it  is 
strengthened  by  mesmo: 

Ndo  estar  em  si  to  be  out  of  one's  mind 
esta?'  muito  em    si  \   ,     ,  .  «  ,„ 

estar  senhor  de  si  /  *^  ^«  conscious  of  oneself 


326  '  Lesson  15. 

cair  em  si  \   .  .        '       it* 

tornar  sobre  si  ]  *^  "^^'^  *^  ^^^^^^^  ^^^^^ 

fazer  alg.  c.  de  per  si,  to  do  something  separately 

fazer  para  si  to  do  for  oneself 

0  immdo  em  si  the  world  by  itself 

pensar  de  si  para  si  to  think  by  oneself 

tomar  sohre  si  to  take  upon  oneself 

trazer  comsigo  to  carry  about  oneself 

ndo  caber  em  si  de  .  .  .  to  be  beside  oneself  with  .  .  . 

§  67.  "5i"  depending  on  another  preposition  may 
be  translated  by  elle(s),  ella(s): 

Elle(s)  tinha(m)  todos  contra  elle(s)  or  si. 
He  (they)  had  everybody  against  him  (them). 
Viram  o  ceu  azul  por  cima  d'elles  (or  de  si). 
They  saw  the  blue  sky  above  them. 

N.B.— The  same  translation  takes  place  when  "s2,''  being 
in  familiar  speech  employed  also  for  "you,"  might  cause  a 
misunderstanding.  Pensa  sempre  em  si  may  be:  he  thinks 
always  of  you  or  .  .  .  of  himself.  So,  to  express  the  latter,  it 
is  better  to  say:  2^e/?sa  sempre  em  si  mesmo. 

§  68.  The  conjunctive  reflective  pronoun  is  se,  which 
takes  the  forms  me,  te^  nos,  vos,  according  to  the  person 
and  number.     Its  place  is: 

(a)  In  an  affirmative  direct  capital  phrase  after 
the  verb: 

J£lle  apresetitoii-se ;  eu  lenibro-me ;  nds  a/fastamo-nos, 

(b)  In  such  a  phrase  beginning  with  an  adverb 
or  some  complement,  se  may  be  placed  before  or  after 
the  verb: 

Hontem    lemhrei-tne;    Id    se   ficou ;   pouco   a  pouco   nos 
aproximd?nos. 

(c)  In  a  negative  and  interrogative  capital  phrase 
and  always  in  a  dependent  clause  before  the  verb: 

JElle  ndo  se  app'oximou;  tu  ndo  ie  applicas;   a   ecpta  e 
que  se  ndo  esquecia;  nem  me  fale  nisso. 

§  69.  How  to  translate  "it  is"  with  a  predicative 
complement : 

(a)  This  being  a  noun  with  an  article,  possessive 
or    demonstrative    pronoun,    an    adjective    or    a    noun 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of  Speech.        327 


employed  as  an  adjective  and  followed  by  qiie  or  an  in- 
finitive, "it  is"  is  translated  by  e: 

E  uma  lastima  it  is  a  pity. 

E  meu  it  is  mine ;  e  isto  that's  it. 

E  0  ten  dever.     E  certo,  e  verdade  que  se  foi  emhora. 

E  facil  a  gente  enganar-se  a  si  mesmo. 

Seria  jiisto  (seria  Jiistica)  que  fosse  ahsolvido. 

(b)  The  predicate  being  an  adverb  or  a  noun  which 
designs  a  transitory  state,  "it  is"  is  rendered  by  "esta': 

Estd  hem  it's  all  right;  estd  um  horror  it's   a  horrible 
thing;  estd  uma  helleza  it's  a  beautiful  sight. 

§  70.  "So"  or  "that''  supplying  the  place  of  an 
adjective,  or  of  a  noun  used  adjectively,  or  of  a  phrase, 
is  translated  by  o  or  isso  or  remains  untranslated: 

Portugal  e  um  povo  triste,  e  e-o  ate  quando  sorri  (and  it 

is  so  even  when  smiling). 
Durante  algum  tempo,  o  sy sterna  liberal  foi  uma  palavra. 
Hoje  7iem  isso  L 
For  some  time  the  Liberal  system   was   (but)   a  word. 

To  day  it  is  not  even  that. 

36.  Thema. 

Louis  Philip,  King  of  the  French,  wrote  most  of  his 
letters  with  his  own  hand.  It's  to  you  that  I  owe  my  liberty 
and  my  life.  Mrs.  S.  speaks  always  of  herself  and  blames 
everything  she  did  not  do  herself.  Have  you  your  spectacles 
about  you  ?  Yes,  I  never  go  out  without  them.  I  never  saw  these 
gentlemen  in  your  house.  Are  they  your  nephews?  Yes, 
they  are.  She  will  think  of  us  when  she  is  unfortunate, 
for  she  will  certainly  become  so.  Is  that  your  house?  Yes, 
it  is.  Are  those  your  shoes?  Yes,  they  are.  "Is  it  you,  my 
friend?"  exclaimed  I,  when  I  heard  somebody  come  up  the 
stairs.  "Yes,  it  is  I,"  answered  he;  "I  bring  you  good  news." 
Was  it  you,  my  boys,  who  planted  this  tree?  Virtue  by  it- 
self is  worthy  of  esteem;  but  vice  by  itself  is  hateful.  I  and  my 
children  will  pass  the  summer  in  the  country.  Then  you  and 
your  friends  will  no  longer  stay  there. 

37.  Leitura, 

Nao  perdia  o  seu  tempo  aquelle  veneziano  que  viera  re- 
commendado  a  S"alomao  Zacuto  e  se  disfar^ava  em  mercador 
flamengo.     Era  um  espirito  perspicaz  e  observador.    Desagra- 


828  Lesson  16. 

ddra-lho  o  caracter  de  Salomao.  NSo  era  evidentemente  o  judeu 
que  elle  suppozera  encontrar. 

Um  outro  Ihe  parecera  excellente  para  informador  e  auxi- 
liar,  em  terra  que  tao  completamente  Ihe  era  desconliecida. 
De  um  relance  d'olhos  o  avaliara  e  Ihe  percebera  os  meritos. 
Esse  outro  era  Ananias,  o  cdmico  judeu,  que  a  canalha  de 
Lisbfia  apupava  cruelmente. 

Que  importava  ao  yeneziano  que  elle  fdsse  ridiculo  ?  Sabia 
muita  cousa  da  yida  de  Lisb6a,  conhecia  e  apreciava  perspi- 
cazmente  os  homens  de  Villa  Nova  da  Gibraltar,  seus  corre- 
ligiondrios,  e  nSo  seria  difficil  conseguir  que  falasse  desassorb- 
bradamente. 

Aquelle  seria  o  seu  precioso  guia.  Leu -Ihe  a  alma  no 
olhar,  sentiu-lhe  vibrar  a  ambiijao  em  breves  referencias  re- 
passadas  de  malicia,  em  palavras  soltas  que  vinham  esbraze- 
adas  de  ranc6r.  Comprehendeu  a  especie  d'homem  que  a  for- 
tuna  Ihe  deparava,  e  logo  procurou  acercal-o  bem  de  si, 
lisongeando-lhe  as  cobii^as  e  malqueren9as,  tao  rapidamente 
surprehendidas.         (Campos  Junior:  Guerreiro  e  Monge.) 

Courersac^ao. 

Que  nos  diz  Campos  Junior  d'aquelle  veneziano  no  seu 
c^lebre  romance  «Guerreiro  e  Monge  ?» 

Quaes  foram  as  relaqoes  d'elle  com  SalomSo  ZacutoV 

Como  vinha  disfar^ado? 

Qual  foi  0  juizo  que  o  seu  espirito  observador  formou  do 
judeu  que  o  acolhera? 

Quem  Ihe  parecia  melhor  para  informadoi:? 

Como  Ihe  tinha  percebido  os  meritos? 

Que  circumstancia  tornava  Ananias  precioso  aos  olhos 
dp  veneziano? 

Que  procurou  elle  fazer  em  seguida? 

Por  5^e  meios  o  acercou  de  si? 


Sixteenth  Lesson. 

Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of 
Speech  (continued). 

Personal  Pronouns  (continued). 
§  71.     If  the    modal   verbs    [querer,    saber,    dever, 
poder,  ir,  deixar,  fazer,  mandar,  vir,  ouvir,   sentir,  etc.) 
are  followed  by  an  infinitive   and  a  personal  pronoun, 


Syjitactic  PeculiariticB  of  Certain  Parts  of  Speech.        829 

this  latter  is  placed  in  a  direct  sentence,  whether  affir- 
mative or  interrogative; 

(a)  After  or  before  the  infinitive,  if  it  is  its  object: 
Devo-o  fazei'  or  devo  fazSl-o?  vou  huscdl-o;  posso  dizer- 

Ih'o  or  posso-Wo  dizer ;  tnandei-a  abrir;  vi  castigdU-o. 

(b)  Before  the  infinitive,  when  it  is  its  subject: 
Mandei-o  buscar  pdo;  vi-o  castigar  o  coo;  ouQO-a  chamar 

a  fUha;  fago-o  vir ;  ouviram-no  falar;  mandaram-me 
entrar. 

§  71.  In  negative  sentences  the  place  of  the  pro- 
noun is  before  the  verb: 

Nao  rn'o  tinhas  dado;  nao  Wo  deste? 

In  the  case  of  §  70  (a)  also  in  a  negative  sentence 
the  pronoun  may  be  placed  before  the  verb  or  after 
the  infinitive: 

Nao  0  devo  fazer  (?) ;  nao  devo  fazil-o  (9). 

In  a  dependent  negative  clause,  the  pronoun  may- 
precede  or  follow  the  ''nao': 

"Jd  porqiie  me   nao   (or  nuo  me)    esquego  que    S  pobre, 
miiito  pobre,  o  nosso  povo." 

§  72.     If  the  phrase  begins  by  a  complement  (ad- 
verb, conjunction,  relative  pronoun,  etc.)  the  conjunctive 
pronoun  is  generally  put  before  the  verb  or  its  auxiliary: 
Emqnanto    o    nao   vejo  .  .  .;     quantas    vezes    IKo    nao 

tenho  dito! 
Deus   vol'O  pague!      (Here    the    conjunction    "jwc"    is 
omitted.) 

N.B. — The  verbs  ver,  ouvir,  deixar,  mandarj  fazer  being 
followed  by  an  infinitive  and  an  accusative  complement  of 
the  S'"^  person  (Oj  aj  os,  as)j  the  dative  pronoun  (Ihej  Ihes) 
may  be  employed  instead  (see  §  62): 

Eu  vejo-lhes  langar  Idgrimas  tristes. 
The  same  is  to  be  said  of  the  verb  chamar:  chama-lke  sever o; 
clmmo'lhe  meu.     (See  also  §  62.) 

§  73.  Conjunctions  of  the  Pronouns. 

(a)  A  pronoun  of  the  dative  or  accusative  may  be 
joined  to  a  gerund,  but  never  to  a  past  participle: 

Dizendo-Uie  isto;  tenho-Wo  dito  (but  not:  tenho  dito-Wof) 


830  Lesson  16. 

(b)  "5e"  may  be  joined  to  another  conjunctive 
pronoun : 

Nao  se  me   tira  da  cabega  que  foram  injustos  comnosco, 

(c)  In  the  future  and  conditional  tenses  the  pro- 
noun complement  is  intercalated  between  the  root  of 
the  infinitive  and  the  termination: 

fechdl-o-d;  sel-o-ei;  far-lhe-ia  falta;  vel-o-emos ;  dir-Wo-ei. 

Popularly,  these  forms  are  not  employed,  but  are 
replaced  by  others — for  instance: 

Eu  digo-Wo  ao  depots ;  vamos  vel-o. 

(d)  Sometimes  a  dative  complement  (especially  of 
the  pronouns)  is  joined  to  a  verb  instead  of  a  possessive 
pronoun  before  a  noun: 

Ficava-nos  tambem  na  amada  terra  o  coragdo. 
Also  our  heart  remained  in  our  beloved  country. 

(e)  The  EngHsh  * 'there  were  four  of  us,"  instead 
of  "we  were  four,"  is  rendered  in  Portuguese  by: 

JS?'amos  quatro  ao  todo. 

(f)  In  familiar  speech  the  pleonastical  "me"  is  used 
in  sentences  like  this: 

Porque  ndo  me  estiida?    Why  don't  you  study? 
Ndo  me  saias  d'aqui!    Don't  go  out  of  this  place. 

(g)  To  the  pronouns  nos  and  vos  is  added  some- 
times an  also  pleonastical  outros: 

N6s-outros  Portugueses  we  Portuguese, 
(h)  In  famihar  speech  seu,  sua  are  employed  with 
a  following  noun  or  an  adjective  used  as  such: 
Seu  garotoi     Naughty  boy! 
Seu  feliza7'do !    Fortunate  man  that  you  are ! 
Seu  tola!    Fool  that  you  are! 

88.  Thema. 

From  where  do  you  get  your  coffee?  I  get  it  sent  from 
Guatemala.  Is  it  good?  I  have  always  heard  it  hghly  praised. 
I  have  also  noticed  it  always  to  have  the  best  flavour  (cf. 
§  62).  Some  time  ago  there  was  a  revolution  in  Catalonia, 
but  the  Government  succeeded  in  suppressing  it.  That  province 
strives  to  render  itself  independent,  but  until  now  it  has 
not  yet  succeeded.  Get  up!  You  intended  to  rise  at  cock-crow. 
Don't  yoa -hear  it  crow?     I  have   heard  it   crowing  already 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Certain  Parts  of  Speech.        831 

half  an  hour  ago.  To  this  poor  woman  a  letter  was  given 
in  which  she  was  informed  of  her  son's  misfortune.  She 
melted  into  tears  (=  desfazer-se  em  pranto)  so  that  she  was 
not  to  be  calmed.  Saint  Anthony,  the  patron  saint  of  Lisbon, 
is  said  to  have  been  preaching  when  a  raving  madman  entered 
the  church  and  with  wild  words  and  gestures  demanded  the  string 
that  fastened  his  hood.  The  saint  immediately  took  it  off,  and 
as  soon  as  he  clasped  it  round  the  madman,  this  latter  changed 
into  one  of  his  most  attentive  hearers. 

39.  Leitura. 
Bia  no  campo. 

A  tarde  principiava  a  coar-se  atraves  das  grandes  arvores 
da  nossa  dev6za.  Os  campos  estavam  solitarios;  neste,  na- 
quelle,  dois  ou  tres  bois  como  esquecidos.  Tinhamos  passado  o 
dia  pouco  communicativos  e  repassados  de  uma  doce  saudade 
maguada:  e,  sem  me  sentir  com  coragem  de  Ihe  dizer  que 
abrisse  o  piano,  po>sei  sobre  a  cadeira  a  rabeca  que  quiz  fazer 
cantar  e  que  gemeu  em  torn  menor  uma  amargura.  Eramos 
tres  ha  dez  mezes  e  somos  so  dois  agora.  E,  como  o  peque- 
nito  morr^ra  aqui,  desde  entao  a  nossa  casita  de  campo,  aldea 
e  branca,  no  declive  d'um  monte  verde,  entre  pinheiros,  fechou-se 
e  nunca  mais  falei  n'ella. 

Quando  me  pediu  que  voltassemos,  quiz  dissuadil-a  ter- 
namente;  mas  ella  tinha  o  riso  nos  labios;  e  um  ramo  de  floras 
outonaes  para  a  campa  do  nosso  fllho,  uma  visita  matinal  ao 
cemiterio  que  e  como  uma  singella  quadra  campestre,  a  missa 
conventual  dita  pelo  tio  Jos6  na  egreja  fresca,  o  alm690  na 
nossa  salita  de  jantar  rescendendo  ainda  a  lua  de  mel  ...  6 
cora9ao  egoista!  attraiste-me  e  nao  fui  superior  ao  encanto 
dum  dia  recolhido  com  ella  na  pacificadoi;a  natur^za.  Ainda 
para  mais  a  quadra  ia  deliciosa  e  eu  amo 'o  tempo  em  que 
as  arvores  se  despem  dos  sens  atavios  e  entram  na  medita^ao 
e  na  penitencia. 

0  dia  estava  bellisimo,  os  caminhos  cheios  de  sol  e  ainda 
hiimidos  das  chuvas  anteriores.  De  manhasinha  atravessamos 
a  aldeia  com  o  nosso  ramo  de  flores  na  mao.  Uma  pontita 
de  pallidez  dava-lhe  mais  realce  ao  rCsto  meigo. 

0  cemiterio  estava  alegre,  tinha  muitas  rosas  de  toucar 
e  0  seu  muro  caiado,  ao  fundo,  d'onde  se  descortina  o  rio  e 
um  panorama  de  verduras.  Ajoelhamos  piedosamente  na  campa 
do  nosso  filho :  cantara  n'esse  memento  uma  avesita  n'um  car- 
valho  proximo,  e  o  sino  dava  as  primeiras  badaladas.  Ella 
limpou  OS  olhos  e  fomos  entao  beijar  a  mao  ao  tio  Jose  e 
ouvir-lhe  a  missa.  (Guilhermo  Gama.) 


382  Lesson  17. 

40.  Para  decorar. 

A  Cigarra  e  a  formiga. 

Tendo  a  cigarra  em  cantigas  « Amiga  (diz  a  cigarra), 

Folgado  todo  o  verao,  Prometto,  a  fe  d'animal, 

Achou-se  em  pennria  extrema,  Pagar-vos  antes  de  agosto 

Na  tormentosa  esta^ao,  Os  juros,  e  o  principal. » 

NSo  Ihe  restando  migalba,  A  formiga  nunca  empresta, 

Que  trincasse  a  tagarella,  Nunca  da,  por  isso  ajunta. 

Foi  valer-se  da  formiga,  «No  verao,  em  que  lidavas  ?> 

Que  morava  perto  d'ella.  A  pedinte  ella  pergunta. 

Eogou-lhe  que  Ihe  emprestasse,  Responde  a  outra :  «Eu  cantava 

Pois  tinha  riqueza  e  brio,  Noite  e  dia,  a  toda  a  hora». 

Algum  grao,  com  que  manter-se  « Oh !  Bravo !  (toma  a  formiga) 

T6  Voltar  0  acceso  estio.  Cantavas?  Pois  dan^a  agora». 

(Bocage.) 


Seventeenth  Lesson. 

Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Demonstrative, 
Relative  and  Indefinite  Pronouns. 

§  74.  The  demonstrative  "this,"  "that,"  "these," 
"those,"  "the  one(s),"  followed  or  not  by  a  relative,  is 
rendered : 

(a)  By  este(s),  esta(s)  for  objects  near  the  speaker; 

(b)  By  esse(s),  essa(s)  for  such  near  the  person 
spoken  to; 

(c)  By  aquelle(s),  aqueUa(s)  for  such  distant  to  the 
one  and  the  other; 

(d)  By  o(s),  a(s}  in  any  case,  but  only  with  a 
following  relative: 

JK  este  (esse,  aquelle,  o)  gue  ve  it  is  the  one   you   see. 

N.B, — These  pronouns,   being  employed  adjectively  and 
referring  to  nouns  of  different  gender,  agree  with  the  nearest: 
Estes  homens  e  mulheres;  estas  mulheres  e  homens. 

§  75.  "This,"  "that,"  employed  without  a  noun 
which,  however,  is  to  be  supplied,  is  rendered  by  este, 
esse  or  is  altogether  omitted: 

Esse  ndo  ^  o  meu  livro.  E  esta  a  minha  porta, 
aquella  e  (a)  do  meu  amigo.  Quern  e?  who  is  that? 
^J  meu  pae.     That  is  my  father. 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Demonstrative,  etc.,  Pronouns.     333 

§  76.  If  "this,"  "that"  does  not  refer  to  a  deter- 
minate person  or  object,  it  is  rendered  by  isto^  isso, 
aqiiillo. 

Que  e  isto  (isso)?     Ndo  percebo  isso  (aquillo). 

§11.    "That  which"  or  "what"  is  rendered  by  o  que. 
0  que  vi  ndo  me  agradou. 
That  which  (what)  I  saw  did  not  please  me. 

Remarh.—Isto,  isso,  aquillo,  tudo,  o  que  (=  aquillo  que) 
are  masculine  and  singular.  If,  however,  followed  by  the 
verbs  ser  or  parecer  with  a  noun  or  pronoun  in  the  plural, 
the  verb  generally  agrees  with  the  predicative  noun:  Isto  ndo 
sdo  palavras  de  animacao:  0  que  vimos  pareciam  drvores. 
JEram  tudo  memorias  de  alegria. 

§  78.  The  difference  between  outro  and  outrem  is 
this:  the  former  is  an  adjective  and  variable;  the  second 
is  a  noun  and  invariable.  The  former  refers  to  per- 
sons and  things;  the  latter  only  to  persons  and  in  a 
general  and  indeterminate  manner: 

<iMas  como  entdo  ndo  havia  no  mundo  outro  amor,  nem 
outrem  a  quern  amar,  que  faria  Adda  para  provar  o 
amor  que  desejava  encarecer?» 

§  79.  "He  who"  is  rendered  by  aqueUe  que,  o  que 
or  quern.  The  latter  is  always  employed  in  proverbs 
and  in  a  general  meaning: 

Quern  tern  capa,  escapa.  Quern  porfia,  mata  caga.  Quern 
com  cdes  se  langa,  com  pulgas  se  levanta  (cf.  §  180,  2 
of  the  1st  Part). 

§  80.  Tal,  taes  without  distinction  of  gender,  is 
the  English  "such,"  "hke";  it  is  employed  conjunctively 
or  absolute: 

Taes  desgosios  soffreu  e  taes  foram  as  suas  ddres  .  .  . 

Such  troubles  he  suffered  and  such  were  his  pains. 

Tal  amo,  tal  criado  like  master,  like  man. 

§  81.     Also  quem>  may  be  employed  for  "such": 
Ndo   faltard   quern  por  alguns  punhados  de  dobras  de 

oiro  OS  favorega  e  acclame. 
There  will  be  no  want  of  such  who  for  some  handfuls 

of  doubloons  will  favour  and  acclaim  them. 

§  82.  The  pronoun  que  in  certain  conjunctions  is 
employed  predicatively  and  may  not  be  translated: 


334  Lesson  17. 

Os  ribeiros  quasi  ndo  murmuram  de  debeis  e  exhaustos 

que  vao. 
The    rivulets    flow    so   feebly   and   exhausted  that  they 

don't  even  murmur,    or  the  rivulets  hardly  murmur 

with  debility  and  exhaustion. 

§  83.  Qtianto  as  a  pronoun  is  correlative;  it  is 
employed  either  with  tcmto  or  with  Uido,  antecedents 
which  also  may  be  only  understood: 

Dei-lhe  (tanto  or  tudo)  quanta  tinJia.   Foi  sonho  (tudo) 
quanta  vi. 

§  84.     The  relative  ciijo  whose,   of  whom,    corre- 
sponds to  ''do  qiiol,''  expressing  the  preposition  de  with  a 
possessive  meaning.    It  is  immediately  followed  by  the 
noun,  with  which  it  agrees  in  gender  and  number: 
Este  e  0  homem  cujo  talento  admiramos. 

If,  however,  this  noun  does  not  express  possession, 
but  is  a  predicative,  "whose,"  "of  whom"  must  be 
rendered  by  de  quern  (dos  quaes),  de  que  (do  qnal). 

Os  viajantes  de  quern  (or  dos  quaes)  foi  companJieiro. 

0  pais  de  que  (or  do  qual)  era  rei  .  .  . 

§  85.  The  relative  que  ("which,"  "that")  may  refer 
to  persons  or  objects.  In  the  latter  case  it  may  be 
preceded  by  one  of  the  prepositions  em,  a,  or  de. 

0  papel  em  que  escrevo;  o  livro  de  que  me  faJou;  a  coisa 
a  que  se  refere. 

If,  however,  "which"  or  "that"  is  employed  with 
another  preposition,  it  must  be  rendered  by  o  qual  (see 
§  180,  3  of.  P.  I). 

41.  Thema. 

The  Whistle. 

I  was  still  a  child  of  seven  years  of  age,  so  related  the 
famous  Franklin,  when  my  parents  on  a  holiday  filled  my 
pockets  with  coppers.  I  went  directly  to  a  shop  where  they 
sold  toys  for  children.  Yet  the  sound  of  a  wlilstle  that  I  saw 
by  the  way  in  the  hands  of  another  boy  charmed  me  so  much 
that  I  voluntarily  offered  him  all  my  money  for  this  one  ob- 
ject. The  boy  consented.  Satisfied  with  my  bargain,  I  ran 
home,  where  I  went  whistling  all  over  the  house,  for  my 
whistle  gave  me  as  much  pleasure  as  it  disturbed  the  whole 
family.    When  my  brothers  and  sisters  knew  of  my  bargain, 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Demonstrative,  etc.,  Pronouns.    835 

they  affirmed  that  I  had  given  for  times  as  much  four  it  as 
it  was  worth,  and  they  laughed  at  me  so  much  for  my  folly 
that  I  began  to  cry  with  vexation.  At  the  same  time  it  came 
to  my  mind  what  good  things  I  might  have  bought  with  the 
rest  of  the  money !  Repentance  then  caused  me  more  chagrin 
than  the  whistle  had  given  me  pleasure.  As  this  occurrence, 
however,  had  made  on  me  an  ineradicable  impression,  it  was 
afterwards  of  great  use  to  me.  Often  when  I  was  tempted  to 
buy  some  unnecessary  thing,  I  said  to  myself:  "Don't  give  too 
much  for  the  whistle!"  and  so  I  saved  my  money. 

42.  Leitnra  e  versao, 

0  trabalho  physico  e  o  mental. 

Todo  0  homem  deve  ter  uma  profissao,  uma  arte  ou  um 
officio:  n'uma  palavra,  uma  occupa9ao  ou  modo  de  vida.  O 
trabalho  e  um  beneficio  para  a  propria  saiide,  tanto  do  corpo 
como  do  espirito,  e  ^  o  unico  remedio  efficaz  para  as  necessi- 
dades.  0  homem  que  trabalha  6  litil  a  si,  aos  seus  e  a  so- 
ciedade;  6  e  do  trabalho  de  todos,  seja  qual  for,  que  depende 
0  progredso  e  o  bem-estar  geral. 

A  unica  nobreza  actual  e  a  do  trabalho :  um  artista,  um 
artifice^  um  operario,  um  commerciante,  um  industrial,  um 
lavrador,  6  tao  indispensavel  ao  bem  geral,  como  o  sacerdote, 
0  mestre,  o  medico,  o  engenheiro,  o  advogado,  o  magistrado» 
0  escriptor  ou  o  sabio.  Perante  a  virtude  de  trabalho  sao 
todos  iguaes,  e  mais  se  distingue  o  que  mais  ou  melhor  produz. 

Aquelles  que  pelo  sen  trabalho  concorrem  para  facilitar^ 
desenvolver  e  tornar  mais  productivo  o  trabalho  dos  outros, 
isto  e,  para  os  ensinar  e  educar,  habilitando-os  a  serem  bons 
e  felizes,  esses  sao  benemeritos  no  mais  elevado  grau :  e  nesse 
gi'upo  esta  0  sabio.  0  que'  no  seu  gabinete,  sosinho,  pensa  e 
medita  no  que  convem  ao  bem  geral,  e  escreve  o  resultado 
das  suas  cogita^oes,  no  proposito  de  ensinar  coisas  ignoradas 
que  elle  descobre,  ou  de  aperfei^oar  ou  propagar  pelo  seu 
trabalho  as  ja  conhecidas,  esse  6  o  obreiro  por  excell6ncia, 
por  que  e  o  mestre  dos  mestres,  a  luz  e  o  guia  dos  traba- 
Ihadores. 

Gloria  e  esses,  e  em  geral  aos  trabalhadores  do  pensa- 
mento,  que  a  sua  vida  consomem  no  mais  alto  e  difficil  labor 
que  nenhuma  remunera9ao  material  saberia  pagar  nem  paga; 
—  e  depois  d'esses,  gloria  aos  seus  apostolos  que  sao  os  pro- 
fessores,  os  mestres,  os  que  ensinam  e  explicam  ao  povo  os 
livros  e  a  obra  dos  pensadores. 

Neste  momento,  as  profissoes,  artes  e  officios  mais  com- 
muns  em  Portugal  sao  os  seguintes,  —  e  a  especialidade  de 


336  Lesson  18. 

cada  uma  d'estas  occupa9des  aprende-se  em  livros^  que  os  ha 
a  respeito  de  tudo  e  que  tudo  ensinam. 

(Trindade  Coelho:    Peqneno  Dicciondrio  de  profissoes,   artes  e 
officios,  app^ndice  do  3*  Livro  de  leitura.) 

Conrersaf^So. 

The  preceding  task  40  may  be  varied:  1.  by  having  the 
story  told  to  the  school-fellows  by  one  of  them  (Franklin  era 
ainda  uma  crianga). 

2.  By  allowing  the  father  of  Franklin  to  tell  it  himt 
(Tu  ainda  eras  .  .  .). 


Eighteenth  Lesson. 

Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Adjectives 

and  Participles. 

§  86.  The  adjective  and  the  participle  employed 
as  an  adjective  (=  verbal  adjective)  serve: 

(a)  To  determinate  the  noun  (pronominal  adjective; 
see  pronouns)  or 

(b)  To  describe  it  (predicative  or  attributive  ad- 
jective)— Ex.: 

Alguns  peixes  teem  formas  singulares, 

(c)  To  quahfy-  the  action  or  the  state  of  a  noun: 
A  empresa  saiu  felie,     A  aurora  rompeu  meiga  e  serena. 

In  the  latter  case  the  adjective  is  employed  ad- 
verbially or  in  apposition — i.e.,  it  is  added  to  the  noun 
or  the  verb  to  explain  and  complete  it  (see  P.I,  §245). 

(Cf.:  Como  era  a  aurora?    Meiga  e  serena. 

Como  rompeu  a  aurora?    Meiga  e  serenamente). 

§  87.  The  verbal  adjective  agrees  with  its  noun 
in  gender  and  number  like  a  predicative  adjective.    Ex. : 

As  ondas  vinham  espraiar-se  preguigosas  no  areal  da 

bahia. 
Sentiu  a  fronte  aquecida  por  febre  ardente.    Eu  vim 

cansado. 
0  soldado,  temeroso  on  irresolutOy  deu  parte  do  negdcio. 

The  adjectives  of  the  last  example  express  cause 
(por  temor  ou  irresolug&o).     In  such   a  case  you   may 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Adjectives  and  Participles.      337 

have  the  adjective  preceded  by  de  in  order  to  put  an 
emphasis  upon  a  state  or  quality  (cf.  §  82): 

Elle  cahiu  de  cansado  he  fell  down  with  weariness. 

A  crianga  salta  de  contente  the  child  jumps  with  ^  :)y. 

De  alegres  que  estavam,  ndo  pensavam  em  mal  algxA,m. 

They  were  so  merry  that  they  did  not  think  of  any  evil. 

§  89,  The  position  of  the  adjective  or  participle 
in  apposition  may  be  before  or  after  the  verb,  according 
o  its  meaning  (see  the  preceding  examples): 

Entramos  em  uma  batalha,  onde  vencidos  (=  se  fdrmos 
vencidos)  honraremos  nosso  Deus  com  o  sangue. 

(a)  If  accompan}dng  a  noun,  the  adjective  precedes  it: 

Acabada  a  refeigao,  saifnos. 
The  repast  over,  we  went  away. 

(b)  The  past  participle,  acompanied  by  a  comple- 
ment, is  placed  after  the  noun  and  before  the  com- 
plement; yet  in  elevated  stile  it  may  even  be  put  after 
the  complement: 

«...  Com  exclusdo  dos  trechos  indicados  pela  mesma 
commissdo  ...» 

«  Depots  de  eliminados  as  trechos  pela  commissdo  technica 
indicados  ...» 

Those  excerpts  which  the  technical  commission  had  in- 
dicated having  been  eliminated. 

(c)  The  past  participle  may  even  take  the  plural 
form  before  a  subject  in  the  singular,  if  this  latter  is 
one  of  the  pronouns  coda  um,  cada  qiial,  nenhum,  ninguem 
and  refers  to  persons  or  things  already  mentioned: 

Sobresaltados  com  esta  vista,  procurava  cada  um  a  toda 
a  pressa  por-se  a  salvo. 

N.B. — Many  participles  may  be  employed  as  mere  adjec- 
tives; others  may  have  an  active  meaning  in  spite  of  their 
passive  form ;  for  instance  ido  {tempos  idos  times  past),  vindo 
(noticia  vinda  de  fdra),  lido  (homens  lidos  well-read  or  learned 
men). 

This  is  especially  the  case  with  participles  of  reflective 
verbs:  arrependido  from  arrepender-se ;  lembrado,  etc.  Ficd- 
mos  arrependidos  we  repented  or  changed  our  mind.  Ella 
fistd  lembrada  she  reminds  herself. 

§  89.  Sometimes  the  adjective  as  well  as  the  par- 
ticiple is  employed  substantively:. 

Portuguese  Con  versa  tion-GrAmmar.  22 


388  LesBon  18. 

Mtiros   de   dois   metros  de  alto   (=  de  aliura)  e  nieio 

metro  de  largo  (=  de  largura). 
Da  esmolas  ao  poire,  consola  o  afflicto  e  (o)  abandonado. 
Give  alms  to  the  poor  (jnan),  comfort  the  afflicted  and 

abandoned  (one). 

(N.B.— Here  pobre,  afflicto  and  abandonado  are  singular, 
and  not,  as  in  English,  plural,  though  they  have  a  plural 
meaning.  The  Portuguese  adjective,  when  substantively  Em- 
ployed, has  the  verb  in  the  plural  only  if  it  has  itself  the 
plural  form:  Os  pobres  pedem  esmola  the  poor  ask  for  alms.) 

§  90.  In  certain  cases  you  may  employ  instead 
of  an  abstract  noun,  complement  to  a  verb,  an  adjective 
preceded  by  de,  or  supply  the  verb  ser  or  estar: 

Accusar  alguem  de  negligenie,   de  desleal  (=  de  negli- 

gencia,   de  deslealdade  or  de  ser  negligent e  etc.)   to 

accuse  somebody  of  negligence  or  of  being  negligent. 

Deu  mostras  de  (ser)  insofrida,   de  (estar)  nervosa. 

She  gave  proofs  of  being  impatient,  of  feeling  nervous. 

§  91.  A  small  number  of  adjectives  may  be  used 
adverbially  in  the  singular  and  masculine  form — i.e., 
unaltered  (see  P.  I,  §  245) : 

Luctas  ndo  raro  esth-eis;  ligdes  demasiado  fdceis;  fdlar 
serio. 

§  92.  A  verbal  adjective  is,  besides  the  past  par- 
ticiple employed  with  ser,  estar,  ficar  etc.,  the  form  on 
-ante,  -ente,  -inte  (the  so-called  Farticipio  active),  derived 
from  the  gerund  (-ando,  -endo,  -indo).  While  the  gerund 
is  invariable  (see  the  following  Lesson),  the  Farticipio 
active  and  the  passive  are  subject  to  all  the  rules  go- 
verning the  adjectives: 

Ficar  am  castigados.     Ndo  estamos  lembrados. 
Aguas  dormentes;  plantas  dormentes;  judeu  err  ante. 

Cf.  the  adjectives  presidenie  (=  presidindo),  amante 
(=  amando),  previdente  (=  prevenindo)  provident,  previdente 
foreseeing  (=  prevetido),  proponente  (=  propondo),  abstinente 
(=  abstendo),  subordinante  (—  subordinando),  corrente,  nas- 
cente,  andante,  ridenie  (=  rindo),  luzente,  constituinte,  seguinte, 
servente. 

In  the  case  of  many  of  these  words  their  derivation  has 
fallen  into  oblivion,  so  that  they  are  considered  qualifying 
adjectives.  Some  of  them  are :  brilhante,  constante,  impoi'tante, 
distantc,  regente,  doente,  contente,  eminente,  exceliente,  etc. 


Syntactic  Peculiarities  of  Adjectives  and  Participles.      339 

Others  have  become  substantives,  as  for  instance: 
Corrente  current,  vertente  slope,  regente  regent,  fabricante, 

disponente,  correspondenie,  descendente  descendant,  ascendentej 

proponentCj  lente,  etc. 

43.  Thema. 

At  war  less  brilliant  than  his  brother,  and  at  peace  less 
foreseeing  than  his  father,  Dom  Affonso  the  Third  neverthe- 
less united  the  qualities  of  the  one.  and  the  other  in  an  eminent 
degree.  The  most  prominent  feature  of  his  character  seems 
to  have  been  cunning  obstinacy,  which  did  not  exclude  an 
excessive  indulgence  towards  his  favourites,  especially  for  those 
who  had  helped  him  to  arrive  to  the  brilliant  position  of 
king.  His  reign  was  a  period  of  real  social  progress,  in  which 
civilisation  extended  and  the  popular  class  made  important  ac- 
qnisitions. 

Weary  with  constant  disappointments,  Peter  the  First, 
Emperor  of  Brazil,  retired  unexpectedly  at  night-time  on  board 
the  English  man-of-war,  where  he  abdicated  in  favour  of  his  son  on 
the  7*^  of  April,  1831.  Dumbfounded  by  this  sudden  resolution, 
the  higher  officers  retired  to  their  houses,  repentant  of  their 
behaviour.  The  people  dispersed  in  silence  (see  §  87)  during 
the  night,  while  the  most  prominent  functionaries,  from  fear 
(see  §  87)  of  the  consequences  of  the  abdication,  decided  the 
following  morning  to  proclaim  the  prince  constitutional  em- 
peror, appointing  him  a  regency  composed  of  three  members. 
In  virtue  of  the  Reform  Law  of  1834,  a  single  regent  then 
governed  Brazil  until  a  decree  of  1841  declared  the  majority 
of  the  emperor. 

44.  Leitura  e  versao. 

0  Terremoto  de  Lisboa  (1775). 

Na  manha  do  primeiro  de  novembro  a  cidade  estremeceu, 
abalada  profundamente,  e  come^ou  a  desabar.  Eram  nove  horas, 
dia  de  Todos  os  Santos:  nas  casas  ardiam  as  velas  nos  orato- 
rios, e  as  egrejas  regorgitavam  povo  a  ouvir  missa. 

Toda  a  gente,  numa  onda,  correu  as  praias ;  mas,  rolando 
em  massa,  estacou  perante  a  onda  que  vinha  do  rio,  galgando 
a  inundar  as  ruas^  invadindo '  as  casas.  Por  sobre  este  en- 
contro  ruidoso,  uma  nuvem  de  p6  que  toldava  os  ares  e  es- 
curecia  o  sol,  pairava,  formada  ja  pelos  detritos  (=  destro9os) 
das  construc9des  e  das  mobilias,  que  o  abalo  interno  da  terra 
vasculhava  (=  varria),  e  os  desabamentos  enviavam,  em  esti- 
Ihas,  para  o  ar. 

A.  onda  do  povo  afflicto,  retrocedendo, .  a  fugir  do  mar, 
trope9ava  nas  ruinas;   e  as  quedas,   e  a  metralha  dos  muros 

22* 


340  Lesson  18. 

que  tombavam,  abriam  na  floresta  viva^  agitada  pelo  vento 
da  desgra^a,  clareiras  de  morte,  montoes  de  cadaveres  e  poQas 
de  sangue,  dos  membros  decepados^  com  mauchas  brancas  dos 
cerebros  derramados  contra  as  esquinaa.  E  as  casas  erguiam- 
86  com  as  parades  desabadas,  os  tectos  abertos  sobre  o  esque- 
leto  dos  tabiques,  mostrando  a  nii  todos  os  interiores  fanestos, 
neste  dia  em  que,  para  muitos,  Deus  julgara  e  condemn ara 
Lisbda. 

Por  isso  o  rouco  trovao  dos  desabamentos  se  ouvia  cor- 
tado  pelos  ais  dos  moribundos,  e  pelos  gritos  dos  homens  e 
das  mulheres,  abra9ados  as  cruzes,  aos  santos^  as  reliquias, 
solu^ando  ladainhas,  nngindo  moribundos,  parando  esgazeados 
a  cada  novo  abalo  da  terra,  que  nao  cessava  de  tremer,  ar- 
rostando-se  pelo  chao  de  joelhos,  e  com  as  maos  postas,  a  face 
em  lagrimas,  a  clamar: 

—  Miseric<3rdia!  Miseric6rdia! 

Casas,  palacios,  conventos,  mosteiros,  hospitaes,  egrejas, 
campandrios,  theatres,  fortalezas,  porticos,  tudo,  tudo  caia, 
«Se  visses  somente  o  palacio  real,  diz  uma  testemunha,  que 
singular  espectdculo,  men  irmao!»  Os  varoes  de  ferro,  tor- 
cidos  como  vimes,  as  cantarias  estaladas  como  vidros! 

A  onda  do  rio  sorvia  n'um  momento  o  caes  do  Terreiro 
do  Pa^o,  com  os  barcos  atracados,  coalhados  de  gente.  Dos 
andares  altos  precipitavam-se  sobre  as  lages  das  ruaa.  0  medo 
crescia,  vinha  a  loucura:  viam-se  mortos  arrastados  pelos  vivos, 
Tiam-se  mutilados  coxeando,  gente  correndo  desgrenhada,  semi- 
nna,  homens  e  mulheres,  velhos  e  crean^as  dilacerados,  san- 
grentos,  arrestando  uma  pema  fracturada,  esvalndo-se  em 
sangue  por  algum  membro  decepado. 

Gritos,  chores,  clamores,  imprecayoes,  ais,  preces,  um  bor- 
borinho  de  vozes  desvairadas  acompanhava  os  gemidos  com 
primidos  dos  soterrados  nos  escombros.  No  turbilhao  das  mas 
havia  qu^das  e  mortes,  abra90S  e  agonias. 

A  mesma  loucura  dos  homens  era  o  desvairamento  dos 
brutos:  os  machos,  desbocados,  arrastavam  os  cavalleiros  e  a 
cale^as,  precipitando-se  nos  despenhadeiros  da  cidade  montu- 
osa;  e  as  massas  de  gente,  viva,  moribunda  e  morta,  de  en- 
volta  com  os  entulhos,  rolavam  ng^  ruas  ladeadas  pelos  esque- 
letos  das  casas  como  uma  imagem  desolada  do  que  seria  o  cahos. 

Quando  a  terra  se  subvertia,  quando  o  mar  vinha  subindo 
afogar  a  terra,  quando  no  ar  faiscavam  as  linguas  flammiferas 
rutilantes,  que  lembran^a  podia  haver  das  inven(;6es  humanas? 
Abra9ado8,  conftmdidos,  na  communidade  do  pranto,  fidalgos 
e  freiras,  mendigos  e  senhores,  viloes  e  cavalleiros,  abra^avam- 
86  na  communidade  da  fome,  do  frio,  da  nudez,  do  terror. 


The  Gerund  and  the  Periphrastical  Conjngation.         341 

De  rastos  a  cidade  inteira,  sacudida  pelo  abalo  formidando 
(=  formidavel),  rennia  toda  a  sua  eloquftncia  n'uma  palavra 
linica : 

—  Misericordia  I     Misericordia !         (Oliveira  Martins.) 


Nineteenth  Lesson. 

The  Gerund  and  the  Periphrastical 
Conjugation. 

§  93.  The  participle  in  -ndo  or  gerund  is  in- 
variable.    It  is  employed: 

(a)  Referring  to  the  subject  of  a  verb: 
Caminhando  vagarosamente^  e  pfirando  a  espagoSy  tinham 

seguido  os  dois  ao  longo  do  rio. 

(b)  Referring  to  the  object  or  some  adverb  (of 
cause,  manner,  etc.): 

Encontrou-os  dormindo  (=  que  dormiam;   see  N.B. — ). 
Olha  OS   cSus,    olha  a  terra,    a   luz   do  dia   expirando 
(—  que  expira)  nas  vagas. 

N.B. — When  it  may  be  doubtful  whether  the  gemnd 
refers  to  the  subject  or  to  the  object,  another  form  must  be- 
chosen;  for  instance: 

Encontrei-os  vindo  da  minha  casa  may  be: 
I  met  them  when  I  came  from  mj  house,  or: 
I  met  them  when  they  came  from  my  house. 

Such  a  phrase  had  better  be  expressed  thus: 
Encontrei-os  ao  virem  (elles)  da  minha  casa. 
Encontrei-os  ao  vir  (eu)  da  minha  casa. 

(c)  In  absolute  form — i.e.,  independent  of  any  part 
of  a  phrase  and  with  its  own  subject.  In  this  case  it 
expresses  a  circumstance  (cause,  time,  etc.)  of  the  verb 
of  the  principal  sentence.     Ex.: 

D,  Jorge,  parecendo-lhe  (=  a  quem  parecia  or  como  Ihe 
parecia)  opportuna  a  occasido,  determinou  tentar  a 
fortuna.  Isto  aconteceUj  estando  tu  (=  while  you 
were)  na  India. 

N.B.  I.— An  absolute  participle  may  be  employed  without 
a  subject: 


342  Lesson  19. 

(a)  when  employed  impersonally:    chovendo    ndo   sairei 
(if  it  rains  .  .  .) ; 

(b)  when,  the  verb  being  a  personal  one,  the  subject  is 
not  expressed: 

7550  esclarecer-se-hd  indagando  a  causa. 

That  will  be  cleared  up  by  inquiring  the  cause. 

N.B.  II. —The  composed  gerund  is  subject  to  the  same 
rules : 

Havendo  elle  falado,  todos  resolveram  partir. 
After  he  had  spoken,  everybody  resolved  to  go  away. 
Tendo  Augusto  Cesar  {or  A.  G.  tendo;  see  Remark)  capti- 
vado  em  guerra  Adiatorix,  trouxe-o  a  JRoma. 

Eemark. — When  the  subject  of  the  gerund  is  at  the  same 
time  tha^  of  the  verb  in  the  principal  sentence,  it  may  pre- 
cede or  follow  the  gerund;  otherwise  it  only  follows:  Tendo 
OS  Portugueses  descoberto  a  caminho  maritimo  da  India,  o 
oriente  abriu-se  a  cultura  do  occidente. 

§  94.  If  the  gerund  expresses  a  circumstance  of 
time,  a  supposition  or  condition,  while  the  verb  of  the 
principal  sentence  designs  something  as  happening  in 
future  or  as  a  habit,  the  gerund  may  be  preceded  by 
the  preposition  em: 

Em  elle  entrando   (=  as  soon  as  he  will  enter),  falar- 

Ihe-ei. 
Ndo  ha  amigos  nem  inimigos  poUticos  em  se  largando  o 

mando. 

§  95.  The  simple  gerund  expresses  a  simultaneous- 
ness  with  the  action  of  the  principal  verb ;  the  composed 
gerund  something  preceding  it.  Yet  the  former  is  often 
employed  instead  of  the  latter,  if  there  be  no  misunder- 
standing: 

Musa,  0  emir  d^ Africa,  desemharcando  (for  tendo  de- 
sembarcado)  nas  costas  de  Hespanha  com  um  novo 
exercito,  rendia  Hispalis. 

The  Periphrastical  Conjugation. 

§  96.  Most  frequent  is  the  employment  of  the 
gerund  in  the  periphrastical  conjugation  (conjugagdo 
periphrdstica) — i.e.,  joined  to  a  form  of  the  verbs  estar, 
andar^  ficar,  ir,  vir,  ter,  Imver.  Thus  employed,  it  adds 
to  the  verb  the  meaning  of  certain  circumstances: 


The  Gerund  aad  the  Periphra«tical  Conjngation.        343 

(a)  With  the  verb  estar  the  gerund  expresses  an 
action  commenced  but  not  yet  finished: 

Estava  estudando;  estd  chovendo;  estd-me  parecendo  que 
tudo  serd  em  vdo. 

N.B. — The  same  meaning  is  expressed  by  estar  followed 
by  the  preposition  a  and  an  infinitive :  estava  a  estudar ;  estd 
a  chover.  Estar  followed  by  para  and  an  infinitive  expresses, 
however,  an  action  immediately  impending :  Estou  para  partir. 

(b)  With  the  verbs  andar,  ficar  the  gerund  ex- 
presses lasting  action  or  state: 

Ando  estudando;  die  andava  meditando;  ficou  gosando, 

N.B.— The  same  meaning  is  expressed  by  an  infinitive 
joined  by  a  to  these  verbs:  ando  a  estudar;  andava  a  medi- 
tar;  ficou  a  gosar. 

(c)  With  the  verbs  ir  and  vir  the  gerund  expresses 
the  gradual  realisation  of  an  action: 

A  vermelhiddo  foi  avultando;  vinha  amanhecendo. 

<tjd  estds  a  ver  que  as  terras  que  o  genro  do  ret  fosse 
tomando  aos  Mouros,  iam,  e  verdade,  augmentando  o 
condado,  mas  iam  ficando  tambem  terras  de  Ledo, 
porque  de  Ledo  era  o  condado,  e  vasalo  do  rei 
espanhol  o  D.  Henrique.^ 

<iPercorrendo  o  corpo  do  homem,  o  sangue  vae  espa- 
Ihando  por  este  a  sua  substdncia.-^ 

Se  for  estudando  diligentemente,  pode'rd  um  dia  saber 
hem  a  lingufi  portuguesa. 

N.B.— Employed  with  an  infinitive  without  any  prepo- 
sition, these  verbs  mark  an  immediate  future:  vou  levar  esta 
carta  ao  correio;  vae  abrir  a  porta! 

(d)  The  auxiliary  verbs  ter  and  have^',  with  following 
de  and  infinitive,  express  necessity: 

Tenlio  (or  hei-)de  escrever  uma  carta. 

N.B.—  Cf.  haver  in  the  future  and  conditional  tenses. 
The  singular  and  the  S^^  person  pi.  of  haver  may  be  joined 
to  de  hj  &  hyphen: 

Hei-de,  has-de,  ha-de  ir^  havemos  de,  haveis  de,  hdo-de  ir. 

(e)  A  conjunction  of  vir  and  an  infinitive  preceded  by 
a  has  nearly  the  same  meaning  as  these  verbs  employed 
absolutely: 


344  Lesson  19. 

Isto  vem  a  significar  is  hardly  to  be  distinguished  from 

isto  significa  (=  isto  por  fim  signiflca). 
Isso  vem  a  ser  o  mesmo  that  is  rather  the  same. 

N.B.— Fir  a  ser  often  means  iomar-se  to  become. 
45.  Thema. 
Brazil. 
(See  the  map  on  the  inner  front-side  of  this  book.) 
Brazil  has  for  limits  in  the  north  the  French,  Dutch  and 
English  GuianaSj  Venezuela  and  the  republic  of  Columhia;  in 
the  east  Equador^  Peru,  Bolivia  and  Paraguay;  in  the  south 
Argentinia  and  Uruguay ;  in  the  south-east,  east  and  north-east 
the  Atlantic  ocean.  It  is  well  known  that  the  discovery  of 
this  country  was  due  to  chance,  and  that  Pedro  Alvaras 
Cabral,  after  having  circumnavigated  the  Cape  of  Good  Hope, 
when  sailing  (fazer  viagem)  to  the  Indies,  was  thrown  there 
by  a  tempest  in  1500.  From  that  moment  this  vast  region 
belonged  to  the  Portuguese  crown,  though  it  was  little 
known  before  the  year,  1534  when  D.  Joao  III.  divided.it 
into  several  provinces  (capitanias)^  of  which  he  made  grants 
to  various  private  persons  who  undertook  to  populate  and 
cultivate  them.  Yet  the  shipwreck  of  some,  the  frequent 
incursions  of  the  Indians,  and  various  other  accidents  which 
the  recipients  of  these  grants  experienced,  and  at  last  their 
death,  were  so  many  obstacles  to  the  prosperity  of  these 
various  States.  Martim  Affonso  de  Sousa  was  the  only  one 
who  remained  to  witness  the  prosperity  of  his  province,  to 
which  he  gave  the  name  of  Sao  Vicente,  because  he  had 
anchored  there  on  the  22"^  of  January,  the  day  on  Tvhich  the 
Church  celebrates  the  memory  of  S.  Vicent  the  martyr.  The 
remainder  of  the  coast  of  Brazil  was  after  that  time  infested 
by  innumerable  adventurers  of  different  nations  who  came  to 
purchase  and  traffic  with  the  Indians.- 

46.  Leitura  e  TersSo. 

0  Brasil. 

Desejando  el-rei  D.  Jolio  III  dar  uma  certa  consist^nda 
itquellas  capitanias,  creou  o  titulo  de  governador,  e  o  conferia 
a  Thom6  de  Sousa,  a  quem  os  donatarios  foram  sujeitos,  e 
quern  em  1549  fundou  a  cidade  de  S.  Salvador  da  Bahia.  Morto 
el-rei  D.  Sebastiao  em  Africa,  Filippe  II,  tendo-se  apoderado 
de  Portugal  por  fallecimento  do  Cardeal-rei,  se  tornou  tambem 
de  facto  senhor  do  Brasil.  Em  1624  os  hollandfises  invadiram 
a  maior  parte  d'este  pais,  por^m  Filippe  IV,  tendo  recobrado 
a  cidade   da  Bahia,    despachou    a  D.  Jorge  de   Mascarenhas^ 


The  Gernnd  and  the  Periphraetical  Conjugation.       345 

marqufis  de  Montalvao,  com  o  titulo  de  vice-rei;  o  qual  foi 
deposto  pouco  tempo  depois,  quando  os  Portugueses,  sacudinda 
o  jugo  dos  espanhoes,  pozeram  no  thrOno  de  seus  avos  o 
duque  de  Bragan^a  com  o  nome  de  Joao  IV  (1640).  Nesta 
6poca  varias  concessoes  haviam  entrado  naturalmente  nos  do- 
minios  da  coroa,  outras  foram  mais  tarde  compradas  aos  her- 
deiros  dos  primeiros  donatarios,  e  a  colonia,  inteiramente  res- 
taurada  em  1654,  foi  administrada  por  govemadores  generaes 
de  provincia,   e  um  vice-rei  na  Bahia.    ao  qual  eram  sujeitos 

05  primeiros,  conservando  todavia  a  faculdade  de  communi- 
carem  directamente  com  o  soberano.  Era  entao  bem  pouco 
conhecido  o  sul  do  Brasil,  e  o  interior  ainda  m^nos.  Assim 
todo  0  maritimo  tornou  a  ser  dividido  em  cinco  governos: 
Pard  e  Maranhao  na  costa  septentrional,  e  Pernambuco,  Bahia 
e  Rio  de  Janeiro  na  oriental;  e  o  chefe  da  dynastia  de  Bra- 
gan^a  houve  por  bem  conferir  a  colonia  o  titulo  honroso  de 
principado,  ordenando  que  d'ali  em  diante  o  herdeiro  presump- 
tivo  da  coroa  tomaria  o  tftulo  de  principe  de  Brasil. 

Com  a  chegada  em  1808  do  principe  regente,  D.  Joao, 
foram  todos  os  portos  do  Brasil  franqueados  as  na^oes  estran- 
geiras,  e  uma  carta  regia  de  2  de  dezembro  de  1815  elevou 
o  principado  do  Brasil  a  dignidade  e  cathegoria  de  reino.  Falle- 
cendo  em  1816  a  rainha  D.  Maria  I,  o  creador  da  primeira 
monarchia  hereditaria  da  America,  vendo-se  a  ponto  de  perder 
na  Europa  o  throno  de  seus  av6s,  se  transferiu  a  Lisb6a  em 
1821,  deixando  no  Brasil  D.  Pedro,  seu  filho  primog^nito,  em 
qualidade  de  principe  regente.  Porem  os  acontecimentos  obri- 
garam  este  principe  a  separar-se  de  Portugal  e  a  erigir  o 
Brasil  em  imp^rio  independente,  sendo  acclamado  imperador 
na  cidade  do  Rio  de  Janeiro  em  12  de  outubro  de  1822;  e 
depois  de  haver  dado  uma  constituiijao  ao  imp^rio,  foi  reco- 
nhecido  nesta  nova  qualidade  por  el-rei  seu  pae,  por  um  tra- 
tado  celebrado  em  1825.  Desde  entao  o  Brasil  viu  seus  portos 
coalhados  de  navios  mercantes  de  todos  as  na^oes ;  sua  cultura 

6  industria  come^aram  a  desenvolver-se.  0  caf6,  a9ucar  e 
algodao,  tendo  uma  extrac9ao  rapida,  e  o  pre^o  d'estes  g^neros 
indo  gradualmente  subindo,  os  proprietarios  e  agricultores  tra- 
taram  de  augmentar  a  produc^ao,  ao  passo  que  o  luxo  se  foi 
introduzindo  nas  cidades,  nas  villas,  e  at6  nas  propriedades 
ruraes  no  meio  dos  campos. 

Conrersa^ao. 

Quaes  sao  os  limites  do  Brasil,  ao  norte?    a  oeste?    ao 

sul?  a  leste? 
Como  se  deu   o  doscobrimento  do  Brasil?     E  em  que 

anno? 


846  liesson  20. 

A  quem  ficou  pertencendo? 

Quaes  foram  as  medidas  tomadas  por  D.  Joao  III  rela- 
tive ao  pais? 

Que  obstaculos  se  Ihes  oppozeram? 

Qual  foi  a  primeira  capitania  prospera? 

Que  aconteceu  ao  restante  da  costa? 

Qual  foi  a  primeira  cidade  fundada  por  urn  portugufes? 
e  come  se  chamou? 

Nas  maos  de  quem  foi  ter  o  Brasil,  depois  da  morte  de 
D.  Sebastiao  e  do  rei-cardeal? 

Em  que  data  e  contemporaneo  a  que  acontecimento  em 
Portugal,  foi  dep6sto  o  primeiro  vice-rei,  instituido 
por  Filippe  IV  ? 

Que  dynastia  conferiu  o  titulo  de  principado  ao  Brasil  ? 

E  quem  o  elevou  a  dignidade  de  reino? 

Quem  emfim  foi  o  primeiro  imperador  do  Brasil? 

Quem  foi  o  ultimo  e  quando  ficou  deposto? 

Que  esp^cie  de  gov^rno  tem  o  Brasil  actualmente? 


Twentieth  Lesson. 

Tenses  of  the  Indicative. 

(See  P.  I,  L.  18  and  19.) 

Present  Tense. 

§  97.     The  Present  of  the  Indicative  is  used: 

(a)  To  denote,  as  in  English,  that  a  thing  is  now 
taking  place,  or  habitually  takes  place.  In  the  first 
case  the  periphrastical  form  may  be  employed,  as  in 
English.     Ex.: 

Saio;  estou  Undo.    Saio  sempre  depois  do  jantar, 

(b)  In  narrative  instead  of  the  Preterite,  in  order 
to  give  more  vivacity  to  the  description,  and  to  make 
the  event,  as  it  were,  present.  This  is  called  the 
historical  or  narrative  Present.     Ex.: 

A  Bastilha  6  abandonada  d  demoligdo;  d^ahi  a  pouco 
um  montdo  de  ruinas  indica  o  logar  onde  estava . . . 
iodos  correm  para  por  a  cidade  na  defensiva  —  ar- 
ranca-se  o  calgado  das  ruas,  fanem-se  barricadas . . .: 

(c)  For  an  action  or  state  marked  as  having  con- 
tinued for  some  time  up  to  the  present: 


Tenaet<  of  the  Indicative.  847 

Desde  quando  estd  aqui  ?  How  long  have  you  been  here  ? 

Estou  aqui  ha  tres  dias. 

I  have  been  here  these  three  days. 

Jd  ha  muito  que  esfuda  o  portugues? 

Have  you  already  been  long  studying  Portuguese? 

Ha  muito  que  o  ndo  vejo  (que  me  ndo  escreve). 

I  have  not  seen  him  (he  did  not  write  me)  for  a  long  time. 

(d)  For  the  Future,  when  speaking  of  actions  which 
are  to  be  completed  in  a  short  time,  as: 
Volto  jd  I  shall  come  back  directly. 
Amanhd  vou  a  praia  to-morrow  I  shall  go  to  the  sea- 
side. 

§  98.     The  Future  Tense: 

(a)  Denotes  that  something  will  happen,  as: 
Estudaremos  esta  ligdo.     Digo-o,   sustento-o  e  sustentd- 

lo-hei. 

(b)  It  is  used  as  a  softened  form  of  the  Imperative, 
impl}dng  the  expectation  of  fulfilment.     Ex.: 

Se  pa  vier  alguem,  dir-lhe-has  que  ndo  estou. 
If  anybody   comes  (you  will)  tell  him,    that  I  am   not 
at  home. 
Honrards  pae  e  mac  honour  thy  father  and  thy  mother 
Ndo  matards  thou  shall  not  kill. 

(c)  It  is  used  to  express  uncertainty,  an  approximate 
statement,  a  possibility,  or  a  modest  form  of  declaration.. 
Ex.: 

Haverd  paz  no  tumulo? 

Will  there  be  peace  in  the  tomb? 

Tive  aviso,  haverd  qunize  dias,  que  adoeceu. 

I  was  advised  about  a  fortnight  ago  that  he  has  be- 
come ill. 

Sera  tempo  de  ir  a  casa  it  is  time  to  go  home. 

Assim  serd.     It  may  be  so. 

Uma  coisa  vos  confessarei.  I  beg  to  confess  to  you 
something. 

§  99.  The  immediate  future  is  expressed  by  the 
Present  of  ir  (eu  van)  or  vir  (venho)  and  the  simple 
Infinitive  (see  §96,  (c)N.B.): 

You  contar-lhes  um  conto.     I  shall  tell  you  a  tale. 
Vem  convidd  los  para  um  passeio  he  invites  them  for 
a  walk. 


348  Lesson  20. 

Bemark.— After  the  conditional  se  —  if,  whether,  quando 
when,  and  emquanto  while,  as  well  as  after  como,  assim  que, 
logo  que  the  Future  of  the  Subjunctive  is  to  be  employed 
(see  L.  23). 

§  100.  The  Preterite  Imperfeito  (see  P.  I,  §115)  is 
used : 

(a)  To  express  what  was  customary  or  habitual,  or 
to  describe  an  action  as  simply  going  on  in  the  past, 
or  a  state  as  existing  in  the  past — whether  in  principal 
or  subordinate  sentences.     Ex.: 

Era  tdo  poderosa  no  primeiro  quartet  do  sSculo  XVI  a 
esquadra  portuguesa,  que  J).  Manuel  trazia  de  ordi- 
ndrio  trezentos  ndus  nas  conquistas  da  Asiaj  da  Af- 
rica e  da  America. 

(b)  In  familiar  speech  it  is  employed  instead  of  the 
First  Conditional: 

Se  a  apanhassCj  eshofeteava-a  if  I  could  seize  her,  I  should 
box  her  ears. 

§  101.     The  Preterite  perfeite  is  used:     * 

For  an  action  occurred  in  the  Past;  it  serves  as 
the  ordinary  narrative  tense  for  past  time: 

Estive  no  theatro  (h)oniem;  fui  ver  o  Othello. 

Em  virtude  da  lei  das  reformas  de  1834,   um  regenie 

wnico  governou  o  Brasil,  ate  que  um  decreto  de  1841 

declarou  a  maioredade  do  imperador. 

N.B  — Of  dever  the  Imperfect  is  always  used  instead  of 
the  Perfect: 

Elle  divia  (not:  deveu)  ser  (or  ter  sido)  (h)ontem  mais 

attencioso  para  comtigo. 
He  ought  to  (or  should)  have    been   more  attentive  to 
you  yesterday. 

§  102.  '  Two  simultaneous  actions  of  the  Past  are 
put  into  the  Imperfect,  while  two  actions  following  one 
another  are  put  into  the  Perfect: 

Eu  escrevia  o  que  o  professor  disia. 

I  wrote  what  the  teacher  said. 

Uma  ielha  caliiu-lhe  na  cahega  •  e  elle  morreu  em  seguida. 

A  tile  fell  on  his  head  and  he  died  at  once. 


Tenses  of  the  Indicative.  349 

§  103.  When  a  lasting  action  is  interrupted  by  a 
new  one,  the  former  is  expressed  by  the  Imperfect, 
while  the  latter  by  the  Perfect: 

Eu  lia  quando  recebi  a  tua  carta. 

I  was  reading  when  I  got  your  letter. 

§  104.  With  regard  to  the  translation  from  Eng- 
Hsh  into  Portuguese,  it  may  be  summarised  that  the  Per- 
fect is  to  be  employed  whenever  you  may  add  one  of 
the  adverbs  then.,  noiv,  thereupon,  thereafter;  and  the 
Imperfect  when  still,  already,  just  may  be  added <  or 
when  the  verb  may  be  rendered  by  would,  used  to  and 
the  infinitive.     Ex.: 

Aggredimos  o  inimigo  que  recuou  we  attacked  the  ene- 
my, who  (then)  retreated. 
Perseguimos  o    inimigo    que    recuava    we  pursued   the 
enemy,  who  (already)  was  retreating. 

§  105.  The  difference  between  the  Preteritos  im- 
perfeito  and  perfeito  is  with  certain  verbs  quite  keen  in 
its  meaning.     Ex.: 

Eu  tinha  I  had  (possessed)  Eu  five  I  had  (I  got) 

havia  there  was  houve  there  arose,  began,  hap- 

pened 
eu  sabia  I  knew  (already)  eu  soube  I  learned,  heard 

eu  conhecia  I  knew  eu  conheci  I  made  the  acquain- 

tance of 

„         ..1  J         J  eUe  vestiu  be  put  on 

die  vestia  he  was  dressed  ^„^  ^^,.^,^^  ^^  ^^^^^^ 

elle  trazia  he  carried,  he  was  elle  trouxe  he  brought 

dressed 

ella  dizia  she  would  say  ella  disse  she  said 

levantdvamo-nos   we   used   to  levantdmo-nos  we  got  up,  rose, 

get  up  etc. 

§  106.  Most  frequently  the  Preterito  perfeito  is 
employed   where  in  English  the  Perfect  is  used.    Ex.: 

Ghegou  he  has  arrived.  Vi-o  I  have  seen  him.  Tive 
uma  carta  I  have  got  a  letter.  Deram-me  noticias  delle  they 
have  given  me  news  from  him.  Esteve  no  concerto  de  (h)ontem? 
Were  you  at  the  concert  last  night? 

§  107.  The  Preterito  indefmido,  however,  expresses 
repetition  or  continuation  of  a  fact  from  a  certain  point 
of  time  until  the  moment  of  speaking.  (In  English 
the  Present  may  sometimes  be  employed  instead).    Ex. : 


350  Lesson  20. 

Iddas  as  constituigdes  teem  facultado  a  certas  autoridades 
0  direito  de  perdoar. 

All  constitutions  have  given  (or  gave  or  give)  to  cer- 
tain authorities  the  privilege  of  absolution. 

Sometimes  this  tense  serves  only  to  emphatically 
declare  an  action  as  altogether  finished  for  the  speaker: 

Tenho  dado  fim  as  minhas  investigagdes. 
I  put  an  end  to  my  investigations. 

§  108.  The  Pluperfects  (Preteritos  mais-qiie-perfeitos 
composto  and  simples)  express  an  action  preceding 
another.     Ex. : 

JEu  jd  tinha  jantado  quando  meu  irnmo  chegou. 
I  had  already  dined  when  my  brother  arrived. 
Faldramos  em  negocio  .  .  .   We  had  spoken  of  business. 

§  109.  The  Mais-que-perfeito  simples  may  be 
employed  instead  of  the  Condicional  as  well  as  instead 
of  the  Imperfeito  Suhj.  (the  latter  especially  in  the  first 
part  of  the  conditional  sentence)  and  instead  of  the 
Presente  condicional  in  the  second  part.     Ex.: 

Quiver  a  (=  queria)  ser-lhe  agradavel. 

I  should  like  to  be  of  some  use  to  you. 

Se  0  contentamento  fisSra  (==  finesse)  milagres,  tivera-me 

(—  ter-me-hia)  nesta  hora  a  sens  pes. 
If  joy  did  wonders,  you  would  have  me  .  .  .  at  your  feet. 

But  it  is  also  absolutely  employed,  especially  in 
popular  interjections: 

Quern  (me)  dera! 

Would  it  were  so!     That  would  be  a  good  thing! 
Pudera!    I  say!     Wouldn't  it!     To  be  sure! 
Prouvera  Beus!    God  grant! 

§  110.  The  Imperativo  expresses  request,  order, 
permission,  or  prohibition.  It  is  formed  out  of  the  Pre- 
sente Suhj.,  but  for  the  2^^  persons  which  are  formed 
out  of  the  Presente  Indicativo^  if  they  are  not  in  nega- 
tive sentences.     Ex.: 

Nao  tebas  coisa  que  ri^o  vejas,  nem  assignes  coisa  que 

nuo  leias. 
Don't  drink  what  you  do  not  see,   nor  sign   what  you 

did  not  read. 


Tenses  of  the  Indicative.  351 

§  111.     The  Condicional  expresses: 
(a)  That  something  soon  happened  or  would  have 
happened  on  certain  conditions.     Ex.: 

Se  ndo  fossemos  orgulhosos,   nao  nos  queixariamos  do 

orgulho  dos  mais. 
If  we   were   not  proud,     we    should    not  complain   of 

the  pride  of  others. 
Elle  teria  sido  felis,  se  tivesse  sabido  moderar  os  sens 

desejos. 
He  would  have   been  happy   if  he  had  known  how  to 

moderate  his  desires. 

N.B.  I.— The  Presenie  Condicional  (or  even  the  Imper- 
feito  Ind.)  is  sometimes  employed  instead  of  the  JPreterito 
condicional,  the  verb  of  the  dependent  clause  being  put  into 
the  Preterito  comp.  indie,  instead  of  the  Mais-que-perfeito. 

«-Caso  e  que  se  eUe  ndo  tern  (=  tivesse)  sido  demittido 
tdo  depressa,  o  roubo  dava-se  (instead  of  dar-se-ia  or 
properly  ter-se-ia  dado)  com  certezay>  there  is  no  doubt 
that,  if  he  had  not  been  dismissed  so  suddenly,  the 
robbery  would  certainly  have  taken  place. 

<iiSe  a  teem  (instead  of  tivessem)  visto  ali  haveriam  apor- 
tado  certamente  e  encontrariam  (instead  of  teriam 
encontrado)  confirmados  as  informagoes  de  Pedro  da 
Covilhd,  que  d^aquella  povoagdo  dera  preciosas  in  for- 
magoes  na  sua  carta  a  D.  Jodo  II,  pois  ali  fora 
poucos  annos  antes  .  .  .  Em  Sofala  certamente  en- 
contrariam (for  teriam  encontrado)  navios  da  costa 
do  Malabar. T> 

(Campos  Junior:  Guerreiro  e  Monge.) 

N.B.— The  Preterito  condicional,  composed  with  tivera 
or  houvera,  may  be  employed  in  conditional  clauses  instead 
of  the  Mais-que-perfeito  Subj.: 

Teria  ido,  se  tivera  (for  tivesse)  sabido  que  .  .  .  (cf.  §  109). 

(c)  In  certain  cases  the  Conditional  (or  the  M.-q.- 
perfeito  simples  instead)  is  used  to  express  astonishment, 
avaliation,  or  a  softened  form  of  declaration: 

Seria  verdade?  Can  that  be  true?  Haveria  no  theatro, 
quando  muito,  trezentas  pessoas,  there  may  have 
been  at  the  most  in  the  theatre  about  300  persons. 
Vim-me  embora  seriam  dez  horas  I  went  home  at 
about  ten  o'clock.  Ndo  diria  isso  I  should  not  say 
so.    Antes  diria.   I  should  rather  say,  as  in  English. 


352  Lesson  20. 

(c)  Frequently  the  Presente  condicional  (without  a 
dependent  clause)  is  used  to  express  an  expectation,  an 
arrangement,  the  fulfilment  of  which  depends  of  the 
future.     Ex. : 

Esse  manual  ser-lhe-hia  guia  seguro  pelos  caminJios  tor- 

tuosos  da  politica. 
This  handbook  was  meant  to  be  a  reliable  guide  to  him 

on  the  tortuous  ways  of  politics. 
Eu  far-lhe-hia  ver  as  hellezas  do  men  pais. 
I  intended  to  show  him  all  the  beauty  of  my  home, 

47.  Thema. 

Extract  from  Portuguese  History. 

The  history  of  Portugal  properly  begins  with  the  reign  of 
the  Count  Henry  of  Burgundy.  All  that  is  anterior  to  this 
belongs  more  to  the  history  of  Lusitania  and  in  a  more  gene- 
ral meaning  to  that  of  the  peninsula.  When  in  Leon  Al- 
phonse  the  Sixth  was  reigning,  the  Count  Henry,  a  descendant 
of  Hugo  Capet  (=  Gapeto)  offered  (=  came  to  offer)  his  ser- 
vices to  that  monarch,  and  received  from  him  in  reward  the 
hand  of  his  daughter  D.  Thereza  and  the  country  of  Portugal. 
Is  is  certain  that  they  were  already  married  in  1095  and 
that  the  Count  Henry  already  in  1097  governed  Portugal 
from  the  Minho  to  the  Tagus.  The  successor  of  this  first  Portu- 
guese regent  was  his  son  Dom  Affonso  Henriques,  who,  after 
having  conquered  many  tracts  of  land  from  (see  §  48  c)  the 
Moors,  was  victorious  at  last  on  the  25^^  of  July,  1139,  at  the 
famous  battle  of  Campo  de  Ourique  against  five  Moorish 
tings,  while  the  day  before  he  had  been  (gerund)  proclaimed 
king  by  his  soldiers,  [a]  title  that  was  confirmed  to  him 
by  the  nation  in  the  Parliament  (as  Cortes)  of  Lamego  in 
1143.  Already  the  monarch  had  caused  the  independence  of  the 
kingdom  to  be  recognised  by  the  King  of  Leon.  The  suc- 
cessors of  Affonso  Henriques  continued  their  conquests: 
D.  Sancho  the  First  conquered  Algarve,  2>.  Affonso  II.  Alcacer 
do  Sal,  and  D.  Sancho  II  many  tracts  and  places  of  the 
Alertejo. 

The  kingly  power  then  began  [to  be]  in  fight  with  the 
ecclesiastical  state,  [which  was]  most  powerful  at  those  times 
and  from  that  fight  resulted  the  deposition  of  D.  Sancho  II 
hy  [a]  bull  of  the  Pope  Innocence  IV,  and  the  government 
of  I).  Affonso  III,  his  brother.  B.  Dinia  strove  especially  to 
make  Agriculture  and  Science  flourish,  to  which  purpose  he 
created  the  first   university  in  Lisbon.     His  successors  conti- 


Tenses  of  the  Indicative.  35b 

nued  the  work  of  civilisation  until  the  unfortunate  reign  of 
D.  Fernando  I,  last  monarch  of  the  first  dynasty. 

The  nation  united  in  Parliament  proclaimed  in  1583  King 
of  Portugal,  John,  Grandmaster  of  the  Order  of  A  viz  {Mester 
de  Aviz),  who  settled  the  independence  of  Portugal  which  was 
attacked  by  Castile,  and  by  his  valour  and  good  administration 
he  obtained  the  love  of  his  people.  The  descendants  of  this 
monarch  reigned  until  1580,  when  the  Cardinal  King  Dom 
Henrique  died.  This  is  doubtlessly  one  of  the  most  beautiful 
periods  of  Portuguese  history. 

48.  Leitura  e  Tersao, 

Os  descobrimentos  dos  portugufises,  as  suas  victorias  na 
Asia  6  Africa,  tornaram  o  sen  nome  temido  e  respeitado  em 
t6da  a  parte.  Dfisde  a  gloriosa  tomada  de  C^uta  em  1415  ate 
a  desgraijada  batalha  de  Al9acer  Quivir  em  1578,  este  povo, 
dotado  de  uma  actividade  sem  exemplo,  descobre  os  archi- 
pelagos da  Madeira,  (das)  Azores,  (das  ilhas)  Canarias  e  (do) 
Cabo  Verd^,  (a)  costa  e  ilhas  de  Guine ;  explora  e  faz  muitos 
estabelecimentos  no  literal  da  Africa  occidental:  dobra  o 
Cabo  das  Tormentas;  submete  ou  faz  tributaries  os  principes 
moaros  da  costa  oriental  africana ;  arrebata  aos  arabes  a 
navegaQgio  da  India  e  (do)  Mar  Vermelho;  e  assombrando 
os  povos  do  Oriente  com  prodigies  de  valor,  estabelece-se  em 
Ormuz,  Diu,  Damao,  Goa,  Bombaim,  Cochim,  Geylae,  Malaca, 
abrindo-se  caminho  pela  Oceania  para  Java,  Borneo,  Timor, 
Molucas,  China  e  Japao,  ao  passe  que  descobre  a  Nova 
Hellanda,  Nova  Guine  e  outras  terras.  Pedro  Alvares 
Cabral  descobre  o  Brasil  (1500)  e  em  mfinos  de  um  seculo, 
os  vastos  e  ferteis  terrenes  entre  o  Amazenas  e  Prata,  se 
acham  submettides  ao  dominie  portuguSs.  Mais  de  cinceenta 
reis  ou  regulos  feram  tributaries  de  rei  D.Manuel,  e  os  mais 
poderosos  monarchas  da  Europa  e  de  Oriente  selicitaram  a 
sua  allian^a. 

Nao  foi  mener  o  cuidado  pelas  l6tras  neste  gloridso 
periode.  D.  Affonso  V  forma  a  bibliotheca  de  Evora;  D. 
Manuel  I  manda  reformar  e  aperfeiijoar  a  legisla^ao.  Fei 
neste  periode  e  no  reinado  de  Joae  III  que  se  introduziu  em 
Portugal  a  inquisi^ao  (1540)  e  a  Companhia  de  Jesus  (1541). 
—  A  morte  do  cardeal-rei  D.  Henrique  (1580)  seguiu-se  a 
occupa9ao  castelhana,  que  durou  at^  1640  :  e  Portugal,  que 
no  reinado  de  D.  Manuel  chegara  ao  maior  grau  de  esplenddr, 
caiu  nesse  periode  na  maior  prostra^ao. 

No  anno  de  16-40  recuperou  esta  na^ao  a  sua  independencia 
pela  gloriosa  revolu9ao  que  eleven  ao  throne  D.  Joae  IV,  tronco 
dadynastia  deBragan^a  ha  pence  ainda  reinante.  Portugal  alliou- 
Portuguese  Conversation -Grainmar.  23 


354  Lesson  21. 

§e  depois  com  a  Inglaterra  e  Hollanda  contra  Espanha  na 
c^lebre  Guerra  de  Successao.  Esta  guerra  terminou  pelo  Tra- 
tado  de  Utrecht  em  1713.  Naqiielle  tempo  e  reinando 
D.  Joao  V,  construiram-se  obras  grandiosas,  come  foram  o 
mosteiro,  templo  e  palacio  de  Mafra  e  o  aqueducto  das  Aguas 
Livres.  Mas  o  tesouro  ficou  exhausto  e  a  na9ao  em  deca- 
dencia,  de  que  so  a  poderia  tirar  um  g^nio  e  perseveran<?a 
como  odo  marques  de  Pombal,  ministro  de  D.  Jos^  I  (1755  —  1777) 
em  cujo  reinado  se  reorganisaram  as  finan^as,  o  ex6rcito  e  a 
marinha,  foram  expulsos  os  jesuitas,  e  a  inquisi^ao  levou  o  seu 
primeiro  golpe,  at^  ser  de  todo  extincta  em  1820. 

Em  1807  OS  franc^ses  •  invadiram  Portugal,  mas  foram 
repellidos  pelo  exercito  anglo-portugu^s,  que  Ihes  deu  severas 
119068  em  Vimieiro,  Bussaco,  Badajoz  etc.  Em  1820  uma 
revolu^ao  estabeleceu  0  systfima  constitucional.  A  rainha 
D.  Maria  I,  tendo  ido  em  1807  ao  Brasil  com  o  principe  regente 
D.  Joao  e  a  c6rte,  la  fallecfira  em  1816.  D.  Joao  VI  entao 
voltou  a  Portugal  em  1821,  sendo-lhe  negado  0  desembarque, 
ate  elle  ter  confirmado  0  systfima  constitutional,  que  foi  des- 
truido  em  1828.  Em  1833  porem  foi  restabelecido  por 
D.  Pedro  IV  (como  D.  Pedro  I  imperador  do  Brasil),  filho  de 
D.  Joao  VI,  0  qual  pelo  seu  valor  e  constancia  soube  reivindi- 
car  0  thrOno  para  sua  filha,  a  senhora  D.  Maria  II,  fallecida 
a  15  de  Novembro  de  1853.  Foi  ella  a  bis-avo  de  Dom 
Manuel  II,  ultimo  rei  de  Portugal,  destbronado  em  1910. 


Twenty-first  Lesson. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood. 

§  112.  The  Subjunctive  denotes  an  action  or  a 
state  as  existing  in  the  mind  of  the  person  speaking, 
and  not  as  a  fact: 

I  do  not  think  he  is  so  old.  Ndo  creio  que  seja  tao  velho. 
We  feared  he  would  go.   JRecedmos  que  se  fosse  emhora. 

It  is  the  mood  of  uncertainty,  and  is  employed  after 
verbs  expressing  desire,  tendency,  order,  hope,  merit, 
fear,  doubt: 

Desejo  (espero,  quero,  duvido)  que  Carlos  esiude. 

§  113.     The  Subjunctive  is  used: 
A.  In   principal   clauses  (oragOes  principaes  or  suh- 
ordinantes): 


The  Subjunctive  Mood.  355 

(a)  In  the  Imperative  mood  for  the  first  and  third 
persons  when  affirmatively,  and  for  all  three  persons 
when  negatively  employed: 

Estude  (elle,  79,  estudemos,  estudem! 

Nao  pegas  a  qmm  pediu,  nem  sirvas  a  quern  serviu. 

Que  esteja  ou  nao  horn  tempo. 

N.B.— In  the  third  person  que  may  precede  the  verb; 
que  estude(m)! 

(b)  In  clauses  where  talve^  precedes  the  verb: 
Talve2  elle  diga  perhaps  he  may  say.  Yet  here  the 
Indicative  may  be  employed. 

(c)  In  clauses  expressing  wishes  or  interjections: 
Fraza  a  Deus  que  assim  seja!     Viva!    Morra!    Deus 

0  salve!  Possa  eu  urn  dia  pagar-lhe  as  suas  finezas! 
Assim  as  suas  prendas  fossem  devidamente  desen- 
volvidas! 

(d)  In  clauses  of  admission  being  equivalent  to  a 
conditional  clause: 

Falle  elle  (=  se  elle  falar),  tudo  se  calard. 

B.  In  subordinate  clauses  (oragoes  suhordinadas) 
beginning  with  que^  and  not  representing  indirect  speech. 
The  conjunction  que  requires  the  Subjunctive: 
(a)  After  all  verbs,  substantives,  adjectives  and 
other  particles  which  express  cause  or  impediment  of 
an  action  or  occurrence,  an  admission,  approval  or  dis- 
approval, hope,  convenience,  etc.,  such,  as:  Desejar^ 
querer,  pedir,  aconselhar,  consentir,'  admittir,  impedir, 
ordenar,  approvar,  propor,  suppor,  merecer^  prohibir^ 
decretar,  resolver,  esperar,  convir,  desapprovar,  acJiar  mat 
(bom,  melhor,  peor). 

Examples. 

Fiz  com  que  elle  visse  o  seu  erro   I  caused  him  to  re- 
cognise his  error. 

^  ''Que'"  may  be  omitted  in  the  complementary  accusative 
clause  whenever  the  verb  is  also  accompanied  by  a  dative  com- 
plement which  is  the  subject  of  the  accusative  clause ;— e.g., 
^Candida  de  Figueiredo  propunha  d  Academia  das  Sciencicts,  en- 
carregasse  uma  comissdo  da  reforma  (ou  revisaoj  da  ortografia, 
antes  que  se  comegasse  o  famigerado  Dicciondrio  (in  spej,  de  que 
era  director  Latino  Coelho^  (Carol''  Michaelis  de  Vasconcellos). 

23* 


356  Lesson  21. 

Impediram  (or  ohstaram)  que  enirassemos. 
They  opposed  our  entrance. 
Aprovo  (desaprovo)  que  faga  isso. 
I  approve  his  doing  so. 
Suponhdmos  que  esse  facto  se  de. 
Suppose  that  will  happen. 

Ndo  Ihe  aconselho  que  parta.  I  don't  advise  you  to  part. 
Ndo  se  pdde  admitir  (or  e  inadmissivel)  que  se  digam 
taes  coisas.  Such  things  cannot  be  allowed  to  be  said. 
Elle  merecia  que  se  Ihe  concedessem  todos  as  honras. 
He  would  be  worthy  of  all  honours  bestowed  upon  him. 

(b)  After  the  expressions  (verbs,  substantives,  ad- 
jectives) of  fear: 

Beceei  que  o  meu  amigo  estivesse  doente. 

Tinha  medo  (estava  com  medo)  que  perdesse  o  combdio. 

De  medo  que  lest,  for  fear. 

Ndo  temas  que  fiques  castigado! 

Estou  a  tremer  (e  de  receiar)  que  haja  mallogro. 

I  tremble  for  fear  there  may  be  a  failure. 

(c)  After  expressions  of  astonishment,  surprise, 
joy,  grief—e.g.: 

Admiro  (-me)  que  elle  venha  (or  (enha  or  tivesse  vindo). 

I  wonder  that  he  will  or  has  come. 

Fiquei  surpreendida  que  tivesse  chegado. 

I  was  surprised  he  had  come. 

Folgo  (or  estimo)  que  tenha  recuperado  a  saude. 

I  am  glad  he  is  well  again. 

Sinto  que  ndo  Ihe  possa  valer. 

I  am  sorry  I  can  be  of  no  use  to  you. 

(d)  After  verbs  or  impersonal  idioms  expressing 
that  it  is  agreeable  or  deplorable,  rare  or  frequent, 
possible,  probable,  astonishing,  important,  just,  necessary, 
useful,  etc.— e.g.: 

J^'  de  sentir  it  is  deplorable,  a  pity 

e  de  ever       \  j^  ^      ^^  assumed 

e  admtssivel  f 

e  de  desejar  it  is  desirable 

e  raro  (vulgar)  it  is  rare  (common) 

e  possivd  (provdvel)  it  is  possible  (probable) 

e  admit dvd  (or  de  admirar)  it  is  astonishing 

parece  incrivel  it  seems  incredible 

importa  it  is  a  matter  of  consequence 


Thb  Subjunctive  Mood.  357 

e  justo  it  is  just 

e    necessdrio    (util,   perigoso)    it    is    necessary    (useful, 

dangerous) 
a  nao  ser  que  unless,  except. 

Ex.:  Importa  que  se  comprehenda  e  exercite  bem  o  em- 
pr^o  do  conjufictivo,  para  que  haja  nella  a  maxima 
facilidade. 

To  this  group  belong  also  the  nouns  predicatively 
employed : 

e  honra  it  is  an  honour 

e  vergonka  it  is  a  shame 

e  tempo     j  .^  -^  ^-^^ 

sao  noras  \ 

e  justica  it  is  justice 

e  asneira  it  is  foolishness 

caso  e  que  the  question  is. 

(e)  After  duvidar  and  other  terms  expressing  doubt, 
when  employed  Affirmatively,  the  English  "whether"  is 
translated  by  que: 

Duvido  que  elle  saiba  I  doubt  that  (or  whether)  he  knows. 
£  muito  duvidoso  que  seja  despachado  o  requerimento 

It    is    rather  doubtful  Whether   the  request  will    be 

agreed  to. 
However :  Nao  ha  duvida  (ninguem  duvida)  que  Cintra 

e  urn  logar  das  mais   honitos  da  Europa.     There   is 

no  doubt  that  Cintra    is  one  of  the  finest  places  in 

Europe. 

N.B.  I. — Sometimes,  however,  the  subjunctive  is  employed 
even  with  duvidar  in  a  negative  clause:  Nao  duviddmos  que 
0  sr.  Jose  diga  a  verdade. 

N.B.  II. — After  ignorar  the  subjunctive  may  be  employed: 
Ignorava  que  vivesses  (or  que  vivias)  na  aldeia  I  did  not 
know  that  you  lived  in  the  country. 

N.B.  III.— After  the  verbs  expressing  knowledge  or 
meaning  of  something  happening  or  existing  (verbos  sensitivos), 
as  ver^  saber,  julgar,  and  those  declaring  something  as  happen- 
ing or  existing  (verbos  declarativos),  as  dijser,  declarar,  an- 
nuncmr,  the  verb  after  *^q^^e'^  may  be  in  the  subjunctive  mood, 
in  case  the  verb  of  the  principal  clause  is  employed  negatively 
or  in  a  negative  interrogation. 

Nao  digo  que  elle  nao  saiba. 

I  don't  mean  to  say  that  he  does  not  know. 


358  Lesson  21. 

Entuo  ndo  achas  que  fosse  melJior  ter  mats  cuidado? 
Don't    you    think    it    would    be    better    to    be    more 
careful ? 

N.B.  IV.— In  an  interrogative  accessory  clause  the  verb 
may  be  in  the  subjunctive. 

Nao  sabia  quaes  fossem  as  suas  ideias  e  medidas. 
I  did  not  know  which  were  his  ideas  and  measures. 

N.B.  v.— In  the  same  case  after  se  whether,  with  dever, 
haver  de  added  in  thought,  the  verb  may  be  employed  in  the 
subjunctive : 

Ndo  sei  se  diga  (=  ndo  sei  se  devo  or  deva  dizer  or: 
ndo  sei  se  hei-de  or  haja  de  dizer)  I  don't  know 
whether  I  am  to  say. 

49.  Thema. 

It  is  not  advisable  that  during  a  thunderstorm  many  people 
should  crowd  together  in  a  church  unless  there  is  a  lightning- 
conductor.  It  is  indispensable  that  a  nation  should  fulfil  its 
destiny  and  always  strive  after  high  ideals.  I  should  have 
rendered  him  this  service,  if  I  had  had  the  means  to  do  so. 
These  flowers  would  not  have  faded  if  they  had  been  watered. 
I  shall  do  what  he  wants  me  to,  provided  he  behaves  well. 
Do  not  go  upon  the  lake  while  the  ice  is  not  solid,  lest  you 
break  through.  He  will  give  it  you  on  condition  that  you  shall 
give  it  back  to  him  to-morrow.  It  is  impossible  that  he  should 
have  written  that.  It  is  convenient  for  you  to  go  to  find  him. 
It  is  a  pity  that  you  have  not  seen  him.  It  is  a  shame  that 
you  should  deny  thus  what  you  have  done.  It  would  be  a 
crime  if  you  should  let  him  do  that.  What  would  they  say 
if  I  should  send  them  this  parcel?  We  should  comfort  her 
if  she  needed  it.  However  sad  the  news  is,  I  shall  impart 
it  to  her.  You  ought  patiently  to  endure  these  trials,  until 
a  time  will  come  when  you  will  no  longer  be  oppressed.  It 
is  just  that  you  should  be  rewarded.  Do  not  believe  him, 
whatever  he  may  say.  God  grant  (=  querer)  he  may  suc- 
ceed. Tell  him,  so  that  he  may  know  it.  Even  if  he  should 
come  to-morrow,  he  would  no  longer  be  in  time. 

50.  Leitnra  e  versao. 

Passeio  a  Riviera  portuguesa. 

Visto  qu3  ja  conhecemos  o  mappa  de  Portugal  nos  sous 

tra^os   geraes,    vamos  agora   fazer   uma   visita  aos  arrabaldes 

da  capital.     Como  esta  calor,  recommenda-se  que  tomfiinos  o 

combdio  de  Cascaesj  para  que  nos  leve  a  Riviera.    Pois  sigam- 


The  Subjunctive  Mood.  359 

me,  se  forem  do  meu  parecer.  Vejam,  alem  esta  o  comboio 
prestes  a  partir.  Nao  se  demorem!  Corram  e  subam,  para 
que  nao  o  percamos.  Eis-nos  installados!  Ainda  bem  que  o 
alcan9amos,  pois  duvido  que  haja  outro  antes  do  meio-dia.  Sen- 
tem-se  e  descansem  da  corrida !  Ora  querem  ver  que  o  Carlos 
esta  sem  folego!  Nao  se  precipitasse  tanto!  Agora  reparem: 
Do  lado  esqufirdo  do  comboio  v6-se  o  Tejo  e  as  margens  da 
Outra  Banda.  D'ali  se  gosa  um  panorama  encantador  de  Lisboa 
e  do  rio,  por  tal  forma  magnifico  que  sera  muito  para  lasti- 
m^r  que  nao  seja  visto  pelo  estrangeiro  que  visite  Lisboa. 

Ora  por  pouco  que  tivessemos  passado,  sem  a  v6r,  a  Torre 
de  Belem,  uma  das  maiores  maravilhas  de  architectura,  que 
ha  no  mundo.  E  que  uma  fabrica  de  gaz  impede  que  se 
veja,  a  nao  ser  do  lado  do  rio.  Que  p^na  que  se  tenha  dado 
licen9a  de  coUocarem  essa  fabrica  de  maneira  que  seja  tao 
difficil  obter  um  relance  d'olhos  d'um  monumento  erigido  para 
que  sempre  relembre  os  feitos  dos  Portugueses  no  seu  period© 
de  maior  heroismo  e  gloria. 

0  comboio  agora  vae  passando  pelas  povoa^oes  de  JDdfundo, 
Pedroucos,  Pago  d'Arcos,  Alges,  praias  consideradas  de  mar, 
visto  que  o  rio  aqui  leva  agua  salgada,  e  freqnentadas  pela 
melhor  gente  de  LisbCa,  comquanto  nao  estejam  longe  da 
capital.  E  que  ha  tantas  e  tao  boas  praias  por  todo  a  costa 
portugu6sa  que  facilmente  se  Ihe  encontra  onde  nos  sintamos 
bem  e  fiquemos  curados  dos  nossos  males. 

Agora  permittam  que  Ihes  chame  a  atten(jao  para  o  sitio 
que  estamos  atravessando  e  que  se  chama  Caxias.  Nao  e  senao 
justo  que  aqui  se  mencione  um  instituto  pedagogic©  que  faz 
honra  ao  pais:  ^  a  Casa  de  CorrecQao,  estabelecida  n'aquelle 
vasto  edificio  que, "  se  bem  que  tenha  sido  um  mosteiro  e  por 
conseguinte  nao  destinado  desde  logo  ao  seu  fim  actual,  e  um 
modelo  no  genero.  E  raro  o  alumno  que  ali  nao  se  sinta  (or, 
sentisse)  bem  e  em  que  os  esfor^os  dos  professores,  tendando 
a  que  todos  cheguem  a  ser  bons  e  uteis,  nao  consigam  (or 
conseguissem)  o  seu  fim. 

E  nao  esque9ilmos  que  aqui  ha  ainda  outra  coisa  a  ad- 
mirar:  uma  casa  de  campo,  deshabitada,  que  foi  do  rei,  ou  seja  o 
quintal  que  llie  pertence,  uma  especie  de  parque  com  avenidas  e 
alegretes  contornados  de  buxo  artificialmente  copado,  e  em 
, parte  do  tamanho  de  um  homem.  Foi,  como  ja  disse,  d'el-rei, 
que  porem  nunca  habitou  aqui  que  eu  saiba.  Outra  quinta 
real,  e  essa  lindissima,  no  que  diz  respeito  ao  palacio  em  estilo 
de  renascen9a,  esta  situada  nao  longe  d'aqui  na  estrada  de 
Cintra,  em  Quelus.  Tambem  tem  parque  rococo  com  altas 
sebes  de  buxo.  Mas  o  maior  attractivo  que  eu  Ihe  conheQO, 
6  o  pro f undo' silfincio  em  que  esta  mergulhado. 


360  Lesson  22. 

Ja  estamos  a  beira-mar.  Notem  aquelle  grande  edificio 
sobre  os  rochedos  lambidos  pela  quebran^a !  Nao  6  como  quern 
quizesse  atirar-se  ao  mar?  E  o  Sanatorio  de  Carcavellos  cons- 
tniido  em  1902  para  que  d6  acolhimento  a  meninos  de  4  para 
12  annos.  Nao  longe  d'ahi  esta  outro  sanatorio,  o  de  Sanf  Anna 
de  Parede  que,  tendo  cem  camas,  recebe  tanto  adultos  como 
crian^as  que  sejam  tuber culosas.  E  ha  quern  affirme  que  cada 
cama  custou  16.000  marcos,  a  ser  verdade  que  o  sanatorio, 
edificado  em  1904,  tenha  custado  1.600  000  marcos  approxima- 
damente. 

Do  nosso  lado  direito  devia-se  v6r  outro  edificio,  mais 
antigo  e  nao  menos  interessante,  se  as  verduras  e  alguns 
grnpos  de  casas  nao  no-lo  occultasse.  E  o  palacio  do  marqufis 
de  Pombal  que  foi  o  grande  ministro  de  D.  Jos^  I.  Estamos 
em  Oeiras. 

E  ja  vamos  passando  Sao  Jodo  d'Estonl,  Estoril  e  MonV 
Estorily  onde  nos  encontramos  na  parte  da  Bahia  de  Cascaes, 
mais  restrictamente  chamada  Biviera  portuguesa.  Proponho 
que  des^amos  para  lanchar  no  Beal  Hotel  MonV  Estoril  d'onde 
se  gosa  uma  vista  formOsa  a  nao  poder  ser  mais  linda.  De- 
pois  daremos  um  passeio  ate  Cascaes,  para  vfir  a  cidadella,  resi- 
dftncia  d'el-rei  quando  ca  estd,  e  uma  forma^ao  das  mais 
curiosas  de  rochedos,  em  forma  de  cratera,  aberta  no  fundo, 
e  chamada  <B6ca  do  inferno*. 


Twenty-second  Lesson. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood  (continued). 
C.  In  Adverbial  Clauses  (oragdes  circumstanciaes). 
§  114.     The    subjunctive    is    employed    after   the 
following  coDJunctions  (cf.  P.  I,  L.  34) : 

(a)  The  concessive  (concessivas):  ainda  que,  posto 
que  etc.,  as  soon  as  the  clause  expresses  only  supposition 
and  not  a  reality: 

Nao  me  queixaria  d'elle,  ainda  que  me  maltratasse. 
But: 
Ainda  que  o  amava,  por  ser  valor oso,  nao  era  cega  pelos 

seus  defeitos. 
N.B.— Sometimes   the  concessive   clauses  may  have  the 
subjunctive,  even  when  expressing  a  reality,: 

Se  hem  que  (or  comquanto  que)  os  Alpes  sejam  mais 
altos  que  OS  Pyrenees,  elks  sdo  mais  fdceis  de  at- 
travessar. 


The  Subjunctive  Mood.  361 

(b)  The  final  (finaes): 

Obedecei  as  lets,  para  que  vos  ohedegam, 

(c)  The  consecutive  (consecutivas) :  que: 

Os  generos  de  mais  necessidade   devem   ser  too  haratos 
que  estejam  ao  alcance  de  todos  os  bolsos. 

'^.B.—Sem  que  and  que  nao  always  require  the  subjunc- 
tive.    Ex.: 

Caso  venha  e  que  nao  (or  sem  que)  chegue  a  hora  .  .  . 

(d)  Nao  porque^  nao  que: 

Procedeu  assim,  nao  porque  gostasse,  mas  por  eniender 
ser  este  o  sen  dever. 

(e)  Contdnto  que^  a  nao  ser  que,  siipposto  que,  dado 
que,  dado  caso  que,  caso  que,  caso  always  require  the  sub- 
junctive.    Ex. : 

Pdde  ir  contanto  que  nao  se  demore. 

(f)  Se  if,  whether,  expressing  condition;  como  se 
as  if;  quer  .  .  .  quer;  como  quer  que  (cf.  se  followed  by 
the  future  in  the  following  Lesson,  §115  (a)): 

Se  nao  fosse  a  grande  distancia,  iri  a  vel-o. 
Falou  como  se  tivesse  perdido  o  juizo. 

N.B.  I.— Instead  of  como  se  in  the  preceding  example 
might  be  employed  como  quem  (see  E). 

N.B.  II. — Se,  introducing  an  indirect  interrogation,  is 
followed  by  the  indicative:  preguntou-me  se  era  grande  a 
distdncia. 

Sa(k)irei  quer  chova  quer  nao  chova  .  .  .  whether  it   be 

raining  or  not. 
Como  quer  que  seja  however  it  may  be. 
Como  quer  que  o  nao  visse  as  he  did  not  see  him  anyhow. 

(g)  Ate  que,  depois  que  and  antes  que,  when  ex- 
pressing a  future,  an  intention: 

Esteja  em  casa  ate  que  seu  irmdo  volte. 
Depois   que   tenha  chegado,    saiam  amhos  antes  que  se 
feche  a  porta. 
(h)  Como,  when,   employed  with  the  imperfect  or 
pluperfect,   it   expresses   a   series  of  events;    sometimes 
also  when  expressing  the  reason: 

Napoledo,  como  tivesse  sido  vencido  e  aprisionado  pelos 

aUiados,  foi  levado  para  a  ilha  de  Elba. 
Como  nao  quizesse  acompanJiar-me,  sai  so. 


362  Lesson  22. 

D.  Ill  Relative  Clauses. 

(a)  When  expressing  a  supposition  and  not  a  reality: 

Pompeo  aspirava  a  honras  que  o  distinguissem  de  fodos 

OS  capifdes  do  seu  tempo. 
Se  enconfrar  um  livro  que  Ihe  agrade,  compre-o. 
Se  ndo  chove,  a  raiz  duma  plartta  ndo  encontra  na  terra 

dgua  que  sugue. 

(b)  When  expressing  a  quality  which  restricts  the 
generality  of  an  idea,  this  idea  belonging  to  a  negative 
or  interrogative-negative  attribute: 

Ainda  ndo  encontrei  homem   algum  que  ndo  tivesse  (or 

tenha)  sido  logrado  nos  seus  sonhos  de  felicidade. 
Quern  ha  que  tenha  sido  sempre  feliz? 

N.B.— Po2(CO  is  considered  as  attributing  a  negative 
meaning : 

Ha  poucos  homens  que  saibam  aproveitar  hem  o  tempo. 

(c)  Expressing  purpose: 

Envieilhe  uma  pessoa  que  o  avisasse  do  que  havia  aeon- 
tecido. 

Eemarlc. — Relative  clauses  which  do  not  belong  to  any 
of  the  groups  above  require  the  indicative :  Elle  sahe  os  meios 
de  que  pdde  dispor  e  sahe  os  deveres  que  tern  de  cumprir. 
Conhecia  perfeitamente  a  sociedade  em  que  vivia. 

E.  Quern  in  the  meaning  of  "somebody  who"  or 
"people  who"  and  depending  on  ha^  apparece  or  the 
like,  or  following  coma  (cf.  C  (f )  N.B.)  equally  requires  the 
verb  in  the  subjunctive  mood: 

Ha  quern  assim  pense;  havia  quern  assim  pensasse. 
Falou  com  quern  tivesse  perdido  o  juizo. 

However:  Ha  algumas  pessoas  que  assim  pensam. 

Also  expressions  as  seja  qiiem  for  que,  qucm  quer 
que  seja  and  the  like  require  the  subjunctive: 

Elle  estd  innocente,  seja  quern  for  que  diga  o  contrdrio. 

F.  Finally,  the  subjunctive  is  employed  in  the  for- 
mulas que  eu  saiha  as  I  know,  and  queira  ou  ndo  queira 
whether  he  wants  to  or  not: 

Ndo  ha,  que  eu  saiha,  expressdo  mais  suave. 


The  Subjunctive  Mood.  863 

51.  Thema. 

I  should  want  to  find  a  book  that  might  serve  me  as 
a  guide  on  my  travels.  Man  is  the  only  sentient  being  that 
in  a  state  of  freedom  may  destroy  itself.  Please  to  send  me 
a  servant  who  knows  how  to  wait  upon  people.  I  should  be 
very  sorry  if  you  should  depart  without  bidding  me  good-bye. 
It  will  be  well  that  you  may  know  why  I  kept  silence.  Per- 
haps it  will  be  sufficient  if  you  tell  him  that  he  will  be  dis- 
missed immediately  if  he  should  not  do  his  duty.  It  is 
time  that  we  return  home,  for  it  begins  to  rain.  It  may 
be  assumed  that  to-morrow  the  weather  will  be  good.  I 
promised  that  I  should  keep  her  company,  in  case  you  should 
be  obliged  to  remain  here.  Dom  Joao  de  Castro,  a  brilliant 
modern  author  and  a  descendant  of  the  famous  Portuguese 
viceroy  of  the  same  name,  says  in  the  preface  to  his  <i-Jor' 
nados  no  Minho^ :  "The  reader  who  will  like  substantial 
treatises,  may  halt  here  with  his  curiosity,  for  my  'Jornadas* 
are  nothing  but  a  slight  beating  of  wings  .  .  .  When  I  should 
be  a  man  —  so  I  intended  when  still  a  child  —  I  should 
rove  through  old  castles;  on  my  command  (=  voz)  the  draw- 
bridges were  to  sink  and  the  confined  ladies  of  the  castle 
should  hail  me  as  their  invincible  deliverer  ..."  You  do  not 
know  whereby  the  ancestor  of  this  author  has  become  an  his- 
torical person,  and  you  ask  me  whether  I  do.  May  I  ask 
leave  to  tell  you  briefly  in  the  following  paragraph  the  his- 
tory of  this  hero,  so  intimately  connected  with  that  of  his 
country. 

62.  Leitnra  e  yersao. 

Dom  Joao  de  Castro, 

D.  Joao  de  Castro  seria  immortal  na  historia  de  Portugal, 
ainda  que  nao  tivesse  si  do  vice-rei  da  India  e  como  -tal  feito 
fa^anhas  como  havera  poucos  as  tenham  feito.  Talvfiz  elle 
seja  mais  conhecido  pela  sua  probidade  e  desinteresse,  que 
nao  ha  quern  Ih'a  possa  negar  ou  Ihe  levasse  a  palma.  Nasceu 
em  Lisboa  no  anno  de  1560;  e  como  descendesse  de  uma  fa- 
miUa  illustre,  passou  a  India  no  vice-rei nado  de  D.  Antonio 
de  Noronha,  e  era  governador  de  Ormuz  quando  foi  chamado 
para  vice-rei  da  India.  Tinha  ja  militado  em  Tanger  e  acom- 
panhado  o  imperador  Carlos  Quinto  na  tomada  de  Tunis.  Por 
essa  occasiao,  como  este  monarcha  quizesse  dar-lhe  a  sua  parte 
dos  despojos,  D.  Joao  de  Castro  recusou,  nao  porque  despre- 
zasse  todo  o  premio  material  da  sua  valentia,  mas  por  entender, 
dizia,  que  so  pertencia  ao  seu  soberano  recompensal-o  como 
merecesse.  Quando  D.  Joao  de  Castro  tomou  conta  do  gov6rno 
da  India,  era  Diu  governada  por  I).  Joao  de  Mascarenhas  que, 


364  Lesson  23. 

posto  nao  dispuzesse  de  mais  de  300  portugu6ses,  a  defendeu 
valorosamente  da  for^a  cem  v6zes  maior  com  que  a  amea^dra  o 
rei  de  Cambaia.  0  n6vo  vice-rei  nao  hesitou  em  Ihe  man- 
dar  alguns  soccorros  de  soldados,  assim  como  sens  dois  filhos, 
dos  qnaes  um  morreu  na  pra9a  pela  explosao  duma  mina. 
Defendia-se  Diu  heroicamente  haveria  seis  mezes,  quando  D.  Joao 
de  Castro  chegou  (1546).  Posto  que  nao  f6sse  facil  illudir  o 
inimigo,  consegoiu  faz6l-o,  entrando  na  pra^a  com  4000  homens. 
Alguns  dias  depoia  fez  uma  sortida  e,  agredindo  as  trincheiras 
dos  sitiantes,  ganhou  completa  victoria,  uma  das  mais  sangui- 
nolentas  e  memoraveis,  que  nos  tem  transmittido  a  hist6ria. 
Ficou  a  cidade  arruinada,  visto  que  o  combate  abrangesse 
mas,  largos  e  arredores.  Era  indispensavel  que  se  reconstru- 
issem  as  fortifica96es,  mas  nao  havia  dinheiro  que  chegasse. 
Neste  apuro  O.  Joao  de  Castro  cortou  alguns  cabellos  da  barba, 
e  sobre  este  penhor  pediu  (que)  Ihe  emprestassem  20  000  par- 
daus^  OS  habitantes  de  G6a,  os  quaes  Ihe  forneceram  o  di- 
nheiro preciso  e  sem  que  tivessem  de  se  arrepender  da  sua 
confian^a,  pois  a  singular  hypotheca  foi  resgatada  no  praso 
fixo.  E  nunca  houve,  nem  nunca  haverd  homem  que  possa 
gabar-se  de  barbas  tomadas  em  mais  alto  val6r.  Foi  esse 
rasgo  de  magnlfico  aprumo  que,  mais  do  que  os  feitos  com 
que  honrou  a  sua  espada  e  as  armas  do  seu  pais,  Ihe  gran- 
gearam  a  popularidade  de  que,  passados  quasi  4  seculos,  ainda 
gosa  0  nome  de  D.  Joao  de  Castro. 

Mai  tinha  conseguido  restabelecer  a  boa  ordem  no  vice- 
reino,  quando  a  morte  o  veio  surprehender  a  6  de  junho  de 
1547.  Teve  de  ser  enterrado  a  custa  do  publico,  visto  nao 
se  achar  nos  sens  cofres  mais  do  que  um  cilicio,  e  tres  reaes'^, 
por  isso  que  D.  Joao  de  Castro,  nao  aspirando  a  bens  que  nao 
fdssem  os  do  seu  pais,  em  v^z  de  amontoar  tesouros,  despendia 
generosamente  os  seus  ordenados  no  servi^o  do  Estado. 


Twenty-third  Lesson. 

The  Subjunctive  Mood  (continued). 

A.  The  Future  Tense. 

§  115.  The  Future  of  the  Subjunctive  is  employed, 
instead  of  the  Future  indie,  whenever  you  want  to  ex- 
press the  uncertainty  of  some  future  event: 

*  Indian  coin  of  about  360  reis  or  Is.  4<^.  in  value. 
2  Old  Indian  coin   of  different  value.     There   neeve  silver 
and  copper  reaes 


The  Subjunctive  Mood.  365 

(a)  After  the  conditional  conjunction  se: 

Se  vier  if  he  should  come ;  se  nao  desejar  mats  nada  in 
case  you  don't  want  anything  more ;  se  Beus  quizer 
please  God. 

However:  se  vejo  (se  vi)  whenever  or  if  I  see  (saw), 
because  here  se  is  not  conditionally  employed  and  does 
not  express  a  future,  but  a  repetition. 

(b)  After  quando  when: 

Quando  vier  when  he  will  come;  quando  formos  a  casa 
when  we  are  to  go  home. 

(c)  After  emquanto  while,  as  long  as: 

Emquanto  fleer  este  trahalho  .  .  .  Emquanto  nao  puder 
contar  com  augmento  de  ordenado  ...  Ordeno  que 
nao  saia  emquanto  nao  tiver  estvdado  a  ligao  (cf.  B, 
§  118  c). 

(d)  After  segundo,  conforme,  assim  como,  assim  que 
according  to,  corresponding  to,  thus,  so  as  to: 

Serds  ou  nao  hem  succedido,  segundo  te  houveres. 

You  will  or   will   not   succeed  according  to  your  mode 

of  procedure. 
Conforme  fizerdes,  far-vos-hao. 
As  you  do,  you  will  be  done  to. 
Por  onde  vds,  assim  como  vires,  assim  fards. 
FUho  eSj  pae  serds,  assim  que  jfieereSj  assim  terds. 

(e)  In  relative  clauses  which  refer  to  something 
uncertain  in  the  future: 

Aquelle  que  vier  he  who  may  come. 

Traga  o  trahalho  que  estiver  feito  bring  the  work  that 

will  be  ready. 
Seja  0  que  JDeus  quieer  be  it  as  God  pleases  (God's  will 

be  done). 

(f)  Often  after  the  relative  crnio  as  and  quem  (he) 
who  (cf.  (d)): 

Cdmo  quieer   as  you  please;    como  Ihe  parecer  as  you 

think. 
Quem  hoa  cama  fizer,   neUa  se  deitard   as   you   make 
your  bed,  so  you  lie  on  it. 
§  116.  The  Perfect  Future  subj.  is  employed  instead 
of  the  same  tense  of  the  indicative,   on  the  same  con- 
ditions as  the  Imperfect  Future: 

Avisem-me  quando  os  cavallos  tiverem  chegado. 
Let  me  know  when  the  horses  will  have  arrived. 


366  Lesson  23. 

B.  Agreement  of  Tenses. 

§  117,  In  the  Subjunctive  Mood  the  agreement 
of  tenses  is,  as  a  rule,  the  same  as  in  the  Indicative. 
Therefore  only  some  exceptions  may  be  noted: 

(a)  There  is  no  Preterito  perfeito  definido  in  the 
Subjunctive  (corresponding  for  instance  to  the  .verbal 
form  fui),  but  only  a  Preterito  perfeito  indefinido  (cor- 
responding, for  instance,  to  tenJio  sido-.tenha  sido)  and  a 
Preterito  imperfeito,  which,  according  to  the  character 
of  the  clause,  may  alternate  with  the  former.     Ex.: 

Example:  Elle  esteve  hontem  doente;  nao  creio  qiie  esti- 
vesse  hontem  doente. 

Example:  Elle  tern  estado  (or  esteve)  doente;  nao  creio 
que  tenha  estado  doente. 

§  118.  The  Future  tenses  of  the  subjunctive  are 
only  employed  in  the  above  mentioned  cases  (see  A). 
However,  it  should  be  noticed  that: 

(a)  An  action  to  be  done  in  the  future  is  expressed 
by  the  present  tense,  in  an  accessory  clause,  if  it  de- 
pends on  a  verb  employed  in  the  present  tense  of  the 
principal  phrase: 

Ordeno  que  elle  vd  amanhd. 

(b)  Such  an  action  depending  on  a  preterito  in  the 
principal  clause,  must  be  expressed  by  the  imperfect 
subj.: 

Ordenei  que  elle  fosse  amanhd. 

(c)  If  the  action  is  relatively  future — i.e.,  if  it  will 
be  already  past  when  another,  equally  future,  action  is 
to  be  or  will  have  been  done,  this  future  tense  ia  thus 
expressed: 

Ordeno  que  ndo  saia,    emquanto  nao  tiver  estudado  a 

ligdo. 
Ordenei  que  ndo  saisse,   emquanto  nao  tivesse  estudado 

a  ligdo. 

§  119.  In  certain  cases  the  imperfect  may  supply 
the  pluperfect: 

Ndo  puzesses  (=^  ndo  tivesses  pdsto)  a  mdo  num  velhof 
You  ought  not  to  have  laid  your  hand  upon  an  old  man! 
Quern  me  dissesse  (or  dirja)  issol 
Who  might  have  told  me  so  before  1 


The  Sabjunctive  Mood.  367 

§  120.  On  the  other  hand,  the  Preterito  perfeito 
indefiiiido  is  sometimes  employed  instead  of  the  Pluper- 
fect subj.  (see  §111,  N.B.I). 

53.  Thema. 

I  cannot  believe  any  longer  in  ycnr  promises  unless  yon 
give  me  the  necessary  securities.  If  you  had  been  more  thought- 
ful, you  would  have  spared  us  these  painful  discussions. 
A  thoughtless  man  never  profits  by  those  lessons  which  Life  is 
giving  him  at  any  moment,  although  he  has  to  pay  for  them 
dearly.  Also  there  are  many  people  who  remain  ignorant  even 
after  having  travelled  (personal  form)  through  the  most  cul- 
tured countries.  They  pass,  as  if  they  were  blindfolded,  be-^ 
fore  the  greatest  wonders  of  Nature  or  the  most  beautiful 
monuments  which  Art  may  have  created,  if  they  are  not 
accompanied  by  somebody  who  will  open  for  them  their  eyes. 

Now  the  thunderstorm  is  over;  as  soon  as  the  sun  will 
come  forth,  while  the  rain  is  still  continuing,  we  shall  see  a 
rainbow.  Also  if  you  place  yourself  before  a  fountain,  with 
your  back  against  the  sun,  you  will  see  forming  itself  in  the 
falling  drops  a  bow  like  the  rainbow,  which  proves  that  this 
phenomenon  is  due  to  the  sun.  If  we  want  the  proof  that 
the  sunlight  is  formed  out  of  various  colours,  it  will  be  suffi- 
cient that  we  cut  a  disc  of  pasteboard  on  which  the  seven 
colours  are  put  in  strips  of  paper,  disposed  from  the  centre 
to  the  circumference,  so  as  to  complete  a  certain  number  of 
successive  spectrums.  If  then  we  cause  the  disc  to  turn  round, 
this  will  appear  white.  That  is  the  so-called  ''experiment  of 
Newton." 

54.  Leitura. 

0  grande  erudito  Consiglieri  Pedroso,  quando  presidente 
da  Sociedade  de  Geographia  de  Lisboa,  submeteu  a  delibera9ao 
da  assembleia  com  o  intuito  de  estabelecer  um  accCrdo  luso- 
brasiliense  uma  serie  de  propostas,  de  que  extraimos  as  seguintes ; 

Estudar  a  forma  mais  adequada  de  se  realisarem  con- 
gresses periodicos  luso-brasileiros,  que  devam  em  prazos  a'fixar 
reunir-se  alternadamente  em  Lisboa  ou  Porto  e  no  Rio  de 
Janeiro  ou  outras  cidades  brasileiras,  com  o  intuito  de  discutir 
todos  OS  assumptos  de  ordem  intellectual  e  econdmica,  que  in- 
teressam  em  commum  e  exclusivamente  as  duas  na^oes,  e  onde 
haja  de  fazer-se  a  propaganda  das  delibera^oes  que  pelos  mfis- 
mos  congresses  e  pelos  govfimos  dos  dois  paises  tenham  de 
ser  tomadas  a  beneficio  de  ambos  os  povos  respeitando-se 
escrupulosamente  a  independencia  de  cada  um  d'elles,  e  ev^i- 
tando-se  toda  e  qualquer  interferencia,   por  minima  que  seja; 


368  Lesson  24. 

na  vida  interna  e  no  modo  de  ser  dos  dois  paises  respectiva- 
mente. 

Estudar  a  forma  de  se  ultimar  um  tratado  de  comncercio, 
ou  antes  um  largo  entendimento  commercial  entre  as  duas 
na^oes,  procurando-se  a  maneira  —  ate  onde  f6r  possivel  veneer 
as  difficuldades  naturaes  inherentes  ao  assumpto  —  de  que 
uma  a  outra  concedam  respectivamente  vantagens  especiaes, 
que  deixem  de  ser  transmittidas  aos  outros  estados^  nao  sendo 
portanto  attingidas  pela  clausula  de  «na9ao  mais  favorecida*, 
inscripta  actualmente  nos  tratados  ja  existentes  tanto  de  Portu- 
gal, como  do  Brasil  com  os  paises  estrangeiros. 


Twenty-fourth.  Lesson. 

The  Infinitive. 
I.  General  Use  of  the  Inflnltive. 

§  121.  Portuguese  language  distinguishes  two 
forms  of  the  Infinitive: 

(a)  the  impersonal  and  (b)  the  personal. 

While  the  former  expresses  an  action  quite  generally, 
without  saying  by  whom,  the  latter  includes  in  its 
ending  at  the  same  time  the  subject. 

§  122.  The  impersonal  or  simple  infinitive  occurs 
purely  (without  preposition)  or  prepositive  (=  depending 
on  a  preposition)— e.g.:  escrever;  de,  para,  por  escrever. 
Sometimes  it  substitutes  (with  or  without  the  article)  a 
noun,  and  may  be  subject,  object,  or  predicate: 

Viver  e  um  henefwio  da  natureea,  commum  a  todos. 
EdiLcar  os  fllhos  e  o  dever  mais  sagrado  dos  paes. 
Nao  Ihe  resta  sendo  pedir  esmola. 
Gosto  de  cantar. 

6  vida  da  minlia  vida 

6  vida  do  meu  viver 

Viver  sem  ti  nao  e  vida 

Viver  sem,  ti  e  morrer.    (Portuguese  folk-lore). 

§  123.  The  subject  infinitive  may  also  be  placed 
after  the  predicate: 

Praia  i  o  hem  falar,  ouro  i  o  hem  calar. 
Mais  vale  calar  que  mal  falar, 
£  melhor  ir  por  aqui. 


The  Infinitive.  869 

0  grande  defeito  do  rato  e  ser  muito  guloso 
£  fdcil  faeer 

Bom  saber  e  calar,  aU  ser  tempo  de  falar, 
J&  uma  vergdnha  (uma  Idstima)  nao  saber  ler 
A  sua  velha  poUrona  onde  Ihe  e  grata  dormir  urn  curto 
s6(m)no  benefico  .  .  . 

§  124.    The  Infinitive  is  employed  as  a  complement: 

(a)  As  a  direct  complement: 

Nao  sei  (que)  fazer  I  don^t  know  how  (or  what)  to  do. 
Esse  homem  de  Estado  quer  ser  chefe  do  governo  (—  quer 

a  chefia)  this  statesman  wants   to   be   the  head    of 

Government. 
Elle  pediu  de  beber  he  asked  for  a  draught. 

(b)  As  an  indirect  complement  of  verbs  or  adjectives, 
answering  to  the  question:  of  what,  to  what,  etc.: 

0  homem  S  capaz  de  se  enganar  (=  de  engano).     Elle 

prepara-se  para  fugir  (=  para  a  fuga) 
Pensa  em  partir  (—  na  partida). 

§  125.  The  simple  Infinitive  is  also  employed  as 
an  attribute;  as  such  it  is  preceded  by  de  after  nouns 
of  which  it  is  the  complement.  In  English  it  is  generally 
rendered  by  the  gerund.     Ex.: 

A  arte  de  escrever  S  jd  antiga.  A  Austria  tinha  inten- 
gdo  de  ficar  neutral  (the  art  of  writing  .  .  .). 

0  publico  nao  tem  interesse  em  os  ouvir.  Elle  fee 
mengdo  de  se  retirar  (.  .  .  no  interest  of  hearing  .  .  .). 

0  pais  estd  numa  situagdo  de  se  lastimar. 

§  126.  The  Infinitive  employed  as  a  substantive 
may  express  any  part  of  a  proposition: 

0  andar  cansa  walking  tires.  Era  urn  nao  acabar  de  rir 
there  was  no  end  of  laughing.  Soava  um  correr 
de  cavallos  a  trot  of  horses  was  heard.  Desde  o  ama- 
nhecer  ate  ao  anoUecer  from  dawn  to  nightfall. 

§  127.  The  Personal  Infinitive  has  its  own 
subject  which  may  or  may  not  be  expressed  by  its 
termination.  It  may  also  be  accompanied  by  a  noun 
or  pronoun: 

Seria  justo  confessarmos  o  nosso  erro 

Nao  ha  maior  Srrd  que  nao  reconhecer  um  homem  seu 

erro  (or  nao  reconhecerem  os  homens  .  .  .)• 
Ao  ouvir  OS  pdssaros  cantarem  no  bosqtie  ... 

Portuguese  Conversatioi-Grammar.  2i 


370  Lesson  24. 

§  128.  The  subject  of  the  Personal  Infinitive  may 
even  be  an  indefinite,  an  impersonal  one.  The  action 
then  is  expressed  by  the  third  person  plural.  In  Eng- 
lish this  form  may  be  rendered  by  the  passive  voice: 

Calei-me  por  nao  me  accreditarem  I  remained  silent  be- 
cause they  did  not  believe  me  (or  because  I  was  not 
believed. 

Betiro-me  para  nao  me  importunarem. 

I  retired  that  I  might  not  be  bored. 

See  also  the  Infinitive  as  representing  a  dependent 
clause,  Lesson  28  §  151. 

N.B.  I.— As  may  be  seen  by  the  examples^  the  Infinitive 
may  also  be  accompanied  by  complements  of  any  kind;  e.g.: 

0  suave  decorrer  do  tempo  .  .  .  urn  longo  agonizar  .  .  .  o 
agraddvel  passear  pelos  campos. 

N.B.  II. — Generally  the  substantivated  Infinitive  is  em- 
ployed only  in  the  masculine  and  singular  form.  With  a 
small  number,  however,  the  employment  of  the  infinitive  as  a 
substantive  is  so  natural  that  even  the  plural  is  formed  of 
it;  e.g.:  o  jantar  dinner,  jantares;  as  dieeres,  os  podereSy  os 
devereSf  os  haveres,  os  andareSj  os  saberes  etc. 

55.  Thema. 

Water  is  an  indispensable  element :  for  men  and  animals 
to  drink ;  to  cook  foods ;  to  fertilise  the  ground ;  to  water  the 
plants ;  to  produce  steam  that  causes  the  locomotive  to  go  on 
land  and  the  powerful  steamers  on  sea.  "What  future 
awaits  us,"  exclaims  Trindade  Coelho,  **if  we  do  not  assist 
agriculture?  Continuous  impoverishment  of  our  race,  which  will 
be  undermined  by  disease;  our  impossibility  of  creating 
new  industries  or  of  developing  those  already  existing,  which 
all  depend  on  the  mother- industry;  the  impossibility  of  our  hav- 
ing commerce,  for  want  of  (=  for  not  having)  something  in  which 
to  exercise  it;  misery  and  hunger  not  very  far  oflF,  when,  in 
exchange  for  products  indispensable  to  Life,  we  shall  have  given 
the  last  crumbs."  Is  there  anything  more  lamentable  than 
not  knowing  how  to  read  and  to  write?  Can  you  tell  us 
how  to  reach  the  railway-station?  I  have  a  great  pleasure 
in  being  of  use  to  you.  Please  come  along  with  me; 
for  I  have  to  go  the  same  way.  When  do  you  think  of 
coming  back?  I  don't  know  yet,  but  I  hope  I  shall  not 
be  long. 


The  Infinitive.  371 

66.  Leitnra  e  yersao, 

Bodrigues  de  Freitas. 

Quern  estudar  com  atten^ao  as  pequenas  obras-primas 
reunidas  n'este  volume  (Pdginas  Avulsas  de  J.  J.  Modriguse 
de  Freitas),  curvar-se-ha  per  certo  com  respeito  e  sympathia 
perante  o  autor.  Notara  nao  so  o  vasto  saber  positive  e  a 
justSza  das  doatrinas  expostas,  mas  tambem  as  variadas  apti- 
does  literarias,  e  a  arte  rara  de  narrar  acontecimentos  e  exte- 
riorizar  ideias,  com  precisao  e  sobrtedade  ...  Se  em  seguida 
rememorar  os  factos  principaes  da  sua  vida  publica,  come  lente 
na  Academia  polyt^chnica,  eximio  publicista,  chefe  de  partido 
6  deputado.  penso  que  deve  ficar  impressionado  pela  obre 
rectidao  da  sua  indole  e  pela  perfeita  unidade  que  st  ipre 
houve  entre  o  sen  pensar,  o  seu  dizer  e  o  seu  obrar  .  .  . 
Picariam,  comtudo,  incompletos  os  breves  tra^os  lan^ados  n'este 
singelo  monumento,  erguido  a  mem6ria  de  Rodrigues  de  Freitas 
pelas  maos  piedosas  que  o  ampararam  e  acariciaram  em  vida, 
se  alguem  dos  poucos-  que  tiveram  a  ventura  de  serem  ad- 
mittidos  na  intimidade  do  seu  lar,  nao  manifestasse  a  profunda 
e  consoladora  impressao,  produzida  pela  sua  personalidade  no 
trato  familiar.  Alguem  que  pode  seguir  a  evolu9ao  das  ideias 
e  dos  ideaes  de  ambos  .  .  .  e  leu  em  admiraveis  cartas  a  es- 
posa,  medita^oes  .  .  .  fragmentos  e  esbo90s  infelizmente,  mas 
tao  bellos  que  provocam  um  doloroso  pesar  por  o  destino  nao 
Ihe  haver  concedido  tempo  e  fori^as  para  terminar  as  suas  in- 
vestiga^oes  sociaes,  nem  para  coordenar  as  suas  ideias  filoso- 
fico-religiosas  .  .  .  Quando  em  vida,  em  horas  de  desalento, 
procurava  alguma  ideia  suTjlime  que  o  avigorasse,  era  na  Ora- 
Qao  de  Benjamim  Franklin  que  a  encontrava,  repetindo: 

«0h  bondade  todo-poderosa,  pae  miserieordioso^  guia  in- 
dulgente.  Augmenta  o  meu  saber  de  sorte  que  eu  reconhe^a 
OS  mens  verdadeiros  interesses.  Firma-me  na  resoluQao  de 
seguir  os  conselhos  que  esse  me  der.  Acceita  os  servi^os  que 
eu  possa  prestar  a  teus  outros  filhos,  como  signal  unico  de 
reconhecimento  que  me  e  dado  offerecer-te  pelos  favores  que 
me  concedes  sem  cessar.» 

(Carolina  MichaSlis  de  Vasconcellos :   pre^mbulo  (dbbr.)  das 
«Paginas  avnlsas»  por  J.  J.  Rodrigues  de  Freitas.) 


24* 


372  LesBon  25. 

Twenty-fifth  Lesson. 

The  Infinitive  (continued). 

II.  Use  of  the  Personal  and  the  Impersonal  Forms 
of  the  Infinitive. 

§  129.  Whenever  the  pure  infinitive  is  employed 
in  quite  a  general  meaning,  without  referring  to  some 
subject,  the  impersonal' form  is  used: 

Os  preceitos  do  direito  sdo :  viver  honestamente,  ndo  em- 
pecer  a  outrem,  e  dar  o  sen  a  cada  urn. 

§  130.  When  the  infinitive  has  its  own  subject 
expressed,  the  personal  form  is  employed  (cf.  §  127). 

Ao  chegarem  os  fugitivos  a  planicie,  um  dos  desconhecidos 
esiava  all. 

§  131.  The  personal  form  is  employed  also  when- 
ever an  action  is  spoken  of  which  has  a  special  though 
unexpressed  subject  (cf.  §128):  Fassei  sem  me  verem. 

§  132.  The  impersonal  form  is  employed  when- 
ever the  infinitive  has  the  meaning  of  an  imperative 
(cf.§136,b). 

§  133.  After  the  verbs  mandar,  falser,  deixar-se, 
the  simple  and  pure  infinitive  is  employed: 

Mcmdei'O  entrar.     Fal-o-hei  subir.    Deixou-se  prender. 

N.B. — If,  however,  the  infinitive  is  separated  from  the 
subordinating  verb,  the  personal  form  may  be  used :  Mandeis-o 
em  dia  e  hora  marcados  seguirem  o  seu  caminho. 

§  134.  The  impersonal  form  of  the  infinitive  is 
used  after  the  following  verbs: 

Acdbar  de,  andar  a,  cessar  de,  comegar  a  (or  de),  con- 
tinuar  a,  costumar,  chegar  a,  desejar  and  the  verbs 
of  similar  meaning  deixar  de,  entrar  a,  dar  em, 
estar  a,  ser  feito  para,  haver  de,  ir  a,  langar-se  a, 
metter-se  a,  ser  mandado,  ousar,  poder^  pdr-se  a, 
querer,  recusar,  saber,  soer,  ter  de,  trafar  de,  tornar 
a,  vir  a.     (Also  for  these  verbs  see  §  133,  N.B.) 

§  135.  .In  any  jother  cases  the  personal  as  well  as 
the  impersonal  forms  may  be  employed,  considering 
always  that  the  use  of  the  one  or  the  other  is  subject 


The  Infinitive.  373 

to  the  clearness,  the  emphasis,  and  the  harmony  of  the 
clause.     Ex.: 

Accrescentava  que  as  noticias  recehidas  do  Alentejo 
continuavam  a  ser  favor dveis.  Ensinou  a  ser  reis 
OS  reis  do  mundo.  Por  esta  pergunta  nos  ensina  a 
sermos  euriosos.  Obriga  os  cercados  a  lidar.  Obri- 
gdra  os  Mossulmanos  a  concederem-lhe  ...  As  aves 
aqudticas  pareciam,  nos  sens  voos  incertos,  ora  vaga- 
rosos,  ora  rdpidos^  folgarem  com  os  primeiros  dias 
da  estagdo  dos  amdres.  Viam-se  lampejar  as  annas 
e  ajuntarem-se  ondas  de  vultos  humanos. 

III.  The  Independent  Infinltiye. 

§  13G.     The  Infinitive  is  employed  independently: 

(a)  When  substituting  a  noun — e.g.: 

0  hem  fazer  floresce^  e  todo  o  mal  perece. 
Mais  oust  a  mal  fazer ^  que  hem  fazer. 
Bem  parece  o  hem  fazer  (see  §  123—125). 

(b)  When  substituting  an  imperative: 

Companheiros,  despedir  esta  noUe  da  montanha  e  das 
tristezas,  e  apparelhar  para  dmanhd  me  seguird^s ! 

N.B. — In  this  case  the  subject  (tu,  v6s)  is  never  expressed. 

(c)  In  exclamations  expressing  surprise,  disillusion, 
astonishment: 

Ndo  haver  quern  me  salve!  Pensar  que  tudo  seria 
em  vdof 

57.  Thema. 

To  err  is  human.  To  obey  is  the  duty  of  youth.  Rea- 
ding, writing  and  arithmetic  are  the  most  elementary  attain- 
ments which  ought  to  be  taught  to  everybody  and  which  all 
ought  to  learn.  The  strong  beating  of  his  heart  prevented 
him  from  going  fast.  To  recognise  the  limits  of  one's  knowledge 
is  to  be  wise.  It  is  not  virtue  never  to  err,  but  avoiding 
error  as  much  as  possible  may  well  be  called  so.  It  is  easy 
to  blame,  but  difficult  to  make  it  better.  I  want  to  see  this 
work  finished,  for  it  is  easily  to  be  done  (cf.  §  146,  2 ;  N,B.  III). 
Already  you  have  often  promised  to  improve  yourself,  yet  I  do 
not  yet  see  that  you  have  succeeded  in  doing  so.  It  must  be 
acknowledged  that  in  the  last  decennium  the  women's  rights 
movement  has  learnt  how  to  convince  the  righteously  and  justly 
thinking  people  of  the  justice  of  its  existence   and  advocacy. 


874  Lesson  26. 

Rowing  is  a  good  exercise,  as,  by  putting  the  arms  to  strong 
movement,  it  obliges  us  to  breathe  deeply.  For  it  is  not 
enough  for  us  to  breathe  good  air  and  well  nourish  ourselves; 
it  is  also  necessary  to  take   some   exercise  and  to  be  clean. 

68.  Leitura  e  versao. 

(a)  0  rate  e  um  animal  muito  intoressante  e  engra^ado;  e 
nSo  obstante  (elle)  ser  o  mais  incommodo  e  atrevido  dos  nossos 
visinhos,  costumamos  gostar  d'elle,  porque  a  sua  viveza  e  in- 
telligencia  nao  deixam  de  faz6l-o  sympathico.  0  rato  seria  at6 
de  estimar,  se  nao  fosse  tao  guloso  e  prejudicial;  pois  al6m 
de  devorar  tudo  o  que  topa,  e  de  furtar  para  levar  aos  filhos, 
parece  que  tern  o  prazer  de  destruir  o  que  pode  alcan(jar,  e 
nao  ha  nada  que  resista  ao  seu  dente  afiado.  A  brincar,  o 
rato  domestico  da  Cabriolas  muito  engra9adas  e  sabe  tomar 
posi96e3  e  fazer  momices  que  lembram  os  dos  palhacjos.  E 
para  ir  ter  com  uma  gulodice,  tanto  6  capaz  de  ir  pelo  chao 
como  por  uma  corda.  Apanhado  e  mettido  n'uma  gaiola,  a 
principio  assusta-se  muito,   ignorando  o  que  Ihe  vae  succeder. 

Task:  The  preceding  to  be  put  in  the  plural:  Os  ratos 
sdo  dnimaes  muito  interessantes,  etc. 

(b)  Um  leao  dignou-se  travar  conhecimento  com  uma  lebre 
muito  lepida.  A  lebre  perguntou-lhe,  se  era  verdade  que  um 
misero  gallo  pudesse  com  o  seu  canto  afugentar  facilmente 
um  leao.  0  leao  respondeu  que  era  verdade  sem  duvida,  e 
que  nao  era  raro  terem  os  grandes  animaes  quasi  sempre  al- 
gum  fraco.  E  assim,  por  exemplo,  ja  teria  ella  ouvido  dizer 
que  0  grunhir  de  um  porco  causava  assombro  e  terror  a  um 
elephante.  A  lebre  interrompeu-o,  dizendo  que  era  agora  que 
ella  comprehendia  a  razao  porque  as  lebres  se  assustavam 
tanto  a  ouvirem  ladrar  um  cao 


Twenty-sixth  Lesson. 

The  Infinitive  (continued). 
IV.  The  Dependent  Infinitive. 

A.    Without  a  preceding  preposition. 

§  137.  Those  verbs  which  according  to  their  meaning 
require  to  be  completed  by  another  verb  with  the  same 
subject,  are  followed  by  the  simple  (impersonal)  infinitive: 
Ninguem  pdde  fugir  d  morte. 


The  Infinitive.  375 

With  the  simple  infinitive  and  without  a  preposition 
are  employed: 

Foder,  parecer^  custumar,  soer  (to  be  in  the  habit) 
saber  (in  the  meaning  of  "to  be  able'O,  ousar^  ndo 
duvidar,  recear,  propor-se,  tencionar,  emprehender, 
intentar,  meditar,  projectar  and  similar  verbs,  tentaVj 
recusar,  merecer;~e.g.: 

A  lingua  hi-partida  da  vibora  agita-se  too  furiosamente 
fora  da  bocca,  que  parece  phosphorejar  e  despedir 
faiscas. 

0  macaco  pdde  receber  uma  verdadeira  educagao. 

Propoz-se  tentar  fazel-Oy  sem  bem  saber  projectar  urn 
piano. 

N.B, — In  relative  clauses  the  infinitive  may  sometimes 
precede  the  personal  verbal  form; — e.g.:  .  .  .  cortando  o  esteiro 
0  mats  abaixo  que  ser  possa. 

§  138.  Without  a  preposition  the  infinitive  is  em- 
ployed also  after  the  following  verbs: 

ver,  ouvir^    sentir,    deixar,   mandar,  faeer  though   the 
infinitive  has  not  the  same  subject  with  these  verbs, 
but  refers  to  their  object; — e.g.: 
ouvi  cantar  =  I  heard  (somebody)  sing. 
Ouviram-no   falar;    manddram-me   entrar;    (in   passive 
form:  elle  foi  ouvido  falar ^  fui  mandado  entrar), 

N.B.  I.— After  deixar,  mandar^  fazer^  vir,  ouvir  the  ac- 
tive infinitive  may  be  understood  in  a  passive  meaning;  then 
its  subject  is  governed  by  por  or  de.  In  English  the  infinitive 
is  rendered  by  one  of  the  participles:  Deixei-me  tyrannizar 
por  ella  I  allowed  myself  to  be  tyrannised  by  her.  0  principe 
fazia-se  respeitar  (made  himself  respected)  dos  vassallos. 

Ex.:  Ouvimos  bater  o  tambor^  tocar  a  rebeca,  cortar  a 
madeira;  vimos  arder  a  casa  We  heard  thfe  drum  beaten,  the 
violin  played,  the  wood  sawn ;  we  saw  the  house  burning. 

It  may  be  noticed  that  when  these  verbs  are  followed,  be- 
side the  infinitive,  by  an  accusative  of  the  third  person,  this 
is  substituted  by  the  dative: 

Eu  vejo-lhes  verter  Idgrimas  tristes  (instead  of:  eu  as 
vejo  .  .  .). 

§  139.  Most  of  the  verbs  of  saying  and  thinking 
(verhos  semitivos.  e  declarativos),  as  pensar,  j^^gd'^'i  contar^ 
declaraK,  affirmar,  negar,  duvidar,  perdoar,  dizer,  entendeVy 


876  Lesson  26. 

etc.,  may  be  followed  by  the  pure  infinitive,  instead  of 
a  clause  depending  on  que; — e.g.; 

Julgas  saber  (=  que  sabes);  affirmou  ndo  haver  perigo 
(=  que  ndo  havia  p.). 

Rule. — The  infinitive  is  generally  simple  when 
its  action  relates  to  the  same  subject  as  that  of  the 
capital  verb. 

N.B. — After  some  verbs  the  infinitive  may  be  preceded 
hyjle;—e.g.: 

•     Jurou  exterminar  (or  de  exterminar)  os  inimigos. 

§  140.  The  transitive  verbs  querer,  preferir,  desejar, 
gostar,  ahorrecer  and  those  analogous  are  followed  by  an 
infinitive  pure  and  simple  whenever  both  actions  have 
the  same  subject:  JDesejo  entrar. 

(The  subjects  being  difierent,  a  dependent  sentence 
with  que  is  employed  instead:  Besejo  que  elle  entre.) 

^.B.— Desejar  may  be  followed  by  de:  desejo  de  ir;  but 
desejo  ir  is  more  popular. 

§  141.  The  transitive  verbs  diligenciar,  procurary 
evitar,  conseguir^  ohter,  decidir,  resolver  and  those  ana- 
logous are  followed  by  the  pure  infinitive,  whether  the 
two  actions  have  or  have  not  the  same  subject: 

Gonsegui  ser  premiado;  consegui  ser  elle  premiado. 
I    succeeded    in    getting    a  prize;    I  obtained   a    prize 
for  him. 

N.B. — In  the  latter  case  you  may  say:  consegui  que  elle 
fosse  premiado, 

§  142.  The  infinitive  pure  and  simple  is  employed 
in  final  clauses  after  the  verbs  ir  and  vir;  the  subjects 
of  these  verbs  and  of  the  infinitive  are  the  same: 

Fui  procurd-lo  I  went  to  call  on  him.  Veio  ver-me  he 
came  to  see  me.  Indo  encontrd-lo  a  dormi'r  ...  to  find  him 
asleep.  Ir  ter  or  vir  ter  (com)  =  to  turn  to,  to  call  on,  to 
fall  in  (with).  Esta  rua  vae  ter  d  ponte.  Fui  ter  com  elle; 
veio  ter  comigo. 

§  143.  The  expression  ndo  fazer  sendo  is  equally 
followed  by  the  infinitive  pure  and  simple: 

Ndo  faz  sendo  brincar   he   does  not  do  anything  but 
play. 


The  Infinitive.     .  377 

§  144.  The  pure  infinitive  follows  as  an  accusative 
complement  the  verbs  ser^  ter  por  origem^  dar  em  re- 
sidtadOy  ter  por  consequencia^  haver  por  galardao  (^=  to 
get  as  a  prize)  and  those  analogous  [N.B.  here  in  its 
personal  form],  as  also  the  verb  fazer  in  its  meaning 
"to  cause."     Ex.: 

Isto  deu  em  resultado  serem  tddos  castigados. 

The  result  of  it  was  that  all  of  them  were  punished. 

Se  hrincares  com  o  lume^   terd   isso  por   consequencia 

qtieimares-te. 
If  you  play  with  the  fire,  the  consequence  will  be  your 

burning  yourself. 
Tdo  grande  e  a  sua  desgraga  que  faz  cJiorar  as  pedras. 
So  great  is  her  misfortune  that  it  causes  the  stones  to 

weep. 

§  145.  Without  any  preposition  or  with  de  the  in- 
finitive follows  the  verbs  dever  (=  must,  ought)  and 
dignar-se  (to  deign,  to  be  pleased).     Ex.:  ~ 

Elles  deviam  (de)  contentar-se. 

They  ought  to  be  satisfied. 

Dignae-vos,  senhor,  (de)  ouvir  o  vosso  servo. 

Be  pleased,  0  Lord,  to  hear  thy  servant. 

§  146.  The  pure  infinitive  (subject)  follows  certain 
adjectives  and  substantives  employed  as  a  predicate 
(see  §  123),  such  as:  precise,  fdcil,  claro,  difficil,  jusfOy 
possively  horn,  melhor,  vergonha^  Idstima  etc. — e.g.:  e  fdcU, 
foi  precise,  sera  melher  sdir  (but  cf.  §  148,  3,  N.B.  Ill), 
as  also  the  impersonal  verbs,  such  as: 

importa  it  is  important  custa-me  it  is  painful  to  me 

convem  it  is  convenient  ndo  custa  nada  it  is  not  diffi- 

cult. 

§  147.     The  pure  infinitive  is  employed  after  some  . 
prepositions,  such  as: 

por  (e.g.:  ndo  saiu  por  ndo  ter  que  vestir  he  did  not 
go  out,  because  he  had  nothing  to  put  on). 

sem  (e.g. :  sem  pestanejar  without  twinkling). 

para  (e.g. :  para  ndo  o  melindrar  that  I  may  or  might 
not  offend  him  .  .  .) 

.  .  .  'para  elle  me  dizer  that  he  may  or  might  tell  me. 


378  Lesson  26. 

69.  Thema. 

On  the  Education  of  Children. 

There  will  be  no  lack  of  those  who  will  laugh  on  hearing 
speak  of  education  of  a  child  only  three  or  four  years  old. 
Nothing,  however,  (is)  more  serious  and  necessary  than  to 
understand  how  to  profit  by  the  sincerity  of  this  age,  which 
does  not  yet  know  how  to  lie,  in  order  to  recognise  the  future 
man  in  the  child. 

It  offers  the  best  opportunity  for  improving  all  good 
qualities  of  character — yea,  even  to  make  the  best  of  its 
defects,  to  change  them  into  virtues,  without  twisting  the  will 
or  wronging  the  individuality.  From  the  infant-school,  where 
the  mother  had  placed  the  child,  because  (see  §  147),  it 
was  impossible  to  have  it  at  home  from  its  third  (tr. :  since 
the  third)  year,  it  passes  over  to  attend  the  public  schools. 
It  has  its  compendiums  which  speak  {a  with  inf.)  to  it  of  things 
that  it  had  not  the  slightest  idea  of.  Each  step  is  a  diffi- 
culty (see  §  147)  to  be  vanquished ;  each  matter  a  novelty  the 
meaning  of  which  the  teacher,  amongst  so  many  pupils  requir- 
ing his  attention,  has  had  no  time  to  explain  to  it.  With 
tears  in  its  eyes  and  the  book  in  its  hands,  the  child  will 
seek  her  whom  it  loves  best,  that  she  may  (see  §  147)  ex- 
plain to  it  what  it  cannot  understand.  And  the  poor  mother 
will  not  be  able  to  help  it,  but  will  have  to  confess  her  igno- 
rance. How  often  when  finding  the  child  nodding  over  a  book 
which  it  does  not  understand,  would  not  the  mother  have 
the  wish  to  take  it  out  of  its  hands  and  by  clear  reading 
and  intelligent  explanation  teach  it  how  to  understand  the 
meaning!  But  the  "poor  mother"  cannot  do  so  (fut.),  because 
she  also  does  not  know.  And  from  day  to  day  the  conviction 
of  its  mother's  inferiority  will  take  root  in  the  child's  mind 
in  the  same  measure  as  it  acquires  (see  §  148,  2)  knowledge 
and  develops  its  intelligence. 

(Anna  de  Castro  Osorio:  As  nttdheres  portuguesas). 

60.  Leitura  e  versao. 

A  ^ignordncia*  do  povo  portugues. 

Ninguem  de  boa-f^  contesta  ser  o  povo  portugufis  igno- 
rante.  Todavia  nao  devemos  exaggerar  as  consequfincias  so- 
ciaes  d'este  facto,  mfismo  porque  nao  acredite  o  senhor  F.  que 
o  pOvo  francos  saiba  chlmica,  o  povo  inglfis  resolva  equacjoes 
e  0  povo  allemao  discorra  sobre  metaphysica.  Se  o  cuida,' 
illude-se  completamente ;  e  de  saber  ler  e  escrever,  e  certo 
que  esse  6  meio  caminho  andado  para  o  p6vo  adquirir  a  ver- 


The  Infinitive.  379 

dade,  mas  e  tambem  meio  caminho  andado  para  a  turba  se 
imbuir  de  quanta  mentirola  e  de  quanta  prot^rvia  goza  do 
hoje  commum  privilegio  da  letra  redonda.  A  ignorancia  e 
mal,  mas  a  meia-sci6ncia  e  peor;  e,  nas  condi^oes  genericas  so- 
ciaes  actuaes,  nunca  o  povo  pode  attingir  a  plenitude  do  saber. 
NSo  tern  tempo  para  estudar,  nem  vagar  nem  disposi^ao  nas 
horas  livres  que  Ihe  restam,  desde  que  sa(h)e  moido  do  seu 
trabalho  exhaustivo.  —  Assim,  f6r9a  Ihe  6  recorrer  aos  e  con- 
fiar  nos  profissionaes ;  confiar  nos  lettrados,  nos  publicistas  e 
nos  politicos  ...  A  independencia  do  espirito  seguira  tambem 
08  trdmites  de  sens  progressos.  Conv^m  nao  desatender  ao 
facto  significativo  de  que  em  Portugal  o  registo  civil  tem  sido 
adoptado  de  prefer^ncia  pelo  proletariado  fabril,  e  6  de  notar 
o  avance  civilisatorio  da  nossa  gente  nas  artes  e  nas  indus- 
trias  .  .  ,  Por  o.  facto  de  o  pOvo  estar  desconfiado,  nao  se 
segue  que  elle  seja  insusceptivel  de  enthusiasmo  .  .  .  Por- 
tanto,  resumindo,  nao  me  pareceram  procedentes  aquellas  accu- 
sa^oes  verberadas  contra  o  povo  portugties  pelo  sr.  F.,  o  qual 
se  mostrou  desgostoso  a  ponto  de  dizer,  alto  e  bom  som,  que, 
emquanto  uns  nascem  para  ser  ricos  e  outros  para  ser  sdbios, 
elle  nasc6ra  para  levar  pancada  e  dar  pouca. 

(Bruno:  Os  modernos  publicistas  portugufises.) 


Twenty-seventh  Lesson. 

The  Infinitive  (continued). 

The  Dependent  Infinitive  (continued). 

B.    With  the  preceding  preposition  de  the  infinitive 
is  employed: 

§  148.     1.  After  substantives  to  which  it  is  a  com- 
plement (see  §  125). 

2.  After  many  verbs   of  which  it  forms   the  com- 
plement, such  as: 
acdbar  to  finish,   having  just      comegar,  principiar  to   begin 

done  deixar  to  forbear 

accusar  to  accuse  desculpar-se  to  excuse 

acertar  to  hit  encarregar(-se)  to  take   upon 

admirar-se  to  wonder  oneself 

advertir  to  inform  esquecerse  to  forget 

affligir-se  to  grieve  excusar-se  to  withdraw 

cUegrar-se  to  rejoice  fugir  (de  or  a)  to  fly  from 

cessar  to  cease  gabar-se  to  boast 


880  Lesson  27. 

gostar  to  like  provir  to  come  from 

haver  to  be  obliged  parar  to  stop 

impedir  to  hinder  qudxar-se  to  complain  of 

lembrar-se  to  remember  ter  de  to  be  obliged 

pedir  to  ask  trata-ae  the  question  is 

prometer  to  promise  vangloriar-se  to  boast. 

3.  After  adjectives,  also  followed  by  the  genitive, 
such  as: 

dvido  eager  digno  worthy 

cansado  tired  difficil  difficult 

capais  capable  fdcil  easy 

certo  sure  impaciente  impatient 

cidso,  ciumento  jealous  insacidvel  insatiable 

contente  satisfied  raro  rare 

descontente  dissatisfied  susceptivel  susceptible., 
desejdso  desirous 

N.B.  1. — Some  adjectives,  expressing  cause  or  design,  may 
be  followed  by  the  infinitive  preceded  by  por; — e.g.:  impa- 
ciente, (des)contente,  causado  por  .  .  . 

N.B.  2. — Some  infinitives  preceded  by  demay  be  employed 
in  the  meaning  of  an  adjective  ending  by  -vel; — e.g.:  Pare- 
dam  menos  de  temer  (=  temivel),  E'de  presumir  (=  presu- 
mivel).     Foi  acgao  muito  de  louvar  (=  louvdvel). 

N.B.  3.— Certain  adjectives  (as /Jici?,  diificil,  raro),  when 
adverbially  employed,  are  followed  by  the  infinitive  preceded 
by  de,  the  substantive  determined  by  the  adjective  being  the 
object  of  the  infinitive;— e.g.: 

Enigmas  difficeis  de  decifrar  (=  de  serem  dedfrados) 
riddles  difficult  to  be  guessed. 

Compare,  however:  com  esta  natureza  e  fdcil  crearem-se 
OS  poHas  —  here  fdcil  is  a  predicate. 

N.B.  4.— In  some  cases  the  infinitive  thus  employed  is 
still  followed  by  a  complement:  sao  fructos  de  enlevar  olhos 
fruits  to  gladden  the  eyes. 

Eram  lindas  de  fazer  inveja  they  were  so  beautiful  as 
to  cause  envy. 

4.  In  clauses  of  circumstance  after  certain  pre- 
positions coujunctionally  employed: 

alSm  de  besides  antes  de  before 

afim  de  that  a  ponto  de  so  that 

d  fdrga  de  with  much  apesar  de  in  spite  of 


The  Infinitive.  381 

depois  de  after  perto  de  near  to 

em  vez  de  instead  of  por  falta  de  by  want  of 

longe  de  far  from  sob  condigao  de   on  condition 

tliat. 
Cotno  0  sr.  Theophilo  Braga  alem  de  haver  classificado 
em  generos  poeticos  as  composigoes  incluidas  no  Campo 
de  Flores  —  as  classificou  tamhem  por  epocas  chro- 
noUyicas  .  .  . 

5.  After  e— e.g.: 
J^  de  crer  (advertir,  mencionar  etc.^  que  .  .  . 

61.  Thema. 
Dear  Friend,— 

Weary  of  travelling,  I  have  just  come  back  to  my  Penates 
(recolher  a  Penates),  dissatisfied  with  myself  for  having  stayed 
away  for  so  many  months  that  I  ought  to  have  been  more 
profitably  employed.  Yet  such  is  our  nature.  We  pine  for 
the  opportunity  to  scamper  through  the  world,  with  an  in- 
satiable appetite  for  seeking  excitements  we  feel  to  be  lacking 
in  the  cramped  surroundings  of  our  home.  And  we  go  to 
find— what?  A  climate  that  does  not  agree  (dizer)  with 
our  nervous  system,  nor  with  our  northern  customs;  a  bed 
fit  only  to  break  oar  bones,  after  having  tired  them  by  con- 
tinual walking;  people  as  indifferent  to  our  presence  as  we  are 
insensible  to  their  company;  a  hotel  room  destitute  of  every- 
thing that  hitherto  seemed  impossible  to  be  done  without.  Only 
in  our  home  have  we  the  opportunity  of  enjoying  the  calm 
and  the  happiness  that  we  vainly  seek  away  from  its  doors. 

But  you  will  be  surprised,  dear  friend,  to  hear  thus 
speak  a  man  who,  although  having  already  finished  his  thirty- 
seventh  year,  yet  remains  a  bachelor.  I  know,  of  course, 
that  you  consider  me  a  theorist  whose  theories  are  all  the 
more  difficult  to  understand,  the  longer  he  is  in  bringing 
about  their  realisation.  But  I  am  determined  to  go  on 
theorising.  It  has  occurred  to  me  to  invite  you,  my  good 
friend,  to  come  here  and  stay  some  time  with  me,  instead  of 
going  to  Italy.  Also  I  hope  you  will  bring  your  family.  We 
shall  pass  a  couple  of  weeks  so  agreeably  that  they  will  com- 
pensate me  for  all  the  vicissitudes  of  my  travels,  and  I  am 
confident  that  you  will  have  no  cause  to  regret  having  ac- 
cepted my  invitation.  Don't  delay  in  letting  me  know  that 
you  will  come,  and  at  the  same  time  tell  me  the  day  and 
hour  I  may  expect  you.    I  am  longing  to  see  you  here. 

Please  remember  me  to  your  family. 

Your  sincere  friend, 
Henry. 


382  Lesson  28. 

62.  Leitnra  e  versao. 
A  respiragao. 

0  horaem  precisa  respirar  para  viver. 

Vamos  estudar  no  seguinte  as  vias  da  respiragao. 

Todo  0  sangue  do  corpo,  depois  de  circular  por  este, 
volta  pelas  veias  ao  cora^ao,  donde  torna  a  partir,  saindo  do 
coraQao  pelas  art^rias.  No  sen  giro  pelo  corpo,  o  sangue  vae 
deixando  por  este  a  sua  substancia.  A  substancia  e  dada  ao 
sangue  pelos  alimentos  e  tanabem  pelo  ar.  0  ar  entra  pela 
b6ca  e  pelo  nariz  e  vae  aos  pulmoes.  0  sangue,  depois  de 
percorrer  o  c6rpo  do  homem,  e  de  deixar  n'este  a  sua  sub- 
stancia, passa  pelos  pulmoes  onde  recebe  mais  ar.  0  ar  que 
ahi  recebe  torna  a  dar  ao  sangue  substancia,  para  este  a  es- 
palhar  outra  vez  por  todas  as  partes  do  nosso  organismo. 

0  sangue  quando  chega  aos  pulmoes  vae  quasi  escuro. 
Quando  sae  dos  pulmoes,  depois  de  ser  ahi  bafejado  pelo  ar, 
torna  a  ser  vermelho-claro,  isto  ^,  torna  a  carregar-se  de  sub- 
stancia para  ir  espalhar  pelo  corpo.  0  sangue  nao  para  de 
circular.  Se  parasse,  o  homem  morria.  Como  6  o  cora9ao  que 
faz  andar  o  sangue  dentro  dos  canaes,  se  o  cora9ao  deixasse  de 
bater,  o  sangue  deixava  de  andar,  e  sobrevinha  a  morte. 

0  ar,  depois  de  entrar  pela  boca  e  pelo  nariz,  vae  em  seguida 
passar  para  o  tubo  da  garganta  chamado  larynge;  e  como  este 
tubo  6  continuado  por  outro  chamado  trachea,  o  ar  segue  pela 
trachea  e  chega  aos  pulmoes.  Como  os  pulmoes  sao  dois,  a 
trachea  divide-se  na  raiz  da  garganta  em  dois  ramos,  cada  um 
dos  quaes  vae  dar  a  seu  pulmao.  Esses  dois  ramos  em  que 
a  trachea  se  reparte,  chamam-se  bronchios,  e  estes  penetram 
pelos  pulmoes :  —  penetrando,  o  ar  que  vae  dentro  d'elles,  en- 
contra-se  com  o  sangue  nos  pulmoes  e  a^i  o  bafeja.  Bafejado, 
0  sangue  torna  a  ficar  vermelho,  porque  o  ar  transmittiu-lhe 
parte  dos  sens  elementos,  os  quaes  elle  vae  em  seguida  espa- 
lhar pelo  corpo,  para  o  medrar  e  dar-lhe  vida. 

(Trindade  Coelho:    Terceiro  Livro  de  Leitura.) 


Twenty-eighth  Lesson. 

The  Infinitive  (continued). 
The  Dependent  Inflnitiye  (continued). 
C.    With  the  preceding  preposition  a. 
§  149.     The  infinitive  preceded  by  a  expresses: 
1.  When  following  a  verb,   the  manner  or  some 
circumstance  of  its  action: 


The  Infinitive.  388 

Viemos  a  correr  we  came  running. 
Diss^  isso  a  rir  he  said  so  laughing. 
Pediu-m'o  a  chorar  he  asked  me  crying  for  it. 
Deteve-se  a  examinar  um  q%iadro  he  stopped  to  examine 

a  picture. 
Encontrei-a  a  dormir  I  found  her  asleep. 

2.  When    following   a   substantive,   a   design,    the 
object  of  which  is  the  same  substantive — e.g.: 

Havia  grandes  difficuldades  a  veneer  there  were  great 

difficulties  to  be  overcome. 
Ha  muitas  pequenas  industrias  caseiras   a  cultivar  e  a 

fazer  resurgir  no  nosso  pais  there  are  a  great  many 

small    home-made    industries   in    our   country   to  be 

cultivated  and  revived. 
N.B.— Sometimes  the  infinitive  joined   by  a  or  de  to  a 
verb  is  equivalent  to  a  verbal  adjective  and  must  be  render- 
ed by  the  past  participle: 

Uma  occasiuo  a  ndo  perder  an  occasion  not  to  be  lost. 

0  caminho  a  trilhar  the  way  to  be  taken. 

E'uma  fonte  de  receita  muito  de  aproveitar  it  is  a  source 

of  income  very  much  to  be  profited  by. 

3.  In  abbreviated  clauses  the  infinitive  preceded  by 
a  serves  to  express  an  admission  or  condition: 

A  ser  isto  verdade  (=  se  isto  fosse  porventura  verdade) 
ndo  tornariamos  a  falar-lhe.  —  A  acreditd-lo  teria 
havido  uma  enchente. 

4.  The  infinitive  is  preceded  by  a  after  the  following 
verbs : 

animar-se  a  chegar  a  ser  .  .  . 

apparelhar-se  a  (or  para)  tornar  a  fazer 

anticipar-se  a  atrever-se  a 

estimular-se  a  preparar-se  a 

excitar-se  a  dbalangdr-se  a 

principiar  o*  langar-se  a 

comegar  a  see  (§  148,  2)  obrigar  a 

appressar-se  a  aventurar-se  a 

tardar  a  or  em  metter-se  a 

continuar  a  por-se  a 

habilitar  a  resolver-se  a 

aprender  a  decidir-se  a 

entrar  a  determinar-se  a 

habituar  a  annuir  a 

^  But,  principiar  or  comegar  par  (dizer)  to  begin  by  (saying). 


384  Lesson  28. 

concorrer  a  ajudar  a 

cooperar  a  entreter-se  a 

ensinar  a  attender-se  a 

autorisar  a  convidar  a 

€tccostumar-se  a  vir  a 

costumar  a  levar  a 

€onde(m)nar  a  arrojar  a 
comegar  a 

as  well  as  after  all  those  which  may  be  followed  instead 
by  an  abstract  noun  preceded  by  a— e.g.: 

Se  continuasses  (nao  tar  dosses,  prindpiasses,  entr  asses, 
te  appressasses,  tornasses,  te  abalangasses)  a  estudar ; 
chegarias  a  ser  insiruido.  AbaJangou-se  a  luctar  (=  d 
lucta) ;  resolveram-se  a  partir  (d  partida).  Quern  dd 
0  seu  antes  de  morrer,  apparelha-se  a  hem  soffrer. 

5.  The  infinitive  preceded  by  a  follows  the  verbs 
of  movement: 

Corri  a  salvo-lo  I  hurried  to  save  him. 

Arrojou-se  a  deter  o  cavdllo  he  rushed  to  stop  the  horse. 

IJ.B. — Cf.  the  verbs  ir  and  vir  which,  being  employed 
as  auxiliary  verbs  of  the  periphrastical  form,  may  be  followed 
by  the  gerund  instead  (see  §  96  and  §  142 :  use  of  these 
verbs  with  the  pure  infinitive). 

6.  The  infinitive  preceded  by  a  after  the  verbs 
estar  and  andar,  equally  auxiliary  verbs  of  the  peri- 
phrastical conjugation,  as  well  as  iicar^  passar,  etc.  in- 
dicates essentially  manner  or  duration  and  may  be 
supphed  by  the  gerund  (see  §  151): 

Ando  a  estudar  or  ando  estudando. 
Estas  coisas  ficam  a  pertencer  or  ficam  pertencendo  ao 
seu  foro  intimo. 

7.  The  infinitive  preceded  by  a  follows  the  verbs 
ensinar,  autorisar,  convidar,  etc.,  being  itself  followed  by 
the  direct  object: 

Ensinou  o  coo  a  faeer  habilidades  he  taught  the  dog  to 

perform  tricks. 
Convidou-a  a  dangar  he  invited  her  to  dance. 
Autorisou-me  a  publicar  as  cartas  he  authorised  me  to 

publish  the  letters. 

8.  In  an  analogous  way  the  infinitive  with  a  joins 
the  verb  dar,  expressing,  however,  an  action  practised 


The  Infinitive.  385 

by  the  dative  complement  of  dar;  and  the  verb  por, 
expressing  the  action  practised  by  the  accusative  com- 
plement of  por. 

Dar  a  alguem  vma  coisa  a  provar  (alguem  is  dative 
complement  of  dar  and  subject  of  provar). 

Por  OS  fUhos  a  estudar  (os  filhos  is  accusative  comple- 
ment of  por  and  subject  of  estudar). 

§  149.  The  infinitive  may  not  only  be  preceded 
by  a  or  de^  but  by  any  other  preposition  (em,  par,  para, 
com^  sem,  antes  de,  depots  de,  apesar  de,  nao  obstante 
etc.),  having  the  same  meaning  as  abstract  nouns, 
governed  by  these  prepositions — e.g.: 

Beconsiderou  depots  de  ter  falado  aos  paes  e  antes  de  se 
comprometer  .  .  . 

He  changed  his  mind  after  having  spoken  to  his  parents 
and  before  engaging  himself. 

Entrei  sem  me  verem  I  entered  without  being  seen. 

Pedi-lhe  para  me  acompanhar  I  asked  him  to  accom- 
pany me. 

Ella  estava  aborrecida  por  nao  saber  como  (or  em  que) 
empregar  o  tempo. 

She  felt  bored^  as  she  did  not  know  how  to  spend  her  time. 

Beixdmo-nos  ficar  por  jd  ndo  haver  tempo  de  alcangar 
0  comboio. 

We  stayed  because  there  was  not  time  to  catch  the 
train. 

Com  ser  velho  ndo  deixa  de  sentir  com  a  gente  moga. 

Though  he  be  old,  he  is  able  to  feel  with  young  people. 

Andamos  (or  estdmos)  mortos  por  ir  para  fdra. 

We  are  dying  to  go  abroad. 

§  150.  After  the  verbs  consistir,  insistir,  perseverar, 
persistir,  teimar,  porfiar,  hesitar,  tardar,  attentar,  confiar 
and  those  analogous  the  following  infinitive  is  preceded 
by  em. 

Persistem  (or  teimam)  em  resistir  they  persist  in  resisting. 
Hesitei  em  confiar  n'elle  I  hesitated  to  trust  him. 

§  151.  The  infinitive  is  employed  for  the  English 
gerund  and  to  shorten  circumstantial  clauses: 

(a)  The  verbs  perdoar  and  agradecer  are  followed 
by  the  personal  infinitive  without  preposition,  and  not 
by  a  dependent  clause  with  que: 

Portuguese  Couveraation-Grammar.  26 


386  Lesson  28. 

PerdooU'lhes  o  haver  em-no  offendido  he  pardoned  them 

their  having  offended  him. 
Agradecerem-nos  o  te-los  protegido  they  thanked  us   for 

(our)  having  protected  them. 

N.B.— The  same  is  to-be  said    of  the    impersonal  verb 
haver  ]~Q.g.: 

Ndo  ha  (=  ndo  e  possivel)   vdLer-lhe   there   is    no   ex- 
celling him. 

(b)  The  subject  being  the  same  in   the  principal 
and  the  dependent  clause: 


instead  of  a  personal  form 
with  the  conjunctions: 
afim  de  que 
para  que 
sent  que 
antes  que 
depois  que 

de  modo  (fdrma,  maneira)  que 
por  que 


the  infinitive  is  employed 
after : 
afim  de 
para 
sent 

antes  de 
depois  de 

de  modo  (fdrma,   maneira)  a 
por. 


N.B.— So  it  would  be  wrong  to  say:  Cultivar  a  terra 
de  maneira  a  produsir,  as  terra  in  the  first  clause  is  the 
complement :  cultivar  a  terra  de  maneira  que  produza  would  be 
right. 

§  152.  Instead  of  a  dependent  clause  with  que 
the  personal  infinitive  without  preposition  may  be 
employed  after  those  transitive  verbs  expressing  ad- 
mission, permission,  suffering  and  those  of  opposite 
meaning,  such  as :  conceder,  permit(t)ir,  adm,it(t)ir,  prohibir, 
sof(f)rer,  tolerar  etc.: 

Frohibiu  entrarem  os  navios  de  noite  (instead  of:  pro- 
hibiu  que  os  navios  entrassem  he  prohibited  the  ships 
coming  in  at  night. 

63.  Thema. 

Women  as  Silkworm-breeders  in  Portugal. 

If  at  some  not  very  distant  date  the  industry  of  silk 
manufacture  in  Portugal  should  happen  to  be  revived,  it  will 
be  due  to  the  initiative  of  Mrs.  Anna  de  Castro  Osdrio,  the 
excellent  writer,  who  is  always  eager  to  see  her  country 
prosperous:  Her  idea  is  at  the  same  time  to  provide  working 
women  with  better  facilities  for  gaining  a  livelihood,  an  object 
which  the  promoter  of  this  industry  never  fails  to  keep  in  mind 


Construction.  387 

This  lady  has  recently  explained  to  the  president  and 
other  aldermen  of  the  municipal  council  of  Setiibal  how  she 
was  led  to  conceive  the  idea  referred  to,  and  has  requested 
the  assistance  and  protection  of  the  council.  She  does  not 
deny  that  there  are  some  difficulties,  but  she  affirms  that  the 
obstacles  are  not  great,  and  hopes  to  overcome  them  with  the 
aid  of  the  authorities. 

She  is  of  opinion  that  the  industry  of  the  sericulture 
(i.e.  of  the  breeding  and  selection  of  silk-worms)  is  one  that 
the  women  of  Portugal  must  not  allow  to  die  out.  With 
five  weeks'  work  of  so  slight  a  nature  that  it  is  rather  a 
pleasant  distraction  than  an  irksome  task,  each  housewife  or 
daughter  could  realise  a  profit  which  to  the  one  would  provide 
assistance  towards  the  house -rent,  and  to  the  other  additional 
funds  for  increasing  the  stock  of  clothing.  To  the  young 
ladies  this  latter  is  generally  a  matter  of  great  importance; 
and  with  some  reason,  indeed,  for  their  greatest  concern  is 
how  to  make  themselves  appear  most  beautiful  and  attractive. 
The  beauty  of  women  is  a  tribute  to  Art  and  Nature  which 
a  cultured  people  should  not  allow  to  depreciate. 

64.  Leitura  e  versao. 

A  mulher  portuguesa  como  seri(Gi)cuU6ra. 

Se  esta  indiistria  se  desenvolver  em  Setiibal,  como  6  de 
esperar,  como  indiistria  caseira  que  deve  ser,  ali  mesmo  sera 
montado  um  filatorio  dos  que  o  governo  vae  montar  official- 
men  te.  N'esse  filatorio  terao  trabalho  algumas  mulheres,  o 
que  vem  a  ser  ainda  uma  grande  vantagem,  visto  as  fabricas 
de  sardinha  em  que  andam  a  trabalhar,  sofFrerem  ja  muitas 
crises  de  falta  de  peixe  e  as  operarias  sentirem  a  falta  de 
trabalho,  que  6  a  mais  dolorosa  das  faltas.  Todos  aquelles 
que  desejarem  experimentar  esta  indiistria,  deverao  dirigir-se 
a  presidente  da  Liga  Eepublicana  das  Mulheres  Portugu6sas, 
a  acima  mencionada  escriptora  e  propagandista  D.  Anna  de 
Castro  Osorio;  porque  a  iniciativa  pertence  a  esta  benemerita 
associa9ao  que  por  todo  o  pais  esta  levantando  (or  a  levantar) 
0  espirito  da  mulher  portugu6sa  e  fazendo-a  entrar  no  caminho 
do  dever,  apontando-lhe  o  trabalho  como  a  linica  fonte  da 
independencia  e  do  brio  individual. 

Do  norte  ao  sul  do  pais  muitas  socias  da  Liga  se  estao 
preparando  (m'  a  preparar)  para  iniciarem  nas  suas  casas  esta 
indiistria.  0  que  e  necessario  e  saber  cada  uma  a  por^ao  de 
sirgo  que  podo  criar  para  se  fazer  a  dictribui9ao  das  f6lhas 
das  amoreiras  cedidas  pela  Camara  e  tomarem  os  criadores  as 
respcnsabilidades    exigidas    pelas    esta^oes   officiaes,    sendo   a 

25» 


388  Lesson  29. 

principal  a  de  se  compromet(t)erem  a  destruir  toda  a  semente 
que  nao  seja  seleccionada,  isto  e :  a  escolhida  e  fornecida  pela 
esta^ao  official.  0  intelligente  professor  da  Escola  Liberal  de 
Setubal  de  boa  vontade  se  presta  a  fazer  na  escola  uma  cri- 
a9ao  de  experiencia,  cujo  product©  revertera  a  favor  da  m6sma, 
que  tanto  necessita  de  numerario  para  se  poder  sustentar  e 
poder  continuar  a  exercer  a  sua  missao. 


Twenty-ninth  Lesson. 

Construction.     Collocagao. 

§  153.  The  simplest  construction  is:  beginning  by 
the  subject  and  what  relates  thereto;  then  the  predi- 
cate and  its  extensions;  the  determinative  follows  the 
word  it  determines  (e.g.:  desejoso  de  gloria);  the  ac- 
cusative complement  generally  precedes  the  dative. 

Interrogative  clauses  begin  with  the  interrogative 
word — i.e.,  the  thing  asked  for— and  what  pertains  to 
it;  the  dependent  clauses  by  the  conjunction  or  a  rela- 
tive pronoun — e.g.: 

Sdo  altas  as  drvores  que  ha  no  jar  dim?     (The   height 
of  the  trees  is  asked  for.) 

§  154.  These  general  rules  have  numerous  ex- 
ceptions, based  on  the  harmony  of  the  speech  or  the 
emphasis  bestowed  on  one  or  the  other  part  of  it.  In 
the  preceding  lessons  these  exceptions,  as  well  as  those 
rules  of  construction  inseparable  from  the  subject  spoken 
of,  have  been  mentioned. 

It  may  still  be  noticed  that  an  absolutely  employed 
participle  precedes  its  noun.     Ex.: 

Arrancada  uma   batateira,  o  pe  traz  agar r ados   vdrias 

batatas. 
If  a   potato-plant  is  pulled   out,  its  root  bears   various 

potatoes  clinging  to  it. 

Yet  when  the  participle  is  preceded  by  em,  the 
subject  may  be  placed  before: 

Em  a  mina  rebentando  or  em  rebentando  a  mina. 
BemarJc. — Though    the    gerund   generally    precedes    the 
nouU;  it  may  in  elevated  speech  also  be  placed  behind;— e.g.: 
A  revoluQoo  abriu  as  portas  da  histdria,  ap(p)elando  para 
0  povOf  fechou-as,  para  o  povo  ap(p)elando. 


Construction.  389 

65.  Thema. 

Preparation  of  Olive-oil. 

Olive-oil  is  extracted  from  the  olive,  which  is  the  fruit 
of  the  olive-tree.  In  some  regions  the  olive  is  beaten  down 
with  a  pole  (=  varejar);  in  others,  it  is  picked  by  hand. 
After  having  been  picked,  the  olive  goes  to  the  olive-pit, 
where  it  remains  for  some  time.  While  it  is  still  in  the  pit, 
the  olive  secretes  (==  escorrer)  a  watery  fluid  (uma  agtta- 
dilha),  dark  and  bitter,  called  olive-water  (alpixe).  From  the 
pit  the  olive  is  taken  to  the  olive -crushing  mill,  which  is  a 
sort  of  round  stone  tank  in  which  one,  two  or  three  vertical 
wheels,  equally  of  stone,  are  moving,  generally  dragged  by 
an  ox. 

In  the  crushing-mill  the  olive  is  crushed.  The  pulp  as  well 
as  the  stone  of  the  olive  is  completely  ground  (—  desfazer) 
forming  a  dark  paste.  On  the  surface  of  this  paste,  when  still 
in  the  mill,  a  great  quantity  of  oil  appears.  This  oil,  con- 
stituting the  first  virgin  oil,  may  be  taken  off  (=  recolher-se). 
From  the  mill,  the  paste  is  taken  in  wooden  porringers 
to  the  olive-press  (lar  or  lastro  de  lagar).  In  the  press  the 
paste  is  put  into  baskets  (=  ceira),  disposed  one  above  the 
other.  Upon  the  topmost  basket  are  placed  some  blocks 
(=  madeiro)  and  then  is  lowered  (=  fazer  haixar)  upon  the 
latter  the  so-called  cross-bar  of  the  press  (viga  do  lagar) , 
which  descends  by  means  of  an  axle-tree  in  a  spiral  line  or 
in  form  of  a  screw  (=  fuss).  This  screw  of  the  olive-press 
ends  in  its  lower  extremity  by  a  big  stone  weight.  In  pro- 
portion to  its  coming  down,  the  cross-bar  presses  (periphra- 
stical  form)  upon  the  blocks  which  cover  the  baskets  and 
squeezes  the  paste  contained  in  them*. 

66.  Leitnra  e  versao. 

Assim  espremida,  a  massa  larga  um  liquido.  Este  liquido 
^  ainda  azeite  virgem  que,  seguindo  por  umg,  calha  ou  sulco 
aberto  no  lar,  vae  cair  dentro  de  uma  talha  de  pedra.  Ao 
lado  d'esta  talha  ha  outra  tambem  de  pedra,  e  as  duas  sSo 
ligadas  superiormente  por  um  sulco  ou  r6go;  mas  o  azeite 
virgem  fica  todo  na  talha  que  esta  em  communica9ao  directa 
com  o  lar.  Em  seguida,  faz-se  elevar  a  viga  do  lagar,  e  as 
ceirag  ficam  d'este  modo  desapertadas.  Desapertadas  as 
ceiras,  a  massa  de  cada  uma  ^  caldeada,  isto  6,  intimamente 
misturada  com  agua  a  f^ver.  Caldeadas  todas  as  ceiras,  de 
novo  tornam  a  ser  espremidas  como  o  fSram  da  primeira  vez. 
Espremidas,    o   liquido  que   ellas  largam  segue  pela  calha  do 


390  Lesson  29. 

lar  para  a  primeira  talha,  onde  encontra  o  azeite  virgem  que 
a  massa  escorreu  quando  foi  apertada  a  primeira  vez. 

Com  0  azeite  proveniente  do  segundo  aperto  das  ceiras 
vae  misturada  uma  por9ao  de  agua,  que  e  a  agua  que  caldeou 
a  massa;  e  como  o  azeite  vem  sempre  d  tona  da  agua,  o  11- 
quido  logo  que  cae  na  talha  reparte-se  em  duas  camadas:  em 
baixo  a  agua,  a  qual  se  chama  alpixe ;  e  em  cima  ou  a  tona 
do  alpixe,  o  azeite.  Entre  o  azeite  e  o  alpixe  ficam  as  borras 
do  azeite.  — 

As  borras  sao  as  fezes  do  azeite,  e  v5o-se  formando  na 
primeira  talha,  entre  o  fundo  do  azeite  e  o  cimo  do  alpixe. 
A  medida  que  o  azeite  se  vae  escoando  para  a  segunda  talha, 
as  borras  vao  subindo  na  primeira;  e  tomariam  para  a  se- 
gunda, se  0  lagareiro  nao  tivesse  o  cuidado  de  as  fazer  depo- 
sitary isto  e,  de  as  fazer  baixar  ao  fundo  da  primeira  talha.  — 
Depois  de  bem  assentes,  as  borras  ainda  apresentam  a  super- 
ficie  uma  certa  quantidade  de  azeite,  embora  impure.  Este 
^zeite  das  borras  e  aproveitado:  serve  para  a  candeia;  para 
untar  os  eixos  dos  carros;  e  para  varios  fins  industriaes:  fa- 
brico  de  sabao  etc. 

Depois  de  completamente  espremidas  as  ceiras,  o  que  fica 
dentro  6  o  baga^o.  0  baga^o  6  o  residue  da  pelle  e  do  ca- 
roQO  das  azeitonas.  0  baga^o  da  azeitona  serve  para  alimen- 
ta(jao  dos  porcos  e  das  gallinhas,  e  ainda  de  combustivel.  No 
proprio  lagar,  a  dgua  para  caldear  a  massa  6  tambem  aque- 
cida  com  lume  de  bagago.  Este  arde  muito  bem  per  ser  oleoso. 
Para  todas  estas  opera9oes  do  fabrico  do  azeite  ha  hoje  mecha- 
nismos  muito  perfeitos. 


891 


Supplement, 


Idioms. 


Sou    ingles.      F«    E<^  e   por- 


Sou,  sim,  senhor.  Para  um 
estrangeiro  F"  E*^  falla  ra- 
zoavelmente  o  portugues. 

Como  se  chama  isso?  Como 
se  diz  ,  .  .? 

Isso  ndo  se  pdde;  isso  ndo 
p6de  ser! 

Entdo  que  tem?  Ndo  estd  horn? 

Isso  passa;  ndo  S  nada. 
Ndo  passou  hem  a  noite  ?  Olhe, 

que  ndo  tem  hoa  ca?'a. 
Passei  a  noite  em  claro. 
Ndo  se  dd  hem  aqui?    Estra- 

nha  0  clima? 

Ndo  estranho,  ndo,  senhor.  Bou- 
rne hem  aqui. 

E  gosta  de  cd  estar  ? 

Gosto  muito.  Estou  mdrto  por 
vir  tdda  a  cidade,  tddo  o  pais. 

Onde  e  a  pardgem  mais  prdxi- 
ma  do  carro  electrico? 

Qual  e  0  caminho  mais  curto 
para  Id? 

Ndo  ha  pardgem  mais  perto  ? 

Julgava  que  houvesse  uma  im- 
mediata  ao  hotel. 


I    am    English.      Are    you    a 

Portuguese  ? 
Yes.  For  a  foreigner  you  speak 

Portuguese  rather  well. 

What  is  this  called  ?    How  do 

you  say  .  .  .  ? 
That  can't  be  (done)! 

What's  the  matter  with  you? 

Aren't  you  well? 
It  will  pass  over ;  it's  nothing. 
Didn't  you  sleep   well?    You 

do  not  look  well,  indeed. 
I  passed  the  night  awake. 
Don't   you    feel    well    here? 

Does  not  the  climate  agree 

with  you? 
It   is    not  that.     Indeed,  the 

climate  agrees  with  me. 
And  do  you  like  to  stay  here  ? 
I  do  indeed.     I  am  dying  to 

see   the    whole   town,    the 

whole  country. 
Where  is. the    next  stopping- 
place  of  the  electric  car? 
Which    is    the    nearest    way 

to  it? 
Is     there    no    stopping-place 

nearer  ? 
I    thought    there     was    one 

next  to  the  hotel. 


Supplement. 


AU  logo!  ate  breve!  ate  d  se- 

mana  (que  vem)  !  ate  d  proxi- 

ma  sexta-feira! 
Ndo  faltava  nada  que  eu  per- 

desse  o  combdio. 
Deixe  ver  isso! 
Jd  estd  de  caminho. 
Estou  com  pressa.' 
Jd  deram  onze  horas. 
Sao  horas  do  correio. 
0  co7nb6io  jd  nao  tarda;  estd 

a  chegar. 
Sa(h)iu-lhe  hem  a  empreza  ? 

Com  licenga!    A  vontade!  • 

Nao  faca  cerimonia! 

Eu  tinha  vergonha  de  Ihe  fallar. 

Nao  tem  troco  ? 

Nao  ha  remedio. 

Vamos  embora! 

Isso  e  conforme!    Depende! 

Estd  bem?     Que  Ihe  parece? 

Em  que  ficdmos? 

Segundo  o  meu  parecer  .  .  . 
Ha     alguem    que    procura    o 

senhor. 
Quern  me  procura  ? 
Diga  que  nao  estou. 

Espere     ahi!     Mande    entrar 

para  a  sala. 
Nao  fallemos  mats  nHsso! 

Jd  folia  menos  mal. 
Estou  constipado.  \ 

Apanhei  uma  constipagdo.       f 
Logo   que   eu  me  apanhar  no 

campo  .  .  . 
Em  que  Ihe  posso  eu  ser  agra- 

ddvel  ? 
Faga  favor  de  se  servir  do  meu 

limilado  prhtimo, 
Tudo  quando  puder  fazer^  serd 

com  todo  0  gosto. 


Good-bye  for  the  present  I 
Until  very  soon!  Until  next 
week!     Until    next  Friday! 

I  was  very  near  losing  the 
train. 

Let  me  see  that. 

He  is  already  on  the  way. 

I  am  in  a  hurry. 

It  has  already  struck  eleven. 

It  is  post-time. 

The  train  must  be  here  di- 
rectly. 

Did  you  succeed  in  your  en- 
terprise ? 

With  your  leave !  Be  pleased ! 

Don't  make  any  ceremony! 

I  was  shy  to  speak  to  him. 

Have  you  any  change  ? 

There  is  nothing  to  be  done. 

Let  us  go  away! 

That's  all  according!  That 
depends ! 

Is  it  well  so?  What  do  you. 
think  of  it? 

Where  did  we  stop?  What 
did  we  agree  upon? 

According  to  my  opinion  .  ,  . 

There  is  somebody  calling  on 
you. 

Who  is.  calling? 

Tell  him  that  I  am  not  at 
home. 

Just  wait!  Show  him  into 
the  drawing-room! 

Don't  let  us  speak  any  more 
of  that! 

You  speak  already  rather  well. 

I  have  caught  a  cold. 

As  soon  as  I  am  in  the  coun- 
try. 

In  what  may  I  be  agreeable  to 
you? 

Please  dispose  of  ray  modest 
services. 

All  I  can  do  will  be  done  with 
the  greatest  pleasure. 


Some  Portuguese  Proverbs. 


Some  Portuguese  Proverbs  equivalent  to 
English. 


Antes  so  que  mal  acompanhado. 
Com  taes  me  acho;  tal  me  fa^o. 

Chega-te  aos  hons,  serds  um 
delles:  chega-te  aos  maus, 
serds  peor  do  que  elles. 

Duro  com  dura,  ndo  faz  horn 
muro. 

Dd  Deus  0  frio  conforme  a 
roupa. 

Quem  primeiro  anda,  primeiro 
apanha. 

Hora  a  hora,  Deus  melhora.\ 

Atrds  de  tempo,  tempo  rem.  / 

Quem  porfia  mata  caga. 

A  cavallo  dado  ndo  se  the  olha 
0  dente. 

0  olho  do  amo  engorda  o  ca- 
vallo. 

Faze-me  as   harhas,   far-te-hei 

o  cahelo. 
Como  canta  o  db(b)ade,  assim 

responde  o  sachristdo. 
De  noite   d   candeia    a  hurra 

parece  donzella. 
Casa   rouhada    —    trancas   d 

porta, 
Tantas  vezes  vae  o  cdo  ao  moi- 

nho,  que   Id  Ihe  fica  o  fou- 

cinho. 
Malhar     no    ferro    emquanto 

estd  quenie. 
Qiicmdo  ha   vento,   molha-se  a 

vela. 
Emquanto    o  pdu   vae  e  vem, 

folgam  as  costas. 
Contenta-te,  gate,  que  farta  o 

farto. 
Filho  de  peixe  sabe  nadar. 


Better  alone  than  in  bad 
company. 

Birds  of  a  feather  flow  to- 
gether. 

Tell  me  whom  you  associate 
with  and  I  will  tell  you 
who  you  are. 

Hard  with  hard  never  made 
any  good  wall. 

Aptness  comes  with  the  office. 

First  come,  first  served. 


After  rain  comes  sunshine. 

Patience  overcomes  all  things. 
Look  not  a  gift  horse  in  the 

mouth. 
The   master's   eye  makes  the 

horse    fat    {or:    the    cattle 

thrive^. 
One  good   turn  deserves  an- 
other. 
The  young  pigs  grunt  like  th© 

old  sow. 
When  candles  are  out,  all  cats 

are  grey. 
To  lock  the  stable-door  when 

the  horse  is  stolen. 
The  pitcher  goes  so  often   to 

the  well  that  it  comes  home 

broken  at  last. 
To  strike  the  iron  while  it  is 

hot. 
To  make  hay   while  the  sun 

shines. 
When   the    cat  is    away,   the 

mice  will  play. 
Great  wealth,  great  weariness. 

What  is  bred  in  the  bone  will 
come  out  in  the  flesh. 


894 


Supplement. 


Pintura  e  peleja  de   longe  se 

vija. 
Filho  is,  pae  serds,  assim  como 

fizeres,  assim  achards. 
Ndo   ha    dgua  mats  perigosa 

que  a  que  ndo  soa. 
Santos  de  casa  ndo  fazem  mi- 

lagres. 

Prata  e  o  horn  fallar;    oiro  i 

0  bom  calar. 
0  seguro  morreu  de  velho. 
Mais  vale  um  *toma*  que  dois 

<^te  dareiy>. 
Quern   ndo  vae  d  gu&ra,   ndo 

morre  n'ella. 
Nem  todo  o  matto  i  ourSgdos.) 
Nem  tudo  o  que  luz  e  oiro.  \ 
Nem  tddo  o  hranco  S  farinha] 
Nem  zomhando,  nem   deveras, 

com  teu  amo  jogues  as  peras. 


Picture  and  battle  to  be  seen 

from  afar. 
Do  unto  others  as  you  would 

be  done  by. 
Still  waters  run  deep. 

A  prophet  is  not  without  ho- 
nour, save  in  his  own  coun- 
try and  in  his  own  house. 

Speech  is  silvern,  silence  is 
golden. 

Prevention  is  better  then  cure. 

A  bird  in  the  hand  is  worth 
two  in  the  bush. 

Who  plays  at  bowls  must  be 
prepared  for  rubbers. 

All  is  not  gold  that  glitters. 

Those  who  eat  cherries  with 
great  persons  ^will  have 
their  eyes  squirted  out  with 
the  stones. 


Short  Notes. 

1. 

Aos  Ex°io3  grg.  Conselheiro  A.  de  Lima  e  Ex^a-   Esposa, 

D.  Maria  Jose  Moreira  da  Silva 

e  0  Coronel  Nogueira  da  Silva  e  Mattos 

apresentam  os  seus  cumprimentos,  pedindo  a  honra  da  sua 
companhia  para  um  copo  de  agua  que,  na  occasi5o  do  casa- 
mento  de  sua  filha  D.  Beatriz  com  o  ex™®  Sr.  capitao  Antonio 
de  Lemos  e  depois  da  ceremonia,  se  offerece  na  4*  feira,  15  do 
corrente,  as  2  hs.  da  tarde  na  ma  dos  Bem-casados  No.  3. 

Lisb6a,  casa  de  V^s  Ex^,  8  de  maio.  • 

2.  Resposta 

(on  a  visiting-card). 

A  Ex™a  Sr»  D*  Maria  Jos6  Moreira  da   SilVa  e  111™°  e 

Ex™o.  Sr.  Coronel  N.  da  Silva  e  Mattos,   agradecendo  em  sen 

nome   e   no  de  sen    marido  a  insigne  honra   do  convite   de 


Short  Notes.  395 

D.  Eugenia  de  Lima 

apressa-se  em  partipar-lhes  que  Ihes  dara  a  maior   satisfa9ao 
poder  assistir  ao  auspiciOso  enlace  da  sua  Ex™*  Filha. 

3.  Outra  resposta. 

Cumprimentando  a  Ex™o  Sr.  Coronel  Nogueira  da  Silva  e 
Sua  Ex°i*  Esposa,  os  Condes  de  Valfldr  teem  o  maximo  pesar 
de  nao  poderem  assistir  a  tao  fausta  festividade,  visto  estarem 
de  lute  recente  por  uma  parenta  sua  muito  chegada.  Fa- 
zendo  os  mais  sinceros  votos  pela  felicidade  dos  Noivos  e  pe- 
dindo  a  V^s  Ex^^  acceitem  d6sde  ja  os  seus  cordiaes  parabens, 
pedem  desculpa  da  sua  nao-comparftneia. 

4. 

Men  illustre  Amigo: 

Por  este  pe^o  lien^a  para  Ihe  apresentar  o  meu  particular 
amigo,  Dr.  Fulano,  exi'mio  escriptor  e  deputado  da  na9ao,  cujo 
noma  nao  sera  de  todo  desconhecido  de  V*  Ex*.  Nao  precise 
dizer  que  as  atten96es  que  a  sua  generosidade  dispensar  ao  Dr.  F. 
tomar-me-hao  ainda  mais  seu  devedor.  Nunca  poderei  pagar 
nem  mfismo  agradecfir  bastante,  tantos  e  tao  immerecidos  fa- 
vores,  dos  quaes  ainda  assim  me  sinto  digno  pela  muito  dedi- 
cagao  que  Ihe  consagro  e  na  convic9ao  que  o  melhor  premio  da 
amizade  e:  acceitar-lhe  as  provas  com  a  mfisma  naturalidade 
como  sao  dadas. 

5. 

Meu  bom  Amigo, 

Caso  0  meu  Amigo  disponha  de  algum  memento  vago 
^manha  entre  uma  e  as  quatro  horas,  pe90  o  insigne  favor  de  vir 
falar-me  a  esta  sua  casa.  Trata-se  d'um  assumpto  urgente  e  que 
merecerd  todo  o  seu  interesse. 

6. 
Ex™o  Senhor  e  Amigo: 

Desconsolado  de  so  h6je  receber  o  seu  bilh6te  d'ante- 
*liontem,  por  ter  estado  ausente,  por  este  pe90  desculpa  de  nao 
ter  apparecido  ahi,  e  licen9a  de  poder  falar-lhe  hoje  a  qualquer 
bora  que  V'  Ex*  se  digne  determinar  e  que  mais  Ihe  convier. 


Supplement. 


Poetry  to  be  learnt  by  heart. 
Popular  Stanzas  of  Four  Yerses. 

«Amar  e  ser  amado,  que  ventura! 
Nao  amar,  sendo  amado,  e  um  triste  horror: 
Mas  na  vida  ha  uma  noite  mais  escura, 
E  amar  alguem  que  nao  nos  tenha  am6r!> 

(Gon^alves  Crespo.) 


Ja  nao  tenho  corapao, 
Que  m'o  tiraram  do  peito; 
No  logar  onde  elle  estava 
Nasceu  um  amor-perfeito. 

Tu  dizes  que  Bao  tens  cruz 
Para  resar  o  rosario; 
Casa-te, .  minha  menina, 
E  teras  cruz  e  calvario. 

0  dia  tern  duas  horas, 
Duas  horas,  nao  tern  mais: 
Uma  6  quando  vos  vejo, 
Outra,  quando  me  lembraes. 

Os  teus  olhos  sao  escuros  . 
Como  a  noite  mais  cerrada; 
Mas  apesar  de  tao  nfigros, 
Sem  elles  nao  vejo  nada. 

A  folhinda  do  salgueiro 
E  a  primeira  novidade; 
Quem  madraga  nao  alcan9a. 
Que  fara  quem  se  ergue  tarde  ? 

Ninguem  descubra  o  Seu  peito 
A  nenhama  amiga  sua; 
Quem  o  seu  peito  descobre 
Seu  segredo  deita  a  rua. 

Quem  6  pobre,  sempre  e  pobre 
Quem  6  pobre  nada  tern; 
Quem  §  rico,  sempre  6  nobre, 
E  as  v6zes  nSo  6  ninguem. 

A  qui  tens  meu  cora^ao, 
Fechadinho  com  tres  chaves; 
Abre-o,  mette-te  14  dentro 
Que  tu  sosinha  bem  cabes. 


Eu  nao  quero  nem  brincando 
Dizer  adeus  a  ninguem: 
Quem  vae^  leva  saudades, 
Quem  fica,  saudades  tem. 

Amorsinho  da  minh'alma, 
Ensina-me  a  tua  arte: 
Ensina-me  a  aborrecer-te, 
Que  eu  nao  sei  senao  amar-te. 

Se  OS  meus  olhos  te  incommo- 

dam, 
Quando  os  v^s  na  tua  frente, 
Manda  entao  que  m'os  arran- 

quem, 
Para  eu  te  amar  cegamente. 

Ando  triste  como  a  noite, 
Nada  me  alegra  o  sentido; 
Ninguem  sabe  o  bem  que  perde ; 
Senao  depois  de  perdido. 

Ai  quem  me  d^ra  ter  mSe, 
Inda  que  fosse  uma  silval 
Inda  que  ella  me   arranhasse, 
Sempre  eu  era  a  sua  filha. 

Ja  morreu  a  minha  mae, 
Ja  la  vae  minha  alegria; 
Caixinha  dos  meus  segredos, 
Espelho  donde  me  eu  via. 

Vae-te,  carta  venturosa, 
Ver  um  bem  que  Deus  me  deu; 
Antes  tu,  carta,  ficaras, 
No  ten  logar  fora  eu. 

Carta,  vae  onde  te  eu  mando. 
Que  uns  lindos  olhos  vaes  ver; 
Carta,  p6e-te  de  joelhos, 
Quando  te  forem  a  ler. 


Poems  of  Modern  Literature. 


397 


Aqui  estou  a  tua  porta, 
Como  0  feixinho  da  lenha, 
A  espera  da  resposta 
Que  dos  teus  olhos  me  venha. 


0  amor  e  o  respeito 
Nao  fazem  boa  uniao; 
Quando  amor  diz  que  sim, 
Diz  o  respeito  que  nao. 


Poems  of  Modern  Literature. 


0  corvo  e  a  raposa. 

E  fama  que  estava  o  corvo 
Sobre  uma  arvore  pousado 
E  que  no  s6frego  bico 
Tinha  um  queijo  atravessado 


A  taes  palavras  o  corvo 
Com  louca,  estranha  afouteza 
Por  mostrar  que  e  bom  solfista, 
Abre  o  bico  e  solta  a  pr6sa. 


Pelo  faro  aquelle  sitio 
Veiu  a  raposa  matreira, 
A  qual,  pouco  mais  ou  mfinos, 
Lhe  falou  d'esta  maneira: 

Bons  dias,  meu  Undo  corvo, 
Es  gloria  d'esta  espessura: 
Es  outra  ph^nix  se  acaso 
Tens  a  voz  como  a  figura. 


Lan^a-lhe  a  mestra  o  gadanho 
E  diz:  «Meu  amigo,  aprende 
Como  vive  o  lisongeiro 
A  custa  de  quem  o  attende. 

Esta  li(jao  vale  um  queijo, 
Tem  d'estas  para  teu  uso.» 
Rosna  entao  comsigo  o  corvo 
Envergonhado  e  confuso: 


Velhaca!     Deixou-me  em  branco, 
Fui  tolo  em  fiar-me  n'ella. 
Mas  este  logro  me  livra 
De  cahir  n'outra  esparrela. 

(Socage.) 


0  Sol  e  0  Vento. 


0  Vento  desafiou 
0  Sol,  um  certo  dia, 
Para  v6rem  dos  dois 
Qual  mais  poder  teria. 

E  logo,  n'um  memento, 
Sem  mesmo   ao   repto  esp'rar 
pela  resposta, 

0  maluco  do  Vento 
Com   a   sua  maneira  descom- 

posta 
Deitou-se  a  v6r  se  despojava 
Da  capa  que  trazia . 
Um  homem  que  passava. 


Soprando  rijo  e  agreste, 
Na  fiiria  d'um  sudoeste, 
Tudo  revolve  e  agita  n'um  es- 

carceu  .  .  . 
—  Logo  a  primeira  rabanada 
Vai-se  ao  homem,   e  leva-lhe 

o  chapeu. 
E  riu,  e  riu  de  gosto,  a  gar- 
galhada, 

Zombando  do  homenzi- 
nho 
Que  seguiu  sereno  e  descuidado 
0  seu  caminho. 


898 


Supplement. 


Este,  por^m,  assim  jd,  avisado^ 

Acautelou-se: 
Puxou  a  roupa  a  si,  abotoou-se . . 
Mesmo  que  —  pondo  tudo  em 

corrupio, 
0  Vento  iroso,  por  ali  abaixo  — 

Estava  frio, 

Urn  frio  bd  diachol 

Como  6  de  calcular, 

—  Nao  de  espantar  — 
Contrariado  o  Vento  exasperou- 
se, 

E  n'uma  fiiria  tal 
Que  ja  nao  6ra,  Vento,   antes 

dir-se  hia 

Um  vendavall 

As  rabanadas, 

Aos  empuxoes, 

As  sapatadas, 
0  Sudoesteteimavaretumbante 
Tirar  a  viva  for9a  a  grossa  capa 

Ao  triste  viandante. 

Mas  quanto  mais  soprava 

E  esbravejava 

0  Sudoeste  insoffrido, 
Mais  o  homem  na  capa  se  em- 

brulhava, 
B,  6  claro,    at6  mais  esta  se 

collava 
Ao  corpo  do  transeunte  assim 
batido. 

0  Sol,  do  alto,  que  esta 

scena  via, 
Ria   de  puro  g6so,  ria, 

ria  .  .  . 


Nao  porque  a  aposta,   emfim, 
o  intereasasse 

(Era  bem  mais  que  certo), 

Mas  uma  li^aosinha  dar  quizesse 

Ao  Vento  fiirio  e  esperto. 

Por  sua  vez  se  foi  ao  bomen- 
zinho 

Da  capa,  e  gravemente, 
E  sem  mdus  tratos 
Nem  espalhafatos, 

Quasi  amigavel,  delicadamente, 
Devagarfnho  .  .  . 

Dobrando  a  sua  for9a  apenas 
de  cal6r, 

Mas   pouco  a  pouco,    lento    e 
lentamente  .  .  . 

0  homem  d'ali  a  pouco  se  despia. 
Quasi  insensivelmente 
Da  capa  que  trazia, 
Da  sua  capa  rica, 
—  Por  tal  modo  suava, 
Em  bica! 

E  concluiu,  falando  sentencioso 
Para  o  Vento  raivoso: 
«Se  mais  for^a  e  poder  que  tu 
eu  tenho, 

Nao  sei .  .  . 
Tu  o  diras! 
Por  mim,  direi 
Que  faz 
Muito  mais  do  que  a  colera,  a 

paciencia. 
Que  mais  vale  a  brandura  que 
a  violencia*. 

(Paulino  de  Oliveira.) 


A  cigarra  e  a  formiga. 


Como  a  cigarra  o  seu  gosto 
E  levar  a  temporada 
De  junho,  julho  e  agosto 
N*uma  cantiga  pegada, 
De  inverno  tambem  se  come 
E  ent^  rapa  frio  e  fome  .  .  . 


Um  inverno  a  infeliz 
Chega-se  d  formiga  e  diz: 
—  Venho  pedir-lhe  o  favor 
De  me  emprestar  mantimento, 
Matar-me  a  necessidadel 


Poems  of  Modern  Literature. 


399 


E,  em  chegando  a  novidade*, 
Fa 90  ate  um  juramento, 
Pago-lhe,  seja  o  que  for! 

—  Mas,  pergunta-lhe  a  formiga, 
0  que  fez  durante  0  estio? 


—  Eu  .  .  .  cantar  ao  desafio. 

—  Ah!  cantar?     Pois,  minha 
amiga, 

Quern  leva  0  estio  a  cantar, 
Leva  0  inverno  a  dan9ar. 
(Joao  de  Deus.) 

Bosas. 
Trazeis-me  rosas;  d'onde  as  beis  trazido, 
Boa  velhinda  e  minha  boa  amiga? 
Rosas  no  inverno!  permitti  que  0  diga, 
Sois  feiticeira:  d'onde  as  beis  colhido? 

Na  primavera  de  mens  annos^  olho, 
Mas  vejo  abrolhos  e  nao  vejo  flores: 
E  vos  colbeil-as,  como  as  eu  nao  colbo  .  .  . 
Sois  feiticeira  —  enfeiti9aes  d'amores. 

Enfeiti^aes  que  a  formosura,  cr6de, 
Nao  vem  da  face  avelludada  e  bella; 
A  formosura  vem  so  d'alma;  6  d'ella 
Que  brota  a  fonte  que  nos  mata  a  s6de. 

Vos  sois  velhinha,  ja  nao  tendes  cores 

Que  0  rosto  animem  e  que  os  olhos  prendam, 

Mas  tendes  prendas  que  0  amor  accendam, 

Tendes  ainda  no  inverno  .  .  .  fl6res.     (Joao  de  Deus.) 

Can-do  das  tres  gotas  de  dgua. 
Trfis  irmas,  tr6s  gotas  de  agua      e  um  passarinho  bebeu-a; 
que  0  infinito  condensa, 
sua  mae,  nuvem  do  c^u, 
la  d'aquella  altura  immensa 
desprendeu : 

vem  uma  e  cae  sobre  a  flor 
que  a  mingua  de  agua  morria, 
e  mal  a  gota  sentia, 
voltava-lhe  o  vi^o  e  a  cor; 
caiu  outra  ao  p6  d'um  ninho, 

Mae, 


mas  a  terceira,  tombando 
no  mar,  dizia  chorando: 

«Nestas  ondas  arrogantes 
desapare90 mesquinha  ...» 

Responde  a  onda  marinha : 
« Ja  sou  maior  que  era  de 

antes. » 
(Affonso  Lopes- Vieira.) 


Ella  velava  perto 

Po  filho  que  dormia, 

E  Candida  sorria 

Ao  lyrio  entreaberto. 

Da  lua  um  raio  incerto 
No  quarto  se  perdia; 
E  a  mae  olhava  0  Dia 
E  a  Luz  do  seu  deserto. 


No  ber90  fluctuante 
Moveu-se  agora  o  infante 
E  acorda  pranteando  .  .  . 

Nao  ha  quadro  mais  bello 
Que  a  mae,  solto  0  cabello, 
0  filho  acalentando! 

(Gon9alves  Crespo.) 


The  first  fruits  of  the  year. 


400  Supplement. 


Consulta. 


Chamei  em  volta  do  men  frio  leito 
As  memorias  melhores  de  outra  idade, 
Formas  vagas,  que  ds  noites^  com  piedade, 
Se  inclinam,  a  espreitar,  sobre  o  meu  peito. 

E  disse-lhes:  «No  mundo  immense  e  estreito 
Valia  a  pena,  acaso,  em  anciedade 
Ter  nascido?  dizei-m'o  com  verdade, 
Pobres  memorias  que  eu  ao  seio  •estreito  ...» 

Mas  ellas  p«rturbaram-se  —  coitadas! 
E  empalidecerem,  contristadas, 
Ainda  a  mais  feliz,  a  mais  serena  .  .  . 

E  cada  uma  d'ellas,  lentamente, 

Com  um  sorriso  intimo,  pungente, 

Me  respondeu:  —  «Nao,  nao  valia  a  p^na». 

(Anthero  de  Quental.) 

Ao  cahir  da  folha. 

Quando  cahir  a  folha  e  ta  to  tores 
A  ter  com  minha  mae  que  ja  morreu, 
Se  nao  Ihe  posso  dar  mais  que  flores,     • 
Leva  Ihe  beijos,  abraqos^  —  Que  sei  eu! 

Diz-lhe  que  eu  ainda  sou  como  era  d'antes 
Assim  sem  esperauQas,  sempre  sem  amores. 
—  Mens  pobres  olhos,  sempre  agonisantes, 
Vao  se  mirrando  mais  —  so  pisam  dores.  — 

Dize  que  os  mens  versos  sao  atormentados 
Como  so  sabem  rimar  os  desgra9ados,  ^ 

Diz-lhe  que  em  breve  .  .  .  NSo,  mas  deixa  la, ' 

Podia  a  santa  affligir-se.     E  agora, 

Sempre  sao  maes  —  quando  te  fores  embora^ 

Nunca  Ihe  contes  o  que  vae  por  ca. 

(Albino  Forjaz  de  Sampayo.) 

0  ccdenddrio. 

E  n'um  instante  a  vida!  .  .  .  Dia  a  dia, 
Desfolho  0  calendario  com  saudade. 
A  gdtta  e  gotta  cde  na  eternidade 
Esta  por^ao  de  vida  fagidia. 


Poems  of  Modern  Literature.  401 

Assim  caminha  em  breve  romaria 

0  prazo  em  que  gastei  a  mocidade 

E  so  me  traz  mais  p6na  cada  dia, 

Mais  pranto,  mais  angiistia  e  mais  edadel  .  .  . 

A  manso  e  manso  c  tronco  se  desfolha 
Do  tempo  que  resume  esta  negrura 
Onde  se  fazem  brancos  os  cabellos  .  .  . 

E  OS  dias  vao  cabin  do,  folba  a  folba, 
E  embora  todos  feitos  de  amargura 
Oh,  quern  pudesse  ainda  reviv6l-os! 

(Conde  do  Casal  Ribeiro.) 

Bocage. 

No  seu  corpo  tao  fragil  quanta  vida, 
Cheia  de  luz,  cheia  de  for(ja  ingente! 
Luz  que  cegava  e  que  inda  cega  a  gente  .  .  . 
For9a  que  a  todos  leva  de  vencida  .  .  . 

Foi-lhe  a  curta  existencia  uma  comprida 
Vida  de  lucta,  e  erabora  o  Amor  florente 
E  a  Gloria  Ihe  sorrisse  ternamente, 
Foi-lhe  penosa  estrada  dolorida  ... 

Seu  g^nio  impetuoso  de  inspirado, 

Que  0  fez  tao  grande  e  t5o  inf'liz  o  fez, 

Minou-lhe  o  d^bil  corpo  arrebatado. 

Ramo  florindo  em  fiammas  muita  vez, 
Ramo  que  pela  Morte  desfolbado 
Todo  em  perfume,  em  alma,  se  desfez. 

(Paulino  de  Oliveira.) 

Preguiga. 

A  pregui^a,  inda  de  peito,  Pregui^a  foi  conf6ssar-se; 

Muito  custou  a  criar!  —  «Fez   exame   de  conscien- 

Quasi  que  morreu  de  feme,  cia?»  — 

Com  preguiQa  de  mamar.  —  «Nao  fiz,  meu  padre!  mas 

Preguica,  ia  crescidinha,  .  "^^^^"^ 

Qaando  por  seu  p6  andava  Amanha^  .  .    Tenha  pacien- 

Nao  era  andar!  mais  par'cia  ^^^'^ 

Que  toda  se  espreguivava  .  .  .  p^^^^;^^  aprendeu  costnra, 

PreguiQa  foi  a  liQao:  Mas,  sempre  que  costurava, 

Ler,  escrever  e  contar?  So  para  nao  por  dedal, 

Deixava  a  memoria  em  casa,  Sempre     os    sens     dedos    pi- 

Oom  preguiQa  de  a  levar!  cava. 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar.  20 


402 


Supplement. 


A  mSe  ralhou  a  Pregui9a, 
Porque  se  nao  penteara; 
Torna-lheella:  —  «Haquaiitos 

dias 
E  que  a  mae  nao  lava  a  cara?» 

Preguiija,  morta  de  somno, 
Quasi  de  somno  morria; 
So  por  nao  fechar  os  olhos, 
Quantas  noites  nao  dormial 

A  Pregui9a  abria  a  bocca, 
Coisa  em  que  ellaeramaiscerta: 
Mas  depois  —  p'ra  a  nao  fe- 
char — 
Ficou  sempre  «bocca-aberta». 


Pregui9a  e  o  Desmazfilo 
Juntarem-se  em  casamento: 
Levando  os  dois,  em  bom  dote, 
Uma  mao-cheia  de  vento. 

A  Pregui9a  teve  dois  filhos: 
Oh  que  santa  gera9?io! 
A  mais  velha,  Dona  Fome; 
0  mais  novo,  Dom  Ladrao. 

Quando  a  Pregui9a  morrer, 
At6  0  monte  maninho, 
At6  fraguedos  da  serra 
Darao  rosas,  pao,  e  vinho. 

(Antonio  Corr^a  d'Oliveira.) 


Ingratiddo. 


Era  uma  vez  um  moleiro 
Que  estava  no  seirmoinho  .  . . 
Come9ando  seu  caminho, 
Vinha  na  serra  Janeiro 
Com  longo  acompanhamento 
De  sombras,  de  neve  e  vento, 
Para  honrar  (se  bem  me  lembro) 
Desepedidas,  bota-fora 
Do  velho  e  pobre  Dezembro. 

Inda  estavam,  —  a  tal  hora! 
Ao  borralho  da  lareira, 
Moleiro  e  mais  a  moleira, 
Depois  de  bem  consoados, 
Bem  fartos  e  regalados  .  .  . 
Que  minguas,  la  no  casal, 
Fome  ou  s§de,  nao  havia: 
Pois,  segundo  se  dizia, 
0  moleiro,  como  tal, 
Mettia  a  mao  na  maquia  .  .  . 
Mas,    n'isto,  ouviram  — 
truz!  —  truz!  — 
Bater  a  porta  .  .  . 

—   «  Jesus ! 
Quem  sera?  . . .  Quem  e?!>>  — 
Eesponde, 
Fora,  uma  voz  arrastada: 
—  «Alguem  que  pede  pousada, 
E  uns  restos  de  lume  aonde 
Se  possa  ainda  aquecer ...»  — 


Torna,  soberbo,  o  moleiro: 
—  «Andar!  andar,  caminheirol 
Esmola?  .  .  .  Nao  pode  ser!» 
Diz  a  voz: 

—  «Nao  me  conheces, 
De  certo!     Se  conhecesses  .  .  . 
Sou  0  Anno  Velho:  Eu  sou 
Quem  para  ti  foi  tao  bom 
Que  tudo  0  que  te  fartou 
Por  minha  gra9a  e  meu  dom 
0  lograste,  dia  a  dia: 
Alvo  pao  que  tu  comeste; 
Doce  vinho  que  bebeste; 
0  azeite  que  te  alumia; 
Sol  que  seccou  tua  lenha  ,  .  . 
Pois  ha  ingrato  no  mundo 
Que  negue  pao  d'um  segundo 
A  quem    um  anno  o  mante- 
nha?!» 


Volta  0  moleiro: 

—  0  paspalho  * 
Do  velho!  Pois  nao  se  atreve? . . 
Faz*  la  a  cama  na  neve, 
Que  ha  de  ser  bom  agasalho! 
De  que  me  eerves,  agora 
Que  ja  vaes  de  p^s  a  cova? 
0  Anno  Novo,  sim!     E  nova 
Amizade,  nova  vinha: 


Poems  of  Modern  Literature.  403 

«E  taleiga  venerada  Poe-se  a  choverl  a  chover! 

De  respeito  e  valimento,  Come<ja  o  rio  a  crescer; 

Pois  me  dara  da  farinha ...  *  —  A  crescer  de  tal  feitio, 

Que  logo  ao  moinha,  o  rio 

Ora,  foi  neste  momento  Levou  o  rodisio  e  a  mo! 

Que  0  Anno  Novo  chegou;  E  nao  ficou  aqui  so 

Vae,  ouviu  tado,  e  pensou:  0  castigo: 

—  «01ha  0  cora^ao  ruim!  Desde  entao, 

Alma  damnada!     0  mofino!  Tanto  Ihe  correu  avesso 

De  aqui  a  um  anno  p'lo  visto,  Anno  de  tao  mau  com690 : 

Fazia-me  o  mesmo  a  mim . .  .  Que  no  moinho  (de  noma 

Espera!  que  eu  ja  te  ensino:  «Moinho  da  Ingratidao») 

Has  de  pagal-as!»   —  0  moleiro  soberbao 

E  nisto,  Acabou,  morrendo  a  fome  . .  . 

(Antonio  Corr§a  d'Oliveira:  Parabolas.) 

A  Ldgrima. 

Manha  de  junho  ardente.     Uma  encosta  escalvada, 
Seca,  deserta  e  nua,  a  beira  d'uma  estrada. 

Terra  ingrata,  onde  a  urza  a  custo  desabrocha, 
Bebendo  o  sol,  comendo  o  p6,  mordendo  a  rocha. 

Sobre  uma  folha  hostil  d'uma  figueira  brava 
Mendiga  que  se  nutre  a  predegulho  e  lava, 

A  aurora  desprendeu,  compassiva  e  divina, 
Uma  lagrima  etherea^  enorme  e  cristalina. 

Lagrima  tao  ideal,  t5o  limpida  que,  ao  vel-a, 

De  perto  era  um  diamante  e  de  longe  uma  estrella. 

Passa  um  rei  com  o  seu  cortejo  de  espavento, 
Elmos,  lan9as,  clarins,  trinta  pendoes  ao  vento. 

No  meu  diadema,  disse  o  rei,  quedando  o  olhar, 
Ha  safiras  sem  conta  e  brilhantes  sem  par. 

Ha  rubins  orientaes,  sangrentos  e  doirados, 
Como  beijos  d'amor  a  arder,  cristalisados. 

Ha  perolas  que  sao  gotas  de  magna  immensa, 
Que  a  lua  cbora  e  verte  e  o  mar  gela  e  condensa. 

Pois  brilhantes,  rubins  e  perolas  de  Ophir, 
Tudo  isso  eu  dou,  e  vem,  6  lagrima,  fulgir 

N'esta  c'roa  orgulhosa,  olimpica,  suprema, 

Vendo  o  globo  a  mens  pes  do  alto  do  teu  diadema. 

26* 


404  Supplement. 

E  a  lagrima  celeste,  ing^nua  e  luminosa, 
Ouviu,  sorriu,  tremeu,  e  quedou  silenciosa. 

Coara9ado  de  ferro,  epico  e  deslumbrante, 
Passa  no  sen  ginfite  um  cavalleiro  andante. 

E  o  cavalleiro  diz  a  lagrima  irisada: 

Vem  brilhar,  por  Jesus,  na  cruz  da  minha  espada! 

Far-te-hei  relampejar,  de  victoria  em  victoria, 
Na  terra  Santa,  a  luz  da  F^,  ao  solda  Gloria! 

E  a  volta  lia-de  gaardar-te  a  .minha  noiva,  6  astro, 
Em  sen  collo  auroreal  de  rosa  e  de  alabastro. 

E  assim  alumiaras  com  ten  vivo  esplendor 
Mil  combates  de  heroes  e  mil  sonhos  d'amor. 

E  a  lagrima  celeste,  ingenua  e  luminosa, 
Ouviu,  sorriu,  tremeu,  e  quedou  silenciosa. 

Montado  n'uma  mula  escura,^  de  caminho, 
Passa  um  velho  judeu,  avarento  e  mesquinho. 

Mulas  de  carga  atras  levam-lhe  o  thesoiro, 
Grandes  areas  de  cedro  abarrotadas  d^oiro. 

E  0  velhinho  andrajoso  e  magro  como  um  janco, 
0  cr^neo  calvo,  o  olhar  febril,  o  bico  adunco. 

Vendo  a  estrella,  exclamou:  «0h  Deus,  que  maravilha! 
Como  ella  resplandece  e  tremeluz  e  brilha! 

Com  meu  oiro  em  montao  podiam-se  comprar 
Os  imp^rios  dos  reis  e  os  navios  do  mar. 

E  por  esse  diamante  espl6ndido  trocara 

Todo  0  meu  oiro  immenso  a  minha  mao  avara.» 

E  a  lagrima  celeste,  ingenua  e  luminosa, 
Ouviu,  sorriu,  tremeu,  e  quedou  silenciosa. 

Debaixo  da  figueira  entao  um  cardo  agreste, 
Ja  ressequido,  disss  a  lagrima  celeste: 

«A  terra,  onde  o  lilaz  e  a  balsamina  medra, 
Para  mim  teve  sempre  um  cora9ao  de  pedra, 

Se  a  queixar-me,  ergo  ao  ceo  os  brayos  por  acaso, 
O  c6o  manda-me  em  paga  o  fogo  em  que  me  abraso. 


Poems  of  Modern  Literature.  405 

Nunca  junto  de  mim,  ulcerado  de  espinhos, 
Ouvi  trinar,  gorgeiar  a  miisica  dos  ninhos. 

Nunca  junto  de  mim  ranches  de  namoradas 
Debandaram,  cantando,  em  noites  estrelladas  .  .  . 

Voa  a  ave  no  azul  e  passa  longe  o  amor, 

Porque  ai!  nunca  dei  sombra  e  nunca  tive  flor!  .  .  . 

6  lagrima  de  Deus,  6  astro,  6  gota  d'agua, 
Cae  na  desola9ao  d'esta  infinita  magoa!» 

E  a  lagrima  celeste,  ingenua  e  luminosa, 
Tremeu,  tremeu,  tremeu  .  .  .  e  cahiu  silenciosa. 

E  algum  tempo  depots  o  triste  cardo  exangue, 
Reverdecendo,  dava  uma  flor  cor  de  sangue, 

D'um  roxo  macerado  e  dorido  e  desfeito 

Como  as  chagas  que  tem  No3so  Senbor  no  peito  .  .  . 

E  ao  calix  virginal  da  pobre  flor  vermelba 

la  buscar,  zumbindo,  o  mel  doirado,  a  abelba!  .  .  . 

(Guerra  Junqueiro.) 


406 


English -Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


(The  gender  is  indicated  by  f.  (feminine)  and  m.  (masculine).    The 
principal  word  is  substituted  by  —  (a  dash),  when  repeated.) 

4  alley  avenida  f.,  alia  f. 

allow  permitir,  dar  licen^a  para, 
consentir  em 

almost  quasi 

already  jd 

also  tambem 

always  sempre 

ambitious  ambicioso 

amiable  amdvel,  bondoso 

among  (par)  entre 

amuse  divertir 

ancestors  antepassados  m.  pi. 

anger  zanga,  despeUo,  eolera^ 
ira 

angry  zangado;  to  be  or  get  — 
zangar-se 

answer  resposta  f;  —  v.  res- 
ponder 

any  algum;  (neg.)  nenhum 

anybody  alguem ;  (neg.)  ninguem 

any  more  mats  algum;  (neg.) 
nao  .  .  mats 

appear  aparecar 

apple  magd  f. 

apply  to  aplicar,  empregar  em 

approach  ajtroximar 

April  abril  (in  dates  A — )  m. 

archer  besteiro  m. 

arm  brago  m. 

army  exercito  m. 

arrive  chegar 

arrow  frecha  f. 

art  arte  f. 

artist  artista  m.  &  /*. 

as  como;  —  .  .  —  assim  que 

ashamed  envergonhado 

ashes  cinzas  f.  pi. 

ask  preguntar,  pedir 

assiduity  assiduidade  f. 

assist  assistir,  socorrer 


above  em  cima  de,  por  cima  de 

about  ao  redor  de,  cerca  de 

able  capaz,  hdhil 

absolve  absolver 

abstain  abster-se 

abundance  abunddncia  f. 

abuse  abusar,  insultar 

accept  aceitar 

accompany  acompanhar 

accustom  acostumar 

account  conta  f.,  lista  f. 

acquaintance  conhecimento  m, 

acquire  adquirir 

act    obrar,   operar;   s  acgdo  f., 

acto  m. 
action  a(c)cao  f. 
add  acrescentar,  adicionar 
address    dirigir(-se  a);    endere- 

gar 
admirable  admirdvel 
admiral  almirante  m. 
admit  admitir 
advance  adiantar,  promover 
advantage  vantdgem  f. 
advice  conselho  w.,  aviso  m. 
affair  negocio  m.,  assunto  m. 
affect  impressionar,  afectar 
afraid,  to  be  — ,  ter  medo 
after  depois,  conforms 
afternoon  tarde  f. 
again  de  novo,  mais  uma  vez 
against  contre 
age  idade  f.;  old  —  velhice 
agree  convir 
agreeable  agraddvel 
alike  semelhante,  igual 
all  tudo  pr.,  todo  adj.;   —  that 

tudo  quanto 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


407 


assistance  assistencia  f. 
associate    with    frequentar,    as- 

sociar-se  com 
astonishing  surpreendente 
at  Gf  em\  at  home  em  casa;  at 

first    710   principio:     at    once 

duma  vez;    at    last   2^or    fim; 

at  all  de  todo 
attack  agredir 
attain  alcangar,  conseguir 
attentive  atento,  atencioso 
attract  atirar 

August  agosto  (in  dates  A — )  m. 
aunt  tia  f. 
author  autor  m. 
avarice  avareza  f. 
avaricious  avaro,  avarento 
avoid  evitar 
avow  confessar 
await  aguardar,  esperar. 

B. 

bad  m<m,  md;  — ly  mal 

ball  bala  f.,  baile  m. 

bare  nu,  despido;  — ly  apenas 

bark  v.y  ladrar;  s.  casca  f.,  cor- 

tiga  f. 
barley  cevada  f. 
battle  hatcdJia  f. 
beard  larha  f. 
beat  hater 

beautiful  formoso^  Undo 
because  porque 
become  ficar,  tornar-sc 
bed  cama  f.,  leito  m. 
bee  dbclha  f. 
beer  cerveja  f. 
before  antes,  ante,  deante 
heg j^edir  (esmolaj,  mendigar 
begin  principiar^  comegar 
behind  atrds  (de)trds 
believe  crer,  acreditar 
belong  to  pertencer  a,  ser  de 
better  melhor 
between  entre 
beyond  alem  de 
big  grande,  grosso 
bird  a/ce  /.,  pdssaro  m. 
bite  morder 
bitter  amargo,  acre 
black  preto,  negro 


blame  censurar,  repreender 

blessing  hengao  f. 

blood  sangue  m. 

blush  corar 

boarding-house  casa    f.  de  Iws- 

pedes 
body   corpo    m.;    every —    cada 

um,  todos;  no—  ninguem 
boil  ferver 
bonnet  chapStt  m. 
book  iTvro  m. 
boot  bota  f. 

born  nascido;  to  be  —  nascer 
bottle  garrafa  f. 
box  caixa  f. 

boy  rapaz  m.,  menino  m. 
brave  valente,  corajoso 
bread  pdo  m. 

break  romper,  partir,  quebrar 
breakfast  almogo  m. 
bring  trazer,  levar 
brother  irmao  m. 
build  construir 
burn  arder,  queimar 
business  negocio  m. 
but  mas,  porem 
butter  manteiga  f. 
buy  coniprar 
by  por;  —  heart  de  c6r;  —  the 

way  (—  the  — )  de  passdgem  ; 

—    and    —    logo,    ao    depois; 

hard—  7miito  perto. 


cab  trem  de  praga  m. 

cabbage  couve  f. 

calf  vitela  f. 

call  chamar;  —  to  mind  lembrar; 

—  at  ir  ter  com 
camel  camelo  m. 
camp  campo  m. 
candle  vela  f. 
cane  bengala  f. 
cap  harrete 

carnival  carneval  m.,  entrudo  m. 
care  cuidado  m. 
carpenter  carpinteiro  m. 
carriage  camiagem  f. 
carry  carregar,  levar 
cast  (away)  deitar  (fora) 
castle  castelo  m. 


408 


Enjjlieh-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


cat  gato  m. 

cattle  gado  bovino  m. 

cease  cessar,  acabar 

censure  censurar 

celebrated  celebre 

certainly  certamente,  com  certeza 

chair  cadeira  f. 

chamber  qiiarto,  sola 

chase  caga  f. 

chastise  castigar 

cheese  queijo  m. 

cherry    cereja  f. 

child  crianga  f. 

china  louga  f.. 

choose  escolher 

chorus  coro  m. 

church  igreja  f. 

city  cidade  f. 

clamour  clamor  m.,  brado  m. 

class  classe  f.,  aula  f. 

clean  limpo 

clear  claro,  limpido 

cloak  capa  f.,  capote  m. 

cloth  pane  m. ;  clothes  vestudrio 

m.,  roiipa  f. 
clothe  vestir 
cloud  nuvem  f. 
coach    carrudgem    f.,    trem    m., 

carro  m. 
coast  costa  f. 
coat  casaco  m. 
coffee  cafe  m. 
cold  frio  (m.)y  constipagao 
colour  cor  f. 

come  vir ;  —  in  entrar ;  —  outsatV 
comfort  conforto  m.,  comodidade 

f.;  —  V.  confoj'tar,  consolar 
command    ordem    /'.    (co)ma'ndo 

m.\  —  V.  (co)mandar,  ordenar 
comDjCuce  comedo  m. 
commerce  comercio  m. 
complain  queixar-se 
compel  obrigar 
compound  compusto 
corirade  camarada   m.,    compa- 

r.heiro  m. 
conceal  esconder 
conceive  conceber 
condemn   conde(m)nar 
conduct  conducta  f.,  proccder  m. ; 

—  V.  conduzii' 
confess  confessar 


confidence    confianga    f.,     con- 

fidencia  f. 
conquer  conquistar 
conqueror  conquistador  m. 
conscience  consciencia  f. 
consent  consentir 
consequence  consequencia  f. 
consider  consiierar 
constrain  constranger 
construct  construir 
contain  conter 
contented  contente 
continue  continuar 
convince  convencer 
cook  cozinheiro;  coser 
cool  fresco  (m.) 
copy-book  caderno  m. 
corn  gruo  m. 

correct  correcto;  —  i\  corrigir 
cost  custar 
country  pais  m. 
courage  cordgem  /.,  dnimo  m.  . 
course  curso  m.,  corrida  f. 
cousin  primo  m.,  prima  f. 
cover    coherta    /'.,     cobertor    m.^ 

tampa  f. 
cow  vaca  f. 
creator  creador  »i. 
creditor  credor  m. 
crime  crime  m. 
cry  grito  m.,  clamor  m. 
cultivate  trultivar 
cup  chicara  f,  taga  f. 
currant  groselha  f. 
custom  costume  m.,  hdbito  m. 
cut    V,    costar,    talhar\    s.    c6rte 

w.,  talhe  m.,  golpe  m>. 


damp  (hjumido 

danger  perigo  m. 

dark  escuro,  sovibrio 

dart  V.  dardeiar,  s.  dardo 

daughter  filha  f. 

dawn  madrugada  f,  aha  f. 

day  dia  m. 

dead  morto;  — ly  morfal(mente) 

deaf  surdo 

dear  querido,  caro 

death  mortc  f. 

debt  divida  f. 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


409 


deceive  enganar,  lograr 
December     december    (in    dates 

I>— )  m. 
decision  decisdo  f. 
deer  viado  m.,  gado  m. 
defect  defeito  m. 
defend  defender 
delight  in  deleitar-se  em 
demolish  demoUr 
dense  denso 

deny  (de)^iegar,  recasar 
depart  partir 
departure  partido 
depend  depender:    —  upon  des- 

cansar  em 
describe  descrever 
description  descrigao 
deserve  merecer 
desire  desejar 
despise  desprezar 
destroy  destrulr 
die  morrer 
difference  difercnga 
difficult  dificil 
difficulty  dificuldade  f. 
diligent  diligente 
dine      1   .     .       ,     ^ 
dinner  l-^^^^^^^'  <'''-^ 
direct   v.    dirigir,  enderegar;  a. 

directo,    direito;    — ly  jd,  im- 

niediatamente 
direction  direcQdo  f.,  ende^-e^o  m. 
disappear  desaparecer 
disciple  discipulo  m) 
dissatisfy  desagradar 
dissipate  dissipar^  desharafar 
dissolve  dissolver 
distinguish  distinguir 
distress  afllgao  f. 
divide  dividir,  ^jar^iZ/iav 
do  fazer 
dog  cao  in. 

door  porta  f. ;  —  way  portal  m. 
doubt  V.  diivid<ir;  s.  ducida  f. 
dozen  diizia  f. 
draw  pitxar,  tirar :  —  (pictures) 

desenhar;     —    upon    oneself 

atirar-se 
dream  v.  sonhar;  s.  sonlio  m. 
dress  v.vestirC-se);  s.  vestido  m., 

fato  m. 
drink  heber 


drop  V.  gotejar,  deixar  cair:   s. 

gota  f. 
drunk  behedo;  to  get —  emhria- 

gar-se 
dry  seco,  enxuto 
duchess  duquesa  f. 
duck  pato  m. 
dumb  mudo 
during  durante 
dust  p6  n.,  poet r a  f. 
duty  dever  m.,  obrigagao  f. 
dwell  morar,  residir 
dye  tingir. 

E. 

ear  orelha  f.,  ouvido  m. 

early  cedo 

earth  terra  f. 

easily  facilmente 

easy  fdcil 

eat  comer 

edition  edigdo  f. 

egg  ovo  m. 

elect  elegei' 

ell  (measure)  vara  f. 

elm  (tree)  olm(eir)o  m. 

elsewhere  algures 

embarrass  v.  embaragar;  s.  em- 
bar  ago  m. 

embellish  embe(l)lecer 

emperor  imperador 

empire  imperio 

employ  impregar 

end  fim  m.,  cabo  w.,  con- 
cluscio  f. 

enemy  inimigo  m. 

engine  (steam  — )  mciquina 

enough  hastante,  assaz 

enrich  enriquecer 

enter  entrar  (em) 

entertain  entreter,  regal ar 

entertaining  divertido 

envy  iuveja 

equal  igual 

equality  igualdade  f. 

error  erro  m. 

escape  v.  escapar,  fuqir\  s.  es- 
capada  f.,  fugida  f. 

esteem  estima  /.,  consideragcuo  f. 

evening  tarde  f.,  noite  f. 

event  sii(c)cesso  w.,  acontecimento 
m. 


410 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


ever  sempre 

everybody      cada     um,     todos ; 

everything  tudo;    everywhere 

em  toda  a  parte 
evil  mal  m. 
example  exemplo  m. 
execute  executar,  cumprir 
exercise  exerctcio,  prdtica 
exhaust  esgotar;    — ed  exhausto 
exist  existir 
expect  aguardar 
extinct  extinto 
extinguish  extingiiir 
extract  v.  extrair;  s.  extracto 
extreme  extremo 
eye  olho  m. 


fable  fdbiila  f. 

face  face  /".,  car  a  f.,  rosto  m. 

fail  faltar,  falhar,  errar 

faint  desfalecer 

faithful  jfiely  leal 

fall  cair 

false  falso 

falsehood  falsidade  f. 

family  familia  f. 

fan  leqiit  w. 

far  Iqnge 

fat  gordo 

fate  fado  m.,  destino  m. 

father  pai  ov  ijae  m.;  —  in-law 

sogro  m. 
fault  defeito  m.,  falta  f. 
fear  medo  wi.,  receio  »n. 
fearful  recedso 
feather  pena  f.,  pluma  f. 
February  fevereiro  (in  dates  F — ) 

m. 
feed  comida  f.,  alimento  nu 
feel  sentir 
feign  fingir 
fellow-traveller  companheiro  m. 

de  viageni 
ferocious  feroz 
fertilize  fertilisar 
few  poucos 
field  campo 

fight  luta  /".,  combate  m. 
fill  encher 
find  encontrar 


fine  honito,  fino 

finish  acabar,  terminar 

fire  s.  fogo  m.;  v.  desfechar 

flag  bandcira  f. 

flatter  lisongear,  adidar 

flatterer  adulador  m. 

flee  fugir 

flock  rebanho  m. 

florin  fiorim  m. 

flour  farinha  f. 

flourish  florescer 

flower  flur  f. 

fly  V.  voar^  fugir;  s.  mosca  f. 

fog  nevoeiro  m. 

follow  seguir 

folly  tolice  f.,  pdndega  f. 

fool  tola  m. 

foolishness  ioUce  f.,  asneira  f. 

foot  pe  m. 

for   (prep.)  para;  (conj.)  par  que: 

as  —  enquanto  a 
forbid   prohibir;    God  — !  Deus 

nao  qiieira! 
forehead  testa  f. 
foreign  estrangeiro 
foresee  prever 
forest  floresta  f.,  bosque  m. 
forget  esquecer,  olvidar 
forgive  perdoar 
fork  garfo  m. 
formerly  antes,  outrora 
forsake  abandonar 
fortify  fortificar 
fortnight,  a  —  quinze  dias 
fortune  fortuna 
forward(8)      para      diante,     na 

dianteira 
found  V.  fundir 
freeze  gelar 
French  f ranees 
frequently      freqiientemente,      a 

miudo 
fresh  fresco 
Friday  sexta-feira  f. 
friend  amigo,  aniiga;  — ly  ami- 

gavel 
friendship  amizade  f. 
fruit  fru(c)to  m.,  fru(c)ta  f. 
fugitive  fugitivo 
fulfil  cumprir 
full  cheio,,  pleno 
furniture  mobilia  f. 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


411 


0. 

gaiety  alegria  f. 

gain  V.  ganhar;  s.  ganho  m. 

game  jogo,  caga  f. 

gape  bocejar,  abrir  a  bdca 

garden  jardim  m. 

gardener  jardmevro  m. 

gate  porta  f.,  portal  m.,  cance(l)la 

gather  collier^  apanhar 
general  a.  geral;  s.  general  m. 
generous  gefieroso 
genius  genio  m.,  talenfo  m. 
gentleman  cavalheiro  wi.,  senhor 

m. 
gentleness  gentileza  f.,  delicadeza 

/•. 
get  procurar,  ter;   —  up  levan- 

tar-se 
gift  dddiva  f.,  prenda  f. 
girl  menina  /".,  rapariga  f. 
give  dar 
glad  cwitente,  alegre ;  — \jgostosa- 

mente 
glass  vidro  m.,  copo  m. 
glitt'er  reluzir 
glory  gloria  f. 
glove  luva  f. 
go  i/r;  —  away  ir-se  (embora); 

—  out  sai/r;  —  far  from  afastar- 

se;    —   for  proctirar;    —  on 

continuar 
God  Deus  m. 
gold  ouro  m. 

good  a.  bom,  boa;  s.  bem  m. 
goodness  bondade  f. 
good-will  boa  vontade  f. 
govern  governar,  reger 
gown  vestido  m. 
grammar  gram(m)dtica 
grandfather  avd  m. 
grandmother  avo  f. 
grant  conceder 
grass  herva  jf.,  relva  f. 
graze  pastar 
great  grande 
green  verde 

grief  desgosto  m.j  mdgoa  f. 
grind  moer 

ground  chao  m.,  solo  w. 
grow    crescer;    —    lean    emma- 

grecer;   —  old  envelhecer;    — 


pale  empalidecer;     —  red  corar 

—  tall  crescer,  estar  crescido; 

—  thin  emmagrecer;  —  worse 
peorar  —  better  melhorar 

—  rich  enriquecer 
guilty  culpado 


hail  V.  granizar ;   aclamar,  saii- 

dar;  s.  graniza  f.     — !   vita! 
hair  cabelo  m.,  pelo  m. 
half  s.  metade  f.;  a.  meio,  meia 
hand  mao  f.;  —  v.  passar 
handsome  bello 
happen  acontecer 
happily  felizmente 
happiness  felicidade  f. 
happy  feliz 
hard  duro,  dspero 
hardly  detodo,  apenas;  — ever 

quasi  nunca 
hare  lebre   f. 
harvest  colheita  f. 
haste  pressa  f. 
hasten  apressar-se,  aviar-se 
hat  chapeu  m. ;  to  put  on  (take 

off)   one's    hat  por   (tirar)    o 

chapeu 
hate  odiar 
hatred  odio  m. 
hay  feno  m. 
head  cabega 
heal  curar 
health  saude  f. 
healthy  saudavel,  sua 
hear  ouvir 

heart   coragao  w. ;  by—  de  cor 
heat  calor  m. 
heaven  ceu  m. 
heavy  pesado 
helm  leme  m. 
help  ajudar,  so(c)correr 
henceforward  d'aqui  para  diante 
here  aqui 

hide  esconder,  occtdtar 
high  alto,  elevado 
hill  co(l)lina  f. 
hinder  impedir 
history  historia  f, 
hit  dar  um  golpe  em;  acertar 


412 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


hive  colmeia  f. 

hold  segurar 

hole  huraco  in. 

holiday  ferias  f.  pi. 

holy  santo,  sagrado 

home  casa ;  go  —  ir  a  or  para 

casa;  at  —  em  casa 
honest  (hjonrado,  (h)onesto 
honour  s.  honra  if.;  —  v.  lionrar 
hope  s.  esperanga;  —  v.  esperar 
horse  cava(l)lo  m. 
hot  quente;  it  is  —  estd  calor 
hour  (hjora  f. 
house  casa  f. 
how  como,   que:,    —  long  (since 

when)?     desde    quando?;     — 

much  (many)  quanto(s)? 
however  no  entanto 
human  (hjumano 
hunger  fome  f. 
hungry  esfomeado;  to  be  —  ter 

vontade  (de  comer) 
hunter  cagador  m. 
hunting  caga  f. 
hurt  ferir,  prejudicar 
husband  marido  m. 


I. 

ice  gelo  m. 

idea  ideia  f. 

idle  preguigoso 

if  se,  caso  que 

ill  a.  docnte;  adv.  mal 

illness  doenga  f. 

image  imdgem  f.  • 

imagine  imaginar 

imitate  imitar 

immediately     i(fn)mediatamente, 

immortal  i(m)mortal 

importune  importuno 

impossible  imposstvel 

improve  progredir 

in  cm;  into  para  dentro  de 

inch  po(l)legada  f. 

increase  crcscer,  au(g)mehtar 

incredible  incrivel 

incur  incorrer  em 

indeed  na  verdade;   — !  e   ver- 

dade ! 
inhabit  habitar 


inhabitant  habitant e  m. 

injure  prejudicar 

ink  tinta  f. ;  — stand  tinteiro  m» 

inquire  inquirir,  indagar 

inquisitive  curioso 

inscribe  increver 

insensible  insenstvel 

instantly  instantdneamente 

instruct  instruir 

insult  insulto  m. 

intend  intender 

interrupt  interromper 

introduce  introduzir,  apresentar 

invade  invadir 

invent  inventar 

iron  ferro  m. 

irreproachable  irrepreetisivel 

island  ilha  f. 

ivory  marfim  m. 

J. 

January  Janeiro  (in  dates  J—) 

jealous  ciumento 

jealousy  ciume  m. 

jewel  joia  f. 

join  juntar 

joy  alegria 

judgment  julgamento  m. 

jug  cdntaro  m.,  caneca  f. 

July  julho  (in  dates  J—)  m. 

June  Junho  (in  dates  J — )  m. 

just  justo,  exacto 

just  as  no  momenta  em  que 

justice  justiga  f. 


keep  ficar  com,  segurar,  observe 
kill  matar 
kindness  bondade  f. 
king  rei  m.;  kingdom  rei)io  m. 
kitchen  cozinha  f. 
knee  joelho  m. 
knife  faca  f.,  navalha  f. 
know  conhecer,  saber 
knowledge      sciencia      f.,      co- 
nhecimenio(s}  pi.  m. 


labour  trabalho  m.,  lavor  m. 
laborious  trabalhoso 
lady  senhora  f.,  dona  f. 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


413 


lamb  anlto  m. 

land  s.  terra  f.;  —  v.  desembarcar, 

arrihar 
langaage  lingua  f.,  lingudgem  f. 
large  grande,  largo 
last   V.    durar,    continuar;    adj. 

ultimo 
late  adj.  defunto;  adv.  tarde 
laugh  rir 
laughter  riso  m. 
law  lei  f. 
lawyer  advogado 
lazy  preguigoso 
lead  s.  chumho  in. 
lead  conduzir;  —  into  induzir 
leaf  folha  f.,  folho  m. 
league  legua  f.,  liga  f. 
learn  aprender,  estudar 
learned  sdbio,  erudito 
least  s.  menos;  at  —  ao  menos', 
in  the  —  de  todo 
leave    licenga    f.\    take    —    of 

despedir-se  de 
left  a.  esqiierdo:  s.  esquerda  f. 
leg  pern  a  f. 
lend  empi'estar 
less  menos 
let  deixar,  arrendar;  —  us  go! 

vamos!  —  him  know!  faga-lJie 

saber ! 
letter  carta  f.,  —  case  carteira  f. 
liar  mentiroso  m. 
liberty  liberdade  f. 
lie  estar  (deitadoj;  mentir 
life  vida  f. 
lift  up  levantar 
like   gostar   de;   a.    semelhante; 

adv.  como 
likely  provdvel 
lily  lirio  in. 

limit  Umitar;  s.  limite  m. 
line  linha  f. 
linen  Ztn/io  m. 
lion  Ztao  w. 
listen  escutar,  ouvir 
little  adj.  pequeno;   adv.  pouco, 

apenas,  mal 
live  v«rgr,  morar 
loadstone,  lodestone  iwian  m. 
locksmith  serralheiro  m. 
long  adj.  longo^  comprido;  adv. 

wmtYo  tempo 


look  at  oZ/ia?-;  —  for  procurar 

looking-glass  espelho  m. 

lose  perder 

loss  ptJ/ia  /*. 

love  s.  amor:  —  v.  amar 

low  haixo,  vil 

luxury  luxo  m. 

M. 

mad  tolo,  alienado 

Madam  minha  senhora 

magnificent  magnifxco 

maintain  manter,  suster 

make  fazer ;  —  haste  apressar-se 

man  homem  m. 

manners  maneiras  f.  pi. 

many  muitos;  so  —  tantos;   as 

—  as    tantos    como;    too    — 
demais 

map  ma(p)pa  m. 

March  margo  (in  dates  M — ) 

mark  out  marcar,  tragar 

marriage  casamento  m. 

marry  casar 

master  s.  mestre,  patrao,  amo  m. ; 

—  V.  senhorear,  conquistar 
matter  assumpto  in.,  nego'cio  m., 

cousa  f. 
May  m^io  (in  dates  M — )  m. 
meadow  prado  m.,  devesa  f. 
meal  refeigdo  f.,  farinha  f. 
means  meio  m. 
meat  came  f. 

meddle  (with)  entremtter-se  (em) 
medicine  remedio  m.,  medicina  f. 
meet  encontrar 
melt  fundir,  derreter 
member  membro  in. 
memory  memoria  f. 
mend  eniendar ;  —  (a  pen)  aparar 
merchant     negociante ,    comerci- 

ante  m. 
messenger  mensageiro  m. 
metal  metal  m. 
middle  meio  m. 
mild  ameno,  suave 
milk  leite  m. 
miller  moleiro  in. 
minute  minuto  m.,  minuta  f, 
misfortune  desgraga  f. 
mislead  desencaminhar,   induzir 


414 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


Miss  menina,  senJwra  Dona 

mist  nevoeiro  m. 

mistake    v.  enganar-se:    s.  erro, 

engano  tn. 
mistrust  desconfiar  de 
mock  trogar  de 
modern  moderno 
modest  modesto 
modesty  modestia  f. 
Monday  segunda-feira  f, 
money  dinheiro  m. 
month  mes  m. 
moon  lua  f. 
more  mats 
morning  manha  f. 
mother  mae  f. ;  —  -in-law  sogra 
motive  motivo  m. 
mourning  luto  m. 
mouse  rato  m.,  ratinho  m. 
mouth  boca  f. 

move  mover(-se)jComover,mexer 
much  tnuito;  too  —  demasiado; 

how  —  qiianto?:  as  —  ta'Mo; 

as  —  as  tanto  que 
murder  assassinar;  assassinio  m. 
murderer  assassino  tn. 
music  musica  f. 
mutton  carndro  m. 


nail  unha  f.,  prego  m. 

naked  nw,  nua 

name  nome  tn. 

namely  nomeadamente;  a.  saber 

napkin  guarda-napo  m. 

nature  natureza  f. 

naughty  ruim^  mal-creado 

near  prdximo,  perto 

nearly  quasi,  aproximadamente 

necessary  necessdrio,  preciso;  to 

be  —  precisar-se 
necessity  necessidade  f. 
neglect  v.  descuidar;  s.  descuido 

m. 
neighbour  visinho  m. 
neighbourhood  visinhanga  f. 
neither  .  .  nor  nem  .  .  nem 
never  nunca,  jamais 
new  novo,  fresco 
news  noticia  f.\  — paper  jornal 


next  proximo,  seguinte 

nice  bonito,  gentil 

niece  sobrinha  f. 

night  noite  f. 

no  nenhum,  ndo 

nobility  nobresa  f. 

noise  barulho,  ruido  m. 

noon  meio-dia  m. 

nose  nariz  m. 

nothing  (nao  .  .)  nada 

notwithstanding  nem  par  isso, 

nourish  alimehtar.  nutrir 

November    november    (in   dates 

N—)  m. 
now  agora 
number  numero  m. 
numerous  numeroso. 

0. 

oak  carvalho  m. 

oats  aveia  f. 

obedient  obediento 

obey  obeir 

oblige  obrigar,  obsequiar 

obliging  obsequioso 

observe  observar,  atender 

obtain  obter,  alcangar 

occupy  oOOcupar 

October  outubro   (in  dates  0—) 

m. 
odious  odioso 
offend  o(f)fender 
offer  s.  o(f)ferta\  —  v.  offer ecer 
often  muitas  vezes 
officer  offjficial 
oil  6leo  m.,  azeite  m. 
old  velho,  idosOy  —  age  velhice 

f.;    how  —  are  youV  quantos 

annos  tern? 
omen  augouro  m. 
omit  ome(t)ter 
on  sobi'e,  em  cima     e 
once   uma   vez;   —    on   a  time 

outr'dra;  at  —  de  repente 
only  s6,  unico 

open  V.  abrir;  adj.  aberto,  franco 
openness  sinceridade  f. 
opponent  adversdrio  ni. 
opportunity  ofp^portunidarle 
oppose  o(p)p6r(-se) 
opposite  ofpjposto,  em  frente  de 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


415 


orange  laranja  f. 

order  s.  ordem  f,;  —  v.  mandar 

other,  an—  outra 

otherwise  alias,  d'outra  inaneira 

over    sohre,   por  cima    dc;    it's 

all  —  acdbou-se 
overtake  a(t)tingir 
owe  dever 
owl  coruja  f. 
own  propria 
owner  proprietdrio  m. 
ox  boi  m. 


pagan  pagao  m.,  paga  f. 

pain  pena,  dor,  trabalho;  on  — 

of  death  sob  pena  de  vida  (or 

de  morte) 
painful  penoso,  dolorosa 
paint  pintar 
painter  pinto r  m. 
painting  pintura  f. 
palace  paldcio   m.\    (king's  — ) 

pa^o  m. 
pale  pdlido 
paper  papel  m. 

pardon  v.  perdoar;  s.  perdao  m. 
parents  paes  m.  pi. ;  parentes  m. 

pi 
part   parte  f. ;    to   take   —    m 

partilhar  em 
party  partido  m.,  parti  da  f. 
pass  V.   passar\   s.  passdgem  f., 

passo  m.,  imssapoi'te  ni. 
passage  passdgem  f.,  irajecto  in. 
patient  s.  doente  m.;  ad],  paciente 
pay  V.  pagar;  s.  piaga  f.,  paga- 

mento  m. 
peace  paz  f. 
peach  pessego  m. 
pear  pera  f. 

peasant  lavrador^  aldedo  m. 
pebble  seioco  m. 
peculiar  particular 
pen  penna  f. ;  — holder  canela  f. 
pencil  lapis  m. 
penknife  canivete  m. 
people  povo  m.,  gente  f. 
perceive  perceber 
perfectly  perfeitamente 
perform  fazer,  cumprir 
perish  perecer 


permit  permi(t)tir 

persecute  perseguir 

person  pessoa  f. 

persuade  persuadir 

philosophy  filosofia  f. 

picture  quadra  m. 

piece  pega  f.,  bocado  m. 

pierce  furaVy  atravessar 

pig  porca  m. 

pill  pilula  f. 

pin  alfinete  m. 

pity  piedade  f.;  it  is  a  —  d  uma 
pena 

place  logar,  assento;  —  v.  cola- 
car 

plain  planicie  f.;  adj.  piano 

plan  projecta  m.,  piano  m, 

plank  prancha  f. 

plant  plant  a  f. 

plate  prato  m. 

play  s.  jogo  ni.,  comidia  f. ;  —  v. 
jogar^  brincar 

plaything  brinqueda  m. 

please  agradar  a;  if  you  please 

—  se  faz  favd' 
pleasing  agraddvel 

pleasure  prazer  m. ;    to  take  — 

in  comprazer-se 
plum  ameixa  f.  ' 
pocket    algibeira    f.,    bMso  m. 

—  handcherchief    lengo    m. 
—book  carteira  f. 

poet  paeta  m. 

poison  veneno  m.,  envenenar 

polite  corles 

politeness  cortesia  f. 

poor  pahre 

pope  pdpa  m. 

poplar  alamo  m.,  choupo  m. 

populous  povaada 

portion  parte  /".,  pargdo  f. 

position  posigda  f.,  situagdo  f. 

post-office  carreia  m. 

pound  arrdtel  m.;  libra  f. 

powerful  poderoso 

praise   v.    lauvar,    enaltecer:    s. 

louvor  m. 
pray  resar,  arar 
prayer  resa  f.,  oragdo  f. 
precious  precioso 
precision  precisdo  f. 
prefer  preferir 


416 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


prescribe  prescrever 

presence  presenqa  f. 

present  adj.  present e;  s.  i^re- 
senie,  regalo  m. 

preserve  preservar,  confeitar 

pretence  pretexto  m. 

pretend  pretender^  fhigir 

pretty  adj.  bonito;  adv.  bem, 
bast  ante 

prevent  impedir 

prey  presa  f. 

pride  orgulho  m. 

principle  principio  m. 

print  itnprimir 

printing,  act  of  —  imprensa  f. 

prison  cadeia  f.,  prisao  f. 

prodigious  prodigioso 

produce  produzir 

project  project 0 

promise  s.  promessa ;  —  v.  pro- 
meter 

proof  prova  f. 

proper  proprid,  conveniente 

property  propriedade  f. 

proposal  proposigdo  f. 

propose  propor 

prove  provar 

province  provincia  f. 

punctuality  pontuaXidade  f. 

punish  castigar 

punishment  castigo  m. 

pupil aZMm>w>,  — a;  discipulo,  —a 

purchase  s.  compra;  —  v.  com- 
prar 

purpose  fim  m.,  designio  m.; 
on  —  de  proposito 

purse  balsa  f. 

pursue  2^6rseguir 

put  meter. 


quarrel  contenda,  altercagao  f. 

queen  rainha  f. 

question  8.  pregunta  f.,   questao 

f.;  —  preguntar 
quiet  quieto,  tranquillo 
quite  todo,  inteiramente. 

R. 

railroad  caminho  m.  de  ferro 
rain  chuva  f. 


rainy  chuvoso 

raise  levantar,  elevar 

rally  mote  jar 

rather  antes,  bastante 

ray  raio  m. 

reach  atingir,  cliegar  a. 

read  ler\  to  —  again  toi'nar  a 

ler 
ready  pronto 
reason  razao  f. 
rebuild  reconstruir 
recall  (rejlembrar 
receive  receber,  acolher 
recognise  reconhecer 
recollect  lembrar-se 
recompense  recompensa  f. 
reconnoitre  reconhecer 
recover  restabelecer 
red  vermelho 
reduce  reduzir 
reed  ca(n)7ia  f. 
reflect  reflectir 

refuge,  to  take  —  refugiar-se 
refuse  recusar 
regular  regtdar 
reign  reinar 
rejoice  regosijar 
relate  coniar,  referir 
j-elieve  socorrer 
rely  fiar-se,  contar  em 
remain  ficar 
remedy  remedio  m. 
remember  lembrar-se; me  to 

him  diga-lhe  muitaa  lembran^as 

minhas 
rend  rasgar 
render  devolver 
renounce  renunciar  a 
repair  concertar,  reparar 
repeat  repetir 
repent  arrepender-se 
reply  responder,  replicar 
report  avisar,  informar,  referir : 

s.  relatorio  m. 
repose  descansar,  repousar 
reproach  censurar,  repreender 
repulse  repulsar 
require  requerir,  exigir 
resemble   assemelhar,  parecer-se 

(com) 
reside  residir,  morar 
resolve   resolver^  decidir 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


417 


rest  descansar,  ficar 
restless  desassocegado 
\  restrain  restringir 
1  return  voltar,  tornar,  restitnir 
reveal  revelar 
revenge  vinganga  f. 
reward  recompensa  f. 
ribbon  fita  f. 
rice  arroz  m. 
rich  rico 

riches  riqueza  f.,  bens  m.  pJ. 
ridiculous  ridiculo 
right    Justo,     direito;      —hand 

direita    f.;    you    are    —    tern 

razao 
ring   annel  m.,   argola  f.\   —v. 

(the  bell)  tocar 
ripen  madurecer 
rise  levantar-se 
risk  risco,  perigo  m. 
river  rio  m. 
road  estrada  f. 
rob  roubar 
robber  lad/rao  m. 
roof  telhado  m. 
room  espago  m.,  aposento,  quarto 

m. 
rose  roi^a  f. 
rotten  podre,  putrido 
round  redondo 
ruin  ruina  f. 
rule  regra  f. 
run  correr ;  —  away  fugir ;  —  to 

acorrer;    —    over  percorrer; 

—  a  ground  frustrar-se. 


S. 
sad  iriste 
safe  salvo 
sage  sdMo 

sail  V.  ira  vela;  s.  vela  f. 
salad  salada  /".,  alface  m. 
sale  venda  f. 
salt  sel  m. 


mesmo 
satisfy  satisfazer 
Saturday  sd(b)bado  m. 
savage  selvagem 
save  salvar 
s&y  dizer 
scarce  apenas 

Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar. 


scholar  alu(tn)no  m. 

school  escola  f.,  aula  f. 

scold  ralhar 

seal  V.  selar;  s.  selo  m. 

season  estagdo  f. 

seaman  maritiheiro  m. 

seat  logar  m.,  assento  m. 

secret  segredo  m. 

seduce  seduzir 

see  ver 

seek  procurar 

seem  parecer 

seize  apanhar 

seldom  raramente 

sell  Vender 

send  mandar,   enviar;    —  away 

mandar  embora,  despedir\    — 

for  mandar^  buscar 
sense  sentido  m. 
September    setembro    (in    dates 

S-)  m. 
servant  criado,  — a 
serve  servir 
set  off,  — out  partir 
settle  arranjar 
sew  coser 

shade,  shadow  sombra  f. 
shame  vergonha  f. 
share  partilhar  em 
shed  (blood)  derramar 
sheep  ovelha  f.,  carneiro  m. 
sheet  folha  f.  (of  a  bed),  lenqo 

■m. 
shine  brilhar^  luzir 
ship  namo  m.,  ndii  f.,  vapor  m. 
shirt  camisa  f. 
shoe  sapato  m. 
shoemaker  sapateiro  m. 
shop  loja  f. 

shore  margem  f.f  praia  f. 
short  breve^  curto 
show  mostrar,  manifestar 
shrub  arbusto  m. 
shun  evitar,  fugir  de 
shut  fechar;  —  in  encerrar 
sick  doente 
side  lado  m. 
sight  vista  f. 
silence  silencio  m. 
silk  seda  f. 
silly  parvo 
silver  prata  f. 

27 


418 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


simple  simples 

since  desde  (que) 

sincere  sincero 

sing  cantar 

sister  imia;    — in-law  cunhada 

sit  (down)  sentar-se 

skate  patinar 

skin  pe(l)le  f. 

slander  dizer  mal  de 

slaughter  matafiga  f. 

sleep  r.  dormir;  s.  s&tnno  m. 

slide,  slip  escorregar 

small  pequeno 

smile  sorrir;  s.  sorriso  m. 

smoke  fumo  m.\  —  v.  fumar 

snow  neve  f. ;  —  flakes  frocos  de 

neve:  —  v.  nevar 
so  assim,  tao\  —  that  tanto  que; 

—  many  tantos 

soap  sabdo  m.,  sdbonete  m. 

sober  sobrio 

soft  mo(l)le,  meigo 

soil  solo  m.,  cliao  m. ;  —  v.  sujar 

soldier  soldado  m. 

solve  (dis)solver 

something    alguma    coisa,    algo 

(de) 
song  canto  m. 
soon  hreve,  logo,  cedo 
sorrow  desgosto  »n.,  mdgoa  f. 
sorry  triste;  I  am  —  sinto,  tenha 

pena 
soul  alma  f. 
sound  sdo,  rijo;  s.  som 
source  fonte  f. 
south  sul  m. 
speak  falar 
spell  aoletrar 
spite,  in  —  of  apesar  de 
spoil  estragar 
spoon  colher  f. 
sport  esporte  m. 
spot  logar 
spread  espalhar 
spring  8.  primavera  f.,  mola  f.; 

—  V.  saltar 
spy  espia  f. 
stagger  cambalar 

stain    mancha,    nddoa  f.;    —  v. 

manchar 
staircase  e8cada(rxa)  f. 


stake  paste  m.,  estaca  f. :  to  be 

at  —  estar  arriscado 
star  estrella  f. 
state  estado  m.,  condirao 
stay  iicar 
step  passo  m. 
stick  pdu  m.,  hengala  f. 
still  ainda 
sting  morder 
stir  mover,  mcxer(-se) 
stocking  meia  f. 
stone  pedra  f. 
stop  imrar 
storm  tempestade  f. 
strange  estranho,  estranjeiro 
strawberry  morango  m. 
street  rim  f.,  caminJio  m. 
strength  forga  f. 
strike  hater,   ferir;  (clock)   dar 

horas 
strong  forte 

study  estudar;  s.  gahinete 
stuff  estofo  VI.,  materia  f. 
subdue  suhjugar,  amansar 
subject  sujeito  m.,  assumpto  m. 
submit  submeter 
subtract  subtrair 
succeed  su(c)ceder,  lograr 
success  su(c)cesso  in. 
successful  bent  su(c)cedido,  felts 
such  tal 
suffer  sofrer 
suffice  bastar 
sufficient  suficiente 
sufficiently  bast  ante 
sugar  assucar  m. 


T. 

thunder  trovdo  m. 

Thursday  quinta-feira  f. 

thus  assim 

tiger  tujre  m. 

till  atS'(a) 

time  tempo  m.,  vez  f. 

timid  timido 

tired  cansado 

to  a,  para;  to-day  hoje;  to- 
morrow dmanha 

too,  —  much  demais,  demasiadOy 
muito 

tooth  dente  m. 


English-Portuguese  Vocabulary. 


419 


top  cimo  m. 

towards  para  (com) 

toweh  toalka  f. 

tower  tor  re  f. 

town  cidade  f. 

tradesman  negociante 

•tragedy  tragedia  f. 

transgress  infringir 

translate  traduzir,  verier 

translation  tradufcjgao  /".,  versaof. 

travel  viajar 

traveller  viajante  m. 

treasure  tesouro  m. 

treat  tratar;  ill —  maltratar 

treatment  tratamento  m. 

treaty  tratado  m. 

tree  drvore  f. 

tremble  tremer 

trouble  inquietar,   desa^socegar, 

inco(m)modar 
true  verdadeiro;  it  is  —  e  ver- 

dade 
trust  confiar  em,  descansar  em 
trutb  verdade  f. 
try  experimentar^  p^'ocurar 
Tuesday  tcrga-feira  f. 
Turkish  turco 
turn  volta  f. 
tutor  preceptor,  tutor  m. 
tyrant  tyra(n)no  m. 

U. 

ugly  feio 

umbrella  parasol  m.,  guarda- 
chuva  m. 

unawares  inesperadamente 

uncle  tio  w. 

understand  coinpre('h)ende>'j  en- 
tender 

undertake  empre(h)cnd€i' 

undo  desfazer 

unfortunate  desgragado 

ungrateful  ingrato 

unhappy  infeliz 

unheard  of  inaudito 

unknown  desconhecido 

unless  a  nao  ser  que 

unsettled  incerto 

upon  em,  sobre,  em  cima  de 

uprightness  rectidao  f. 

use  tiso  m.,  lidbito  m.;  —  v. 
costumar 


useful  lUU 

usually  de  ordindrio 

utter  (cries)  dar  (gritos). 

V. 

vainly  debalde 

valley  val(le)  m. 

valour  valor  w.,  valentia  f. 

variety  variedade  f. 

various  vdrio 

vast  vasto 

velvet  veludo  m. 

very  muitOj  bem. 

vessel  vaso  m.,  navio  m. 

vice  vicio  m. 

victory  victoria  f. 

village  aldeia  /".,  vila  f. 

vinegar  vinagre  m. 

violet  violeta  f. 

virtue  virtude  f. 

virtuous  virtuoso 

visit  s.  visita  f.;    —    v.  visitar, 

freqiientar 
voice  voz  f. 

volume  volume,  tomo  m. 
vow  voto  m.;  —  v.  votar 
voyage  viugem  f. 

W. 

wait  es2)erar 

walk  passear;  s.passeio  m. 

wall  muro  in. 

walnut  noz  f, 

want  falta;    —  v.  precisar;   to 

be  — ed  jfdltar 
war  guerra  f. 
warm  quente 
watch    relogio   m.;    —  v.   velar, 

observar 
water  dgua  f. 
way  caminlio  m. 
weak  fraco 

wear  trazer,  trajar,  vestir 
weariness  cansago,  aborrecimento 

m. 
wearisome  1j^„^,.^ 
weary  j 

weather  tempo  m. 
Wednesday  quarto-feira  f. 
week  semana  f. 

27* 


420 


English-Portugaese  Vocabulary. 


weep  chorar 
weigh  pesar 
well   hem;   to    be  —  esiar  hem 

or  horn 
wheat  tHgo  in. 
when  quando 
where  onde 
whip  chicote  m. 
white  hranco 
whole  iivteirOf  todo 
why  porque? 
wicked  ruim 
wide  largo 

widow  viuva  f. ;  — er  viuvo  m. 
wife  esposa  f.,  mulher  f, 
wild  selvdgem 

willing  prompto ;  to  be  —  querer 
willingly  gostosamente 
win  ganhar 
wind  vento  m. 

wind  up  (a  watch)  dar  cor  da  a 
window  janela  f. 
wine  vinho  m. 
wing  asa  f. 
winter  inverno  f. 
wipe  esfregar 
wisdom  sabedoria  f. 
wise  sdbio,  erudito,  prude^Ue 
wish  desejar 
without  sent 
witness  testemunha  f. 
woman  mulher  f. 
wonderful     admirdvel,     maravi- 

Ihoso 
wood  hosqtie,  madeira  f.,  pdu  m. 


wool  Id  f. 

word  paXavra  f.;  to  keep  one's 

—  cumprir  com  a  sua  pala- 

vra 
work  ohra  f.,  trahalho  m. ;  —  «• 

trahalhar 
workman  operdrio  m. 
world  mundo  m. 
worm  verme  m. 
worse  pear,  pior 
worth  digno;  to  be  —  valer 
wound  ferida  f.\  —  v.  ferir 
wretched  desgragado,  miserdvel 
write  escrever 
writing  letra  f. 
wrong   injustiga;    to  be  —  ndo 

ter  razdo. 


year  anno  m. 

yellow  amarel(l)o 

yesterday  (h)ontem 

yet  ainda 

yield  ceder 

yoke  jugo  m. 

young  novo,  mogo 

joxxth.  juventude,  mocidade  f. 


Z. 

zeal  zHo  m. 
zealous  zeloso 
zero  zero  m. 
zounds!  porDeus! 


com  a  hreca! 


-^ 


421 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary, 


A. 

Ahaixo  [Ts'^ba^fn]  down;  under 
abalar  [vbv'larj  to  shake 
abandonar      [vtundu  na,r]       to 

abandon 
abCb)ade  [is'ta^?]  m.  abbot 
abelha  [v'tisCiv]  f.  bee 
obenQoar  fabensu'arj  to  bless 
aberto  [v'bsrtuj  open 
abolir  fabu'lirj  to. abolish 
aborrecer  f^burr^  'serj  to  abhor, 

displease 
abragar  [vbrv'sar]  to  embrace 
ahreviar  fvbr9v}  'arj  to  abbreviate 
abrigar  febH'gar]  to  shelter 
abrigo  [v'brigu]  m.  shelter 
dbril  [v'brii]  m.  April 
abrir  fv'brirj  to  open 
abuso  /» 'buzuj  m.  abuse 
acabar  [nkv'barj  to  finish 
acaso  [e'kazu]  m.  chance 
acautelado    fvkauta'laduj    cau- 
tious 
acautelar-se     [nT^autd'larsD]      to 

provide 
acQao  [a'svii]  f.  action 
a(c)cento  [is'sentu]  m.  accent 
a{c)c€so  fv'sezuj  lighted 
a(c)crescentar  fvkrgfsen  'tar]  aug- 
ment, increase 
a(c)cusar  [vku'zar]  accuse 
aceitar  fesvi'tarj  to  accept 
acender    [vscn'der]     to     light, 

kindle 
acertar  [■esgr'tar]  to  hit 
achar  f's'far]  to  find 
acido  i'as^d'u]  acid,  sour 


acima  ["e'simv]  over 
aclarar  fvkl^'rarj  to  clear 
ago  f'asuj  steel  m. 
acolher  [vku'fier]  receive 
acompanhar   [vkomp^'jiarj    ac- 
company 
aconselhar  fekostTiar J  to  advise 
acontecer  [vkontd'ser]  to  happen 
acordar  [vkur'darj  to  awake 
acostumar  [vkuftu'mar]  to   ac- 
custom 
acre  ['akrd]  =,  sour 
acreditar  [vkre&i'tar]  to  believe 
activo  [a'tivuj  active 
acto  f'atuj  m.  act,  action 
actor  fa  'tor]  m.  = 
actriz  [a'trif]  f.  actress 
actual  [a'tuaij  = 
addigao  [e&i'svu]  f.  addition 
adiante   [nd}'vntd]    before,    for- 
ward 
adiar  [v&i'ar]  to  adjourn 
adivinhar  [v&9vVjiar]  to  guess 
adoecer  [v&ui'ser]  to  fall  ill 
adormecer  [v&urmd'ser]   to    fall 

or  lull  asleep 
advertir  [vffdvdr'tir]  to  advise 
afadigar  [vfvdi'gar]  to  fatigue^ 

tire 
afamado  [vfts'ma&u]  famous     * 
afastar  [vfvf'tar]  to  remove 
afazeres  [vfv'zerij']  m.  pi.  busi- 
ness 
a(f)fecto  [«'fetuj  m.  affect 
aCPfeigdo  [vfvi'svu]  f.  affection 
a(f)firmar  [y fir' mar]  to  affirm 
a(f)flicto  fv'jlitu]  afflicted 
a(f)fligir  fi-'fli' (jir]  to  afflict 


422 


Portugiiese-Engliah  Vocabalary. 


af(f)luente  feflU'ent^J  m.  affluent 
agarrar  [vgv'rrsir]  to  seize 
igasalho  fvg.v  'zafiu]  m.  lodging, 

shelter 
agradccer  [^girisS^d'ser]  to  thank 
agradecido  [vgrvda'siduj  thank- 
ful 
agradeclmento    [isgrvOdsi  'mSntuJ 

m.  thanks 
agrado  fe'gra&u]  m.  liking 
dgua  f'figws]  f.  water 
aguardar  [legic^r'dstr]  to  await 
ii^udo  [u'gxi&u]  sharp,  pointed 
aguia  ['a'jinj  f.  eagle 
agulha  [j^'gufiv]  f.  needle 
ahi  [y'i]  there 
ainda  [n'ind'B]  still 
ajoelhar  [^^ui'fiar]  to  kneel 
ajuda  [e'^uffv]  f.  help 
ajudar  f^gu'd'arj  to  help 
alar  gar  [vlvr/gar]  to    enlargen 
alcangar    [alkv'sar]    to    reach, 

obtain 
aldeao  [aldl'^u]  m.  peasant 
aldeia  [al'dv}^]  village. 
aUgre  [is'ligri]  gay 
alegria  feh'grivj  f.  gaiety,  joy 
alSi  [a'lvi]  beyond 
alfaiate  [alfBi'ate]  m.  tailor 
alfandega[al'fvnddffB]  f.  custom- 
house 
atfinete  [alffnetd]  m.  pin 
algibeira   [al^i'tvtra]  f.  pocket 
cdgodao  [digu'&vu]  m.  cotton 
alguem  [ai'gvi]  somebody 
algum  [al'giij  some 
alimento  [I'lfmentu]  m.  nourish- 
ment 
Al(l)emanha  jvh'majiv]  f.  Ger- 
many 
al(l)emdo  [^Id'tnvuJ  m.  German 
al(lji  [v'lij  there 
alma  f'aimvj  f.  soul 
ahnofjar  [ahnu'sar]    to  break- 
fart 
almoQO   fai'tnosuj  m.  breakfast 
alto  ['aUu]  high,  tall 
altura  [ai'turv]  f.  height 
alugar  [vlugar]  to  hire,  let 
alumno  fv'lunuj  pupil,  student 
alvo  [aivu]  m.  white,  aim 
dmanfia  [amv'jnv]  to-morrow 


amar  [n'mar]  to  love 
amarelo  [em^'rdu]  yellow 
amargo  [v'margnl  bitter 
amdvel  [v'mavsij  amiable 
ambigdo     fembi'svuj    f.    ambi- 
tion 
anibicioso     [vmbisi'ozuj    ambi- 
tious 
ambos  ['vmbufj  both 
ameaga     [vmy'as'e]     f.    threat, 

menace 
ameagar  [mnw'sarj  to  threaten 
amendoa  [v'mHtidunJ  f.  almond 
americano  [vmeri'kvnuj  Ameri- 
can 
amigdvel  ['emi'gavsij  amicably 
amigo  [n'miguj  m.  friend 
amiudo  [vmi'u&u]  often 
amizade    [vmi'za&d]    f.    friend- 
ship 
amo  ['vmu]  m.  master 
anwr  [n'mor]  love 
amostra  [Ts'mostve]  f.    pattern, 

sample 
ancido  [vsi'mij  m.  old  man 
dncora  ['ykuraj  f.  anchor 
andar  fvn'darj  to  go,  walk 
andorinha  [vndu  'rijiv]  f.  swallow 
dngulo  ['vgidu]  m.  angle,  corner 
angustia  [v'gnftjTs]  f.  anguish, 

pain 
anho  ['isjiuj  m.  lamb 
animal  [eni'mai]  m.  = 
dnimo  /'vnimuj  m.  valour,  cou- 
rage 
anjo  ['i'suj  m.  angel 
a(n)nel  [v'nei]  in.  ring 
a(n)nexo  [v'neksu]  annexed 
a(n)niversdrio  funiv^r' sar^uj  m. 

anniversary 
a(n)nual  [y'nuai]  annual,  yearly 
a(n)nunciar  f^nus^'arj  announce 
a(n)nuncio  fv'7ius}uj  advertise- 
ment 
anoitecer   fenoH^'serJ    to    grow 

night,  darken 
anlever  [Qnt^'verJ  to  foresee 
antigo  [vn'tiguj  ancient 
antiguidade    [vtitigi' ff&C^d]    anti- 
quity 
apagar  [vpv  'garj  to  extinguish, 
quench 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


428 


apanhar    fspv'jiarj    to    grasp, 

catch,  pick 
apartar  ,[vpvr'tarj  to  separate 
apear,  apiar  ['spi'ar]  to  alight 
apenas  [e'penvf]  scarcely 
aperfeigoar  [vparfHsu  ar]  to  ac- 
complish 
apertar  [^pdr'tar]   to  bind,  tie, 

press,  squeeze 
aperto  /» 'pertuj  m.  crowd,  throng 
apoderar-se      [vpu^?' rarse]      to 

seize,  to  take  possession 
apontar    [epon'tarj     to    point, 

aim  at 
aposento  [ispuzentu]  m.  room 
aposta  [n'poftej  f.  wager,  bet 
apostolo  [e'poftuluj  m.  apostle 
a(p)parecer  ['ep'Brd' ser]  appear 
<i(p)parelho^[ypv'ryfiu]   m.    ap- 
paratus 
a(p)pelido  [ep9'lid'uj  m.  surname 
a(p)plauso[v  'plaiczuj  m.  applause 
a(p)plicaQao  [splikv  'svujf.  appli- 
cation 
aCpJplicado  f^pli'ka&uj  diligent 
a(p)proximar  [yprosi'mar]  to  ap- 
proach 
aprego    [^'presu]  m.  estimation 
aprender  [epren'derj  to  learn 
aprendiz     [upren'di:/]    m.     ap- 
prentice 
apresentar  [vptdzen'tar]  to  pre- 
sent, introduce 
apressado  [ypre'sa&aj  hasty 
aproveitar  [spruVBi'tar]  to  profit 
aptiddo  [apti'&yu]  f.  aptness 
aquecer     [^ke'serj      to      warm, 

heat 
uquelle  [^'keh]  that 
aqui  [v'kij  here 
aquietar  [ekis'tarj  to  quiet 
aquillo  [e'kiluj  that 
ar  [arj  m.  air 

arbitrdrio  [srbi  'trariuj  arbitrary 
arhusto  [vr'buftu]  m.  shrub 
arcehispo  [ursd'tifpu]  m.  arch- 
bishop 
arco  ['arkuj  m.  arch 
areia  [i^'reinj  f.  sand 
argola  [vr'golv]  f.  ring 
arguir  [vrguHr]  io  argue 
aria  ['arw]  f.  aria,  air,  song 


drido  f'ari&uj  dry 
arma  f'armvj  f.  weapon 
armazem   [iBrmy'zvt]    m.   ware- 
house, magazine 
arranjar  f^rrv'^arj  to  arrange, 

dispose 
arrdtel  [a'rratei]  m.  pound 
arredores  [vi'r9' (forif]  in.  pi,  en- 
virons 
arrefecer    [vrrdfe'cer]   to    cool, 

catch  cold 
arroz  [v'rrof]  m.  rice 
arte  ['artd]  f.  art 
artigo  [vr'tigu]  m.  article 
artilharia    [vrtifiTs'ri:^]    f.    ar- 
tillery 
artista  [vr'tift^]  in.  artist 
drvore  ['arvurd]  f.  tree 
asa  ['azTs]  f.  wing,  handle 
asno  f'a^nuj  in.  ass 
dspero  f'afpdruj  rough 
assado  f^'sa&uj  m.  roast-meat 
assaltar  fesai'tarj  to  assault 
asseio  [v'sviu]  in.  neatness 
assentar  [vsen'tarj  to  seat,  put 
assento  [v'sentu]  m.  seat 
assignatura  [vsinv  'tur^J  f.  signa- 
ture 
assim  [v'sij  so 
assistir  [vsif'tir]  to  assist 
assucar  [y'sukarj  m.  sugar 
assunto   [v'suntu]  m.  subject 
aasustar  [vsuftarj  to  frighten 
astro  I'aftruJ  m.  star 
atirar      [vti'rar]      to      throw, 

fling 
atraigoar  [ntratsu'arj  to  betray 
atrds  f^'trafj  behind,  after 
atraso  [v'trazu]  m.  delay 
atravessar  [Hravd' sar]  to  cross 
atento  [v'tentu]  attentive 
au(g)mento  [au'mSntuJ  m.  aug- 

^  mentation,  increase 
Austria  ['auftrtvj  f.  = 
autor  [au'tor]  m.  author 
dvido  ['avicfuj  covetous,  greedy 
aviso  [v'vizuj  m.  communication, 

advice 
avo  [v'voj  m.  grandfather 
avo  [ts'vo]  f.  grandmother 
azedo  [v'ze&uj  sour 
azeitona  [ezvi'tonvj  f.  olive 


424 


Portugnese-English  Vocabulary. 


aztd  [is'zui]  blue 
azulejo    [vzu'l^^u]    m.    Dutch 
tile  glazed. 

B. 

bacalhau    [bvkv'dau]    m.    cod- 

fisli 
hacia  [bv'slvj  f.  basin 
baga  ['bag's]  f.  berry,  drop  (of 

sweat) 
bagdgem  fbv'gagvij  f.  luggage 
bago    f'bagu]    m.     grain    of    a 

grape 
bahia    [bv  'ivj    f.     bay ;      B— 

Bahia 
baUar  fbat'larj  to  dance 
baile  [  bath]  m.  ball 
bainha  [b'e'ijiv]  f.  sheatb 
bairro  ['bairru]   m.  quarter  of 

a  town 
baixa  ['ba^p]  decrease;   leave, 

B —  part  of  Lisbon 
baixar  [bay' far]  to  sink,  fall 
baixella,    [bai  felv]  f.  furniture 

for  -the  table ,  silver-plate 
baixio  [bay' fin]   m.    low  water 
baixo  fbai'fu]  low 
bala  f'balv]  ball 
balanca    [bis'lvsa]     f.    balance, 

scales 
balango  [bv'lvsuj  m.  belance 
balcao    fbai'kvu]    m.    balcony, 

counter 
baldado  [bat'da&u]  void 
balde  ['baldd]  m.  bucket 
baloigar  [baloi'sar]  to  balance 
bancada     [bv'ka&s]     f.     pew, 

bench 
baiico  ['bvTcu]  m.  bank 
bandeira     [bvyi'dvtrv]    f.     flag, 

ensign 
bandeja  [bvn'dv^]  f.  tray,  tea- 
board 
bando  f'bvndu]  m.  band 
banho  f'bvjiu]  m.  bath;   — s.  pi. 

banns 
baptismo    [ba'tigmu]     m.    bap- 
tism 
harato  [bv'ratu]  cheap 
barba  f'barbv]  f.  beard;  chin 
barbear  [bvrhy'ar]  to  shave 


barca,  barcaga  ['barks,  bsr'kage] 

f.  bark,  ferry-boat,  lighter 
bar  CO  ['barkuj  m.  bark,  boat 
barra  ['barrv]  f.  bar,  m^uth  of 

a  river;  trimming 
barriga     [bv'rrigv]    f.     belly; 

—  da  perna  calf  of  the  leg 
barril  [b's'rrii]  ni.  cask 
ba7'ro  I'barru]  clay 
barulho  [bv'rufiu]  m.  noise 
bastante      [bvf'tvntd]     enough ; 

rather 
bastar  [  bvf  'tar]  to  be  sufficient 
batalha  [bv'tativ]  f.  battle 
batata  [b's'tatv]  f.  potato 
hater  [bn'ter]  to  beat 
beber  [bd'ter]  to  drink 
bebida  [bd'bi&s]  f.  drink,  potion 
heigo  ['brnsu]  in.  lip 
beijar  [b^fgarj  to  kiss 
beijo  ['bTSi^u]  m.  kiss 
beira  ['bvirvj  brink,  shore;  B — 

Province  of  Portugal 
beiramar    [bvyrTB'mar]    f.     sea- 
coast 
belga  ['bsigsj  m.  and  f.  Belgian 
Belgica  ['bdjjks]  f.  Belgium 
beleza  [bd'lezs]  f.  beauty 
bein  [bv}]  well 

bemfeitor  [bvifui'tor]   m.  bene- 
factor 
bemquisto       [bv}'ktftv]      well- 
beloved 
bengdo  ['besmi]  f.  blessing 
benefko  [bd'ncfyku]  beneficial 
benevolo  [b9'n£vuln]  benevolent 
bento  ['beniu]  consecrated 
benzer(-se)   [be'zer(-sd)]  to  con- 
secrate, to  make  the  sign  of 
the  cross 
berrar  [bj'rrar]  to  scream 
besta  ['befte]  m.  beast,  brute 
biblia  ['biUtv]  f.  Bible 
bicho  [bifuj  m.  worm 
bico  ['biku]  m.  beak,  bill 
bife  I'Ufd]  m.  beef 
bilha  ['bh-r.e]  f.  earthen  pot 
bilhete       [bi'detd]      m.      note, 

billet 
bispo  ['bifpu]  m.  bishop 
boato  ['buatu/  m.  rumour 
boca  I'bokv]  f.  mouth 


Portugnese-English  Vocabulary. 


425 


bocado  [hu'ka&'uj  m.  mouthful, 

piece 
boi  [bofi]  m.  ox 
boia  ['bolts]  f.  buoy 
bola  ['bolv]  f.  ball 
holo  f'boluj  m.  cake,  biscuit 
holor  fbu'lorj  m.  mould 
bolsa  f'boisvj  f.  purse 
bolso  f'boisuj  m.  pocket 
horn,  boa  [bo,  bov]  good 
bondade  [bdn'da&9]  f.  goodness 
honito  [bunituj  nice 
borboleta  [burbu'letvj  f.  butterfly 
bordo  f'borduj  m.  board 
borraefia  [bu'rrafv]  f.   leather 

bottle 
hota  I'bofe]  f.  boot 
bot&o  [bu't^u]  m.  button 
botar  [bu'tarj  to  cast,  throw 
bote  f'botdj  m.  boat 
botica  [bu'tikv]  f.  apothecary's 

shop 
broQO  f'brasuj  m.  arm 
bradar  [br^'&ar]  to  shout 
bramar  /brv'marj  to  roar 
branco  f'brvJcuJ  white 
branquear  fbrvki'arj  to  whiten, 

bleach 
brasdo  [brv'zvu]  arms 
brasileiro  [brvzi'lviru]  Brazilian 
bravo  f'bravu]  brave,  wild 
breve  ['brsm]  brief 
brilhar  [bri'fiar]  to  shine,  excel 
brincar  [brt'har]  to  play 
broa  I'brovJ  f.   bread  of  millet 
bronze  ['brozd]  in.  brass 
burgues  [bur'gej]  m.  citizen 
burro  f'burruj  -w.  ass 
buscar  fbuf'karj  to  fetch 
buxo  f'bufuj  m.  box-tree 

C. 

cdbega  fke'besvj  f.  head 
cabe(l)lo  [kv'behi]  m.  hair 
caber  [kv'ber]  to  find  room  (in) 
cabo  f'kabuj  m.  end,  handle 
eabra  f'kabrvj  f.  goat 
cabrito  [kv'britu]  m.  kid 
caga  ['kasvj  f.  chase 
cacho  [kafu]  m.  grape 
caco  f'kakuj  m.  potsherd 


cada  I'k'o&Ts]  every,  any 
cadeia  [kn'ffvw]  f.  chain 
cadeira   fka'dvtrvj  f.  chair 
cadertio    [h^'&ernu]    m.    copy- 
book 
caes  fkaifj  m.  quay 
cafS  [kv'fe]  m.  coffee-house 
ca(h)ir  [kv'ir]  to  fall 
caixa  ['ka}fv]  f.  box 
caixdo  [kai'fvu]  m.  coffin 
calar  [hs'lar]  to  keep  secret 
calqada  fkai'sad'ej  f.  pavement 
calQodo  [kal'sa&u]  f.  shoes  and 

boots 
calqar    [kai'sarj    to     put     on 

shoes 
calculo  ['kalkulu]  m.  calculation 
caldeira  [kai'dvyrv]  f.  kettle 
caldo  fkaidu]  m.  broth 
calice,  calls  f'kalifj  m.   chalice 
callo  ['kalu]  corn,  hard  skin 
calmo  f'kaimuj  calm 
calor  [kv'lor]  m.  heat 
cama  ['kvmv]  f.  bed 
camara  ['kvmvrv]  f.  chamber 
camarote   [kvmTs'rotd]  m.  cabin^ 

box 
cdmbio  fkemhiuj  m.  exchange; 
letra  de  —  bill  of  exchange 
cambUta  fkim'biftvj  w.  money- 
changer 
caminho  [kv'mijiu]  m.  way 
camisa  fka'mizvj  f.  shirt 
camjiainha  [kvmp^'ijt^J  f.  bell 
campo  f'kvmpuj  m.  field ;  no  — 

in  the  country 
caneca  [k'e'nek^]  f.  miig,  can 
can€l(l)a  [k^'nelej  f.  cinnamon 
canhdo  [kps'jfivu]  m.  cannon 
canna  ['kvnv]  f.  cane,  reed;  de 

asudcar  sugar-cane 
cano  I'k  iBnu]  m.  pipe,  tube 
canon  fkunonj  m.  cannon 
cansaqo  [kv'sasu]  m.  weariness 
cansar  [kv  'sar]  to  tire 
cantar  [kvn'tar]  to  sing 
canto  I'kvntuJ  m.  song 
cdo  [kvu]  m.  dog 
capa  ['kapvj  f.  cloak,  cover 
capaz  [kv'paf]  capable 
capel(l)a  [k^'pdv]  f.    chapel 
capital  fkvjpt'taij  = 


426 


Portaguese-English  Vocabulary, 


capitdo  [kypi'tvu]  m.  captain 
capUulo  [kTs'pitulu]  m.  chapter 
ca(p)tivo  [Tce'tivu]  m.  captive 
oara  ['kar'e]  f.  face 
caracol    [kierv"kolJ     m.     snail; 

helix 
ear  deter  [kv' rater]  m.  character 
carda  f'kardaj  card  ing-comb 
cardeal  fk^rdi'aij  m.  cardinal 
cardo  ['kardu]  m.  thistle 
carga  [Izargv]  f.  load,  burden 
cargo  ['kargu]  m.  charge 
caridade  [kvri'&ad9]   f.  charity 
carjie  ['karnd]  f.  meat 
carneiro  [kvr'n^iruj  m.  mutton, 

ram 
caro  I'karuJ  dear 
carril    [k^'rriij   m.   track ;  pL 

carris  rail 
carro  ['harm]  m.  car,  carriage 
carrudgem  [kvrru'a^vi]  f.   car- 
riage 
carta  ['kartv]  f.  letter 
cartcira   [k^r'tvirv]  f.  pocket- 
book 
carteiro  fkur'tmru]  m.  postman 
carvalho  [kvr'vafiu]  m.  oak 
carvdo  [kvr'vvu]  m.  coal 
casa  ['kazv]  f.  house 
casacdo   [kvzv'kvu]    m.    great- 
coat 
casamento  [kvzTs  'mentu]  m.  wedd- 
ing 
casar  [ku'zar]  marry 
casca  [Icafkv]  f.  bark,  rind 
cascata  [kvf'katv]  f.  cascade 
caso  f'kazuj  m.  case,  accident 
easte(l)lo  [kvf'telu]  castle 
castigar  [kvj'tigar]  to  punish 
easulo  [kazulu]  m.  hull,  husk 
Cauda  fkaud'e]  f.  tail,  train 
causa  f'kausa]  f.  cause,  plea 
cautela      [kau'telv]       caution, 

ticket 
cavalariga  [kewlu'risuj  f.  stable 
cavallo  [kv'valu]  m.  horse 
cear  fs*  'arj  to  sup 
ceMla  [sd'tolv]  f.  onion,  bulb 
cedo  fseO'uJ  soon 
cego  ['seguj  blind 
ceifar  [sei'farj  to  harvest,  cut 
(corn) 


celebrar  [sdh'brarj  to  celebrate 
celebre  f'sehbrdj  famous 
cem  [svij  a.  hundred 
censura  [se'surv]  f.  censure 
centra  f'sentruj  m.  centre 
eera  ['  serv]  f.  wax 
cerco  ['serkuj  f.  circle,  circuit 
cerebro     f  sevdbru]     m.     brain, 

head 
cereja  [sd'rvjv]  f.  cherry 
cerejeira  [sdr}'svyrv]  f.  cherry- 
tree 
cerrar   [sd'rrar]  to  shut,    close 

up 
certeza  [ssr'tezej  f.  certainty 
certiddo    [sdrtt'd'vu]    m.   certifi- 
cate 
certo  f'sertuj  sure,  certain 
cessar  [sd'sar]  to  cease 
ciu  [seuj  m.  heaven,  sky 
chdcara  ['fakvrv]  f.  Bras,  farm, 

country-house 
chaga  [  fagv]  f.  wound 
chamar  ['fvmar]  to  call 
ehamnta  [femnj  f.  flame,  blaze 
chdo    [fyuj     m.     ground,     soil^ 

floor 
charuto  [fv'rutu]  cigar 
chato  r/atu]  flat  - 
chave  ['Sav9]  f.  key 
chegar  ff}'garj  to  arrive 
cheio  f'fvf'uj  full 
cheirar  [fvi'rar]  to  smell 
chicara  ['fikvrvj  f.  cup 
chim,    chines    [Jl,    fi'nef]    m. 

Chinese 
chita  ['fitv]  f.  printed  calico 
chorar  [fu'rarj  to  cry,  weep 
chourigo  [fo'risu]  m.  sausage 
chover  [Ju'verJ  to  rain 
chrisido  [kriftvuj  (m.)  Christian 
chronista   [kru'nijtu]  m.    chro- 
nicler 
chumbo  f'junibuj  m.  lead 
chuvoso  [J'u'vozuJ  rainy 
cicatriz  [sikis  'trifjf.  cicatrice,  scar 
cidade  [si'&a&j]  f.  town 
cigarro  [si'garru]  m.  cigar 
cima  [simv]  f.  top;   em  —  on, 

upon 
cinco  f'siku]  five 
cincoenta  [st'kwentul  fifty 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


427 


circo  ['sirkuj  m.  circus 
circular  [s.Hrhu'larJ  to  circulate 
circulo  f'sirkulu]  m.  circle 
civil  fs9'viij  civil,  polite 
clarear,      clarificar      [klvri'ar^ 
Izlvrffykar]  to  grow  light,  to 
clear 
claro  f'klaruj  clear 
classe  ['klas9j  f.  class,  species 
clima  ['klimv]  m.  climate 
coharde  [ku'f)ardd]  (m.) . coward 
coberta  [ku'bertvj  f.  cover 
cobertor  [kut)9r'torJ  m.  blanket, 

quilt 
cobertura  fka^^r'turvj  f.  cover- 
ing 
cobre  ['kobrgj  m.  copper 
cobrir  [ku'brir]  to  cover 
coclie  f'kofij  m.  coach 
coelho  ['kuvTiu]  m.  rabbit 
collier  [ku'^erj  to  gather,  pluck 
collegial  [kuli^i'al]  collegiate 
collo  f'kjluj  m.  neck,  lap 
collocar  [kulu'kar]  to  put 
tolonia  [ku'lonfv]  f.  colony 
colza  ['koizTs]  f.  barley 
combater  [kombv'ter]  to  combat 
combinagdo      [kOmbinv'sauJ     f. 

combination 
comboio  [kom'boiu]  m.  train 
combustivel    [kOmbuf'tivci]    (w.) 

combustible 
comegar  [kumd'sar]  to  begin 
comedia  [ku'ms&iv]  f.  comedy 
comer  [ku'mer]  to  eat 
co(m)memorar  [kumdmu'rar]  to 

commemorate 
co(m)mercial  [kumdrsi'al]  = 
co(m)merciantefkum9rs}  'vntd]  m. 

merchant 
co(m)m€rcio  fku'mersfuj  m.  com- 
merce 
com(m)eUer  fkunid  'terj  to  commit 
co(m)migo  [kii'migu]  with  me 
co(m)misao  [kumi'svuj  f.   com- 
mission 
c6(m)moda  ['komu  'dv]  f.  chest  of 

drawers 
co(m)modo[komuOu]  commodiiQXJi^ 
co(m)mover  f'kumuverj  to  move 
coCm)muntcagdo  [kumunikv  'svu] 
f.  communication 


eomnosco  [ko'nofkuj  with  us 

coma  ['komu]  how 

companheiro  [kompv'jiutruj  m. 
companion 

comparagao  [kompvrv  'sva]  f. 
comparison 

comparecer  [kompisry  ser]  to 
appear 

compartimento  [kompvrti  'men- 
tuj  m.  division,  compartment 

compasso  [kom'pasuj  m.  com- 
pa8s(e8) 

compatriota  fkompv  'triotv]  m. 
and  f.  country-man  (-woman) 

compendio [kom'pendiu]  m.  com- 
pendium 

completar  [komph'tar]  to  conj- 
plete 

complicar  [komplt'karj  to  com- 
plicate 

composto  [kom'poftuj  compound 

comprar  [kom'prar]  to  buy 

compre(he)nder  [komprien  'derj 
to  comprehend 

comprido  [kom'pri&u]  long 

concdho  [kd'svfhu]  m.  council; 
district 

concertar  fkds^r'tarj  to  mend, 
repair 

concha  ['kofej  f.  shell 

concorrer  [koku'rrer]  to  concur 

concorrencia  fkoku'rresivj  f. 
competition 

concurso  [ko'kursu]  m.  con- 
course, crowd 

conde(m)nar  [kondd'nar]  to  con- 
demn 

condigao  [kondp'svuj  f.  condition 

condisciptdo  [kondtf'sipulu]  m. 
school-fellow 

condiicta  [kOn'dutv]   f.  conduct 

confessar  [kofd'sarj  to  confess 

confianga  fkdffvsvj  f.  con- 
fidence 

con  forme  [kd'form9]  like,  con- 
form 

confuso  [kO'fuzu]  mixed,  con- 
founded 

congratular  [kOgrvtu'lar]  to  con- 
gratulate 

conhecimento  [kojidsi' mentu]  m. 
knowledge 


428 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


conquista  [ko'kiftv]  f.  conquest 
consciencia  [kdfsf'esivj  f.   con- 
science 
conseguir  [kosd'gir]  to  reach 
eonselho  [ko'svfiu]  m.  advice 
consentir  [kosen'tirj  to  consent 
consideragdo    [kosiffdrv  'svuj    f. 

consideration 
consider ar  [kosi&d'rar]  to   con- 
sider 
consist i?'  [kOsjs'tirJ  to  consist 
consoante    [kosu'vntd]    f.    con- 
sonant 
consocio    [ko'sosiu]     m.     com- 
panion, associate 
cansolo  [ko'solu]  m.  consolation 
CQnstaivte  [kdf'tvntdj  steady 
consiar  [kof'tar]  to  appear,  to 

be  said 
constipado [kofW pad'nj ,  estar  — 

to  have  a  cold 
constiiuigdo     [koftitui'svitj      f. 

constitution 
constnicQdo  fkoftru'svuj  f.  con- 
struction 
consuUa    [ko'suitv]  f.  consulta- 
tion 
c(mta  ['kontv]  f.  account,  bill 
contagioso    [kdntv^'ozu]     con- 
tagious 
contar  [kon  'tar]  to  count,  reckon 
contente  [kon'tentd]  content 
contar  [kon'ter]  to  contain 
contettde  [kont^'uffu]  m.  contents 
continuar  [kontinu'arj   to  con- 
tinue 
conto   f'kdntuj   m.   tale,    story; 

—  de  reis  =  1000  milreis 
contra  [^kontrv]  against 
convento  [ko've  ntuj  m.  convent 
conversa,  conversagdo  [ko'versv, 

kdv9rsv's^uj  f.  conversation 
convicQdo    [kovik'svuj    f.    con- 
viction 
convidar  fkovi'&arj  to  invite 
copia  f'kjpiaj  f.  copy 
dor  fkorj  f.  colour 
c^r  [korj,  de  —  by  heart 
coragOo  fkurn'svuj  m.  heart 
cor 6a  [ku'roe,  'krov]  f.  crown 
cor  oar  jku'ruar]  to  crown 
corpo  f'korpuj  in.  body 


correio     [ku'rretuj     m.     post, 
courier;    —  geral  chief  post 
office 
corrente  [ku'rrent?]  f.  current, 

stream 
correr  [ku'rrerj  to  run,  flow 
corresjJonde^icia    fkurrtfpon'de- 

s}vj  f.  correspondence 
corrigir  [kurro'sir]  to  correct, 

to  mend 
cortar  [kur'tav]  to  cut 
corte  fkortd]  m.  edge,  cut  • 
cdrte  ['kortd]  f.  court 
cortejo  [kur'tvju]  m.  train,  at- 
tendance 
cortes  [kiir'tef]  polite 
cortesia  [kurt9'zi:u]  f.  courtesy, 

bow 
cortiga  [kur'tisu]  f.  rind,  bark 
cortigo  [kur'tisu]  m.  bee-hive 
cortir  [kur'tir]  to  tan 
corvo  f'korvuj  m.  raven 
coser    [ku'zer]    to    sew,    coabt 

along 
costa  f'koftvj  f.  coast,  shore 
costumar  [kuftu'mar]  to  be  ac- 
customed 
costura  [kuf'turv]  f.  sewing 
qostureira  [kuftu'rvfi'v]  f.  seam- 
stress 
couro  f'koruj  m.  leather 
couve  ['kovd]  f.  cabbage 
cova  ['kovTs]  f.  hole,  grave 
c6xa  ['kofe]  f.  thigh 
cozer    [ku'zer]    to    cook,    boil, 

bake 
cozido  fku  'zi&r]  m.  boiled  meat 
cozinha  [ku'zijiv]  f.  kitchen 
crdneo  [krvnyu]  m.  skull 
cravo  I'kravxi]  m.  pink,  clove 
creagao  [krjv'svu]  f.  creation 
creador  [kr}v'&or]  m.  creator 
crear  [kr}  'ar]  to  create 
creatura  fkrw'turv]  f.  creature 
cridito  ['kreifitu]  m.  credit,  re- 
putation 
crenga  f'kresv]  f.  faith 
crer  fkrerj  to  believe 
crescer  [krdf'serf  to  grow 
criado,    a  [kry'adu,    krt'a&s]  8. 

servant 
crianga  [krf'vss]  f.  child 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


429 


criar  [kri'arj  to  breed,  produce, 

educate 
crime  ['krimaj  m.  = 
criminoso  [kr^mi'nozuj  criminal 
am  [km]  raw 
cruel  [kru'et]  = 
cruz  [kru'.f]  f.  cross 
cuidado  [kuy  d'adu]  m.  care 
cujo  f'kuguj  whose 
culpa  f'ktiipiej  f.  fault 
cultivar  fkuUi'varJ  cultivate 
cumplice  fkUmplisoJ  m.  accom- 
plice 
c^mtilo   f'kumulu]   m.  heap 
eunhado,     (-a)     pcu'jia&uj     s. 

brother-(8i8ter)-iii-law 
cunho  f'kujiu]  m.  stamp,  coin 
cura  [  kurv]  s.  cure,  curate 
curaiivo   [kurv'tivuj  curing 
curioso  [kuri'ozuj  cu?ious 
curral  [ku'rraij  m.  sheep-fold, 

pen 
curso  ['kursuj  m.  course,  race 
curto  ['kurtuj  short 
cxispir  [kuf'pir]  to  spit 
c\i8ta  ['ku/tsj  f.  cost,  expense, 

pain 
custo    ['kuftuj    m.    cost,     diffi- 
culty 
cutelo  [ku'telu]  »n.  knife 
cutilcida  [kilty la&v]  f.  cut,  wound 
czar  [kd'zar]  m.  = 


D. 

dddioa  f'dadivvj  f.  gift 
dado  [  da&u]  die 
dama  ['dvmv]  f,  dame,  lady 
damasco  [dv  'majku]  m.  damask ; 

apricot 
da(m)no  [dsnuj  m.  damage 
dansa  ['dvsvj  f.  dance 
dar  [darj  to  give 
data  f'datvj  f.  date 
debaixo  [dd'tatfuj  under 
debalde  [dd'tald?]  in  vain 
dihil  I'detii]  weak 
dihito  I'debituJ  m.  debt 
decencia  fdd' sesiv]  f.  decency 
decidir  [ddsd'&ir]  to  decide 
decifrar  [ddsi'frar]  to  decipher 


decima .  [' d€»imv]  f.  tenth 
declaragdo  [ddklvrn'svuj  f.  de- 
claration 
decUnar  [dsldi'nar]  to  decline 
declive  [dd'klivd]  m.  steep 
decoro  [dd'koni]  m.  decorum 
decorrer  fddku'rrerj  to  elapse 
decreto  [dd'krstu]  m.  decree 
decuplo  f'dekupluj  tenfold 
dedal  [da'&al]  m.  thimble 
dedicar  [de&i'kar]  to  dedicate 
dedo  ['ded'uj  m.  finger 
defeito  [d9'faituj  m.  defect 
defender  [ddfen'derj  to  defend 
deferir  [ddfd'rir]  to  defer 
defesa  [ddfeza]  f.  defence 
defeso  fdd'fezuj  m.  forbidden 
definitivo  [ddfdnd'tivu]  definitive 
defronte  [dd  frontd]  opposite 
defunto  [d/funtu]  defunct 
degredo  [dd'gre&u]  m.  exile 
deitar   [dni'tar]   to   lay   down, 

cast 
deixar  [dvi'far]  to  let,  leave 
deleitar  [ddl^i'tar]  to  delight 
delgado  [dd'ga&uj  thin 
deliberar     [ddlitd'rar]     to     de- 
liberate 
delicado  [ddli'kaffu]  delicate 
demais,  demasiado  [do'maif,  dd- 

m'BZt'a&uJ  too  (much) 
demente  [dd'mentd]  foolish,  mad 
demi(t)tir  [ddmd'tir]  dismiss 
democrata[ddmu'kratv]  m.  demo- 
crat 
demora  [dd'moris]  f.  delay 
demostrar   [ddtnuf'trar]    to    de- 
monstrate 
denso  f'desuj  dense,  thick 
dentado  [den'tadu]  toothed 
dente  ['denta]  m,  tooth 
dentista  [den'tiftv]  m.  dentist 
dentro  ['dentruj  within 
dependente  [ddpen  'dentd]  depend- 
ing 
deplorar  [ddplu'rar]  to  deplore 
depor  [dd'porj  to  deposit 
depdsito  [dd'poz^tu]  m.  deposit 
depressa  [d9  presaj  quick 
derradeiro  [ddrrv  'cfviru]  last 
derreter  fdarra'tcrj  to  melt 
derrota  fdd'rrotvj  f.  defeat 


430 


Portuguese-Englieh  Vocabulary. 


desafogar   [ddZBfu'gar]  to  free, 
clear 

desagraddvel  [d9zvgrv  'davd]  dis- 
agreeable 

desalento  ff^^'lentu])^^ 

desanimo  [de  zmiimuj  j  -^ 

desapparecer  [dQzvpvrd'ser]  dis- 
appear 

desapprovar  fdjzapru'varj    dis- 
approve 

desarmamento    [ddzamiv  'mentuj 
m.  disarming 

desarranjo  [ddzv'rrv^u]  m.  con- 
fusion, disorder 

desastre  [d9  'zajtrd]  m.  disaster 

desatar     [dpzu'tarj     to    untie, 
loosen 

desa(tJtengao [ddzvte' svu] f.  want 
of  attention 

desa(t)tencioso    \ 

[ddzutesi  'ozuj  I  impolite, 

desa(t)tento         |     inattentive 
[ddzv  'tentii]    J 

desharatar  [djgbvi'v  'tar]  to  waste 

desbastar  [dl^tvf'tar]  to  rough- 
hew 

desbotar    [df^tu'tarj     to     dis- 
colour 

descalgar  fdffkai'sarj  to  pull  off 
(shoe  or  glove) 

descalgo    [d^f'kahu]    bare-foot- 
ed 

descansar  [dtfkv'sar]  to  rest 

descanso  [d}f'hvsu]  m.  rest,  re- 
pose, ease 

descurga  [d}f'kargv]  f.  discharge 

descqscar  [dt/kvf'karj  to  peel, 
husk 

descender  [dijsen'der]   to    des- 
cend, proceed 

descer  [dff'ser]  to  descend 

descida  [d}f'si&v]  f.   declivity 

descoberta  [dyfkubertv]  f.  dis- 
covery 

descobrir    [dffku'brir]    to    dis- 
cover 

desconfianga   [dtfkdff  'vsv]    dis- 
trust 

desconkecido  [dyfkojfid' si&u]  un- 
known 

desconsolo    [dffko'solu]   m.    af- 
fliction 


descontente    [difkon  tentd]    dis- 
contented 
descoser  [difku'zer]  to  unsew 
descredito  [d}f'kr€d}tu]  m.  dis- 
credit 
desciado  [dyj'kut&u]  m.  descuido 
desculpa  fdi/'kuipvj  f.  excuse 
desde  ['de^^d]  since 
desdem  [df^'&v%]  m.  disdain 
desejo  [dd'zvgu]  m.  desire 
desembarago   [ddzimhis  'ram]    m. 

ease,  quickness 
desencaminhar     [ddztkemi  'jiar] 

to  mislead 
desengano   [dQze'gvnu]    m.    un- 
deceiving 
desenho  [dd'zvjiu]  m.  drawing 
desenvolver  [ddzwoi'ver]  to  de- 
velop, display 
desertar  [ddzdr'tar]  to  desert 
desespero   [ddz}J'p6ni]    m.    des- 
pair 
desfazer  [diffv'zer]  to  undo 
desfeita  fdtf'fvitv]  f.  insult 
desgraga  [d}$'gras^]  f.  disgrace 
designar  [ddzi'jiar]  to  design 
deslumbrar     [d}glum'brnr]     to 

dazzle 
desmaio  fdig'mafu]  in.  swoon 
despacho  [djf'pafu]  m.  dispatch 
despedir  [dtfpd'&ir]  to  dismiss 
despir  [dif'pir]  to  undress 
destine  [dif'tinu]  m.  destiny 
destruir  [diftru'ir]  to  destroy 
deter  [dd'ter]  to  detain 
determinado  [ddtdrmi'naffu]  de- 
cisive 
detrds  [dd'iraf]  behind 
devagar  [daw 'gar]  slowly 
dever  fdd'ver]  m.  duty 
deveras  [dd'vervf]  really,  indeed 
devolver  fdavoi'ver]  to  restore 
dez  [dsf]  ten 

dezembro  fd^'zembruj  December 
dia  f'diaj  m.  day 
didlogo  fd}'alugu]  m.  dialogue 
dictado  [di'ta&ii]  dictation,  pro- 
verb 
di(f)ferenga    [difd'rensv]    differ 

rence 
diCfXicU  [dyfisil]  difficult 
dignidade  [dignt' ffaih]  f.  dignity 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


431 


diligente  [daU'^entd]  diligent 
'^diminuir  [d^mi  'nuirj  to  diminish 
direcgdo  [dire  'svuj  f.  direction  • 
direito [di'rvitu]  straight,  direct, 

m.  right,  law;  pi.  duties 
dirigir  [ddry'^ir]  to  direct 
discipido  [difsipulu]  m.    pupil, 

disciple 
dispensar   fdjfpen'sarj   to    dis- 
pense 
disponivel     fdifpu'niveij      dis- 
posable 
dispdr  [dif'por]  to  dispose 
disputa  fdif'putisj  f.  dispute 
dissolver  [disol'ver]  to  dissolve 
distdncia  [d'lf'tvs'tv]  f.  distance 
distincto     [d^f'tintu]     distinct, 

distinguished 
diverso  [di'versu]  diverse 
divida  ['divid'ej  f.  debt  , 

dividir  [ddva'&ir]  to  divide 
divino  [dd'vinu]  divine 
dizer  [di'zer]  to  say. 
d6  [do]  f.  pain,  compassion 
dobra  [  ddbra]  f.  plait 
dobrar  [du'trar]  to  double 
dobro  f'dobruj  double 
doce  f'dosoj  m.  sweet(meat) 
docil  f'dosjij  docile 
doenca  [du'esv]  f.  illness 
doerde  [du'ent?]  sick 
doloroso  [dulu'rozu]  painful 
dom  [do]  m.  gift 
domestico  [du'msftiku]  domestic 
domicilio  [dumD'silju]  m.  dwell- 
ing 
dominar    [dumt'nar]     to    lord, 

command 
doming 0  [du'migu]  m.  Sunday 
dominio  [du'minju]  m.  dominion 
dona     ['done]     f.     (land)lady, 

owner 
dono  ['donu]  m.    owner,    land- 
lord 
dor  [dor]  f.  pain 
d[ormir  [dur'mir]  to  sleep 
dourar  [do'rarj  to  gild 
doutor  [do' tor]  m.  doctor 
droga  ['drogv]  f.  drug 
droguista  [dru  'giftv]  m.  druggist, 

grocer 
duplo  ['duplu]  double 


duque,  duquesa  ['dvkd,  du'Tceze] 

duke,  duchess 
duragao  [durv'svu]  f.  duration 
durante  [du'rvntB]  during 
durar  [du'rar]  to  last 
dureza  [du'rezv]  hardness 
duro  ['duru]  hard 
duvida  ['duvid'e]  f.  doubt 
duvidar  [duvi'&ar]  to  doubt 
duvidoso  [duvi'&osuj  doubtful 
duzentos  [du  'zentus]  two  hundred 
duzia  ['duziv]  f.  dozen. 


ebuli^Iio  [ibuli'svu]  f.   ebullition 
economico    [iJcu  'njintku]    econo- 
mical 
ediQuo  [idi'snu]  f.  edition 
edificar  [iffj^'kar]  to  edify 
edificio  [i&^'fisiu]  m.  edifice 
edital  [idi'taij  m.  edict 
editor  [i/fi'tor]  m.  = 
educar  [x&u'kar]  educate 
e(f)fectivo  [ifs'tivu]  effective 
e(f)feito  [i'fmtu]  effect 
c(f)ficaz  .[ifi"kaf]  efficaqious 
Egi(x>)to  [i'situ]  m.  Egypt 
ei-lo(s),  eil-a(s)  or  eila  [vilu(]), 

'mln(f)]  there  is,  there  are 
eira  ['v\rv]  threshing-floor 
eis  [yff]  there  is 
electrico  [i'letriku]  electric(al) 
elegante  [iWgvnt?]  elegant 
eleger  [iU^^r]  to  elect 
eleigao  [ilet's^u]  f.  election 
eleito  [i'leitu]  m.  elected 
eleitor  [ilyi'tor]  m.  elector 
eleoar  [ih  'var]  to  raise,  elevate 
elogio  [ilii'^iu]  m.  elogy 
eloquente  [ilu'kwentd]  eloquent 
embaixador     [imbaifv  'ffor]     m. 

ambassador 
embarago    [tmbu'rasu]    m.    em- 
barrassment 
embarcar  [mb^r'kar]  to  emhsLvk 
embeber  [imhd'ber]  to  imbibe 
einbolsar  [imboi'sar]  to  put  into 

a  purse,  pocket 
embolso  [im'bolsu]  pocketing  up 
embora  [tm'borv]    m.  neverthe- 
^    less;  ir  —,  se  —  to  go  away 


432 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


enibranquecer    [tmbrvkd  'serj    to 

whiten,  to  grow  white 
embriagar    ftmbrjv'garj   to    in- 
toxicate; to  transport 
embrulhar  [tmbru'^arj  to  wrap 

up 
embrydho   [Tm'bru^uJ  tn,  parcel 
emendar  [imen'dar]  to  mend 
emigragdo  [imigrv  'svuj   f.  emi- 
gration 
emmagrecer  [imvgrd'sdr]  to  grow 

lean 
emmalar  [imv  larj  to  embale 
emmudecer  [imu&d'ser]  to  silence 
emogao  [imu'svu]  f.  emotion 
empalUdecer    [impvli&d  'serJ    to 

grow  pale 
empenhar  [%m'p9'jfiar]  to  engage, 

pledge 
empenho    [im'pejiuj    m.    pawn, 

engagement 
emplastro  [im'plaftru]  m.  plaster 
empregado  [tmprd'gadfu]  m.  of- 
ficial, functionary 
empregar  [Imprdgar]  to  employ 
emprego  [im'pregu]   m.  employ- 
ment 
empre(h)ender  [mpr}dn' der]  to 

ucdertake 
empresa  [im'prezv]  f.  enterprise 
emprestar  [imprdf  tar]  to  lend 
emprhtimo    fitn  prsfttmuj     m. 

loan 
empurrao  [impu'rrvu]  m.  push 
empurrar[impu'rrar]\^  ^ 

empuxar  [impu  far]   \       ^ 
encadernar  [ikvd'ar  nar]  to  bind 

(books) 
encaminhar  [tkvm}  'jiar]  to  direct, 

guide 
encanar  [ikis'nar]  to  canalise 
encanto  [t'kvntu]  m.  charm 
encargo  [i'karguj  m.  charge 
encarnado  [tkvr'na&u]  incarnate 
encarregado  [ikisrrd' ga&u]  char- 
ged 
encerrar  [Ud  'rrar]  to  shut  or  lock 

up  ^  , 

enchente  [tfent9]  m.  inundation, 

swelling 
tncher  [i'fer]  to  fill,  to  rise 
encobrir  [tkubrir]  to  cover 


encolher    [iku'/ier]    to    shrink, 

shrug 
encommendar    [tkumen  'dar]    to 

recommend 
encontrdo  [ikon'trvu]  m.  shock 
encontrar  [ikon'trar]  to  meet 
encontro  [i'kontru]  m.  meeting 
encosta  [I'kostv]  f.  declivity 
encostar  [tkuf'tar]  to  lean 
enderego  [idd'resu]  m.  direction 
endireitar  [idirvy'tar]   to  make 

straight 
en4rgico  fi'ner^ikuj  energetic 
enfadonho  ftfv  '&opu]  tiresome 
enfasUado    [ifvft}'a&u]     weary, 

loathful 
enfeitar  [ifvt'tar]  adorning 
enfeite  [i'fvitp]  m.  garb,  attire 
enfermar    [ifdr'mar]    to    grow 
,     sick,  fall  ill 
enfermo  [i'fermu]  sick,  ill 
en  for  car  [ifur'kar]  to  hang 
enfraquecer       fifreka  'serf      to 

weaken,  slacken 
enganar  figv'nar]  to  deceive 
engano  fi'gvnu]  m.  error,    mis- 
take 
engarrafar  ftgvrrv'fa)]  to  bottle 
engenho     fl'^vjiu]    m.     engine, 

machine 
engommar  ftgu'marj   to  starch, 

iron 
engraqado     figrv  'sa9u]    merry, 

graceful 
engrandecer  ftgrvnda'serj  to  en- 
large 
enguUr    [igu'lir]    to    swallow, 

devour 
enigma  fi'nigmv]  m.  = 
enjoar    fl^u'ar]  to  be  sea-sick 
enlagar   [Uv'sar]    to    interlace, 

entangle 
enleio    [I'lviuJ    m.    perplexity; 

charm 
enlutar  filu'tar]  to  cover  with 

mourning 
ennohrecer  finubra'serj  ennoble 
enredo  fi'rreffuf  m.  intrigue 
enrolar    firru'lar]    to    roll,    to 

wrap 
enrouque^er  firroks  'serf  to  make 

hoarse 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


433 


ensaio  [I'saiu]  m.  essay,  rehear- 
sal 
entalhar  [TntisTiar]  to  carve 
entdo  [in'tvu]  then;  well? 
£nte  ['entd]  m.  being 
entender   [mten'der]   to    under- 
stand, mean 
entendido  [mten  di&o]  initelligent 
enterro  [in'terroj  m.  burial 
entoar  [intu'ar]  to  tune 
€ntrada  [tn'tra&e]  f.  entrance 
entranhas     [in'trvjivf]    f.     pi 

bowels,  heart 
entrar  [in'trar]  to  enter 
entre  ['enird]  among,  between 
entregar    [intrd'gar]    to    hand, 

deliver 
entregue  [m  'tregd]  delivered  up 
entreter    [mtrd'ter]    to    divert, 

amuse 
entrevista  [mtr9'viftv]  f.  inter- 
view 
entristecer  [mtriftd'ser]  to  sad- 
den 
entrudo  [in'trud'a]   m.   carnival 
enumeragdo     [inumars  's§uj     f. 

enumeration 
envelhecer   [ivefiD'ser]   to    make 

or  grow  old 
envenenar  [ivdno'nar]  to  poison 
enverdecer  [ivdrda'ser]  to   make 

or  become  green 
envolver  [wol'ver]  involve 
enxame  [I'fvmd]  m.  swarm 
enxerto  ft  fertuj  m.  graft,  scion 
e)ixdfre  [i'fofrd]  m.  brimstone 
enxupar      [ifu'gar]      to      dry, 

wipe 
enxuto  [i'futu]  dry 
4pico  f'epikuj  epic 
epidemia  [ipd&i'mia]  f.  epidemy 
epiderma    [ipi' (fermv]    f.     epi- 
dermis 
epigraphe  [i'pigfvfd]  f.  epigraph 
epilogo  [i'pilugu]  m.  epilogue 
epistola     [i'pistulvj    f.    epistle, 

letter 
epoca  ['epiikv]  f.  epoch 
equilihrio   [iki'li:fir}u]  m.   equi- 
librium 
equipdgem    fiJci'pa^viJ    f.   equi- 
page, furniture 
Portuguese  Conversation-Grammar, 


eqiiivaler  [ikivv  'lerj  to  be  equi 

valent 
equivoco  [i'hiviiku]  m.  ambiguous 
ermida  [ir'mi:&v]  f.  hermitage 
ermitdo  firmi'tvuj  m.  hermit 
errar  [i'rrar]  to  err 
erro  ['erru]  m.  error 
erudito  [iru'&itu]  well-read 
erupgdo  [irup'svuj  f.  eruption 
ervilha  [ir'vifiv]  f.  pea 
esboqnr  fijbu  'sarj  to  sketch 
escada  [if'ka&v]  f,  stairs 
escdla  [if'kalvj  f.  ladder,    scale 
escaldar  fifkaidarj  to  scald,  bum 
escapar  [ffkis'par]  to  escape 
escarlate  [ifkvr'latd]  scarlet 
escarnecer  fifkvrnd  'serj  to  scoff, 

rail 
escdrneo  [ifkarniu]  m.  mockery 
escasso  [yf'kasu]  scanty 
esclarecimento  [yjklvrdsi  'mSntu] 

m.  clearing 
escola  [if'kolv]  f.  school 
escolher  [ifku'^erj  to  choose 
esconder  [ffkon'derj  to  hide 
escosses  [ifku'sej]  m.  Scotch 
Escossia  [ifkosiv]  f.  Scotland 
escova  [}'Jko:vv]  f.  brush 
escraviddo  ffjkrvvi  'dvujf.  slavery 
escravo  [if  kravuj  m.  slave 
escrever  fffkro'ver]  to  write 
escripto  fff'kritu]  written 
escriptor  ftfkri'torj  m.  writer, 

author 
escrivaninha    fifkrivv  'nijiaj    f. 

writing-desk 
escrivdo  [ifkri'vvu]  m.  clerk 
escrofulas    fyf'krofulvf]    f.   pi. 

scrofula 
escrupulo  fif'krupulu]  m.  scruple 
escudeiro  fifkii  'd'^yru]  m.  squire; 

upper  servant 
escudo  ftf'kud'uj  m.  shield 
esculptor  f}fkui'torJ  m.  sculptor 
escumoso  ftjku'mosu]  frothy 
escurecer  fifkurd  'serJ  to  darken 
escuro  ftf'kuiruj  dark 
escusa  f}f'kuzvj  f.  excuse 
escusado  fifku  'za&u]  superfluous 
escutar  fyfku'tar]  to  hearken 
esforgar  fiffur'sar]   to    streng- 
then; —  -se  to  endeavour 


484 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


tsforgo  [if'forsu]  m.  effort 
esgotado  [y^gu'ta&u]  exhausted 
esgrima  [t^'griimv]  f.  fencing 
esguio  [i^'giiu]  lank 
esmagar  [i^mv'gar]  to  bruise 
eamaltar  [ys^^al  'tar]  to  enamel 
esm^ro  /?j  meru]  m.  care,  dili- 
gence 
esmola  [ig'molv]  f.  alms 
espago  [if'pasu]  m.  espace 
espagoso  [tfpv'soizu]  espacious 
espada  [if'pa&Te]  f.  sword 
espalhar  ['tfpv'harj  to  scatter 
Espanha  [i/'p^ji^J  f.  Spain 
espanhol  [ifpv'jiotj  Spanish 
espantar  [ifpyn'tar]  to   startle 
espanto  fif'pvntuj  m.  fright 
especial  fifp}s*'aij  = 
especialidade   [ifpis^vli'&ad^d]  f, 

speciality 
espide  [j/'peistid]  f.  species 
espectador  [tfpetv  &or]  m.  spec- 
tator 
especulagao     [ifpdkvlv  'svu]     f. 

speculation 
espelho    [}f'pvfiu]    m.    mirror, 

looking-glass 
esperanga  fifpd'rvsvj  f.  hope 
esperar  [ifpd'rar]  to  wait,  hope 
espertar  [ifppr'tarj  to  awake 
esperto  [i/'pertuj  Bp-nghUj,  brisk 
espesso  [ifj'pesu]  thick,  close 
esphera  [i/'feirvj  f.  sphere 
espiga  [if'pi'.gv]  f.  ear  (of  com) 
espingarda   [}fpl'gar&v]  f.  gun 
espinha  f}f'pijivj  f.  spine 
espinho  [ff'pijiuj  m.  thorn 
espirito  [ifpiriitu]  m.  spirit 
espirrar  [ffpi'rrar]  to  sneeze 
esplendido  [if'plendi&u]  splendid 
esponja  [}f'pO$Ts]  f.  sponge 
espontdneo   [}fpon'tisn}u]  spon- 
taneous 
tspora  [yf'porv]  f.  spur 
esposo,    -a  fif'pozu,   tfpozvj  s. 

husband;  wife 
espreitar  [jfprvi'tar]  to  spy 
espremer  [tfprd'mer]   to   press, 

squeeze 
esquadra  [tf'lcwa&rsj'f.  squadron 
esquecer  ftfke'serj  to  forget 
esquecido  fifke'sid'uj  forgetful 


esquerda  fif'kerdej  f.  left  hand 
esq^ierdo  [ifkerdu]  left 
esquina  ftf'kinvj  f.  corner 
esseficial  [isS'sfiai]  essential 
estabelecimento  [jftvtdhsi  'mSntuJ 

m.  establishment 
estagao  ffftv'svtij  f.  station 
estada  [if'ta&vj  f.  abode 
estado  [{f'taOu]  m.  state 
estaldgem  [}ftv'lagvi]  f.  inn 
eatampa  [ff'timpv]  impressioo, 

print 
estampilha  [if'tvmpifiv]  f.  stamp 
estanciu    [}f'tvsivj    f.    station; 

abode 
estanho  f}f'tvjiuj  m.  tin 
estante  [}f'tvntd]  f.  book-shelf 
estar  [ij'tar]  to  be 
estdtua  [if'tatuv]  f.  statue 
estdtuto  [tfte'tutu]  m.  statute 
eaUf  -a  ['eftd,  'estv]  this 
estender  ftften'derj  to  extend 
estSril  [ff'terii]  sterile,  barren 
estilo  [ff'tiilu]  m.  style 
estima  [tf'tiimv]  f.  esteem 
estimar  [tfti'mar]  to  estimate 
esUmulo  [}f'ti:mulu]  m.  stimulus 
estio  [}f'ti:u]  m.  summer 
estival  [ifti'tai]  = 
estofo  fif'tofuj  m.  stuff,  cloth 
estojo  [}f'to:$u]  m.  case,  box 
estomago  [ff'tdmvgu]  m.  stomach 
estorvo  [tj'torvuj  m.  obstacle 
estrada  ftf'tra&ej  f.  road 
estrado  [yf'tra&u]  m.  estrade 
estragar  fiftrv  'gar]  to  spoil 
estrago  fytragu]  m.  damage 
estrangeiro  [}ftrv  'gvfru]  foreign- 

(er) 
estranhar[}ftrv  'jiar]to  wonder  at 
estranho  ff/'trvjtu]  strange 
estrebaria  [}ftr%hTs'fi:v]  f.  stable 
estreitar  [iftrvi'tar]  to  straiten 
estreito   ftf'trvitu]   m.   narrow, 

strait 
estrella  [tf'trelv]  f.  star 
estremecer  f}ftrdma'ser]  to  shake, 

tremble 
estrondo  [yf'trondu]  m.  cracking 
estudante  [}ftu  '&vnt9]  m.  student 
estudar  [tftu'dar]  to  study 
estudioso  [}ftu' Srtozu]  studious 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


435 


estudo  l)J'tu:&n]m.  learning 
estufa   hf'tufvj    f.    store,    hot- 
house 
estupidez  [tjtupi'def]  f,  stupidity 
estupido  [y"tu:pi&uj  stupid 
eternidade  [Uarni'&ad'sJ  f.  eter- 
nity 
*  eterno  [i'Urnu]  eternal 
ether  ['stsr]  m.  = 
evaciLar  [iw'kwar]  to  evacuate 
evadir   [ivTs'Siir]    to   avoid,   es- 
cape 
evangelho  [ivv'^vfiu]  in.  gospel 
evasdo  fivv'zvuj  f.  evasion 
evidente  [ivi'&entdj  evident 
evitar  [ivi'tar]  to  avoid 
exacto  [(v)i'zatu]  exact 
exagerar  [(v)izv^9'r  ar]   to  ex- 
aggerate 
€xce(i)lencia [(v)if8d'lens}vj f.  ex- 
cellence 
exce(l)lent€  [(■B)ifsd'lentd]  excel- 
lent 
€xce(p)gdo  [(v)ifse'svuj  f.exce^ 

tion 
exce(p)tq  ['if'sstu]  except 
excluir  [ifkluirj  to  exclude 
executar  [izdku'tar]   to  execute 
exemplo  [i'zemplu]  m.  example 
exSrcito  [i'zsrsitu]  m.  army 
exigir  [izi'^vr]  to  claim 
exiliD  [i'zi:l}u]  m.  exile 
existir  [%zif'ti:r]  to  exist 
exito  f'vfzituj  m.  success 
expectativa  [ijpettt'tivv]   f.   ex- 
pectation 
expedir  [}fpd'9i:r]  to  dispatch 
experiincia  [yfp^r}' esiv]  f.  ex- 
perience 
experimento   [tfpdri'mentu]   m. 

experiment 
expirar  [yfpi'rar]  to  expire,  ex- 
hale 
expUcar  ftfpU'karJ  to  explain 
exportar    [}fpur'tar]     to     ex- 
port 
expressivo   [ifpr9'si:vu]  expres- 
sive 
expresso  [if'presu]  express 
expulsar  {ifpul  'sar]  to  expel 
eoctenso  [if'tesu]  extensive 
extracto  [if'tratu]  m.  extract 


extraordindrio  f}/trsordi'nar*uJ 

extraordinary 
eodrimo  [}J'tre:mu]      \      . 
extremoso  [iftrd'mozu]]  ^^^^^e^^^- 


fdbrica  ['fat>rikn]  f.  fabric 
fabricdr    [fvtrikar]   to   manu- 
facture 
fdbnco  [fe  'briikuj  m.  fabrication, 

manufacture 
fdhula  rfaf>ulvj  f.  fable 
fabuloso  ffvibu'lo.'zuj  fabulous 
faca  ['fakv]  f.  knife 
facada  [f'e'ka&v]  f.  stab 
faganha  ffv'svjivj  f.  exploit 
face  ['fasd]  f.  = 
fachada    [fv'fadv]    f.    fa9ade, 

front 
facho  ['fafu]  m.  torci ,  fagot 
fdcil  f'fasiij  easy 
facilitar  [fvsali'tar]  to  facilitate 
facto  ['factu]  m.  fact 
factura  [fa'turvj  f.  facture;  bill" 
fada  f'fadv]  f.  fairy,  fay 
fadiga      [fv  '&i:Qv]       hardship, 

fatigue 
fado   i'fadu]   m^  fate,   popular 

song 
faia  [fa}v]  f.  beech 
faisca  ffv'ifkvj  f.  flake,  flash 
falar  [fv'lar]  to  speak 
falcdo  ffai'kvuj  m.  falcon 
fa(l)l€cer  [field 'ser]  to  die 
fa(l)lecimento  [fvldst'mentuj  tn. 

death 
fa(l)lencia  [fv'les/tv]  f.  failure 
fa(2)Udo  [fv'li:&u]  in  failure 
faUo  ['faisu]  false 
falta  ['faUv]  f.  want 
f altar  [fai'tar]  to  want 
falto  f'faituj  (de)  bare  (of) 
fama  f'fvmvj  f.  fame 
familia  [fv'miiltvj  f.  family 
faminto  ffv'mintuj  hungry 
famoso  Ifv'mo.'zuJ  famous 
fanal  [fv'nal]  m.  lighthouse 
farda  f'fard'e]  f.  uniform 
fardo  I'farduJ  m.  pack 
farejar  [f^rt'^ar]  to  scent 
farelo  [ps'relu]  bran 

28* 


436 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


farinha  [fn'rijivj  f.  meal,  flour 

faro  ['faru]  m.  scent 

farpa      ['farim]     f.     harpoon, 

grapnel 
farpear  [farpy'drj  to  harpoon 
farrapo  [fu'rrapu]  m.  rag 
fartar  [fvr'tar]  to  satiate 
farto  [  fartu]  satiated 
fastio   [fef'tiru]  m.  loathsome- 
ness 
fatal  [fv'tai]  = 
fatia  [fy'ti'vj  f.  slice 
fatigar  [fvti'gar]  to  fatigue 
fato  ['fatuj  m.  clothes 
fausto  f'fauftuj  fortunate 
fava  ['favis]  f.  beau 
favo  [  faviij  m.  honeycomb 
favor  [f^'vor]  m.  favour 
favordvel  [fwu'raveij  favourable 
faxa  [fajv]  f.  band 
fazenda  [fn'sendv]  f.farm;  cloth, 

goods 
fazendeiro  [fvzen'd^tru]  m.  co- 
lonist 
fazer  [fTs'zer]  to  make,  do 
fe  [fe]  f.  faith 
febra  f'febrnj  f.  fibre 
febre  ffcbrs]  f.  fever 
fechar  [f}'far]  to  shut 
f^cho  [  fTsfu]  m.  bolt,  bar 
fecundo  [fykUndu]  productive 
feigao  [fvi'svu]  f.  form,  feature 
feijao  [jf^}'svuj  m.  French  beans 
feio  [fviu]  ugly 
feira  ['f^}ra]  f.  fair 
feitio  [fni'tiu]  m.  fashion,  make, 

shape 
feito  ['ftiHu]  m.  fact,  deed 
feitoria  [fvitu'riv]  factory 
feixe  ['f^fiJ  1^'  faggot 
fel  [fel]  m.  gall 
felicidade  [fdljsf'O'ad'^J  f,  felicity 
felicitar  [fMs}'tarJ  m,  to  felici- 
tate 
Fmx  ['felifj  Felix 
feliz  Ip'lif]  happy 
femea  ffemiv]  f.  female 
feminino  [f?mo' ninu]  feminine 
fenda  f'fendv]  f.  chink,  crack 
fender  ffen'derj  to  cleave 
feno  [  fenu]  m.  hay 
fera  ['fer^J  f.  wild  beast 


feretro  f'ferdtruj  m.  bier 
feria   ['feryv]   f.    daily   wages; 

pi.  holidays 
ferida  [f?  'ri&e]  f.  wound 
ferir  [fd'rir]  to  wound 
feroz  [fd'rof]  fierce 
ferradura  [fdrra  ffurv]  f.  horse- 
shoe 
ferrdgem    [f<f'' rragv}]     f.     iron- 
work 
f err  amenta.  [fdrrv'menfB]  f.  iron 

tools 
ferrar  [fQ'rrarJ  to  shoe 
ferreo  ['ferryu]  iron  ■ 
ferro  ['ferruj  m.  iron 
ferrdlho  [fd'rrofiu]  m.  bolt 
fertil  ['fertiij  fertile 
ferver  fpr'verj  to  boil 
festa  f  fe/tr^J  f.  feast 
festejo  [fff'tv^u]  m.  \  fp_|-  _i 
festivo^  [ftf'tivu]        J  festival 
feto  f'fetu]  m.  fern,  fetus 
feudo  f'fevxlfu]  m.  fee,  fief 
fever  eiro  [fQVo'rviruJm.  February 
fezes  I'fezif]  f.  pi.  dregs 
iiagao  [fiv'svuj  f.  spinning 
fiador  ffiv'd'orj  m.  bail 
fianga  [fi'vs^]  f.  security,  bail 
fiar  [fi'ar]  to  spin 
flcar  [fi'har]  to  remain,  become 
fidalgo  [fi'ffaiguj  m.  nobleman 
fid  [f}£i]  faithful 
figado  f'figs&uj  m.  liver 
figo  ['figuj  m.  fig 
figueira  [f^'g^fr^J  f.  fig-tree 
fUa,    fileira    [filv,    fi'lmrvj    f, 

file,  rank 
filha  ['fifiv]  f  daughter 
iilho  f'fi^uj  m.  son 
filial  [fili'aij  f.  = 
fUtro  f'fiitruj  m.  filter 
fim  [ft]  m.  end 
fmado  [fi'naOuJ  dead 
final  [fi'naij  = 
findar  ffln'dar]  to  terminate 
fineza  ffi  'nezvj  f.  fineness,  civility 
fingir  [fi'jirj  to  feign 
fio  ffiuj  m.  thread 
firvia  /'firmvj  f.  firm,  signature 
firmar    ffir'marj    to   settle,    to 

sign 
firme  ['firmjj  firm 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


437 


fiscal  ffif'kaij  = 
fita  f'fitvj  f.  ribbon 
fiocar  [fUc'sar]  to  fix 
fixo  ['fixsu]  fixed 
flexivel  ffleJc'sivsiJ  flexible 
floco  f'flokuj  m.  flock,  flake 
iior  [florj  f.  flower 
florescer  [flurff'ser]  to  flourish 
floresta  [flu'reftv]  f.  forest 
flucttiar  [flutu'arj  to  float 
fluido  ['flui&u]  m.  fluid 
focinho  [fu'sijiu]  m.  snout 
foco  ['foicuj  in.  focus 
fdfo  [  fofuj  soft,  spongy 
foffdo  [fu'gmi]  m.  hearth,  stove 
fogoso  [fu'^ozu]  fiery 
foguete  [ftt'getd]  m.  rocket 
folar  [fu'larj  m.  Easter-gift 
folgar  [foi'gar]  to  rest,    rejoice 
fdlha  ['fofi-e]  f.  leaf 
folhear   [fofly'ar]  to   turn   over 

the  leaves 
folheto  ffu'^etuj  m.  pamphlet 
fovne  ['fojmd  f.  hunger 
fonte  ['fdnt9]  f.  fountain,  spring 
fora  ['forv]  abroad ;  —  de  with- 
out 
foral  [fu'ral]  m.  charter 
fdrca  fforhv]  f.  gallows,  gibbet 
forga  ['forsTs]  strength,  force 
forgado    [fur'sadu]   m.   galley- 
slave 
forgar  [fur'sarj  to  force,  compel 
forgoso  [fur'sozu]  necessary 
forja  ['fors^J  f.  forge 
fdrma  ['formv]  form 
fdrma  ['formv]  f.  mould 
formar  [fur' mar]  to  form 
formiga  [fur'migvj  f.  ant 
formdso  [fur'mozu]  beautiful 
fornaTha  [fur'naJiv]  f.  furnace 
forno  ['fornu]  m.  oven 
forrar  [fu  'rrar]  to  line 
fdrro  ['forru]  m.  lining 
fortaleza  [furtv'Uzv]  f.  fortress 
forte  [fortd]  strong 
fortificar  [furtdfi'karj  to  fortify 
fortuna  [fur'tun'e]  f.  fortune 
fosso  ['fosu]  m.  ditch 
foz  [fof]  f.  mouth  • 
fraco  I'fraku]  weak 
fractura  [fra'tury]  f.  fracture 


frade  f'frad'^J  m.  monk,  friar 

frdgil  ['fra^rij  fragile 

franco    ['frvku]    frank,    loyal; 

post-paid 
frango,  -a  ['fr^gu,  -'g]  chicken 
franqueza   [frv'kezvj,   f.  frank- 


franquia  [fry'ki.'e]  f.  post-pay- 
ment 
fraqueza  [fr^'Jcezv]  f.  weakness 
frasco  ['frafku]  m  bottle 
fraternal,    fraterno   [frvtdr  'rial, 

frv^ernu]  fraternal 
frecha  ['fref'e]  f.  arrow 
fr^cheira     [frs  fvirTs]    f.     loop- 
hole 
fregids  [fn'gef]  m.  customer 
frei  [frvi]  m.  monk,  brother 
freio  [frviu]  m.  bit,  bridle 
freira  ffrvirtfj  f.  nun 
freioco  f'fr^ifiij  m.  ash-tree 
frente  ['frentej  f.  front-side 
frequentar  [frokwen'tarj  to  fre- 
quent 
frequente  [fr9'kwente]    frequent 
fresco  [frefku]  fresh 
fretar  ffrd'tar]  to  freight 
frete  [  frete]  m.  freight 
frieza  [fr}'ezv]  f.  coldness 
frio  [friu]  cold 

fronteira  [frOn'tvirv]  f.  frontier 
froia  [Jrotv]  f.  feet 
froiixo  ffrofuj  slack,  loose 
fructa  f'frutvj  f.  fruit 
fructifero    [frii'tifdru]    fructi- 
ferous 
fructo  ['frutuj  m.  fruit 
fuga  ['fugis]  f.  flight 
fugir  [fu'sir]  to  fly 
fulminar  ffuimt'narj  to  fulmi- 
nate 
fumar  [fu'mar]  to  smoke 
fumo  ['fumu]  m.  smoke 
fundagdo  [fundy'smi]    f.    foun- 
dation 
fundar  [fUn'dar]  to  found 
fundigao  ffiindiseu]  f.  melting, 

fusion,  casting-house 
fundir  [fun'dir]  to  found 
funeral  [fimd'raij  m.  = 
funil  [fu'niij  m.  funnel 
funileiro  [funi'lviru]  m.  tinker 


438 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


furia  f'furivj  f.  fury 
furidso  [furi'ozuj  furious 
furtar  [fur 'tar]  to  rob,  steal 
furto  [  furtuj  m.  theft 
fuso  f'fuzuj  m.  spindle,  spool 
futU  ffuUiJ  futile 
futuro  [fu'turu]  m.  future 
fuzilar  [fuzi'lar]  to  shoot 


gdbar  fge'barj  to  praise 
gdbinete    fg^bi  'net9j    m.    study, 

closet 
gado  ['gaffuj  m.  cattle 
gaiola  [gay'dlv]  f.  cage 
gaivao  [gai'vvuj  m.  martinet 
galgar  [jal'gar]  to  climb  up 
galgo  [gaigu]  m.  greyhound 
gadjlego  fg^'leguj  m.  porter 
Gd(l)lia  ['galiv]  f.  Gaul,  Gallia 
ga(l)Ucismo  [gvli  'si^muj  wi.Galli- 

cism 
ga(l)Un}iu  [g^'UjivJ  f.  hen 
ga(l)linheiro     [gvli'jimruj     m. 

poulterer 
ga(l)^  [g^lu]  wz:  cock 
galope  [gv'lopd]  %\  gallop 
game(l)la  [gm  'meU]  f.  porringer, 

bathing- vat 
gancho  ['gvfuj  m.  hook,   hair- 
pin 
gangrene  [gv  'grenvj  m.  gangrene 
garihar  [ga'jiarj  gain,  earn 
ganho  f'gajiuj  m.  gain,  profit 
ganir  Igv'nir]  to  howl 
ganso  f'gvsuj  m.  goose 
garfo  ['g&rfu]  m.  fork 
gargalhada      [gvrgv'dadvj      f. 

laughter 
garganta  [gvr'gvntv]  f.  throat 
garoto  [gv'rotu]  m.  street-arab 
garra  [garrv]  f.  claw,  paw 
garrafa  [gv'rrafv]  f.  bottle 
garrido  [gv'rri&u]  nice,  smart 
gastar  [g^ftar]  to  spend 
gcisto  f'gaftuj  m.  expense 
goto  i'gatu]  m.  cat 
gatuno  fgv'tuno]  m.  rogue 
gdvea  ['gavtvj  m.  scuttle 
gaz  Igaf]  m.  gas 


gazeta  [gv'zetv]  f.  gazette,. news 

paper 
gazua  [gn'zu:^]  pick-lock 
geito  f'gvHuJ  m.  turn,  skill 
geitoso  fjet'tozuj  fit,  apt 
gelar  [^9'lar]  to  freeze 
gelea  [^d'lvw]  f.  jelly 
gilo  f'xeluj  m.  ice 
gemer  [gd'mer]  to  lament 
gemido  [ss'mi&u]  m.  groan 
ge(m)ma  f'^emvj  f.  yolk 
ginero  f'jendruj  f.  gender 
generoso  [^dnd'rozu]  generous 
ginio   f'stntu]  m.  genius,   dia- 

racter 
gengiva  fse'^iivvj  f.  gums 
gen7-o  (serruj  m.  son-in-law 
getite  f'^enta]  f.  people 
gentil  [$Sn'ti:l]  genteel 
gentio    [^en'ti'u]    m.     heathen, 

pagan 
geral  f^j'rai]  general 
germdnico  fj9r'in'BnikuJGeYm3.n 
germinar  [^9rmi'narJ  to  germi- 
nate 
gesso  f'^esuj  m.  gypsum 
gesto  ['s^^ftu]  m.  gesture 
ginja  f'siS^J  f-  common  cherry 
girar    f^i'rarj    to    turn,    move 

round 
girasol  [^iru'soi]  m.  = 
giro  ['^iru]  in.  circulation 
glacial  fgln'sfalj  = 
gldria  ['ghnv]  f.  glory 
glorificar  [glurdji'kar]  to  glorify 
glorioso  [glurt'osu]  glorious 
goivo  fgcivu]  m.  gillyflower 
gola  ['golvj  f.  collar 
golfo  I  'goifuj  m.  gulf 
goUso  fgu  'lozuj  lickerish 
golpe  [goip^]  m.  blow 
g6(m)ma  ['gomvj  f.  gum 
gordo  f'gorduj  fat,  greasy 
gordura  [gur'dtirvj  f.  grease 
gorgeta  [gur'^etej  f.  gratuity 
gdrro  fgorruj  m.  cap 
gosar  [gu'zarj  to  enjoy 
gdso  fgozu]  m.  enjoyment 
gostar  [guf'tar]  to  like 
gusto  f'goftuj  m.  taste,  pleasure 
gostosamentelguftjzv  'ment?]  with 
pleasure 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


439 


gostoso  [guf'tozu]  savoury 
g6(t)ta  ['gotTs]  f.  drop 
go(t)tejar  [guti'^ar]  to  drop 
governar  [guvdr'nar]  to  govern 
governo   [gu'vernuj   m.  govern- 
ment 
graqa  f'grasvj  f.  grace,  elegance 
gracejar  [grvs}'^ar]  to  joke,  jest 
gracioso  [grvsfi' ozu]  graceful 
grade  [gra&d]  f.  grating 
graclo  f  gra&uj  m.  rank,  will 
granadeiro      [gr^ny' d'ettu]      m. 

grenadier 
grandeza [grvn' dezTs]  f.  grandeur 
grangear  [grv^t'arj  to  obtain 
graniso  [gr's'mizu]  m.  hail 
grdo  fgrvuj  m.  grain,  corn 
grasnar  [grTs^'nar]  to  croak 
gratidao  [grTstVdvu]  f.  gratitude 
grato  ['gratu]  grateful 
graluito  [gre'tuytu]  gratuitous 
grave  ['gravd]  = 
gramira  [gr'e'vu'.rv]  f.  engraving 
graxa  ['grafv]  f.  blacking 
grelha  ['gr^sdv]  f.  roaster 
gremio  ['gremjuj  m.  guild,  cor-~ 

poration 
grtllo  ['griliij  m.  cricket 
grisalho  [gri'zafiu]  greyish 
grito  ['grUu]  m.  scream,  cry 
grosa  ['grozv]  f.  gross 
groselha  fgru'zvdvj  f.  currant 
grosseiro  [gru'sviru]  clumsy 


grosso  ['gromj  big,  thick 
•unhir    [       ' 
grumble 


grunh  ir    fgru  'jiir 


J    to 


grunt, 


grupo  [grupu]  m.  group 
guarda  ['gnardv]  f.  guard 
guarda-chuva  [gwar&v  'fu:vv]  m. 

umbrella 
guarda-livros [gwar&Ts  'livru/J  m. 

book-keeper 
guardanapo    [gwardv'najmj    m. 

napkin 
guarda-iwrtao    [givar&epur  'tvuj 

m.  porter 
guardar    [gicvr'dar]    to    keep, 

preserve 
guerra  f'gerrvj  f.  war 
guerreiro  [gd' rrvi-rii]  m.  warrior 
guia  ['gi:v]  m.  and  f.  guide 
gxiiar  [gi'ar]  to  guide 


guindaste  [gm'dafte]  m.  crane 
gy(m)ndsio  [gi'naziu]   m.  gym- 
nasium 
gijCmJndstico  [^i'naftiku]   gym- 
nastic. 

H. 

(li)dhU  ['amj  able 

(h)ahilitar  [vddli'tarj  to  enable, 

qualify 
hahitagdo  [atitv-' svu]  f.  habitation 
hdhito  ['abituj  m.  habit 
habitual  [ebitu'aij  = 
habituar  [vMtu  'arj  to  accustom 
hdlito  f'alituj  m.  breath 
harmonia  [vrmu'nin] /".harmony 
hasta  ['affej  f.  spear,  lance 
haste  ['aftd]  stem 
hastear  [vfti'ar]  to  hoist 
haver  [v'ver]  to  have 
haver es  [^'ver}f]  m.  ph  fortune 
hebria,  -a  [i'breuj  Hebrew 
hedimido  ft&t'dnduj  hideous 
Mlice   ['elisd]   m.  helix,    screw- 
propeller 
helvetica  [H'vetiku]  Helvetic 
liera  ['srv]  f.  ivy 
heranga  [i'rv&v]  f.  inheritance 
herdade  [ir'da&9]  f.  heritage 
herdar  [ir'dar]  to  inherit 
herdeiro  [ir'da}ru]  m.  heir 
herde  [i'roi]  m.  hero 
heroico  [i'roiku]  heroical 
herca  f'erwj  f.  herb,  grass 
hesitar  [izi'tar]  to  hesitate 
(h)iate  ['laid]  m.  yacht 
hilaridade  [ilvri'dadd]  f.  hilarity 
hippddromo  [i'po&rumo]  m.  race- 
course 
hirto  f'irtuj  stiff,  rigid 
historiador      [ifturi'e'd'orj      m. 

historian 
historico  [if'torikuj  historical 
historia  [iJ"tor}v]  f.  history 
hoje  ['o^ij  to-day 
hollandes    folvn'defj  rn.   Dutch 
(h)ombro  ['dmbruj   m.  shoulder 
homem  ['omv}]  man 
homendgem  [om9'nagviJ  m.  honi- 

age 
homicida  fum9'si:d'ej  m.   and  f. 
murderer 


440 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


homicidio  [uvid  'si:&fu]  m.  murder 
honesto  [u'nestu]  honest 
honrado  [o'rradu]  \  i^^^^urable 
honroso  [o  rrozuj    ) 
(hjontem  f'dntvtj  yesterday 
Tiora  ['orTs]  f.  hour 

horta  ['orfe]   f.  kitchen- garden 
hortaliga  [ortv'lisvjf.  vegetables 
hortela  [ortd'lv]  mint 
hortelao  [ortd'lvu]  m.  gardener 
horto  f'oHuJ  m.  garden 
hospeddgem  [oJp9' cfa^vi]  f.  hos- 
pitality 
hospedaria  [ofpd&v 'H-.tb]  m.  lodg- 
ing-house 
Iwspede  ['ofpddd]  m.  guest 
hospital  fofpi'tal]  m.  = 
hostil  [of' tit  J  hostile 
humano  fu'mvnoj  human 
h^mid'o  f'umi&uj  damp 
humilde  [u'miidd]  humble 
hungaro  [itg^ruj  m.  Hungarian 
Hungria  fu  'gri:^]  f.  Hungary 


I. 

Iberico  [i'bsrilcuj  Iberian 
igar  [i'sarj  to  hoist 
ida  l'i:&nj  f.  going 
idade  [i'&atd]  f.  age 
idioma  [i&^'omv]  m.  idiom 
iddlatra  [i'&olHry]  idolatrous 
idolo  f'i'duluj  m.  idol 
idoso  [i'ffozu]  aged 
ignobil  [ig'nobiij  ignoble 
ignorante  [ignu'rvntjj   ignorant 
igndto  [ig'notu]  unknown 
igualar  figwv  'larj  to  equal 
igualha   [i'gicafiv]  f.  like 
Uha  f'i'nvj  f.  isle 
ilharga  [i  dargv]  f.  flank,  side 
i(l)legal  fil9'gaij  = 
tmpeto  ['impdtuj  m.  impetuosity 
impettiosofimp^tu'ozuJitDpetuoxis 
impio  [lm'pi:o]  impious 
implorar  [tmplu'rar]  to  implore 
itnpdr  [tm'por]  to  impose 
importardo  [impurtv' svu]  f.  im- 
portation 


importante    [impur'tvntd]     im- 
portant 
importar  [impur'tar]  to  import 
importe  [im'portd]  m.  cost,   sum 
importuno  [tmpur'tunoj  m.  im- 
portune 
impossivel    [impu'siveij    impos- 
sible 
imposto  [im'poftu]  m.-  duty 
impostor  [impuf'tor]  m.  = 
imprensa  [%m  'presvj  f.  press 
impressao     [tmprd'svuj     f.    im- 
.   pressi6n,  print 
impresso  [im'presitj  printed 
imprimlr  [unpr^'tnirj  to  print 
improviso     [zmpru'viizu]      un- 
foreseen 
imprudente     [impi'u' &entd]     im- 
prudent 
impune  [im'pune]  unpunished 
inaudito  [inau'&itu]  unheard  of 
incendio    [t'sendfu]    m.    confla- 
gration 
ince^iso  [z'sesuj  m.  incense 
inchar  [tfar]  to  swell 
incidente.    [isi'dentd]    m.     inci- 
dent 
inclinado  [ikli'na&u]  inclined 
incluir  [iklu'ir]  include 
indusQ  [i'kluzu]  enclosed 
inco(in)modo  [I'komud'uJ  inconve- 
nient, s.  m.  molestation 
incorrer  [iku'rrer]  to  incur 
incredulo  [t'krs&uJu] incredulous 
incrivel  [i'Tcrivei]  incredible 
inculto  [I'hultu]  incult 
Incumbir  [ikum  'birj  to  charge 
indagar  [tndv'gar]  to  inquire 
indemnisar  [inddmni  'zarj  indem- 
nify, compensate 
independente  [independent?]  in- 
dependent 
indice  ['indis?]  m.  index 
indiCf)ferenQa  [indifd'TesTs]  f.  in- 
difference 
indigena    [in'disdn'e]    m.     indi- 
genous 
indigente  [indi'^ent^]  indigent 
indigno  fin'dignuj  unworthy 
indio  ['tndiuj  Indian 
indistincto    [indof'tintu]    indis- 
tinct 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


441 


individuo   [tdd'vi&wu]   m.   indi- 
vidual 
imdizhel  [md9' ziivsi]  unutterable 
indole  f'induUJ  m.  character 
irnddmito  fm'cbmituj  untamed 
indulto  [i'duituj  m.  privilege 
industria  [in '  du:ftr}v]  f.  industry 
mduzir  [tndu'zir]  to  induce 
ifUddto  [i'ne&itu]  un printed 
infa(l)Uvel  [if^'lvvsij  infallible 
infdncia  [I'tysin]  f.  infancy 
infante  [I'fvntd]  infant 
inferior  [Ifdn'or]  = 
inferno  [i'fsrnu]  m.  hell 
i/nfimo      f'ifimuj       verymean, 

meanest 
influir  [iflu'irj  to  influence 
influencia  [iflu'eswj  f.  influence 
informe  [%'forme]  formless 
ingenue  [i'^enuo]  ingenuous 
ingrato  [i'gratu]  ungrateful 
inhospito  [in  ^ofpituj  inhospitable 
inimigo  [ind'imgu]  m.  enemy 
injusto  [i'^uftuj  unjust^ 
i(n)noc€nte  finu'sent?]  innocent 
inquieto  [tki'etu]  uneasy 
inquirir  [ikd  'rir]  to  inquire 
insaluhre  [isv  'luibrdj  insalubrious 
insecto  [i'setu]  m.  insect 
inserir  [iso'rir]  to  insert 
insignificante  [is9gnifi'Mnt9j  in- 
significant 
insipido  fi'si'pid'u^  insipid 
instar  [ij'tar]  to  insist 
instrucQoo     [tftru'svuj     f.     in- 

strucion 
instruir  [iftru  'irj  to  instruct 
instia  f'isuej  f  islet 
insulto  [i'suitu]  m.  insult 
insurgente  [isur'gentdj  insurgent 
Integra    [intdgru]  entire,   righ- 
teous 
inteiro  [in'tetru]  ire,  whole 
inte(l)ligivel[lntdlf  'ji-vsij  intelli- 
gible 
intengdo  [tnte'svu]  f.   intention 
intender  [inten'der]  to  intend 
intento  [in'tentuj  m.  intention 
interesseiro  [intdvd' sviru]  selfish 
inter jeigao   [intdr3^}'svu]   f.   in- 
terjection 
interlocutor  [intprluhu'torj  m.  = 


intermedia  [intdr'ms&iuj  m.  me- 
diation 
interna  [in'terno]  m.  internal 
interprete    [in'terprdtd]   m.    in- 
terpreter 
interrogar  [mterru  'gar]  to  inter- 
rogate 
interromper  [tnt9rrdm  'per]  inter- 
rupt 
interrupto     [mte  'rrutu]     inter- 
rupted 
intestino [intdf'tiinu]  m.  intestine 
intimo  fintimuj  intimate 
intripido  [in'trspidu]  intrepid 
intruso  [in'truzo]  m.  intruder 
inundar  [inun'dar]  to  overflow 
inutil  [i  'nu:tiij  useless 
invadir  [iw  'dir]  to  invade 
invdlido  [I'valiMi]  invalid 
invasdo  [ive'zvu]  f.  invasion 
inveja  [i've^v]  f.  envy 
invenqao  [ive'svu]  f.  invention 
internal  fivjr  'nal]  winterly 
inverno  [i'vsrnu]  m.  winter 
investir  [ivif'tir]  to  invest 
invocar  [tvu'karj  to  invocate 
ir  [i:r]  to  go 
ira  firs]  f.  wrath 
irmd  [ir'mv]  f.  sister 
irmayiar  firms 'nar]  to  match 
irracional     [irrssiu  'nai]    irra- 
tional 
irregular  [irrdgu'lar]  = 
irritar  [irri'tar]  to  irritate 
irrupgao  firrup  'siu]  f.  irruption 
isento  [i'zentu]  exempt,  free 


J. 

Jd  fsa]  already 
jacintho  f^v'sintu]  m.  jacinth 
jacto  f'gaktu]  m.  throw 
jamais  fga'maif]  (n)ever 
Janeiro  f^v'msiru]  m.  January 
jane(l)la  [gv  'nelv]  f.  window 
jantar  [gvn'tar]  m.  dinner 
Japdo  fs^'pso],  a  —  Japan 
japones  fsspu'nef]  Japanese 
jardim  fssr'di]  m.  garden 
jarra  f'sarre]  f.  jar 
jazer  f^v'zer]  to  lie 
jaziga   /j»  'ziigu].  m.  grave 


442 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


to  fast 


jejuar  fs9su'ar] 

jeowm.  /js»'jm7  »"•  fasting 

Jerdnymo    [^d'ronimu]    Jeroni- 

mo 
Joao  [jw'vu]  John 
joelho  ['^wvfiu]  m.  knee 
J090  Tjo^m/  w.  play 
joia  I'soiTs]  f.  jewel 
Jorge  ['s^^S^J  ^-  George 
Jornada  [gur'naffv]  f.  journey 
jornal  fgur'naij  m.  journal 
Jose  [$u'ze]  m.  Joseph 
joven   ^ovvt]   m.   and   f.  young 

man  or  woman 
judeo,  judia   [gu'&eu,    gu'd'i:v] 

Jew,  Jewess 
jugo  t'suguj  m.  joke 
juiz  fgu'if]  m.  judge 
jtdgar  fsui'garj  to  judge 
julho  ['zuHu]  m.  July 
junco  f'^uTcuJ  reed 
junta    ['guntej  f.  juncture,   as- 
sembly 
jurar  fgu'rarj  to  swear 
juro  ['guru]  m.  rent,  interest 
justiga  [guj'tisv]  f.  justice 
justificar  [guftafi'karj  to  justify 
Jiisto  fguftuj  just 
juventude [suven'tud?]  f.  juveni- 
lity 

L. 

L&bio  f'labfuj  m.  lip 

lago  f'lasuj  m.  knot 

lacrar  [Iv'krar]  to  seal 

ladear  [Iv&t'arJ  to  flank 

ladeira  [le'&mrv]  f.  declivity 

lado  ['ladu]  m.  aide 

ladrao,  ladra  [h'&rvu,  la  'd'rv]  s. 

thief 
ladrilho    [Iv'&rirm]   m.    brick, 

tile 
lagar  [In' gar]  m.  wine-press 
lagarta  [Iv'gartv]  f.  caterpillar 
lagarto  [Iv'gartuJ  m.  lizard 
lage  f'lasuj  f-  flagstone 
Ixigo  ['laguj  m.  lake 
Idgrima  ['lagrimv]  f.  tear 
lama  [IvmvJ  f.  dirt,  mud 
lambareiro   [Ivmbu  ivsiru]    glut- 
tonous 
lamber  flnm'berj  to  lick 


lamentar  [Ivmen'tar]  to  lament 
Idmpada  ['Umpv&v]  lamp 
lampejar    /Ivtnpi'garJ   to  shine, 

lighten 
langa  f'lvsvj  f.  lance 
langar  [Iv'sarJ  to  throw,  vomit 
lance  [Ivsd]  m.  throw,  occasion 
lancha  [IvfvJ  f.  launch 
langa  f'lvsuj  m.  throw,  distance 
languir  [ly'gir]  to  languish 
lanifero [Iv'nifdru]  wool-bearing 
lanterna    [Ivn'ternv]   f.  lantern 
lapa  f'lapv]  f.  cave,  den 
lapidar  [Ivpi'&ar]  lapidary 
laranja  [Iv'rvgv]  f.  orange 
lareira  fle'rvirvj  f.  fireplace 
largar  [Ivr'gar]  to  let  go 
largo  [larguj  large,  ample 
larguesa    [Ivr'gezv]    f.  largess, 

generosity 
largura  [Ivr'guruJ  f.  wideness 
lasca  ['laJTcTB]  f.  fragment 
Idstima  ['laftimej  f.  pity 
lastro  [  laftru]  m.  ballast 
lata  f'tatv]  f  tin-plate 
latdo  [Iv't^u]  m.  brass 
lateral  [Ivtd'rai]  = 
latido  fln'ti:(TuJ  m.  yelping 
latim  [Iv  'ttj  m.  Latin 
latino  [Iv'tiinu]  m.  Latin 
latoeiro  [Ivtu'viru]  brazier 
lavadeira  [lvvv'dv}rv]  f.  laund- 
ress 
lavar  flv'varj  to  wash 
lavatorio  [Ivvv'toriu]  m.  washing- 
stand 
lavoura  flv'vorvj  f.  husbandry 
lavrador  [Ivvru  &or]  m.  peasant, 

husbandman 
lavrar  [h'vrar]  to  work,  to  till 
leal  [U'ai]  faithful,  loyal 
ledo  [U'vu]  lion 
lebre  ['hbr^J  f.  hare 
lectivo  [le'ti'.ou]  scholastic 
legal  [h'gaij    = 
legar  [h  'gar]  to  leave,  bequeath 
legenda  [h'^-en&B]  f.  legend 
legivel  [h'giivfl]  legible 
legna  ['hgice]  f.  mile,  league 
lei  [let]  f.  law 
leildo  [Ivi'lt'uJ  m.  auction 
leitdo  [Ivi'tvu]  m.  sucking-pig 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


443 


leite  [Ibitd]  m.  milk 

leiteira  [Ivi'tvirv]  f.  milkmaid 

leito  flvUuJ  bed,  couch 

leitor  [Ivy' tor]  reader 

leitura     [lv}'turv]    f.     lecture, 
reading 

lembranga    [lem'brvsv]    f.     re- 
membrance 

lenibrar  [lem'hrar]  remember 

leme  ['IsmdJ  in.  helm 

lefiQO  ['lesuj  m.  handkerchief 

lengol  [le'soij  sheet 

lenha  ['IvjivJ  f.  wood 

lente  [  'lentd]  s.  f.  = ;  s.  m.  pro- 
fessor, reader 

lento  f'lentuj  slow 

leque  f'lskdj  m.  fan 

ler  [lerj  to  read 

lesma  ['le^mej  f.  slug 

leste  ['IsJhJ  m.  East 

letra    [leti'v]    f.    letter,    type, 
change 

letreiro  [h  'try}ru]  m.  inscription 

levantar  [hv§n  'tar]  to  raise,  lift 

levar  [la'var]  to  carry 

leve  ['lev?]  light 

liber dade  [libdr'dad^?]  f.  liberty 

libra  ['Ivbrv]  f.  pound 

licenqa   [li'sesv]   f.   permission, 
leave 

licito  f'li:situ]  lawful 

lida  ['li:&e]  f.  toil,  labour 

lide  I'li'd'dj  f.  combat,  fight 

liga   [liigis]  f.  garter;    alliance 

ligadura  [ligv'cfu:rv]  f.  ligature 

ligar  [li'gar]  to  tie 

ligeiro  [Wgefru]  light,  slight 

lilaz  [li'laf]  f.  lilac 

lima  ['limv]  f.  file 

Umao  fli'mvuj  m.  lemon 

limite  fli'mit^]  m.  limit 
limoeiro  [limu'struj  m.  lemon- 
tree 

limpar  [lim'par]  to  clean 

limpo  f'limpti]  clean,  neat 

Undo  I'lindu]  beautiful 

lingiia   f'llgun]  f.  tongue,    lan- 
guage 

linha  fUjis]  f.  line 

linho  f'lijiu]  w.  linen 

liquido   ['IvM&u]  liquid 

liriOf  lis  flirtu,  Ii:f]  m.  =,  lily 


liso  f'li'zu]  smooth 
lisongear  [lizdgt'ar]  to  flatter 
lividD  ['lim&u]  livid 
livrar  [li'vrar]  to  deliver,  save 
livraria  [ivrv'ri:^]   f.  library 
livre  ['liiv^d]  free 
lixo  ['U:fu]  m.  filth, 
lobo  f'lobu]  in.  wolf 
lodo  f'lodu]  m.  mud 
logo  [logu]  directly 
lograr  [lu'grar]  to  obtain,  suc- 
ceed 
logro  [logru]  m.  cheating,  fraud 
lonibo  I'lombu]  m.  loins 
Una  [lone]  f.  sail-cloth 
longe  [log}]  far 
longinquo  [Id'gikwu]  remote 
longo  ['l6gu]  f.  long 
louga  ['lost']  f.  table-plate,  china 
louco  ['loJcii]  mad 
louro  ['loru]  fair;  m,  laurel 
lousa  ['lozv]  f.  slate 
louvar  [lo  'var]  to  praise 
lucro  ['luh'u]  m.  profit 
lugar  [lu'gar]  m.  spot  place 
lume  ['luimd]  m.  fire 
lusitano,  luso  [liuzu]  Portuguese 
lustre  ['luftre]  m.  lustre,  gloss 
luta  ['lutv]  f.  fight 
luto  ['lutu]   m.  mourning 
luva  ['Iwvn]  f.  glove 
luxo  ['lufu]  m.  luxury 
luz  [In:/]  f.  light 
luzir  [lu'ziir]  to  shine 
lyceu  [li'seuj  771.  lyceum. 


M. 

Magd  [mu's^]  apple 

macaco  [ma'kaJcuJ  m.  monkey 

magada  [nns'sa&e]  f.  blow  with 
a  mace 

mdchma  ['makinv]  f.  machine 

macio    [mTs'siiu]  smooth,  soft 

madrugada  [m'ed'ru' ga&e]  f.  day- 
break 

maduro  [mV&uroJ  ripe 

mae  [mvi]  m.  mother 

magnifico  [mag'nifiTcu]  magnifi- 
cent 

magna  ['magiiv]  f.  bruise; 
grief 


444 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


magro  fmagruj  m.  meagre,  lean 
maioria  [m'eju'riiv]   mayoralty, 

majority 
mats  [maif]  more 
malentendido  [malentgn'did'uj  m. 

misunderstanding 
malholo[m'B'levulu]mjXid\QYo\eni 
malha  fma^aj  f.  mash. 
malldgro  [mv'logru]  m.  failure 
malvado   [mal'va&u]  m.  wicked 
mamifero  [m^'tnifaruj  m.  mam- 

miferous 
mancebo  [mv'sebu]  m.  youth 
mancha  ['mvfv]  spot,  stain 
manco  ['mvku]  lame 
mandar  [vwn  'darj  to  command, 

send 
maneira  [mv'nvirv]  f.  manner 
manga  ['mvgv]  f.  sleeve 
manha    ['rmsjnv]     f.    handiness, 

cheat 
manha  fmv'ji§J  f.  morning 
mania      [mv'ni:Te]     f.      mania, 

madness 
manifestar  [mvndfif'tarj   mani- 
fest 
mano,  mana   f'mvnu,  'mvnv]  s. 

brother,  sister 
manso  ['mvsu]  f.  tame 
mania  ['mvntv]  f.  blanket,  horse- 
cloth 
manteiga  [mvn  'tvigv]  f.  butter 
manto  f'mvntuj  m.  mantle 
moo  fmvuj  f.  hand 
mar  [mar]  m.  sea 
maravilha  [mvrv'vi^v]   marvel; 

wonder 
marca  ['markvj  f.  mark 
margo  ['marsnj  m.  March 
mare  [mv'rs:]  f.  tide 
mdrgem  ['mar^vi]  f.  border 
marido  [mv'ri:&u]  m.  husband 
marinha    [mv'rijiv]   f.   marine, 

navy 
marinheiro      [mvri'jiviruj     m. 

mariner 
marmelo  [mvr'mdu]  m.  quince 
maroto  [mv'rotuj  m.  knave 
marqius  fmvr'ke:/]  m.  marquis 
martello  [mvr'telu]  m.  hammer 
mas  [mvf]  but 
mdscara  /  mafkvrvj  f.  mask 


massa  ['masv]  f.  haste 
mastigar  [mvfti'garj  to  chew 
mastro  ['maftruj  m.  mast 
niata  fpiatej  f.  wood,  forest 
matahorrao     fmatshu'rrvuj     m. 

blotting-  paper 
matar  [mv'tar]  to  kill 
maternal  [mm9r'nal]  \  j^^ternal 

matinal  [mvti'nal]  early 

mato  I'maiuJ  m.  thicket,  wood 

mdximo      ['masimuj     greatest, 

principal 
mediano  [md&i'vnu]  middling 
medico  ['me&iku]  m.  medical 
medida  [md'&v.&n]  f.  measure 
medir  [md'&ir]  to  measure 
m^do  ['me&uj  m.  fear 
medrar  [md'&rar]  to  thrive 
meigo  ['mvigu]  gentle,  meek 
meio  [mviu]  m.  half,  middle 
mel  fmcij  m.  honey 
melao  [m9'lvu]  m.  melon 
tnelhor  [mi'fior]  better 
m^tnbro  ['membruj  m.   member 
memdria  fma'nijrtvj  f.  memory 
mengao  [me'sdu]  f.  mention 
mendigo    [mgn'diguj  m.  beggar 
menor  fmg'norj  minor 
menos  ['menu/ J  less 
mensal  [me'sai]  monthly 
mente  ['menta]  m.  mind 
mentir  [men'tir]  to  lie 
tnentira  [men'tirej  f.  lie 
mercado  [m<yr'ka&u]  m.  market 
mercadoria     [mdrkv&u  'ri:^J     f. 

ware,  goods 
merce  [mpr'sej  f.  mercy 
mercieiro  [rndrs}  'vtruj  m.  mercer, 

retailer 
merecer  [m9rd'ser]  to  deserve 
merenda  [md'rendv]  f.  afternoon 

tea 
mergulhar  [msrgu'^arj  to  sub- 
merge 
mes  [mefj  m.  month 
mesa  f'mezvj  f.  table 
mesmo  fme^mu]  same 
mestre,  mestra  I'mejtrd,  'meftrv] 

s.  master,  teacher 
metade  fm»'ta&9]  f.  half 
m^trico  f'metrikuj  metrical 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


445 


meter  [md'terj  = 
mexer  [m}'fer]  to  move 
miar  [m}'ar]  to  mew 
migalha  [mi'gv/iv]  f.  crumb 
milagre  [mi'lagrs]  m.  miracle 
milha  ['mv.fivj  f.  mile 
milho  ['mi:fiu]  m.  millet 
7nimo  ['mi:mu]  caress,  mimic 
mimoso  [mi'mozu]  tender 
nvina  ['mi:nv]  f.  mine 
mineiro  [mi'nviru]  m.  mineral 
Minho  I'mijiu]  m.  Minho,   pro- 
vince and  river  of  Portugal 
minimo  ['mi:nimu]  least 
miolo  [mt'olu]  m.  crumb;  brains 
mirar   [mi'rarj  to  look  at 
miseria  [mi'zerjv]  misery 
missa  f'misvj  f.  mass 
mister  [myj'tsr]  necessary 
misturar  [mtjtu'rar]  to  mix 
m6  [mo]  f.  mill-stone 
mohil  ['mdbH]  movable 
mobilia  [mut>i:l}v]  f.  furniture 
moclw  f'mofuj  m.  owe 
mdQO  fmosuj  young 
moda  ['mo&v]  f.  fashion 
moderar  [mu&d'rar]  to  moderate 
modesto  [mu'&eftu]  modest 
modico  ['mo&iku]  moderate 
modista  [mu'diftv]  milliner 
modo  ['mod'u]  m.  mode,  manner 
moida  [mu'e&is]  f.  coin 
moer  [mu'er]  to  grind 
mola  f'molaj  f.  spring 
moldiira  [mol'duirv]  frame 
molhar    [mu'^ar]    to    moisten, 

wet 
molle  [mold]  soft;  lax 
momento  [mu'mentuj  m.  moment 
monarc(h)a  [mu'nark^J   m.  mo- 
narch 
mwije  [md^J  m.  monk 
monstro  ['moftru]  m.  monster 
inontanha  [mOn'tvji'e]  f.  moun- 
tain 
monte  fmOntdJ  Mount 
morada   [mura&aj   f.   dwelling, 

abode 
mor alidade  fmwreli'dadd]  f.  mo- 
rality 
morango    [mu'rvgu]    m.    straw- 
berry 


morar  [mu'rar]  to  dwell 
morder  [mur  'derj  to  bite 
morrer  [w.u'rrer]  to  die 
morte  ['myrtd]  f.  death 
morto  f'mortuj  dead 
mosca  ['mofk'e]  f.  fly 
mostarda  [muf'tardvj  f.  mustard 
mosto  f'moftitj  m.  must 
mostrador  [muftr^  'd'orj  m.  coun- 
ter, dial-plate 
mostrar  [mus'trar]  to  show 
mouraria  fmor^  'ri:vj  f.  quarter 

of  the  Moors  in  Lisbon 
mouro  I'moru]  m.  Moor 
movel  f'moveij  m.  piece  of  fur- 
niture 
mover  [mo'verj  to  move 
movimento  [movi'mentu]  m.  mo- 
vement 
muar  [mu'arj  m.  and  adj. 

mule,  mulish 
muda  ['mu&e]  f.  change 
mudar  [mu'&ar]  to  change 
mudo  I'mu&u]  dumb,  silent 
mugir  [mu'^irj  to  low,  to  roar 
muito  I'mtimtu]  much 
mula  I'mul^J  f.  (she-)mule 
mulher  [mu'fier]  f.  woman,  wife 
mitUa  ['muUv]  f.  fine 
mundano  [mundvnu]  worldly 
mundo  f'munduj  m.  world 
muralha  [mu'raR's]  f.  wall 
murchar  [mur 'far]  to  wither 
murmurio  [mur'mu:r}oJ  m.  mur- 
mur 
muro  ['muru]  m.  wall 
musgo  ['mu^gu]  m.  moss 
musica  ['muzik^J  f.  music 
mutuo  ['mutwuj  mutual 
myope  ['mi:upd]  short-sighted 
mysterio  [mi['ter}u]  m,  mystery 


Naho  ['nat>uj  m.  turnip 
nada  ['na&e]  nothing 
namorado  [namu'ra&u]  amorous 
ndo  [nvu]  no 
nariz  [ms'rif]  m.  nose 
narraQox)  [n^rr^'svuj  f.   narra- 
tion 


446 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary, 


nasceriQa    [nvf'sesvj     f.    birth, 

origin 
nascente  [nvf'senU]  m.  spring 
nascido  [nvj'si&u]  m.  born 
nascimento  [nvfsi  'men  tuj  m.  birth 
nativo  fnv'ti:vuj  native 
natureza  [nvtu'rezv]  f.  nature 
naufrdgio  fnau'fragiuj  m.  ship- 
wreck 
ndufrago   ['naufr^guj   m.  ship- 
wrecked 
naval  [nv'val]  = 
navalha     [nv  'vafiv]     f,     razor, 

pocket-knife 
nave  f'navsj  f.  = 
navegdvel  [niBV9  'gaveij  navigable 
navio  fne  viuj  m.  ship 
nebuloso  [natiu'lo.'zuj  foggy 
necessidade  [ndsdsi' ffaffd]  f.  neces- 
sity 
negar  [nd'gar]  to  deny 
negociante  f7i9gus}'int9j  m.  mer- 
chant 
negro  ['negru]  {m.  =),  black 
nenhum  [n9  'jiumj  none 
neto  ['netuj  m.  grandson 
nevar  [n9'var]  to  snow 
neve  [nevd]  f.  snow 
nevoeiro  [navu'^fruj  m.  fog 
ninho  f'ntjiuj  m.  nest 
nitido  ['niiti&u]  neat 
n6  ['no]  m.  knot 
ndbre  ['nolird]  noble 
noqao  fnu'svuj  f.  notion 
nddoa  f'no&tcTe]  f.  spot,  stain 
nmte  ['noHd]  f.  night 
noiva  ['naive]  f.  bride 
nojo  [no^u]  m.  tedium,  disgust 
nome  ['nomQ]  m.  name 
nomear  [numt'ar]  to  name 
nor  a  ['norv]  f.  daughter-in-law 
nos  [nof]  we 
no8  [nufi  us 
nota  [notv]  f.  note 
notar  [nu'tar]  to  note,  mark 
notdvel  [nu'tavei]  notable 
noUcia  [nu'ti.-swj  f.  notice 
nova  ['njvv]  f.  news 
novSllo  [nu'velu]  m.  clue 
ndvo  ['novu]  new 
nii  [nu:J  bare,  naked 
nuca  ['nukv]  f.  neck 


nu(l)lo  ['nulu]  null 
numero  ['numdru]  m.  number  ' 
numeroso  [numd'rozu]  numerous 
nunca  ['nukvj  never 
nupcias   ['nups^vf]  f.  pi.  wed- 
ding 
nutrir  [nu'trir]  to  nourish 
nuvem  ['nu.'vv}]  f.  cloud 


0. 

Obedecer  [dbdSfg'ser]  to  obey 
obediente   [Obd&i'ents]   obedient 
dbito  I'obitu]  m.  death 
obrar  [o  'brar]  to  work 
obrigagao    [obrig^'svu]    f.  obli- 
gation 
obrigado  [obri'ga&u]  obliged 
obscuro  [obtf'ku:ruJ  dark,   obs- 
cure 
obsequiar  [ob9Z9Jc*' ar]  to  oblige 
observagdo  [ob9S9rvv'svu]  f.  ob- 
servation 
obstdculo    [obtf'tahulu]    m.    ob- 
stacle 
obter  [ob?'ter]  ta  obtain 
o(c)casiao  [okvzt  '%u]  f.  occasion 
o(c)cidente  [os/i'dentd]    m.  west,^ 

Occident 
o(c)correr  [ohu'rrer]  occur 
6cio  fosiu]  m.  leisure 
dculo  ['okulu]  m.  eyeglass 
6dio  ['o&yu]  m.  hatred 
oeste  ['weftd]  west 
o(f)fender  [ofSn'der]  to  offend 
o(f)fensa  [o'fesv]  f.  offense 
o(f)ferecer  [ofdr9'8er]  to  offer 
o(f)ficial  [ofds}' ai]  official,  officer 
o(f)ficina   [ofd'simv]    f.    office, 

(work)  shop 
o(fJficio  [o'fi:s}u]  m.  charge 
olhar  [o  nar]  to  look  at 
olho  ['o^ii]  m.  eye 
oliveira  [oli'vvtrv]  f.  olive-tree 
o^ide  ['Ondd]  where 
opinido  [optny'vu]  f.  opinion 
o(p)por  [o'por]  to  oppose 
o(p)portunO  [opwr'tumuj  oppor- 
tune 
6(p)timo  ['otimu]  best,  very  good 
ora  ['orv]  now 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


447 


oragao     for^'svuj    f.     prayer, 

clause 
orar  [o  'rar]  to  pray 
ordem  ['ordmj  f.  order 
ordenado  [ordd'nadu]  m.  salary 
orelha  [u'rvde]  f.  ear 
orgao  ['orgvu]  organ 
orgvXho  [or'gudu]  m.  pride 
oriente  [or}'entd]  m.  orient,  east 
orificio  [on'fi-.stu]  m.  orifice 
origem  [o'ri:^vi]  f.  origin 
ornar  [or'nar]  to  adorn 
orvalho  for'va/iuj  m.  dew 
osso  f'osuj  m.  bone 
ourives  [o'ri:v}f]    m.  goldsmith 
ouro  [o'ru]  m.  gold 
ousado  [o'za&u]  bold,  daring 
ousar  [o'zar]  to  dare 
outono  [o'tomu]  m.  autumn 
outrem  f'otrvij  somebody  else 
outro  f'otruj  another 
ouvido  [o  'vi-S'uJ  m.  hearing,  ear 
ouvir  [o'vir]  to  hear 
ovelha  [u'vvfiv]  f.  sheep 
ovo  fovuj  m.  egg 
oxald  [ojv'laj  would  to  God! 


Pachorra   [pjs'forrv]   f.  forbea- 
rance, patience 
paclfico  [pv'si.'fikuj    peaceable; 

pacific 
pacote  fp^'kotoj  m.  packet 
pago  f'pasuj  w,  palace 
pddaria  [pad'v'ri:vj  f.  bakery 
padecer  fp's&g'serj  to  suffer 
pddeiro  [pa'&Bjru]  baker 
padrdo  [pv'&rvu]  m.  pattern 
padrmho    [pe'&rijiu]    m.    god- 
father 
pai  [pai]  m.  father 
paga  [pa-gv]  f.  pay(ment) 
pagamento  [pvgv'mentuj m.(j^Sky-) 
-  ment 

pagdo  fpv  'gvuj  m.  pagan 
pdgeni  [paseij  m.  page 
paisdgem    [pai'za^v}]   f.   lands- 
cape 
pais  [pvi:/]  m.  country 
paixdo  [pai'fvu]  f.  passion 
paldcio  [pv'lagyu]  m.  palace 


2)alavra  [pv'lavrej  f.  word 
palha  ['paCiTs]  f.  straw 
pdllido  ['pali&u]  pale 
palma  ['paimv]  pal m(- tree) 
palmeira   [pal'mvirv]  f.  palm 

tree 
pdlpar  [pai' par]  to  touch 
pdlpebra   ['paijjdbrv]    f.   eyelid 
pancada  [pv'katfv]  f.  blow 
panella  [pn'iiehj  f.  kitchen-pot^ 

cooker 
2)anno  f'pvnuj  m.  cloth 
pdo  [pvuj  m.  bread 
papel  [py'i^d]  m.  paper 
para  ['pvr^]  for 
parabens  [pierv  'tvif]  m.  pi.   fe- 
licitation 
pardgem    fp'^'ra^vij  f.  halting- 
place;  abode 
paraiso  [pvrv'ijzu]  m.  Paradise 
parar  fpv'rarj  to  halt,  to  dwell 
pardal  [pvr'dai]  m.  sparrow 
pardo  I'parduJ  grey 
parecer  [pwd'ser]  to  seem 
parecido  [pur/ situ]  alike 
pareddo  [pvrd'&vu]  m.  big  walU 

mole 
parede  [pv're&a]  f.  wall 
pa/relha  [p^'rvlh'ej  f.  pair,  team 
parente   [p'e'rentd]   related  (re- 
lation 
pardchia,  parSquia  fpn'roJav]  f. 

parish 
pdroc(h)o  fparuku]  m.  son 
par  que  f 'parka]  m.  park 
parreira  [x>'is'rr'Birv]  f.  vine 
parte  f'partaj  f.  part 
particij>ar  [pvrtdsi' par]  to  par- 
ticipate, partake 
particular  [pwtiku'lar]  = 
partida  [pyr'tidv]  f.  depart 
partido  [pvr'ti&u]  m.  party 
partir  fpvr'tir]  to   depart;    to 

break 
pascer  [pvf'ser]  to  pasture 
Fdscoa  ['pafkw^J  f.  Easter 
pasmar  [p^s  'fnar]  to  puzzle,  to 

be  stupefied 
passa  ['pass]  f.  raisin 
passdgem  fpv'sagvt]  f.  passage 
passar  [pis  'sarj  to  pass 
pdssaro  ['jiasvruj  m.  bird 


448 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


passear   [pvs'i'ar]   to    (take    a) 

walk 
passeio  fpv'svtuj  m.  walk 
passo  ['pasuj  m.  step 
pasta     [paftTs]     f.      portfolio; 

paste 
pastar  [pvf'tar]  to  pasture 
pastel  Ipvf'tei]  m.  pie,  pastry 
pasteleiro    [pvfta'lHru]  m.  pas- 
try-cook 
pasto  ['paj'tu]  m.  pasture 
pastor  [pef'tor]  m.  shepherd 
pata  f'patvj  f.  claw 
paterno  [ps'fernuj  paternal 
pato  f'patitj  m.  duck 
patrao  [pv'trvu]  patron 
pdtria  ['patri'e]  f.  native  country 
patricio  //;» 'tri:s}uj  m.  patrician 
patroa  [p's'trov]  f.  mistress 
pauta  fpautv]  f.  tariff;  lines 
paiUado  [pau  'ta&o]  ruled 
pacao  [pv'vmi]  m.  peacock 
pavilhao  [pvvi'livu]  m.  pavilion 
paz  [paf]  f.  peace 
pe  [pe]  m.  foot 
peao  [pl'vu]  m.  pedestrian 
Xieqa  ['pssv]  piece,  play 
peccado  [pd'ka&u]  in.  sin 
peda^o  [p9'dasu]  m.  piece,  bit 
pedido    [pq'Mi&uJ    m.    request, 

commission 
pedinte  [pd'&tntd]  m.  beggar 
pedir  [pa' &ir J  to  ask,  beg,  desire, 

order 
liedra  [pe'^rvj  f.  stone 
pega  ['pegv]  f.  magpie 
pegar  [pa' gar]   to  glue,    to   lay 

hold  of 
peito  fp^ftuj  m.  breast 
peixe  ['p^}/}]  m.  fish 
pel(l)e  ['pd/]  f.  skin 
pel(l)ica  [pd  'likvj  f.  kid-leather 
pel(l)o  ['pelu]  m.  hair 
pena   ['pmv]    f.    pain,    punish- 
ment; ter  —  to  be  sorry 
pender  [pen  'derj  1  to  hang, 

pendurar  [jpSndu'rarJ  J  suspend 
penedo  [pd  nedu]  m.  rock 
penetrar  [pmd'trarj  to  penetrate 
penhdr  [pi'jior]  m.  gift,  talent 
penhorar  [pijiu'rar]  to  engage, 
oblige 


penitencia   [pan'i'ies}'e]   f.   peni- 
tence 
penna  ['pen's]  f.  pen,  feather 
penoso  [pd' nozu]  painful 
pensar  [pe'sar]  to  think 
pente  ['pentd]  m.  comb 
pentear  [penti'ar]  to  comb 
p>equeno  [pd'kenu]  little 
pera  ['perv]  pear 
perante  [pd'r^nto]  before 
perceber  [pdrsa'ier]  to  perceive 
percwrer    [pdrku'rrer]    to    run 

through 
per  da  ['perdv]  f.  loss 
perdao  [par'dau]  m.  pardon 
perder  [pdr'der]  to  lose 
perdoar  [pdr'dwar],  to  pardon 
pereeer  [pdra'ser]  to  perish 
pereira  [pd'rmry]  f.  pear-tree 
perfeito  [por'fvitu]  perfect 
perfume  [pdr'fuimd]  m.  = 
perigo  [pd'rvgu]  m.  danger 
periodo  [p9  'riu&u]  m.  period 
permissao    [pdrmi'svu]    f.    per- 
mission 
perna  ['perny]  f.  leg 
perola  ['psrulv]  f.  pearl 
persa  ['psrss]  m.&f.&  a.  Persian 
perseguir    [porsd'gir]    to     per- 
secute 
persiano  [porsyvnu]  a.  Persian 
pertencer  [parte 'ser]  to  belong 
perto  ['psrtu]  near 
pesado  [pa'za&u]  heavy 
pesar  [pd'zar]  to -weigh 
pesca  ['psfkis]  f.  fishing 
pescogo  [pifkosu]  m.  neck 
peso  ['pezu]  m.  weight 
pessego  ['pesagu]  m.  peach 
Ijessimo   ['pssimuj   worst,    very 

bad 
pessoa  [po'sov]  f.  person 
pez  [pef]  f.  pitch 
pharmdcia,  farvndcia  [fvr  masin] 

f.  pharmacy 
photdgrapho,     fotografo     [fu'to- 

grvfu]  in.  photograph 
physico,  fisico['fi:ziJcuJm.  physical 
pia  [pi.ti]  f.  trough,  basin 
picar  [pi'kar]  to  sting 
pimenta  [pi'mentv]  f.  pepper 
pinheiro  [pf'jtV^u]  in.  pine-tree 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


449 


pinho  ['pijiuj  m,  pine-wood 
pintainho   [pintTs'ijfiu]    m.   dab- 
chick 
pintura    [pin'tura]    f.    picture, 

painting 
piano  f'plvnuj  m.  project 
planta  f'plvntvj  f.  plant,   sole, 

ground-plan 
pluma  ['plum's]  f.  feather 
p6  [po]  f.  dust,  powder 
pobre  ['pobre]  poor 
p6co  ['posuj  m.  well 
poder  [pu  'ffer]  m.  might,  power 
poHa,  poetisa  [pu  'eiVj  pui  'tiz^J 

s.  poet 
pois    [poif]    now,     afterwards, 

then,  well 
pdlvora  ['poivumj  f.  powder 
pomba  ['pdmhv]  f.  pigeon 
pombal  [pom'hal]  m.  dove-cot 
ponta  ['pdnfej  f.  point,  top 
ponfe  ['pdnt'j]  f.  bridge 
ponto  ['pdntuj  f.  stitch,  point 
pontual  [pontw'al]  punctual 
por  [porj  to  put 
2)6rco  ['porkuj  dirty,  m.  hog 
porque  I'purkd]  because;  why 
porta  ['port's]  f.  door 
portador  [purtv'&or]  m.  bearer 
portanto      [pur'tvntu]      conse- 
quently 
portdtil     [pur'tatii]     bearable, 

pocket  .... 
porte  ['portd]  m.  post- pay,  depart- 
ment 
portugues  [purtu  gef]  Portuguese 
posse  ['posd]  f.  possession 
possivel  [pu'sl'vei]  possible 
possuir  [pusu'irj  to  possess 
posta  ['poftvj  post 
poste  ['poftdj  m.  stake,  pillar 
pdsto  ['poftu]  m.  place,  post 
pdsto  que  [poftu'ko]  though 
jpmico  ['poku]  little 
poupar  [po'psLr]  to  spare 
povoado    [pu'vuadu]    populous, 

inhabited 
pra^a  ['prasv]  f.  place 
prado  i'pra&u]  m.  meadow 
praia  ['praiv]  f.  shore 
pranto  ['prvntu]  m.  weeping 
prata  ['prafe]  f.  silver 

Portugnese  Convorsallon-Grammar. 


prato  ['pratu]  m.  dish 
prazer  [prs'zerj  m.  pleasure 
prazo  ['prazu]  m.  term 
preceder  [prdsd'der]  to  precede 
precioso  lpr98}'ozu]  precious 
preciso     [prd'sizu]      necessary, 

precise 
2)rego  ['presu]  m.  price 
prefdcio  [p-i-i' fas}u]  m.  preface 
pregar  [pre' gar]  to  preach 
pregar  [prd'gar]  to  nail 
prego  ['pregu]  nail,  hat-pin 
preguigoso  [prdgi'sozu]  lazy 
pergunta  [pdr'gunfB]  f.  question 
prejuizo    [prdgto'lzu]     m.    pre* 

judice 
piSmio  ['premnij   m.  premium, 

prize 
prenda    ['prend'e]   f.    present, 

talent 
presa  ['prezv]  f.  prey 
presents  [prd'zhitd]  (m.)  present 
pressa  ['pres^s]  f.  hurry 
prestar  [pr}f'tar]  to  lend,   give 
pr^stitno  l'pr€ftimu]m.^iueB8,  use 
presunto  [prd'zwitu]  m.  ham 
pretexto  [prd'teftu]  m.  pretext 
preto  ['pretu]  m.^  negro,    black 
primavera  [primv'verv]  Spring 
primeiro  [pri'mvpru]  first 
pHncipe  ['pri^pd]  m,  prince 
prindpiar  [pr%sdp}'ar]  to  begin 
prisdo  [pri'zvu]  f.  prison 
problema  [pru  "blem'e]  m.  problem 
procissao    [prusi'svu]    f.    pro- 
cession 
procurar  [pruku  War]  to  procure, 

seek 
prodigio  [pru'&v^iu]  m.  prodigy, 

marvel 
prddigo  ['pro&igu]  prodigal 
profissdo   [prufi'svu]  m.  profes- 
sion 
profunda  [pru'fun&u]  profoimd 
progresso    [pru'grssu]   m.    pro- 
gress 
projictil  [pru'getil]  m.  projectile 
prdlogo  ['proluguj  m.  prologue 
p>rome(t)ter  [prurrw  'ter]  promise 
pronto  [prontu]  ready 
pronuncia    [pru'nusiv]    f.   pro- 
nunciation 

29 


450 


Portugaese- English  Vocabulary. 


propor  [pru'porj  propose 
prdprio  ['propftu]  proper 
proseguir    [prusd'gir]    to    pro- 
secute 
prova  ['profe]  f,  proof 
provawl  [pru'vavd]  probable 
proveito  [pru'vvHu]  m.  profit 
prdximo    ['prosimuj    next;    m. 

fellow- creature 
Prussia  ['prusfivj  f.  Prussia 
Xyrussiano  fprus}'vnuj  m.  Prus- 
sian 
(pjsalmo  ['salmu]  m.  psalm 
publicar  IpuNi'karJ  to  publish 
jmJmao  [pul'mvu]  m.  the  luDgs 
pulo  ['ptduj  tn.  leap,  jump 
pulsagao  [puisfB  'svuj  f.  pulsation 
pulso  ['ptiisu]  m.  pulse 
punho  f'pupu]  m.  fist;  ruffle 
puro  f'puruj  pure 
puxar  [pu'farj  to  push 


Quadrado   [hwv'ffra&u]    square 
quadragesimo     [kuv&rv  '^ezimu] 

fortieth 
quadro  ['kwa&ru]  m.  picture 
quadrupede    [kwv  '^rupd&d]     in. 

quadruped 
qual  [kwai]  which 
qualidade  [kwvW ffaffd]  f.  quality 
qualificar  [kicvhk'kar]  qualify 
qualquer  [kwai' Jeer]  any 
quando  ['kwvndu]  when 
quantia  [kwvn'ti:n]  f.  sum 
qiiantidade      [kwvnii'&a&d]      f. 

quantity 
quanta    ['kwvntu]   how   much? 

as  much  as 
quarenta  [kwv'rentv]  forty 
quarto  ['kwartu]  room 
quasi  ['kwazi]  almost,  nearly 
quatorze  [kv'torz^J  fourteen 
quatro  [  kivatru]  four 
que  fky,  kij  which;  that;  what? 
qucbrar  [ka'trar]  to  break 
queda  ['kedv]  f.  fall 
queijo  ['kvigu]  m.  cheese 
queimar  [kvt'm&r]  to  burn 
queixa  [  kvtfvj  f.  complaint 
queixo  ['kvyfu]  m.  chin 


quern  pcvtj  who 
quente  ['kentd]  hot 
quer  .  .  quer  [ker]  whether  .  .  or 
querer  [ka'rerj  will,  want 
querido  [To'ri&u]  beloved 
questao  [kif'tvu]  f.  question 
quieto  [ki'etu]  quiet 
quinhentos      [ki'jientufj      five 

hundred 
quinquagesimo  [kwikwiB  '^ezimuj 

fiftieth 
quinta  ['kmtvj  f.  fifth;  farm 
quintal  [km  tal]  m.  —,  garden 
quinto  I'ktntu]  fifth 
quinze  ['kizd]  fifteen 
quotidiano  [kot9d't'vnu]  daily 

R. 

Eabeca  [ri'v'bekv]  f.  violin 
rdbo  f'rrat>uj  m.  tail 
raga  ['rrasv]  f.  race 
rachar  [rre  far]  to  rend,  cleave 
raciocinio  [rrvsfu  'sinju]  m.  rea- 

80n(ing) 
radiante  [rrisdi'Qntd]  radiant 
rainha  [rfe'iyis]  f.  queen 
raio    f'rratu]    m.    ray,    beam; 

flash  of  lightning 
raiva  [Wraivv]  f.  wrath 
raiz-  [rrv'if]  f.  root 
ralhar  [rrv  dar]  to  scold 
ramalhete  [rr^mv' fietd]  m.  nose- 
gay 
ramo  [Wramu]  m.  branch 
rapariga    [rrispa'rigv]    f.    girl, 

lass 
rapaz  [rrv  'paf]  m.  boy,  lad 
raposa  [rrv'pozv]  f.  fox 
raro  [rraru]  rare 
rasgar  [rrv ^' gar]  to  tear 
rasgo  ['rra^gu]  m.  stroke,  trait 
raso  ['rrazu]  shorn 
raio  ['rratuj  m.  rat 
razao  [rrv'zvu]  f.  reason 
real  [rry'al]  = 
rebocar  [rrobu'kar]  to  tow 
rccado   [rrd'ka&u]  m.   message, 

errand 
reca(hjir  [rrekv'ir]  to  relapse 
recebedor    [rrossb^  &or]  m.    col- 
lector 


Portaguese-English  Vocabulary. 


451 


receber  [ms/berj  to  receive 
receio  [rr9'sv}u]  m.  fear 
receoso  [rrdsi'ozu]  apprehensive 
receita  [rr9'svitv]  f.  income 
recente  [rrd'senta]  recent 
recepQao  frr9se'svuj  f.  reception 
reciho  [rd'sibu]  m.  receipt 
reciproco  frr/siprukuj  reciprocal 
recita  ['rrssitv]  f.  representation 
reclamo  [rrd'ld^mu]  m.  bird-call 
recobrar  frrdlcu'brarj  to  recover 
recollier   [rrdlcu'fier]   to  gather, 

with  draw 
recolhimento  [rrdkufii' mentu]  m. 

gathering 
recompensa  [rrshUm'pensv]  f.  re- 
compense 
reconciliar  [rrahdstji'arj  recon- 
cile ^  [ful 
reconhecidofrr9  'Jcujv>  'sidujtha.nk- 
recordagdo  [rrdkur&v'seu]  f.  re- 
membrance 
recreio  [rrd'Tcrvtu]  m.  recreation 
rectidao  [rreti  d'vuj  f.  rectitude 
recto  ['rreluj  righteous 
recuar  [rrd'hwar]  to  draw  back 
recusa  rrd'kuzv]  f.  refusal 
rede  ['rred?]  f.  net  (work) 
redempQao    [rrddvi'svu]    f:    re- 
demption, ransom 
reduzir  [rrd&u'zir]  reduce 
reflectir  [rrdfle'tir]  reflect 
reflexao  [rrdfls'smi]  f.  reflection 
reftexo  [rrd  'flehsuj  m.  reflex 
refugio   [rrd'fu^uj    m.    refuge, 

shelter 
rega  f'rregvj  f.   irrigation,  wa- 
tering 
regago  [rro  'gasuj  m.  lap,  bosom 
regador  [m  'gs  '&or]  m.  watering- 
pot 
regoLo   [rrd'galu]   m.    pleasure, 

muff 
jregar  [rrd' gar]  to  water 
regateira  [rrdgv'ta'irv]  f.   huck- 

^teress 
regedor  [rr}sd'ffor]  m.  governor 
regeneragdo     [rrt^on^rv  'svu]    f. 

regeneration 
reger  [rry'^er]  to  govern 
regicida   [rr}gd' si&is]  m.  and  f. 
regicide 


regist(r)o   frrt' sift(r)uj  m.    re- 
gister 
rego  f'rreguj  m.  furrow 
regosijofrrdgu  ziguj m.  joy,  mirth 
regra  f'rregrvj  f.  rule(r) 
regressar  [rragrg'sarj  to  return 
regua  frregicvj  f.  ruler 
regular  [rr?gu'larj  = 
rei  [rrvi]  m.  king 
reinado  [n'v}'na&u]  m.  reign 
reinar  [rr,ii'nar]  to  reign 
reino  ['rrvjnu]  m.  kingdom 
rHs  Irrif^J]   m.  pi.   Portuguese 

(copper)  coin 
reitor  [rrv%'tor]  m.  rector 
rejeitar  [rry^vi'tarj  reject 
relagcLo  [rrdln'svu]  f.  relation 
reldmpago      [rrd'lympvgu]      m. 

lightning  flash 
relatorio  [rraln'toriuj  m.  report, 

account 
relevo  [rrd'levu]  m.  relief 
reUgio  rrd'hjtuj  m.  watch 
relva  ['rrsiwj  f.  turf 
remar  [rrd' mar]  to  row 
remate  [rrd' maid]  m.  conclusion, 

cornice 
remediado  [rrdmdd"}  'ad'u]  well-off 
remediar  [rrdmddi'ar]  to  remedy 
remedio  [rrd'mediu]  m.  remedy 
remessa  [rrd'mesv]  f.  remittance 
remeter  [rrdmd'ter]  to  remit 
remo  ['rremu]  m.  row 
remorso  [rrd'morsu]  m.  remorse 
remoto  [rrd'motu]  remote 
renda  ['rrendis]  f.  lace 
rendeiro  [rrSn'dviru]  m.  tenant, 

renter 
render    [rren'der]    to     render; 

subdue 
rendimento    [rrendi'mentuj     m. 

revenue 
rendoso  [rren'dozu]  productive 
renegar  [rrdnd'garj  to  disown 
renovar  [rrdnu'var]  to  renew 
renovo  [rrd  'novu]  shoot,  offspring 
renunciar    [rrdnHsf'ar]     to    re- 
nounce 
reo  [rrei]  m.  accused 
repafdv  [rrop^'rar]  to  repair 
reparo  [rrd'paru]  m.  satisfaction, 
attention 

29* 


452 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


repartigdo   [rrdpvrti' svu]  f.   re- 
partition 
repente  [rr9  'pen*9/,(<^^—)  suddenly 
repentino  [rrdpen'tinu]  sudden 
repetir  [rrdpd'tir]  to  repeat 
repleto  [rrd'pletu]  overcrowded; 

fat 
repdlho    [rtd'poflu]    m.    headed 

cabbage 
reposteiro  [rrdpuf'tvvru]  m.  cur- 
tain 
repouso  [rr9  'pozu]  m.  repose,  rest 
repre(h)ender[rrdpr}ender]teT^Te' 

hend 
represa  [rrd'prezvj'f.  lock,  sluice 
reproduzir  [rrdpruifu' zir]  repro- 
duce 
repuoco  [rrd'pufu]  m.  spout 
requerer  [rrdkd'rdr]  to  solicit 
res  [rref]  f.  cattle 
res  [rrEf]  (do  chao)  m.  groundfloor 
resentir  (-se)  [rr9sen'tir(-8d)]  to 

resent 
resfriar  [rryffri'ar]  to  cool 
resina  [rre'zimv]  f.  resin 
resistir  [rrdzif'tiir]  to  resist 
resma  f'rregmnj  f.  ream 
resoluto  frrdzu'lutuj  resolute 
resolver  [rrdzol'ver]  to  resolve 
respeito  frry'pvituj  m.  respect 
respirar  [rryfpi'rar]  to  breathe 
responder  [rrffpon  'derj  to  answer 
restituigao  [rr}ft}tui  svu]  f.  res- 
titution 
resto  ['rreftu]  m.  rest 
resumir  [rrdzu'mir]  to  resume 
resurgir  [rr98ur'$ir]  to  revive 
resusdtar  [rrdsufsi'tar]  resusci- 
tate 
retalho  [rrd'tadu]  m.  remnant 
reter  [rrd'ter]  to  withhold,  re- 
strain 
retirar  [rrdti'rar]  to  retire 
retrato  [rrd'tratu]  m.  portrait 
reiiniao  frrtuni'vuj  f.  reunion 
reverente  [rrovd'rSntd]  reverent 
reverso   [rrd'versu]  m.  opposite, 

back-side 
revez  [rrd'vef]  m.  reverse,  mis- 
fortune 
revtzar  [rrdvd'z&r]  to  do  by  turns 
revisao  [rr9vi'zvuj  f.  revision 


revistar  [rr9mf'tar]  to  revisit; 
reza  ['rrezv]  f.  prayer 
rezar  [rrd'zar]  to  pray 
r(h)eumatismo  [rreum  ib  'ti^m  u]  m . 

rheumatism 
ribeira  frri'bvtrvj  f.  brook,  bank 
ribeiro  [rri'bviru]  m.  rivulet 
ridiculo  [rrd'&tkulu]  ridiculous 
rifa  f'rrifv]  f.  lottery 
rijo  ['rri$u]  strong,  hard 
rim  frrij  m.  kidney 
rima  ['rrimv]  f.  rime 
rio  f'rriuj  m.  river 
riquesa     [rri'kezv]     f.     riches, 

wealth 
rir  frrirj  to  laugh 
risca  [rrif'ica]  f.  stroke 
riso  ['rriizu]  m.  laughter 
roca  f'rroTcaJ  f.  distaff 
rocha  f'rrof^]  f.  rock 
rocio  [rru'siiu]  m.  square 
roda  ['rroffvj  f.  wheel 
rodear  [rrulh'ar]  to  turn  round, 

encircle 
roer  [rru'er]  to  gnaw 
rogar  [rru'gar]  to  entreat 
rogo  f'rroguj  m.   request,    en- 
treaty 
rol  [rroi]  m.  roll,  list 
rola  ['rrolv]  f.  turtle -dove 
rolo  f'rroluj  m.  roll,  cylinder 
romance  [rru'mvsQj  m.  = 
romano  [rru'mvnu]  (m.)  Roma^ 
rosa  ['rrozv]  f.  rose 
rdsto  f'rrojtu]  m.  face 
roto  ['rrotuj  torn 
rotuJo  f'rrotiduj  m.  label 
rotibar  [rro'tar]  to  rob 
rovi>o  f  rrot>uJ  m.  robbery 
rouco  f'rrohuj  hoarse 
roupa  ['rropa]  f.  clothes 
rouxinol  frrofi'noij  m.  nightin- 
gale 
roxo  f'rrofu]  violet 
rua  frruivj  f.  street 
rude  ['rrutfd]  = 
rugir  [rru'^ir]  to  roar 
ruido  [rru'itfu]  m.  noise 
ruivo  f'rruivuj  ruddy 
rumo  f'rrumuj  m.  rhumb-line 
russo  f'rrusuj  Russian 
rustico  ['rru/tihuj  m.  rustic 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


453 


Sabdo  [sv'bvuj  m.  soaj) 
sd(h)hado  ['saibv&u]  Saturday 
saber  fsv'berj  to  know 
sdbio  f'sabtu]  wise,  learned 
sabonete  [sebu'neidj  m.  soap 
sabor  [av'bor]  m.  taste,  savour 
sabre  ['sabrdj  m.  sable 
sacar  [sv  'kar]  to  draw,  pull 
saca-rolhas  [sakis'rofivf]  m.  cork- 
screw 
sa(c)co  I'sakuJ  m.  sack,  bag 
sacrificio  [svkrdfiigiujm.  sacrifice 
sacudir  [svTzu'&ir]  to  shake 
sadio  [sa'MmJ  healthy,  sound 
safar   (-se)   [sv'farisd)]  to  run 

away 
sagrado  [sv'graduj  sacred 
sa(h)ir  [sn'irj  to  go  (out) 
saia  [saiiv]  f.  petticoat 
saibro  f'saibruj  m.  gravel 
Sal  [saij  m.  salt 
salada  [sv'lad'v]  f.  salad 
saldrio  fsv'larfuj  m.  salary 
salgar  [sal' gar]  to  salt 
salitre  [sv'liitrd]  m.  saltpetre 
saliva  [sv'lvvv]  f.  = 
salmdo  [sal'mvu]  m.  salmon 
salsa  [salse]  f.  parsley 
saltar  [sal  'tar]  to  jump 
saltear  [saUy'ar]  to  assault 
salto  f'saltu]  m.  jump 
salvar  [sal'var]  to  save 
salm  f'salvu]  safe 
sanar  [se'nar]  to  cure,  heal 
sanear  [svny'ar]  to  make  whole- 
some 
satrgria  [s^'griiv]  f.  bleeding 
sangue  [  siegd]  m.  blood 
santificar  [s§nt9fi'kar]  to  sanctify 
santo  I'sintu]  m.  saint 
sapateiro   [svpv'tvtru]    m.  shoe- 
maker 
sapato  fsv'patu]  in.  shor 
sapo  ['sapu]  m.  toad 
saque  ['sakd]  m.  pillage,  (drawing 

of  a)  bill  of  exchange 
saraiva  [sv'rviw]  f.  hail 
sardinha  [svr'dijiv]  f.  sardine 
satisfa(c)Qdo  [siBtiffv  'smi]  f.  satis- 
faction 


satisfazer  [svtyffv  'zer]  to  satisfy 
saiidade  [svu  &ad'd]  f.  melancho- 
ly, longing 
saudar  [s^u'&ar]  to  salute 
saude  [sv'u&9]  f.  health 
saudoso  [svu'&ozu]  melancholic 
scenario  [sd'nariu]  m.  scenery 
sce(p)tro  ['s€tru]  m.  sceptre 
sciencia.fsi'estvj  f.  science 
scientifico  [sfen'tiflku]  scientific 
scismar  [sis  'mar]  to  muse^  medi- 
tate 
se  [se]  f.  see,  cathedral 
sebe  ['sebd]  f.  hedge 
sebo  ['sebuj  m.  tallow 
8e(c)ca  ['sekv]  f.  dryness 
se(c)co  I'sekuJ  dry 
secreto  [sd'kretu]  secret 
seculo  ['sekulu]  m.  century 
seda  ['sed'v]  f.  silk 
side  ['se&dj  f.  seat 
sede  ['se&9j  f.  thirst 
sege  ['segf]  f.  chaise 
segredo  [sd'gre&u]  m.  secret 
seguir  [sd'gir]  to  follow 
segundo  [ss'gundu]  m.  second 
seguro  [sd'guru]  secure 
seio  [sisiu]  m.  bosom,  lap 
sets  [svif]  six 
seiva  ['s^tvvj  f.  sap,  juice 
seixo  ['sstfuj  m.  pebble 
se(l)la  ['seln]  f.  saddle 
se{l)lo  ['seluj  m.  stamp 
selvdgem  [ssl'va^v}]  savage 
sem  [sii]  without 
semana  [sd'unvriv]  f.  week 
semear  [sdtnt'ar]  to  sow 
semente  [sd'mentd]  seed 
semi  .  .  .  ['sdmi  .  .  .]  = 
sempre  ['seprd]  always 
senao  [sd'nvu]  except,  safe 
senha  psvjiv]f.  sign,  mark,  watch- 
word 
senhorio  [s%jiu'ri:u]  m.  landlord 
senslvel  [se'sivel]  sensible 
sentenga  [§Sn'tesv]  f.  sentence 
sentir  [sen'tir]  to  feel 
separar  [sdpv'rar]  to  separate 
siquito  [sekitu]  m.  suit 
ser  [ser]  to  be;  m.  being 
serao [sd'rvu] m.  evening  (party) 
sereno  [sd'renu]  serene 


454 


Portugaese-Englieh  Vocabulary. 


serio  ['serfu]  serious 
serpente  fsdr'pentpj  m.  serpent 
serra  f'serrsj  f.    saw;  chain  of 

mountains 
serralheiro  [sarre  'fiviru]  m.  lock- 
smith 
sessdo  [s'/svu]  f.  session 
Hessenta  [s9'sentv]  sixty 
severo  [sd'veru]  severe 
sexo  f'ssksuj  m.  sex 
sexta-feira  [svtftv'fvim]  Friday 
silencio  [si  les}u]  m.  silence 
si(l)laha  ['siht)ej  f.  syllable 
sim  [si]  yes. 
sincero  [st'seru]  sincere 
singelo  [st'^du]  simple 
singular  [sign  larj  w.  = 
sino  ['si:nuj  m.  bell 
sitio  ['siitiuj  m.  spot,  place 
sit(uad)o  ['sit(ua&)u]  situated 
s6  [so]  alone,  only 
soar  [su'ar]  to  ring,  sound 
soh  ['scibd]  under 
sohre  [sdbrd]  upon,  on 
sdbremesa  [sotrd  'mezv]  f.  dessert 
sobrenome  [sotrd'nomd]   m.  sur- 
name 
sobrinho  [su'brijiu]  m.  nephew 
sobrio  ['sobriu]  sober 
s6(c)co  ['sokuj  m.  sock;  blow 
so(c)cdrro  [so  'Icorru]  m.  succour 
socio  ['sosfu]  m.  member,  partner 
so(f)frer  [su'frer]  suffer 
so(f)frivel  [su'fri.vci]  tolerable 
sogra  ['sogrv]  f.  mother-in-law 
sogro  ['sogru]  m.   father-in-law 
sol  [s^]  m.  sun 
sola  ['solv]  f.  sole 
solar  [su'lar]  m.  mansion-house 
soldado  [soi  dad'u]  m.  soldier 
soldo  ['soidu]  m.  (soldier's)  pay 
sole(m)ne  [su'Und]  solemn 
soliddo  [suli'dvu]  f.  solitude 
solido  ['soli&u]  m.  solid 
soliturio  [suit' tar iu]  solitary 
solo  ['solu]  m.  soil 
soltar  [soi' tar]  to  free,  loosen 
solto  [  soitu]  free,  loose 
8om  [so]  m.  sound 
sombra  ['sOmbrv]  f.  shade 
sombrio  [som'briu]  shady,  dull 
8o(mJma  ['somv]  f.  sum 


8o(m)no  ['sonu]  m.  sleep 
sonho  ['sojiu]  m.  dream 
sopa  ['sopv]  f.  soup 
soprar  [su'prar]  to  blow 
sopro  ['sopru]  m.  blowing,  breath 
sorrir  [su'rrir]  to  smile 
sorte  ['sortd]  f.  sort^  fate 
sossego  [su'segu]  m.  calmness 
suar  [su  'ar]  to  sweat 
sub  .  .  .  [sub]  .  .  .]  = 
subida  [subii&e]  f,  ascent 
subito  ['subitu]  sudden 
sublime  [su'bli-nw]  = 
subme(t)ter  [submd'ter]  to  subject 
submisso  [sub'misu]  submissive 
subscrt(pJgqo    [subykri'svu]    f. 

subscription 
substdncia  [si(b}f'tvsfiv]  f.    sub- 
stance 
su(c)ceder  [susd'&er]  succeed 
su(c)cesso  [su  'sesu]  m.  success 
sueco  ['sweku]  m.  Swedish 
sufficiente  [sufdsi  'entd]  sufficient 
suicida  [sui'siid's]  m.  f.  suicide 
Suissa  [sw'isv]  f.  Switzerland 
sujeito  [su'xeitu]  subject 
sujo  ['su^vj  m.  dirty 
sul  [sul]  m.  South 
su(m)mo  ['sumu]  highest 
siMT  [su'dt]  m.  sweat 
super ficie  [sup9r'fi:s}9]  f.  super- 
ficies 
superfluo  [su  'perfluu]  superfluous 
superior  [sup9'r}or]  m.  = 
superstigdo  [supdrfti' svu]  f.  su- 
perstition 
st^pjplemento  [supld'mSntu]   m. 

supplement 
su(p)pdr  [su'por]  suppose 
su(p}portar  [supur'tar]   support 
supremo  [su'premu]  supreme 
supra  .  .  .  [^suprv]  .  .  .]  = 
surdo  ['surdu]  deaf 
surdo-mudo  [surdu -mu&u]  deaf- 
mute 
surpresa  [sur'prezv]  f.  surprise 
surto  I'surtu]  anchored 
suspeito  [sujpvitu]  tn.  suspect 
suspiro  [suf'pi'ru]  nt.  sigh 
sustento  [suftentu]  m.  sustenance, 

food 
susto  ['suftu]  m.  fright 


Portuguese- English  Vo cab ul ary. 


455 


Tdbacaria    [tvivk-e'riiv]    f.    to- 
bacco-shop 
tdbaco  [tv'taku]  m.  tobacco 
tabe{l)liao  [tvhd'lyvu]  nu  notary 
taholeiro    [tvt)u'lv}ruj   m.   fray, 

gaming- board 
tahuUta  [tvtu'letv]  sign  (board) 
tdbua  ['tatuv]  f.  table(t) 
taga  ['tasv]  f.  bowl 
tacdo  [tv'kvu]  m.  heal 
iacto  I'tsLtu]  m.  touch 
talhar  [tv'fiarj  to  cut 
talhe   ['taftd]  m.  form,  shape 
talho  f'tafiuj  m.  cut,  chopping- 

block 
talvez  [tai'vej]  perhaps 
tamanho  [tv'mvjiu]  (so)  great 
tanto  f'tvntuj  so  much 
tao  [tvuj  80,  such 
tajHir  fte  'par]  to  cover 
tapete  [tv  'pet 9  J  m.  carpet 
tardar  [tur'dar]  to  tarry 
tarde  ['tardd]  f.  afternoon,  eve- 
ning 
tarefa  [tv'refv]  f.  task 
taxa  ['tsifv]  f.  tax,  rate 
tecelao  [tdsd'lvu]  m.  weaver 
tecer  [td'ser]  to  weave 
tecido  [td'si&u]  m.  tissue 
tecto  ['teiuj  m.  roof 
tela  ['telv]  cloth,  linen 
telegrapho  [td'legrvfu]  m.  tele- 
graph 
telha  [  fed^]  f.  tile 
temer  [td'mer]  to  fear 
tempo  I'tempuJ  m.  time 
temporal  [tempu  raij  m.  = 
tenaz  [td'nafj  f.  tenacious 
teng&o  [ie'svu]  f.  intention 
tencionar  [tesiu'nar]  to  intent 
tenente  [td'nentd]  m.  lieutenaut 
tentar  [ten' tar]  to  tempt 
tSpido  ['tepi&w]  tepid 
terminar  tdrmi'nar]  terminate 
terra  ['terra]  earth,  ground 
terreiro   [ta'rrsfru]  m.   terrace, 

square 
terremoto  [tdrrd'motu]  m.  earth- 
quake 
tesoura  [td'zorv]  f.  scissors 


testa  ['teflTs]  f.  forehead 
iestemunha  [tijtd  'mujiv]  f.  testi 

mony,  witness 
texto  ['teftuj  m.  text 
tia  ['ti:v]  f.  aunt 
tijolo  [ty'solu]  m.  brick 
timido  I'timi&u]  timid 
tingir  [ti'^ir]  to  dye 
tinteiro  [tm'tEtru]  m.  inkstand 
tinto  ['tintu]  dyed,  red 
tio  ['tin]  771,  uncle 
tirar  [ti'rar]  to  draw 
toalha  [tu'afiis]  f.  towel 
tocar  [tu'car]  to  touch 
todo  ['tod^uj  (adj.)  all 
tomar  [tu  'mar]  to  take 
tomo  ['tomu]  m.  tome 
tonel  [tu'nd]  m.  tun,  cask 
tormento  [iur  'mentu]  m.  torment 
iornar  [tur'nar]  to  (rejturn 
torre  ['torrd]  f.  tower,  steeple 
forrente  [tu'rretitd]  f.  torrent 
torto  ['tortu]  crooked,  tortuous 
tortura  [tur'ture]  f.  torture 
tosse  ['tosd]  f.  cough 
toucinho  [to'sijiu]  m.  bacon 
touro  ['toru]  m.  bull 
trabalho  [trv'bafiu]  m.  work 
trago  ['trasu]  m.  touch,  sketch 
traduzir  [trvd'u'zir]  to  translate 
trdfego  ['trafggu]  m.  \  .     .n 
trdfico  ['trafiku]  m.   J  ^^^^^^ 
traidor  ['traid'orj  m.  traitor 
trajo  ftra^u]  m.  garb 
tranqui(l)lo  [trv  'kwilu]  tranquil 
transcrevei'  [trvfkrd'ver]  trans- 
cribe 
transporte  [trvf'portd]  m.  trans- 
port 
transtoi'no  [trvf'tornu]  m,  distur- 
bance 
tratar  [trv  'tar]  to  treat,  deal 
trato  [train]  m.  treasment 
trave  ['travd]  /".  beam 
travessa     [trv  'vesv]     f.     cross- 
beam 
trazer  [trv'zer]  to  carry,   bring 
trecho  ['trsfu]  m.  excerpt 
trem  [trvt]  m.  carriage 
tremer  [tr^'mer]  to  tremble 
trevo  ['trevu]   trefoil 
treze  ['trezd[  thirteen 


456 


Portuguese-English  Vocabulary. 


trezentos  [tr^'zentuJJ  ihxeQ  hund- 
red 
trigo  f'triguj  m.  wheat,  corn 
Trindade  [tnn  'da&d]  f.  Trinity 
trtplice  f'triplis?]  triple 
triste  ['triftd]  sad 
trocar  [tru'kar]  to  change 
iroco  I'trokuJ  m,  change 
tronco  f'troku]  m.  trunk 
tropa  [' trope]  f.  troop 
tropel  [tni'^^el]  troop,  multitude 
trovyo  [tru'vyuj  m.  thunder 
trovejar  [triiv}'$ar]  to  thunder 
tudo    I'tuffuJ    the    whole,    all, 

everything 
tumulo  f'tumuluj  m.  tomb 
turco  f'turkuj  m.  Turk 
turro  f'turim]  muddy 

U. 

ultimo  ['ultimu]  last 

undnime  [u'nvnimd]  unanimous 

unlia  f'ujiv]  f.  nail 

uniao  [unf'vu]  f.  union 

unico  f'unikuj  only,  sole 

unidade  [uni'&a&d]  f.  unity 

unir  [u'nir]  to  unite 

urbano  fur  benuj  civil 

urgente  [ur'gent9j  m.  urgent 

urso  ['ursu]  m.  bear 

urze  I  'urzdj  f.  sweet  broom 

uso  f'uzuj  m.  use 

usual  [uzu'al]  = 

usura  [u'zuru]  f.  usury 

util  I'util]  useful 

uva  I'uvn]  f.  grape 

T. 

Vacca  ['vakvj  f.  cow 
vacuo  f'vakwu]  void,  empty 
vaga  ['vagv]  f.  wane 
vagar  [vv'gar]  m.  leisure 
vago  ['vagu]  vacant,  vague 
vaidade  vai'&a&d]  f.  vanity 
vaidoso  [va^'ffozu]  vain 
vale  ['vahj  m.  post-office  order 
valente  [w'lentQ]  valiant 
valer  [vB'ler]  to  be  worth 
vdlido  f'vali&uj  valid,  efficacious 
valido  [vv'lifuj  m.  favourite 


valor  [vv'lor]  m.  value 
valsa  f'vaisvj  f.  valse 
vantdgem  fvvn'tageij  f.  advan- 
tage 
vantajoso    [vvniv  'sosu]    advan- 
tageous 
xao  [vvu]  void,  vain ;  m.  void 
vdrio  f'variu]  various 
varrer  [vv'rrer]  to  sweep 
vasa  ['vazv]  f.  slime 
vasar  [vis'zar]  to  empty 
vaso  ['vazu]  m.  vase,  vessel 
vasto  [  vajtu]  vast 
vazio  [vv'zim]  empty 
veado  [vt'aduj  m.  deer 
vegetal  [vf^d'taij  m.  vegetable 
vela  ['velv]  f.  sail 
velho  I'vefiu  &  'vvfiu]  old 
ve(l)ludo  [v9'lu&u]  m.  velvet 
veloz  [v9'lof]  swift 
veneer  [ve'ser]  to  vanquish 
venda  ['vendv]  f.  sale 
vender  [vender]  to  sell 
veneno  [vd'nenu]  m.  poison 
vento  fventuj  m.  wind 
ventre  ['ventrgj  m.  belly 
Ventura  fven'tura]  f.  fortune 
verdade  [v9r'dv&9]  f.  truth 
verdadeiro  [vdrdvdv^ru]  true 
verde  ['verdd]  green 
vergonha  [vdr'gojiv]  f.  shame 
verme  ['vermd]  m.  worm 
vermelho  [vdr'mvfiu]  red 
versdo  [vdr'seu]  f.  version 
verier  [vgr'ter]  to  spill;   trans- 
late 
vtspera  ['vs/pdrv]  f.  eve 
vestido  fvtf'tidu]  gown,  dress 
vestir  [vyf'tir]  to  dress 
vez  fvefi  f.  time 
via  f'vi'v]  f.  way,  passage 
vidgem  [v}'a$v}]  f.  journey 
vicio  f'visiu]  m.  vice 
victima  fvitima]  f.  victim 
victdria  [vi'torfv]  f.  victory 
vida  ['vidv]  life 
vide  f'vtjd'ij  f.  vine 
vidro  f'vi&ru]  glass 
vi(l)la  f'vilv]  f.  village 
vinagre  fvi'nagr^]  m.  vinegar 
vinda  ['vindv]  f.  amval 
vindima   [vm'di:mvj  f.  vintage 


Portugnese-English  Vocabulary. 


457 


vingar  [m'gar]  to  revenge 
vinha  ['vijiv]  f.  vineyard 
vinho  f'vijiuj  m.  wine 
vintem   [vin'tvi]  m.  Portuguese 

coin  of  20  reis 
violento  fviu'lentuj  violent 
vidleta  [mu'letv]  f.  violet 
vir  [virj  to  come 
virar  [vi'ra,rj  to  turn 
virgtda  ['virgulv]  f.  comma 
mril  [vi'ril]  manly 
virtude  [vir'tu&d]  f.  virtue 
vista  f'viftej  f.  view 
visto  ['riftuj  seen 
viuvo  fvt'uvu]  m.  widomer 
mvo  ['vivuj  alive 
vizinho  [vd'zijiu  m.  neighbour 
voar  [vu'ar]  to  fly 
rolta  ['vcitv]  f.  turn 


voltar  [vci'tar]  to  (re)turn, 
volume  [vu'lumd]  m.  volume 
volver   [coi'ver]   to  go  back,  to 

stir 
vontade  [von'taffd]  f.  will,  wish 
voo  [vou]  m.  flight 
voto  ['vjtu]  m.  vote 
voz  [vof]  f.  voice 


Z. 

Zanga  ['zv^v]  f.  anger 
zangar  [zv  gar]  to  irritate 
zelo  ['zeluj  m.  zeal 
zero  I'zeru]  m.  zero 
zombar  [zom'barj  to  mock 
zumbido  [zum'hi&u]  m.  1  hxim- 
zunido  [zu'ni&u]  m.        j  ming. 


29** 


.^^ 

RETURN     CIRCULATION  DEPARTMENT 
TO— ►     202  Main  Library 

1  DAN  PERIOD  1 

9                                          '^ 

HOME  USE 

4 

5                              6 

ALL  BOOKS  MAY  BE  RECALLED  AFTER  7  DAYS 

1  -month  loans  may  be  renewed  by  calling  642-3405 

6-month  loans  may  be  recharged  by  bringing  books  to  Circulation 

Desk 

Renewals  and  recharges  may  be  made  4  days  prior  to  due  date 

DUE  AS  STAMPED  BELOW 

AitiaotsufU^l 

?  YM 

OD 

UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA,  BERKELEY 
FORM  NO.  DD6,  40m,  3/78  BERKELEY,  CA  94720 


®s 


LD  21-100m-8,'84 


U.C.  BERKELEY  LIBRARIES 


coDM'jbuafli 


(pry(\o^i 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY